THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 RIVERSIDE 
 
 GIFT OF 
 
 Col, Arnold W, Shutter
 
 ^ — 
 
 
 fi-^ 
 
 i^-Tt a c ffc -tK. 
 
 /# . . 
 
 
 ..-i<^>---v 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 3 1-.^^ 
 
 i^ 'ST 
 
 per T^c h / r o /V; e /t c-> i- 

 
 Clar^iiboii Ipr^ss ^^ri^s 
 
 LANGE'S GERMAN COURSE 
 
 COMPOSITION 
 
 a
 
 HENRY FROWDE, M.A. 
 
 PUBLISHER TO THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD 
 
 LONDON, EDINBURGH, AND NEW YORK
 
 n -^ 
 
 V^^ 
 
 Clar^nbon Ir^ss Smcs 
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION 
 
 A THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL GUIDE 
 TO THE ART OF TRANSLATING ENGLISH PROSE 
 
 INTO GERMAN 
 
 BY 
 
 HERMANN LANGE 
 
 LECTURER ON FRENCH AND GERMAN AT THE MANCHESTER TECHNICAL SCHOOL 
 AND LECTURER ON GERMAN AT THE MANCHESTER ATHENiEUM 
 
 THIRD EDITION 
 
 With the German Spelling revised to meet the requirements of the 
 Government Regulations of 1880 
 
 AT THE CLARENDON PRESS 
 
 M DCCCC
 
 
 Oxforb 
 
 PRINTED AT THE CLARENDON PRESS 
 
 BY HORACE HART, M.A. 
 PRINTER TO THE UNIVERSITY
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 'German Composition' is intended to be a Theoretical and Practical 
 Guide to the Art of Translating English Prose into good and idiomatic 
 German. It is arranged in such a manner that students who have 
 reached the fiftieth Lesson of the 'German Manual' may commence and 
 advantageously use it conjointly with that book. Being complete in 
 itself, it is likewise adapted for the use of any other students who, 
 possessing a knowledge of German Accidence and having had some 
 practice in reading German Prose, wish to acquire the Art of Translating 
 English Prose into German. 
 
 The book is calculated to serve the requirements ot the B.A. Ex- 
 aminations of the London and Victoria Universities, the Competitive 
 Examinations for the Civil and Military Service, the Oxford and Cam- 
 bridge Local Examinations for Senior Students, the Examination of the 
 College of Preceptors for First Class Candidates, and of similar Public 
 Examinations — all of which require the candidates to translate English 
 Prose into German. 
 
 I may conscientiously say that I have done all I could to make the 
 book attractive and useful. The selection of the Extracts has been made 
 with the greatest care directly from the works of the various authors, and 
 is the result of many years' attentive reading and research. The pieces 
 have been almost exclusively chosen from the works of the best modern 
 English and American writers, and, it is hoped, will be found as inter- 
 esting and instructive as they are well adapted for translation into 
 German. They represent all the various styles of English Prose Com- 
 position, and contain a great variety of subjects, as a glance at the 
 various pages will show; whilst the fact that the specimens, with only one 
 or two exceptions, are no mere fragments, but complete pieces in them- 
 selves, must necessarily add to their value. 
 
 The Biographical Sketches of famous men and women, which at 
 intervals appear in the Notes and are always given in German, form a 
 special feature of the book. (Comp. S. 127, N. i; S. 138, N. 12 ; and
 
 vi PREFACE. 
 
 S. 156, N. I.) They are of various lengths, according to their import- 
 ance, and have been written to add to the interest of the work and at the 
 same time to offer the student some useful material for reading German. 
 
 With respect to the help given in the Notes, I may state that I have 
 proceeded with the utmost consideration and care. The great object 
 I placed before me was to show, by precept and example, that a good 
 translation cannot be produced by the mere mechanical process of join- 
 ing together a number of words, as the dictionary may offer them at 
 first sight: but that it requires great thought and analytic power; that 
 every sentence, nay, almost every word, has to be weighed and con- 
 sidered with respect to its true bearing upon the text ; and that a good 
 rendering is only possible when the translator has grasped the true 
 meaning of the passage before him. 
 
 I have endeavoured to give neither too little nor too much help, but 
 whenever I found a difficulty which a student of average ability could 
 not fairly be expected to overcome, I have stepped in to solve it. For 
 this purpose I have made use of English equivalents and periphrases and 
 of Rules and Examples, and in cases where neither of these helps was 
 considered practicable I have not hesitated to give the German rendering 
 of the word or passage to be translated. The last mode of procedure, 
 however, I have adopted only when I found that the dictionaries in 
 ordinary use were insufficient, as is so frequently the case, and more 
 especially with respect to idiomatic passages, which it is impossible to 
 render successfully unless the translator is well versed in both languages, 
 and at the same time has undergone a thorough training in the Art of 
 Translating English into German, which the present volume professes to 
 teach. The plan of indicating the rendering of words and phrases by 
 means of English equivalents and periphrases must be of evident ad- 
 vantage to the learner, for it teaches him how to think and analyse, whilst 
 it leads him to render the word or phrase correctly without giving him 
 the translation itself. 
 
 The Notes of Sections i to 1 50 and the Appendix contain in a con- 
 cise and lucid form almost all the rules relating to the German Syntax, 
 and in most instances these rules have been illustrated by practical 
 examples and models. The Appendix gives in thirty-seven paragraphs 
 the Rules referring to the Construction, the use of the Indicative, Sub- 
 junctive (or Conjunctive), and Conditional Moods, which for convenient 
 reference have been reprinted from my ' German Grammar,' and to fa- 
 cilitate the student's work I have added an Index to the Grammatical 
 Rules and Idiomatic Renderings.
 
 PRE FA CE. 
 
 Vll 
 
 > London, 
 
 In a work containing such a great number of Extracts as the present, 
 there are, of course, many idioms and passages which may be correctly 
 translated in various ways, and I can therefore scarcely hope that all 
 my renderings will meet with the approval of every German scholar. 
 I may, however, confidently affirm here that I have devoted much thought 
 and labour to this publication, and that I have tried with all my heart to 
 make it acceptable to teachers and students alike. 
 
 In conclusion I respectfully tender my best thanks to the publishers — 
 Messrs. W. and R. Chambers, Edinburgh, 
 „ Chapman and Hall, 
 „ Longmans and Co., 
 „ Sampson Low and Co., 
 „ Macmillan and Co., 
 Mr. Murray, 
 
 Messrs. T. Nelson and Sons, 
 „ Smith, Elder, and Co., and 
 „ Stanford and Co., 
 and to the Editors of — 
 The Daily News, 
 
 „ Daily Telegraph, 
 ■ „ Globe, y London, 
 
 „ Standard, and 
 „ Times, 
 
 for their very kind permission to make use of the Copyright Extracts 
 in this publication, and for the cordial manner in which they granted 
 my request. 
 
 Page ix contains a few Hints and Directions for using the Book which 
 I consider of great importance, and to which I beg to draw attention. 
 
 HERMANN LANGE. 
 
 Heathfield House, Lloyd Street, 
 Greenheys, Manchester, 
 September, 1883.
 
 PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 
 
 A second edition of this volume having been called for, I wish to 
 express my cordial thanks to the numerous colleagues and friends who 
 adopted it as a text-book for their classes. 
 
 As I am engaged in preparing, besides this book, a third edition 
 of two other volumes of my ' German Course,' and, at the request 
 of the Delegates of the University Press, also a Key to this volume, 
 ' German Composition,' I think the present moment opportune 
 for introducing the reformed German spelling which, by Government 
 regulations, has been taught in German schools for the last five or 
 six years, and is becoming more generally used from year to year 
 in friendly intercourse, papers, periodicals, literature, and commercial 
 correspondence. It is but fair that the students of German in this 
 country should be taught to spell in the simplified way now 
 universally practised by their German contemporaries. They will at 
 least have nothing to unlearn then ; and, although the present spelling- 
 reform may be considered but a compromise between the older and the 
 younger schools, there being a tendency in the younger men to go even 
 further than their older colleagues in the simplification of our orthography 
 and to make it still more phonetic and uniform in principle, it will take 
 a long time before the Government will be moved to make modifications 
 of any importance in their regulations. I confidently trust that the 
 great trouble I have bestowed upon the revision of the present edition 
 will be appreciated by teachers and students alike. It will easily be seen 
 that the alterations of the orthography in the various books forming this 
 * German Course ' must have necessarily entailed a very considerable 
 additional expense ; but the publication having met with much approval 
 on the part of the public, I was anxious to leave nothing undone in 
 order to adapt it in every respect to the requirements of the times and to 
 make it still more useful. 
 
 On examination it will be seen that the changes made are not so many 
 as may be supposed, and that the principles underlying the German 
 spelling-reform are simple and easy to understand. 
 
 At the end of the Appendix will be found a Synopsis of the 
 principal changes the German spelling has vmdergone, accom- 
 panied by Examples and a few Exceptions to the general rules. 
 
 HERMANN LANGE. 
 
 Heathfield House, Lloyd Street, Greenheys, Manchester, 
 December, 1886.
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR USING THE BOOK. 
 
 Each Section should first be prepared for viva voce translation, with the 
 assistance of the Notes in class ; then translated in writing ; carefully cor- 
 rected ; and finally practised, by comparing the English text with the corrected 
 German version, for a second viva voce translation until the student 
 is able to translate the English text, ivitbout the assistance of the 
 Notes in class, just as readily into correct German as if he -were 
 reading from a German book. 
 
 The Grammatical Rules given in the Notes should always be carefully 
 studied, and the reading of previously given Rules and the various paragraphs 
 of the Appendix referred to in the text should never be omitted. 
 
 The strict and conscientious observance of these directions is 
 earnestly requested. 
 
 The second viva voce TRANSLATION ivitbout the assistance of the Notes 
 in class, as explained above, is especially of the greatest importance to the 
 student's progress in the Art of Translating English into German, and is the 
 only way of mastering all the idiomatic and syntactic difficulties contained in 
 the Lessons and explained in the foot-notes. It commends itself likewise as 
 the best way of committing to memory the great number of words and the 
 various forms of construction occurring in the text, and will gradually, but 
 surely, lead to the acquisition of a good and thorough German style of 
 writing. 
 
 To be quite clear the Author ventures to propose the following 
 
 PLAN OF WORKING. 
 
 First Lesson. 
 
 Prepare for viva voce translation Sections i and 2, with the assistance 
 of the Notes in class. 
 
 Second Lesson. 
 
 Translate in Writing Sections i and 2 ; and prepare for viva voce transla- 
 tion Sections 3 and 4, with the assistance of the Notes in class. 
 
 Third Lesson. 
 
 Prepare for fluent and correct viva voce translation Sections i 
 and 2, WITHOUT the assistance of the Notes in class, by comparing the English
 
 X DIRECTIONS FOR USING THE BOOK. 
 
 text with the corrected German version ; translate in Writing Sections 3 
 and 4 ; and prepare for -viva -voce translations Sections 5 and 6, with the 
 assistance of the Notes in class. 
 
 Fourth Lesson. 
 
 Prepare for fluent and correct •vi'va voce translation Sections 
 3 and 4, without the assistance of the Notes in class, by comparing the 
 English text with the corrected version ; translate in Writing Sections 5 and 
 6 ; and prepare for "vi-va "voce translation Sections 7 and 8, with the assistance 
 of the Notes in class ; 
 
 Then proceed in the same way throughout the book. 
 
 It need scarcely be added that the quantity of work pointed out 
 here may be diminished or increased according to circumstances, 
 and that the longer sections towards the end of the book -will in 
 most cases require the former course. 
 
 The frequent attentive study of German literature will be a powerful 
 auxiliary to this book in imparting the Art of Translating English Prose 
 into German.
 
 ABBREVIATIONS AND SIGNS EXPLAINED. 
 
 Ace Accusative. 
 
 adj adjective. 
 
 adv adverb. 
 
 App Appendix. 
 
 art article. 
 
 Comp. . . . compare, 
 
 comp. . . . compound, 
 
 conj. . . . conjunction, 
 
 constr. . . . construction, 
 
 contr. . . . contracted. 
 
 Dat. {or dat.) . Dative, 
 
 def. .... definite. 
 
 b. {) (bag ^"f Oj that is. 
 
 demonstr. . . demonstrative. 
 
 ( (exempli gratia), for 
 
 ( example. 
 
 i (et cetera), and so 
 
 I forth. 
 
 Expl. . . . Example, 
 
 fem,, or (f.) . feminine. 
 
 geb (gcboren), bom. 
 
 Gen. . . . Genitive. 
 
 i. e (id est), that is. 
 
 Impf. . . . Imperfect, 
 
 impers. . . . impersonal, 
 
 indef. . . . indefinite. 
 
 Inf Infinitive. 
 
 insep. . . . inseparable, 
 
 intr.jorintrans. intransitive. 
 
 Liter. . . . Literally, 
 
 m., or (m.) . . masculine, 
 
 N Note. 
 
 n noun. 
 
 neut., or (n.) . neuter. 
 
 Nom. . . . Nominative. 
 
 p,p Past Participle. 
 
 p. ps. ... Past Participles. 
 
 pers person. 
 
 persnl. . . . personal, 
 
 posses. . . . possessive, 
 
 prep. . . . preposition. 
 
 Pres. . . . Present, 
 
 pres. p. . . . Present Participle, 
 
 pron. . . . pronoun. 
 
 refl reflective. 
 
 reg regular. 
 
 relat. . . . relative. 
 
 S Section. 
 
 Sing. . . . Singular. 
 
 str strong. 
 
 Subj. . - . Subjunctive, 
 
 tr., or trans. . transitive. 
 
 ( (unb anbcrc), and 
 "■'^ \ others. 
 
 u f h) . . ^ ^""^ ^^ ^''"'*'^^' ^"^ 
 '' \ so forth. 
 
 v verb. 
 
 ( (videlicet), namely, 
 
 ( to wit. 
 
 w weak. 
 
 § paragraph. 
 
 + (geflorben), died. 
 
 =a .... is equivalent to.
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Preface ^ 
 
 Directions for Using tiie Book '* 
 
 Abbreviations and Signs Explained xi 
 
 SECT. 
 
 1. A Good Maxim. — Sir Thomas Buxton i 
 
 2. What is Eternity ? — Rev. R. K. Arvine i 
 
 3. The Action of Water. — Dr. Lanliester 2 
 
 4. Of what Use is it ? — S. Smiles 2 
 
 5. Wealth.— Rev. C. Cotton 3 
 
 6. Mendelssohn in Birmingham. — Athenaeum 3 
 
 7. To Forgive is to P'orget. — Rev. H. W. Beecher .... 3 
 
 8. What is Capital ?— Rev. Dr. Macduff 4 
 
 9. A Good Rule. — S. Smiles 4 
 
 10. England under the Rule of Queen Victoria. — W. M. Thackeray 5 
 
 11. Concentration of Powers. — T. Carlyle 5 
 
 12. Coolness.— W. C. Hazlitt 6 
 
 13. Religious Toleration. — Rev. R. K. Arvine 6 
 
 14. How Hugh Miller became a Geologist. — S. Smiles ... 7 
 
 15. Extremes Meet. — Rev. R. K. Arvine 7 
 
 16. Poor Pay.— Rev. R. K. Arvine 8 
 
 17. The World is a Looking-glass. — W. M. Thackeray ... 8 
 
 18. Give the honour to God alone. — Rev. R. K. Arvine ... 9 
 
 19. How did Cuvier become a Naturalist ? — S. Smiles ... 9 
 
 20. On the Choice of Books. — Lord Dudley 10 
 
 21. An apparently insignificant fact often leads to great results. — S. Smiles 10 
 
 22. Oats. — Nelson's Readers 11 
 
 23. Spring Blossoms. — Rev. E. M. Davies 11 
 
 24. The Winking Eyelid.— Prof. G. Wilson 11 
 
 25. A Good Example. — Rev. J. Burroughs . . . . „ .12 
 
 26. Description of a Glacier. — Mrs. Beecher Stowe . . . .12 
 
 27. Without Pains no Gains. — S. Smiles 13 
 
 28. The Magna Charta. — Lord Macaulay 14 
 
 29. Honesty.— Dr. B. Franklin 14 
 
 30,31. Formation of a Coral-Island. — M. Flinders ... 15, 16 
 
 32. Reynard Caught. — Anonymous 16 
 
 33,34. The Means of Conveyance in the Time of Charles IL— Lord 
 
 Macaulay . . . . . . . . .17 
 
 35. Sir William Herschel. — Rev. Dr. Leitch 18
 
 XIV 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 SECT. 
 
 36, 37. The Air-Ocean. — Maury .... 
 
 38. Cheerful Church-Music. — Rev. R. K. Arvine 
 
 39. Our Industrial Independence depends upon Ourselves. — S. Smiles 
 
 40. England's Trees. — Hewitt .... 
 41-45. The Indian Chief. — Washington Irving . 
 
 46. Rice. — Nelson's Readers 
 
 47-53. The White Ship.— Charles Dickens . 
 
 54. Barley. — Nelson's Readers .... 
 
 55. The Soldier and his Flag. — General Bourrienne 
 
 56. Our cultivated Native Plants. — Hewitt . 
 
 57. 58. The Bequest. — Anonymous 
 
 59. Wheat. — Nelson's Readers .... 
 
 60. Occupation of the Anglo-Saxons. — Milner 
 61-68. Tender, Trusty, and True. — Rev. Robert Collyer 
 
 69. Despatch of Business. — Sir Walter Scott 
 
 70, 71. On Perfumery. — Prof. Ascher . 
 
 72. On Instinct. — Rev. S. Smith .... 
 
 73. Peter the Great and the Monk. — Anonymous 
 
 74. 75. The Beauty of the Eye.— Prof. G. Wilson 
 
 76. A Funeral Dance. — ^^Sir S. Baker . 
 
 77. Absolution Beforehand. — Rev. R. K. Arvine . 
 
 78. 79. Stand up for whatever is True, Manly, and Lovely. — T. Hughes 
 
 80. Work is a great Comforter. — Anonymous 
 
 81. Perseverance finds its Reward, — N. Goodrich 
 
 82. The Necessity of Volcanoes. — Rev. Prof. Hitchcock 
 
 83. The Power of Beauty. — Lord Shaftesbury . 
 
 84. The English Climate.— Hewitt 
 
 85, 86. The London Docks. — The " Globe " Newspaper 
 87. Dr. Johnson on Debt — S. Smiles . 
 88-94. A Curious Instrument. — Jane Taylor 
 95. Anglo-Saxon Dress. — Milner .... 
 96, 97. The Glaciers at Sunset. — Mrs. Beecher Stowe 
 98,99. The Lost Child Found.— Jacob Abbott . 
 100. Perspiration. — Rev. Dr. Dick 
 101-107. The Drama of the French Revolution of 1848. — Essays 
 
 "The Times" 
 
 108. Experience is the best Teacher. — W. C. Hazlitt 
 
 109. On Self Culture.— William Chambers . 
 110,111. Goethe's Death.— G. H. Lewes . 
 
 112. On Travelling. — Charles Kingsley 
 
 113. The Management of the Body. — Sidney Smith 
 
 114. The Sources of Water. — Dr. Lankester 
 
 115. The Art of Oratory.— Henry Clay 
 
 116. Early Privations. — S. Smiles .... 
 
 PAGE 
 
 19, 20 
 20 
 21 
 21 
 
 22-24 
 
 25 
 26-30 
 
 30 
 31 
 32 
 
 32, 33 
 33 
 34 
 
 34-39 
 
 39 
 
 40, 41 
 
 41 
 
 42 
 43 
 44 
 45 
 46,47 
 47 
 48 
 
 49 
 49 
 50 
 
 50,51 
 52 
 
 53-57 
 57 
 
 58,59 
 
 59,60 
 . 61 
 from 
 
 61-69 
 
 69 
 
 . 70 
 
 70,71 
 
 • 72 
 
 • 73 
 
 • 73 
 
 • 74 
 
 • 75
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 XV 
 
 SECT. 
 
 Hon 
 
 Smiles 
 
 lette 
 
 117,118. The Blessedness of Friendship. — Charles Kingsley 
 119, 120. Do Good in your own Sphere of Action. — Thos. Hughes 
 121, 122. The State of Ireland.— The Right Hon, John Bright 
 123-125. On Ragged Schools.— Dr. Guthrie 
 
 126. Shylock Meditating Revenge. — Shakespeare 
 
 127, 128. Character of Charlemagne. — Hallam , 
 129-131. Goethe's Daily Life at Weimar.— G. H. Lewes 
 
 132. The Progress in the Art of Printing. — The Right 
 
 E. Gladstone 
 
 133. Robert Dick, the Baker, Geologist, and Botanist. — S. 
 134, 135. The Gospel of Work.— Charles Kingsley 
 136,137. Do not be Ashamed of your Origin. — Anecdotes. 
 
 138. Not Near Enough Yet.— Rev. Prof. Earle . 
 
 139. A Great Loss. — S. Smiles 
 
 140,141. Hero Worship. — Charles Kingsley 
 142-144. James Watt and the Steam-Engine. — Lord Jeffrey 
 145. Manufactures in England. — Bevan .... 
 146, 147. Mr. H. M. Stanley's Appeal for Supplies . 
 148. Answer to the preceding letter. — J. W. Harrison 
 149, 150. Mr. Stanley's Acknowledgment of the preceding 
 
 the Supplies 
 
 151. Returned Kindness. — Dr. Dwight .... 
 152-154. New- Year's Eve. — After Hans Andersen 
 155. Providence Vindicating the Innocent. — W. Smith 
 156, 157. Napoleon Bonaparte. — Emerson 
 
 158. The Warlike Character of the Germans. — Admiral Garbett 
 
 159. The Way to Master the Temper. — Alcott . 
 160, 161. Opinions as to English Education. — S. Smiles 
 
 162. A Royal Judgment.— P. Sadler .... 
 
 163. Tacitus.— Sir Walter Scott 
 
 164. Humility. — Anonymous 
 
 165-168. Russian Political Prisoners in Banishment. — James Allen 118-122 
 
 169-171, Tahiti. — Charles Darwin 123-125 
 
 172. Audubon, the American Ornithologist, relates how nearly a thou- 
 sand of his original Drawings were destroyed. — John Audubon . 126 
 
 173-177. The Battle of Kassassin. — The Correspondent of the London 
 
 "Standard" 127-132 
 
 178. How the Duke of Wellington was Deceived. — Historical Anecdotes 134 
 179-181. A Letter from Dr. Henry Danson to Mr. John Forster, on 
 
 Charles Dickens's School-Life 135-137 
 
 182. Sir Joseph Paxton. — S. Smiles 138 
 
 183-186. Rebecca describes the Siege of Torquilstone to the wounded 
 
 Ivanhoe. — Sir Walter Scott 139-143 
 
 187-190. The Favourite Hares. — William Cowper . . . 144-146 
 
 PAGE 
 
 76 
 
 77,78 
 
 . 79 
 
 80-82 
 
 82 
 83,84 
 
 85-87 
 W. 
 
 . 88 
 
 . 89 
 
 90,91 
 
 92 
 
 • 93 
 
 . 95 
 
 95,96 
 
 97,98 
 
 . 98 
 
 99, 100 
 
 . lOI 
 
 and 
 102, 103 
 
 . 104 
 105-107 
 
 . 108 
 109-11 I 
 
 . 112 
 
 • "3 
 113-115 
 . 116 
 . 117 
 . 117
 
 XVI 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 SECT. PAGE 
 
 191. Prince Bismarck's Home.— The Correspondent of the London 
 
 "Daily News" i47 
 
 192. Royal Benevolence. — W. Buck 148 
 
 193. Telegraphy among Birds. — Prof. G. Wilson . . . . i49 
 194-196. The Hanse.— J. H. Fyfe 150-152 
 
 197. Coming to Terms.— The "Young Ladies' Journal" . . . i53 
 
 198. False Pride.— The "New York Herald" i55 
 
 199. Anecdotes of Great Statesmen : 
 
 I. Abraham Lincoln. — The "New York Herald" . . .156 
 
 II. Prince Bismarck and Lord Beaconsfield. — The Correspondent 
 
 of the London "Daily Telegraph" 156 
 
 200. The Power of Music— Manchester "Tit-Bits" . . . .158 
 201-206. The two Schoolboys, or Eyes and No Eyes. — Dr. Aikin 159-165 
 207,208. The King and the Miller.— Chambers's Short Stories 166,167 
 209,210. A Friend in Need.— Chambers's Short Stories . . 168,169 
 
 211. My First Guinea. — The Rev. Dr. Vaughan 169 
 
 212. The Green Vaults in Dresden. — Bayard Taylor . . . .171 
 
 213. The Death of Little Nell.— Charles Dickens . . . .172 
 
 214. The Childhood of Robert Clive.— Lord Macaulay . . . i73 
 215,216. An Adventure with a Lion. — Dr. Livingstone . . i73> i74 
 217-220. The Burning of Moscow.— Sir Walter Scott . . 175-177 
 221-223. Christmas in Germany. — Bayard Taylor . . . 178-180 
 224. New- Year's Eve in Germany. — Bayard Taylor . . . .181 
 
 225,226. The Two Robbers.— Dr. Aikin 182 
 
 227, 228. A Touching Scene at Sea.— Rev. E. Davies . . 183,184 
 
 229-232. An Oration on the Power of Habit.— J. B. Gough . 185-187 
 
 233-242. A Curious Story.— W, J. J. Spry 187-194 
 
 243,214. How the Bank of England was Humbled. — "Tit-Bits" 195,196 
 
 245,246. Morgan Prussia. — King George the Fourth . . . 197,198 
 
 247. The Terrible Winter of 1784. — After Alexander Dumas . .199 
 
 248-250. A Story Worth Reading. — St. James's Magazine . 201, 203 
 
 Appendix : 
 
 A. — Essentials of Construction 205 
 
 B. — The Indicative Mood 209 
 
 C. — The Subjunctive (or Conjunctive) Mood . . . .210 
 
 D. — The Conditional Mood 213 
 
 Synopsis of the changes the German Spelling has undergone through 
 
 the Government Regulations of 1880 215-222 
 
 Index to the Grammatical Rules and Idiomatic Renderings 
 
 223-228
 
 y 
 
 ^^:.€A.<?'?^l-<Zy97^ 
 
 C^-yi,-/L^-<y6y7'?^^y?7^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^.?^< 
 
 
 ^fi%, ^ ^^ <^. ^ ^^ 
 
 /^ --^ -^r ' 
 
 J. ^. 
 
 ZA^ 
 
 '«-%>; 
 
 6C- 
 
 / C^ (Xy^ e-, 
 
 r '^''*^'/ 
 
 -/ ^^ / 
 
 ,-<v*- 
 
 / "/ / 
 
 
 y6 
 
 -^ ,-<%^ ^ ,<*-A2»^ 
 
 ^ , ^', ^-^^is^:/, /?A< /:?Z>< <X> , 
 
 / ■^•- /
 
 .^: ,^ ,^? ^^ ^ ^^' '^' 
 
 II. 
 
 0/2y, O/^, ^^ ^ ^3^^ .^<^'> ^V^, ^^, ^^; ^^ 
 
 '^^'/Z^ , 
 
 /iJuC^^^ ^y^^ c^-^r^^ 
 
 ^==-ii!l^i>Z'4>^5Vt--«>i^-^^'-1^^i>K^^%'«^, 
 
 
 
 .^^ 
 
 
 y 
 
 
 -^^-^ -<:^^^5}''-7K'^!^-?K- 
 
 -TX-^'Z'-T'-'X^ . 

 
 Ill, 
 
 ?<z- 
 
 t^''0--t^''0^-<^^^-':/'^ 
 
 .--^^V^ 
 
 TS^^^^ZM-^:^ 
 
 .->:r-'^V*' 
 
 
 />^<n^ ^/ t^' 
 
 -'-r-if^^ 
 
 
 *?-«> 
 
 
 -TJC--^ 
 
 -Z-^^^^T^^^-Tr-T-^t^ 
 
 // 
 
 Qy 
 
 ^^y-'-jv-Z"Z
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. 
 
 1. Words which, in the English text and in the periphrases of the English text, are 
 
 printed in Italics, must not be translated. 
 
 2. When two words are separated by a dash ( — ) in the Notes, they represent the first 
 
 and last word of a whole clause in the English text, and the rendering refers to 
 the clanse thus indicated. 
 
 3. When two or more words are separated by dots (...) in the Notes, the rendering 
 
 refers to those words only. 
 
 4. The sign = is used in the meaning of; 'is equivalent to'. 
 
 5. As a rule, the periphrases are given in correct English construction. 
 
 Section 1, 
 
 A GOOD MAXIM '. 
 
 My maxim is: never to begin '^ a book without finishing' it, never to 
 consider * it finished without ^ knowing it, and to study ^ it with "^ a whole 
 mind. — Sir Thomas Buxtosi. , 
 
 1, ©runbfa^, m. 2, to begin, an'fangen. When the Infinitive is used 
 
 either subjectively or objectively, it is generally preceded by the preposition \\\, 
 and is called Supine. Comp. S. 78, N. 14, i. To form the Supine Present 
 of compound separable verbs, like au'fangcn, we must pl^ce the preposition ju 
 between the separable prefix and the verb. The Supine must be used here. 
 See App. § I. 3, to finish, bfcubivjett. The Supine is generally used for 
 
 rendering the English. Gerund (i.e. the verbal in -ing) when the latter is 
 governed by a preposition, though, sometimes, this form may be rendered by 
 the help of the subordinative conjunction bap and a finite verb (i.e. one with 
 a personal termination) ; as — 
 
 He judges qvithout understanding any- (Sr uvtcilt, () n c ctum3 l^on bet @a(^e 
 thing about the matter. ju verfict)en, or c()ne bvif er 
 
 ehttag von ber @ad)c v e r ji e :^ t. 
 Use the Supine, which is always to be placed at the end of the clause. 4, To 
 consider a thing finished, cine ^a6)i a I i bcenbigt bctraditcn. The pronoun ' it' 
 should begin the clause. See App. § 2. 5, without — it, c^ne mit bem 
 
 Snljalt bceifelbcn fcrtraiit jii fein. 6, to study, jiubie'vcn. 7, with— mind 
 
 = with undivided attention. 
 
 Section 2. 
 
 WHAT IS ETERNITY? 
 
 The following question was ^ put in writing ^ to a boy ' in the deaf- 
 and-dumb school* at Paris: "What is eternity?" "It is the life-time 
 of the Almighty," was the answer. — Rev. R. K. Arvine. 
 
 VOL. IV. B
 
 2 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 2. 
 
 1, Here the verb is in the Passive Voice. Remember that the German 
 Passive Voice is formed by the auxiliary tprrbflt. The verb is in the 
 Passive Voice whenever the subject is suffering the action expressed 
 by the verb ; as — 
 The castle luas built in the year 2)ag Sc^top tour be im Sa^re 1609 
 
 1609. evbaut. 
 
 To put a question to a person, einem eine ^xa^t »cr'(egeti. 2, in writing, 
 
 fd)nftlid), which place before the p. p. (App. § I). 3, boy = pupil. 4, Z\M.h-- 
 ftummenanftalt, f. ; render 'in the' by the gen. of the def. art.; at = in. 
 
 Section 3. 
 
 THE ACTION" 1 OF' WATER, 
 
 The action of water on ^ our food * is very important. There ^ would 
 be no carrying of food into the system but for the agency of water. It 
 dissolves everything ^ that "^ we take *, and nothing ' that we take as food 
 can ^" become nutriment that '^ is not dissolved in water. — Dr. Lankester. 
 
 1, 'action', here = operation, SBirfuiig, f. 2, Use the gen. of the def. art. 
 
 The definite article is always required before nouns representing the whole of 
 a given class, and before abstract nouns taken in a general sense. 3, on = 
 
 upon. 4, food = victuals, ©pcifeii, pi. 5, This sentence must be construed 
 in a somewhat different way ; say : ' Without the agency (S3ennitte(inig, f.) of 
 water, no food (Sfia^nuig, f.) would be conveyed into the body,' Un'itbe bent 
 .Rcirpct feine S'lat^rutii^ ?lu'c^efi^f)rt irerbcn. 6, everything = all. 7, 'that', 
 
 here toag. The indefinite relative pronoun tt)n4 is the pronoun generally 
 required after the indefinite numerals alte3, etliiaS, ntanc^c^, nicfttg, Dtet, and ipenig, 
 after the indefinite demonstrative pronoun baS, and also after a superlative 
 used substantively ; as J)ag <S(f)onfic, loag id) ^abc. 8, ' To take', when used 
 
 of food, may be rendered by cfTen, trinfcn, or genie^en, which latter verb should 
 be used here. 9, 'nothing — food', may be briefly rendered by ' fcine 
 
 genoffcne ©peife'. 10, can — nutriment = can serve as nutriment ((Sniu^j 
 
 rung, f.). The verb bieiien requii-es the prep, ju, which governs the dat. and 
 must here be contracted with the def. art. into ;;uv; see N. 2. 11, that — 
 
 water = before (efjc, see App. § 17) the same (f.) is dissolved in water. 
 
 Section 4. 
 
 OP^ WHAT USE IS IT? 
 
 When'^ Franklin made his discovery of the identity^ of lightning' and 
 electricity ^ it* was sneered at^ and people asked: "Of what use is it.?" 
 To ® which his apt reply was : " What is the use of a child ? — It may "^ 
 become a man !" — S. Smiles. 
 
 1, Of — it, iffic^u im|,t eg? 2, 'When', referring to definite time of the 
 
 Past, must always be rendered by 'al<3i'. 3, of the identity, »on ber 
 
 Sbentitat, f. ; see S. 3, N. 2. 4, When the agent from which the action 
 
 proceeds is not mentioned, the English Passive Voice is often rendered 
 by a reflective verb, or by the indefinite pronoun iliau and a verb in the 
 Active Voice ; as — 
 
 At last the book woas found. dnblic^ | [ J " \ [^^ ^^ \ bag ©iK^. 
 
 Say ' people (man) sneered at it.' 5, A. To sneer at something, fiber iiX^tx^ 
 
 fpctteuj B. 'at it' = there at, batiibcr. The English pronouns 'it', 'them',
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 4. 3 
 
 'that', and 'those', dependent on a preposition governing in German the 
 dative or accusative, are generally to be rendered by the pronominal adverb 
 ' ba' in combination with a corresponding preposition. This is always the 
 case when 'it' and 'that', in connection with a preposition are used in- 
 definitely, and frequently when either of these pronouns refers to a noun 
 representing an inanimate object or an abstract idea. The letter x is inserted 
 between the adverb ba and the preposition, whenever the latter begins with 
 a vowel. 6, To — was = Upon this (Jpierauf) he (inverted constr., see 
 
 App. § 14) gave z/^^" following striking (tvcffciib) answer. 7, may = can; to 
 
 become a man, jum 'Dianne wcrtcn. 
 
 Section 5. 
 
 WEALTH ^ 
 
 Wealth, after alP, is^ but a relative thing: for he who has* little, 
 and wants ^ still less, is richer than he who has much, and wants still 
 more. — Rev. C. Cotton. 
 
 1, wealth, (Rcic^tum, m., see S. 3, N. 2. 2, When the subject, which 
 
 may be preceded by its attributes, occupies the first place in a 
 principal clause, either the copula or the verb must follow im- 
 mediately. 3, after all . . . but, bed) intmcr nur; a — thing, etwaci Oiclativeg. 
 
 4, to have = to possess. 5, 'to want', here bebuvfen. 
 
 Section 6. 
 
 MENDELSSOHN IN BIRMINGHAM. 
 
 When^ Mendelssohn, on^ the first performance of his' 'Elijah' in 
 Birmingham, was about* to enter ^ the orchestra, he® said laughingly to 
 one of his friends and critics "^ : " Stick ^ your claws into me ! Don't 
 telP me what you like, but'° what you don't like!" — Athen^um. 
 
 1, See S. 4, N. 2. 2, The preposition ' on', signifying ' on the occasion 
 
 of, must be rendered by ' bei'. ' Performance', 2lupf)rung, f. 3, Use the 
 
 gen. of the def. art.; Elijah, (fHas?. 4, 'to be about', im SBcc^riff fein. 
 
 'To be about' may also be rendered by the auxiliary verb of mood irodcn 
 and the infinitive of another verb ; as — 
 
 / nuas just about to leave, when the 3cf) ipar gerabe im Scgrijf abjiuvcifctt 
 letter arrived. {or 3d^ n.^o(ltc gcrabe abreifcn), 
 
 al3 bcr ^ricf anfam. 
 
 5, 'to enter', bctreten, see S. i, N. 2. 6, Since the subordinate clause 
 precedes the principal clause, the construction of the principal clause must be 
 inverted, see App. § 15. 7, to— critics, say 'to a friend and critic', 
 (Reicnfcnt, m. 8, 'Stick — me!' This metaphor must be rendered freely 
 by: sjsacfen @ic nti* nut tiicl^tig an! 9, tell = say; to like = to please, with 
 the dat, of the person. 10, The co-ordinative conjunction 'but' must be 
 rendered by 'foit&cru', when, after a negative statement, the subsequent 
 clause expresses an idea altogether contrary to that of its antecedent. 
 
 Section 7. 
 
 TO FORGIVE IS^ TO FORGET. 
 
 I can forgive, but I cannot forget," is "^ only another way of saying : 
 I will not forgive." A wrong once forgiven^ ought* to be like^ a 
 cancelled note*, torn in two and burned up, so^ that it never can be 
 shown against the man. — Rev. H. W. Beecher. 
 
 B 2 

 
 4 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 7, 
 
 1, *to be', here = to signify, f^el^cn. 2, is — saying = signifies only in 
 
 (mif) other words. ' 3)ag 9Boit' has two plural forms with a different meaning 
 to each : bie SBovter, single, unconnected words ; bie SBorte, words connected 
 into speech, 3, j^. Whilst the English Perfect Participle (commonly 
 
 called Past Participle) is placed both before and after the noun it qualifies, 
 the German Past Participle used attributively, as a rvile, precedes 
 the qualified noiin; as — 
 
 We met with a ship bound for Bre- SBir trafett tin \ta^ f&ttmtW bc 
 *"en. fttmmted Srf)iff. 
 
 B. Clauses containing a Perfect Participle, however, may also be rendered by 
 the help of a relative pronoun. Thus rendered, the preceding sentence 
 would read : 
 
 fflir trafett etn ®c^iff, tt)cld^e§ im^ aSremcn befttmmt tpar; 
 
 but the first rendering is certainly more concise than the second, and it is to 
 be preferred in all cases where the attributive construction would not be too 
 lengthy. 'A wrong once forgiven', say 'A forgiven wrong', and mark that: 
 "When Participles are used attributively, and precede the noun they 
 qualify, they must be inflected like adjectives. 4, render ' ought' by 
 
 the imperfect of follcn. 5, like, iine. 6, note, ©(^utbfdjein, m.; to tear 
 
 in two, jerrci'^cn ; to burn up, »crbrcu'nen. According to the rule given in N. 3, 
 the participles of these two verbs have to be placed before the noun 'note', 
 which they qualify. 7, 'so — man', say 'which never again can be used 
 
 against the debtor'. According to the hint given in S. 2, N. i, the verb is 
 in the passive voice, and since the clause is a subordinate one, the verbs must 
 stand at the end of the clause. Place the p. p. first, and the copula (can) last. 
 
 Section 8. 
 
 WHAT IS CAPITAL P 
 
 What is capital? Is^ it what a man has.? Is'^ it counted (App. 31) 
 by' pounds and pence, stocks* and shares ^ by houses and lands*? 
 No ! Capital ^ is not what a man has, but what a man is. Character " 
 is " capital ; honour '" is capital. — Rev. Dr. Macduff. 
 
 1, ' Is — has?' say ' Does it consist in that which (see S. 3, N. 7) we possess?' 
 The prep, 'in' here governs the dat. Read again S. 4, N. 5, B, and notice 
 that, when the demonstrative pronouns 'that' and 'those' are followed 
 by a relative pronoun, they cannot be rendered by the adverb 'ba' in com- 
 bination with a preceding preposition ; as — 
 
 We laughed «f /A«/ w^/VA (or at what) 2Bir tac^ten fiber bag, tuaS @ie uiti? 
 
 you told us. ev,5df>lteii. 
 
 2, See S. z, N. i ; 'to count', here fcf)d^cn. 3, by = na(f). 4, SBcrt:: 
 
 ^Hipicre. 5, 9lfticu. 6, ?aiibereicii. 7, ' Capital— is'. The literal 
 
 translation of this sentence would read very awkwardly in German, say ' Our 
 capital does not consist in that which we possess, but (S. 6, N. 10) in that 
 which we are.' 8, Character = A good reputation. 9, 'is', here iji. 
 
 10, eijrenljaftigfett, f. 
 
 Section 9. 
 
 A GOOD RULE'. 
 
 A French minister, who was alike ^ remarkable ' for his * despatch of 
 business and his constant' attendance at places of public amusement,
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 9. 5 
 
 being * asked how he contrived to combine both objects, replied : " Simply '' 
 by never postponing till to-morrow what should be done* to-day." — 
 S. Smiles. 
 
 1, Seben^vcgel, f. 2, ' alike . . , and', fowc^l . . . ime auc^. 3, to be 
 
 remarkable tor something, ftc^ burc^ etloaS aue^'jci^nen. 4, his— business, 
 
 fondle (Srlebii^ung fciiier 9lnit(?i5efd)aftc. 5, constant— amusement, rcgclmdgiger 
 
 53efuc]^ offentUc^cr a3cv9iiiiijuii9gorte. The prep, buvd), which requires the ace, 
 must be repeated at the beginning of this clause. 6, 'being— replied'; 
 
 this sentence requires an entirely different construction in German, say ' an- 
 swered upon the question, how (App. § 16) he made it possible to combine 
 both (neuter sing.)'. To combine, ccreiiiicjcn. The verb 'to make' must be 
 placed in the Present Subjunctive, since the clause contains an indirect ques- 
 tion. Read carefully App. §§ 28 and 30. 7, Simply— to-morrow, (Sinfa^ 
 baburd), ba^ ic^ uie auf mcrgen mfc^icbe. 8, 'to do', here erlcbiijcn. See 
 
 5. 2, N. I, and place the verbs in the order pointed out in S. 7, N. 7. 
 
 Section 10. 
 
 ENGLAND UNDER THE RULE^ OF" QUEEN VICTORIA. 
 
 The peace, the freedom, the happiness ^ and the order which Victoria's 
 rule guarantees ^, are ' part of my birthright as ayi EngHshman, and I 
 bless * God for my share ' ! Where else shall * I find such liberty * of 
 action, thought, speech^", or" laws which protect me so welP^.? — 
 W. M. Thackeray. 
 
 1, rule = reign. 2, Use the gen. of the def. art. The definite article 
 
 is used in German before names of persons when preceded by an adjective or 
 a common name ; as — 
 
 25 e V arme gri^ ! Poor Fritz ! 
 
 2)er JTaifcv aBiUjelm. Emperor William. 
 
 3, happiness = well-being, aBof)lfal)vt, f. 'Victoria's rule', say 'the reign of 
 Queen Victoria'. 4, to guarantee, 9CU'»dl)Vcn. 5, are part = form a part. 
 
 6, I bless = I thank. 7, share = lot. 8, shall = can. 9, gvci{)cit 
 beg Jpaubctue. Repeat the article before the two following nouns. In German 
 the articles, possessive adjective pronouns, and other determinative 
 words must be repeated when they are used in reference to several nouns 
 of different gender or number, whilst in English they are only required before 
 the first noun. 10, Insert 'and' before 'speech', Oicbe, f., and place the 
 verb fiuben immediately after that noun. 11, Substitute the words 'and 
 where' for the word 'or'. 12, gut. 
 
 Section 11. 
 
 CONCENTRATION OF POWERS. 
 
 The weakest living creature S by ^ concentrating his powers on a single 
 object, can'^ accompUsh' something. The strongest*, by dispersing his 
 over many, may fail to accomplish anything ^ The drop, by continually * 
 falling', bores® its passage through the hardest rock. The hasty ^ 
 torrent rushes^" over it with hideous uproar, and leaves no trace be- 
 hind. — T. Carlyle. 
 
 1, creature, 5Bcfcn, n. ; strengthen the superlative of the adjective by placing 
 * ader ' before it, forming one compound expression, analogous to : !i;ie alUr;
 
 6 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION II. 
 
 fc^cnfle 93[ume, the finest flower (of all). 2, The copula ' can ' must be placed 
 immediately after the subject and its attributes, as has been pointed out in 
 
 5, 5, N. 2. 3, 'by concentrating his powers', burd) Jvonj^cntvaticn feiuer ^rafte ; 
 to accomplish something, ehxiaS ;\u(lanbe brincjcn. Use the adverbial expression 
 'at least' before 'something', which will give more force to the German 
 rendering. 4, The strongest — fail, S)em (Stdrff^en l)itigegeu unrb e3 biirc^ 
 Sevfplitterung feiner ^rdfte tiic^t gelingen. 5, anything, and) nuv bag ©eringilc. 
 
 6, to bore one's passage, fid^ cinen 2Beg bo()ven. Place the verb according 
 to S. 5, N. 2 ; the adverbial clause 'by continually falling' must follow it. 
 
 7, To render 'falling', form a noun of the verb 'fallen'. The German 
 language makes frequent use of the Infinitive Present of verbs to form 
 abstract nouns, whilst the English language uses the Verbal in -ing for that 
 purpose. Such nouns are always of the neuter gender ; as bag ©efjen, going ; 
 bag ©jfen itnb !£rin!cn, eating and drinking. 8, continual, unabldffig, adj. 
 9, hasty, ungcfliiin ; torrent, ©trcm, m. 10, to rush over something, uber 
 ettrag ^inircg'ftutjen ; ' rushes — uproar', say ' rushes with hideous (cntfe^li^) uproar 
 (@etofc) over the same.' 
 
 Sec ^Z 071 12. 
 
 COOLNESS \ 
 
 Of the Duke of Wellington's - perfect coolness on ' the most trying 
 occasions, Colonel Gurwood gives * this instance. He was ^ once in 
 great danger of suffering '^ ship-wreck. It was bed-time '' when (S. 4, 
 N. 2) the captain of the vessel came to him, and said : " It will soon be 
 all over ^ with us 1" " Very well," answered the Duke, " then I (App, § 14) 
 need not (App. § 12) take off® my boots!" — W. C. Hazlitt. 
 
 1, ,Sa(tttiitigfett, f. 2, Place the genitive after the governing noun, and 
 
 say : ' Of (23on) the perfect coolness of the Duke of Wellington.' Perfect = 
 great. 3, 'on — occasions ' = in the most dangerous (gefa^vticU) situations. 
 
 4, to give = to relate. See App. § 14 for the construction. 'This instance' 
 = //^f- following example. 5, 'to be', here fic^ befinben. 6, Construe 
 
 according to S. i, N. 3. 7, <Scf}tafcngjeit, f. 8, voiuber. 9, to take 
 
 off, aug'jieffen, see S. i, N. 2. 
 
 Section 13. 
 
 RELIGIOUS TOLERATION*. 
 
 When ' certain persons attempted ^ to persuade Stephen *, King of 
 Poland, to constrain ^ some of his subjects, who ^ were of a different 
 religion, to embrace '' his, he said ^ to them : " I ® am king of men, and 
 not of^" consciences". The^^ dominion of conscience belongs exclu- 
 sively to God." — Rev. R. K. Arvine. 
 
 1, OieUgicngbutbung, f. 2, 'When', here? 3, attempted to = would, 
 
 impf. of ftioKen. 4, say 'the king Stephen of Poland', ^ijiiig ©te)^f)an t^cn 
 
 Satt^ovi regierte Bon 1 576-1 586. 5, ^iringen. Place the verb after the 
 
 relative clause, since the relative pronoun should follow its antecedent 
 as closely as possible. 6, 'who — religion', say 'who belonged to 
 
 another religion'. 7, to embrace = to accept. 8, 'to say', here 'to 
 
 reply', entgcgnen. 9, I — men = I rule (^crrfcl)cn) over men. 10, of = 
 
 over. 11, This noun is not used in the plural in German. See S. 3, N. 2. 
 
 12, 'The — God', say 'God alone rules over consciences (sing.)'.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION I4. 7 
 
 Section 14. 
 
 HOW HUGH MILLER 1 BECAME A- GEOLOGIST. 
 
 Hugh Miller's^ curiosity* was^ excited by ike remarkable traces of 
 extinct " sea-animals in '' the Old Red Sandstone, on which he worked as 
 a quarryman. He inquired^, observed, studied, and became a geologist. 
 "// was the necessity", said he, " which made ® me a quarrier, that taught 
 me to be a geologist." — S. Smiles. 
 
 1, Ǥugt) 9)?if(er iruvbe ant loten Oftctier 1802 vion avmen (Slterit jit Sromartt) in 
 ©c^otttanb geboren. (Sr avbcitcte 1 5 3al}ve ale* gcmciner ©tcinbrec^ev, bcfdjdftigtc ftc^ 
 jcboc^ ira()renb jcncr 3eit mit Uttevavi[c^en unb wiiTenf^aftlic^en 5lrbeiten, befcnberg mit 
 bev ©eolcgic, ber cr ganj^ nciie 93af)ncn ercffnctc. 2)urcl) feine SBcrfe ^at cv jid) in bcr 
 SBiffenfd^aft einen nnftcrblid^en 9Jamen erircvben, unb a(g er am 2 4sten 2)e5embcr 1856 
 ftarb, verier ©c^cttlanb in if)m einen feincv beften Scfinc, unb bic ©eotcc^ie einen ihrcr 
 berebteften unb erc)ebenften ^e()rer. 2, Contrary to English construction, the 
 
 indefinite article is not used in German in stating the business or 
 profession of a person ; as— 
 
 He wants to be a soldier. @r n?i(( <Sc(bat irerbcn. 
 
 Exception : When the noun denoting the business or profession is preceded 
 by an adjective, the indefinite article is used in German, as in English: 
 
 His father was a clever physician. ®eiu SBater iiMr ein gcfc^icfter Slvjt. 
 
 3, When a Proper Name is used in the Genitive Case, it is generally 
 placed before the governing noun, as in English: Schiller's poems, ©c^illev^ 
 ©ebid^te. 4, SBi^begicrbe, f. 5, How is the Passive Voice to be 
 recognised? *To excite', here tebl)aft an'vegen; construe accord, to S. 13, N. 5. 
 6, au^'gefiorben. 7, in — Sandstone, in einem atten OJotfanbfteinlager ; on 
 which = where. 8, 'to inquire', here 9^acbfovfc^ungen anftellen. 9, 'to 
 make' requires here the prep, ^u contracted with the def. art.; 'that — 
 geologist', mac^te tnic^ f^Ueplicf) auc^ ^um ©eclogen. 
 
 Sectio7i 15. 
 
 EXTREMES MEET». 
 
 When Diogenes, during the famous festival ^ at Olympia ', saw * some 
 young men of Rhodes arrayed^ most magnificendy, he (App. § 15) ex- 
 claimed smiling : " This is pride ! " And when, afterwards ^ he met * with 
 some Lacedaemonians in a mean '' and sordid * dress, he said : " And this 
 is also pride I " — Rev. R. K. Arvine. 
 
 1, 3)ie (Srtrcme berii^ren iicf). 2, the festival at Olympia, bie DIt)mfifcficn 
 
 iVefte. ©iefe bcvu()mten tvcfte, aucfi Dh)mi.nfd)e ©viflf gcnannt, nnu-ben in jctem fiinftcn 
 Sa'^te ant eiilen a3cllmcnb nac^ ber ©eunenwenbe (9hifang 3uli) bei CU)nuna j^u (Sl)ven 
 bes BfUf? gcfeievt. ©ic bauevten fiinf 2!agc unb bcfianben in SBettrenneu (^u 9Bagen, 
 ju ?pfevb unb \\\ %\\%) nub in grimnaftiuten ©vielen al(er 5lrt. 3, Contrary 
 
 to English practice, the comma is, as a rule, not used in German 
 to enclose adverbs or adverbial clauses of time, manner, and place. 
 
 4, 'to see', here evblicfcn, which place after ' Rhodes' ; young men = youths; 
 'of, here au<5; Rhodes, OibebuS. 5, 'arrayed — magnificently'. Turn 
 these words into a relative clause, and say: 'which were most magnificently 
 (aufiji vracfctigflc) arrayed ([(^mucfen) ', according to the rule given in S. 7, N. 3, B. 
 6, to meet with a person, eincm begegnen. Place the subject immediately after 
 'when'. The Lacedemonian, ber Sa^fbdmcnier. 7, avmfelig. 8, ^erlumpr.
 
 8 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION l6. 
 
 Section 16. 
 
 POOR PAY\ 
 
 When the Duke of Marlborough, immediately after the battle of Blen- 
 heim ^, observed ^ a soldier leaning * pensively on the butt-end of his 
 musket, he accosted '•' him thus : " Why so pensive ^, my friend, after so '' 
 glorious a victory ? " " It may be glorious *," replied the brave fellow, 
 " but * I am thinking that all the human blood I ^° have spilled this day " 
 has only ^'^ earned me fourpence." — Rev. R. K. Arvine. 
 
 1, Slnnfclige Sc^atihuig. 2, 2)ie <Sd)(ac^t bci SUnb()cim (Engl. 'Blenheim') 
 ttturbe am 13*^° Slugufl 1704 con bcm •'pevjog con SWavlbcvoug^ in 33crSintiung mit bent 
 6ftevei(^ifc^cn $vinjcn ©ugen gcgm bie Sranjofen gcfoci^ten. Sliub^cim ift ein ftciueS 
 baverifcl)eii Jiovf bei §6ct}ftabt, an ber ©onan. ©ie Si^lac^t Unirbe ju guuficn bcv ^BetJ 
 biinbctcn cntf^icben, unb ber -§er;(og luni 3)fav(bcivoitgt) evftielt fiiv biefcu gtdnjenben ©icg 
 von ber Jlonigin 9lnna ein pradjtiHillcei ©d}Io^ (Blenheim House) bei SBoobftorf in 
 Difovb[()ire jnm Ocfc^cnf. 3, Place the verb 'observed' after the noun 
 
 'soldier'. 4, 'leaning — musket'. This passage must be changed into 
 
 a relative clause, thus: 'who leant (fic^ flii^en) pensively (gebaiifenyoU) upon the 
 butt-end (^olbcn, m.) of his musket ', for : Sentences containing a Present 
 Participle which qualifies a preceding noun or pronoun, are generally 
 turned into relative clauses; as — 
 
 The teacher, noticing the boy's talent, 2)er Scfjrcr, h) e t c^ e r bo3 iJatent beg 
 applied to the prince on his be- Jlnabcn bemerfte, »ernjenbete ftc^ 
 
 half. fur if)n bei bem giiiiien. 
 
 5, to accost, anteben; thus, folgenbevniafen. 6, here 'nac^benfcub' in order to 
 avoid the repetition of the same word. 7, so ... a, ein .. . fo. 8, Make 
 
 the word 'glorious' emphatic by placing it at the head of the clause, and see 
 App. § 14. Insert the adverb '»of)l' between the subject and the verb 'be', 
 which will render the sentence more idiomatic. 9, but — thinking, ^n 
 
 id) bebenfe. 10, Supply the relative pronoun 'which', for: The relative 
 
 pronoun can never b^ omitted in German ; to spill, wergicpen. 11, this 
 
 day = to-day. 12, This work has only earned me a shilling, biefe 51rbeit tjat 
 
 uiir nut einen Sdjifliug eiugebvadjt. 
 
 Section 17. 
 
 THE WORLD IS A LOOKING-GLASS. 
 
 We ' may be pretty certain that persons '^ whom all the world treat ill, 
 deserve entirely ^ the treatment they * get. The world is a looking-glass, 
 and gives ' back to every man the reflection of his own face. Frown * at 
 it, and ^ it will in turn look sourly upon you ; laugh * at it and with it, 
 and* it is a jolly, kind companion". — W. M. Thackeray. 
 
 1, We — certain. 3Biv fonneu \\\\^ ^iemlic^ ftd^er barauf vevlajfen. 2, per- 
 
 sons — ill = those who have to suffer from everybody. 3, Wonfommen. 
 
 4, they get, iretd^e i()nen guteit >v>irb. 5, to give back the reflection = to 
 
 reflect, juriict'werfen ; every man, jebec; face = image. 6, to frown at a 
 
 person, liere 'einen muvrifd^ an'blicfen'; use the second pers. sing. 7, and 
 
 — you, unb fie unib and) auf bic^ verbvie^lic^ ^evnie'berfd^auen. 8, ' Laugh at it' 
 
 seems to be used here in the sense of: 'Smile at it'. Say: 'Smile at it, 
 laugh with it', etc. 'To smile at a person', here 'einen freunbtid) an'blicfen'. 
 9, 'and — is', say: 'and it will be for thee (bir)'. 10, ®cfai)vtin.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION l8. 9 
 
 Section 18. 
 
 GIVE' THE HONOUR TO GOD ALONE. 
 
 A lady applied ^ to the worthy philanthropist ^ Richard Reynolds on 
 behalf of a little orphan boy. After he* had (App. § 17) given liberally ^ 
 she said: "When® he is old enough, I (App. § 15) will teach'' him to 
 thank his benefactor." " Stop^" said the good man, " thou art mistaken *. 
 We do not thank the clouds for rain (S. 3, N. 2). Teach''' him to look 
 higher, and thank Him'^ who giveth both the clouds and the rain." — 
 Rev. R, K. Arvine. 
 
 1, Say 'Give God alone the honour'. 2, to apply to a person on behalf 
 
 o/" somebody, fic^ bci eincm fur jemanb tjeinwubcn. 3, a)Jetif^ciifvcuiib, m. 
 
 4, To avoid ambiguity turn the pron. 'he 'here by 'Reynolds'. 5, 'liberally', 
 here rci(^ltc^. 6, The conjunction 'when', used in the sense of ' when- 
 ever', and referring to indefinite time, must be rendered by ' tveillt' (compare 
 
 5. 4, N. 2) ; as — 
 
 When (whenever) my old teacher Senn tncin alter Scfuer nad^ ^amButg 
 came to Hamburg, he always fam, )uot)ute er jlet^ bei niiv. 
 
 stayed with me. 
 
 7, The verb ' lc()Uir, to teach, requires the accusative of the person. Render 
 the sentence ' I — benefactor' by ' I will teach him to be thankful to his bene- 
 factor'. 8, §alt' I 0, to be mistaken, jic^ inen. 10, Teach — 
 higher, Se^rc t^n t)c()er bliffen. 11, The pronoun ' Him' is here used as a 
 demonstr. pron. ; ' both . . . and ', fpico^l . . . mie auc^ ; ' to give ', here = to send. 
 
 Section 19. 
 
 HOW DID CUVIERi BECOME A NATURALIST? 
 
 When young (S. lo, N. 2) Cuvier was one day^ strolling' along the 
 sands near Fiquainville, in Normandy *, he observed a cuttle-fish lying ^ 
 stranded on the beach. He was attracted ® by the curious object, took 
 it home to ' dissect, and ^ began the study of the mollusca, which ended 
 in his becoming one of the greatest among natural historians. — S. Smiles. 
 
 1, ®. 35. 6i\»icr, beviif^mtcr franj6jif(^er 9ktuvforfd}cv (1769- 1832), crVb bie vers 
 Q(eidi)enbc Slnatomie gucift juv IBifTeiifc^aft. 2, one day, eiiicg llagefJ ; one 
 
 morning, cine^ 3}?ovi5en3 ; one evening, eince! 2lbcubd, etc. 3, to stroll along 
 
 the sands, an bcr Jliifte um^er'f^Uubcvn ; ' near', here V)cn. 4, bic Olcrmanbic, 
 
 always used with the def. art. 5, 'lying — beach', say 'which the sea 
 
 had washed (fpulcn) upon the beach. (See App. § 17.) 6, to be attracted 
 
 by something, fic^ buvc^ cttra^^ an\ir?i-Hjcii fiil)lcn ; 'object', here 'creature'. 
 
 7, The Supine is used to express purpose, and must be employed whenever 
 the English 'to' is used in the meaning of 'in order to', or 'for the pur- 
 pose of; clauses of this sort are generally introduced by the conjunction 
 'HIU'; as — 
 
 I will take this animal home to dis- 3c^ »tiif( bieS ilicr mit nac^ Jpaufe netjmcu, 
 sect. urn ii ju ff^icvcn. 
 
 8, ' and — historian', say 'began (an'fanc^cn) to study the mollusca, and became 
 finally (fcfcUc§li(^) one of the greatest natural historians'. Mollusca, SUtdluefcii 
 or ©ficl^tierc.
 
 10 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 20. 
 
 Section 20. 
 
 ON THE CHOICE OP BOOKS ^ 
 
 In literature (S. 3, N. 2) T am fond "^ of confining myself to the best 
 company, which consists chiefly of old acquaintances ^ with whom I am 
 desirous of becoming more intimate, and I suspect * that, nine ° times out 
 of ten, it is more profitable ^, if not more agreeable, to read an old book 
 over again, than "^ to read a new one for the first time. — Lord Dudley. 
 
 1, 'of books', here ber Seftiive. 2, A. The verbs ' to be fond of and 
 
 'to like' are often rendered by the auxiliary verb of mood 'ittogeil', either 
 with or without the adverb 'gerne' or 'gem' (willingly), which is used to in- 
 tensify its signification ; as — 
 
 7«wvery/o«^o/the German language. Sd^ mag bic bcutfd^e (Si?ra(i)e fc'^r gcrn. 
 ^rd-jowybW (?/■ walking? 9Kcgen @ie genie fpa^ieren gcfjen? 
 
 I don't like this child. 3(^ ntag bie3 Jviiib nid^t. 
 
 JB. But the adverb Qerite or fjcttt in itself denotes liking and fondness, 
 
 and is therefore the general translation of the verbs 'to be fond of or 'to 
 
 like' when used with the infinitive of other verbs ; as — 
 
 7 //jf^ to dance. Sc^ tan^e gcrn. 
 
 /Tf flr^ /b«^ o/" confining ourselves to SSir befc^ranfen itn3 gem aiif cinige 
 
 a fevv old books. hjetiige alte J8ii(^er. 
 
 Construe the above clause accord, to the last example given. 3, acquaintances 
 = friends; I am desirous of becoming = I wish to become (App. § 19J. The 
 insertion of the adverb 'nod^' before the comparative will greatly improve the 
 rendering of this clause. 4, to suspect = to believe. 5, 'nine times 
 
 out of ten' maybe briefly rendered by the adverbial expression nteiflcnteil^, 
 which place immediately after the subject of the subordinate clause. 6, pro- 
 fitable, tm^Uc^ ; 'if — agreeable', say 'if not even (gar) more agreeable; 'over 
 again', here tio^ cinntat. 7, 'than — time', say 'than to occupy oneself 
 
 (ft(^ bcfdiaftigcn) with a new one\ This periphrase is necessary to avoid a 
 monotonous repetition in German. 
 
 Section 21. 
 
 AN APPAIIEN"TLY IWSIGNIFICAH'T PACT' OPTEIT'^ LEADS 
 
 TO GREAT RESULTS. 
 
 When Galvani "* discovered that a frog's leg * twitched when placed in 
 contact with different metals, it ' could scarcely have been imagined that 
 so apparently insignificant a fact would ever lead (App. § 17) to important 
 results. Yet therein lay the germ of ® the Electric Telegraph, which ' binds 
 the intelligence of continents together, and probably before many years 
 elapse wilP " put' a girdle round the globe." — S. Smiles. 
 
 1, IS^atfa^c, f. 2, See S. 5, N. 2, and place the adverb after the verb; 
 
 'result', CRefuitat, n. 3, Suigi @ah\uu, italicnifcfeer 5lnatom, eiitbccfte 1780 ben 
 
 @at»anidmuS. ' When — discovered', say ' When Galvani made the discovery '. 
 4, 'leg', here <S(^enfe(,m.; to twitch, in 3iirfitiigcn gevatcn; when placed = when 
 (S. 18, N. 6) the same was (S. 2, N. i) brought. 5, it — imagined, l)atte 
 
 man fic^ faum »ovflc((en fonncn; 'that so apparently ... a', ba^ cine fi'einbar fc. 
 e, jum. 7, which — together, »t?e((^ev bie ®ei|iev ber .Scntinente mit einanter 
 
 t>cvbinbct ; before — elapse = in « few years. 8, See App. § 16. 9, to 
 
 put a girdle round the globe, einen ©iirtei rings urn bie (Svbe jie^en. ' 9Jitig3 urn 
 bie Qrbe jie:^' tc^ einen ©iirtel in ciennal ^ef^n 9)iimiten.' ^ucf, ©ommernaditstraum.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 23. II 
 
 Section 22. 
 
 OATS>. 
 
 Oats are (S. 2, N. i) chiefly used whole '^ as food for horses. Ground ' 
 into meal, they are used in some countries (especially in Scotland) for * 
 making porridge and cakes. As® a plant, it is extremely hardy, and 
 grows where neither wheat nor barley could •■' be made productive. For '' 
 this reason it is a favourite crop in mountainous countries and moist 
 climates — for example in Scotland and Wales. It (S. 5, N. 2) also 
 grows luxuriantly in Australia, Northern^ and Central Asia, and in 
 North America. — Nelson's Readers. 
 
 1, SDcr ^afer, which noun is never used in the plural. 2, whole, nnge; 
 
 ttta^tcn; to use, beuu^cn ; food for horses, $fevbcfiittec, n. 3, Ground — meal, 
 jit ^Sc)\ »crnta()lcn ; they — used = one uses (gehauc^cn) it (m.). See S, 4, 
 N. 4; 'country', here ®egenb. 4, for — cakes, urn SDJcfilfufJ^e unb ,f?ucf)cu 
 
 bviraug ju ntac^eti. 5, 'As — hardy', say 'The plant is extremely hardy 
 
 (frdftig)'. 6, could — productive = would thrive. 7, For — reason, 
 
 2)a()cv, adv., App. § 14. Render the pron. ' it' by ' ber -ipafcr' ; a favourite crop, 
 bag Jpauptgctreibe. 8, in 9iorbnmb SDJittelafien. 
 
 Section 23. 
 
 SPRING - BLOSSOMS ^ 
 
 The blossoms of Spring are as briefs as they are beautiful. For^ a 
 short time they embellish the country, spreading*, as it were, a bridal veil 
 over every ® tree and hedge. It seems, indeed ^ as if Nature had given 
 them existence only to (S. 19, N. 7) show their worth, and then to de- 
 stroy them. Yet '' they are " fair pledges of a fruitful tree," and teach us 
 the solemn ^ lesson — that ' everything lovely on earth is destined soon to 
 perish, and ^° like them to glide into the grave. — Rev. E. M. Davies. 
 
 1, 5vut}tttigcibluten. 2, vergangli^. 3, Sluf ; to embellish, fiimijrfeii. 
 
 4, spreading = and spread; as it were, gkid^fam. 5, 'every — hedge', say 
 
 'hedges and trees'. 6, n?ivflic^ ; as — only, <x\?> '^dtte bie 9Iatur ifjneu nur ba<J 
 
 ©afcin vcrtief)cn. 7, 'Yet — tree', say 'They are however the lovely 
 
 messengers (a3orbctcn) of a fruitful (fvud?trei(^) tree'. 8, solemn lesson, 
 
 einfte aBaljr^eit. 9, that — perish, ba§ adei^ Serene aiif (Srbcn ber ^-Bcrgdnglidifcit 
 gewci()t ijl. 10, 'and — grave', say 'and like the blossoms must (App. § 18) 
 
 glide (fuifen) into an early grave'. 
 
 ^ Section 24. 
 
 THE WINKING 1 EYELID. 
 
 The "^ object of winking is a very important one. An outside ' window 
 soon (S. 5, N. 2) gets soiled * and dirty, and a careful shopkeeper * cleans 
 his windows every morning. But our eye-windows must " never have so 
 much as a speck or spot upon them ; and the winking eyelid "^ is the busy 
 apprentice who, not once a day, but * all the day, keeps the living glass ' 
 clean; so that, after alP", we are litUe worse off than the fishes, who" 
 bathe their eyes and wash their faces every moment. — Prof. G. Wilsok.
 
 I a GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 24. 
 
 1, Sag Dffncn unb ©c^Hefcn bcv 9lugcn(iber. 2, 'The — one', say 'The 
 
 opening and closing of the eyelid (pi.) is of great importance. 3, outside 
 
 window = street window. 4, triibe. 5, Jabcn()iiter ; supply the adv. 
 
 ' therefore' after the verb ' cleans', and place the object last of all. 6, ' must 
 — them', say 'must (buvfen) never suffer (ev(cibcn) even (fe(bft) the smallest 
 speck, the least dimness (!£riibung). 7, bag ft(^ offneiibc unb fc^liefcnbe 
 
 Slugenlib; 'apprentice', here Sabenburfd}c. 8, but — day, iiein, ben ganjicn 
 
 Xag I)inbuvd). 0, Slugengtag. 10, genau betracbtet; the subject should 
 
 be placed immediately after the conjunction 'that'; little = not much; to be 
 badly off, fcf)(imm baran fein. 11, who — moment, »vel^e Slucjenunb ©efidjijcbcu 
 Slugcnblirf babcn unb Wafc^cu. 
 
 Section 25. 
 
 A GOOD EXAMPLE. 
 
 It is reported that, one day (S. 19, N. 2), the^ two great philosophers 
 Aristippus "^ and ^schines had fallen at variance ^. The * following day, 
 however, Aristippus came to^ ^schines, and said : " Shall® we be friends ?" 
 "Yes, with ''all my heart!" answered ^schines. "Remember*," con- 
 tinued Aristippus, " that ' though I am your elder, yet I sought for peace." 
 " True ^°," replied .^schines, " and for this " I will always acknowledge 
 you to be the more worthy mam, for ^^ I began the strife, and you the 
 peace." — Rev. J. Burroughs. 
 
 1, Place the subject immediately after the conj. 'that*. 2, SlrtStt^V'U^ 
 
 anS (5t)i-ene truvbe (380 ». S^r.) ©tifter ber cv)rcnaifd)en ^^ifofojj'^enfc^ute, h?cl(^c bie 
 8ef)rc aufftcKte, ba^ bag ^^oc^fte ®lii(f beS 3)Jenfc^cn int ftuuUi^cu unb geiftigen aSergnugcn 
 ju fndjen fei. Slvifii^j^jug \xsox etn 3eitgfnof[e beg ©ccrateg unb bcv einjige ^^ilofcpl) 
 fcinev 3eit, ber fi(^ fcine a3ortrdge utit @c(b bejafjkn lief. 91 fc^ in eg rtar ein S'leben* 
 bu()(er unb ®egner beg J)cmoftencg, irurbe (389 ». (S^r.) gu Sltljen geborcn, lebte fvdter gu 
 Sitjobug unb fiebeltc enbti(^ na^ (Santog fiber, »o cr (314 ». @^r.) fiarb. 3, to 
 
 fall at variance, ft^ ubeilner'fen. 4, The = On the ; however, jebo^, which 
 
 must not be placed between commas. 5, Use here the def. art. contracted 
 
 with the prep, ju into jum, for : The def. art. is often used to mark the 
 Gten. Dat. and Ace. of proper names. 6, Shall = Will. 7, »cn 
 
 ganjem .^evgen! 8, CSvinncre bic^ baran. 9, Say 'that I have sought for 
 
 peace, although I am the elder'; to seek for peace, urn ben S^ieben nad)'fud)cn. 
 10, Say 'That is true'. 11, bcgt)alb, adv. (App. § 14). He acknowledged 
 
 you to be the more worthy man (of us two), (Sr evfannte bi^ atg ben SBurbigcren 
 ron ung beibcn an ; construe according to this example, and supply the expletive 
 'an(^' after the object ' you'. 12, benn i(^ n?ar bev cvfie jum ©treit, unb bu 
 
 jum gvicben. 
 
 Section 26. 
 
 DESCRIPTION OF A GLACIEB. 
 
 I must now explain to you ^ what a glacier is. You see before you ' 
 thirty or forty mountain-peaks, and between these peaks what ^ seem to 
 you frozen rivers. The snow, from * time to time melting and dripping 
 down the sides of the mountain, and congealing in the elevated hollows 
 between the peaks, forms a half-fluid mass, a river of ice ^, which is called 
 (S. 4, N. 4) a glacier. As ® the whole mass lies upon a slanting surface, 
 and is not entirely solid throughout, it'' is continually pushing, with a 
 gradual but imperceptible motion, down * into the valley below. — Mrs. 
 Beecher Stowe.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 26. 1 3 
 
 1, Use the and pers. sing. 2, Place the words 'before you' after the 
 
 object. 3, gtaubfl'bu ju dis erilante Sluffe ju erblirfen. 4, which 
 
 (App. § 16) from time to time melts, drips down on the mountain-sides (Sercj; 
 ab^dnge), and congeals (gefriercn), etc.; see S. 16, N. 4. Supply the adverb 
 »rtebet before the verb 'congeals'. The elevated hollow, tie ()o^er getegeue ge(^i 
 fpalte. 5, (Sigftrcm, m. 6, As = Since, ia (App. § 16) ; to be entirely 
 
 solid throughout, iuxd) iinb imd) fe|l fcin. 7, it — pushing, fo fen!t fie ]ii) 
 
 fortrt?d^renb ; with a . . . but, ntit einct jtuar . . . bo(^. 8, down — below, in 
 
 bad itntcti licgenbe %i}al ^iiiab. 
 
 Section 27. 
 
 WITHOUT! PAINS NO GAINS. 
 
 It was one of the characteristic qualities of Charles James Fox ^, that ^ 
 he was thoroughly pains-taking in all that he did. When * appointed 
 Secretary of State, being ° piqued at some observadon as to his bad 
 writing, he actually took' a writing-master, and wrote copies like a 
 schoolboy until he had sufficiently improved himself. Though ^ a cor- 
 pulent man, he ^ was wonderfully active at picking up tennis-balls, and * 
 when asked how he contrived to do so, he playfully replied : " Because '" 
 I am a very pains-taking man." The same accuracy which he bestowed 
 upon trifling matters ", was displayed by him in things of greater im- 
 portance ; and ^^ he acquired his reputation by " neglecting nothing." — 
 S. Smiles. 
 
 1, Di^nt iSlnfft fcin ®eirtnn. 2, 3c^ mcc^te vcrfd^fagen jn iibcrfe^en : 'of 
 
 the famous Ch. J. Fox', wnl baburc^ baS aicrl)dltmsS beg ©cnitio^ gan^ flar au^i 
 gebriicft unrb. 6()arUg 3ame5 gor (1749-1806) irarb fcfeon 1768 SUitglieb be? 
 UntcrbaufcS, 1772 Serb bf^ (Sc^a^c^, unb bitbcte 1783 mit S'iortt) unb 5portlaub ein 
 2Jfinijteiium, U'el^cg jebcc^ balb bent SDiinifterium ^itt trct(^cn ntu^te. ®r bcgaiui 
 barauf mit 58uvfe unb anbern cine gvo^aitige farlamcntavifc^e Dpvfition gcgcn *i>itt 
 unb fdrnpftc i^on 1792-97 fafi allein gegcn cine ftarfe 9)Jaioritdt. 3m 3a^ve 1806, 
 furj »or [cincm 2!obc, nntrbe cr mit Wraninlle no^mal^ anS ©taattSruber bcrufcn. 
 3, ba^ cr ftc^ in allent, iva'S cc tf)at, bie gro^te 2)fut)e a^ah. 4, When he was 
 
 appointed (see N. 7). The verbs mac^en (to make), erncnncn (to appoint), 
 and er«}d()lcn (to choose, to elect), and other verbs denoting choosing or 
 appointing, require in German the prep, ^u contracted with the def. art., 
 whilst in English they govern t^wo Nominatives in the Passive Voice ; as — 
 
 !Der 5«iiiib mcincS 93atcr3 iji jum 2lbs Rly father's friend has been elected 
 
 gecvbnetcn cvlvdfilt ivcvben. a member of Parliament. 
 
 5, being — writing. This clause must be rendered in an altogether different 
 form ; let us say ' and felt hurt by an observation as to (ubcr) his bad hand- 
 writing'. To feel hurt by something, fii-fi buvc^ ctumei invlc^U fu()lcn. The p. p. 
 must be placed? 6, 'to take', here cngagie'vcn ; 'actually', here faftifd) 
 
 (see App. § 15) ; to write copies, jic^ im ©cIuMifdjvcibcn iibcn; improved himself 
 = improved his hand-writing. 7, Though he was. Grammatical dis- 
 
 tinctness, as a rule, requires that the subject and copula, which after certain 
 conjunctions arc so frequently omitted in English, should, be clearly ex- 
 pressed in German. 8, When a subordinate clause, beginning with 
 one of the conjunctions b a, obglcic^, Uuil, and nunn, precedes a principal 
 clause, which is often done for the sake of emphasis, the principal clause is 
 generally introduced by the adverbial conjunction fo (so, thus, therefore); as — 
 
 25a ii tcgnct, fo fonncn (App. § 15) tt)ir As it is raining, we cannot go out. 
 nic^t au(3gcf)cn.
 
 14 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 27. 
 
 'He — balls', fo toax cr tnt Sluffangen bcr SdHe bcint !Jcnnigfpie(e bo(i) nterftruvbtg 
 ijeataiibt. 9, 'and — so', say 'and when (S. 18, N. 6) one asked him how 
 
 he did (niad)eu) it'. The verb wiac^en should be used in the Pres. Subj., since 
 the clause contains an indirect question (App. §§ 28 and 30). Playfully, 
 fc^erjenb. 10, SBeil id} tniv ftctg bie gvij^te 9)Jiit)e gebe. 11, trifling matters, 
 
 ^tfinigfciten ; 'was — importance', say 'he showed also in more important 
 matters' (Jlngelcgeii^eiteu). 12, and — nothing, uitb cr erttjarb fic^ feittm iJluf 
 
 baburc^; bap er iii^ts fuv ju gering cvarf)tcte. 
 
 Section 28. 
 
 THE MAGNA CHAKTA'. 
 
 The great-grandsons oP those who had fought under William, and 
 the great-grandsons of those who had fought under Harold, began to * 
 draw near to each other in friendship, and the first pledge of their recon- 
 ciliation was the* Great Charter, won^ by their united exertions, and 
 framed for their common benefit. Here commences the history of the 
 English nation. The history of the preceding events * is the history of 
 wrongs inflicted' and sustained by various tribes, which, indeed^, all 
 dwelt on English ground, but^ which regarded each other with aversion 
 such as ^° has scarcely ever existed between communities separated ^^ by 
 physical barriers. — Macaulay, History of England. 
 
 1, !Dic '2J?acina Sparta' i^ in am 19^^°- 3uni 12 15 bent Jlcuig So^ann cfinc 8anb 
 abgcvungctte (£taat^grmibiievtvag, utdc^ev al3 ©ruublagc bcv ci!gtif(^cn a^erfaffmig gilt. 
 2, ' of those — Harold'. These two clauses are iiest rendered in a contracted 
 form, thus: 'of the men who had fought under W. and H.' 3, to draw 
 
 near to each other, fi(^ einanber tta^ern ; in friendship, frcunbfc^aftlic^, adv. 
 4, bie 2)Jagna S^avta. 5, The two clauses containing the two p. ps. must 
 
 be turned into one contracted relative clause, as explained in S. 7, N. 3, B. 
 Use the verbs in the Impf. of the Passive Voice. To frame, cntwerfcn. 
 6, (Srcignii^, n. 7, The two p. ps. qualifying 'wrongs' (Uiibilben) should be 
 
 placed before that noun, as explained in S. 7, N. 3, ^; of, voii; to inflict, »ems 
 ben; to sustain, erleibcn ; by — tribes, vierfd)iebcner iBolfeiftammc. 8, j^Wax', on = 
 upon ; ground = soil. 9, but — aversion = but (jeboc^) showed such an 
 
 aversion against one another. The Article, when used in connection with 
 adjectives and adverbs, stands in German generally before those words : such 
 an aversion, einen fo(d)en 9Sibenin[(en. Since the clause to be translated 
 is in reality but a part of the preceding relative clause, which it completes, the 
 verb must be placed ? 10, such as, luic, after which supply the pron. cr, to 
 
 give more distinctness to the rendering; to exist, be|icl)cn; communities = 
 nations. 11, ttjclc^e buvc^ naturlicf)e (Sienseu »oii cinanber gctrcnnt finb. 
 
 Sectio7i 29. 
 
 HONESTY. 
 
 Mr.^ Denham had been in business at Bristol, had failed ^ compounded, 
 and gone ^ to America. There *, by a close application to business as 
 a merchant, he acquired a plentiful ^ fortune in a few years. Returned * 
 to England, he invited his old creditors to an entertainment, at which he 
 thanked them for the easy'' terms (S. 16, N. lo) they had favoured^ him 
 with, and, though the guests had expected nothing but a good treat, 
 every' man, at the first remove, found to his astonishment a cheque
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 29. 1$ 
 
 under his plate for*" the full amount of the unpaid remainder, with 
 interest. — Dr. B. Franklin. 
 
 1, ' Mr. — Bristol', translate 'Mr. D. had had a business at (in) B.', and 
 place the object after the adverbial circumstance of place. 2, to fail (in 
 
 business) fadicven ; to compound, acccibicien. Verbs from the Latin with the 
 termination ievcn do not admit of the prefix or augment ge in the Past Parti- 
 ciple, but follow in all other respects the weak or modern form of conjugation. 
 3, say 'and was gone to America'. The verb i\eljen is always construed with 
 feitt, which auxiliary is especially used with, intransitive Verbs denoting 
 a Passive State of the subject, a change from one State into another, or a 
 Motion, if the place to which the motion is directed, or from which it proceeds, 
 is either expressed or understood. 4, The words 'he acquired' (ertangen) 
 
 should, in an inverted form (App. § 14), follow the adverb 'There'; 'by — 
 merchant', buvc^ unabta(Tige faiifntdnnif^e illjdtigfeit. 5, plentiful = great. 
 
 For the position of the object see App. § 9. 6, Sla^ (Snglanb jururfgcfetirt ; 
 
 entertainment = meal ; at which, ivobei. 7, bequcnt ; terms, ^-Bcbingungen. 
 
 8, to favour a person with something, ciiietn itWaS gciudfiveii (v. tr.) ; nothing 
 but, nuv; treat, ©djmau^, m. 0, every — plate, faiib tod/ ciu jeber nacf) bent 
 
 crjien ©ange j^u feinem (Srjlaunen nntev bcm Seller einen SBe^fel »or. 10, for — 
 
 interest = which was issued (angfieden) for (auf) the full amount of the remaining 
 (riirfftdnbig) debt with (nebji) interest. 
 
 Section 30. 
 
 FORMATION OF A CORAL-ISLAND. 
 
 I. 
 
 It seems to me, that* when the animalcules, which form the corals at 
 the bottom'^ of the ocean, cease to live, their' structures adhere to each 
 other, by virtue either of the glutinous remains within, or of some pro- 
 perty in salt- water. The interstices being* gradually filled up with sand 
 and ^ broken pieces of coral washed by the sea, which also adhere, a mass 
 of rock is at length formed. Future ^ races of these animalcules erect 
 their habitations upon the rising "^ bank, and * die, in their turn to elevate 
 this monument of their wonderful labours. 
 
 1, ' that when the animalcules . . . cease to live'. This clause may be briefly 
 rendered by saying: 'that after the death (3lbflcrtcn, n.) of the animalcules'. 
 To translate the last noun, form a diminutive of !£ict 2, ajieevceibcben, m. 
 
 3, 'their — salt-water'. Use the following order of words for rendering this 
 passage: 'their little houses (dim. of i^an>?) either through the in them con- 
 tained glutinous remains (Ubeneffe) or through some (irgenb cine) property 
 of the salt-water held together are (Pres. of the Passive Voice)'. 4, When 
 the Present Participle is used to denote a logical cause from which we 
 may draw an inference, it must, by the help of the conjunction 'ba', be 
 changed into a finite verb, i.e. one with a personal termination, thus: — 
 The interstices being gradually filled ©a nun bie 3iviifcl)envdume allnidtjUcf) mit 
 up with sand, a mass of rock is at ©aiib au^gefiiUt werben, fo linvb 
 
 length formed. au(3 bent ©anjen enblic^ cine gclfenj 
 
 inajfe gebilbct. 
 The tense in which the verb is to be used, must always be determined by the 
 context. 5, and — sea, unb tnit i^cm 9Kccve ()evange|>ultcn ^crbvccfclten ^ciallcn; 
 
 it is a matter of course that the verbs must follow this passage. 6, The 
 
 following generations. 7, 'to rise', here fic^ crljeben. Present Participles
 
 1 6 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 30. 
 
 used attributively are inflected like adjectives. Bank = reef. 8, 'and 
 
 die — labours', translate ' and die to (S. 19, N. 7) contribute also in their turn 
 (t^rcrfcitg) to the elevation ({Srf)6{)ung, f.) of this monument of their admirable 
 work (Slrbeit, f.)'. 
 
 Section 31. 
 
 rORMATION" OF A CORAL-ISLAND. 
 
 II. 
 
 The* new bank is not long in being visited by sea-birds. Salt-plants ^ 
 take root upon it (S. 4, N. 5, B), and ^ a soil is being formed, A cocoa- 
 nut, or the* drupe of a pandanus is thrown on" shore. Land-birds 
 visit it® and deposit the seeds of shrubs and trees. Every high tide, 
 and still more '' every gale, adds something to the bank. The * form of 
 an island is gradually assumed, and last of all * comes man (S. 3, N. 2) 
 to (S. 19, N. 7) take possession. — M. Flinders. 
 
 1, The new coral-reef is (S. 2, N. i) now soon visited by (»on) sea-birds. 
 2, Sea-plants ; to take = to strike. 3, imb fo bilbet fid) cine ©rbfc^ici^t. 
 
 4, bie gvu(^t cincr CPanane. 2)ie ^aiiane (Pandanus) \\i eine 5lrt $atme unb ttirb 
 auc^ $anbang (m.) obcc ^atmnupaum genannt. 5, an, contracted with the 
 
 def. art. 6, it = the same, to agree with its antecedent 'shore'; to de- 
 
 posit, jitriicf taffcn ; seeds, ©ante, m., used in the sing. 7, still more = 
 
 especially ; adds — bank, trdgt ctluag ^ur SSergio^erung bcs Stiffs fcei. 8, The 
 
 latter (biefeg) gradually assumes (an'ne^^mcn) the form of an island. The adv. 
 'gradually* may be made emphatic; see App. § 14. 8, iutc^; 'to — 
 
 possession' = to take possession of the same. 
 
 Section 32. 
 
 KEYNARD^ CAUGHT. 
 
 A fox observed ^ some fowls at roost, and wished to ' gain access to 
 them by smooth speeches. " I have charming news * to tell you," he ^ 
 said. " The animals have concluded ® an agreement of universal peace 
 with one another. Come down and celebrate ' with me this decree *." 
 An old cock, who was well on his guard, looked ' cautiously all around, 
 and the fox, perceiving (S. i6, N. 4) this, inquired ^° the reason. "I was 
 only observing ^^ those two dogs which are coming this way ^^," replied 
 the cock. Reynard prepared" to set oif. "What"," cried the cock, 
 "have not the animals concluded an agreement of universal peace?" 
 " Yes," returned the fox, " but those dogs (S. 5, N. 2) perhaps have not 
 yet '® heard of it (S. 4, N. 5, B)r — Anonymous. 
 
 1, !Der fibertijletc OJeinefe (or OJein^arb). 2, to observe = to see ; at roost, 
 
 aiif i^rer ©tange ftl^en. 3, to — speeches, buvc^ glatte SBcvte iferet f)at)f)aft jii 
 
 mrben. 4, charming news = something pleasant. To render 'you' use 
 
 the dat. of the persnl. pron. of the 2nd pers. pi. For the construction see 
 App. § 7. 5, The words indicating the speaker, after a quotation, must 
 
 be rendered in an inverted form (see App. § 13). 6, to conclude, 
 
 ob'fc^lie^en, str. v. tr. ; the agreement of universal peace, ber aflgemeine 5>^ieben^; 
 wcrtrag ; to come down, ^erun'tevfcmmm ; supply the adv. alfo between the verb 
 and the separable particle. 7, feient. 8, S8ef(^(ii§, m. 9, to look 
 
 all around, fid) nac^ alien ©citen um'fdjcn. 10, to inquire the reason, fic& na* 
 bet UrfacJ^e erfunbigen. 11, I was observing = I observed (beoba^teu).
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 32. 1 7 
 
 Which are coming = which come. The English compound forms of the 
 verb with the auxiliary and the present participle, and of the verb 'to do' 
 with the infinitive (I do come = I come. I did come = I came), must be 
 rendered by the corresponding simple forms. 12, bicfcg 9Bec(c^. 13, ft(^ 
 
 gum 2)a«oulaufcti bereit mai)tn. 14, Sic. 15, ' not yet ', "here nod) iuci)t^. 
 
 Section 33. 
 
 THE^ M-F.ATNTS OP COTTVEYANCE IN" THE TIME OP 
 
 CHARLES II. 
 I. 
 
 Heavy articles'* were (S. 2, N. i) in the time of Charles II generally 
 conveyed from place to place by waggons ^. The * expense of trans- 
 mitting them was ^ enormous. From London to ® Birmingham the charge 
 was £7 a'' ton, and from London to Exeter £12, which ^ is a third more 
 than was afterwards charged" on turnpike-roads, and fifteen times more 
 than is now demanded by ^° railway companies. Coal " was seen only 
 in districts where it was produced ^2, or ^' to which it could be carried by 
 sea, and " was, indeed, always known in the South of England by the 
 name of sea-coal. 
 
 1, S)ie ©cfcrbcvungsmittct j^ur 3cit i?ar(3 beg Sweitcn. 2, objects. 3, Saftj 
 irageit, which place after 'generally'. 4, 'The — them', may be briefly 
 
 rendered by the compound noun ' 3)ic !£ran?i.'>oitf often'. It may here be pointed 
 out that the German language lends itself more easily than any other living 
 language to the formation of compovmd expressions. Many advantages 
 result from this adaptability of the language to express in one single term 
 which, otherwise, would require a number of words; but the greatest of these 
 advantages seems to me to lie in the power it gives us to avoid the too frequent 
 use of the Genitive, a power which, if rightly wielded, will impart great vigour, 
 conciseness, and elegance to the student's style of writing. 5, were extra- 
 
 ordinary high (gro^). 6, nac^ ; 'charge', here gvac^t, f. ; 'to be', here 
 
 betragcn; £7, fickn *pfunb ©tcrlinc^. 7, The def. art. is used in stating 
 
 the price of goods, when the English use the indef. art. ; as — 
 ©icfer .ffattmt fofict fiinfjig ^fcnnicjc bie This cotton is sixpence a yard. (10 
 ISde. . pfennigs = I ^^.) 
 
 8, The pron. 'which' referring to a whole clause, and not to a particular 
 word in that clause, should be rendered by the indef. rel. pron, Wn«^ ; as — 
 
 She acted without thinking about ®ie tjanbctte, oI)ue fiber bie Sctften nadjj 
 the consequences, nuhich was very jubenfen, tt'ag fe()r unvcd^t ioar. 
 
 wrong. 
 
 9, kvei^nen; turnpike-road, dfiauffec, f. 10, v^on, followed by the def. art.; 
 to demand, beanfpriidjen. 11, i2teinfoI)(en, used in the pi. without the art. 
 Use the active voice with man, S. 4, N.4. 12, gennuncn. 13, or-— sea, 
 cbcr lro()in jie i-'crfdittft irevtcu fonutcn. 14, Say 'and it was (fie Unu-bcn) in the 
 South of England therefore (bal)ev and)) only called sea-coal ('8c^iffe(fol)lcn) '. 
 
 Section 34. 
 
 THE MEANS OP CONVEYANCE IN THE TIME OP 
 
 CHARLES II. 
 II. 
 The rich ^ (S. 5, N. 2) commonly travelled in ^ their own iron carriages 
 with at least four horses. A ^ coach and six is in our time never seen, 
 
 VOL. IV. c
 
 l8 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 34. 
 
 except as part of some procession. The frequent mention, therefore, of 
 such equipages * in old books is Hkely to mislead us. We ' attribute to 
 magnificence what was really^ the effect of disagreeable necessity. 
 People " in the time of Charles II travelled with six horses, because ^ 
 with a smaller number there was danger of sticking^" fast in the mire. — 
 Abridged from Mac aul ay's History of England. 
 
 1, Adjectives used as nouns are declined as they would be if the noun, 
 which is understood, were to follow them. They are always written with a 
 capital initial. 2, in itjten eigcnen mit irenigfteng »icr -Pferben befpannten eifcrnen 
 
 .fi'iitfc^en. 3, *A — seen'. This clause must be construed thus : 'Except 
 
 (Slufer) in processions a coach and six (eine fc^gfpdnnige .Rutfc^e, see App. § 14) 
 is now never seen'. Supply the words ' bei im^' before the p. p. 4, <Staat^i 
 fufjOffrfc ; therefore ... is likely to mislead us = can therefore easily mislead 
 (irre fiif^ren) us. The object 'us' must be placed immediately after the copula 
 'can'. 5, SSir [(^reiben bet ^4)va^tliebc gu. 6, really = in reality; 'effect', 
 
 here = consequence. 7j, Say 'of a'. 8, One (S. 5, N, 2). 9, because 
 . . . there was danger, hjcil man . . . ©efa^r (tef ; 'small', here geritig. 10, to 
 
 stick fast, ftccfeii bleiben. Use the Supine, for: When the JJnglish Gerund 
 (i.e. the verbal in -ing) is governed by a noun, a verb, or an adjective, it is 
 generally rendered by the Supine. Comp. S. 78, N. 14. Examples: 
 He possesses the gift of speaking well. @r bcfi^t bie ®abe gut j u f }? r e d) e n. 
 Do not begin talking! ^ingen @ie nic^t an ju fpre^en! 
 
 Section 35. 
 
 SIR^ WILLIAM HEBSCHEL. 
 
 When * pursuing his musical avocations in the pump-room at Bath, 
 Sir William Herschel had a small workshop close ^ at hand, and when 
 (S. 1 8, N. 6) the* exacting loungers in the pump-room admitted of a 
 pause in the music, he slipped off* to (S. 19, N. 7) complete the polishing 
 of a speculum®, or the grinding'' of a lens. Scarcely, however, had he 
 heard the signal *, when ^ he was ready to snatch up his instrument and ^° 
 to be the first in the orchestra. Thus " he gathered up the fragments of 
 lime, and this made (S. 27, N. 4) him at last the friend of monarchs^^ 
 and the first ^' of astronomers. — Rev. Dr. Leitch. 
 
 1, S^ricbric^ SSilfjelm ^evfc^el (fpater Sir aBilHatn i^frff&el) njurbc 
 am 15'en sjicsi. 1738 in Jpannover geboren. (Sr fant <x\i ajfuftfcr nac^ (Sngtanb, bes 
 fdidftigte fic^ jetoc^ in feincn SlJu^eiiunben eingef^enb uiit bcr Slflronomie, toclc^er er fic^ 
 cubUc^ (xpM\ nnbmete. @v cntberfte mit felbp »eifertigten Spicgclteteefopcn con bis bafjin 
 mibefannter ®ro§e ben Uranus, ju^ci ©aturn^monbe, ja{)(veid^e Doppctfterne, @tcni()aufen 
 iinb SiJebelfl^ecfen, unb lieferte f)Dc^il iri(f)tige 33eobad)tungcn fiber bie ^laneten. ©iefe 
 (Sntbcrfungen, welc^e bev ©elt burd^ bie son ber fcnigiic^en ©efedfc^aft bcr aBifTcnfd)aften 
 ioercj|ent(ic^ten Soumale mitgctfjeilt unirben, mac^ten i^n balb ,^nm beviif)mtcn SJianne. 
 (S"v untvbe won bent .tiinige ©covg III jum fcuigticf}en Slfironomen evnannt unb gcno^ 
 (S1)ve, >Ru()m unb 2Bo()lftanb, al3 er am 258*6^ Slug. 1822 i\\ @[ong() bci aBinbfov '^^xCo. 
 (§3 ift unmoglic^, f)ier nid)t aud) j^uglcic^ feiuer geliebtcn @c^»eftcr ^aroline in 
 gcbeufcn, \veld)e mit feUencr .*^ingebung ft^ ben Seftrebungcn unb Slrbciten besS dlteren 
 ©rubers anfc^lo§ unb fo nidjt iveuig \\\ ben gldn^enben ©rfclgen biefee grc^en unb ^6(^fl 
 merfnnivbigen ilfanneS beitrug. ©ie ftavb im 3a()ie 1848 in if)rer iBaterftabt Jianno»er. 
 3()ve uuldngji v^eroffentliditcn S'lemoiven unb 93ricfe iievbienen im t)od)ftcn @rabe bag 
 allgcmeine Sntevcfie, tt3e(d)eei fie nic^t adein in 5)eutfd}(anb, fcubevn aud) in (Snglanb 
 ^cisoigevnfen ^aben. 2, This passage requires a different construction in
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION ^^. 1 9 
 
 German, thus : * When Sir W. H. was still officiating (fungie'ren, see S. 32, N. 11) 
 in the pump-room (Xviuf^af(c) at Bath as a member of the band (^a^icne), he 
 had', etc. 3, close at hand, gan^ in ber 9Id(}e, which place before the 
 
 object. 4, bie inclbcgeljrcnten SWufiggdngcr; to admit of something, d'wae 
 
 gefiatten, w. v. tr. 5, f)inau^'fc^(upfcu. 6, ©piegef, m. 7, ©(^Icifeit, n. 
 
 8, tag Seic^cn gum Slnfangcn. 9, when — ready, fo trar ex aud) fc^on bereit ; 
 
 to snatch up, crgrcifen, see S. i, N. 2. 10, and — first = and as the first to 
 
 take (cin'nf {)itien) his place. 11, Thus — time = Thus (©0, adv.) he used 
 
 every spare-moment ; the spare-moment, ber fvcie 9lugenbUdf. 12, * monarch', 
 
 here gurji. 13, jum erftcu 5l)lroucnten [ciucv Seit- 
 
 Section 36. 
 
 THE' AIR -OCEAN". 
 I. 
 
 Enveloping' this solid globe of ours are two oceans, one' partial, and 
 the other universal. There is the * ocean of water, which has ° settled 
 down into all the depressions ® of the earth's surface '', leaving ^ dry above 
 it all the high lands, as mountain-ranges, continents, and islands ; and ^ 
 there is an ocean of air, which enwraps " the whole in one transparent 
 mande. 
 
 Through " the bosom of that ocean, like fishes with their fins (App. 
 § 14), birds" and other winged creatures swim; whilst man" and other 
 mamalia creep like '* crabs at the bottom of this aerial sea ^^ 
 
 1, 3)aS Suftmeer. 2, Say ' Two oceans envelop (umgebcn) our solid globe 
 
 ((Srbfuget). 3, the one partial (teilwetfe) and the other universal (gang). 
 
 The subsequent sentence is best introduced by a colon ( : ), which we use to 
 direct attention to what is following. The words '■There is' must then be 
 omitted. 4, bag SBetttneer. 5, 'which — all', say 'which fills (erfuf(en) 
 
 all '. 6, 33cvttefutig, f. 7, To render ' of the earth's surface ', form a 
 
 compound noun by combining the corresponding German terms of the nouns 
 ' earth ' and ' surface'. 
 
 yl. When the component parts of Compound ITouns are substantives, we 
 combine them often without any connecting link ; as — bag Sajitier, beast of 
 burden ; bag <£tabtoicrte(, the quarter of a town, ward. 
 
 B. Neither do we require a connecting link for the formation of Com- 
 pound. Nouns the first component of which is an adjective or a particle; 
 as — bie ®tc^muttcr, grandmother ; bag Uiigliicf, misfortune ; ber Uvqued, fountain- 
 head. 
 
 C. The Gender of Compound Nouns (with the exception of a few com- 
 pounds with SWut, m.) is determined by the last component, which is always 
 a noun. 
 
 8, 'leaving — islands'. This passage may be rendered thus : ' so that alW/'i? 
 high lands (lSv()t>l)ungeu), as (wic) mountain-ranges, etc. . . . rise dry above the 
 same; to rise, fic^ cr()cbeu. 9, unb bag I'uftmcer. 10, innfn'il'lcn ; say 'the 
 
 whole globe' (.tiigc(,f.) ; 'in', here mit. 11, In this ocean of air. 12, Since 
 the four subsequent nouns in this passage represent a whole class, the def. art. 
 is required before each (S. 3, N. 2). 13, Use this noun in the plural, since 
 
 the noun with which it is connected by the conj. 'and' stands in the same 
 number. 14, glcicf) .Svcbfeu ; to creep, umdcv hicc^cn. The word ' whilst' 
 
 being a subordinative conj., the verb must be placed? 15, Suftmcer. 
 
 C 2
 
 20 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION y] . 
 
 Section 37. 
 
 THE AIR -OCEAN. 
 II. 
 
 The air-ocean, which everywhere ^ surrounds the earth, and feeds and 
 maintains it, is even ^ more simple, more grand, and more majestic than 
 the^ 'world of waters'; more* varied and changeful in its moods of 
 storm and calm, of ebb and flow, of brightness and gloom. The ® at- 
 mosphere is, indeed, a wonderful thing, a most perfect example of the 
 economy of nature. Deprived of® air, no animal would live, no plant 
 would grow, no flame would burn, no "^ light would be diffused. The ^ 
 air, too, is the sole medium of sound. Without it, mountains might ® fall, 
 but ^° it would be in perfect silence. Neither whisper ^^ nor thunders ^^ 
 would ^^ ever be heard. — Maury, Physical Geography of the Sea. 
 
 1, Place the adverb before the verb. 2, fcgar noc^. 3, jene mac^tige 
 
 SBaiTcHceU, after which put a full stop and begin a new sentence. 4, This 
 
 passage may be construed thus : * It offers a greater variety (^Dtannififahigfeit) 
 and changeableness in the transitions from storm to (ju) calm, from ebb to 
 flow, and from light to gloom (Sanfel, n.)'. The article (which, if practicable, 
 should be contracted with the preceding preposition) must be used with the 
 last six nouns, see S. 3, N. 2. 5, ©er Siiftfveig ift in ber %{)<x\ :^6c^ji tounberbav 
 
 unt) gelt)d()vt ein ijoflcnbetcg SBfifpiet oon bent ^ansfjdltcvifd^en aCefen ber ^iatur. 
 6, Without (App. § 14) ; would = could, Impf. Subj. 7, unb fein Sic^t ftcfc 
 
 oerbvei'ten. 8, Also (def. art.) sound can only be transmitted (forf^'fJiuijcn) 
 
 through the air. 9, might = could ; to fall, ctn'ftuvjen. 10, Say ' and 
 
 yet the prevailing silence would not be interrupted'. 11, teife^ ©cfliifter, 
 
 ace. 12, tauten 2)onnev, ace. 13, 'would — heard', use the active 
 
 voice with the indef. pron. man. 
 
 Section 38. 
 
 CHEERFUL 1 CHURCH - MUSIC. 
 
 When the poet Carpani inquired ^ of his friend Haydn ' how it hap- 
 pened * that his church-music was ° always so cheerful, the great composer 
 made * the following beautiful reply : 
 
 " I cannot make it otherwise '^," said he, " I * write according to the 
 thoughts I feel. When " I think of God, my heart is so full of joy that 
 (App. § 16) the^° notes dance and leap, as it were, from my pen; and 
 since God has given me a cheerful heart, it ^^ will be pardoned me that ^^ 
 I serve him with a cheerful spirit." — Rev. R. K. Arvine. 
 
 1, frc^ti^. 2, inquired of = asked. 3, Sofep^ C">^t}bn (geb. ben 3isten 
 
 CUJati^ 1732 ju 0?c^vau in Dflreid^, + ben 3isten spj^i 1809 in SBicn, bitbcte ftc^ buvc^ 
 eigeneg (gtubuim in ber a)hi[tf au^ unb tebte bann nanientlic^ al3 JtapeKmcifter be^ 
 Svirfien (S^ter^aj^j in 2iBicn. (Sr '\\i ber ©dicpfer bev ©V)mvt)onie unb beS ©treic^j 
 quartette ; aud) f)at ec fic^ burd^ bic SSegvnnbung ber neneren 3nftrumentationg!un)i ein 
 befonbere^ a3ei'bienil ertttovben. ©eine SBerfe |[nb cbenfo j^a'^lrci^, nne mannigfattig ; 
 bur^ bie beiben Dratoricn: '®ic ©c^opfung' (1799) unb 'bie 3a()reti,^eiten' (1801) 
 I)at er jebcc^ fcinen 9Jamcn mit e{)ernen Settern in bie ®efd)ic^tc bet itunft eingetvagcn. 
 4, Use the Pres. Subj. of fonimen, since the clause contains an indirect ques- 
 tion ; see App. §§ 28 and 30. 5, was — cheerful, ffctg einen fo fr6f)ti(^eu 
 (Sftarafter trage. 6, to make a reply, eine Stnttitort gcben; 'beautiful', here
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 38. 21 
 
 finntg; for the construction see App. § 15. 7, anbcv^; for the place of the 
 
 negation see App. § 12. 8, Translate the passage *I write — feel' briefly 
 
 by saying: ' I write just as (fo Hue) I feel', since it would not be in accordance 
 with the genius of the German language to render the sentence in a literal 
 way. (©ebanfen faun man iiic^t fiifjleu.) 0, S)cnfe id) an ®ott, fo ifi, etc.; 
 
 full of, ijoKer. 10, Construe this clause after the following model : 
 
 The notes danced and lept, as it 2)ie 9Ioten tan^tcu unb I}iipften tf)m 
 were, from his pen. glci^fam au^ b e r gcbet. 
 
 11, fo ivivb man inir Ijojfentlic^ serjeifjcn. 12, that = if. 
 
 Section 39. 
 
 OUR INDUSTRIAL ^ INDEPENDENCE DEPENDS UPON 
 
 OURSELVES. 
 
 Truer ^ words were never uttered than those spoken by Mr. Dargan, 
 the Irish railway-contractor, at a public meeting in Dublin. 
 
 " I have " heard a great deal V' he said, " about the independence that 
 we are ^ to get from this or that source, yet ® I have always been deeply 
 impressed with the conviction, that our industrial independence depends 
 upon ourselves. Simple '' industry and careful exactness would ^ be the 
 making of Ireland. We have, it^ is true, made a step in advance, but per- 
 severance is ^° indispensably necessary for eventual success." — S. Smiles. 
 
 1, inbujlrieri. 2, A greater truth than that which Mr. D., the Irish 
 
 railway-contractor ((Eifenba^n5ltnterncf)nicv), spoke (aug'fvrec^fn) at (in) a public 
 meeting in (ju) Dublin, has never been uttered. 3, The words *he said' 
 
 should follow here; see S. 32, N. 5. 4, a great deal = much. 5, are 
 
 to get, erlangen foden ; for the construction see App. § 16 ; from, au^. 6, yet 
 I have always had the firm conviction. Render 'to have' here by \)i^i\\. 
 
 7, fc^U^t; 'industry', here glei^,m.; careful, j^veug ; exactness, ^flic^tcvfiitdnuj, f. 
 
 8, would establish (bcgn'inbcn) Ireland's prosperity (ffiot)lftaub, m.). 9, it is 
 true, jttjar; see S. 15, N. 3; 'to make', here tt)un; in advance, »ov>vdrtei. 
 10, Here follow the words 'for (ju, contracted with the def. art.) eventual 
 (ecentucll) success'. 
 
 Section 40. 
 
 ENGLAND'S^ TREES. 
 
 The principal native'^ trees are the^ oak, ash, elm, poplar, aspen, 
 birch, larch, alder, hawthorn, hazel, and willow. The beech, maple, 
 horse-chestnut *, Spanish chestnut ^ walnut ^ sycamore, acacia, weeping 
 willow, cedar, and Lombardy poplar have been introduced. 
 
 The moist climate of England is** eminently suited to the growth of 
 forest-trees, and we find that in ancient times the larger part of the 
 country presented one ^° vast scene of forest, as " the ^'■^ uncleared dis- 
 tricts of America do now. The " few scattered patches of natural wood 
 which remain, show " what was once the character of nearly the whole 
 country. — Hewitt, Physical Geography of England and Wales. 
 
 1, See S. 14, N. 3. 2, cin()cimifcf). 3, bic Sidic. The article 
 
 is repeated in this passage only when the subsequent noun is ot different 
 gender or number from the preceding one. 4, bie 9Jcptvi|lame. 5, bie 
 
 cdjte ^ajlanic. 6, bcr iBaHnupbaum. 7, (Sng(aut»5. 8, to be suited
 
 22 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 40. 
 
 to a thing, einer ©ac^e .^u'trd^Ud^ fein ; eminently, au^erorbcntlicf), which place 
 before ' jutvd^U(^'. 0, Use the gen. of the def. art. The definite article 
 
 should be used in all cases where an object is individualised or singled out from 
 other objects. 10, one — %,forest = an almost uninterrupted scene of forest, 
 aBalblatibfc^aft, f. 11, ' as . . . do now, ioie noc^ jje^t. 12, bie ungclicftteteu 
 
 SBalbgcgenbcn. 13, The — remain, ©ie iveni^en jetftrcut Ucgenben Uberrejie 
 
 natiirlid^er ®cf)6tje. 14, Say ' show the character which formerly belonged 
 
 almost to the whole country '. 
 
 Section 41. 
 
 THE INDIAN CHIEFS 
 I. 
 
 During the war in America, a company^ 0/" Indians attacked a small 
 body ^ of British troops *, and defeated ^ them. As ® the Indians had '^ 
 greatly the advantage in swiftness of foot, and were eager in the pursuit, 
 very few of the English escaped ; and those who * fell into their hands, 
 were treated with a cruelly of which there ^ are not many examples, even 
 in that country. 
 
 Two of the Indians came up ^° to a young officer, and attacked him 
 with great fury. As ® they were armed with battle-axes, he had no hope 
 of" escape. But, just at''^ this crisis, another Indian came up", who 
 was advanced in years, and was armed with a bow and arrows. The " 
 old man instantly drew his bow ; but, after ^^ having taken his aim at the 
 officer, he suddenly dropped his arrow, and'^ interposed between the 
 young soldier and his pursuers, who were about '^ to cut him to pieces. 
 The two Indians retired with respect. 
 
 1, !Deic SnbiancvtjauvtUug. 2, §aufe, m. 3, ©c^ar, f. 4, troops = 
 
 soldiers. 5, to defeat, in bie g(u(^t f^lagen. 6, When the conjunction 
 
 ' as' stands for ' since', it must be rendered by ' &«'. 7, had — foot, ben 
 
 Q3titten im fiaufen bebeutenb ubertegen waren ; and — pursuit = and eagerly pursued 
 the same. For the following clause see S. 27, N. 8, and say 'only few ot 
 the Britons succeeded to escape (baiiou'fommeu) '. I succeed, e3 gciiticjt mir. 
 8, n>el^e ben Snbianern in bie ^dnbe fxeten. 9, there are, «S gicbt. The sub- 
 
 ject 'eg', which must be placed immediately after the relative pronoun, should 
 be followed by the adverbial clause 'even in that country'. 10, to come 
 
 up to a person, ft^ einem nd^ern. 11, auf afJcttung. 12, at = in ; 
 
 crisis = critical (entfd)eibung^tto(l) moment. 13, to come up = to appear; 
 
 who — arrows = of advanced (covgefc^ritten) age and armed with bow and 
 arrows. 14, ber Silte ; to draw, fpannen ; immediately, nncerjiiflUc^, which 
 
 may be emphasized by being placed at the head of the clause (App. § 14). 
 
 15, Say 'after he had aimed (,^ielen) at (auf) the officer'; to drop, fallen (ajfeu. 
 
 16, and interposed, unb ftellte fi^. 17, to be about, im aSe^rift fein ; to cut 
 to pieces, jerftiirfeln ; with respect = respectfully. 
 
 Section 42. 
 
 THE INDIAN CHIEF. 
 II. 
 
 The ^ old man then took the officer by the hand, soothed him into 
 confidence by caresses, and, having conducted him to his hut, treated him 
 with a kindness which did honour to his professions'^. He made (S. 27,
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 42. 23 
 
 N. 4) him less a^ slave than a^ companion, taught* him the language of 
 the country, and instructed him ill ® the rude arts that were practised by 
 the inhabitants. They ^ lived together in /Ae most perfect harmony, and 
 the young officer, in '' the treatment he met with, found nothing to regret, 
 but® that (App. § 16) sometimes the old man fixed his eyes upon him, 
 regarded® him for some minutes with steady and silent attention, and 
 then burst into tears. 
 
 1, Say * Hereupon the old man seized the hand of the officer, sought by 
 caresses to gain his (bcffen) confidence, conducted him to (iii) his hut, and 
 treated', etc. 2, aicrfpied^utu^, f. 3, his. 4, The verb Ip^rcit, 
 
 to teach (old German leran, Gothic laisjan), etymologically signifies 'to cause 
 a person to know a thing'. This is the reason that it is in German most 
 generally used with two accusatives: that of the person and that of the thing; 
 as — (Sx Uijxt mic^ bic Sanbeei f p ra c^c, he teaches me the language of the 
 country. ?el)re mid) 3)eine Oiec^te! (I'lttljcr.) SBcr \)<xt bic^ folcfje ©treic^e 
 gelefjrt? (Ut)(anb.) 5, in — arts, in bcit ^evingcii ©cfc^irf tic^fciten ; to practise, 
 
 iiben; by, »ou ; 'inhabitants', here (Singeborncn. 6, They = both; together 
 
 = with one another, which place after ' harmony' (Sintvac^t, f.). 7, in — 
 
 with, in ber itjm guteil ivevbmbcn Set}aub(un3. Where must the verb be placed ? 
 Supply the word 'anbeveS' after • nothing'; 'to regret', here beflagen. 8, a(^. 
 9, Say 'regarded him silently/or a while (App. § 9, yl) with steady (uu^cnraubt) 
 attention*. 
 
 Section 43. 
 
 THE INDIAN CHIEF. 
 III. 
 In^ the meantime the spring returned, and the Indians again took 
 the field. The old man, who was still vigorous, and able to bear the 
 fatigues of war'', set out with them, afid ivas accompanied by his prisoner. 
 They marched above ^ two hundred leagues across the forests, and came 
 at length to * a plain, where the British forces ^ were encamped. The old 
 man showed his prisoner the tents at a distance ®: " There," said he, " are 
 thy countrymen. There is the enemy who '' waits to give us battle. Re- 
 member * that I have saved thy ^ life, that I have taught '" thee to conduct 
 a canoe, to arm thyself with " bow and arrows, and to surprise "^ the 
 beaver in the forest. What wast thou when I first took thee to my hut ? 
 Thy hands were those of an infant. They could neither procure ^^ thee 
 sustenance nor safety. Thy soul was " in utter darkness. Thou wast 
 ignorant of everything. Thou owest all things to me. Wilt thou, then '', 
 go over to thy nation, and take up the hatchet against us?" 
 
 1, Say 'Meanwhile it became spring'; to take the field, \x\i %d^ jict^cn. 
 2, bie >Kneggbcfc^ivcvbcn ; ' to set out', here ^ietjen. 3, more than. 4, to 
 
 = into. 5, forces = troops ; to encamp, fein Cagcr auf fc^lagcu. 6, v>on 
 
 rocitem, which place before the accusative. 7, who waits, bcr barauf laucvt ; 
 
 to give battle = to attack. 8, *3cbfiifc. 9, A. The definite article 
 
 is often used instead of the possessive adjective pronoun in cases where 
 the possessor is clearly seen from tlie context ; as — 
 
 3(^ ^abc bic Sebcr in ber Jpaub. I have the pen in my hand. 
 
 B. The possessor is often indicated by a personal pronoun in the 
 dative ease ; as — 
 
 3(^ and mil- bic ^anbc uwfdjcn. I will wash my hands.
 
 24 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 43. 
 
 The latter mode of construction must be applied in this case. 10, * I have 
 taught thee to conduct a canoe.' Read once more S. 42, N. 4, and mark 
 further that: that -which is taught is often expressed in the form of 
 a Supine, as in this instance. 11, We say 'mit ^feil unb SJogcn'. 
 
 12, xibevfarteii. 13, geuidf/ren ; sustenance, Sla^rung, f. 14, lag ill 
 
 i^iufteniig ge^iillt. 15, alfo; nation = people ; to take up = to seize. 
 
 Section 44. 
 
 THE INDIAN CHIEF. 
 IV. 
 
 The officer replied that ^ he would rather lose his own life than take 
 away that of his deliverer. The Indian, bending ^ down his (S. 43, 
 N. 9, A) head, and covering his face with both his hands, stood ^ some 
 time silent. Then, looking* earnestly at -his prisoner, he"* said, in a 
 voice that was at once softened by tenderness and grief: "Hast thou 
 a father?" "My father," said the young man, "was® alive when I left 
 my country V " Alas ! " said * the Indian, " how wretched ® must he be ! " 
 He paused ^" a moment, and then added : " Dost thou know that ^^ I have 
 been a father ? I ^^ am a father no more. I saw my son fall in ^* battle. 
 He fought at my side. I saw him expire. He was covered with wounds, 
 when he fell " dead at my feet." 
 
 1, that — deliverer = that he would rather die than kill his deliverer. See 
 App. §§ 28 and 30. 2, The two Participles in -ing are best rendered by 
 
 using the Imperfect. 3, stood — silent, unb fiaiib fo eiue SBeile fci^wcigenb ba. 
 
 4, Say *Upon this (.§icrauf) he looked', etc. 5, he — grief, unb ftagte 
 
 mit tton 3artU(!^feit unb ^^urnmer gebdmvftec ©timrne. 6, teat no^ am Sebeii. 
 
 7, J^eimat, f. 8, exclaimed. 9, unhappy. 10, jogern, i.e. to 
 
 hesitate. 11, baf 'Axxif i* eiuft 33atcv war? 12, Say ' But now I (App. § 14) 
 
 am it no more '. 13, We use here the def. art. 14, nie'beifaUeiu 
 
 Section 45. 
 
 THE INDIAN" CHIEF. 
 V. 
 
 He pronounced ^ these words with the utmost vehemence. His ' body 
 shook with a universal tremour. He ' was almost stifled with sighs, 
 which * he would not suffer to escape him. There ^ was a keen rest- 
 lessness in the eye, but no tears flowed to * his relief. At '' length he 
 became calm by degrees : and, turning towards the east, where the sun 
 had just risen, " Dost thou see," said he to the young officer, " the beauty 
 of that sky, which sparkles with prevailing day ? and hast thou pleasure 
 in the sight?" "Yes," replied the^ young officer, "I have pleasure in 
 the beauty of® so fine a sky." " I have none 1" said the Indian, and^*^ 
 his tears then found their way. 
 
 A few minutes after, he showed the young man a " magnolia, in full 
 bloom. "Dost thou see that beautiful tree?" said he, "and dost thou 
 look ^^ upon it with pleasure ? " " Yes," replied the officer, " I ^^ look 
 with pleasure upon that beautiful tree." " I have no longer any pleasure 
 in ^* looking upon it ! " said the Indian hastily ^^ and " immediately
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 45. 25 
 
 added: "Go, return to thy father, that" he may still have pleasure, 
 when (S. 18, N. 6) he sees the sun rise in^* the morning, and the trees 
 blossom in the spring ! " — Washington Irving. 
 
 1, spoke. Begin the clause with 'These words' (S. 7, N. 2). 2, Say 
 
 *A universal tremour shook (erfchuttevn) his body'. 3, (Sr erftitfte fafl untet 
 
 ben ©cufjern. 4, Say 'which he endeavoured (t)cmut)t fein) to suppress'. 
 
 5, His eyes (sing.) looked restlessly about. 6, \nx Sinbenntg feineg (Scfemerj^cg, 
 7, Say ' Gradually he became calmer'. The following passage requires alto- 
 gether a different structure in German. Say * He turned towards the east (jxc^ 
 gen Dfien wenbcn), where the sun had just risen. " Dost thou see the beauty 
 of the sky, which sparkles (evgtdnjen) with (»on) the breaking (an'bre($en) day 
 (2:agegUd)t, n.) ? and hast thou pleasure (Srcube, f.) in (an) the sight (5lnbUrf, m.)?" 
 he asked the young officer'. 8, the — officer, bicfer, to avoid a useless re- 
 petition. 9, of such a (S. 28, N. 9) sky. 10, 'and his', say 'whose'; 
 found their way, t)eroor'brac^en. 11, eine in »o((er S3lute ^e()enbe SWagnolie. 
 12, 'to look upon', here betvac^ten. 13, Say 'I rejoice in its splendour', 
 to avoid monotony. To rejoice in a thing, fic^ einer <Bad)S fj-cuen. 14, ' in 
 — it', may be briefly rendered by 'in the sight'. 15, rafc^. 16, 'and — 
 Go'. Begin a new clause here, and say : ' " Go," he added (fiipite ev bann ^inju)'. 
 17, auf ba^ (followed by the Pres. Subj. of f)aben). 18, be^ 9JJovgen3, App. § 9. 
 The verb 'sees', being the governing verb in both clauses, takes the last place. 
 See App. § 19. 
 
 Section 46. 
 
 RICE. 
 
 Rice forms the ^ chief subsistance of the people ^ in India, China, Japan, 
 and other eastern ' countries. Indeed, it supports * more persons than 
 any other article of food^ In Asia it (S. 2, N. i) is chiefly cultivated in 
 India, China, and ^ Ceylon ; in Europe : in Lombardy "^ (Italy) and Spain ; 
 in Africa : in Egypt ; in South America : in Brazil ; and in North America : 
 in * the CaroUnes and ^ Louisiana. Its " cultivation requires an" immense 
 quantity of moisture. It ^^ grows best in " fields which can be inundated. 
 Indeed ", the fact that it is usually sown upon watery soil makes it pro- 
 bable that the first Verse of the eleventh Chapter in ^^ Ecclesiastes refers 
 to Rice. In Egypt, for example, it is always sown while ^^ the waters of 
 the Nile cover the land, and when the floods subside", (S. 27, N. 8) it is 
 deposited^* in the mud. A strong spirit", called arrack, is distilled 
 from''° rice, and^' the straw is used for making plait for hats and 
 bonnets. — Nelson's Readers. 
 
 1, bvig t)aui>tfdc^Ud)ife 9kf)rung^mittcl. 2, Say ' of the inhabitants of India 
 
 (3nbien^)', etc. 3, cricntalif^. 4, erud()rcn. 5, 9lal)vunoi^avtife(, m. 
 
 6, Supply here the prep, auf, which should always be used to render the 
 English 'in' before names of islands. 7, in ber ?cmbavbei. 8, auf ben 
 •ftavolinen. 9, Supply the prep. in. 10, S)er OJci^bau, i.e. the cultivation 
 of rice. 11, an — of = extraordinary much. 12, The noun 'rice' 
 must here be repeated, since the pron. ' er' would refer to ' Oici^bau'. 13, auf. 
 14, 3a, bie S;()atfa(^e, ba^, etc. 15, im ^Irebiger SalcnuMiiiS ; to refer to some- 
 thing, fid} auf ctlta^ bejieften. The above mentioned passage reads as follows : 
 'Cast thy bread upon the waters: for thou shalt find it after many days'. 
 
 16, Say 'when the land is still covered by (lUMi) the waters of the Nile', 
 
 17, fid) suriirf'^ieticn, i. e. withdraw. 18, fi^ ab'lagcvn (see S. 4, N. 4, A) ; 
 'mud', here ®d)iamm, m. 19, ©pivitufii, m. 20, au^. 21, and — 
 bonnets, unb bag ©trot) gebrauc^t man jur Slnfevtigung von a)?dnncr;unb graueu()iiten.
 
 a6 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 47. 
 
 Section 47. 
 
 THE 'WHITE SHIP. 
 
 (a.d. 1 1 20.) 
 I. 
 
 King Henry I went^ over to Normandy with his son Prince (S. 10, 
 N. 2) William and a great retinue, to have the prince acknowledged* as 
 his successor by the Norman nobles, and to contract^ the promised 
 marriage between him and the daughter of the Count of Anjou. _ When 
 both * these things had been done with great show ^ and rejoicing, the 
 whole retinue prepared ® /o embark for the voyage home. 
 
 When '' all was ready, there came to the king Fitz-Stephen ^ a sea- 
 captain, and said : " My ^ liege, my father served your father all his life, 
 upon the sea. He steered ^^ the ship " with the gold boy upon the prow, 
 in 12 which your father sailed " to conquer England. I beseech you to 
 grant " me the same ofifioe. I *^ have a fair vessel in the harbour here, 
 called the White Ship, manned by fifty sailors of renown. I pray you, 
 Sire ^^ to ^^ let your servant have the honour of steering " you in the 
 White Ship to England." 
 
 1, to go over, ft^ bcgcben. The words 'to Normandy' (S. 19, N. 4) must be 
 placed after 'retinue'. 2, to have acknowledged, tjiilbigcn taffen. See S. 19, 
 N. 7. The words ' by (»ou) the Norman nobles' must be placed after ' prince'. 
 The nobles, bcr Slbel. 3, to contract a promised marriage, eiiKti »erabrebetcn 
 
 Jpctratgocrtvag ab'fc^licpcn. The pron. ' him ' should be turned by ' the prince', 
 to avoid ambiguity. 4, both — things = this. 5, ^omp, m.; rejoicing, 
 
 oieic greubenbciieiflungcn ; to be done, gefc^efien. 6, fl^ jur ^eimreife an'id)icfen. 
 
 7, Supply the adverb ' nun' after ' when'. 8, The subject and apposition 
 
 must be placed immediately after the predicate. Comp. App. § 15- 9» Say 
 
 ' My father^ O prince (giivft), served yours (use the second pers. sing, of the 
 posses, pron., and continue the address in the same person) his whole life long 
 at (juv) sea'. 10, (cnfen. 11, bag am aSovbcvtnle mit cinem gotbcnen ^naben 
 ccrjicrtc ©c^iff. 12, aiif. 13, sailed — England = sailed (ftc^ ein'f^iffcn) 
 
 for (ju) the conquest of England. 14, vertei^en. 15, Say ' I possess 
 
 in this ({)icri9) harbour a fair with fifty renowned (brtrafirt) sailors (©eeleutc) 
 manned vessel (gabrjeiig), called (App. § i) the White Ship'. Comp. S. 7, N. 3. 
 16, ^crr. 17, to let . . . have = to grant ; use the Supine. 18, ' to 
 
 steer', here = to conduct, gelcitcn. See S. i, N. 3. 
 
 Section 48. 
 
 THE WHITE SHIP. 
 II. 
 
 " I am sorry," replied the king, " that ^ my vessel is already chosen, 
 and that I cannot therefore sail with the son of the man who served - my 
 father. But ' the prince, with all his company, shall go along with you 
 in the fair White Ship manned by fifty sailors of renown." 
 
 An* hour or two afterwards, the king (App. § 15) set saiP in« the 
 vessel he had chosen, accompanied by other vessels, and'', sailing all 
 night with a fair and gentle wind, arrived upon the coast of England in 
 the morning. While ^ it was yet night, the ' people in some of the ships 
 heard a faint wild cry come ^° over the sea, and wondered what " it was.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 48. 
 
 27 
 
 1, Say 'that I have already chartered (bebingcn) a ship'. 2, Use the 
 
 Perfect, which is used in German to express an action or occurrence both 
 perfect and past, without reference to any other action or occurrence. 
 3, Render 'but' by jcbocf), which place after 'shall'; with — company, famt 
 fciiiem ijanjeii ©efolge; 'to go along', here fasten, to be placed at the end of the 
 whole clause, which construe accord, to S. 48, N. 6. 4, An — afterwards = 
 
 Soon after. 5, to set sail, ab'ffC(cln. 6, To place the qualifying 
 
 parts before the word, qualified, is one of the most striking peculi- 
 arities of German Grammar. This construction, called attributive 
 construction, has been explained in Section 7, Note 3 with respect to the 
 rendering of the Perfect (or Past) Participle qualifying a preceding noun; but 
 it must here be pointed out that it may likewise be used for rendering the 
 Present Participle qualifying a preceding noun (comp. S. 16, N. 4), and that 
 it is sometimes even suitable for translating short relative clauses. This, as 
 long as it is not too much indulged in, imparts to the construction great con- 
 ciseness and vigour, and avoids the too frequent use of relative pronouns, 
 which, contrary to English .construction, cannot be omitted in German. 
 (Comp. S. 16, N. 10.) 
 
 Examples. 
 
 When the fleet, fa'voured by the 
 finest weather, was about to set 
 sail, there arose a shout of joy, 
 proceeding from many thousands 
 of voices, and resounding mightily 
 from the shore. 
 
 The child, gently sleeping in his 
 mother's arms, was suddenly 
 roused by his father's noisy en- 
 trance. 
 
 The church, nuhicb ivas damaged 
 by the siege, is now being re- 
 stored. 
 
 Sl(g btc »on b«m fc^onficn SBettet 
 begunftigtc ^I'-'tte im Se^vifif irar 
 abjufcgcln, erf)ob fid) cin »ou wielcn 
 taufenb ©tinimeu crf(f)alUnber 
 Subelruf, 0011 bem baS Ufer mod^tig 
 icieber^adte. 
 
 S)a5 in ben ?lvmen bcr 9)?utter 
 fanft [c^lafenbc Jlinb iintrbe plo§; 
 Xx&l bnvc^ ben Idnnenben ©intritt be^ 
 i5atevg aufgcwerft. 
 
 ®ie buvd> bic ©ctagernng bef(^d; 
 biflte ^ird}e tt)irb jc^t uneber^erge^ 
 fiellt. 
 
 The clause 'in — vessels' requires the attributive construction, since the two 
 relative clauses, otherwise required, would make the rendering very lengthy 
 and monotonous. To avoid a useless repetition, translate the first noun ' vessel' 
 by ©c^iff and the second by ga^vi^eiicj, and connect the two clauses by the con- 
 junction unb. 7, The passage 'and — morning' may be briefly rendered 
 thus: and arrived, favoured (begunfiigt, App. § i) by a gentle (md§ig) wind, the 
 (am) next morning in England. 8, Say 'During the night'. 9, the 
 people = one, after which supply the conj. jcbod) ; in ships = upon some ships. 
 10, come — sea, lion ber ©ee fteviiber, which place after 'ships'; wild cry, 
 Slngftfc^vci. 11, wag biees ju bebcuten tja^e. 
 
 Section 49. 
 
 THE WHITE SHIP. 
 
 III. 
 
 The prince went ' aboard the White Ship with one hundred and forty 
 
 youthful nobles, among whom were eighteen noble ladies of the highest 
 
 rank. All ^ this gay company, with their servants and the fifty sailors, 
 
 made three hundred souls aboard the White Ship. 
 
 " Give three ^ casks of wine, Fitz-Stephen," said the prince, " to the 
 fifty sailors of renown. My* father the king has sailed out of the
 
 a8 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 49. 
 
 harbour. What ® time is there to make merry here, and yet reach Eng- 
 land with the rest?" 
 
 " Prince ^" said Fitz-Stephen, " before morning my fifty and the White 
 Ship shall overtake the swiftest vessel in attendance on your father the 
 king, if we sail at midnight." 
 
 1, to go aboard ship, jtd^ auf cin @d)iif bcgcben ; the young noble, bcr iunge 
 Slbelige; 'to be', here jic^ ttefinben; eighteen — rank, adytje^n bent I)o(I)ficn 9Jatige 
 anget)6rigc 2)amcn. The words 'aboard the White Ship' take the last place in 
 the clause. 2, This clause requires the following construction : With the 
 
 servants (S)tcnerf(^aft, f.) and the fifty sailors consisted the whole gay company 
 upon the White Ship of (au3) three hundred persons. 3, Construe ac- 
 
 cording to App. § 5. 4, Say 'My royal father'; has sailed out of = has 
 
 left. Supply the adverb foeben after the auxiliary. This will greatly improve 
 the rendering. 5, Also the two following passages require a different 
 
 construction ; say ' How long can we still make merry (fi^ giittic^ t^un) here 
 (to be placed before 'still'), if we will arrive in England at the same time 
 (guglcid)) with the others?' The words 'in England' should stand before the 
 verbs, which arrange according to App. § 18. 6, Say ' " If we sail at (urn) 
 
 midnight, O prince (see S. 27, N. 8), my fifty men (Seute) and the White Ship 
 shall nevertheless (bcnno(^) before the coming morning overtake the swiftest 
 ship in the service of thy royal father," replied Fitz-Stephen'. — 'The swiftest 
 — father' = the swiftest in the service of thy royal father standing ship. 
 (Comp. S. 48, N. 6.) 
 
 Section 50. 
 
 THE WHITE SHIP. 
 IV. 
 
 Then ^ the prince commanded to ^ make merry ; and the sailors drank 
 out the three casks ^wine, and the prince and^ all the noble* company 
 danced in the moonlight on the deck of the White Ship. 
 
 When at last she ^ shot ® out of the harbour of Barfleur, there "^ was not ^ 
 a sober seaman on ' board. But the sails were all set ^° and ^^ the oars all 
 going merrily, Fitz-Stephen at the helm. 
 
 The gay young nobles and the beautiful ladies talked, laughed, and 
 sang. The prince encouraged ^^ the fifty sailors to row harder '^^ yet, for " 
 the honour of the White Ship. 
 
 1, Hereupon. 2, that they (man) should make merry. The verb must 
 
 stand in the Present Subjunctive, as will be seen from §§ 28-30 of the App. 
 3, famt. 4, abelig ; company = retinue. 5, biefc^, to be placed after 
 
 ' When'. e, shot out of = left. 7, there to be, (tc^ bcfinbcn. 8, not a, 
 au(f> nic^t cin cinjigcv. 9, Say 'upon the ship'. 10, gefpannt. 11, Say 
 'and the oars moved (fic^ 6eit>egen) merrily (hiftig), whilst F.-St. stood at the 
 helm'. 12, an'treiben. 13, harder = faster. 14, bem iveipen ©cl^ifl 
 
 gu @§ren. 
 
 Section 51. 
 
 THE WHITE SHIP. 
 V. 
 
 Crash^! — a terrific cry broke from three hundred hearts. It was the 
 cry (S. 16, N. 10) the people^ in the distant vessels of the king had 
 faintly ^ heard on the water. The White Ship had struck upon a rock, 
 and * was going down 1
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 51. 29 
 
 Fitz-Stephen hurried " the prince into a boat with some few nobles. 
 " Push off," he whispered, " and row to ^ the land. It is not far, and the 
 sea is smooth ''. The * rest of us must die." 
 
 But ^ as they rowed away fast from the sinking ship, the prince heard 
 the voice of his sister Mary calling '" for help. He (S. 5, N. 2) never in 
 his life had been so good as " he was then He '^^ cried, in an agony : 
 " Row back at any risk ! I cannot bear " to leave her ! " 
 
 1, ^rac^!— e8 crI)oB fief) cin aug bvci l)imbcrt M(\}\m erfcf)af(cubcv frivd}tcvticf)cr Slngft^ 
 ferret. 2, the people = one ; in = upon. 3, faintly on the water, inwcdfommcn 
 innt ber Sec f)criibev. 4, itnb wax im ©infcn begvijfen I 5, to hurry into 
 
 a boat, [d)ne(l in cin SScct ftcicjcn laffcn ; with = and. 6, an, contracted with 
 
 thedef. art. 7, rufjig. 8, The — us = We others. 9, Render 'but' 
 by Jebod), which place before the adverb 'fast' (fcfencK) ; to row away, fi^ mU 
 ferncn. 10, See S. 16, N. 4 ; for, urn. 11, Say ' as at (in) this moment'. 
 
 12, The remaining passage will greatly improve by placing the clause ' Row — 
 risk' before the words 'He — agony'. In an agony, vcU ©celnuuujft ; at any 
 risk, foi^e eS, WaS eS n.icf(e. 13, When there is in a principal clause a transitive 
 verb, the object of which is contained in a following objective clause, which 
 often assumes the form of a supine (i.e. an infinitive with ,^n, see S, r, N. 2), 
 the object in the principal clause is frequently supplied by the pro- 
 noun c^f which then may be called the grammatical object. This is 
 more particularly the case when special emphasis is given to the verb contained 
 in the principal clause ; as — 
 
 He lijkedto hear good music. (St tiebtc c3, gute 2)infif JU fioren. 
 
 The deed proves, that she speaks the 2)ic Xljat b c » e i ft eg, ba^ fte bie 
 truth. S5?al)r(}eit fpvic^t. 
 
 Section 52. 
 
 THE WHITE SHIP. 
 VI. 
 
 They rowed back. When ^ the prince held out his arms to catch ^ his 
 sister, such ^ numbers lept in, that the boat was overset ; and in the same 
 instant the White Ship went * down. 
 
 Only two men floated^: a nobleman, Godfrey by name, and a poor 
 butcher of Rouen. By and by ® another man came swimming towards 
 them, whom '' they knew, when he had pushed aside his long wet hair, to 
 be Fitz-Stephen. 
 
 When he heard that the prince and all his retinue had ^ gone down, 
 Fitz-Stephen, with a ghastly face », cried : " Woe, woe to me !" and sank^** 
 to the bottom. 
 
 1, Supply here the conj. abcr. 2, auf'fangcn. 3, Say *so many 
 
 persons jumped into the boat, that it capsized'. 4, Supply the adverb 
 
 auc^ after the verb. 5, to Poat, auf bcm aBajfcr fc^lvimmcn ; of Rouen, and 
 
 gjmicn. 6, SXvx\ barauf; supply the adverb ncc^ before 'another'. He 
 
 comes swimming towards me, cv fommt auf mid) ju'gcfdiinommcn. 7, Say 
 
 'in whom they recognised Fitz-Stephen, when he', etc.; to push aside = to 
 throw back. 8, had gone down, bm Sicb cvlittcn. The auxihary verb (had) 
 
 may here be omitted, for : In subordinate clauses, the auxiliary verbs 
 (tiaben, fcin, and ivcvbcn) are often omitted for the sake of conciseness 
 and elegance; as —
 
 30 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 52. 
 
 2)af f!e mir g c n c nt m c n (h?urt>e), tfi That she ^was taken from me is my 
 mein gro^te^ 8etb. greatest sorrow. 
 
 9, with — face, tctcnbtcid^, adv. How must the words be arranged here ? 
 
 10, to sink to the bottom, in bie Xicfe f)inab'jinfcn. Supply the adv. bann after 
 the verb, which will establish a closer connection between this clause and the 
 preceding one. 
 
 Section 53. 
 
 THE "WHITE SHIP. 
 VII. 
 
 The other two clung ^ to the yard for some hours. At length (App. 
 §14) the young noble said faintly'^: "I am exhausted, <z«^ benumbed ^ 
 with cold, and can hold* no longer. Farewell, good friend. God pre- 
 serve (App. § 34) you! " 
 
 So ^ he dropped and sank, and of all the brilliant crowd ^ the poor 
 butcher of Rouen alone was saved. In '' the morning, some fishermen 
 saw him floating in his sheep-skin coat*, and got* him into their boat, — 
 the sole relater of the dismal tale. 
 
 For^ three days no one dared to carry'" the intelligence to the king ; at 
 length they " sent into his presence a little boy, who, weeping ^^ bitterly, 
 and kneeling at his feet, told him that the White Ship was '^ lost, with all 
 on board. 
 
 The king fell to the ground like " a dead man, and '' never afterwards 
 was seen to smile. — C. Dickens, A Child's History of England. 
 
 1, to cling to the yard, fic^ an cine (Sfgeljtange an'Hamntcm ; for some hours, 
 einige ©tunbcn lang ; for three days, brei Sage lang. 2, fraftlo^. 3, vor 
 
 Miti erjiaitt. 4, ' to hold', here fic^ ijaittn. 5, Say ' Upon this_ (Here- 
 
 upon) he fell into the water and sank to the bottom (in bie Xiefe t)inab'ftnten) '. 
 6, crowd = company. 7, In the morning, am 2)?orgcn. 8, sheep-skin 
 
 coat, ®d)afpelj, m. 9, nef^men ; the appositional clause 'the sole relater 
 
 (libcrBringer) of the dismal (tvaurig) tale (>Kunbe)' must be placed immediately 
 after the pronoun ' him', to which it belongs ; and mark that : The apposition 
 must always agree in nximber, gender, and ease with the noun or pro- 
 noun to which it belongs. 10, to carry an intelligence to a person, 
 (Sinem eine Sotfc^aft toerfiinben. See App. § 5. 11, man; into his presence 
 = to (ju) him, which place after 'boy'. 12, The Present Participle 
 may be used adverbially, as in English, to denote manner or state. 
 Say 'who told him kneeling and weeping bitterly, that', etc. 13, was 
 — board, ntit Tiann unb 2)?aug gefunfen fei. 14, like — man = as if dead 
 (icie tut), which place after ' fell.' 15, Say ' and never has one seen him 
 smile again'. 
 
 Section 54. 
 
 BARLEY (S. 3, N. 2). 
 
 Barley is (S. 2, N. i) now principally used ^ to make ' malt for ^ brewing 
 beer and distilling spirits. It serves, however ^ as food* in the form of 
 pearl barley, used ^ for thickening soups. It is also used ^ as food for 
 poultry. Barley'^ meal is used for fattening pigs and turkeys. Barley 
 straw furnishes us fodder * for cattle and horses. Barley is chiefly pro- 
 duced ® in the northern regions of Europe, in Central Asia, and in North
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 54. 3 1 
 
 America. It is much hardier " than wheat, resists " 5o^k heat and drought 
 better, and ^^ may therefore be raised from poorer soils. It '^ is said to be 
 the most ancient food * of (S. 3, N. 2) man. — Nelson's Readers. 
 
 1, Bcretten, see S, 19, N. 7. 2, for — spirits, jur SBierbraucrct unb 
 
 QSranntuieinbvenncvei, after which supply bavaiiS. 3, inbeffen. 4, 9Ja()vuiu3g= 
 mittel, n. 5, Say 'which one uses for thickening soups', jur Sierbicfung ber 
 
 @uptjcn. 6, bcnut^en and gcbraud)fn, which use alternately ; as — poultry, 
 
 al3 ^ii^nerfutter. 7, Say ' With barley meal one fattens (nidfien) pigs and 
 
 turkeys (tiirfifdic^u^ncv)'. 8, a3ie()=unb ^45ferbefutter. 0, gckut. Where 
 
 must the p. p. be placed here? 10, fraftig. 11, *to resist' here = to 
 
 bear, certvagen. Use the def. art. before the first noun. 12, Say ' and can 
 
 therefore be cultivated (au'baiicii) upon poorer soil'. Supply the adverb auc^ 
 after 'therefore'. 13, It is said to be, jtc fcU . . . fein. The verb foUcil 
 
 is frequently used to express an assertion of another person, when 
 it answers to the English 'it is said', 'it is reported', 'they say'. 
 
 Section 55. 
 
 THE SOLDIER AND HIS FLAG (ga^nc). 
 
 On seeing ^ a young Prussian soldier who was pressing his flag to his 
 bosom in the agonies of death, Napoleon said to his officers : " Gentle- 
 men ^, you see that a soldier has for his flag a sentiment almost ap- 
 proaching^ idolatry. Render* fitneral honours at once to this young 
 man. I regret that I do not know his name, that^ I might write to 
 his family. Do not take" away his flag; its silken folds will be an 
 honourable shroud '^ for him. — General Bourrienne*. 
 
 1, When the Present Participle is used in adverbial clauses of 
 time, it must generally, by the help of one of the conjunctions alo (when), 
 nac^bcm (after), inbem (while, whilst), and tvdl)vcnb (while, whilst), be changed 
 into a finite verb, i. e. one with a personal termination ; thus — 
 
 Hearing his opponent speak in this SlU er feinen ©cgncv fo fprcc^en {}6rte, 
 
 way, his features assumed an ex- iial)meu fcine 3ug2 ben Sluebnuf bcr 
 
 pression of contempt. i>erad)tiuuj an. 
 
 Having given his orders, the officer 91ac{)bem ev feine Sefeljle crteilt fjatte, 
 
 rode quickly away. vitr txx Dffmec fitucK von banncn. 
 
 ioo>^/w^ at me in a suppliant manner, Snbcm fie mid) bittenb unfal), gldnjte 
 
 a tear glittered in her eye. cine Xf)rdne in i()vem §lnge. 
 
 I saw it 'ivhen passing the house this 3c^ fa() i^i, aU ic^ t)cute 3}?orgcn beim 
 
 morning. Jjaufc voriibcrging. 
 
 Consequently, the above passage must be rendered thus : * When Napoleon 
 saw (bcmcvfcn) a young Prussian soldier who was pressing his flag to (an) his 
 (S. 43, N. 9, J) bosom (.'pcr,^) in the agonies of death (im ilcbcofampfc, which 
 place after 'flag'), he said to his officers': etc. 2, Say ' You see, gentle- 
 
 men'. 3, 'to approach' here = to border (an chvas? gvcn^cn). For the 
 
 construction see S. i6, N. 4. 4, Say 'Bury this young man (bungling) 
 
 without delay with military honours'. 5, that — write, nm . . . fdncibcn jn 
 
 finmcn. He writes to me once a month, 6v fc^vcibt cinmal nienatli^ an mid). 
 6, Supply the pronoun ibm (from him) after the Imperative. 7, Scidicni 
 
 tiid), n. ; ' for him ' must be rendered by the dat. of the pers. pron., which place 
 after the copula 'will'. 8, Scv (i)eneral 33currienne wcx -^rioatfetvctdv unl» 
 
 fvdtcvev SJicgvavl) Sflavcleong be^ @r|^cn.
 
 32 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION ^6. 
 
 Sectiofi 56. 
 
 OUR CULTIVATED' NATIVE ^ PLANTS. 
 
 Most ' of the fruits which grow on trees, such as our apples and pears, 
 have ^ been greatly ® improved and raised ® above their natural state by 
 grafting and other artificial means. 
 
 Of cultivated native plants, the chief are celery ^ parsley, the cabbage, 
 turnip, carrot, parsnips, and the hop. The onion is * a native of South 
 France, the lettuce of Greece, the radish of China, and the rhubarb, 
 now ^^ so largely used in pies and puddings, of Russia. Cress comes 
 from " Persia, spinach from some '^ part of Asia, and the Jerusalem 
 artichoke '^ from Brazil. — Hewitt, Physical Geography of England 
 AND Wales. 
 
 1, ttercbcU. 2, eiti'f)ctmifdt. 3, The clause 'Most — trees' maybe 
 
 briefly rendered by '©ie mciften ffiaumfvuc^te'. 4, Here follows the ad- 
 
 verbial clause * by grafting — means'. 5, bcbcutenb. 6, 'raised — state' 
 
 may be elegantly rendered by the p. p. 'cultivated' (wcrcbctt). 7, Say 'The 
 
 "principal cultivated native plants are', etc. 8, See S. 3, N. 2. I should 
 
 recommend to repeat the art. before each of the following six nouns. 9, is 
 a native of, jiammt <\\!i?>. 10, ' Now — puddings'. This elliptic clause must 
 
 be completed in German. Say 'which is now so largely (much) used in pies 
 (^ajlctcn) and puddings', 11, au3. 12, 'some', here ivgcnb ein. 
 
 13, @rbartif(^ocfe, f. 
 
 Section 57. 
 
 THE BEQUESTS 
 I. 
 
 An old avaricious English gentleman ^ had three sons, of whom one ' 
 was a good-natured but light-minded fellow. Whenever (S. i8, N. 6) he 
 fell * into any trouble, he excused himself on ^ the ground that ^ he was 
 seeing life. His prodigality, however, annoyed '' his father so much ^ that 
 he resolved to disinherit (S. i, N. 2) him. His friends interceded* in his 
 favour, but their efforts were in vain. 
 
 When the old gentleman '° felt his end approaching, he called his sons 
 together", and said to them: "I leave ^'^ to my son John my whole 
 estate ", and desire him '* to be frugal." John '^, in a sorrowful tone, as 
 is usual on such occasions, prayed heaven to prolong his father's life, and 
 give him health to enjoy the gift ^® himself. 
 
 1, S)ag ffievntaditni^. 2, ©ngfdnber. 3, Say 'the one'. 4, to fall 
 
 into trouble, in a5etlegenl)eit gcraten. 5, on the ground, bamit. 6, ba^ 
 
 cr bag Scbcn fenncn lerne. Comp. App. §§28 and 30. 7, ^erbrie^eti. See 
 
 S. 5, N. 2. 8, fetjr. 9, to intercede in a person's favour, ju gunjtm 
 
 eincr 5pcrfon fprec^cn. He interceded in my favour, ev fpvad) 511 tncincti gunften. 
 Supply the adverb jft^ar (it is true) after the verb. 10, S^txx. ; to feel one's 
 
 end approaching, fcin (iiibe :^cvan'nal)en fu{){en. 11, together, gu ftd). 
 
 12, 'to leave', here = to bequeath. 13, Scfi^uttg, f. 14, The con- 
 
 struction of the Infinitive with an Accusative, so frequently employed in 
 English as an imitation of the Latin and Greek, is unknown in German. 
 Such constructions must be rendered by a subordinate clause introduced by 
 the conjunction ba^; as — 
 
 I know him to be an industrious man. 3c^ \ueip, ba^ er cin flei^iger 3JIattn ifl.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 57. ^^ 
 
 See also App. § 34, and say 'and wish that he may be frugal (fvaifam)'. 
 15, This passage requires the following construction : ' As (irie) it is usual 
 (ubli^) on (hd) such occasions, John (App. § 15) implored heaven in (mit) 
 a sorrowful tone to prolong', etc. The noun ^immel is always used with the 
 article. 16, 35ermd(^tiii^. 
 
 Sec ft on 58. 
 
 THE BEQUEST. 
 II. 
 
 The father continued : " I leave to my son James my money *, 
 amounting^ to four thousand pounds^." "Ah, father," said* James, of 
 course in * great affliction, " may (App. § 34) heaven give you hfe and 
 health to enjoy the gift yourself" The*^ father, then addressing the 
 spendthrift, said: "As^ for you, Dick, you'' will never come to good; 
 you will never be rich. I leave you a shilling to (S. 19, N. 7) buy^ a 
 halter." "Ah, father," said Dick in a most' melancholy voice, "may 
 heaven give you life and health to enjoy the gift yourself!" — Anonymous. 
 
 1, 'money', here = ready money, barc^ ®clb. 2, to amount to some- 
 
 thing, fic^ auf ttWwS bctaufen. See S. 16, N. 4. 3, :^a§ ?J>flllt&, one pound 
 
 English money, never takes the sign of the Plural in German, and the same 
 refers to 'bif SJJrttf, a German coin corresponding to one shilling English. 
 4, said = exclaimed ; in = with. 5, Say * Upon this the father addressed 
 
 himself (fi^ tuenben) to (an) the spendthrift and said'. 6, As — Dick, 3Ba^ 
 
 iii) betrift, {Ri(f)avb. 7, Introduce this clause by the adverbial conjunction 
 
 fo, and see App. § 15 ; to come to good, ^u tfrnaS OJc^tetn fommcn. 8, The 
 
 German language, as a rule, reqiiires that the person for whose 
 benefit an action is performed, is clearly indicated. When this is 
 not done by a noun in the dative case, it is generally done by means 
 of the dative of a personal pronoun; as — 
 
 I will buy a hat. 3($ unfl mir ctncn ^itt fanfcn. 
 
 We have built a house. 9Biv i}cib(n nnei cin S^anS gcbaitt. 
 
 Supply, therefore, the necessary pronoun after the conjunction unt ; a halter = a 
 rope, ©tricf, m. 9, Render 'most' here by ' Ijcd^ft'. 
 
 Section 59. 
 
 WHEAT. 
 
 Wheat is the most valuable ' of all grains, because ' from it, chiefly, we 
 obtain the flour of which bread is made. In order to make^ flour, the 
 grains of wheat* are crushed''^ between stones in a mill. The crushed 
 mass is then separated ® into two parts, — bran '' and flour. Bran is the 
 outer husk of the grain, which is used (S. 4, N. 4) for * fattening cattle, 
 etc.® It'° does no harm, however, to mix the bran with the flour; the 
 mixture is more nourishing than the pure flour. The bran makes the 
 flour and the bread darker in colour ; but this is no disadvantage, for 
 brown bread is both" cheaper and more nourishing than white bread. 
 Bread ^^ is often artificially whitened by '^ the addition of alum and other 
 injurious substances. Wheat is" chiefly grown in France, Germany, 
 Austria, Southern Russia, (S. 46, N. 6) the British Isles, Australia, the 
 United States, Canada, Egypt, and Northern Africa. — Nelson's Readers. 
 
 VOL. IV. D
 
 34 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 59. 
 
 1, iuevboft; 'grain', here .^ornavt, f. 2, Say 'because it yields ({icfent) 
 
 us chiefly the flour for our bread'. 3, beveiteu. 4, Form a compound 
 
 noun of 'wheat' and 'grains' (Werner). 5, jermaf)ten. 6, fonbcru. 
 
 7, The prep, 'in' must be repeated before this and the following noun. 
 
 8, for — cattle, ;^ur a>ict)fitttcviin(^. 9, u. [. w., i. e. unb fo nieitcr. 10, It 
 — however, UbrigenS fc^abet eg ni(^t(?. 11, both . . . and, fowo:^( . . . afe auitj. 
 12, Say ' Bread receives (ev()a(ten) often an artificial whiteness through an 
 addition', etc. 13, When 'by' is equivalent to 'through', it must be 
 rendered by blird). 14, Say 'grows chiefly', in order to make the con- 
 struction more concise than it would be by using a p. p., which would have its 
 place at the end of the whole clause, and would thus make the construction 
 too lengthy. 
 
 Section 00. 
 
 OCCUPATIOTT OF THE ANGLO-SAXONS. 
 
 Fishing (S. 40, N. 9) was a principal occupation, owing ^ to the frequent 
 abstinences from flesh-meat, enjoined^ by (S. 59, N. 13) a superstitious 
 ritual ^ Eels were taken * in immense numbers in the marsh lands of 
 the Eastern counties ; salmon in the river Dee ; herrings along the shores 
 of Suffolk, Kent, and Sussex, in ® their annual migration ; while larger 
 species, as ® the whale and grampus '', were captured in the open sea. 
 Hunting and falconry were the field-sports ^ of the great. The beasts of 
 the forest or chase, which were protected by fines, and reserved^ for 
 privileged persons, were the ^° stag, roebuck, hare, and rabbit. The wolf, 
 {o^i, and boar might" be killed by ^^ any one with impunity, if (S. 27, 
 N. 7) found without" the limits of the chase or forest. The wild duck 
 and heron were the" common quarry. — Milner, History of England. 
 
 1, Say 'in consequence of the frequent fasting'. 2, an'cvbnm. See 
 
 5. 7, N. 3, B. 3, 9iitu(3, m. 4, 'to take', here = to catch; numbers 
 = multitudes, SJfenge, f. ; marsh lands, 2Rarfd3t3egenben. 5, in = upon. 
 
 6, as = like, nne. 7, bcr ©c^lvcrtfif^ (Delphinus orca). 8, g3ei\yiuj 
 iptngcn. 0, refcwiercn. 10, I propose to use the following seven nouns 
 in the plural and without the article, in order to avoid the frequent repetition 
 of the same. 11, Use the Imperf. of tihfcn. 12, by — impunity, oon 
 iebcvmaim ungejivaft. 13, without = outside, auf evfjalb. 14, Say ' the 
 booty of air. 
 
 Section 61. 
 
 TENDER \ TRUSTY, AND TRUE. 
 I. 
 
 (Extract from a Sermon preached to a congregation of children at Chicago.) 
 
 When 2 1 was in the Sunday-school, and had just begun to read about ^ 
 David, I * did not feel sure he ever was a real baby, and had to be fed 
 with a teaspoon ; or that he ever was a real little boy ® that ^ went to 
 school as I did, and played marbles ^ and had a peg-top ^ a jack-knife ^ 
 some slate pencils, ever ^^ so many buttons, and a piece of string ", all 
 in one pocket ; that '^ he ever had to try hard not to cry when he went 
 to school very cold ^' mornings ; or " that the teacher spoke sharp to him,
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 6 1. 35 
 
 when the little chap had tried ^^ his best to get '^ his lesson, and '^ did not 
 get it very well. 
 
 1, 3iivtfiif)(c!ib, ;;iweddffig unb trcu. 2, Say ' When I went to the Sunday- 
 
 school', and supply the adverb iicd) after the subject. 3, ukr. 4, Say 
 ' I could scarcely imagine, that he ever really had been a little child and had 
 to be fed with a teaspoon (unb niit ciiicm 2;()eeli3ffet ijahi gefiittcrt iverbcn miiJTfii)'. 
 By carefully reading §§ 29 and 30 of the Appendix, the student will see that 
 the verbs depending on the governing verb * imagine' must stand in the Perfect 
 of the Subjunctive Mood. According to S. 52, N. 8, however, the auxiliary 
 'fci' may be omitted in the clause 'that he ever really had been a little child'. 
 5, Suiige. The auxiliary 'fei' may again be omitted here. 6, that = who; 
 
 as I did =* like myself, which place immediately after the relat. pron. 
 7, ©d^iiffer. Remember that both this and the next clause are depending on the 
 relative clause 'that — did'; place, therefore, the verb 'played' after 'marbles', 
 and the verb 'had' after 'peg-top'. 8, Jtvcifel, m. 9, S'afc^cnntcfj'i.-v, n. 
 
 10, ever so many, cine Un^a^l vunt, i.e. no end of. 11, cin ©tiuf Siiibfabcn. 
 
 12, that — hard, ba^ er fic^ je ^cihe anfivengen muffen. 13, cold mornings, 
 
 an cincm fc()r fatten SWorgcn, which place after the subject. ' To go to school ', 
 j^ur (or in bie) @d)u(e gf^cn. 14, Say ' or that the teacher had ever scolded 
 
 (fdjcUen) the little fellow (93urfcf)c), when he had', etc. 15, to try one's 
 
 best, itc^ 9}?ii()C geben. 16, to get one's lesson = to learn one's lesson, 
 
 [cine l*cttion crlerncn. 17, Say 'and had not learnt it well', and supply 
 
 the adverb bed) (nevertheless) after the objective pronoun 'it'. For the 
 position of the verb see App. § 17. 
 
 Section G2. 
 
 TENDER, TRUSTY, AND TRUE. 
 II. 
 
 But you * know, ministers "^ have to find out all about such men as 
 David ; and I have found out enough to ^ make me feel sure he was 
 once a little boy, j'usl like one of you ; that he had * to learn verses, like 
 you; and didn't like (S. 20, N. 2, A) it, like you; and that he did not 
 like to go to bed early, or to get up early, like you. 
 
 I rather ^ fear that, in the summer, he " ate green apples, unripe melons, 
 hard peaches, and sour plums, as '' you do ; and ^ got sick, and was very 
 sorry, and had to take® medicine, as you do; that he said he would 
 (App. § 28) never do it again, and that he^° then never did do it again, 
 as '* I hope you will neither. 
 
 1, Use the 2nd pars, pi., and after the verb supply the adverb 'ja', which 
 will be equivalent to the English ' I am sure'. 2, bie l^fan•el■, before which 
 
 supply the conj. bag. Have to = must; to find out, au^'finbig madden; all — 
 David = all (S. 3, N. 7) that relates (fid) be,^iet)cn) to (auf) such men as David. 
 3, Say 'to (S. 19, N. 7) be convinced, that', etc. Just — you, luic il)r. 4, The 
 auxiliaries 'to have' and 'to be' followed by the infinitive of another verb, 
 must generally be rendered by the auxiliary verb of mood 'miiffcn'; as — 
 I have to do it, 3d) ntu§ f(? t()un. 5, \<x\i, adv.; see S. 5, N. 2. 6, The 
 
 subject 'he' must immediately follow the conj. 'that'. 7, as you do, \c>\t 
 
 iliv. 8, that he became (iverbcn) ill; 'and — sorry', say 'felt (cmvfiubcn) 
 
 bitter repentance'. 9, 'to take', here cin'nctimcn. 10, Here follows 
 
 the pron. ' it'. 11, ivie i()r eg f)cftcntlid^ and} nid)t uncbcv t(}un irerbet. 
 
 D 2
 
 ^6 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 6^. 
 
 Section 63. 
 
 TENDER, TRUSTY, AND TRUE. 
 
 III. 
 
 Now', just here I was trying to see what ^ sort of boy David was when 
 he grew ' bigger ; and, when I shut my eyes, and so tried * to see // all 
 clearly, I heard a noise right ^ under my study window. This was® 
 about'' four o'clock, Friday afternoon; the schools were out, and the 
 children running home ^ I turned my head to see what was the matter ', 
 and then (App. §14)! saw what I want ^° to tell you. About ten boys 
 were standing together ^^ All at once a big boy knocked ^^ a little boy ^' 
 down, and rolled him in the snow '*. The little boy got up '^ and said : 
 " What*® did you do that for?" Then^' the big boy again approached 
 the litde boy**, and I believe ** he would have knocked him down again", 
 had not the little boy *' walked sobbing away ^^ towards home. 
 
 1, §ict hioflte i^ nun fcfien. 2, what sort of, tt'aS fur ctn. 3, ircvben. 
 
 4, \\^ bcmuf)en. 5, just under the window of my study. 6, Here 
 
 follow the words ' on Friday afternoon'. 7, Supply here the prep. 'at', 
 
 urn. 8, The English 'home', after a verb denoting motion, must be 
 
 rendered by itacft .i^nilfp, and 'at home', after a verb denoting rest, by jll 
 Ji^rtllfc. 9, the matter is, C§ flifbt, verb impers. Use the Present of 
 
 the Subj., according to App. § 32. 10, The auxiliary verb of mood 
 
 'tPOUcil' expresses wish and want; as — 
 
 SfBag tvolfen Sie? What do you w/V^? 
 
 3u twcnt ivoUen @tc? Who is it you nvant? 
 
 11, ncfcen einauber. 12, to knock down, ju fflobcn fcf)tageit. 13, The 
 
 noun 'boy' need not be repeated here. 14, Supply here the adverb 
 
 'about' (umf)cr). 15, to get up, auf ftef)cn. 16, What . . . for = Why. 
 
 Use the 2nd pers. sing, 17, Upon this, S. 44, N. 4. 18, Supply here 
 
 the conj. ba§. Read carefully § 36 of the App., and construe accordingly. 
 Use the Pluperfect Subj. in both clauses, and observe that the verb gefien 
 always requires the auxiliary fein. See S. 29, N. 3. 19, noc^ eininal. 
 
 20, away towards home = home. 
 
 Section 64. 
 
 TENDER, TRUSTY, AND TRUE. 
 
 IV. 
 
 " There," I said, when I had seen that, " I know what David never 
 did do : he (S. 5, N. 2) never struck a boy that * was no match for him ; 
 he never was a coward like that big boy ; for he ^ is a coward to ^ strike 
 a small boy so; and those* others are not the boys (S. 16, N. 10) they 
 ought ^ to be, to ® stand by and see it done." I saw such '' a thing in 
 a picture once, which was called the Wolf and the Lamb. A great, cruel 
 boy ^ meets a small, delicate lad * who has lost his father, and stands over 
 him with *° his fist doubled, just as I saw that boy sland under my study 
 window. I think" if- any** boy in this church were *^ to see that 
 picture, he would instantly say *^ : " What a shame to use *" a boy so 
 who is not your match \"
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 64. 37 
 
 1, that— him, bev ifjm iud)t geimdjfeu war. 2, the pron. 'he' is used 
 
 demonstratively in this clause. 3, Say 'because he can strike a small 
 
 boy so'. 4, those = the. 5, To render 'ought', use the Imperf. 
 
 of 'foUeit'. 6, Say 'because they stand by (t)abci'flfl)cn) and look at it 
 
 (eg mit an'fctjcn) '. 7, such a thing, ctivas Slefjnli^ee. The adv. ' once ' must 
 
 stand immediately after the verb. 8, S3ubc, m. 9, lad, 58uvfd)e, m. 
 
 The clause 'who — father' may be briefly rendered by the adj. 'fatherless', 
 which place before 'lad'. 10, ittit gcbaUtcv g^uft. 11, When the verb 
 
 'to think' is used in the meaning of 'to be of opinion', it must be rendered 
 by '(^(aiibcit', and when it is used in the meaning of 'to be engaged in 
 thinking', by 'Deiifcil'. 12, The conj. 'if' must always be rendered 
 
 by'rociin'. 13, any boy = any (iii^enb) one of you. 14, Render the 
 
 words 'were to see' by the Imperf. Subj. of fel)cn. 15, aus'nifeit. 16, to 
 use = to abuse, mi^'fjanCetu. 
 
 Section 65. 
 
 TENDER, TRUSTY, AND TRUE. 
 
 V. 
 
 Once I read in the Life ^ of Dr. Channing, who was one of the best 
 men that ever (jc) lived ^ (a ^ great deal better than David, because he 
 lived ^ in a better lime), what he once did, when he was a ^ boy and saw 
 a* thing like that. Little Channing was one of the kindest'' and most 
 tender-hearted boys I * ever heard of. I will tell you a story to show 
 you how ^ kind he was, and tender, and true. One day he found in a 
 bush a nest full '" of young birds just out of the shell. Children, did ^' 
 you ever see a^'^ nest full of birds just out of the shell.? — little tiny", 
 downy things ", with ^^ hardly more feathers than an oyster ? The birds 
 which William Channing found, were just of that kind; and when he 
 touched them with his fingers, and felt how soft and warm they were, 
 they all began to gape '^ very ''' much as you do when I preach '^^ a very 
 long sermon. 
 
 1, 8fbcneifcefc{)rcibiin9, f. The Genitive relation must be expressed by the 
 Gen. of the def. art. See S. lo, N. 2. Proper names are not inflected 
 when they are preceded by an article and a common name. — Dr. 
 iUiiilliam CSdcrl) liljaiiuing, bcrul)mtcv ammfanifc^cv @ciftlid)a- uut) SdniftficKcr, 
 wurbe ini 3a()ie 1780 511 51eivvevt auf 0J()cbc;36lanb cicbcven unb ftarb im 3a()rc 1842 
 j\u 23cnuini\ton in 93frmi.Mit. "^01110 j^ablrcidieu aiu^ijc^eidincten Sdniftcii t)abcn [eincu 
 yiamcu auc^ in cuvcvai|"d)cn Jtvcifcu bcviibmt C5cmad}t. (Sclcvibisc, bciTcii !8cfamit[d)aft cr 
 mad}tc, o.\i cr im 3al)re 1822 (Siujiaub befudjtc, n\n- fo fctjr »cn il)ut ciiujcuommcn, ba^ 
 cr augricf : ' He has the love of wisdom, and the wisdom of love !' 2, Use 
 
 thePerfect. See S.48, N. 2. 3, a great deal = much. 4, lived in = belonged 
 to, au'c\c()P«n, which governs the dat. 5, Substitute the adverb nod) for 
 
 the indef. art. 6, See S. 64, N. 7. 7, best and most tender-feeling. 
 
 8, Say 'of whom I have ever heard'. 9, Say 'how good, tender and true 
 
 he was'. 10, sell i^cii evft focbeu <mA bcr ©djalc gcfvcduucu i?et^clu. 11, Use 
 the Perfect. 12, To avoid repetition, turn the words ' a — shell' by 
 
 'such (fo) young little birds', and render Mittle birds' by forming a diminutive 
 of a^ogei. 13, j^avt. 14, 3)incicrd)cu. 15, Say ' almost as naked as 
 
 an oyster'. 16, 'to gape', here bcii ®d)uabcl aiiffpervfit. 17, very — do, 
 
 fdjt TOie i^r ben SDhuib auffrcvvt. 18, to preach a sermon, cine »:prfbic\t 
 
 imltcn.
 
 3^ GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 66. 
 
 Section 66. 
 
 TENDER, TRUSTY, AND TRUE. 
 
 VI. 
 
 Well, little (S. lo, N. 2) Channing knew ^ the birds did not gape because 
 he preached a long sermon, but (S. 6, N. 10) because they were hungry. 
 So 2 what did he do? He ran straight^ home (S. 63, N. 8), got* some 
 nice soft crumbs of bread, and fed the little birds with them (S. 4, N. 5, B) ; 
 and ' after that he fed them regularly every day after ® having come home 
 from school. But'' one day (S. 19, N. 2), when he went to* the nest, 
 there it lay on the ground, torn and bloody, and the Uttle birds all dead ; 
 and the father-bird ^ was crying ^° on a wall, and the mother-bird " was 
 crying on a tree. Then little Channing tried ^'^ to tell them that he did 
 not kill '3 their poor young brood ; that " he never could do such a mean, 
 cruel thing as that, and that ^^ on the contrary ^^ he had tried to feed 
 them. But it was no use; the little birds could not understand him, 
 and ^■^ kept on crying ; and at last he sat down, and wept bitterly. 
 
 1, Supply here the conj. baf. 2, Say 'What did he therefore (a(fo) do?' 
 
 3, firacfg. 4, ()c>(tc ftcf). 5, and — that, unb i^cn ba an. 6, fo bafb 
 
 er »on ber ©c^utc nac^ -ipaufe gefommen Mwx. 7, This passage will read more 
 
 elegantly by beginning with the conj. 'when', which must be followed by the 
 subject 'he'. 'But' should then be rendered by jebcd), which takes the third 
 place. 8, nac^. 9, bag 2)?dnn(^cn. 10, januncrii ; on = upon. 
 
 11, bag 9Bei6c^eu. 12, fic^ bemu^en. 13, Use the Pert". Subj. according 
 
 to App. §§ 28 and 30. 14, ba§ er cine fo gcmeine Oranfamfett nie fccgctjeii 
 
 fontie, 15, In subordinate clauses, the subject stands in most cases 
 immediately after the conjunction or relative pronoun. 16, im 
 
 ©egeuteit. See S. 15, N. 3. 17, unb jammeiten inciter. 
 
 Section 67. 
 
 TENDER, TRUSTY, AND TRUE. 
 
 VII. 
 
 Now ^ this was the sort of boy Channing was ; and I was going ^ to 
 tell you that (S. ^(), N. 15) one day he heard of a big boy beating (S. t6, 
 N. 4) a little one ^ like that bad boy * under my window. Channing was 
 a little boy ; he was a little man when he was full grown ^; but then he 
 had a big soul. I was going ^ to say he had a soul as big as a church ; 
 but indeed ® his soul was bigger than all the churches in ^ the world ; — and 
 when he heard of that * cruel boy, who was ever ^ so much larger than 
 himself, he went right up to him, and said : " Did i" you strike that litde 
 boy ?" " Yes, I did 'i; and what then ?"— " Then," said Channing, " you 
 are a coward, because he was no match for you ; and now I am going ^ 
 to whip 12 you for doitig it." Because he had a big soul, and though he 
 was a small boy, he " went in, and fought for the right. That was the 
 only time he '* ever fought in his life. IBut ^^ I, standing in ^« this pulpit, 
 honour him more for it than if he had (App. § 36) never ^' fought 
 at all.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 6y. 39 
 
 1, Say 'This was (supply here the adv. a(fo = now) little Channing's cha- 
 racter'. Gomp. S. 12, N. 2. 2, The auxiliary verb of mood 'tooUfll' 
 corresponds to the English 'to be going' or 'to be on the point', followed 
 by the infinitive of another verb. Gomp. S. 6, N. 4. 3, ' One' following 
 an adjective or a pronoun, and representing a noun understood, is not to be 
 translated; as — Which pen shall I give you, — this one or that one? SBcld^e 
 geber foil id) S^ncn gebcn, — biefe ober iene? 4, ber bofe 53ube. . 5, full 
 grown, ait^^ewac^fen. 6, in ber X^at, which place after the verb. 7, Render 
 ' in the' by the gen. of the def. art. 8, Use the dat. of the demonstr. pron. 
 ber; 'boy', here 93 ube. 9, ever so much, tc^ ircif nic^t me »iel. 10, Use 
 the Perfect according to S. 48, N. 2. 11, I did, ba^ l}abc ic^ get^an. 
 12, pdjtigen. 13, ' to go in', here in ben >K'anH)f tveten. 14, he — life, 
 in feuiem l*eben, ba^ er fic^ [c^Ukj. 15, Place the conj. 'but' after the subject, 
 and, for the sake of emphasis, repeat the pron. ' I' after the rel. pron. ' ber', 
 which must introduce the next clause. 16, ' in ', here auf. 17, never 
 ... at all, nic. 
 
 Section 68. 
 
 TENDER, TRUSTY, AND TRUE. 
 VIII. 
 Boys, I like peace; I like (S. 51, N. 13) to see you play like good, 
 true-hearted little men \ Never " fight if you can help ^ it ; but * never 
 strike a boy who is no match for you, and never stand ^ by quietly whilst 
 another boy is doing (S. 32, N. 11) it. Tender, trusty, and true, boys; 
 tender and true. King David, King Alfred, George Washington, William 
 Channing, Theodore Parker ®, more great men than I can name, were all 
 of that sort ; and'' they came out right, because they went in right. Brave 
 as lions ^^ true as steel, with kind ^ hearts for doves, ravens, and sparrows, 
 they (App. § 14) would never tear^° birds' nests, or sling stones to*' kill 
 birds, because they felt as Jesus did when he said : " Blessed are the 
 merciful." — Rev. Robert Collyer, The Life that now is. 
 
 1, 'man', here ©nifd)e. 2, The adverb cannot precede the Imperative 
 
 in German. 'To fight', here jld^ fd'lagen. 3, to help = to avoid. 
 
 4, Render 'but' by jebod), which place immediately after the verb. 5, to 
 
 stand by quietly, niupig babei ilet)en. 6, X^ccbcrc ^sarfer, bevii()nitev 
 
 amcrifanifd)cr (^kijilic^ev unb ®elel)vter, irnrbe tm 3al)re 18 10 ju i'eriui^tcn in i)iaiia; 
 (^nfett^ geboren unb jiarb im 3a[)re i860 i\\ glcrcnj, iro cr fi(^ fcinev ®efunbl}eit nn-cjen 
 aufliiclt. X)ni(^ feine aui?i^e^eid)nete @elel)rfamfcit, v^vcpe SBidenefvaft nub [eltcne '^Uw. 
 fd^enticbe ubte eu auf feine Seiti'^encffen einen bcbentenben (Siiifin^ auS, namentlid) abev in 
 Sejug auf bie 33efreiunc\ bcv ^2flaven, beren (2a(^c cr eft ntit ®efat)r feine^ Seben^ unb 
 feinev grei(;eit uerteibigte. 7, and — right, unb fie trateu al3 (Sieger ami bem 
 
 ^ampfe ()Cv\?or, ^eil fie fiir bai3 Oiedit in ben .ftampf tvatcn. 8, Use the noun 
 
 'lions' with the def. art., but not the noun 'steel'. 9, ' kind' here = feeling. 
 10, ^evftoren. 11, See S. 19, N. 7, and supply the prepositional adverb 
 
 bamit before the object. 
 
 Sedioji 69. 
 
 DESPATCH OF BUSINESS'. 
 
 You^ must beware^ of stumbling over a propensity, which easily be- 
 sets * you from ^ the habit of not having your time fully employed ''. 1 
 mean "^ what the women very expressively * call dawdling '. Your motto
 
 40 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 69. 
 
 must be " Hoc age." Do instantly whatever ^° is " to be done, and take '^ 
 the hours of recreation after business ^^ and not before it ". When a 
 regiment is^^ under march, (S. 27, N. 8) the rear is^® often thrown into 
 confusion, because the front do " not move ^^ steadily " and without inter- 
 ruption. It^° is the same thing with business. If^^ that which is first in 
 hand is not instantly, steadily ^^ and regularly despatched '^^, other 2* things 
 accumulate, till affairs ^^ begin to press all at once, and no human being 
 can *^ stand the confusion. — Sir Walter Scott, Letters to his son. 
 
 1, @(J)ncf(e ©efcfcaft^crlebigung. 2, Use the 2nd pers. sing. Personal 
 
 and Possessive Pronouns used in letters, and referring to the person 
 addressed, require a capital initial in German. 3, to beware of 
 
 stumbling over a propensity, itrf) t)ttteti, ciuem Jpaiigc ju wcrfaKcn. See S. i, N. 3, 
 and S. 34, N. 10. 4, bef^teic^en. 5, from the habit, wcnu ^a ^xd) 
 
 baran gcwcfjnfi. 6, 'to employ', here au^'fudm. 7, Supply here the 
 
 pronominal adverb bamit. 8, bejeid^tienb. 9, Scitvergeubung. 10, )va$. 
 11, is to be done = must be done. See S. 62, N. 4, and S. 2, N. i. 12, choose 
 your hours of recreation ((Sv^oUmggjiunbc, f.). 13, business = work, which 
 
 use with the def. art. 14, it = the same. 15, to be under march, 
 
 auf bcm SJiarfc^ begvijfen fcin. 16, to be thrown in confusion, in Unorbnung 
 
 gcratcit. 17, The verb must be in the singular after a collective 
 
 noun in the singular. 18, 'to move', here fovt'mar[c{)icvcn. 19, glci^s 
 md^ig. 20, Say 'And so it is likewise (auc^) with business (Slrbeit)'. 
 
 21, if— hand,aBcnn bie gevabe vcrlicgenbc Slvbeit. 22, ftctig. 23, ertebigeii. 
 24, other — accumulate, fo l)dufeu fic^ iuj»infd)en anbere ©a^cn an. 25, bie 
 
 2lvbeiten, after which place the words 'all at once', aKe auf cinmat. For the 
 place of the verbs see App. § 19. 26, can — confusion, bev aSeittiivviin^ 
 
 gewaci^fen ijt. 
 
 Section 70. 
 
 ON PERFUMERY ^ 
 
 I. 
 The ' exquisite pleasure we enjoy from the smell of sweet flowers is ' 
 alone sufficient to account for the love of perfumery. Flowers pass 
 away * so quickly that we naturally desire to preserve their sweetness ^ 
 as " long as we can, and in this our perfumers succeed "^ admirably. The 
 perfume " of most flowers depends upon an oil, which ® is peculiar to the 
 plant, almost every sweet-scented ^" plant having its own peculiar oil ; 
 and, what is of'^ more importance: these oils belong to a class called ^^ 
 essential or volatile, because they become ^^ volatile when " heated. 
 
 1, Ueber $arfiimericn. 2, Say 'the great enjoyment which the smell 
 
 (35uft, m.) of sweet (trcl)tvic(^enb) flowers affords (gcwdfjren) us'. Place the 
 pron. ' us' immediately after the rel. pron. 3, is — perfumery = explains 
 
 sufficiently (jur ©eniige) our love for perfumery. 4, to pass away, verwelfen. 
 
 5, 2Bc()(geru(i^, m. 6, as — can, fo lange mt mcglic^. For the position of 
 
 the verbs see App. § 19. 7, to succeed, getingcu, v. intr. (used with fein), 
 
 governs the dative of the person ; as — 
 
 He succeeds admirably in this. 2>ieg gelingt i'^m sortrcffiid^. 
 
 Construe the above clause accord, to the preceding example ; perfumer, ^av; 
 fiimeuv. 8, 'perfume', here = scent, 2)uft, m. 9, The relat. clause 
 
 'which — plant' is best rendered by the attributive construction, as explained 
 in S. 48, N. 6; peculiar, eigentum(id&. 10, odorous, »rpl)lricd)enb ; its own
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 70. 4I 
 
 particular oil, t^r befonbeve^ £)I. The clause 'almost — oil' must be con- 
 strued accord, to S. 30, N, 4. 11, of — importance = still more important. 
 12, Say ' which one calls essential (dtljevifd)) or volatile (pdjtig) oils'. 13, to 
 become volatile, fid) vevfliidjtiaeu. 14, when heated = when they are heated 
 (erwurmen). Comp. S. 27, N. 7. 
 
 Scctio7i 71. 
 
 ON PERFUMERY. 
 II. 
 
 The common or fixed ^ oils, on the contrary, stich as olive ^ or linseed- 
 oil, do not evaporate. This * may be easily illustrated, thus : If a piece 
 of writing-paper be touched* with a fixed oil or grease, (S. 27, N. 8) it 
 leaves" a stain, which ^, upon being held before the fire, will not disappear. 
 
 Now ^, if any ^ plant has a peculiar smell or taste, it is * generally found 
 that its essential oil is the cause of this (S. 4, N. 5, B). Consequently ^ 
 if we extract this, we really obtain " the essence. — Prof. Ascher. 
 
 1, fcfl ; on the contrary, {)iiH5e9eu. See S. 15, N. 3. 2, as olive or linseed- 
 oil, line ba^ DliiHU obev !^einfamencl. When two corapound. nouns which have 
 the last component in common follow each other, the last component is 
 generally omitted in the first noun, which is connected with the next one by 
 means of hyphens. — To evaporate, jid) »crfi[iic^tic5en. 3, ©ie^ Id^t (ic^ 
 
 auf folgenbe JBeife Iciest beiceifen. 4, Turn the Passive Voice here into the 
 
 Actice Voice by means of the pron. man, as explained in S. 4, N. 4. 5, ' to 
 
 leave', here = to leave behind; it = this. 6, The passage ' which — dis- 
 
 appear' may be briefly rendered, thus: 'which does not disappear before the 
 fire'. See S. 32, N. 11. 7, Reverse the order of the first two words in 
 
 this clause. 8, any = a. 9, Consequently = therefore, alfo, which 
 
 place after the subject 'we'. 10, to obtain, gciinmim; the essence (as a 
 
 Nom.), bcr bcv ^paiijc figcutumlic^c S53ol)k3fi-in^. 
 
 Section 72. 
 
 ON INSTINCT". 
 
 The'* following most curious instance of a change of instinct is 
 mentioned by Darwin. The bees carried * over to * Barbadoes and the 
 Western Isles ceased ® to lay up any honey after the first year, as '^ they 
 found it not useful to ihevi. They found the weather so fine, and the 
 materials "^ for making honey so plentiful, that they quitted ^ their grave, 
 prudent', and mercantile" character, became exceedingly profligate and 
 debauched ", ate ^^ up their capital, resolved to work no more, and " 
 amused themselves by flying about the sugar-houses and stinging the 
 blacks. The'* fact is, that^^ by"' putting animals in difi"erent situations ", 
 you may ^"^ change, and even reverse, any of their original propensities. 
 Spallanzani ^' brought ''■'^ up an eagle upon -' bread and milk, and fed a 
 dove on " raw beef. — Rev. S. Smith. 
 
 1, Uber ben tierifcfcen 3iijtiuft. 2, This clause requires a different render- 
 
 ing; let us say ' Darwin gives the following most (()C'cl?)l) curious example of a 
 change of the animal instinct'. The last noun requires the def. art., as explained
 
 42 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION J2. 
 
 in S. 3, N. 2. 3, to carry over, '^inubevkingen. The Perfect Participle 
 
 qualifies the noun ' bees'. According to S. 7, N. 3, the words ' carried — Isles ' 
 may be rendered either by the attributive construction or by forming of them 
 a relative clause. I venture to propose the use of the attributive construction 
 as the more elegant of the two modes of rendering, and more especially in 
 order to avoid a repetition of subordinate clauses. 4, When the pre- 
 
 position *to', in connection with a verb denoting motion, stands before the 
 names of countries, towns, islands, etc., it must be rendered by 'ncid)'. 
 5, Here follow the words ' after — year'; to lay up honey, einen 35orvat con 
 i^onij au'fammeln. 6, See 8. 41, N. 6 ; it = this; not useful, nic^t mc^r ijon 
 
 9lu^en. 7, materials — plentiful, SKatevialicn jur ^onigbcrcituug in fc{(^em 
 
 Uberfiuffe vci-tjanbcn. 8, auf gebeii. 9, prudent = cautious. 10, mers 
 
 !antiUf(^. 11, itnmd^ig. 12, to eat up, auf je^reu. 13, unb [\i) 
 
 bavan evgoltctt. For rendering the passage 'by — blacks' see S. i, N. 3. To 
 fly about, umfd^»t>dr'mcn, v. tr. 14, The — is, @g \\\ dm auSgemac^te X{}atfa^e. 
 15, Here follows the subject 'you' (comp. S. 66, N. 15), which translate by the 
 impers. pron. matt. 16, by — animals, buv(^ iBevfe^ung bet Xiexe, i.e. by a 
 
 removal of the animals. In = into; different = other. 17, Here follows 
 
 the object and its attributes, ' their original (angeborcn) propensities (Xrieb, m.) '. 
 18, may = can ; reverse, in entgegcngefe^te {Ri^tuugen teiten. 19, S a j a r 
 
 ©paltanj^ani, Berfi^mtec itatienifd^er Slnatom unb Dlaturfotfc^ev, geb. 1729,+ 1799. 
 20, to bring up, gvo^ jie^en. 21, M. 22, ntit. 
 
 Section 73. 
 
 PETER THE GREAT AND THE MONK. 
 
 Peter the Great ordered ^ many foreign books to be translated into the 
 Russian language, and among others^ " Puffendorf 's ^ Introduction to 
 the Knowledge of the States of Europe." A monk, to whom the 
 translation of this book was committed *, presented * it some time after ^ 
 to the Emperor. The monarch examined "^ the translation ; at * a certain 
 chapter, however, he suddenly changed "^ countenance, turned indignantly 
 to the monk, and said : " Fool, what did I order ^^ thee to do ? Is this 
 a translation?" He^' then referred to the original and showed the poor 
 monk a paragraph in which the author had spoken with great asperity ^- 
 of the Russians, but which had not been translated. " Go," resumed the 
 monarch, " and instantly carry out " what I have bidden thee to do. It is 
 not to (S. 19, N. 7) flatter my subjects that I" have ordered this book 
 to be translated, but (S. 6, N. 10) to instruct ^^ and reform ^^ them!" — 
 Anonymous. 
 
 1, Use the auxiliary verb of mood 'Inffcil' as a translation of 'to order', 
 'to command', and 'to cause', when these verbs are connected with the 
 auxiliary 'to be' and the Past Participle of another verb; as — 
 
 The emperor ordered the ringleaders Set ^aifcu ti e ^ bie Slnfu^rer e r -. 
 
 to be shot. f c^ i e ^ e n. 
 
 The admiral commanded the ships to ©ev Slbmirat lie g bie ©d)!^ in ©c^lad^t; 
 
 be draivn up in order of battle. cvbnung aufjlellen. 
 
 He caused the money to be paid to me. Gr ticf mir bag @etb auSja^ten. 
 
 2, Supply here the adverb an(f). 3, $uffenboif3 SBeitvdge jur euroV'difd»cii 
 
 ©taatcnfiinbe. 4, an'i^ertrauen. 5, iibcnei'dben ; it = the same, which must 
 
 agree with its antecedent 'translation'. 6, after, bavauf. 7, ^xuiiw.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 73. 43 
 
 8, in. 9, to change countenance, tie %<irhi tv>ec£)feln. 10, 'to order', 
 
 here bcfcT)feii. See S. 48, N. 2. 11, Say ' Hereupon he opened (auf fdjla^eti) 
 
 the original'. 12, ©c^avfe, f.; had spoken ... of = had expressed himself 
 
 (ftc^ auei'fprfcfien) . . . about. 13, uerric^tcn. 14, Inverted construction. 
 
 15, bek^reu 16, refotmiercn ; the prep, jii must be repeated before this verb. 
 
 Section 74. 
 
 THE BEAUTY OF THE EYE. 
 
 I. 
 
 Look^ how beautiful the human eye is, excelling^ in beauty the eye 
 of every creature 1 The eyes of many of the lower animals are doubtless 
 very beautiful. AlP of us must have admired the bold, fierce, bright eye 
 of the eagle ; the large, gentle, brown eye of the ox ; the treacherous 
 green eye of the cat, waxing * and waning ^ like the moon, as " the sun 
 shines upon it (S. 4, N. 5) or'' deserts it; the pert eye of the sparrow; 
 the sly eye of the fox ; the peering ' little bead ^ of black enamel in ^° the 
 mouse's head ; the" gem-like eye which ^'^ redeems the toad from ugliness ; 
 and the intelligent, affectionate expression, which " looks out from the 
 human-like eye of the horse and dog. There '* are these and the eyes 
 of many other animals full of beauty ; but ^* there is a glory which ex- 
 celleth in the eye of man. 
 
 1, Use the 2nd pers. sing. 2, Say 'and how it excelleth in fan) beauty 
 
 the eye of every other creature!' The words ' in beauty' should be placed 
 before the verb. 3, All of us, unv al(c ; all of them, ftc alle ; all of you, 
 
 if)t (or @ie) alle. Render the words 'must have' by 'have certainly'. The 
 p.p. should be placed after 'eagle'. 4, fid) Vicujrcpcrti. 5, ftd) «cv; 
 
 Kcincrn. 6, as = according as, je nac^bem. 7, or deserts it = or not. 
 
 8, forfc^cub. _ 9, ^crtenauge. 10, im 3JJaufcfcpf^cn. II, bag eiiicm 
 
 ©betfieine gletc^eube Sliuje. 12, Say ' which lets us forget the ugliness of the 
 
 toad'. 13, which — the = in the. 14, There are these . . . full = 
 
 These ... are full. Full of, uoKcr. 15, im Slii^e bc3 3)ieui"(^i-ii icboc^ lic^t eine 
 
 al(c3 iibei-tvcjffnbe ^^srac^t. 
 
 Section 75. 
 
 THE BEAUTY OF THE EYE. 
 II. 
 
 We realise ^ this fully only when "^ we gaze into the faces of those we 
 love. It' is their eyes (S. i6, N.io) we look at* when we are near them, 
 and ® recall when we are ^ far away. The face is a '' blank without the 
 eye, and the eye seems to concentrate every ^ feature in itself. It is the 
 eye that smiles, not the lips ; it is the eye that listens ^ not the ear ; it ^° 
 that frowns, not the brow ; it " that mourns, not the voice. Every sense 
 and every faculty ^'^ seems to ^^ flow toward it, and find expression through 
 it '*, nay ^^ to be lost in it ; for all must have felt at times as ''' if a man's 
 eye was not a part of him, but (S. 6, N. lo) the man himself; as'^ if it 
 had not merely life, but also a'* personality of its own; — as'' if it was 
 not only a living, but also a thinking being. — Prof. G. Wilson.
 
 44 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 75. 
 
 1, 'to realise', here =to comprehend, bcgvcifcn. The object 'this' may be 
 emphasized by being placed at the head of the clause. Fully only, cift ganj. 
 2, Say 'when we look upon (betradjten) the face (Slutli|, n.) of our loved ones 
 (imfercr Stcben)'. 3, (SS fiiib. 4, aub(i(fcn. 5, and which we recall 
 
 (fic^ jururfrufcn)» 6, are far away, fent »on i^nen miUn. 7, a blank = 
 
 expressionless. 8, Supply here the adj. 'individual' (einjeln). 9, taufc^cii. 
 10, Say 'the eye frowns (^urnen, i.e. to look angry)'. 11, Say 'the eye is 
 
 sad'. 12, ©cmiitefitramung, f. 1^ to — it, bat)in ju firomcn. 14, 'it', 
 
 here = the same. 15, \a, barin aufjugcben. 16, as if . . . was, aU Jrdvc ; 
 
 a man's eye = the eye of a man. 17, as if it had, ale tjdtte eg. 18, a 
 
 personality of its own = a self-dependent personality. 19, as if it was, 
 
 als Jtdre c^. 
 
 Section 76. 
 
 A FUiraiRAIi DANCE'. 
 
 Drums were beatino:^ horns blowing ^ and* people were seen all 
 running in one direction. The cause was a funeral dance. I joined * 
 the crowd, and soon found myself in® the midst of the entertainment ''. 
 The dancers were most (^od^ft) grotesquely * got up *. About a dozen 
 huge ostrich feathers adorned their helmets. Leopard or black and white 
 monkey-skins^" were suspended" from their shoulders, and a leather, 
 tied (S. 7, N. 3, A) round the waist, covered a large iron bell which was 
 strapped ^^ upon the loins of each dancer ; this they rang ^^ to the time of 
 the dance. A large crowd got up in" this st)'le^^ created^® an inde- 
 scribable hubbub, heightened" by the blowing of ^^ horns and the beating 
 of seven nogaras ^' of various notes ^*'. Every dancer wore ^' an antelope's 
 horn ^2 suspended round the neck, which he blew occasionally in ^^ the 
 height of his excitement. — Sir S. Baker, The Albert N'yanza. 
 
 1, Gin %XR\ juv Scic^cufeier. 2, were beating = were being beaten. See 
 
 S. 2, N. I. To beat a drum, cine Xrommcl ru^ren. 3, horns (were) blow- 
 
 ing = horns resounded (ertcticn). 4, Say ' and one saw all (af(eg) people 
 
 run in (nad)) one direction. 5, fic^ an'fd)lic^ai, which requires the dat. 
 
 e, in the midst, iumitteti, which requires the gen. 7, entertainment = 
 
 festivity. 8, grotc^f. 9, 'to get up', here au^'ftaffieren. 10, 'skin', 
 
 here gfff, n., of which form a compound expression with the pi. of the nouns 
 'leopard' and 'monkey', as explained in S. 71, N. 2. 11, were suspended 
 
 = hung ; from = »on . . . ^cvvib. 12, to be strapped, mit einent OJienten bcfejiigt 
 
 fein ; ' upon ' here an. 13, f(^el(cn ; to — dance, ivd{)venb beg Xanjeng jum 
 
 Saftc. 14, auf. 15, style = manner. 16, created = made. 17, Say 
 ' which was (Passive) still heightened', according to S. 7, N. 3, B. 18, Use 
 the gen. of the def. art. 19, 'nogaras' — which use in its unaltered form in 
 
 German — are a kind of drum. 20, notes = sounds. 21, wore . . . sus- 
 
 pended = had . . . hanging ; ' round ', here an. 22, To render ' antelope's 
 
 horn' form a compound noun of the pi. of the noun ' antelope' and the singl. of 
 the noun ' horn'. Comp. S. 36, N. 7, A, B, and C, and mark further: 
 
 A. Although the first component of Compound Nouns is generally in the 
 singular, some require the plural ; as— ^inberflubc, f., nursery; Silbergaflcrie, f., 
 picture-gallery. 
 
 B, I. The first component takes sometimes one of the genitive inflections 
 ^, e^, It, cit, or clt§, according to the declension it belongs to ; as — Jtenigg; 
 mantel, m., royal mantel ; Sagcslic^t, n., day-light ; ^elbciunut, m., heroism ; 
 gvicbengliebe, f., love of peace.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 76, 45 
 
 2. "We find, however, the terminations § or C§ used as a connecting 
 link between the two components for the mere sake of euphony, even 
 in cases where the first component is a feminine noun ; this is more especially 
 the case when the first component is in itself a compound expression, when it 
 has one of the derivative suffixes ^eit, ing, ling, feit, [i^aft, turn, ung, or when it is 
 a noun of foreign origin terminating in ion, at, and at; as — (SJeburt^tag, m., 
 birthday; J^oc^jfit^gcfc^enf, n., wedding present; 2Bcig()cit^(e:^rc, f., philosophy; 
 (Reltgion^bulbnng, f., toleration ; Unicerfitdtggevicl^t, n., university court. 
 
 C. In a few compound nouns we find one of the euphonic terminations e, er, 
 and I used as a connecting link between the two components ; as — Sagcs 
 mxt, n., day's work ; 5l)"d)crmittwocl), m., Ash-Wednesday ; >^cifcelbccre, bilberry. 
 
 D, I. When the first component consists of the stem of a verb, it is 
 often joined to the second component without a connecting link ; as — ©cfcreib; 
 buc^, n., copy-book. 
 
 2. Sometimes a euphonic e is used as a connecting link; as — ^d^ts 
 finger, m., forefinger; ^altepimft, m., place of stopping. 
 23, in — excitement = in the highest excitement. 
 
 Section 77. 
 
 ABSOLUTION" BEFOREHAND i. 
 
 When TezeP was at Leipzig, in the sixteenth century (App. § 9), 
 and had collected ' a great deal of money from all ranks * of people, a 
 nobleman, who suspected imposition, put ° the question to him : " Can 
 you * grant absolution for a sin which a man '' shall intend to commit in 
 future ? " " Yes," replied the frontless commissioner, " but on * condition 
 that a proper ^ sum of money be actually ^° paid down." The noble 
 (S. 5, N. 2) instantly produced the sum demanded, and in return" re- 
 ceived a diploma ^^, sealed and signed by Tezel, absolving" him from the 
 unexplained crime which he intended to commit. Not " long after, when 
 Tezel was about (S. 6, N. 4) to leave Leipzig, the nobleman made^' in- 
 quiry respecting the road he would probably travel ", waited " for him in 
 ambush at a convenient place, attacked and robbed him, then ^* beat him 
 soundly with a stick, sent him back to Leipzig with " his chest empty, 
 and'^"' at parting said : " TKis is the fault "^ I intended to commit, and for 
 which I have your absolutions^." — Rev. R. K. Arvine. 
 
 1, ©er im MoxmS crtcilte 3lB(af. 2, 3oT)ann 2!c^el (cigeutlid) ©icjet) iwtrbe 
 
 urn 1460 511 Scipjig gcbcren, trat 1489 in ben S)cminifanercvbcn, irarb 1502 vnnn '•^Hiprt 
 jum ?lbla§prcbigcr bej^cllt, (pdtcr jnm apo|toUfd}eu .ftommiJTav crnannt unb mit bcm 
 Slbla^ljanbcl in @acf)fen bch-aut, gcg ftc^ jcboc^, con Sutl}cv fcit bem 31^*611 Qftobcv 1517 
 wcgen [finer un\.^evj'(^dmten Slnma^ungcn befdm^ft, in ia$ ^paulincvtloilcr jn Seiv^ig 
 ^nriirf, tfo ec im 3a()re 15 19 vcrjlarb. 3, cin'ne()men ; a great deal of, einc 2)iaiie 
 
 Construe accord, to App. § 5. 4, ranks = classes; people, 33coctfcrnng, f., 
 
 see S. 3, N. 2. 5, 'to put a question to somebody' here = to ask some- 
 
 body. 6, I propose to use the 2nd pcrs. pi. in this case, and to supply 
 
 the adverb ancfi after the pron. 7, a — future — which one only (erft) 
 
 intends to commit. See App. § 19. 8, unter, followed by the def. art. 
 
 9, angemcfi'en; to render 'sum of money' form a comp. n. of which the noun 
 'money' forms the first component and the noun 'sum' the last. 10, ac- 
 
 tually = directly ; to pay down, aui<,v^l^(f»- 11> •" return, bafur, which 
 
 place after the verb. 12, 'diplom;r, here 5lbUipbvief, m. 13, abfcU 
 
 vieven. See S. 16, N. 4; unexplained, ungenannt. 14, Not — after = Soon
 
 46 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 77. 
 
 upon that. See S. 4, N. 5, B. 15, to make inquiry respecting something, 
 
 ficfc nad) etwag criunbigfu. 16, *to travel', here ein'fcl^tagcn. 17, to wait 
 
 in ambush for somebody, einen in eincm •^iiiter^alte auf'lauern. 18, the 
 
 adverb bann must be placed after the object. To beat a person soundly with 
 a stick, cinen tiiiiitig burc^'pniadn. 19, say 'with empty chest (^ajten, m.)', 
 
 which place immediately alter the object. 20, unb rief il)m beim Slbfc^icb 
 
 nod^ ju. 21, 'fault', here = sin, 22, Supply here the adverb [c^oti. 
 
 Section 78. 
 
 STAND UP> FOB WHATEVER IS TRUE, MANLY, AND 
 
 LOVELY 2. 
 
 I. 
 
 In ' no place in the world has individual character more * weight than 
 at a public school. Remember^ this, I beseech^ you, all you boys who^ 
 are getting into the upper forms. Now^ is the lime when you may' have 
 more^° influence for good or evil in the society you live in than you ever 
 can have " again. Quit ^^ yourselves like men, then ; speak out " and 
 stand up for whatever is true, manly, and lovely. Never (S. 68, N. 2) 
 try to be popular^^, but otily do your duty, and help^* others to do theirs ; 
 and when you leave the school (S. 27, N. 8), the '® tone of feeling in it 
 will be higher than you found it, and so you " will do good to " genera- 
 tions of your countrymen yet unborn. For boys follow one another in 
 herds like sheep, for " good or evil ; they " hate thinking, and ''° have 
 rarely any settled " principles. 
 
 1, Use the 2nd pers. pi.; whatever = all that; see S. 3, N. 7. 2, fc^cn. 
 
 3, In no place = Nowhere. 4, more weight = greater influence. 5, Re- 
 member this = Think (2nd pers. pi.) of it; see S. 4, N. 5, £. 6, bitten. 
 7, ^T^fr (m. sing.), tit (f. sing.), and bic (pi.) must be used as relative pro- 
 nouns in reference to a personal pronoun of the first or second person of 
 either number, and also in reference to the personal pronoun of the third 
 person plural (©ie) used instead of the second person plural. For the sake of 
 emphasis the personal pronoun is frequently repeated after the relative pro- 
 noun, and the verb must then agree with the personal pronoun, as the following 
 examples will show. 
 
 95crf^mdl)ji bit mic^, bie i^ beine Dost thou disdain me, ivho am your 
 
 greuHbin bin? friend? 
 
 3c^, ber id^ bic^ »oii bcincn gcinbcn /, ivho delivered thee from thy 
 
 befreite. enemies. 
 
 Construe the clauses * who — forms' accordingly ; to get into the upper forpnis, 
 in bie obevn .Sllaffen vcrfe^t Wcrben. 8, Say 'The time has [is] come'; when, 
 
 tro. 9, may have = exercise (attg ubcn) likely. 10, Say ' more good 
 
 or evil influence upon (auf) the company surrounding you (©uve Umgebung) '. 
 11, have = exercise. 12, Say 'Be therefore manly'. 13, 'to speak 
 
 out', here gcvabe unb fret I)crau(3'[pvec^en ; 'to be popular', here ftc^ beltebt tnacf)en. 
 14, When the following verbs are used in connection with another verb 
 governed by them, that verb stands in the Infinitive without the pre- 
 position 511 (Comp. S. 34, N. 10) : 
 
 A. The auxiliary verbs of mood : bfivfen, fcnnen, mpgcii, muffen, fcHen, U)of(en, and 
 lajfcn. (See Expl. i.)
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 78. 47 
 
 B. The verbs : btciben, fal^ren, gc^cn, flnbeu, fu()(en, ^ci^cn (to bid, to command), 
 
 fjelfen, t)cvcn, lef^ren (also with ju, Comp. S. 43, N. 10), lerueii, madden, [e^en, 
 and rciteu. (See Expl. 2.) 
 
 C. The verb tfoben in phrases like Expl. 3. 
 
 D. The verb tf|un followed by nic^ts. (See Expl. 4.) 
 
 Examples. 
 
 1. 3^ mag gem fdireibeii. I am very fond of writing; 1 like to 
 
 write. 
 
 2. 3)er 2)icnct fanb [ciiien .§eirn tot The servant found his master lying 
 
 ant iBoben liegcn. dead on the floor. 
 
 3. (it i)at gut reben. It is all very well for him to talk. 
 
 4. ®r t^ut nid^t^ aU effcn imb He does nothing but eat and drink. 
 
 trinfen, 
 
 15, the — higher = the moral tone of the same (gen.) will be a higher one 
 (S. 67, N. 3). 16, Supply here the adverb ncc^. 17, on; remember 
 
 that the p. p. 'unborn' is used as an adj. and qualifies the noun 'generations'. 
 18, Say 'as well in evil as in good'. 19, iaS 2)eiifen ijl iljncu mibequem. 
 
 20, Supply here the pron. 'they'. 21, feft befiimmt. 
 
 Section 79. 
 
 STAND UP FOR WHATEVER IS TRUE, MANLY, AND 
 
 LOVELY. 
 II. 
 
 Every school (S. 5, N. 2), indeed, has its own traditionary standard ^ of 
 right and wrong, which cannot be transgressed with impunity, marking ^ 
 certain things as low * and blackguard, and certain others as lawful and 
 right. This standard is ever * varying, though ii changes only slowly and 
 little by little. It® is the leading** boys only, who (S. 15, N. 3), subject'' 
 to such standard, give, for^ the time being, the tone to^ all the rest, 
 and^" make the school either a noble institution for" the training of 
 Christian Englishmen, or a place ^^ where a young boy will get " more 
 evil than if he were turned out ^* to make his ^ ' own way in London 
 streets. — Thos. Hughes, Tom Brown's School Days. 
 
 1, SKa^fiab, m.; 'of, here fur. 2, I)e5cid}nen, see S. 16, N. 4, and intro- 
 
 duce the clause with the conj, unb. 3, fcl}dublic^ uub gemcin. 4, bcftdubig. 
 
 5. ' It is', here (Sg finb. 6, tcnangcbeub. 7, biefcm aJKigjlab uutcmvcvfcu. 
 8, ivx 3cit. 9, to = for. 10, Supply here the rel. pron. 'who'; 
 to make the school a noble institution, au(3 ber ©cf)u(e cine fittlid^e 5luftalt 
 mac^en. 11, to (S. 19, N. 7) educate Christian (ci)rif^(icbgcfiuut) Englishmen. 
 12, ©tdtte, f. 13, 'to get', here fid) au'cigueu. 14, l}inau6'ftc^en; use 
 the First Conditional. 15, his — streets = his fortune in (auf) the streets 
 of London. 
 
 Section 80. 
 
 WORK^ IS A GREAT COMFORTER. 
 
 Two neighbouring gardeners had the misfortune of ^ having their crop 
 of early peas killed by frost. The one called^ upon the other to condole* 
 with him. " Ah," cried he, " how unfortunate •* we have been, neighbour 1
 
 48 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 80. 
 
 Do you ^ know ? I have done nothing but fret ever since '^. But it seems 
 you have there a fine healthy * crop ^ coming ^" up already ; what " is it ?" 
 "This?" cried the other gardener, "why ^2, it is a crop of peas (S. 16, 
 N. 10) I sowed (S. 48, N. 2) immediately after my loss." "What^', 
 coming up already ? " replied the fretter ^\ " Yes, while you were 
 fretting ", I ^^ was working." " What ! don't you fret when you have 
 a loss ? " " Yes, but I always put it off" until a/fer I have repaired^* the 
 mischief ^^" " Why, then you have no need to fret at all." " True ^*'," 
 replied the industrious gardener, " I ^ find working better than fretting." 
 — Anonymous. 
 
 1, 2)ie Slrbeit ifl cine fiif e Xrollcritt. 2, of ~ frost = that (S.. r, N. 3) their 
 
 young peas were (S. 2, N. i) destroyed by (bmc^, followed by the def. art.) 
 frost. 3, to call upon a person, ciiicn Bcfiidjcu. 4, to condole with 
 
 a person, cinem fein SBcileib 6e,5ci9en. 5, I have been unfortunate, eS iji mir 
 
 UJtfltudfHc^ crgangen. 6, Use the 2nd pers. sing. 7, ever since =* the 
 
 whole time', which place after the auxiliary; 'but fret', aU mid^ gcdrgcrt. 
 8, frdftig. 9, ©aat, f. 10, * to come up' here '^iibf^ grun au^fe^en. 
 
 11, 2Bag ifl'g fur eine ? 12, ct ; it — peas = they are (eg jinb) young peas. 
 
 13, 2Bie ; coming up already ? = and they look already so (supply f)iibfc^) 
 green? 14, ber !Irauernbe. 15, fi(^ dvgern. 16, Say *I have 
 
 worked'. 17, auf fd^icben. 18, uneber gut madden. 19, ©cf)abe, m. 
 
 20, €fli^ttg. 21, Say ' I find it better to work than to fret'. 
 
 Section 81. 
 
 PERSEVERANCE FINDS ITS REWARD. 
 
 Robert Bruce, restorer^ of the Scottish monarchy, being ^ pursued one 
 day by the enemy, was ^ obliged * to seek refuge in a barn and to spend * 
 the night there. In® the morning, when he awoke, he saw a spider 
 climbing up'' the* beam of the roof. The spider fell' down to the 
 ground, but immediately tried to climb up again, when it a^" second 
 time fell to the ground". It made a third attempt, which also failed. 
 Twelve times did (S. 32, N. 11) the litde spider try to climb up the 
 beam, and twelve times it fell down again, but the ^° thirteenth time it 
 succeeded''^ and^ gained the top^* of the beam. The king (S. 5, N. 2) 
 immediately got up ^^ from his lowly ^^ couch, and said : " This litde 
 spider has taught (S. 42, N. 4) me perseverance; I will follow its ex- 
 ample. Twelve times have " I been beaten by the enemy. I will try 
 my fortune once more ! " He did so ^*, and won the next battle. The 
 king became the spider's scholar. — N. Goodrich. 
 
 1, Use the noun with the def. art. 2, Construe according to S. 55, N. i, 
 and use the Imperf. of the Passive Voice ; by, luni. 3, The pron. cr must be 
 supplied here. 4, gcnotigt; * to seek refuge', here fi(i) jiiK^ten. 5, ju'briugen. 
 6, Say ' When he awoke in the (am) morning'. 7, f^inauf hiec^en ... an ; 
 
 see S. 16, N. 4. 8, Use the indef. art. instead of the def. art. 9, auf 
 
 ben ©obea fallen. 10, gum jtreitcn 2Kale. 11, l^erun'tcrfaKcn, to avoid 
 
 monotony. 12, I succeed, eg gelingt mir. 13, The pron. ftc must be 
 
 supplied here. 14, bag obevfte (Snbe. 15, ficf) cvl)et)en. 16, befd}eiben. 
 
 17, The Active Voice will read better in German. 18, so = it.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION Sz. 49 
 
 Section 82. 
 
 THE NECESSITY OPi VOLCANOES. 
 
 The ' remarkable proofs which modern geology has presented of vast 
 accumulations of heated ^ and melted matter * beneath the earth's crust ^ 
 make it evident that (S. 3, N. 2) volcanoes are essential to the preservation 
 of the globe. If (App. § 36) there '' were no safety-valves through * the 
 crust, such vast accumulations of heat would rend asunder ^ even ^^ a 
 whole continent. Volcanoes are " those safety-valves '^, more than two 
 hundred of which are scattered ^' over the earth's surface. But if no such 
 passages" existed (see S. 27, N. 8), nothing could prevent the^'^ pent-up 
 gases from accumulating till they had (Impf Subj.) gained strength '^ 
 enough to rend a whole continent, and " perhaps the whole globe, into 
 fragments. — Rev. Prof. Hitchcock. 
 
 1, Use the gen. of the def. art. 2, Use the attributive construction 
 
 explained in S. 48, N. 6, and say 'The by (ttoit, followed by the def. art.) 
 modern geology presented (auf'flcden) remarkable proofs of (»cn) a vast ac- 
 cumulation ', etc. 3, ertjil^t. 4, matter = masses. 5, ©rbvinbe, f. 
 6, essential = necessary ; to = for, 7, 'There is' and 'there are', used 
 in a general sense, are generally rendered by the impers. v. ' p^ girbt ' 
 8, Say ' in the earth's crust'. 9, augciiiau'bcvrci^cu. 10, fc^ar. 11, are 
 = form. 12, Here follow the words 'of which'. 13, \jertei(cn. 
 14, passages = openings. 15, the — accumulating = the accumulation of 
 the pent-up (cin'fvervcn) gases. 16, ^vaft, t.; enough, t)iiuci^ciib, adj., to be 
 placed before the noun 'strength'. 17, 'and' here ja. The verb 'to 
 rend into fragments' (auecinau'bcvrn§ctl, of which form the Supine, S. i, N. 2) 
 must of course be placed at the end of the whole passage. 
 
 \ 
 
 Section 83. V*^ 
 
 THE POWER OP BEAUTY. 
 
 In one of the worst parts of London there is ^ an institution ^ which 
 I visited. In one room I found about' thirty-five men listening (S. i6, 
 N. 4) to the teaching * of the daughter of a small shopkeeper * in ^ the 
 neighbourhood. She was one of the prettiest women (S. 16, N. 10) I 
 ever saw '' in my life. I noticed that the young girl was quite alone with 
 those rough ^ men, and said to the superintendent ' : " Are ^° you not 
 afraid to leave the pretty young girl alone with all those men ? " He 
 replied : "1^^ am." " Then, why don't you go to her ? " " You mistake^" 
 my fear. I ^' am not afraid of their doing her any harm. They love her 
 so much that they would lick ''' the ground on which '° she walks, but I 
 am afraid ^''' that some " person may step in, who, not '** knowing the 
 manner of the place, may ^^ say something impertinent'^" to her; and if 
 he^^ did, he would not leave the place" alive '^'." — Lord Shaftesbury. 
 
 1, Render 'there is' by the Pres. of bfflctjen. 2, Jliiftalt, f. 3, itiKjffdfn-. 
 4, llnteitici^t, m. 5, .tlvamcr. 6, aiis*. 7, saw = have seen. The 
 
 auxiliary may be omitted, according to S. 52, N. 8. 8, rc^. 9, This noun 
 
 VOL. IV. E
 
 5© GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 83. 
 
 may be used in its unaltered form. 10, Surest fiaBcii. 11, 3a, brd^, 
 
 which place before the words 'he replied'. 12, mistake = misunderstand. 
 
 13, I — harm = I fear not that they will do her any harm (ctwad juteibe t^un). 
 
 14, 'to lick', here = to kiss. _ 15, ivcvauf. 16, befurcf)tcn. 17, Say 
 *a stranger' could (Impf. Subj.) come in. 18, not — place, unbcfannt mit 
 ben ©ittcn biefcr Slnflalt. 19, Impf. Subj. 20, Uuge^crigcg. 21, Sup- 
 ply here the object 'bag'. 22, ^au3. 23, Icbeubig, before which 
 supply the adverb 'wicber'. 
 
 Section 84. 
 
 THE ENGLISH CLIMATE. 
 
 The air is generally very moist, most ' so near the western coast, and 
 less so '^ as ^ we go eastward. 
 
 It * is to the abundant moisture of the air that the beautiful foliage of 
 our trees and the rich verdure of our fields and gardens, so much praised 
 "by foreigners who visit England, are chiefly owing. Moisture is one of 
 the two things^ most necessary to* vegetation, and hence'' our fields, 
 trees, and woods possess during the greater part of the year a continuous 
 richness of^ verdure, which' cannot be found under'" the sunny skies of 
 the shores of the Mediterranean. 
 
 The weather is at " times liable to very sudden changes, depending 
 (S. 1 6, N. 4) mainly on the changes of the wind^^ — Hewitt, Physical 
 Geography of England and Wales. 
 
 1, most so near, unb jtoar am feuc^tcftcn an. 2, so = moist. 3, j|e tncl)v. 
 
 4, Say ' To the great moisture of the air owe (»erban!en) our trees chiefly 
 their beautiful foliage and our fields and gardens their rich verdure, which by 
 foreigners, who visit England, is praised so much'. 5, The words 'most 
 
 (l)6c^ft) necessary', qualifying the noun 'things', must precede it. Things = 
 conditions. 6, fiir. 7, bat)cr, adverbial conjunction, see App. § 24, B. 
 
 8, an. 9, Say 'as (wie) one cannot find it (i^u)'. 10, under — shores, 
 
 an ben fonnigen ^uftenilri^en. 11, mituuter. 12, SBtuteiJnjec^fel, m. 
 
 Section 85. 
 
 THE LONDON DOCKS. 
 
 I. 
 
 Seemingly ' boundless is the region of the docks, and the visitor who 
 sets out with ever so definite an idea of the course he intends to pursue, 
 will constantly find himself allured from the path. He passes "^ a door 
 from ' which issues a delicious fragrance of spice, and he turns in * to 
 (S. 19, N. 7) explore^ it. At* the top of a stone staircase he finds an 
 enormous floor '' piled * with bales of cinnamon and boxes of nutmeg. 
 Here and there are great heaps which, on ® close inspection, prove '" to 
 be cloves. Others, of" a brilliant sienna colour, he'^ finds to be heaps 
 of mace. The '^ floor above this is stored ^* with Peruvian bark ^^ This 
 article is used for the preparation " of quinine, but '^ it is imported in
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 85. 51 
 
 such quantities " as " to render it difficult to believe that ^' it can all be 
 used medicinally. 
 
 1, Say ' The region (33crei($, m.) of the docks seems (etfdtcinen) almost bound- 
 less (unbegrenst), and even when the visitor begins his course (SBanbmuig, f.) 
 •with ever so (mit einem nod) fo) definite a plan about (iiber) the direction he 
 intends to pursue (bie citmifc^lagcnbe 9ti^tiing, Comp. S. 48, N. 6), (fo) he will 
 constantly find himself allured (ab'lciifen) from his path'. Supply the adverb 
 bod) before the adv. 'constantly'. 2, an etliuig t'orbei'gcl^en. 3, auS bev 
 
 ifim eiti fojilic^er SBctjlgcntd) »on ©cirurjcii entgcgcnfiromt. 4, l^inciu'ge^cn. 
 
 5, be(id)tigcu; the pron. 'it' must be rendered by the persnl. pron. of the 3rd 
 pers. pi. to agree with its antecedent '©cwfirje*. 6, 5lm (inbe. 7, ^a^ 
 
 gcrraum, m. 8, au'fiillen; for the constr, see S. 7, N. ^, B. 0, bet 
 
 nal)crer ©cjid^tigmig. 10, Construe according to the following model : 
 
 This proves to he false, bifS crireift fi(^ al6 falfd). 11, ^011 vvac^tigfr Cfcr; 
 
 farbe. 12, Say 'he recognises as heaps'. 13, 3^er bariibeilicgeube Sagcvvaum. 
 14, an'fitflen. 15, (S()inavuibe. 16, To render 'preparation of quinine' 
 
 form a comp. n. of the corresponding German terms 'quinine' and 'preparation' 
 (SBcreitung); to use, i^cvtoenben. 17, bod), adverbial conjunction, see App. 24,5. 
 18, SWenge, f., only used in the sing. 39, as — believe, ba§ e^ fid) faum gtaiibcti 
 la§t. 20, that — medicinally = it (to agree with ?lrtifel) could (Pres. Subj.) 
 only be used (bfuii^en) for (jii) medical purposes (3>Pfrf, mO* 
 
 Section 80. 
 
 THE LONDON DOCKS. 
 
 II. 
 
 On ^ another floor of the same building may^ be found bundles of 
 Pimento-^ slicks and Malacca* canes, a great store of mother-of-pearl, 
 a heap of delicate ^ richly-tinted ear-shells*, and a quantity ^ ivory. 
 Here are elephants' teeth, some'' of which are larger than bricks and 
 weigh fourteen pounds. Passing** out of this building, we find* ourselves 
 in an enormous shed with little black boards, hung '° at intervals, and 
 bearing the names of vessels. Beneath these boards are " goods lying 
 ready for shipment, and these are at least as varied '^ as the imports ^^ 
 Here are pickles", blacking, a^-' cartload or so 0/" bricks, and scores" of 
 anvils. There " are church-bells, a chest of drawers, a rocking-horse, 
 a mangle, and boxes, bales, and barrels innumerable". — 'The Globe' 
 Newspaper. 
 
 1, 3n. 2, Use the Active Voice with 'man', and say 'one finds'. 
 
 Comp. S. 4, N. 4. For the constr. see App. § 14. 3, ?^c(fciU'fci|er, m. 
 
 4, 9[)Ki(affavo(ir. 5, jart. 6, (£cco(}vmufd;cIn. 7, The clause must 
 
 commence with the words ' of which'. 8, * To pass out' here = to leave, 
 
 V. trans. Construe according to S. 55, N. i. 9, to find oneself, fidb 
 
 bcfinben. 10, anf 't)dngen ; at, in. Construe according to S. 7, N. 3, B. 
 
 11, are — shipment, licgcn jur (5infd)iifung bcf^imnitc SBavcn. 12, i>cvfd)icbenct 
 
 ?lrt. 13, (Sinfut)ravtifcl. 14, Use this noun in its unaltered form. 
 
 15, Say ' one or two loads of bricks '. 16, scores of, cine llnjatjl von. 
 
 17. 2)ovt fuib. Comp. S. 82, N. 7. 18, in jat)I(ofcr SKcnge. 
 
 E 2
 
 5a GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 87. 
 
 Section 87. 
 
 DR. JOHNSON ON^ DEBT. 
 
 Dr. Johnson held '^ that ' debt is ruin. His * words on the subject are 
 weighty, and worthy of being held in remembrance. " Do not," said ^ he, 
 " accustom * yourself to consider debt only as "^ an inconvenience. You " 
 will find it a calamity. Poverty takes ^ away so many means of doing 
 good, and ^° produces so much inability to resist evil, that it ^^ is by ^^ all 
 virtuous means to be avoided. Let ^^ it be your first care, then, not to be 
 in any man's debt. Resolve " not ^® to be poor. Whatever ^® you have, 
 spend less. Poverty" is a great enemy to human happiness. It destroys 
 liberty. It makes some ^* virtues impracticable " and others ^° extremely 
 difficult. Frugality ^^ is not only the basis of*^ quiet, but^^ of benefi- 
 cence ^^ No '^^ man can help others that wants himself. We must have -" 
 enough, before '^^ we have to spare." — S. Smiles, Self-Help. 
 
 1, uber ba3 ©c^ulbenmac^en. 2, 'to hold' here = to be of opinion, bet 
 
 Sliiltc^t fein. 3, Say 'that debt (bag ©(^ulbenmad^cn) leads (Pres. Subj.; 
 
 Comp. App. §§ 28 and 31) to ruin'. 4, Say ' What he says on (itbct) this 
 
 subject (©egenftanb, m.) is important and worthy of our notice (33evad)tun9, f.)'. 
 5, Place the words 'said he' at the end of the whole clause. 6, When 
 
 verbs and adjectives, governing a preposition, are used in a principal 
 clause and are followed by a subordinate clause, either in the form 
 of a supine (i.e. an infinitive with jjii, see S. i, N. 2) or beginning with a 
 subordinative conjunction, the adverb &a, in connection with the pre- 
 position required, is generally placed in the principal clause ; as — 
 
 We will accustom ourselves to be 3Bittt?o((cn un^ b a va n gewof^ncn, fpavfam 
 
 thrifty. ju feiu. 
 
 Do not excuse yourself with having (Sntfc^itlbtgcu ©ie fic^ nic^t bam it, bap 
 
 had no time. (gie feiiie Beit ge^abt ^aben. 
 
 The verb fic^ geiuc^rien requires the prep. an. Construe accordingly, and use 
 the 2nd pers. sing. 7, an inconvenience, al^ ctivaei ^dfti;^cg. 8, Say 
 
 ' You will find that it leads to poverty', see S. 3, N. 2. 9, to take away, 
 
 cnt,^ie'^en, after which supply the pron. un3 (from us). 10, and — inability 
 
 = and makes us so often incapable. 11, it is ... to be avoided = we must 
 
 avoid it (to agree with Slrmut), see S. 62, N. 4. 12, by — means, na^ 
 
 bei^en .Krdftcn. 13, Say ' Beware therefore (\\i) ^uten) of running into debt'. 
 To run into debt, ©d}ulbeu ntad)en. Use the Supine according to S. 34, N. 10. 
 14, fic^ ettoaS »or'ne^meu. 15, not — poor = not to get (gcraten) into 
 
 poverty. 16, Say * However little (9Bie gcving, after which supply the 
 
 adverb aud^) thy income ( (Sinna{)me, f.) may be, lay up a part of the same 
 (fo lege bodf) cinen %i\\. berfelben ^uriicf)'. 17, Slrtniit ii^ bcm ©lucfe feinb. 
 
 18, einjelne. 19, impracticable = impossible. 20, Supply here the 
 
 adverb mieberum (again). 21, 'frugality' here = thrift (to be used without 
 
 the art.). 22, of quiet, beS inncrn grieben^. 23, Supply here the 
 
 adverb aud^, and see S. 6, N. 10. 24, 2Bo()U()im, n., to be used with the 
 
 gen. of the def. art. 25, Say ' He who (SBer, after which supply the 
 
 pron. felbfi) needs (bebuvfen, requires the gen. of the def. art.) help, cannot help 
 others'. 26, to have enough, jur ©cnuge ^abcn. 27, Say ' before 
 
 (e^e) we can have to spare (ehvas iibrig tjaben)'.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 88. 53 
 
 Sec ti 071 88. 
 
 A CURIOUS' INSTRUMENT. 
 
 I. 
 
 A gentleman'^, just returned^ from a journey to (S. 72, N. 4) London, 
 was surrounded by* his children, eager ^, after the first salutation was 
 over, to hear the news, and still more eager to see the contents® of a 
 small portmanteau, which ^ were, one by one, carefully unfolded and 
 displayed to view. After * having distributed amongst the children a few 
 small presents, the ' father took his seat again, saying, that ^° he must 
 confess he " had brought from town "^, for his own use, something far 
 more curious and valuable than any '^ of the little gifts (S. 16, N. 10) they 
 had received. It was, he said ", too good to '^ present to any of them ; 
 but he would, if ^® they pleased, first give them a brief description of it 
 (S. 4, N. 5, B), and " then perhaps they might be allowed to inspect it. 
 
 1, mevfunirbig. 2, The noun ' gentleman' may be used in its unaltered 
 
 form in German. 3, t}eim'fcl)icu ; tor the constr. see S. 7, N. 3, B. 
 
 4, »on ; to surround, umviu'gcu. 5, Say * who after the first salutations 
 
 were eager (begierig) '. 6, ber 3ti^alt, which has no plural. 7, Since 
 
 the antecedent of the pron. <ivhich (i.e. 3n()alt) has no plural in German, the 
 constr. of the passage 'which — to view' must be altered. Let us say 'from 
 which {<x\\i ttielc^cr, to agree with OJcifetafc^e in the fern, sing.) then (supply the 
 adverb aui^ in this place) every piece was carefully unpacked (auS'j^atfeu) and 
 shown round (umljcr'scigcn)'. 8, Construe accord. to S. 55, N. 1 ; to distribute, 
 «cttei'len; amongst, unter, with the ace. The direct object must be placed 
 before the woras 'amongst the children'. 9, Say 'he sat down again and 
 
 said'. 10, that he must confess, cr trcKe eg juir gefic^cn. 11, This 
 
 passage is best introduced by the conj. ba^. Read carefully App. §§28 and 30. 
 12, au« ber Stabt, which place before the p. p. (mitgcbvacfct). 13, tvgcnb cine. 
 
 14, Say ' he continued'. 15, See S. 19, N. 7, and supply here the pron. ce ; 
 
 to any = to one. 16, Say ' if they wished it'. 17, unb bann biirften 
 
 fie eg ji(^ »ieilci(i)t anfeljen. 
 
 Section 89. 
 
 A CURIOUS INSTRUMENT. 
 
 II. 
 
 The children were accordingly ' all attention, while the father thus ^ 
 proceeded ^ : " This small instrument displays * the most ^ perfect inge- 
 nuity of* construction, and^ exquisite nicety and beauty of workmanship. 
 From* its extreme^ delicacy'", however, it" is so liable to injury, that it 
 is always protected by a '^ sort of light curtain, adorned '' with a beauuful 
 fringe, and " so placed as to fall in a moment on the approach of the 
 slightest danger. The ^* external appearance of the instrument is always 
 more or less beautiful, though in this respect there '** is a great diversity 
 in the different sorts. The " internal contrivance, however, is the same 
 in all of them, and is so curious, and in its power" so astonishing, that 
 no one who knows it ^^ can suppress his surprise and admiration."
 
 54 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION Sg. 
 
 1, naturtic^ bic 2lufmcrffamfeit felbjt 2, fotjjeiibermaicit. 3, pro- 
 
 ceeded = continued. 4, displays = shows. 5, most perfect = highest. 
 
 6, Use the gen. of the def. art. 7, Say ' and is most exactly (uimbettreffUc^ 
 
 genou) and beautifully worked'. 8, From = On account of, SScgeii. 
 
 9, extreme = extraordinary. 10, (Em^^finbU^feit, f. 11, it — injury 
 
 = it is so easily exposed (aii^'f^fef") to (S. 3, N. 2) injury. 12, a sort of=a 
 
 certain. 13, Use the attributive constr., S. 7, N. 3. 14, Say * which 
 
 is placed (angcbvadjt) so that it falls down at (bci) the approach of the slightest 
 danger in a moment'. 15, The — appearance, Sag Slupere. 16, Render 
 
 ' there is' in this instance by ' kjtefjt (there exists), which must be placed at the 
 end of the passage, on account of the preceding subordinative conj. obgleic^. 
 17, The internal contrivance, !Der 2)Jec^anigmii3. 18, power = efficacy, 
 
 aBirffamfcit, f. 19, it = the same (to agree with SWei^aui^mit^). 
 
 Scctio7i 90. 
 
 A CURIOUS INSTRUMENT. 
 III. 
 
 " By a slight ayid momentary movement, which the owner can easily 
 effect, he can ^ ascertain ^ with considerable accuracy the size, colour, 
 shape, weight (S. 10, N. 9), and value of^ any article whatever. A* 
 person possessed of one is ' thus saved from the necessity of asking a 
 thousand questions and® trying a variety of troublesome experiments, 
 which would otherwise be necessary; and such a slow and laborious 
 process ' would, after * all, not succeed * half so well as a single appli- 
 cation of this admirable instrument." 
 
 George. " If it is such a very useful thing" (S. 27, N. 8), I wonder" 
 that ^^ everybody, that can at all afford it, does not have one." 
 
 1, To avoid repetition render the verb * can ' here by imjlanbe feiit. 
 2, bejlimmcn, which use in the form of a Supine and place at the end of the 
 whole clause. 3, of — whatever, trgcnb cineg ®egeii|1anbc3. 4, A — one 
 
 = The possessor. 5, is — questions = needs therefore (alfo) not (to) ask 
 
 a thousand questions. To ask a question, cine grage |ie[(en. 6, and — ex- 
 
 periments = and to make various troublesome experiments. 7, 93crfa^ren, n. 
 
 8, after all not, boc^ nii^t, which must not be placed between commas. Comp. 
 S. 15, N. 3. 9, getingen. 10, thing = object. 11, I wonder, 
 
 ti wunbert nti(^ ; we wonder, ed umnbert un^ ; you wonder, eg irnuibcrt ©te. 
 12, that — one = that not everybody, who can at all (irgcnb) make it possible, 
 possesses the same (to agree with 'object'). 
 
 Section 91. 
 
 A CURIOUS INSTRUMENT. 
 IV. 
 
 Father. " These instruments are not so uncommon as you suppose ; 
 I myself happen to know several individuals ^ who ^ are possessed of one 
 or two of* them." 
 
 Charles. " How large are they, father ? Could I hold one in my 
 hand?"
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 9 1. 55 
 
 Father. " You * might ; but ' I should be very sorry to trust * mine 
 to you." 
 
 George. " You must take "" very great care of it, then " ?" 
 Father. " Indeed ® I must. I intend every night to envelop '" it in " 
 the light curtain I mentioned ; it must, besides, occasionally be washed 
 in *^ a certain colourless liquid kept " for the purpose ; but this is such a 
 delicate " operation, that " persons, I find, are generally reluctant to per- 
 form it. But notwithstanding the tenderness '^ of this instrument, you '■' 
 will be surprised to hear that" it may be darted to a great distance, with- 
 out " suffering the least injury, and without any danger of losing it." 
 
 1, individuals = persons. 2, who — one = who possess one. 3, of 
 
 them = of the same. 4, '^a^i fcnntefi bit \vot}l. 5, but — sorry = but 
 
 I should be very unwilling. 6, to trust anything to a person, eiiiem ettra^ 
 
 an'tjcrtraiten. 7, to take great care of a thing, ettra^ fe{}t inac^t ne^men. 
 
 8, then = thus, alfo, wiiich place after the object. 9, (^(Xin^ map ic^ iai '. 
 
 10, umt)ufUn. 11, in — mentioned = with the above-mentioned light 
 
 curtain. 12, in=wilh. 13, bic man ft(^ j\u biefent Qwtdi ^dlt. 14, deli- 
 cate = critical, bcbenfli(^ or gcfdljrUc^. 15, that — it = that one, as I have 
 found, performs (^cl(,^ie'()cn) the same generally but (nur) very unwillingly 
 (ungernc). 16, (Sniiifinblicfjfeit. 17, you — hear = you will hear with 
 astonishment. 18, that — distance, ba§ man (& in wcitc Sfnicn Jrcvfcn fann. 
 19, Say * without that it suffers the least injury, and without that one runs any 
 danger of losing [to lose] it.' Comp. S. i, N. 3. 
 
 Scrfion 02. 
 
 A CURIOUS INSTRUMENT. 
 V. 
 
 Charles. " Indeed'! and how high can you dart it?" 
 
 Father. " I ^ should be afraid of telling you to what a distance it will 
 reach, lest you should think I am jesting with you." 
 
 George. "Higher than this house, 1' suppose?" 
 
 Father. " Much higher." 
 
 Charles. " Then *, how do you '' get it again ? " 
 
 Father. "It' is easily cast down by a gende movement that does it 
 no injury." 
 
 George. " But who can do that ? " 
 
 Father. " The '' person whose business it is to take care of it." 
 
 Charles. " Well **, I cannot understand you at all ; but do * tell us, 
 father, what it is chiefly used for ! " 
 
 1, X)aS h^drcl 2, Say * I almost fear to tell you what distances it can 
 
 reach, that (bamit) you may not believe that I am jesting with you', 3, *I 
 
 suppose', in interrogative sentences, may be elegantly rendered by the 
 adverb n>o1)I: 
 You have prepared your lesson well ©ie fjabcn 3T)re ?efticn (KUte U'o^t gut 
 
 to-day, / suppose ? ftubicrt ? 
 
 In elliptic sentences, where the verb is omitted, ftiol^t generally occupies tlie 
 first place. 4, The adv. bcntt must stand after the object e^. 5, The 
 
 pron. 'you', used in a general sense, is mostly rendered by the indef. pron. 
 lltnil. 6, It — down, (5'3 fciift ftcb . . . Icidit Jwtcber nac^ unten. The place of
 
 56 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 93. 
 
 the words by — injury ' is indicated by the three dots. 7, !I)eriftiii^e. 
 
 8, Well = Alas, Sicfc. 9, The English 'do', in sentences of entreaty, may 
 
 colloquially be rendered by the adverb fcorf) ; as — 
 
 Do give me the book, my child ! @ieb mir boc!^ bog S3uc^, metn ^iitbl 
 
 Section 93. 
 
 A CURIOUS INSTRUMENT. 
 VI. 
 
 Father. " Its * uses are so various that I know not which ^ to specify. 
 It ^ has been found very useful in deciphering (S. i, N. 3) old manuscripts, 
 and *, indeed, has its use in modern prints. It ^ will assist us greatly in 
 acquiring® all kinds of knowledge, and without it'' some of the most 
 sublime parts ^ of creation would be matters ^° of mere conjecture. It " 
 must be confessed, however, that very much depends on a^^ proper 
 application of it, being (S. 30, N. 4) possessed by many persons who 
 appear to have no ^^ adequate sense of its value, but ^* who employ it 
 only for the most low and common purposes, without even thinking, 
 apparently, of the noble uses ^^ for which it is designed, or of the ex- 
 quisite^® gratification" (S. 16, N. 10) it is capable of affording. It^* is 
 indeed in order to excite in your minds some higher sense of its value 
 than you might otherwise have entertained, that I am giving you this 
 previous description." 
 
 George. " Well ihen^ tell us something more about it (S. 4, N. 5, B)!' 
 Father. "It is also of" a very penetrating quality, and it can often 
 discover secrets which can be detected by no other means. It ^^ must 
 be owned, however, that "^^ it is equally prone to reveal them '^^" 
 
 1, Its — various = It serves for (511) such (fo) various purposes (3h''eff, m.). 
 2, which — specify = which I shall specify (aufii()ren). 3, It — useful = One 
 
 has found it of great use. 4, and — prints = and also in (bci) our modern 
 
 printing it is indeed of great use. 5, It — greatly = It helps us much. 
 
 6, ii^ ertceiben ; all kinds of, adeitei. 7, it = the same. 8, 'parts' here 
 
 ©ebiete. 9, Use the gen. of the def. art. 10, matters => objects. 
 
 11, It — however = I must however confess. 12, Use the def. art.; proper 
 = right ; of it = of the same. 13, no — sense = a wrong idea (Segriff, m.), 
 
 14, unb. 15, uses = purposes (3werf, m.). 16, unocrgleicllic^, i.e. in- 
 
 comparable. 17, ®cnup, m., i.e. enjoyment. 18, Say ' Only to awaken 
 
 in you a higher idea of its value than you probably (oeimutlid^) otherwise (fonft) 
 would have had (Pluperfect Subj.), I give you this previous (tjorlduftg) descrip- 
 tion'. 19, of — quaUty = very penetrative (fc^arfftc^tig). 20, Say 'But 
 (©cc^) I must confess. 21, that — prone = that it is just as much (eben fo 
 fe^r) prone ; prone = disposed, geneigt. 22, them = the same, to agree with 
 'secrets*. 
 
 Section 94. 
 
 A CURIOUS INSTRUMENT. 
 VII. 
 
 Charles. " What ! can it speak then ?" 
 
 Father. "It is sometimes said (S. 54, N. 13) to^ do so, especially 
 when * it happens to meet with ^ one of its own species."
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 94. 57 
 
 George. " What colour are * these instruments ? " 
 
 Father. " They vary ® considerably in this respect." 
 
 George. " Well, what colour is yours ? " 
 
 Father. " I believe it is of a darkish colour ; but if I shall confess 
 the truth (S. 27, N. 8), I must say that I never saw (S. 48, N. 2) it® in 
 my life." 
 
 Both. " Never ' saw it in your life ? " 
 
 Father. " No, nor * do I wish ; but I have seen a representation of it, 
 which (S. 48, N. 6) is so exact that my curiosity is quite satisfied." 
 
 George. " But why don't you look ' at the thing itself? " 
 
 Father. " I should be in great danger '° of losing it, if I " did." 
 
 Charles. " Then you could buy (S. 58, N. 8) another." 
 
 Father. " Nay^'^, I believe I could not prevail ^^ upon any one to part 
 with such (S. 28, N. 9) a thing"." 
 
 George. " Then, how did you get yours ? " 
 
 Father. " I am so fortunate as ^* to be possessed of more than one ; 
 but ^^ how I got them I really cannot recollect "." 
 
 Charles. " Not recollect 1 Why'*, you said you brought " them from 
 London to-night ! " 
 
 Father. " So ^° I did ; I should be sorry if I had left them behind me 
 (see App. § 36)." 
 
 Charles. " Now", father, do tell us the name of this curious instru- 
 ment!" 
 
 Father. " It is — the Eye." — Jane Taylor. 
 
 1, *to do so', referring to the preceding verb 'speak', mu^t be rendered by 
 the infinitive of that verb. 2, when — with = when it accidentally comes 
 
 together with. 3, with — species, mit cittern fcinesi^lcic^eit. 4, are = 
 
 have. 5, to vary considerably, fc^t tierfc^icbeit feitt. 6, Supply the 
 
 adverb nod) after the object. 7, Never — life? = You have never seen 
 
 it in your life ? 8, id) tin'ittfc^c c^ aud^ nic^t. 9, to look at a thing, fi^ citi 
 S)ittg atCfe^cti. 10, 'to be in great danger', here ©cfatjr laiifm. 11, Sup- 
 
 ply here the object 'eg'. 12, D neiit, 13, to prevail upon any one, 
 
 ictttanb jtbcvi/cbctt. 14, 'thing', here ©ccienfiaitb, m. 15, ttoc^ mcl)r a\6 
 
 timi ju befi^cn. 16, but — them, abet h?ie ic^ baju gcfettttttett biti. 17, to 
 
 recollect, fit^ et»a3 xn6 ©cbd^ttti^ j^uritcfrufctt. 18, The English ' why ' is, 
 
 in this instance, best rendered by the adverb ' ja ', which place after the verb. 
 
 19, Use the Perf. Subj., according to App. §§ 28 and 30 ; here titit'britiincit. 
 
 20, ®c«)i§ habc id) bag. 21, Say ' But father, tell us at last,' and supply the 
 adverb ' boc^' after the pron. 'us'. Corap. Lange's German Manual, p. 354, 
 L. 31, N. 4. 
 
 Section 95. 
 
 AITGLO'- SAXON DRESS. 
 
 The dress of civilians in general consisted ^ of a shirt and tunic de- 
 scending ' to the knee, of linen or wool, according ^ to the season. A 
 belt was often worn round the waist ', and a short cloak over the whole. 
 Drawers, leather shoes or short boots and hose, or sandals, completed 
 the ordinary costume. Labourers (S. 3, N. 2) are generally represented 
 with shoes, but without hose. Females * of all ranks '' wore long, loose
 
 58 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 95, 
 
 garments reaching' to the ground, completely hiding (S. 16, N. 4) all' 
 symmetry of^ shape. Long hair, parted^" on the forehead, and falling" 
 naturally down the shoulders, with an ample ^^ beard and moustache, dis- 
 tinguish the Anglo-Saxons from the closely cropped'* Normans. Planche 
 remarks that '* the character of face, as delineated in illuminations, im- 
 mediately designates ^^ the age" wherein" the early ^* portraits of our 
 Lord^', which have'^" been reverently ^^ copied 10 '^ the present day, 
 were^' originally fabricated. — Milner, History of England. 
 
 1, Say 'The dress of the Anglo-Saxons'. 2, to consist of a thing, aai 
 
 cttrag bc(ief)en. 3, to descend = to reach ; to, an or aitf. Use the attributive 
 
 construction explained in S. 48, N. 6. 4, according to, je nac^. 5, waist 
 = body. 6, Females = Women. 7, ©tanb, m. 8, {ebe. 9, Use 
 
 the gen. of the def. art.; form, ©efialt, f. 10, gcf^citelt; on the forehead 
 
 = in the middle. Use the attributive construction. 11, and falling = 
 
 which fell. 12, t»cf[. 13, furg gefi^orcu. 14, that — illuminations, 
 
 iaf ber ©ejic^t^tl^^jug in ben Slbtiilbungen. 15, bciiimmcu. 16, Seit^ltct, m., 
 
 i.e. epoch. 17, wherein = in which. 18, * early', here = first. 19, Lord 
 = Saviour, ^citanb, m. 20, Use the active voice with 'man'. Comp. S. 4, 
 
 N. 4. 21, fo vietattofl. 22, big auf. 23, Say ' were first (juctft) 
 
 made (an'fcrtiflen) '. 
 
 Section 96. 
 
 THE GLACIERS AT' SUNSET'. 
 
 L 
 
 At a distance these glaciers, as ' I have said before, look * like frozen 
 rivers (S. 26, N. 3); when® one approaches nearer, or when they press® 
 downward '' into the valley, they look * like immense crystals and pillars ' 
 of ice piled '" together in every conceivable form. The effect " of this 
 pile '^ of ice, lying (S. 48, N. 6) directly^' in the lap of* green grass and 
 flowers, is quite singular. Before we had entered ^® the valley, the sun 
 had gone down ; the sky behind the mountains was clear, and it" seemed 
 for a few moments as if darkness *^ was rapidly coming on. But " in 
 a few moments commenced a scene " of transfiguration, more ^° glorious 
 than anything I had witnessed yet. The cold, white, dismal fields *' of 
 ice gradually changed ^'^ into hues^^ of the most beautiful rose colour-*. 
 A" bank of white clouds, which rested ^^ above the mountains, kindled ^^ 
 and glared "^^ as ^"^ if some spirit of light had entered into them. 
 
 1, bci, contracted with the dat. of the def. art. 2, Comp. S. 26. 3, Place 
 the words 'as — before' at the head of the whole passage; 'at a distance', in 
 ber (Sntfcrnung. For the constr. see App. § 15. 4, 'to look like', here 
 
 'dt)nlic^ fc^en', which requires the dat. 5, The clause 'when — nearer' 
 
 maybe briefly rendered by 'in ber Dldfje', i.e. 'close by'. 6, l^inein'bringen. 
 
 7, abnjdrtS. 8, 'to look* may here be rendered by anS'fftjen, to avoid re- 
 
 petition j 'like' must then be turned by 'wie'. 9, To render ' pillars of 
 
 ice' form a comp. n. analagous to 'ice-pillars'. 10, to pile together, 
 
 auf fc^ic^tcn ; use the attributive constr. 11, Sinbrncf, m. 12, pile of 
 
 ice, (Sigmajfe, f. 13, unmittelbat. 14, Use the gen. of the def. art. 
 
 15, betreten, v. tr. 16, it seemed = it had the appearance. The adverbial 
 
 circumstance of time ^for a few moments' may be emphasized by being placed
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 96. 59 
 
 immediately after the conj. 'and'. 17, Darkness is coming on, bie 2)un; 
 
 felt)cit btid;t i)crein. 18, But — moments = But soon. 19, Form a 
 
 comp. n. 20, The passage 'more — yet' may be elegantly rendered by 
 
 * iweld^c aflcS Bcveitg ©cf^aiite x\o<ii an ^cxtHdifeit iibertvaf' . 21, Form a comp. n. 
 22, to change into something, in it\va6 iV bercje^en. 23, S^avteiitcue. 24, 9Jo-- 
 fenrot, n. 25, A — clouds, 6in toeife^ ®ett)o(f. 26, rested = hung. 
 
 27, kindled = reddened (crro'tcu). 28, glared = glowed (ergtii'tjcn). 
 
 29, as — them, tvii con ciuem Sidjtacijle evfiiKt. 
 
 Sectio7i 97. 
 
 THE GliACIERS AT SUNSET. 
 
 II. 
 
 You * did not lose your idea of the dazzling, spiritual whiteness of the 
 snow ; yet you seemed to see it through a rosy veil, the sharp edges of 
 the glaciers and the hollows between the peaks reflecting wavering tints 
 of lilac and purple. The effect ^ was solemn and spiritual above every- 
 thing I have ever seen. These ^ words, which * had often been in my 
 mind through the day, and ^ which occurred more often than any others 
 while I was travelling through the Alps, came into my mind with a pomp 
 and magnificence of meaning unknown before : — " For by (biirc^) Him 
 were all things created that are in * heaven and that are in earth, visible 
 and invisible, whether '' they be thrones, or dominions, or principalities, 
 or powers*: all things were created by Him and for Him: and He is 
 before* all things, and by Him all things consist^" (Col. i. i6, 17)." — 
 Mrs. Beecher Stowe. 
 
 1, Say ' The idea (Silt), n.) of the dazzling, spiritual (geijlcvfjaft) whiteness of 
 the snow lost itself not ; it seemed, however, as if one saw it (a(^ fdtje man H) 
 through a rosy veil, whilst the sharp edges (B^irff, f-) of the glaciers and the 
 hollows (iiBerticfung, f.) between the peaks were beaming (crjlra^Ien) in wavering 
 (unbcjlimmt) colours of lilac and purple'. 2, Say 'The impression ((Sin; 
 
 tiiirf, m.) of it (S. 4, N. 5, B) surpassed in (an) solemnity and sublimity every- 
 thing (allcg, S. 3, N. 7) that I had (App. § 22) ever seen'. 3, Say 'The 
 following words'. 4, which — mind, bie ntir ... oft »cc ber @ee(e gcfianben. 
 5, and — before = and of (an) which I was most reminded during my Alpine 
 journey (Sllpenrcife), revealed themselves only (evfi) now to my mind in their 
 whole splendour and magnificence. 6, in — earth, im Jpimmcl unb auf 
 (Srben. 7, whether they be, feicn jle. 8, ©ewalten. 8, is before 
 — stands above. 10, befteijen, which place after ' Him'. 
 
 Section 98. 
 
 THE LOST CHILD FOUNDS 
 
 I. 
 
 A few years since, in the United States of America, a child was lost ' 
 in the woods. Darkness (S. 3, N. 2) was rapidly coming on^ and the 
 alarmed father, accompanied by some of his neighbours, hastened away 
 in * search of the lost child. The '■' search continued in vain till nine 
 o'clock in the evening. Then the alarm bell was rung ', and the cry of
 
 6o GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 98. 
 
 fire ' soon resounded through the streets. It * was, however, ascertained 
 that * it was not fire which caused the alarm, and that the bell tolled ^^ to 
 spread the more " solemn tidings '^'^ of a child lost ". 
 
 Every heart sympathised " in the sorrows of the distracted '^ parents, 
 and multitudes'^ of the people" were seen (S. 4, N. 4) ascending the 
 hill upon the declivity of which the village was situated '*, to " aid in the 
 search. The night passed away, the morning dawned, and yet no tidings 
 came. The sun arose. The whole landscape glittered in the rays of the 
 morning sun. But the village was deserted and still; the shops were 
 closed, and business was hushed ^°. Mothers ^^ were walking ^ the streets 
 with sympathising" countenances and anxious ^^ hearts. There-* was 
 but one thought there : — What has become of '^^ the lost'' child? 
 
 1, ©ag irietergefunlcne ^inb. 2, to be lost, fi^ ticrirvcit. 3, to come 
 
 on, ^cvan'riirten. 4, in — child = to seek the missed child. 5, The — 
 
 evening = Till 9 o'clock in the evening (abeub^) their endeavours had remained 
 without success (cvfol^(cS). Remember that the verbs feitt, tPcr&eit, and 
 bleibeit are conjugated with the auxiliary fcilt. 6, jie^cn. 7, Form 
 a compound noun by combining the corresponding German terms of the nouns 
 'fire' and 'cry' (S. 36, N. 7, ^). 8, it — ascertained, (S3 Mte ftd^ [ttci) 
 
 l)craug. 8, that — alarm = that the alarm was not caused through fire. 
 
 10, crtoncn. 11, more solemn = still more dreadful. 12, tidings = 
 
 message. 13, Use the p. p. of the verb vermiffen. See S. 7, N. 3, J. 
 
 14, Say 'shared the sorrow' (Summer, m., which is only used in the Sing.). 
 
 15, angftcrfiiKt. 16, ®^aren. 17, of the people = of country-people. 
 18, to be situated, liegen. 19, to — search, um mit fiii^cn ju tjelfcn. 20, 'to 
 be hushed', here = to rest. 21, Say ' The women'. 22, to walk the 
 streets, auf ben Stra^cn iniifjev'ge^en. 23, tcifiic:^meiib. 24, ©6 ttax iiur 
 cin ©ebatife, bcr alk cvfiillte. 25, auS. 
 
 Section 99. 
 
 THE LOST CHILD POUND. 
 II. 
 
 About^ nine in'^ the morning the signal gun was fired, which announced 
 that the child was found (S. 4, N. 4), and for^ some time the suspense 
 was dreadful. Was the child found a* mangled corpse, or was it alive and 
 well ? Soon (App. § 14) a joyful shout^ proclaimed the safety of the child. 
 A procession was formed ^ by those engaged ^ in the search. The child 
 was placed upon a litter, hastily constructed ^ from the boughs of trees 
 (S. 36, N. 7, A\ and borne^ in triumph at'° the head" of the procession. 
 
 When they arrived at the brow'^ of the hill, they stoppedy^r a moment, 
 and proclaimed their success with three loud and animated '^ cheers ". 
 The mother could no longer restrain her feelings. She rushed into '^ the 
 street, clasped her " child to her bosom, and wept aloud. Every " eye 
 was suffused with tears, andyir a moment all was silent. 
 
 But suddenly some one gave a^^ signal for'® a shout. One long, loud, 
 and happy note of joy'^" rose from^^ the assembled multitude'^'^ who then 
 dispersed to (S. 19, N. 7) return home and to resume^' their business. — 
 Jacob Abbott.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 99. 5 1 
 
 1, ge^cn. 2, in the morning, morgcng. 3, for — time, einc ^nt laiig. 
 
 4, a = as a = al«. 5, joyful shout, gveul)ctu^cf($rci (S. 76, 22, 5). 6, Use 
 
 the reflective form ftc^ bilben; by, ecu. 7, lvctd)e fid) bci ber SUijfinbung beg 
 
 .llinbeg bctciligt t)atteu. 8, Use the attributive construction pointed out 
 
 in S. 7, N. 3 ; constructed, jufam'mengefiigt ; from, au3. 9, cinf)er'tia9en. 
 
 10, an. 11, ©pi^c, f. 12, brow = top. 13, animated = fiery. 
 
 14, §uvvag. 15, auf. 16, her = the. 17, Say ' No eye was with- 
 
 out tears (tf)vanenleer) '. 18, Use the def. art. 19, ,^u. _ 20, happy — 
 
 joy, form a comp. noun of the corresponding German terms 'joy' and 'cry'. 
 21, au0. 22, aJicticje, f. 23, to resume business, fid; an fein ©efc^dft 
 
 begeben. 
 
 Section 100. 
 
 PERSPIRATION. 
 
 Perspiration is the evacuation ^ of the juices of the body through the 
 pores of the skin. It has been calculated (S. 4, N. 4) that there are- 
 above three hundred millions 0/ pores in the glands of the skin which 
 covers the body of a middle-sized man. Through these pores more than 
 one half* of what we eat and drink passes off^ by ^ insensible* perspira- 
 tion. If we consume eight pounds of food in'' a day (App. § 9 ; S. 27, 
 N. 8), five pounds of it (S. 4, N. 5, B) are insensibly discharged * by 
 perspiration. During® a night of seven hours' sleep we perspire about 
 two ^^ pounds and a half. At an average we may ^^ estimate the dis- 
 charge ^ by ^^ sensible and insensible perspiration at '^^ from half an ounce 
 to" four ounces per hour. This (2)ieg) is a most^^ wonderful part'^ of 
 the animal economy, and " is absolutely necessary to ^* our health, and 
 even to our very existence. — The Rev. Dr. Dick. 
 
 1, 2lugfd)cibung, f. 2, ' (there) to be', here fid) bcfinbcn. Place the re- 
 
 flective pron. after the conjunction ba§. The words 'above — pores' come 
 after the relative clause 'which — man', after which place the verb bcfTUteu. 
 3, entipcid)cn. 4, bie ^alftc. 5, mittclft. 6, unmevflic^. 7, an. 
 
 8, auS'fc^cibcn. 9, Say ' During a seven hours' (fiebenftiinbig) sleep'. 10, two 
 pounds and a half, brittcf)alb^funb. 11, may = can. 12, burc^. 13, auf. 
 14, big. 15, Use the superlative of the adv. ftod). 16, part — economy, 
 (Sinrid)tun9 tm tifvif^eu Drganiginng. 17, Substitute a relative pronoun for 
 
 the conjunction ' and', which will improve the sentence very much. 18, fQv. 
 
 Section 101. 
 
 THE DRAMA OP THE FRENCH^ REVOLUTION OP 1848. 
 
 I. 
 
 Our first scene is a palace ; the period ^ winter ; the time ' morning, 
 and the weather cold and miserable *. It is ten o'clock, and the King 
 of France with his wife "* and family are •■' discovered at the breakfast table. 
 A splendid beginning ! Calmness '' is the prevailing expression of every 
 countenance save one — the king's daughter-in-law*, who looks anxious 
 and disturbed. Light* domestic talk, such as '° becomes princes and the 
 gilded roof that" overhangs them, occupies ^'^ the moments. Hush"! 
 Whilst the lacqueys, dressed (S. 7, N. 3, A) in gold and scarlet, move'* 
 noiselessly about the room, a noise is heard without '^ It" becomes
 
 6a GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION lOI. 
 
 more" audible by degrees. Suddenly the door flies open, and two" men 
 enter, pale as ghosts. They'' are Ministers of State (S. 76, N. 22, A). 
 They have news to communicate. Discontent prevails in the city ; the '^^ 
 populace are out ; the dragoons have surrendered their sabres, the soldiers 
 their arms, within'^' sight of the apartment in which the king had just now 
 enjoyed his meal, and his daughter-in-law had looked ^^ so sad. 
 
 1, National adjectives require a small initial in German. 2, period 
 = season. 3, time = day-time (S. 76, N. 22, B). Connect the two nouns 
 
 by means of the genitive inflection c3. 4, vaiif). 5, wife, consort, 
 
 ^Cltta^lilt, which term generally applies to the wife of a king, or to that of 
 persons of the upper ranks of society. — The possessive adj. pron. is best 
 repeated before the next noun. 6, Since the subject begins the sentence, 
 
 the verb must be placed immediately after it. Say ' The king of France 
 sits, etc.', and transl. the words 'at — table* briefly thus: bcim SrMjftiidetifdic. 
 7, Calmness — disturbed. This period is best construed thus: With /i&f ex- 
 ception of the king's daughter-in-law (i.e. the daughter-in-law of the king), 
 who looks anxious and disturbed, bear (App. § 14) all the faces the expression 
 of (S. 3, N. 2) calmness. — S)cr Jtoiiig Wax Subirig $()itivp, gcb. ben 6.Dftob. 1773 
 ju paxis, attefiec ©o()n be3 •^crjogg ?iibtxng ^^ilipp »on Drlc'ang. ^<x^ bcr 3ulircvc; 
 lution t»on 1830 bcjticq cr fvaft Jlatnmei-bcf(^luffeg viom 7. SUuv at^ .Konig ber ^ranjoffit 
 ben !£^ron. IDurc^ bic gebntarrcuoliition lion 1848 gefturjt, fic^ ev nadi ©ngUuib, too cv 
 fortan in (Slavemont untcv bem Xitd cine^ ©rafen »on 5JJcui(h) lebte nnb im Sa^vc 1850 
 fiavb. Seine ®cmal)lin n?ar SRatia Slntalie »on ©icilien, ivelcl^c ebenfaKs in 
 (Sng(anb ftarb. _ 8, 2)ie ©c&unegertocfjtev beg .flonigg wax i^elene, Jpergogin »on 
 DrUang, »cvniihvete Ocma^Un beS im 3a^rc 1842 infolge cineS @^3Vitnge^ anS bent 
 SfBagen beim 3)uv(^gel)en bet ^fevbe cerungliicften •^er^cgS go^binanb »on Orleans, 
 bee dltejicn ©of)nc6 beg JlonigS Subtoig ^l)ilipp, toelc^er ad)t JJinbev tjatte. 9, Sup- 
 ply the indef. art. before the adj. 'light'; 'domestic', here = confidential ; 
 talk = conversation. 10, such as, loic, after which supply the pron. (tc to 
 
 agree with 'conversation'. It becomes princes, eg \^a^t ftc^ fitr Siirf^f"' 
 11, ' tbat — them', may be briefly turned by 'over them'. 12, occupies 
 
 — moments, Id^t bie 3cit fdjnefl bal^ingefjen. 13, Jpcvd) ! 14, to move, 
 ft^ bewegen; about the room = in the room. 15, without = outside. 
 16, Use here a demonstrative pronoun to agree with 'noise'. 17, more 
 
 — degrees = louder and louder. 18, two men pale as ghosts, jtoei geijlevs 
 bletd)e Ocikttcn. 19, They are, m finb. 20, S)er ^obcl ifi auf ben Seinen. 
 21, within — meal = and this almost (fafi) immediately in front of (Dor) the 
 windows of the room in which the king had just now breakfasted. — Use the 
 verb in the Imperfect, and render Just noiv by foeben. 22, 'to look sad', 
 here tvfibe ein^ev'bliffcn, which use likewise in the Imperfect. — The German 
 Imperfect is chiefly used, as a historical tense and to express a past 
 action or occurrence with reference to another. It is, however, like- 
 wise used to denote the continuance of an action, to describe a certain state, 
 and to express customary and habitual action. Comp. S. 48, N. 2, for the use 
 of the Perfect. 
 
 Section 102. 
 
 THE DRAMA OF THE FRENCH REVOLUTION OF 1848. 
 
 II. 
 
 What is to be done ? The king is thunderstruck \ hesitates for a 
 moment, and'^ then, urged' by the queen, instantly leaves the room. 
 The* queen follows^ her husband with her (S. 43, N. 9, A) eyes from
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 102. 6^ 
 
 the palace window. She sees* him on horseback' reviewing^ the National 
 Guards ^ She has no fear, neither '° has he. What " more ? He re- 
 turns, accompanied ^ by ^^ the man whom ", yesterday, to satisfy public 
 clamour, he created Prime Minister. Has the Minister power to save his 
 master.? You (S. 92, N. 5) observe at^^ a glance that^'^ he is far more 
 anxious to save himself. He craves'* permission to resign. Permissions^ 
 is granted, when (S. 4, N. 2) a volley ^^ is (S. 4, N. 4) heard close ^^ to 
 their ears. What does it mean? This'^" man will tell you who now 
 enters. The King has a pen in his hand, with which he is about (S. 6, 
 N. 4) to appoint his new Prime Minister. " Sign^^ not," shouts the^^ last 
 comer, a ^' man of the press, with the face ^* of a student, and the spirit ^'' 
 of a soldier. " Sign rather ^* your own abdication." The situation is 
 fine'''. The pen drops ^* from the King's fingers; the speaker^' takes it 
 up, and quietly^" replaces'^ it in the Monarch's hand (see S. 43, N. 9). 
 
 1, trie i^cm ©cuncv c^cvudit. 2, Here place the verb 'leaves'. 3, The 
 
 Past (Perfect) Participle is often used elliptically to denote an ex- 
 isting state or condition; as — 
 
 Urged by his father, he instantly left 2>ou foiticm 9>ater gebraiigt, Vcrtief er 
 the room. ciligft fcaef Bimmcr. 
 
 4, Construe this period by beginning with the adverbial clause 'from the 
 palace window', »oii ben 5'ciiftevu be(S -palaf^eei a 116. The verb must then follow 
 immediately. To denote a starting point with respect to place, the EngHsh 
 preposition 'from' is generally translated by yoii followed by the prepositional 
 adverb rtll§, or by aug . . . I)ii:au6 when the verb indicates a motion from one 
 place to another. In relation to time we use VOII . . . rtll, which often cor- 
 responds to the English ' beginning with ', or to ' from ' followed by 
 'forwards' ; as — 
 
 Beginning ivith to-morrow {From to- a3on ntor^cii an luufycu ©ie jcbcn STag 
 morroiu forijuards) you must take fpajieicii gcljeii. 
 
 a walk every day. 
 
 5, fotgen requires the dative. 6, See S. 78, N. 14. 7, ju ^>ferbe. 
 8, nutficrn. 9, the National Guards, bie ^flaticnalgarbe. 10, neither has 
 he = and he also not. 11, SIhi^ gicbt't? tveitcv? 12, by the man, vcn 
 ciiiem 3)Jannf. 13, 'whom — Minister', construe 'whom he only (crfi) 
 yesterday appointed Prime Minister, to satisfy (gcm'igcn, with the dat.) the im- 
 petuous (ungoftum) demands of the people'. To appoint, to create, crucnticii. 
 Verbs denoting choosing and appointing, as rritrittirit, iuarf)ftt, and 
 rnvnblril, to choose, to elect, require in German an Accusative followed by 
 the prep, j^ti with tlie dative, when in English they govern two Accusa- 
 tives in the active voice ; as — 
 
 The King appointed Prince Bismarck !Der ^enig ernannte ben JyuvPcn ©t^j 
 
 Prime Minister. niaicf J^um ^^vemievminil'iet. 
 
 S. 27, N. 4 will show the construction in connection with the passive voice. 
 14, at a glance, aiujenHiff(id). 15, that — anxious, bag e(J if)m incl me^r 
 
 barum ju t{}Hn ift. 16, to crave permission to resign, nni (irlaubnie bitten, 
 
 fcin Slmt nie'berlegcn ^u biufcn. 17, Use the def. art. with this noun, and 
 
 supply the dat. of the pers. pron. ev after the auxiliary ; the verb is in the 
 passive voice. 18, aTJuefetcnfalve, f. 19, close to their ears = in t/je 
 
 immediate neighbourhood. 20, 'This — enters' may be briefly rendered: 
 
 S)er [oebcn (Sintietcnbe nnvb c^ \\M ju evfcnncn gcbcn. 21, nntcvfdjvci'bcn, insep. 
 
 comp. str. v., which use in the 3rd pers. pi. of the Imperative mood. As a 
 mark of respect, the word ' ©ire' may be inserted after this clause. 22, the
 
 64 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION I02. 
 
 — comer, bcr ^emngctrctcne. 23, citi 3oitrna(ifi. 24, 'face', here = im- 
 pudence or boldness. 25, spirit = courage. 26, Iteber. 27, fine 
 = critical. 28, to drop from, entfaKen, with the dat. 29, Form a noun 
 of the present participle of the verb fprec^en. The noun (gprec^et applies, as 
 a rule, to the Speaker in the English House of Commons. The Speaker in 
 the Imperial German Reichstag is styled q^rdribciit. 30, In German, 
 when the subject stands before the verb, the adverb must never 
 precede the latter or, in compound forms, the copula (auxiliary 
 verb). Comp. App. § 9. 31, wiebet gebeu. 
 
 Section 103. 
 
 THE DRAMA OP THE mENCH REVOLUTION OP 1848. 
 
 III. 
 
 The audience ^ is already touched ^ The poor king looks around him 
 for* advice; no* one offers it; even the Prime Minister of® yesterday 
 is dumb; and in® another instant the'^ deed is done. The King has 
 abdicated in* favour of his grandson ^ Behind the scenes^" you (S. 92, 
 N. 5) hear sounds " of tumult and disorder, and your '^ heart is already 
 beating for the issue. The King doffs ^^ his robes '*, places his sword 
 upon the table, and^^, dressed (S. 102, N. 3) as a private gentleman^", is 
 evidently anxious ^^ to depart. The Queen would '* fain meet the coming 
 danger, but his ^' Majesty has already ordered the carriages. The horses 
 are put^** to, but horses and groom are shot^^ by the multitude^^ A broad 
 path leads from " the palace garden '^^, and at the end "^^ of it a friendly 
 hand ^"^ has brought two hired coaches ". " Let ^® us go," exclaims the 
 Monarch, and, leaning (S. 53, N. 12) heavily ^^ upon the Queen, whose ^^ 
 head is high and erect, he hurries on. The coaches are ^^ reached ; the 
 fugitives escape ^^ They arrive at St. Cloud ^^, at Versailles, but not to 
 (S. 19, N. 7. Supply the adv. bort) stay. On'* they go, and at half-past 
 eleven o'clock at night they descend at Dreux '^ 
 
 1, !I)ie Slmrefenben. 2, ticf crgriffcn fein. 3, nac^. 4, No — it, 
 
 .telnet erbietet fid) baju. 5, of yesterday, gejlern ernannt, which use attri- 
 
 butively before the noun. 6, in another = in the next. 7, ' to do 
 
 a deed', here cine Wrfunbe ooff^ie^en. 8, gu gunfien . ^ 0, 2)er (Snfet ftar 
 
 bee ultej^c ©c^u be^ serftorbenen J^erj^ogS J^erbinanb con Orleans imb feiner @emaf)(in 
 J^efenc. 2)icfec @o()n, lre(*cr noc^ (jeute (S)c5. 1886) in (SnglanD lebt, trdgt ben 
 9Janten Subwig $f)i(ipp fion DrleanS unb fu^rt ben !Iitel eitteS ®rafcn con ^ari^. <Sein 
 jiingerer ©ruber ift OJobert ^J^fH^ipP »o»i Drte'anS mit bcm iSitet -^erjcg con Sfiartre^, 
 augenblicffic^ ebenfafl^ in (Snglanb. 10, Use here the Sing. 11, sounds 
 
 — disorder = confusion and noise. 12, your — issue = our hearts beat already 
 in anxious expectation of the events to come (be3 Jlommenben). 13, con fii(^ 
 werfen. 14, 'robes', here StaatgHeibev. 15, Here place the verb 'is'. 
 16, ' priv. gentl.', here Sicili)!. 17, bcgierig; 'to depart', here = to flee. 
 18, would fain = would willingly; use the Imperf. Subj. of mogen with the adv. 
 gem. To meet danger, ber @efal)r bie ©time bieten. 19, ©e. (for ©eine) 
 ^DJajeftdt, after which place the verb in the 3rd pars, pi., which is customary in 
 speaking of Sovereigns. 20, to put to = to put the horses to, an'fpannen. 
 21, erfcl}ie^en. 22, ^l^obet, m. 23, 'from', here auS ... ^inau^. Comp. 
 S.io2,N.4. 24, Form a compound of 'castle' and 'garden'. 25, 'end', 
 here 2luggang, m. 26, Form a comp. of ' friend' and ' hand' according to
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 103. 65 
 
 S. 76, N. 22, B. 27, SWict^fiitfc^c, f. 28, The King would address 
 
 his Consort in the 2nd pers. sing. 29, to lean heavily upon, jtc^ fcjl fiu^eti 
 
 auf (with Ace). 30, wetc^e mit flo(i\ct()Dbcncm Jpaui^te cin()erfcl)rcitct. 31, are 
 reached, irerbeu bcfliegen. 32, entfommeu. 33, @au ct 15 loub bet 95crfai((e^ 
 Wat ju jcner 3eit eiiie bcUebte Oteftbcnj bet fonigUc^cn gamilie. * ©aiict' (abbreviated 
 @t.) comes from the Latin 'sanctus'. 34, @(3 ge()t loeiter. 35, ®rcur 
 
 ift ein ©tabtc^en im iTseviartement (SuresSoirc, an bet (Sure, mit 7000 (Sitmiol)uern imb 
 entt)dtt ein ©cfclc^ mit ©vabfapelle be^ ^aufe^ Drle'anS, \vdd)t von bev 3)iutter be3 ^onigg 
 Subwig $^iliv)) gegvunbet wurbe. 
 
 Section 104. 
 
 THE DRAMA OP THE FRENCH REVOLUTION OP 1848. 
 
 IV. 
 
 At one in the morning they are joined * by (oon) one of the King's 
 sons, who informs the unhappy pair that the claims "^ of the grandson 
 had^ been disregarded, and that the republic had been declared by the 
 people of Paris. It is enough. The King shaves off his whiskers, puts 
 on green spectacles, buries * his face in a handkerchief, speaks English, 
 and calls himself Smith. The wind is ® high, the coast ® dangerous, em- 
 barkation "^ is out of question at the moment, and before an opportunity 
 offers, the rank of the runaways * is discovered. Fortune (S. 3, N. 2), 
 however, is® with them : they escape^" capture and put to sea. Protected 
 by Heaven, they reach in safety " the hospitable shores of England. 
 
 Meanwhile ^^ what has happened in Paris ? The whole city has given 
 way" to a handful of rioters — men (S. 53, N. 9) who meditated an 
 "emeute**", and effected, to their astonishment, an actual revolution. 
 But^° two individuals upon the side of the King evinced a^* particle of 
 courage, and these were women — his wife and his daughter-in-law 
 already '■' mentioned. The " rest of the city were'^ faithless to themselves 
 as well as to the King. 
 
 1, 'to be joined', here cingefiott ircvbcn (to be overtaken). 2, Here 
 
 i^hronanfvviic^e. 3, According to the two rules in §§ 28 and 30 of the 
 
 Appendix, the Perfect of the Subjunctive Mood is to be used in this and the 
 following clause. The two clauses, however, can be joined by omitting the 
 second conjunction ' that' and the copula ' had been' of the first clause. Turn 
 'to disregard' by nicfct anerfcnnen; the words 'by — Paris' may be briefly ren- 
 dered by »on bcu ^arifcrn, which place immediately after the conjunction ' and'. 
 4, 'to bury', here = to veil, uml}ii(leu ; the prep, 'in' must then be rendered 
 by mit. 5, is high = blows violently. 6, Since the copula ' is ' was 
 
 changed into another verb in the previous clause, it must be inserted here. 
 7, The literal version of this clause would not read well. I propose to use 
 the following construction: it is (Gomp. N. 19) for the moment impossible to 
 embark. 8, runaways = fugitives. 9, is with them, ifi itjiicn (u'lb (pro- 
 
 pitious). 10, to escane capture, bcr 5>er()aftiing entgcfjen ; to put to sea, in 
 
 bie <Sec ftec^en. 11, gliirflic^; 'shores', here GJeftabe. 12, ^n^anfd^en, 
 
 which place after the copula 'has'. The verb 'to happen' is conjugated with 
 fein. 13, to give way = to yield, conj. with fein; handful, ^auficiu. 
 
 14, Slufrntn, m.; rioter, Sliifviifjrcr. 15, but = only; individuals = persons. 
 
 16, a particle of = a little. 17, bercu wtr fcf^cn erwdtintcn. 18, AlW^e 
 
 others in the city. 19, were — King = ' were just as faithless towards 
 
 VOL. IV. F
 
 66 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION IO4. 
 
 themselves as they were towards the King', and insert the grammatical subject 
 e^ after the pronoun 'they'. — The grammatical subject p^ is frequently 
 employed for emphasizing the real subject or to give more tone and 
 life to the construction ; as — (4^ fpvac^ tie ^eibcnfd}aft auS feinen Suflcn. It is, 
 moreover, used with all impersonal verbs ; as— e^ frievt, «3 tonnert, ee gitbt, eS ift. 
 
 Section 105. 
 
 THE DRAMA OF THE FRENCH REVOLUTION OF 1848. 
 
 V. 
 
 Princes, peers ^, soldiers, and statesmen were all sneaking ^ in hiding 
 places whilst the capital was ^ made over to the mercy of a few dozen 
 incendiaries. The daughter-in-law, seeing (S. 55, N. i) the King depart*, 
 carries^ her child to the Chamber of Deputies", and'^ there, with womanly 
 courage and queenly dignity, vindicates his rights. Her friends entreat 
 her to withdraw. Firm " in her purpose, she does not move * an inch. 
 She attempts to speak, but is interrupted; and^" he who interrupts is 
 himself silenced by an armed mob that pours" into the halP^ The 
 Duchess is forced away^^, and in that terrible extremity is separated from 
 her son. The child is seized by (S. 106, N. 23) a rough hand, which" 
 is strong enough to strike ^*, but " generous enough to save. The boy 
 is brought" to his mother, and mother and son pass^* from asylum to 
 asylum, chased'® by scythes, sabres, muskets, and, worse ^^ than all, the*^ 
 bloody passions of an infuriated " canaille". For^^ four days they^^ creep 
 into hiding places ; on the fifth day they are beyond the frontier. 
 
 1, The Peers of France were called 'Pairs', which term is used in German, 
 the final ^ being pronounced. 2, to sneak into hiding places, in ben SSinfel 
 
 hiec^en. 3, was made over = was left (iibeilaf'fen), with the dat. Construe 
 
 the sentence after the following model : — j)ie Scftung untvbe einct fleinen 9li(jaf)t 
 ©olbaten aiif ®nabe cbcr Uiignabc ubevlaffcn. 4, baoon'veifen. Gomp. App. § 19. 
 
 5, fii(}ren, before which the subjective pronoun ' she ' must be supplied. 
 
 6, !l)eputievteufammer, f. 7, and — rights = where she vindicates his rights 
 with, etc. 8, gtfl ifiren 3»»ccf oevfolgcnb. 9, juvii(f'»eict)en. 10, and 
 — himself, unb ber fie Uiiteibred}enbe feibft n)irb. 11, to pour = to rush. 
 12, ©aat, m. 13, gcWaltfam l)inwcg'bvdngcn. 14, After the rel. pron. 
 insert the adverb jtvac (certainly, it is true, indeed), which will give more force 
 to the clause. 15, barcin'gufc^lagen. 16, ' but ', here boc^, or aber anc^. 
 17, * to bring ', here = to bring back. 18, ' to pass ', here = to flee. 
 19, chased = pursued ; by, uon. 20, what is still worse. 21, son bcm 
 bhitgierigen 3ovn eiiies vafenben ^6be(3. 22, SBicr Siage lang. 23, they — 
 places = they try to conceal themselves. 
 
 Section 106. 
 
 THE DRAMA OF THE FRENCH REVOLUTION OF 1848. 
 
 VI. 
 
 Everybody is escaping at ^ the same moment. There is the King's 
 eldest son, pale and half-naked, throwing^ aside his tinsel and putting on 
 fustian, looking^ less than a man in his fear, trembling with* emotion, 
 and finally running ° like a madman for" his life. There are your''
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 106. 67 
 
 ministers, of* European reputation and wisdom unapproachable, bound- 
 ing' like antelopes, northwards", southwards, "anywhere, anywhere" 
 out of the city", which they and all the rest give up ^^ to indiscriminate 
 riot. And " now the crowning point of our first " tableau " is near. 
 The (S. 107, N. 13) mob, masters'* of Paris, are sacking the Tuileries. 
 The choicest moveables '^ are broken to atoms ; a group " takes ^' the 
 places which Royalty filled a moment ago at the breakfast table ; others 
 are in the wine cellar drinking^* themselves ten times drunk; others, 
 again *', are in the Queen's apartments, defiling '" that ^^ domestic sanc- 
 tuary. Outside the palace and on the top ^^ of it a flag is waved "^^ by -^ 
 a dozen men, whose ^° shouts and shrieks invite hundreds, whom ^^ you 
 see crawling up with no earthly object but immediately to (S. 19, N. 7) 
 slide down again. 
 
 1, at — moment = with them. 2, 'throwing — life'. The rendering of 
 
 this passage according to the rule of S. 16, N. 4 would be inelegant, since there 
 are a number of Present Participles following one another. I propose, there- 
 fore, to begin a new period here, saying: He throws aside his tinsel (here 
 Slitterjlaat, m.), puts on fustian, etc. ; to put on fustian, fic^ in ffiav^cnt flciben. 
 3, to look less than a man, faum cinem 3)ivUtiic d^iiUc^ fef)cn. 4, »or; emo- 
 
 tion = excitement. 5, baoou'laufen. 6, um feiit iJcbeii ju vctten. 7, your 
 = the. 8, of — unapproachable = incomparable in (an) European fame 
 
 and wisdom. 9, Since a relative clause follows immediately, it would be 
 
 bad taste to render this clause, beginning with a Present Participle, in the same 
 form. It will be best to commence a new period. Comp. N. 2. 10, na(^ 
 
 9?orb mib (Siib. 11, The second 'anywhere' is best turned by nur fjintveg. 
 
 12, bcm aflgcmcincn 9liifru()r preiggcbcn. 13, And — near = And now we 
 
 approach (ftc^ nd()cni, with Dat.) the end (@(^luf , m.) of our first tableau. The 
 French 'tableau' is used with French pronunciation in the same sense in 
 German. It is of the neuter gender and takes the inflection of an g in the 
 Gen. Sing. 14, masters of Paris = which rules in Paris; to rule, bc()cnfd)cn 
 
 (v. tr.). 15, moveables = objects ; atoms = pieces. 16, Insert the 
 
 noun 'men'. 17, cin'uc()men ; Royalty = the Royal family ; filled = occupied 
 
 (imie \)cAi\\, treated like a comp. sep. v.). The adverbial clause 'at the break- 
 fast table' is best placed after the verb 'takes'. 18, drinking themselves 
 drunk = and drink themselves drunk (jid) betviufcu). 19, Kiictcvum uiibcve. 
 20, and defile (befubcln). 21, bicfc geiieiliijtc Stiitte bcr §du(J(ic^fcit. 22, top 
 = roof; of it = of the same. 23, The preposition 'by' in connection 
 with the passive voice and establishing a relation with the noun or 
 pronoun that denotes the doer of the action expressed by the verb, 
 is rendered by WOll. 24, {)iit imb l}cv fc^weufcn. 25, To avoid a 
 succession of relative clauses, which should always be avoided, begin again a 
 new period here and say : The shouts and shrieks of these men invite (i)cvbfi's 
 Iccfeii), etc. 26, whom — but = who seem only to climb up (cvfkttcni) the 
 roof. The adv. 'immediately' comes after the conjunction 'to'. 
 
 Section 107. 
 
 THE DRAMA OF THE FRENCH REVOLUTION OF 1848. 
 
 VII. 
 
 There ^ is sentiment in all things. The apartments of the poor 
 daughter-in-law are reached (S. 4, N. 4, man), but, strange^ to say, are 
 respected^ in the midst of the work* of general destruction. Her 
 
 F 2
 
 68 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION loy. 
 
 children's toys are^ not even touched; the hat and (S. lo, N. 9) whip of 
 her dead* husband are'' still sacred; the books (S. 16, N. 10) she had 
 been reading lie still open*. It^ is an incident that cannot fail to'° elicit 
 rounds of applause. And whilst ^^ anarchy and destruction prevail here, 
 there ^^ is equal confusion and danger in the Chamber of Deputies. We 
 have seen the" mob forcing their way into (ju) that deliberative assembly. 
 Everybody" is now rushing to the tribune. Three ^* speakers become 
 marked from the rest ; their ^® names are Lamartine ^, Cr^mieux ^^, and 
 Ledru Rollin^%- they" gain the popular ear, and undertake (S. 51, N. 13) 
 to establish ^* order — a superhuman responsibility I A Provisional Go- 
 vernment is announced, named ^^ and approved on the spot. " To (S. 72, 
 N. 4) the Hotel de Ville ! " exclaims one ''». " To the Hotel de Ville ! " 
 respond a hundred ; and amidst ^^ yells and hootings, cries of " Vive la 
 R^publique ! " " Vive Lamartine ! " "A bas tout le monde 1 " Monsieur 
 Lamartine'^^ sets out for that celebrated building, followed by a train made** 
 up of the dregs of a seething metropolis. In the middle*^^ of the shouting 
 the curtain falls, and ^^ the first act terminates. Search ^'' the dramatic 
 annals of the world for such another. — Essays from " The Times ". 
 
 1, (Ss jxnbct iicf) jeboc^ ubevafi ncc^ eine ©v«r »on ©efu^t. 2, strange to say, 
 
 fonberbaveviucife. 3, are respected, werben bicfelbcn . . . tterfc^ont. 4, work 
 
 — destruction, aftgcmeinc^ 3cvftcrun^^U>eif. 5, blcibcn ; not touched = un- 
 
 touched. 6, Mrftovben. 7, fiub bent SInbcnfcn no(^ iKiUg. 8, Supply 
 
 here the adverb ba, which will make the sentence more emphatic. 9, It is, 
 
 (S6 ijl bic^. Comp. S. 104, N. 19. 10, to — applause, ben aflgemeinflen 
 
 ^cifatl :^er»orjuntfen. — S)icfer a3c»rfa(( cvndrt fic^ burc^ bie gro§e ^oputaritdt beg oer= 
 ftorbeneu •ipersogg unb feiner @ema^(in, ber ^crjogin ^elene von Orleans. 11, Place 
 the adv. 'here' after whilst, and use the adverb no(^ with it. 12, 'there 
 
 is', here finbet man, after which place ' in — Deputies'. 13, the — way = 
 
 how the mob forces its way (fid) einen 3Beg bafjnen). In German the verb 
 agrees in the Singular with a collective substantive in the Singular. 
 14, SlUeg ; to, auf. 15, £)rei Oiebner i}oxt man iibec bie anbern tjinan^. 16, ]u 
 ^eigcn. 17, they = these ; to gain the popular ear, ft(^ bcim 3io(fe ®(^ot 
 
 cerf^affen. 18, nneber ^er'iicKcn. 19, mit Seamen benannt. 20, Say 
 
 'one voice', and afterwards 'hundred other voices'. 21, unter. 22, unb 
 unter imcbev^olten 5lucirufen t»on . . . 23, 'to set out', here bie ^rojefficn 
 
 an'treten ; for, na^. The verb must of course appear before the Subject 
 Lamartine. Soui^ Sllp^onfc Samartine eitcgte ^undd^fi bur^ feine ^arten 
 Sugenbbic^tungen in ben jwan^igec Sat^ren aUgcmeine Slufmevffamfeit. 91acf)bem er 
 butc^ ben Xci eine3 Dbeimg em bebeutenbeg 93evntogen everbt ^atte, bereijlc er 1832 
 ben Orient, irorauf ev bie politifi^e Sanfbal^n betrat unb einev ber gtanjcnbllen Oiebner ber 
 ©ejjutiertenfattimer wuvbe. 9{a^ ber ?yebruavret>oUttion »on 1848 tt>urbe et a)2itgtieb 
 ber prooifcrifdnn Olegierung unb 2)iiniftcr be3 2ln6iiHivtigen, gog fic^ jcboc^ 1851 un; 
 jufrieben 5uriicf unb + am i. SJJdrj 1869 ju $af|t), \vo er in burftigcu a^er^dltnijfen 
 gelcbt ^ttc. Sfaac Slbot^j^e Sremieur, i'sSvaelit, n?urbe 1830 Stb»ofat am 
 ^affationgf)ofe ju ^arig, befdnivfte, feit 1842 SUhtglieb ber Jtammer, I)cftig ba^ ^init 
 fierium ©uijot unb forberte bie 3^efovmbe»egung. 'Jlac^ bev j^ebruavreuohition won 
 1848 warb er a)JitgUcb ber )?rooifovifd;)en Oiegierung, in ber er furje 3cit bag 3ufitjmini5 
 fierium befleibete. ^ad) ber iCa£)t beg ^ringcu i^cuig 9iapolecn jum ^U'dftbenten trat 
 er gur Dvpofition ubcr, rtarb beint <Staatgi'trei(^ am 2. S)ej. 185 1 ver^aftet, jebod^ balb 
 rtiieber freigelaJTen, worauf er fic^ auf feine 5prarig befi^rdnftc. 3m 3abie 1870, na^ 
 bem ^tm\i beg Jlaiferreic^g, noc^malg jum 5)?itglieb ber vrcinforifcfjeu 9iegierung ge; 
 m\)it, f|ielt er ftc^ ju ©ambctta unb marb fpdtcr 3JJitglieb ber SlaticnabcrfammUmg.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 107. 69 
 
 Slterant-re ^lugu^ic Scbru {RoUin irarb Slb»ofat, unb trat 1844 in bie hammer 
 ber !Dc<:futiertcn, nac^bcm er aU Slbvofat in »ic(en jjcUtifc^cn ^rojcjTcn jjlaibiert ^atte. (Sr 
 bctciligtc ftd^ Icbfiajit ki bcr Otcfovmagitation von 1847, irarb 1848 ailitgticb ber pxa 
 »i|'orifd}en Sflegierung unb SUiuijlcr beg Snnevn, tvat jcboc^ f(^cn im Suni be^felbcn Sat)reg 
 »on bcr flfJegicrung jururt. 3m 3uni 1849 ntu^tc er rttegen |5oUti[c^er Sntrigucn mij 
 ©nglanb fiiel)cn, »parb abwcfenb guv 2)e^>ortation ceruvtcilt unb lebte feitbem a\& 2Witg(ieb 
 be^ bortigen 9ic»oUition0fomiteeiS in Scnbou. Sm 3at)ve 1857 untrbe er mit aWai^^ini 
 einea ^omplot^ gegen iyiaj.ioteou III. angcfkgt unb abevmalg tterurteitt, unb fef^rte 
 cnblic^ am 26. «l)targ 1870 infclge ber (Svflavung ber 3?epubUf unb ber Vlmncftie nai) 
 ^an& gurucf, ctjnc fid) aber an ben bortigen (Svciguiffcu Ijertiovragcnb gu beteiligcu. 
 24, made up of, njclc^cr jtci^ au3 . . . gebilbct t)at ; seething, gdf)renb. 25, 3n« 
 
 mitten, followed by the Gen. 26, After 'and' supply the adv. fo, which 
 
 requires the constr, to be inverted. 27, Search — another. This passage 
 
 would not read well in a literal version, which may be altered thus : — Where 
 can we find in the dramatic annals of the history of the world (comp. n.) a 
 similar one (einen glei(!^cn). 
 
 Section 108. 
 
 EXPERIENCE IS THE BEST TEACHER ^ 
 
 A French student of (S. 3, N. 2) medicine lodged^ in the same 
 house in London with a man in a fever. This poor man was con- 
 stantly plagued by the nurse to drink, though ^ he nauseated the insipid 
 liquids that were presented to him. At last, when she * grew more 
 and more importunate, he whispered in her (S. 43, N. 9, B) ear: — 
 " For * God's sake bring me a salt herring, and I will drink as much as 
 you please*! " 
 
 The woman indulged "^ him in his request ; he devoured the 
 herring, drank plentifully, underwent ** a copious perspiration, and 
 recovered ^ 
 
 The French student inserted this aphorism^" in his journal" : — " A salt 
 herring cures ^^ an Englishman in a fever." 
 
 On" his return to (S. 72, N. 4) France he prescribed the same remedy 
 to the first patient in a fever * to whom he was called. 
 
 The patient died ; on which ^* the student inserted ^* in his journal the 
 following note: — "N.B. Though a salt herring cures an Englishman, 
 it '* kills a Frenchman." — W. C. Hazlitt, Anecdotes. 
 
 1, ?et)rerin, to agree with 'experience', which is feminine in German. 
 2, Here place the words 'in London — fever*; a man in a fever, ein Sifber^ 
 tranfer. 3, Construe the sentence 'though — him' after the following 
 
 model: ©ie mir gercic^ten gefd)macflo[cu ©ctvdnfc nnbevn mid) an. 4, Here 
 
 place the adv. 'at last'; more and more importunate, immev jubringlic^er. 
 5, Um ©ottceiunden. 6, wcKcn. 7, to indulge a request, einer SBittc 
 
 nnKfa^ren. 8, to undergo a copious perspiration, in tiid)tigen @d)liiei§ 
 
 gcraten (str. v.). 9, genefcn, str. v. 10, ?ef)rfa^. 11, Form a 
 
 comp. n. of 'day' and 'book' according to S. 76, N. 22, C 12, furieren ; 
 
 in a, vcm. 13, Say 'When he had returned to France'. 14, on 
 
 which = whereupon. 15, fd^reiben, after which place 'following note'. 
 
 16, fc ftirct cin Sranjofe baran.
 
 70 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION IO9. 
 
 Section 109. 
 
 ON^ SELF CULTURE. 
 
 (From' an address delivered to an assemblage of young men at Edinburgh.) 
 
 I^ stand before you a self-educated man. My education was* that 
 which was supplied at the humble parish schools of Scotland ; and it was 
 only^ when I® went to Edinburgh, a poor boy, that I devoted my 
 evenings, after the labours of the day, to the cultivation of '^ that intellect 
 which the Almighty has given me. From seven or eight in the morning 
 till nine or ten at night ^ was I a.t^ niy business as a bookseller's ap- 
 prentice ^°, and ^^ t't was only during hours after these, stolen from sleep, 
 that I could devote myself to study. I assure you that I did not read 
 novels ^^; my attention was devoted ^^ to physical science and other useful 
 matters ". During " that period I taught myself French. I look back ^® 
 to that time with great pleasure, and am almost sorry I have not to go ^' 
 through the same troubles again. I '* reaped more pleasure when I had 
 not a sixpence in my pocket, studying in a garret in Edinburgh, than I 
 now find when sitting amidst all the elegancies and comforts of a parlour. 
 — William Chambers. 
 
 1, iibcr (Sctbjibttbung. 2, 9lu« ; to deliver an address to an assemblage, 
 
 »or einer aSecfammtung eine 9tebc t)atten ; young men, junge Seute. 3, I —man. 
 This sentence does not allow of a literal rendering; say 'You see before you 
 a man who has educated himself (ftct) felbjt bitbcn or auS'bi(ben). 4, was — 
 
 Scotland = was such as (it) (eine fol^e, trie fte) is given (eitcilen) at (in) a simple 
 Scottish village-school. 5, The adverb ' only', when used in reference 
 to time, is turned by * crft', but in reference to number by ' lllir' ; as— 
 
 This man has only (but) one coat. ^u^ex SWann fyit nut eincn Oiccf. 
 
 It is only one o'clock. de ifi erfi ein Uf)r. 
 
 6, when — boy = when I, a poor boy, came to (S. 72, N. 4) Ed. 7, Con- 
 
 strue the clause ' of — me' according to S. 48, N. 6 ; intellect, ©ciji. 8, ' at 
 night', here abenb^, since ^ad^t applies only to the hours between 11 p.m. and 
 5 A.M. 9, at = in, contracted with the Dat. of the def, art. 10, Supply 
 
 here tt)atig (engaged). 11, Say 'and only during the later (fpdter) hours, 
 
 which I stole from sleep (bent (gd)[afe ab'fiet)Ien), could I ', etc, 12, Otoman , 
 
 m. 13, auf tiatiminffenfcfiaftli^c <Stubicn . . . gcvid^tet. 14, ©egenftanb, m. 
 
 15, ' During that period' may be briefly rendered by bamat^ ; to teach oneself 
 German, otjne Sel)vct 2)eutf^ (lubicrcn. 16, jurudblicEen. 17, to go 
 
 through troubles, aSefcblverben burc^'mac^cn ; again, no^ einmal. For the constr. 
 see App. § 19. 18, Say ' When (S. 4, N. 2) I had no sixpence (@ed)gpfen; 
 
 nig^ucf, n.) in my pocket and studied in a garret in E., I felt (fic^ fuf)(en) happier 
 than now, when (ba) I sit in an elegant and comfortable (bef)agtic^) parlour'. 
 
 Section 110. 
 
 GOETHE'S^ DEATH. 
 I. 
 
 The' following morning — it was the 22nd March 1832 — he tried to^ 
 walk a little up and down the room, but* after a turn, he found ^ himself 
 too feeble to continue. Reseating ^ himself in the easy chair, he chatted
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION TTO. 71 
 
 cheerfully with Ottilie [(S. 53, N. 9) his daughter-in-lawj on' the ap- 
 proaching spring, which would ^ be sure to restore him. He ' had no 
 idea of his end being so near. The name ^Ottilie was frequently on 
 his lips. She sat beside him, holding ^° his hand in both of hers. It was 
 now observed that his thoughts began to wander" incoherently. " See," 
 he exclaimed, " the lovely woman's head, with black curls, in splendid 
 colours — a ^^ dark background ! " Presently ^^ he saw a piece of paper 
 on the floor, and asked //lem how ^* they could leave Schiller's letters so 
 carelessly lying about. Then^® he slept softly, and, on^® awakening, 
 asked" for the sketches'^ (S. 16, N. 10) he had just seen — the" sketches 
 of his dream. 
 
 1, 3oI)ann SBolfgang won ©ettje, gcBorcu ben 22. Slugujl 1749 ju S^vanf; 
 fitrt **/2J?., gejicrben ben 22. Wlax\ 1832 ju 2Beimar, fann teo^l mit Oiec^t bev unis 
 vcrfalfle @fniu« [einer 3ctt gcuannt inerben, bereit iJittcratur cr imbeftritten bcf)errfd}te. 
 ©r wax S)ic^ter, 33iograpf), ^Jlatiirforfc^er, 5Utertumgfcrfd)ev, Jtritifcv, 5l|^f)etifer unb 
 ©taat^mann. 3n faft alien rcftifcfcen ©attiingcn ^cigtc ev jidi aU i^of(fitbetcr .ftiinftlev, 
 am fiebeiitenbjicn ab(v irat er ale Sijvifer. (§t I)interlie^ eincn cinjtgcn 'Boiya, bcfTcn graii 
 (Dttilif) untcii cm>d(}nt >rirb. 2, 9lm nd^jlcn SWcrgcn. 3, im 3immer auf 
 
 unb ab'gc^cn. 4, but — turn = but already after a few steps. 5, ftc^ 
 
 fu()(fu; 'to continue' may be briefly rendered by bajit. 6, After he had 
 
 seated himself again, etc. 7, fiber. 8, vvould be sure = would surely 
 
 (see App. §§ 28 and 30). 9, He — near = He had no idea of it (batten), 
 
 that his end was so near. 10, unb l)iett feine ^anb mit beiben Jpdnben um; 
 
 fc^lofTen. 11, umber'irren. 12, a = upon a. 13, Then. 14, irarum 
 man @(^i((erd S3iiefe fo fovglcg :^erumliegcn taffe, 15, Hereupon. 16, bcim 
 
 @rwadien. 17, fovberte er. 18, 93i(ber. 19, the — dream, feine 
 
 3;raumbilccr. 
 
 Section 111. 
 
 GOETHE'S DEATH. 
 II. 
 
 In silent anguish they^ now awaited the close now so surely ap- 
 proaching (S. 48, N. 6). His speech was becoming less and less dis- 
 tinct. The last words audible "^ were : " More Light I " The final * 
 darkness * grew apace, and he ® whose eternal longings had been for 
 more light, gave a parting cry for it as he was passing under the shadow 
 of death. 
 
 He continued to express himself by signs, drawing ^ letters ' ^vith his 
 forefinger in the air, while he' had strength, and finally, as life (S. 3, N. 2) 
 ebbed®, drawing^" figures slowly on the shawl which covered his legs. 
 At" half-past twelve he composed ^'^ himself in the corner of the easy 
 chair. His faithful watcher " placed a finger on her lips to intimate that 
 he was asleep '*. It was a sleep in which a life glided *^ from the world. 
 He^' woke no more. — G. H. Lewes, Life of Goethe. 
 
 1, they = his friends, bic <Scinen. 2, In ordinary prose adjectives quali- 
 
 fying a noun should precede it. 3, final = last. 4, ©unfet (n.) fticg 
 
 t)crniebcr. 5, he — death = he who had always longed (ft6 fcbncn) for (nadi) 
 
 more light, cried still parting for it fbanact>) when the night of death over- 
 shadowed him. 6, The conjunction iiiCicitl writh a finite verb is
 
 72 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION III. 
 
 frequently employed for rendering the English Participle in -ing 
 used in adverbial clauses of manner ; as — 
 
 Supporting himself on her arm he Snbctn er ftd^ auf i^ren Slrm ftutjtc, 
 slowly ascended the stairs. ftieg cr iangfam bie ilrcppe '^inauf. 
 
 7, S3u(I)ftabcn, which place after 'forefinger'. 8, After *he' insert the 
 adverb noc^. 9, balnn'puten. 10, drew he slowly figures (3d:^tcn), 
 etc. 11, llm I)alb einei. 12, to compose oneself in the corner, ft^ 
 rul)ig in bie Scfe .^uvud'legcii. 13, aCavtcrin. 14, Use the Present of the 
 Subj. App. § 28 and § 30. 15, fc^eibcn; from, aug. 16, Say 'Goethe' 
 instead of ' he ' ; woke = awoke ; no more, nid^t tt)ieber. 
 
 Sectmi 112. 
 
 ON TRAVELLING (S. 3, N. 2). 
 
 I ^ wish folks ^ in general would keep their eyes a little more open 
 when they travel by rail ^. When I see young people rolling along in 
 a luxurious* carriage, absorbed (S. 102, N. 3) in a trashy^ shilling novel ^ 
 and '' never lifting up their eyes to look out of the window, unconscious * 
 of all that* they are passing ; — of ^° the reverend antiquities, the admirable^^ 
 agriculture, the rich mid peaceful scenery ^^, the ^^ like of which no other 
 country upon earth can show (App. § 18); unconscious^*, too, ^ how 
 much they might ^"' learn of botany and geology, by ^® simply watching 
 the flowers along the railway banks, and the sections " in the cuttings " ; 
 — then it grieves me to see what " little use people make of the eyes and 
 the understanding which God has given them. They complain of '^^ a 
 dull " journey : but ^'^ it is not the journey which is dull ; it ^* is they who 
 are dull. Eyes '^^ have they, and see not ; ears have they, and hear not ; 
 mere ^^ dolls in smart clothes, too many of them, like the idols of the 
 heathen. — Charles Kingsley, Town Geology. 
 
 3, 3cf) nioc^te tro^t. 2, Say '(the) people (bie ?eitte) would use (Imperf. 
 
 Subj. of braudjen, App. § 32) in general the eyes a little more', etc. 3, mit 
 
 tier (Sifeuba^n reifeu. 4, luxurious = splendid ; for the rendering of the verbs 
 
 in this passage consult S. 78, N. 14, and for their position, App. § 19; to roll 
 along, ba()in'rof(en. 5, fc^led)t. 6, Form comp. n. according to S. 76, 
 
 N. 22, B. 7, and — eyes = so that they never lift up their eyes. This 
 
 constr. is necessary to avoid a repetition of participles. 8, nic^t^ a^ncnb. 
 
 8, tDorau fie »oriibevfal)ren. 10, Say 'nothing of. 11, excellent. 
 12, landscape. 13, the — which = as, wie jte (grammatical object; comp. 
 S. 51, N. 13. 14, auc^ jii(^t cinmal at)nenb. 15, I might learn much of 
 botany, id) fonnte vnet a3ctamf Icrncn. The subject 'they' place after 'geology' 
 and before the two verbs. 16, by — watching = if they would only watch 
 (beobac^teu) ; along 1— banks = on (an) the sides of the railway. 17, Sa^n; 
 i.>rojxl, n. 18, 5)urc^fticb, m. The two verbs must, of course, stand at the 
 end of the whole passage. 19, me ttienig, little (denoting quantity). 
 20, liber, with Ace. 21, dull = wearisome, lang^eilig. 22, but — dull 
 = but not the journey is dull. 23, fie fflbfi fnib e^ (Comp. S. 104, N. 19). 
 24, The inverted constr. would not read well here ; use therefore the ordinary 
 constr. 25, are nothing but (alg) dolls in fine clothes, and like (gleic^, 
 with Dat.) the idols (®c^cnbitbcr) of the heathens are there too many of them 
 (jinb i^rev ju oiele).
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION II3. 73 
 
 Section 113. 
 
 THE MANAGEMENT' OF THE BODY. 
 
 I have nothing new to say upon the management which the body 
 requires ^ The common rules are the best: — exercise without fatigue; 
 generous^ living without excess ; early rising, and moderation in sleeping. 
 These are the apothegms * of old women ; but if they are not attended 
 to®, happiness*^ becomes (App. § 15) so extremely difficult that^ very few 
 persons can attain ^ to it. In ^ this point of view, the care ^° of the body 
 becomes a " subject of elevation and importance. A walk in the fields, 
 an hour's ^^ less sleep, may " remove all these bodily vexations ^* and 
 disquietudes which are such formidable enemies to ^' virtue ; they may 
 enable ^' the mind ^^ to pursue ^^ its own resolves without that constant 
 train " of temptations to resist, and ^^ obstacles to overcome, which ^' it 
 always experiences from the bad organisation of its companion. — Sidney 
 Smith. 
 
 1, treatment. 2, beburfeti, govern, the Gen. 3, strengthening 
 
 food. 4, ScbcnSvcgcln. 5, to attend to, bcobac^tcn, v. tr. 6, the 
 
 acquisition of happiness. 7, Insert the adv. 'only' after 'that'. 8, I 
 
 cannot attain to it, id) fann cS iiicfct cvlangcit (v. tr.). 9, In — view, 93on 
 
 biefcm ©cjic^teipunfte au^ betracbtct, after which follows the verb (App. § 14). 
 10, *}>p[ci3e, f. 11, Say 'a grand (ev^aten) and important subject'. 12, an 
 hour. 13, can perhaps. 14, disturbances and troubles, ©tcningeu unb 
 
 33efd)n?frbcn. 15, Use the noun with the Gen. of the def. art. 16, mind 
 
 = soul. 17, befdfjitjen, v. tr. 18, fctgcii, with Dat, 19, 'train', 
 
 here = host, ^eer, n.; of, voii ; to resist, nnbevfie()eji, govern, the Dat. 20, Sup- 
 ply here 'those'. 21, the acquaintance of which (bercn) the soul always 
 owes (»crbanfcn, govern, the Dat.) to the defective organisation of its companion. 
 
 Section 114. 
 
 THE SOURCES 1 OF WATER. 
 
 There' are many sources of water. The first great source^ is the 
 ocean, which collects all the water from* the earth; this water contains 
 so large a quantity of salt, that none ^ of us can drink it. The sun, 
 however, bears * down upon the ocean's surface, and its headng ' rays 
 penetrating * the water, combine, as® it were, with it (S. 4, N. 5, B), and '" 
 raise it up. The atmosphere (S. 5, N. 2), like " a sponge, absorbs the " 
 vaporous water, carrying '^ it from the Equator to" the Arctic and the 
 Antartic regions; thus^^ distributing it north and south. It then con- 
 denses in the form of rain and of snow. When it sinks into the earth 
 and pours down the " mountain sides, it forms springs and rivulets, 
 entering^* (S. 16, N. 4) the ocean again in" the form of rivers. Man 
 catches'' it in tubs and cisterns, draws'^" it from^' the rivers, or digs 
 down '^"^ into the earth, and catches "^ it as it passes '* along beneath his 
 feet. Thus "^^ we have rain water, river water, and spring or well water. — 
 Dr. Lankester.
 
 74 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 1 14.. 
 
 1, Here lttqucf(ctt. 2, The water has many sources. 3, great = 
 
 chief; form a comp. n. 4, To render 'from the' use the Gen. of the 
 
 def. art. 5, none of us = nobody. 6, bears down upon = shines. 
 
 7, crirdrmenb. 8, penetrating = penetrate, buvdjbrin'gen, insep. comp. str. v. 
 
 9, as it were, gteid^fam. 10, and draw it upward. 11, Wit. 12, ia6 
 
 tterbunfiete SBaffer. 13, carries it. 14, nadj ben ncrblic^en unb fixblictjeu 
 
 ^polargegenbcn. 15, and distributes it north and southward. Comp. S. 71, 
 
 N. 2, the principle stated there applying likewise to other compound expressions 
 besides nouns. 16, the = on (an) the. 17, in the form of = as, which 
 
 place after the rel. pron. 18, to enter again the ocean, bent Djean hJtcber 
 
 guftrontcn. 19, anf fangen, sep. c. str. v. 20, to draw water, SBaffer 
 
 f^opfen. 21, au3. 22, down = deep. 23, fantmetn. 24, * to 
 
 pass along', here bafjin'jiief en. 25, 9luf biefe Sffieife. 
 
 Sectio7i 115. 
 
 THE ART OF ORATORY. 
 
 I * owe my success in life to one single fact ^ namely : — At ' the age of 
 twenty-seven* I commenced, and continued for years, the process of daily 
 speaking (S. 34, N. 10) upon the contents of some historical or scientific 
 book. These efforts ^ were made sometimes in a corn-field ®, at others ' 
 in the forest, and not unfrequently in some distant ^ barn, with ^ the horse 
 and ox for my auditors. It ^° is this early practice in the great art of all 
 arts that I am indebted for the primary and leading impulses that stimu- 
 lated me forward, and shaped and moulded my entire subsequent" destiny. 
 Improve ^^, then, the superior advantages (S. 16, N. 10) you here enjoy^'l 
 Let not^* a day pass^''^ without exercising (S. 34, N. 10) your powers'^ 
 of speech. There is (S. 82, N. 7) no power like '^ that of oratory. Caesar 
 controlled ^^ men by" exciting their fears ; Cicero ^° by^* captivating their 
 affection and swaying their passions. The influence of the one perished '^ 
 with its author ; that of the other continues '^'^ to this day. — Henry Clay'*. 
 
 1, To avoid beginning with the pronoun *I', which seldom looks well in 
 German, and is considered bad style in letters, place the object first, and con- 
 strue according to App. § 14. 2, fact = deed or action = %\^aX, f.; 
 fact = event (as in this instance) = ^batfarfje, f.; the Latin factum, pi. 
 ^acta or ^actcn, is, hovp-ever, used in both significations. 3, At 
 the, 3m. 4, Supply 'years', and construe thus: I began the process 
 (aSerfafiren, n.), which I continued for years (ja^retang) to speak daily about 
 (iiber, with Ace), etc. ; some = a. 5, efforts = exercises. 6, Here 
 place the verb. 7, jumeiten. 8, enttegen. 9, whereby horse and 
 ox formed my audience (3nf)6t:er). 10, It — forward = To this early 
 practice ... I owe the first and leading impulses (!Iviebfebcrn) which urged me 
 forward (oor'tt)drt3trciben, sep. comp. str. v.). 11, subsequent --= later. 
 12, Improve = Use, which use in the 2nd psrs. pi.; then = therefore; superior 
 = great. 13, genic^en. 14, 'Not' in connection with the indef. art. 
 must generally be rendered by 'no'. 15, ooriVfievgcfjen. 16, 9tebe; 
 talent, n. 17, Uictdf)e ber bev ©evcbfanifeit gleic^fommt. 18, tet)evvfd)en. 
 19, bnvd^ (Srregnng ; render ' their' by the Gen. of the def. art. 20, Supply 
 here 'controUed them' (M)crrf4tc fie babur^, ba§ er . . .). Comp. and read 
 carefully S. 87, N. 6, and also S. i, N. 3. The verb beftevvfc^en requires the 
 preposition burc^. 21, by — passions = that he gained (ftc^ genniuien) their
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 1 1 5. 75 
 
 love and guided (tenfen) their passions. 22, cvf^avb ; its author = the author 
 
 of the same (to agree with 'influence'). 23, fcrt'l)aueiii, sep. c. w. v.; to 
 
 this day, big auf ben t^futigm 3;a9. 24, .§enrt) (Ski) (geb. 1777 in aSirginicu, 
 
 + 1852 in aBaftjington) itar citi amerifauif^er ©taatgmann, wd^a ft(^ aU ©ot)n 
 eineg einfai^en 2anbniatniet3 big ju ben t)C(I)ftcn Jimtern bc3 Staats f)craufavbcitcte ; 
 1824 toarb er junt ©taatgfefrctdv bc^ SluSUidrtigen ernannt nnb 1829 wax n unter 
 Sacffong 5)3rafibcntfd)aft im Jlcngrc§ gufjrcr bcr Dpiiofiticn, a\6 \v([d)ex er bie @4u^^ 
 gof(c unb bie 9iationalbanf verteibigtc. 3m 3af)re 1849 bracJite ev ben ^omvromi^ ^ii- 
 ftanbe, \wmd) bent ©itbcn bag OJed^t bet a5etfplgung pc^tiget ©tlaioen buvd^ bag 
 ®ebiet ber Union eingeidnmt iwaib. 
 
 Section 116. 
 
 EARLY PRIVATIONS'. 
 
 Admiral Jervis, Earl of St. Vincent, tells us the * story of his early 
 struggles, and, among ^ other things, of his determination (S. i, N. 2) 
 to * keep out of debt. " My father had a very large family," said he, 
 " with limited means. He gave me twenty pounds (S. 58, N. 3) at * 
 starting, and that was all (S. 3, N. 7) he ever" gave me. After I had 
 been a considerable time at ^ the station at sea I ' drew for twenty more, 
 but the bill came * back protested, I ' was mortified " at this rebuke, and 
 made " a promise, which I have ever ^- kept, that " I would never draw 
 another bill without^* a certainty of its being paid. I immediately changed 
 my mode of living, quitted '* my mess ", lived ''^ alone, and ^^ took up the 
 ship's allowance, which I found quite sufficient ; washed and mended '' 
 my 07vn clothes; made a pair ^trousers out o/the ticking of my bed^^ 
 and, having (S. 55, N. i) by^^ these means saved as much money as^'^ 
 would redeem my honour, I took'^* up my bill. From (S. 102, N. 4) 
 that time to this I ^* have taken care to ^'' keep within my means." 
 
 Jervis (S. 5, N, 2) for six years endured pinching ^^ privation, but pre- 
 served his integrity, studied his profession with success, and gradually 
 rose" by merit and bravery to the highest rank. — S, Smiles, Self-Help. 
 
 1, Early Privations, 3ngcnbentbcl)iungcn ; the story — struggles. This passage, 
 literally rendered, is not clear in German, and should be turned thus : of (con) 
 the struggles with privations, which he had to go through (bejieljen), when he 
 was a youth (a(g 3iinglincj, which place after the subject ' he'). 2, among 
 
 other things = unter anberem. 3, fi<i) i^on ©c^ulben frci^atten. 4, at 
 
 starting, beim Seginn nteiner Saufba'^n ; see App. § 9. 5, je ; for the position 
 
 of the pronoun 'me' see App. § 9, and use the verb in the Perfect, omitting, 
 however, the auxiliary according to App. § 22. 6, auf nteinem Q>cilen ^ur 
 
 ©ee. 7, I — more = I drew another (ncc^ ein) bill of twenty pounds. To 
 
 draw a bill, cincn SBec^fel jietjcn. 8, to come back protested, mit *)3roteil 
 
 wicber ^urucf'fommen. 8, I felt (fi^ fii^len). 10, mortified = humbled, 
 
 gebcmutigt ; at, burc^, 11, 'to make a promise', here ein ®clubbe ablegcn. 
 
 i2, ever = always, fletS. 13, that — bill. This clause is best changed into 
 
 a shortened subordinate clause in form of a supine : never to draw a bill again. 
 Place 'again' after 'never', 14, without — paid, ot)iie au(^ jic^er i;n fciit, 
 
 bap man i^n ^onovieven iruvbe, 15, ' To quit', here to give up. 16, Offi-- 
 
 ^icrgtifct). 17, To live, equivalent to resitie or davell, is generally rendered 
 
 by 'wohntW ; but equivalent to exist is rendered by if bcH. 18, nnb bidt 
 
 micb an bie ©cftififgraticiieii ; quite, buvc^aug. 19, here fiirfen, 20, bed
 
 76 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION I16. 
 
 = bed-covering; Gomp. n. S. 36, N. 7, ^. 21, by these means = in (auf) 
 
 this manner. 22, as — honour = in order to redeem (tricber cin'lofen) my 
 
 honour. 23, to taice up one's bill, feiiicn SSecI)fcl bejafiteu. 24, Say 
 
 ' I have always endeavoured'. 25, to keep within one's means, iiic^t uber 
 
 feine 2Rittet ^inaug lebcn ; for six years, fec^g Sa^ie (ang. 26, We would use 
 
 the superlative here; pinching, briicfcnb. 27, 'to rise', here empor'fieigcn ; 
 
 to, big ju, contracted with the Dat. of the def. art. 
 
 Section 117. 
 
 THE BLESSEDNESS' OP FRIENDSHIP. 
 
 I. 
 
 A'^ blessed thing it is for any^ man or (S. lo, N. 9) woman to have 
 a friend ; one human soul whom we can trust utterly ; a friend who 
 knows the best and the worst * of us, and who loves us, in spite of all 
 our faults; who wilP speak the honest® truth to us, while the world 
 flatters us to "' our face, and laughs at us behind our backs ; who will 
 give* us counsel and reproof in the days of (S. 3, N. 2) prosperity and 
 self-conceit ; but ^ who, again, will comfort and encourage us in the days 
 of difficulty^", and sorrow, when the world leaves" us alone to^^ fight our 
 own battle as we can. 
 
 If we have had the good fortune to win such a friend, let us do any- 
 thing ^^ rather " than lose him. We must give and forgive ; live and let 
 live. If our friend have^^ faults, we must bear" with them (S. 4, N. 5, B). 
 We must hope all things, believe all things, endure all things, rather ^^ 
 than lose that most precious of all earthly possessions — a trusty" friend. 
 
 1, ©egen, m. 2, It is a blessing. 3, every. 4, Superlative of 
 
 fd^limm. 5, will speak = always speaks. Use the Present likewise with the 
 
 following verbs in this passage. 6, aufrtd^tig. 7, inS ©cftc^t. 8, to 
 
 give counsel and reproof to a person, eiitem tnit {Rat unb !£abc{ jur ©cite jictjen ; 
 self-conceit, @elbiltaufdjung, f. — The advert)ial clause 'in the days — conceit' 
 stands after the rel. pron. and the Dat. 'us' (App. § 9). 9, but — again, 
 
 bcr uti3 obcr auc^. 10, ^piufung. 11, 'to leave a person alone', here 
 
 eincu imftic^ laffen. 12, unb toir imfern .ff'amvf, fo gut tnir fcnncn, allein 
 
 ai:?jufccl)tcn ^aben. 13, all. 14, nm \^\\ nur iiic^t ju t»crliercn. 15, has. 
 
 16, to bear a thing, ©cbiilb mit ft»a3 l^aben. 17, lieber, which place before 
 
 the last 'air. 18, juccvlaijig. 
 
 Section 118. 
 
 THE BLESSEDNESS OP FRIENDSHIP. 
 
 II. 
 
 And a friend once won (S. 7, N. 3, A) need' never be lost, if we will 
 only be trusty and true ourselves. Friends may'^ part, not merely in body, 
 but in spirit, for a while. In the bustle of (S. 3, N. 2) business and the 
 accidents of life, they may lose^ sight of each other for years (S. 115, 
 N. 4); and* more — they ^ may begin to differ in their success in life, in 
 their opinions, in their habits, and there may be, for a time ®, coldness
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION Il8. 77 
 
 and estrangement between them : but not for ever, if each will be but 
 trusty and true. 
 
 For then'^, according to^ the beautiful figure of the poet, they will be 
 like two ships which set sail ' at morning from the same port, and ere "* 
 nightfall lose sight of each other, and" go each on its own course, and 
 at its own pace, for many days, through many storms and seas; and''' 
 yet meet again, and^^ find themselves lying side by side in the same 
 haven, when the long voyage is past. — Charles Kingsley, " The Water 
 OF Life." 
 
 1, need — lost = we need (brauc^cn) never to lose. 2, may = can, after 
 
 which place the adverbial clause 'for a while', auf fiir5e 3fit ; the verb 'part', 
 which is equivalent to ' be separated ' should stand at the end of the whole 
 passage ; ' in body ', fovvertic^ ; ' in spirit ', gcijiig. 3, to lose sight of each 
 
 other, fic^ anS bent (SSefic^t vcvticreti. 4, ja uc(f) tnet}r. 5, Say ' it is 
 
 possible that their success in life, their opinions, their habits begin to differ 
 (Ciiferieren) '. 6, for a time, eine 3eit tang, which place after ' and ' ; ' may ', 
 
 here mag ; ' be ', here = exist, bcftcljcn. 7, Here follow copula and subject 
 
 according to App. § 14. 8, according to, nadt); figure, 3iilb,n.; to be like, 
 
 glci^en, which governs the Dat. 9, to set sail auefcgcln. 10, ere night- 
 
 fall, cor !Dunfehverbcn. 11, Say 'and of which each through many storms and 
 upon many seas (l)iccr, n.) for days pursues its own course (iRic^tung, f.) and its 
 own pace (8anf, m.) '. 12, and — again, irelc^e aber benuod^ uncber ^ufarn'mcn^ 
 
 trejfcn. 13, Say ' and find that they lie after the long voyage (©ecfa^rt, f.) 
 
 side by side (neben einanber) in the same haven '. 
 
 Section 119. 
 
 DO GOOD IN YOUR OWN" SPHERE OF ACTION'. 
 
 I. 
 
 " I want to be at work ^ in the world," said Tom, " and not dawdling 
 away ^ three years at Oxford." 
 
 "What do you mean* by 'at work in the world?'" said the master, 
 with ^ his Hps close to his saucerful of tea, and peering at Tom over it. 
 
 " Well, I mean real work ; one's ^ profession, whatever '' one will really 
 have to do, and make one's living by. 1 want to be doing some real 
 good, feeling (S. 30, N. 4) that I am not only at play * in the world," 
 answered Tom, rather' puzzled to find out himself what he really 
 did mean. 
 
 " You are mixing up two very different things in your head, P" think, 
 Brown," said the master, putting down" (S. iii, N. 6) the empty saucer, 
 " and you ought to get clear '^ about them (S. 4, N. 5, E). You " talk of 
 'working to get your living' and ' doing some real good in the world' 
 in the same breath." 
 
 1, ®iifnngefvciet, m. ; your = thy. 2, to be at work = to do something. 
 
 3, to dawdle away, vorgonbcn. 4, mean = understand; by, untcv ; use the 
 
 2nd pers. sing. 5, Sic ?ivt^cn an ben flKuib bcr ihMIcu Ihiteitaijc fe^!,cub ; to 
 
 peer at a person, auf eincn blicfen ; over it, batuber hicg. 6, jemanbed, 
 
 7, whatever (ba^ U\i3) one must really do to make one's living (feincn llntcvbalt 
 veibienen). 8, at play = for play {^nm Spiclen). 9, Say 'somewhat
 
 78 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 1 9. 
 
 puzzled (werlegcn) at (fiber) the meaning (©inn, m.) of his words '. 10, The 
 
 words ' I think, Brown ' are best placed at the head of the passage; Comp. S. 
 64, N. ri ; to mix up, vermengcn. 11, auf ben Sifcf) fie((cn. 12, to get 
 
 clear about a thing, ftd) fiber tiwa^ Wax iverben. 1 cannot get clear about that, 
 id^ fann tnir barfiber nid^t flar uurben ; — ought = should. 13, Use the 2nd 
 
 pers. sing., and read carefully S. i, N. 3, and S. 87, N. 6, which will enable you 
 to construe this passage. The adverbial clause ' in the same breath ' ( = in one 
 breath) must be placed after the predicate 'talk '; to talk of a thing, »on ctrca^ 
 fprec^cn. 
 
 Section 120. 
 
 DO GOOD IN YOUR OWN" SPHERE OF ACTION. 
 
 II. 
 
 Now ^, you may be getting a good living in a profession, and yet 
 doing no good at all in the world, but (S. 6, N. lo) quite '^ the contrary. 
 Keep ^ the latter before you as your one object, and you * will be right 
 whether you make a living^ or not; but* if you dwell on the other, 
 you'll very likely drop'^ into mere money-making, and let* the world 
 take care of itself, for good or evil. Don't be in a hurry ^ about finding 
 your work in the ^ox\d for yourself ; you are not old enough to (S. 19, 
 N. 7) judge for yourself yet, but just^° look about you in the place you 
 find yourself in, and try (S. 51, N. 13) to make things" a litde better 
 and honester there. You'll''^ find plenty to keep your hand in at Oxford, 
 or wherever else you [may] go. And^' don't be led away to think this 
 part of the world important, and that unimportant. Every corner of the 
 world is important. No man knows whether this part or that part is " 
 most so, but every man may ^* do some honest work in his own corner. — 
 Thomas Hughes, " Tom Brown's School Days." 
 
 1, Now — getting, ©u fannjl bir mm aber »ief(eii$t . . . serbienen. 2, quite = 
 
 just, gerabe. 3, Say ' Keep the last part of your sentence as your principal 
 
 aim (Jpauptjlcecf, m.) before your eyes (vor Slugen) '. 4, Say 'you will do 
 
 right'. 5, Insert babei after 'living'. 6, Say 'but if you have only 
 
 the other (to agree with ' part ') before your eyes '. 7, to drop into mere 
 
 money-making, in bfo^e ©elbmai^erei »erfal(en. 8, to let the world take care 
 
 of itself for good or evil, bie 3BeU im ®utcn nub im 33ofen fic^ felbfi ubcrtafen. 
 
 9, to be in a hurry, fid) beeiten; about finding = to find (S. i, N. 3), 
 
 10, 'just', here mir, which place after verb and pronoun; in the place, an ber 
 ©telle ; to find oneself, ft(^ befinben. 11, * things ', here = life, with def. art., 
 after which place the adv. ' there'; honester = more virtuous. 12, The 
 clause ' at Oxford — go ' is best placed at the head of the whole passage ; to 
 keep your hand in = to do. 13, And — away, ?af bic^ aiid^ nici^t baju 
 tierleiten; to think a thing important, eine <S^CLS:ii fiir uncfctig flatten. 14, is 
 most so = is most important. — When the superlative is used as a pre- 
 dicate, it is generally preceded by am (the preposition an contracted with 
 the definite article, dative case singular, masculine), and takes the dative 
 termination Cll; as — This matter is not important, but that is most important, 
 biefe ©acfce ift nicljt und)tig, aber iene ijl am hn^ti^ften. 15, may — corner = 
 can in his own corner do something good.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 121. 79 
 
 Section 121. 
 
 THE STATE ^ OF IRELAND. 
 
 (Conclusion of a Speech delivered'^ in the House of Commons 
 
 in March 1868.) 
 
 I. 
 
 We must all endeavour to get' rid of passion in* discussing this church 
 question, which ®, I am sorry to say, is, of all others, the most calculated 
 to create passion. We are* all, I believe, of one religion, I do not 
 know (S. 51, N. 13), but I suppose there '^ will come a time in the history 
 of the world, when men will be astonished * that Catholic ' and Protes- 
 tant, Churchman^" and Nonconformist", had''^ so much animosity and 
 suspicion against each other. 
 
 I '^ accept and believe in a very grand passage which I once met '* with 
 in the writings of the illustrious founder of the colony and (S. 10, N. 9) 
 state ^Pennsylvania, that ^^ " the humble", meek, merciful, just, pious, 
 and devout souls are* everywhere of * one religion ; and when death" 
 (S, 3, N. 2) has taken off the mask, they will know^^ one another, though 
 the diverse liveries ^^ they wear make -" them strangers." 
 
 1, Buftanb, m. 2, to deliver a speech, eine 9icbc (}a(ten. Construe according 
 to S. 7, ^. I, A; the House of Commons, ba^ Jg»au^ bcv ©cmciuen. 3, to 
 
 get rid of passion, fid) ber Seiteufc^aftlidjfcit cntfjaltcn. 4, in discussion = 
 
 when we discuss (tefpred^cn). 5, welc^e (cibcv mc()v af3 jcbe anfccve ba^iU auijettian 
 ift, bie Scibcnfc^aften ju crrcgen. 6, are = have ; of one = the same. 
 
 Commence the passage with '1 believe '. 7, there — time, c^ ivirb einft . . . 
 
 fine 3fit fommen. 8, to be astonished at a thing, ftcf) fiber ctlraS UMtnbeni. 
 
 Comp. S. 87, N. 6. 9, Use the pi. with this and the three following 
 
 nouns. 10, = members of the English Church. 11, 9]cnfoiifcrmi)lcn. 
 
 12, to have animosity, geiubfcf)aft t)cgen._ 13, Say * I believe in (an, with 
 
 Ace.) the following sublime utterance (Jlufenmc^, f.) '. 14, met with = read. 
 
 15, The passage ' that — religion ' will be much improved by substituting the 
 adverb 'ndmlicf):' (viz.) for the conjunction 'that'. 16, bie 33cfd)eibeiicu. 
 
 17, After ' death ' insert the pron. ' ifjucn ', which will make the reading much 
 clearer; auxiliary 'has* may be omitted according to App. § 22. 18, fi^ 
 
 einanbor erfenncu. 19, Use the pi. of ©elvaiib, n, 20, make them 
 
 strangers, jie ^icniebcn untcr cinunbet cntfremben. 
 
 Section 122. 
 
 THE STATE OF IRELAND. 
 H. 
 
 Let us act in this spirit, and our work is ^ easy. The noble lord (S. 5, 
 N. 2), towards^ the conclusion of his speech, spoke of the cloud which is 
 at present hanging^ over Ireland. It is a dark and heavy cloud, and 
 its darkness expands * over the feelings of men in all parts of the British 
 Empire. But" there is a consolation that we may all take to ourselves. 
 An inspired king, bard, and prophet has left ' us words which ^ are not 
 only the expression of a fact, but we may take them as the utterance 
 of a prophecy. He says : "To * the upright there arises light in the 
 darkness."
 
 8o GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 122. 
 
 Let us try in this matter to be upright ^ Let us try to be just, and 
 that cloud will ^^ be dispelled ; the dangers which we see will vanish ; 
 and we" may have the happiness of leaving" (S. i, N. 3) to our children 
 the heritage of an honourable citizenship in a united and prosperous ^'^ 
 empire. — The Right Hon. John Bright. 
 
 1, is easy = will be easy for us (Dat. of persn. pron.). 2, an, contr. with 
 
 the dat. of the def. art. 3, f(^\peben. 4, ftc^ crtlve'cfen. 5, Say 
 
 ' But one consolation we can all gather from it '. To gather, entuet|men; from, 
 au^. Read S. 4, N. 5, B. 6, ^intcrtaffcn, insep. comp. str. v. 7, Say 
 
 'which not merely designate (6cjeid)ncn) a fact (S. 115, N. 2), but (S. 6, N. lo) 
 which we may ( = can) also take (^in'ncf^mcn) as a prophecy (read App. § 18) '. 
 8, " %\ix: ben ®cred)tcn cr{)ebt fic^ cin 8i{^t in bcr Sinfternis ", 9, I think there 
 
 is but the adj. 'gcrcdjt' to render both 'upright' and 'just' in the underlying 
 sense. 10, wirb jic^ oerteilen. 11, we may have = we shall perhaps 
 
 have; happiness = joy. 12, prosperous, gliirfUc^ ; empire = state. 
 
 Section 123. 
 
 DR. GUTHRIE ON RAGGED SCHOOLS ^ 
 
 I. 
 
 The "^ interest I have been led to take in the Ragged School move- 
 ment is an example of how, in Providence, a man's destiny — his course 
 of Hfe, Hke that of a river — may be determined and affected by very 
 trivial circumstances. It is rather ^ curious — at least it is interesting for 
 me to* remember — that (S. 66, N. 15) it was by a picture I was first ^ 
 led to take an interest in ragged schools — by a picture in an old, ob- 
 scure®, decaying burgh '^ that stands on the shores of the Frith of Forth, 
 the birth-place (S. 53, N. 9) of* Thomas Chalmers. I went^ to see 
 this place many years ago, and, going (S. 55, N. i) into an inn for*" re- 
 freshment, I found the room covered (App. § i) with pictures of shep- 
 herdesses with their crooks, and sailors in " holiday attire, not ^'^ 
 particularly interesting. But above the chimney-piece there" was a 
 large print ", more ^^ respectable than its neighbours, which ^® represented 
 a cobbler's room. 
 
 1, ©oftor ®ntf)vic iibcr bic @ii)utcn fur t»evira^vtojlc J?inbcv. — ©ogcnannte 'Ragged 
 Schools ' erifiiercn in !S;eutf($lanb \x>oi)i nid)t, unb jtt>av aug bent cinfac^en ©runbc, n>eit 
 toir fie big(}er ni(^t notig Ijatten 2, This passage requires an altogether 
 
 different construction. Say 'The circumstances which led me (itetd^e mid^ 
 ba^in fu^vten) to interest myself for the establishment of schools for neglected 
 children, are an example of (baiuni) how through Providence (buv(^ bie 3Sccfe- 
 ^ung) the fate of a man (SJicufc^) — his course of life (S. 76, N. 22, B,i) like 
 (gteicf>, with dat.) that of a river — can be determined and affected (beeinfiuft) 
 by very trivial (gcringfugig) circumstances '. For the position of the verbs read 
 App. §§ 16-20. 3, 'rather', here = not a little. 4, to remember, 
 
 ntic^ baran 5U erinnern. 5, juevit. 6, obscure = unknown. 7, 'burgh', 
 here glecfen, m. ; the relat. clause ' that — Forth ' may be elegantly rendered 
 attributively, thus : am Ufet beg gritt) of 5cvt^ betcgen, which last word inflect 
 correctly and place before the qualified noun 'burgh '. 8, von. 9, went 
 
 to see = visited: place, Dvt, m. ; the adverbial clause of time is best placed at 
 the head of the passage. 10, Say 'to ( = in order to) refresh myself.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 123. 8 1 
 
 11, in holiday attire, im j^ej^anpcjc. 12, Insert' avbicb ivere'. 13, there 
 
 was = hung. 14, print, J^ol^fc^nitt, m. ; or Jlupferftid?, m. 15, Supply 
 
 'which was'; 'respectable', here = tolerable, ertidglic^. 16, Since we 
 
 commenced the preceding clause with a relative pronoun, it need not be 
 repeated here. Substitute the conj. ' and ' for ' which ' ; a cobbler's room = the 
 workshop of a cobbler. 
 
 Section 124. 
 
 DR. GUTHRIE ON RAGGED SCHOOLS. 
 
 II. 
 
 The^ cobbler was there himself, spectacles'^ on nose, an old shoe 
 between his (S. 43, N. 9) knees, the massive * forehead and firm mouth 
 indicating* great determination of character, and, beneath his bushy eye- 
 brows, benevolence ® gleamed out on a number of poor ragged boys and 
 girls who stood at their lessons round the busy cobbler. My curiosity 
 was awakened ; and in the inscription I read how this man, John Pounds, 
 a cobbler in Portsmouth, took " pity on the multitude of" poor ragged 
 children left^ by ministers and magistrates, a«^ ladies and gentlemen, to 
 go to ruin in the streets — how *, like a good shepherd, he gathered in 
 these wretched ^" outcasts — hov/ he had trained " them to God and the 
 world — and how^'^, while earning his daily bread by'^ the sweat of his 
 brow, he had rescued" from misery and saved to'^ society not less than 
 five hundred of these gentlemen^". I felt'^ ashamed of myself. I'** felt 
 reproved for the little I had done. My feelings '^ were touched. I was 
 astonished at the man's achievements; and 1^° well remember, in ^^ the 
 enthusiasm of the moment, saying to my companion (and I have seen in 
 my cooler and calmer moments no reason for ^" unsaying the saying) : 
 " That man is ^^ an honour to humanity, and deserves the greatest monu- 
 ment ever^* raised within the shores of Britain." 
 
 1, The — himself, Sa faf? bcr Sc^u()jiic!cr, me ev Icibtc imb (eBte. 2, spectacles, 
 bie!i3vi((e; on, aiif, witli the def. art. 3, broad. 4, indicating = gave 
 
 evidence of (jcn;]cti vuni). 5, benevolence — cobbler = shone forth (cvi^dn^cn) 
 a pair of benevolent eyes with which he looked (blicfcn) upon a number 
 (5ln^at)(, f.) of poor, ragged (^fvlumvt) boys and girls w'.io learned their lessons 
 (Slufgabe, f.) and stood around the busy ( = industrious) cobbler. To stand 
 around a person, urn ciiicit l)cvitiH'|hi)en. 6, to take pity on a person, fic^ 
 
 iciiiant>c^ cvtavmcii, with gen. 7, Use the gen. of the adjectives. 8, left — 
 streets = which ministers ((5iciftlid)c) and magistrates (Dh'ii^kit, f.) had left 
 (ubcvlaffcn) to their ruin in (aiif) the streets. Read App. § 17. 9, After 
 
 ' how ' follows the subject ' he ' according to S. 66, N. 15. 10, wretched = 
 
 unfortunate; gathered in = assembled around himself, um ftcfc l)ei- vcrfvimnicltc. 
 11, to train, ci-,^ic'()cii ; to, fur. 12, itiib U'ic cv fic, Uidljiciib cr . . . ucrbicute. 
 
 13, by^ — brov>', im SrfiUH'ijjc fcincS 5liuv'ftclitc(?, which place after ' daily bread'. 
 
 14, to rescue from misery, ana tern (Slciiti ^icl)cn. The auxiliary verb, which must 
 be used in the Subjunctive, according to App. §§ 28 and 30, may be omitted 
 in the intermediate clauses of this long period, and placed but once at the end 
 of the entire passage. 15, Use the dat. ot the def. art. 16, The word 
 'gentlemen' is best used in its unaltered form in this pai-sage. It should be 
 placed in inverted commas. 17, to feel ashamed of oneself, ftd^ bcfcI^dnu 
 fiiljlcn. 18, Say ' 1 he little (was) I had done was to me (mil) a reproach'. 
 
 VOL. IV. G
 
 82 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 24, 
 
 19, feelings = heart. 20, I well remember = I know yet very well. 21, Say 
 ' that I said in the enthusiasm of the moment ', etc. 22, baS ©efagte ju 
 
 tttiberrufcn. 23, ntac^t bev 3Wen[^l)eit (Bi)xe. 24, = which ever Qe) has been 
 raised within the British Isles. 
 
 Section 125. 
 
 DB. GUTHKIE ON RAGGED SCHOOLS. 
 
 III. 
 
 I^ took up that man's history, and /found it animated by' the spirit 
 of* Him who* had "compassion on the multitude." John Pounds was 
 a clever man besides ^; and, like " Paul, if he could not win a poor boy 
 in (auf) any other way, he won him by art. He '^ would be seen chasing 
 a ragged boy along the quays, and compelling him to come to * school, 
 not by (biu'd;) the power * of a policeman, but by the power of a hot 
 potato. He knew the love an '° Irishman has for a potato ; and " John 
 Pounds might be seen holding under a boy's nose a very hot potato, 
 and ^^ wearing a coat as ragged as the boy himself wore. When the 
 day comes when ^^ honour shall be done to whom honour is due^*, I^* 
 can fancy the crowd of those whose fame poets (S. 3, N. 2) have sung ^^ 
 and to whose memory monuments have been raised, dividing " like a 
 wave, and ^* passing the great, and the noble, and the mighty of the 
 land, this poor, obscure old man stepping forward and receiving the 
 especial notice of Him who said: "Inasmuch" as ye did it to one of 
 the least of those, ye did it also to me." — Dr. Guthrie. 
 
 1, I followed up (Vfvfolgen) the life of this man. 2, Don. 3, of Him, 
 
 beffen. 4, who (bcr ba) had compassion with the poor. 5, aitc^, placed 
 
 after the verb. 6, h)ie ^JJaitlug, which place after ' him ' ; by art = through 
 
 cunning (Sift). 7, He — seen = One saw him often ; to chase a person, 
 
 eiticm na^'taitfen. Read S. 78, N. 14, 2. 8, jur ©d^ule. 9, 5)?acf)t, f. 
 
 10, Say 'of an I. for a hot potato'. 11, and one could often see how 
 
 J. P. held a hot potato under a boy's nose. — To hold a potato under one's 
 nose, eiuent eine Jlattcffel imtev bie SfJafe I}alteti. 12, and (insert here babet) 
 
 wore as ragged a coat as the boy himself. 13, an bem (51)re enriefen unrb. 
 
 14, to be due, getmfjvm. 15, Say ' then I see (bann fe()e i^ ini ©eijie) how 
 
 all those ', etc. 16, Bcftngen. 17, ftc^ gteid) eincr 2Bocie angctnanbcrteiten. 
 
 18, and — said=see, how this poor, unknown old man steps forward (Ijeioor* 
 ttcten) and passes by (an cinem lunii'berfcbveiten) the great, noble and mighty of 
 the land, and is received (S. 2, N. 1) with especial attention by Him (tjon 3'^m, 
 which place after the conj. ' and *) who (insert ba) said. 19, Say ' What 
 
 you (i^r) have done to the least (bem ©cvingften) of (untev) these, that have you 
 done to me '. 
 
 Section 126, 
 
 SHYLOCK^ MEDITATING REVENGE. 
 
 If it will feed'* nothing else (S. 27, N. 8), it will* feed my revenge. 
 He has disgraced * me, and hindered ^ me of half a million ! laughed ® 
 at my losses, mocked'' at my gains, scorned my nation, thwarted^ my 
 bargains, cooled^ my friends, heated^" my enemies I And" what's his
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 126. 83 
 
 reason ? I am a Jew ! Has ^"^ not a Jew eyes ? Has not a Jew hands, 
 organs, senses, affections," passions? Is (S. 2, N. i) he not fed with^* 
 the same food, hurt with the same weapon, subject^" to the same 
 diseases, healed^* by the same means, warmed" and cooled by the 
 same summer and winter, as a Christian tsP IP^ you stab us, do we 
 not bleed ? If you tickle us, do we not laugh ? If you poison us, do we 
 not die? and" if you wrong us, shall we not revenge? If we are like^" 
 you in the rest (S. 27, N. 8), we will resemble you in that'^M If a Jew 
 wrong a Christian, what '^'^ is his humility ? Revenge ^*. If a Christian 
 wrong a Jew, what^* should his sufferance be by Christian example? 
 Why'^^, revenge! The villany you teach (S. 42, N. 4) me P* will exe- 
 cute; and'^^ it shall go hard but'^* I will better the instruction. — William 
 Shakespeare, " The Merchant of Venice." 
 
 1, ©^V)(rrf auf (Kac^c fimienb. 2, feed=satisfy. 3, Insert the adv. 
 
 'bed) after the subject. 4, disgraced = insulted, befd)impft. 5, einen 
 
 iim etwad bvitu^cn. 6, Supply ' has ' to begin this clause ; at, iibcr, with ace. 
 
 7, to mock at a thing, Hwwei vievfpottfn, v. tr. ; ' my gains ' may be rendered by 
 meincn profit. 8, crossed (biircl)fveu'jcn) my enterprises. 9, cooled = 
 
 made indifferent. 10, heated = incited (aufveisfu). 11, And for what 
 
 (aue* iiie(^cm) reason ? 12, As a rule the English * not a ' or ' not an ' 
 
 is best rendered, by the indef. numeral tciu. Say * Has a jew no eyes' ? 
 13, feelings. 14, vcn. 15, Say 'is he not subject to', etc.; to be 
 
 subject to a thing, einer <Bad)i unteiuunfeii fein. 16, This verb requires 
 
 again the passive voice, and copula and subject must be supplied; by, burd). 
 17, Say 'not warmed', the auxiliary need not be repeated here. 18, Begin 
 
 with the principal sentence in this and the two following passages. * You ', 
 here i{)r. 19, Say ' and we shall not revenge ourselves, if you wrong 
 
 us (Unve(^t jufii^en) '. 20, to be like, ijlcid)cii, with dat. ; in the rest, in aKcm 
 
 ubviijcn. 21, in that, bavin. 22, what is = in what (wherein) consists. 
 
 23, 3n bcr 9fJadic. 24, in what (wherein) shall according to the Christian 
 
 example consist his sufferance (2)ulben, n., or ©ulbujig, f.) ? 25, 9hni, hod) 
 
 rcoi)i in ber 9fad)el 26, ic^ and fte aiuticubcn. 27, and — hard, imb t6 
 
 mii^tt feltfam jugc()cn. 28, but — instruction = if I should not even (nod), 
 
 after 'not') excel ('should excel' Iniperf. of the Subj.of iibevtvejlw; App. § 33) 
 my teachers. 
 
 Section 127. 
 
 CHARACTER' OF CHARLEMAGNE. 
 
 I. 
 
 In ' analyzing the character of heroes it is hardly possible to separate 
 altogether the ^ share of fortune from their own*. The epoch made*" by 
 Charlemagne in the history of the world, the illustrious families which * 
 prided themselves in him as their progenitor, the "^ very legends of 
 romance, which are full of his fabulous exploits, have* cast a lustre 
 around his head, and testify® the greatness that has embodied itself in 
 his name. None ^°, indeed, of Charlemagne's wars can be compared 
 •with the Saracenic victories of Charles Martel ; but " that was a contest 
 for freedom, his for conquest ; and *^ fame is more partial to successful 
 aggression than to patriotic resistance. 
 
 G 2
 
 84 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 12J. 
 
 1, Say 'The character of Charles the Great (S.53, N.9)'. Jlartber ®io§e, 
 .fonic^ bet Sranfeu unb fpater romifc^er Jtaifev, tuuvbe am 2. 9Xpri( 742, li\-i(}ifcl}einUd> 
 ^u Slacfjen, geboren mib wax ber @of)U $ipin^ bc^ ^(cincit unb bcr @ufe[ Jtarl 
 iliJartetU, bcfl'eu (Siege iiber bie ©arajeneu in biefet Seftion cnva()iit t»erbeu. 9^ac^ 
 bcm Zoii feittcg foni9U(i}eu 3?aterg (768) tvat er gemeiitfd}aftU(^ mit feiiiem SciiDcv 
 Jtartmanu bie OJegientng an, toarb aber f(^on im 3a()ve 771, biirc^ ben i£ob feineei 
 33rubert3 unb bie JUisfd^Ue^ung ber ©c()ne beSfelben »om it^rone, SlKein'^errfdjer ubet 
 afle 5ranfen, «on ben $t)rencien bi5 ,;^um Sfliebevvfiein unb jum SJJeere, aud) in !l)eutf^; 
 lanb i'tber bie fflaijern, S^ljiiviiiger unb 2Hamanncn. S)urc^ 5a()(vci(^e ^riegc ertt>eiterte er 
 \iiod) bie ©renjen feine^ Otei^eg [c£)v balb, unb pvax novblid) bi^ j^uc @ibet, [iibUc^ bi^ 
 ^um (Sbro unb nact) Unteritalien, unb oftiic^ bie guv ©aale, bent 586f)mcr»albe unb bcr 
 Xf)eig, big er im Safjre 800 worn ^^Japfte 8co HI. im @t. peters IDom ju 9iom feierlic^ 
 als romif(^er ■S'aifec gefront tmivbe. @r ftarb am 28. Sanuar 814. 3n J^avl bem ©vo^en, 
 h)ie it)n bie ®ef^i(^te mit Otcc^t benaunt i)at, ttiav bcr a3cgrunbcr ber flaatticl)cn Drbnung 
 fur bie gcfammte ®ermanennie(t erfc^icucn. Seine Seben^aufgabc, bie i()m »on Slnfang 
 an fcftj^anb, trar, a((e beutfd^cn @tammc in ben cinen fvanfifd^cn 9lcic^g»erbanb unb in 
 bie eine djrij^lic^e Mixd^i jufammenjufaffen. Sem bcften !£eile nac^ i^ fte i:^m gctungen, 
 unb fo {)at er ber nacI}fo(genbcn 3cit, bem ganjeu 2J?itte(attcr, bag ©cprdge fcincg ©eifteg 
 aufgebriicft. 3n niemanb jleflt fic^ bie e^t beutfcl)e ?U-t bcr alien 3eit [0 ^cvrlid) bar, alg 
 in i()m. Slfg er bie Jlrone crl)iett, jd()lte er evfi 26 Sa^re, fianb alfo in ber >Kraft unb 
 ffilute ber Sugenb. dx wax von gcttjaltiger Jlovpergrc^e, eine ^clbengeftalt, unb uon 
 nid)t minber gewaltiger Jtorpcrfraft, fo ba^ cr beim frol}lic^en ffiaibtvevf ben .flampf mit 
 bem untben Slncrcdifcn in ben 2lrbenncmcdlbern irie eiu ©picl aufna^m ; iiberl)aupt tjou 
 fcner Sufi an Jlrieg unb @efa^}r, une fte ben abcnteuevnben i^eevtonigen ber iBolfevnjani 
 berung eigcn getvefen wax ; /in ben uncf^tigen iDingen ber IBclt »on jener i^drte unb 
 9iiicftI(^t6lofigfeit, bie noc^ feinem gro^cn SKanne gefct)lt ; unb ebcufo im fleinen ithm 
 beg Jpaufeg unb beg tdglic^cn a5cvfeJ)rg oon iener a}(ilbe, Jpeitcvfcit unb gvifd)e beg 
 ©emiiteg, bie fo gerue ©cfd^rten center ©ro§e fmb. 2ll(e bicfe ^igcnfc^aften ^atte er 
 mit feinem bamaligen S^otfe gemcin; wa^ il)n aber iiber bagfelbe er^ob, bag itar ber 
 iteitfc^aucnbe ©eijt, bcr bem alien diomcrtum bag ^orbilb cincg iccltumfaffeuben ©taateg 
 abgelcrnt ^atte, unb ber bieg SWuftcr o()ne fne(^tif(^e 9iad[)al)mung bcm fo gang anbern 
 gcnnanifdicn aSefen anguvaffen ivupte. Unb jtvav ifi biefer ©cijl, ber fief) in i^m ojfenj 
 barte, urn fo njunbervoKer, weil niemanb na(^n)eifen faun, l»ie er fic^ gebilbet, unb »er 
 tf)n fo gelctjrt unb ergogcn ^at. Slug bem ©unfel fciner 3eit gcf)t cr, im eigeuen Sic^te 
 leuc^teub, auf. 2, 93eim §lnali}ftercn »on ^ctbcni^avaftevcn. 3, the share (Slutcil, 
 m.) of fortune = of a happy (giinj^ig) fate (©cfc^icf, n.). 4, Supply 'individuality'; 
 altogether = quite. 5, made, gefd)ajjf'en ; by, »ou. Use the attributive con- 
 
 struction as explained in S. 7, N. 3, ^. 6, Say 'which called him with pride 
 their progenitor '. 7, Say ' even the romantic legends '. 8, Say ' have 
 
 crowned his head with glory (9Ju^m, m.) '. In elevated diction ' head ' is 
 rendered by 'ipau:pt',n. 9, begeugen. 10, Say ' It is indeed (it»oI|l) 
 
 true that none of Charles's wars can be compared to (mit) the victories of 
 Charles Martel over the Saracens'. 11, but — conquest = but these were 
 
 contests for freedom (5tcif)citgtdm^3fe), whilst his (to agree with ' wars ') were 
 contests for conquest ((SroberunggfdnHifc). 12, Say 'and fame (S. 3, N. 2) has 
 more partiality (iBorliebc, f.) for successful aggression (2lngriff, m.)', etc. 
 
 Section 128. 
 
 CHARACTER OF CHARLEMAGNE. 
 II. 
 
 As a scholar S his acquisitions ^ were little superior ' to those of his 
 unrespected son ; and in * several points of view the glory of Charle- 
 magne might be ^ extenuated by an analytical dissection. But ® rejecting
 
 ^ 
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 28. 85 
 
 a mode of judging equally uncandid and fallacious, we shall find that he 
 possessed in everything that grandeur of conception which distinguishes 
 extraordinary minds *. Like Alexander, he seemed born ^ for universal 
 innovation^"; in a life restlessly active", we see him reforming (S. 78, 
 N. 14,^) the coinage ^^, and establishing the legal divisions of money"; 
 gathering ^* about him the learned of every country, founding schools 
 and collecting libraries ; interfering ^*, but with the tone of a King, in 
 religious controversies ; aiming ^*, though prematurely, at the formation 
 of a naval force ; attempting ", for ^' the sake of commerce, the magnifi- 
 cent^* enterprise of uniting (S. i, N. 3) the Rhine and^" Danube; and" 
 meditating to mould the^'^ discordant codes of Roman and barbarian 
 laws into one uniform system. — Hallam, " The Student's Middle Ages." 
 
 1, Scholar = ' pupil or schoolboy 'is rendered by ©c^utcr ;=' student ' by 
 Stubent, and = * learned man' by ®elf()vtev. The last sense is applicable here. 
 2, acquisitions = knowledge. 3, superior, ubcvlcgcii, with dat. unrespected = 
 unnoticed. 4, in many respects, in niaiirf)cr ^§iiifid)t, after which place 
 
 'might'. 5, be — dissection, burc^ eiue eiii3el)ciibe Uiitcvfudjum^ gcfcfentdlcrt 
 
 U^erteu. 6, Say 'But if we reject an equally (fine cbftifo) partial (pavtciifcfc) 
 
 and (al3) fallacious (tn'uyvifc^) mode of judging (*8euvtci(iuu3v^ivci)"c, f.)'. 7, Use 
 the gen. of the def. art. 8, 'mind', here @eift, m. 9, born = created; 
 
 * universal ', here ireitumfaJTcnb. 10, innovations = reforms. 11, All 
 
 parts qualifying a novm must be placed before it. 12, SWun^f^flcm, n. 
 13, form a comp. n. according to S, 36, N. 7, yi/; both nouns are combined in 
 the sing. 14, Complete the clause by saying : 'we see him gathering', etc., — 
 to gather, »erfantmetn ; about, inn ; of every country = of all countries. 15, in- 
 terfering in religious controversies, ftd) irtit vcligicfcn <2tveitii^fciteu bcfaffen ; after 
 which place the clause 'but — King', and supply 'always' after 'but'; 'tone', 
 here = dignity. 16, This sentence should likewise be introduced by 
 
 supplying 'We see him ', after which place ' though prematurely ' (ju fiuf)5citii^) ; 
 to aim, ftrebcn (uad)). 17, Begin this clause with 'see him'. 18, for 
 
 the sake of, urn . . . wiKen, with Gen. 19, attempt the magnificent enter- 
 
 prise, ben Qtcgavfic^eu a5ei[uc^ macficii. 20, and = with the. 21, utib bavauf 
 
 ftnncn. 22, the — law s, bic fief) unbcifpicdjenbeu vcmifc^en utib fcnfttvjen ®efe^f ; 
 
 uniform, ein^eitli^ ; to mould, vcifd^mdjen. 
 
 Section 129. 
 
 GOETHE'S DAILY LIFE AT WEIMAR. 
 
 I. 
 
 Passing through an ante-chamber, where, in cupboards, stand his 
 mineralogical collections, we enter (App. § 14) the study, a Xow-roo/ed, 
 narrow room (®einacl^, n.), somewhat dark (S. 128, N. 11), for it is 
 (S. 2, N. i) lighted only through two tiny windows, and* furnished 
 with a simplicity quite touching to behold. 
 
 In the centre'^ stands a plain oval table of unpolished oak'. No arm- 
 chair is to be seen, no sofa, nothing which (S. 3, N. 7) speaks^ of 
 comfort. A plain hard chair has " beside it the basket in which he 
 used * to place his handkerchief. Against '' the wall, on the right, is a ' 
 long pear-tree table, with book-shelves, on which stand lexicons and 
 manuals. Here hangs a pincushion, venerable in ' dust, with the visiting-
 
 8(5 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 129. 
 
 cards, and other trifles which*" death had made sacred. Here" also a 
 medallion of Napoleon, with this'^ circumscription : " Scilicet^* immenso 
 superest ex nomine multum." On the side-wall again, a book-case, 
 with some works of poets. On the wall to the left is a long desk of 
 soft wood, at" which he was wont* to write. A sheet of paper with 
 notes of^^ contemporary history is fastened near'® the door, and behind" 
 this door tables^* of music and geology. 
 
 1, and — behold = and is (ijt) furnished with an almost (faft) touching sim- 
 piicity. 2, middle. 3, @tc^en()otj, n. ; the oak = oak-tree, is rendered 
 
 by @i^e, f., or (Sii^Baum, m. 4, speaks = points to ; to point to a thing, auf 
 
 ettfoS beutfti. 5, has beside it = stands beside. 6, used to place, ju 
 
 Icgen VP^fl^f' ' To use ', when employed transiti'vely, is generally rendered by 
 t)raud)eu, gcbvaitcljen, beiiu^en, an'rticuben, and t)evbiaitcl)cit, whilst intransiti-vely it is 
 rendered by )(i^(o^n\ or gcwofjnt fein, in the sense of ' to be accustomed to ', ' to 
 be in the habit of ',' to be wont to do'. 7, Against = on; on (or to) the right, 
 tc(^tS; on {or to) the left, ImU. 8, ctn (anger S^ifd) son 33irnbaumt)otj. 
 
 9, in dust = through its age. 10, which — sacred, bie buv(^ ben %o\) getjeiligt 
 
 itnb. 11, Insert * is' or 'hangs'. 12, this = the. 13, Scilicet — 
 
 multum, Little honour is derived from a great name. 14, at, an. 
 
 15, fiber bie (or au^ ber) Slagcgiicfc^ic^te. 16, in bet 9Mf)e ber %\)\ix ; to fasten, 
 
 an'Ijcftcn. 17, an; supply ' hang ' after ' door '. 18, nuififalifc^e miD 
 
 jeologif^e S^aicKen. 
 
 Section 130. 
 
 GOETHE'S DAILY LIFE AT WEIMAR. 
 
 II. 
 
 The same door leads into a bedroom; it is a' closet with a window. 
 A simple bed, an arm-chair by'' its side, and a tiny washing-table, with 
 a small white basin on it and a sponge, is' all the furniture. 
 
 From the other side of the study we enter the library, which should* 
 rather be called a lumber-room of books. Rough ^ deal shelves hold the 
 books with ' bits of paper, on which are written " philosophy," " history," 
 " poetry," etc., to mark the classification. He rose at seven [o'clock], 
 sometimes'' earlier, after a sound and prolonged' sleep ; for like Thor- 
 waldsen' he had a "talent for sleeping," only surpassed (S. 7, N. %B) 
 by^" his talent for" continuous work. Till eleven he worked without 
 any interruption. A cup of chocolate was then''^ brought, and" he re- 
 sumed work till one. At two he dined. This " meal was the impor- 
 tant meal of the day. His appetite was immense. ?Even on the days 
 when '^ he complained of not being hungry, he ate much more than 
 most men. Puddings, sweets '^ and cakes were always welcome. He 
 sat" a long while over his wine, chatting'* gaily to some friend or 
 other — for he never dined alone — or to one of the actors, whom he had 
 often with " him, after dinner, to read over their parts, and to take ^^ his 
 instructions. 
 
 1, etn fteineg .tabinett. 2, by its side=before it, bawor. 3, is — furni- 
 
 ture = form (bitben) the whole furniture (SWobiliar, n.). 4, should rather 
 
 be called = could (Impf. Subj.) much rather (ttielme^v) be called. The auxiliary
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 130. 87 
 
 * could' stands last of all, whilst 'called' has the first place of the three verbs, 
 which are used in the Passive Voice. 5, Say ' Upon simple (f^ti^t) deal 
 
 boards stand the books '. 6, The passage ' with — classification ' may be 
 
 simplified by saying : * on (an) which (benen) bits of paper with the labels 
 (2luff(^rift,f,) . . . indicate (bcj^eid^ncn) a certain order'. The abbreviation 'etc' 
 corresponds to the German ' u. f. \v.', which is the short for ' uitb fo ttJciter ', and 
 so on. 7, Insert attc^ after ' sometimes '. 8, long. 9, Sllbcrt 
 
 fflertcl 2!t)orlt»albfeu, bcn'i()mtcc banifd^er ffiitb^auer, mtvbe im 3a^re 1770 auf ber 
 @ce jluifc^en S^lanb itnb Jlcvientiagen gcboren, trat cin ©c^iitcr ber Jlunftafabentie jju 
 ^opeiifjagcn imb (ebte i^ou 1796 bi(3 1838 in 9Jom, fcfjrte abcr bann nac^ feincr ^fimat 
 imiidf \vo cr am 24. 2J?arj 1844 ftaib. 3;()cr»albfen iji ber ©(^i3).ifer ;;al)Ircidjcr ibcaler 
 aBctfe im ec^tcn f(affifct)cn ©eifte altgriccfjifdjer Jtunft, weldjt meiften3 bet antifeit 
 Wl\)t1)oloa,ie, j^um %dl abcr and) ber d)ri|ilicl]en OJeligionSanfc^auung entlefint finb. 
 @ein ?lame hjivb unjierbtid? fein, benn er lebt ber SBelt in feiiten uni'>erflleid)lic^en SBcrfcu 
 fort, bie ju ^opfn()agcn t»on fcincn begeiflevten Sanb^lcuten in cinem befonbcri! ba;5u gebautcn 
 fWufeum, ipel^fg ben 5Jlamen beg iwcltberiiljmten Jlimjlierg trdgt, j^ur SSclcunberung ber 
 yJac^rocU auf^geficKt fuib. 10, biirc!^. 11, jur uiiaiiSgefel^ten *)lrbeit. 12, Place 
 the adv. 'then' at the head of the sentence, and supply 'for him' (i^m) after 
 the auxiliary. As a rule the person or persons for whose benefit an 
 action is done must be indicated in German ; as — I will buy a hat, 
 id) will mir einen ^ut faufen. 13, and — one = whereupon he worked again 
 
 till one o'clock. 14, This — day = This was his principal meal. Form 
 
 a comp. n. according to S. 36, N. 7, ^. 15, when (wo) he complained of 
 
 (iibcr) want (SJ/angel, m.) of (an) appetite. 16, ©ii^igfeiten. 17, To 
 
 sit a long while over one's wine, lange beim ifficin ft|en. 18, chatting = and 
 
 chatted (plaubern) ; to some friend or other=to (mit) this or that friend. 
 19, bei fid) ; after — parts = to ( = in order to) read to him their parts (JNolleii) 
 after dinner (nad) !£ifc^e, which place after the conj. um and the dat. of the 
 persn. pron.). To read, vcr'lefeii. 20, To take instructions, 2lntvei|'iingen 
 
 entge'gennc^men. 
 
 Section 131. 
 
 GOETHE'S DAILY LIFE AT WEIMAB. 
 
 III. 
 He was fond of wine (S. 3, N. 2) and drank daily his two or three 
 bottles. Lest * this statement should convey a false impression, I hasten 
 to^ recall to the reader's recollection the very different habits of our 
 fathers in respect to drinking. It was no^ unusual thing to be called 
 " a three-bottle-man" in those days in England, when* the three bottles 
 were of port or Burgundy ; and Goethe, a * Rhinelander, accustomed 
 from boyhood to wine, drank a wine which his English contemporaries 
 would have called water. / The ' amount he drank never did more than 
 exhilarate him, and never made him unfit for work or for society. Over^ 
 his wine, then, he sat some hours ; no such thing as dessert was seen 
 upon his table in those days ; not even the customary coffee after dinner. 
 His mode " of living was extremely simple ; and even when persons ' 
 of very moderate circumstances burned wax '", two " poor tallow candles 
 were all that could be seen in his rooms. In the evening he often went 
 to the theatre, and there ^^ his customary glass of punch was brought (S. 4, 
 N. 4, man) at six o'clock (App. § 9). If(S. 27, N. 7) not at the theatre, 
 he received friends at ^^ home. Between eight and nine a frugal supper 
 was laid ", but '" he never took anything except a little salad or preserves.
 
 88 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 131. 
 
 By" ten o'clock he was usually in bed, — G. H. Lewes, "Life of 
 Goethe." 
 
 1, Lest — impression = In order that (!J)amit) this observation may (Present 
 Subj. of mci^en; read App. §§ 33 and 34) not make a false impression. — For the 
 position of the verbs see App. § 18. 2, to — drinking = to remind the 
 
 reader of (an) the very different (ganj anbcrn) habits of our fathers in respect 
 of drinking. — To transl. ' drinking ' form a noun of the infinitive of the verb 
 'to drink', and use it with the def. art., according to S. 3, N. 2, and S. 11, 
 N. 7. 3, no — thing, ntc^t^ Ungeiw^nUc^e^ ; in those days, batnate, which place 
 with ' in England ' after ' was '. 4, ' when ', here tt»o. Notice that : The 
 
 relative conjunction 'ipo' is often used in reference to time as a 
 translation of ' Tvhen ' in the sense of 'at (in or during) which time' ; 
 as — Q6 %(\ii)iii} 5U cincrBeit, rt?o (^u or in lvetd)cr) @ie abwcfcnb iravcn, it happened 
 at a time ivhen you were absent. It is also used relatively, in reference 
 to place, instead of a relative pronoun preceded by a preposition ; 
 as — .Kennft bu bag 8anb, w (in ntclc^em) bie 3itvoucn bliifien ? (Goethe) Know you 
 the land where (in which) the citrons bloom ? 2)icg ifl bag ^aug, tt»o (in bent) cr 
 wo^nt, this is the house where (in which) he lives. 5, a — wine, alei 
 
 OJ()cinldnber »on Sugenb anf an ®ein gcwc^nt. 6, The — him = What he 
 
 drank had never any ( = an) other effect than (alg) to exhilarate him; to 
 exhilarate, angcnetjm an'vcgen. 7, So he sat for hours (ftnnbenlang) over his 
 
 (beim) wine. 8, Scbengnjeife, f. 0, Scntc ; of = in. 10, wax = 
 
 wax candles. 11, two — rooms = one saw in his rooms only two poor 
 
 (biirftig) tallow candles. 12, batjin. 13, bci ftc^ ju §aufe. 14, to 
 
 lay a frugal supper, cin cinfa($eg Slbeubeffen anftragen; to lay the table (the cloth), 
 ben %\\^ becfcn. 15, Say 'but he (himself) took (ejyen or geniefen, S. 3, N. 8.) 
 
 only a little salad or preserves '. 16, Urn. 
 
 Sectio7i 132. 
 
 THE^ PROGRESS IN THE ART OF PRIWTIWG. 
 
 (Conclusion'^ of a Speech delivered at the Caxton Celebration, June 30, 1877, 
 
 in London.) 
 
 I now call ' attention, in * a few words, to the progress of this art. 
 I hold up a volume in my (S. 43, N. 9) hand, to^ which I beg everyone 
 to direct his eye, because I think it ^ may be called the climax and con- 
 summation of this art. This '' volume is bound, as you see, and stamped 
 with the arms of the University o/" Oxford. It is a Bible bound* in a 
 manner that commends itself to the reader — I believe ^ in every sense 
 an excellent piece of workmanship, containing more than one'^'^ thousand 
 pages. Well", you will say: " That is very'^ commonplace, why bring it 
 before us?" I do so^' in order to telP* you that this book sixteen 
 hours ago did not exist — it ^' was not bound, it was not folded, it was not 
 printed. Since the clock struck twelve last night at^® the University 
 Press in Oxford, the people (man) there have printed and sent us this 
 book. They (nian) have sent several copies" to ^^ be distributed here 
 in the midst of your festival. That shows what can be done, and that is 
 what has been done, and ^^ it shows the state to which this great art is 
 now happily arrived. If ^^ I began with a humiliating confession as to 
 the small share we could claim in contributing to the early history of 
 printing, we may ■'^ leave off, ladies and gentlemen, in a better spirit,
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 32. 89 
 
 because I think that such a performance as this is ^ one that will be 
 admitted to be a credit in any portion of the world. Now I will trouble 
 you no longer, but (S. 6, N. 10) will ask" you to" drink with me to 
 the memory of this most distinguished name : " To ^^ the memory of ^* 
 William Caxton, the (S. 53, N. 9) first English printer, and a native'" of 
 /Ais our beloved country ^^." — The Right Hon. W. E. Gladstone. 
 
 1, !Die S^crtfcferitte in tcr Smf)bnicfcvfiinji. The novm 'progress' is generally 
 rendered by the corresponding plural form in German. 2, ®d)lup 
 
 eiucr am 30. 3uni 1877 bei ©etcc^fiUjeit bet (Sartonfeiev in iionbon gef^altencn SfJefce. 
 3BiUiam Sarton, bcr erftc ©nc^brucfec (Snglanb^, »urbe im 3a()ve 1412 f^u SBcalb 
 in .^cnt geborcn, uic^nte abet fpatcr altS ©iivgct unb Jlaufinanu in SonCon, tt)cfelb|t 
 er auci^ im 3a{)vc 1492 fiarb. 3, to call a person's attention to a thing, einen 
 
 auf ctltag anfmaffam mac^en. Begin with the adv. 'now', and supply the personal 
 object '©ie'. 4, in a = with; of = in, 5, = which I beg you all to look 
 
 at (betrac^tcn, v. tr.). 6, it — art = we may (biivfcn) consider (an'fe()cn) it 
 
 the climax and consummation {aU bie I)ocf)fie (Stufe ber iu^Kenbung) of ( = in) this 
 art. 7, Say ' As you see, this volume (here (Sinbanb) is stamped with the 
 
 arms ', etc. 8, bound — reader = the binding of which must commend 
 
 (App. § 18) itself at once (ftcl) i^on fclbfl) to the reader. 9, Here insert 'it 
 
 is'; sense = respect, 5}cjie()uni}, f.; piece of workmanship = ' work of art', which 
 render by forming a comp. n. according to S. 36, N. 7, ^. 10, * One ' or 
 
 ' a ' before ' hundred ' and ' thousand ' is, as a rule, not translated in 
 Grerman. 11, Say 'But (which place after the copula 'will') you will 
 
 perhaps say'. 12, etwaii gan;; (McuH'ljniicIjei^, ivc^u (& n\\& nocb ;^cigcn? 
 
 13, The English ' so ' in connection with a transitive verb is generally 
 to be rendered by ' e* '. If we wrant to emphasize the object, however, 
 we use either of the demonstrative pronouns ' Da* ' or ' DicS ', and 
 place it at the head of the clause; as — Do you think jof ©lauben Sic 
 cij? No, I do not, SiJcin, ba^ glaube i^ ni(^t. 14, fagcn or mifteiUn. 
 
 15, Say ' it was neither bound, nor . . . nor . . .* 16, Render 'at the' by 
 
 the gen. of the def. art. ; and place the clause 'at — Oxford' after ' clock '. 
 Last night, riergangcne 9{ac^t. 17, ' Copy ' in the signification of 'specimen ' 
 
 is rendered by (greilUJlar, n.; pi. e ( = e); ftopic, f., is the written copy of any 
 book, document or MS. 18, Say ' in order to distribute them here during 
 
 this festival '. 19, and — arrived = and -it shows the high degree (Stnfe, f.) of 
 (ber) perfection which this great art has reached now-a-days (t}cntjutage) (App. 
 § 17). 20, If — printings If I began with the humiliating confession that 
 
 we in respect to (auf) our contribution to the (^uv) early (fvul)crcn) history 
 of the art of printing can claim (bcanfvmclicn buvfen, which comes last) only 
 a small (gering) share. 21, may = can; leave otf= conclude ; spirit = mood, 
 
 ©timmnug, f. ; performance, I'eifliuig, f. 22, is — world, ubevall in ber 2Belt 
 
 mit (S()ien ancvfanut irciben nnrb. 23, 'To ask' in the signification of 
 
 'asking a question ' is rendered by frrtflcil or cilie iVl'<*fl<* ftfUcil, but in that 
 of *to request' by bitten. 24, to — name = to empty your glasses with 
 
 me to the (;^um) memory (Slnbcnfen) of (an) this most (l)LHl)ft) distinguished 
 name ; (* your glasses to empty ' nuist be placed at the end.) 25, 3um 
 
 ®ebad)tni3. 26, Use the Anglo-Saxon genitive here. 27, native = son. 
 
 28, country = fatherland. 
 
 Section 133. 
 
 ROBERT DICK, THE BAKER, GEOLOGIST, AND BOTANIST. 
 
 Not long ago. Sir Roderick Murchinson discovered at Thurso, in the 
 far north of Scotland, a profound ' geologist, in the person of a baker
 
 90 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 33, 
 
 there', named Robert Dick. When (S. 4, N. 2) Sir Roderick called 
 upon him at' the bakehouse in which (S. 131, N. 4) he baked and earned 
 his bread, Robert Dick deHneated * /<? ^m by ® means of flour upon a 
 board, the geographical features' and geological phenomena of his 
 native country, pointing"' out its imperfections in* the existing maps, 
 which ^ he had ascertained by travelling over the country in his leisure 
 hours. On^° further inquiry, Sir Roderick ascertained " that the humble^^ 
 individual before him was not only a capital baker and geologist, but also 
 a first-rate " botanist. " I found," said the Director-General of the Geogra- 
 phical Society, " to my great humiliation, that this baker ^* knew infinitely 
 more of (S. 40, N. 9) botanical science, ay, ten times more, than I did ; 
 and that there were (S. 82, N. 7) only some twenty or thirty specimens ^^ 
 of flowers which he had not collected. Some he had obtained ^^ as 
 presents, some (= others) he had purchased, but the greater portion had 
 been accumulated ^"^ by his industry, in his native county of Caithness ; 
 and the specimens ^^ were all arranged '^ in the most beautiful order, 
 with ^^ their scientific names affixed." — S. Smiles, " Self-Help." 
 
 1, grunbUc^. 2, bortig, which use attributively before the noun 'baker'; 
 
 named, nameu^. 3, in. 4, entwcvfen, insep. comp. str. v. 5, mittcl^ 
 
 etncg mit 2)fe()l bcfircuten SretteS. 6, Umriffe. 7, Say 'whereby he 
 
 pointed out the imperfections'. To point out a thing, auf etteag werweifen, insep. 
 comp. str. V. 8, Use the gen. of the def. art. 9, which — hours = of 
 
 which (tt)o»on) he had convinced himself on (auf) his travels through the 
 country in his leisure hours (Syiiipcfiunben). 10, ^Jiact) tpeiterer $riifung. 
 
 11, ascertained = learnt, crfu^r, from erfa^ien. 12, humble = modest ; 
 
 individual = man. 13, first-rate = considerable, Bcbeutenb. 14, Here 
 
 follow the words *of — science' after which transl. the adv. 'infinitely', which 
 is followed by 'ay (ja) ten times more ' and the verb ' knew '. 15, specimens 
 of flowers, 33hintcnaitcn. 16, To obtain a thing as present, ctwae! gcf^euf t 
 
 cr^dten. 17, accumulated = collected. Where, and in what order, must 
 
 the verbs be placed? Which voice must you use? — native, ^cimifc^. 18. (Srem^ 
 ))lar, n.; pi. e. 19, jjufam'mcujieden, sep. comp. w. v. 20, and the 
 
 scientific names everywhere (uberall) affixed (^iuju'fiigen), sep. comp. w. v. 
 
 Section 134. 
 
 THE GOSPEL OP WORK. 
 I. 
 
 Work, hard ^ work, is a blessing to "^ the soul and the character ' of 
 the man who works. Young men ■• may not think so. They ^ may say : 
 " What * more pleasant than to have '' one's fortune made for one, and ' 
 have nothing more before one than to enjoy life ? What * more pleasant 
 than to be idle ; or, at least, to do only what one likes, and no more 
 than one Ukes ?" But they would find themselves mistaken. They 
 would find that idleness makes a man® restless, discontented, greedy, 
 the '" slave of his own lusts and passions, and see, too late, that no man ' 
 is more to be pitied than the man " who has nothing to do. Yes, 
 thank ^"^ God, every morning, when you get up, that you have something 
 to do that day which must be done, whether you like it or not. ; Being " 
 forced to work, and forced to do your best, will breed in " you temper-
 
 « 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 34. 9 1 
 
 ance and self-control, diligence and strength of will, cheerfulness and 
 content, and a (S. 132, N. 10) hundred virtues which the idle^*^ man will 
 never know. 
 
 1, f^Wer. 2, fiir. 3, character = dignity. Turn 'of — works 'by 
 
 * of him (bejfcn) who (after which insert the adv. ba) works. 4, men = 
 
 people, Scute. When 'people' signifies ' persons ' in the general sense of 
 the word, it is mostly rendered by yplltc. In the signification of 
 'nation' it is rendered by Sl^olf, n., corresponding to the liatin 
 *populus' and the French 'peuple'. In the first signification, however, 
 we can often translate it by the indefinite pronoun 'man', which also corres- 
 ponds to the English 'they ', ' we ', ' you ', used in a general and indefinite 
 sense. 5, = They say perhaps. 6, aini^ giebt e^. 7, to have = to 
 
 see; for one = by (vcn) others. 8, Say 'with no other task than to 
 
 enjoy one's life ' ? 9, * Man* is here used in the signification of ' human 
 
 being', when it is generally rendered by * bet SJJcilfc^ '. 10, Read S. 102, 
 N. 13. 11, Use the demonstrative pron. berienigc. 12, When the Im- 
 
 perative of the 2nd pers. is used in a general application, we use it either in 
 the 2nd pers. sing, or the 2nd pers. pi. Use the 2nd pers. sing, in this case. 
 13, Being — best = The compulsion (3ivang, m.) to work (jur 5lrbeit) and the 
 necessity to do your ( = thy) best. 14, Place ' in you ' ( = thee) after 
 
 'virtues', immediately before the infinitive 'breed' (= awaken, ctlrecfeti). 
 15, the idle man, ber 3)?iifiggdiiger. 
 
 Section 135. 
 
 THE GOSPEL OF WORK. 
 
 11. 
 
 The monks in olden times found it so\ When (S. 18, N. 6) they 
 shut'' themselves up from the world to worship God in' prayers and 
 hymns, they found that [here follows the subject '"they"], without working*, 
 without^ hard work either of head or of hands, they could not' even be 
 good men (S. 134, N. 9). The'' devil came and* tempted them, they 
 said, as often as they were' idle. T An idle monk's soul was lost, they 
 used (S. 129, N. 6) to say, and they spoke truly. Though they gave" 
 up a large portion of ^^ every day, and of every night also, to ^^ prayer 
 and worship, (S. 27, N. 8) yet" they found [that] they could not pray 
 aright without work. 
 
 And "working (S. 11, N. 7) is praying," said one of the holiest of 
 them that" ever hved ; and he spoke truth (S. 3, N. 2); if^** a man will 
 but do his work for the sake of duty, which is for the sake of God. — 
 Charles Kingsley. 
 
 1, Turn ' it so ' by ' bag *, which place at the head of the sentence, using the 
 inverted construction and inserting the adv. 'audi' after the verb. 2, to 
 
 shut oneself up, fic^ ab'fci)Ue§eit, sep. comp. str. v. refl. 3, buvdr, to worship, 
 
 vere^rcn. 4, working = work. 5, o()ne augeilreiigte Jlcpf-'cbcr Jpanbarbeit. 
 
 6, not even, tud)t cinmal. 7, The words ' They said ' are best placed at 
 
 the head of this passage. To translate the verbs correctly, you must carefully 
 read App. §§ 28 and 30. 8, and tempted them = in order to tempt them. 
 
 9, Wdven. 10, 'to give up', here = to devote, nntmcii, with dat. 11, of — 
 also = of the day and of the night. 12, bem ®ebct unb ben 2lnbacbteiibiiiigcn. 
 
 13, yet, bo(^, to be placed after the subject. 14, who ever (je) has lived.
 
 93 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 35. 
 
 How must the verbs be placed ? 15, Begin a new period here, and say: 
 
 ' When a man (S. 134, N. 9) does his work for the sake of (urn . . . toillcn, 
 which governs the Gen.) his duty, (S. 27, N. 8) he does it (to agree with 
 'duty') for God's sake'. 
 
 Section 136. 
 
 DO NOT BE ASHAMED OF YOUR ORIGIN \ 
 
 I. 
 
 General Bau, a German (S. loi, N. i) officer in^ the service of Russia, 
 who had contributed much to the elevation of the great Catherine ^, had ^ 
 orders to march to Holstein with a body of troops of which he had the 
 command. He was a soldier of fortune, and no one knew either his 
 family or his native place. |One day (S. 19, N. 2), as he was encamped 
 near ^ Husum, he invited the principal * officers to dinner. As they were 
 sitting down to the table, they * saw a plain miller and his wife brought 
 into the lent, whom ' the general had sent his aide-de-camp to seek. 
 The poor miller and his wife approached, trembling (S. 53, N. 12) with* 
 apprehension. The general reconciled them to' their situation, and 
 made " them sit down beside him to dinner, during which he asked ^L 
 them a number of questions about their family. 
 
 1, Origin, Jpevfunft, f. ; in the service of Russia, tn rufftfc^en ©ienfieu. 
 
 2, ,$lat^arina I., Jlaifevin con flfiu^lanb, irurbe am 15. 5Unit 1684 geboren intt 
 UMr tie !£c(I)tcv eiiteg littjauifc^en 93auevei, nameiiei (Samuel ©fawroiisfi. Sm 3al)re 
 1 701 ttiuvbe fte bte ®attin cineg fdjiiiebifc^cn ©ragoncr^, ftel bann bei ber (Sinnaf)me 
 aJkiifiiburgtS buv^ bie OJuffen (1702) in bie Jpdnbe beg vnJTifc&cn ©cncvalg ©cJ^eremetjcw, 
 burc^ ben \t jum Siivflen a)Jenfd^ifon) nub enblid^ jnm Jlaifer $eter bcm ©rogen fam, 
 bcr jic^ in jie cerliebte unb ftc^ im Sa^re 1707 ^eimlic^ mit i^c cermd^len lief. 3hx 
 eic^entlic^er Saufname luar 2)Javt^a, beim Ubertritt jur 9vie(^ii"(^ fat^olifc^en ^ircl)e 
 fi-l}iclt fie icbo(^ bie 9]amen Jlat^arina Sllerictttna. 3m Salute 171 1 gelang e^ i^r, inbem 
 fie fid^ bie ®unft beg (Vro§v>ejierg j^u gennnnen trufte, am $vutl) baS vuffifc^e ^eer burc^ 
 i'ift auS 9efdf)ilicl)ev Sage \yx befreien, ttujrauf fie int 3af)ve 17 12 »on ^etcc bcm ©rpfcn 
 cffcntli^ alg fcinc red)tmd§ige ©ema^lin ancrfannt nsnrbe. ©ie ftturbe enbtic^ im 3at)ve 
 
 1724 alg .taifevin feicrlic^ gefront, ale fie jebod^ nac^ $etcvS beg ©rofen S^obe im Siabve 
 
 1725 auf 33ettieb beei giivften aJ?cnfc^ifott) alg regiercnbc J?ai[evin auSgerufen nmrbc, iiberlief 
 fie ft(^ ciner jiigcllofen Seben^weife unb fiarb om i7.2)'?at 1727. ©ietrarb l^hittev breicr 
 !£cd)ter, Jlatl)avina, 9(nna (9)(utter $cterg III.) unb (Slifabetf), ber nai^maligen .faiferin. 
 
 3, Say 'had the order'; render 'to march — command,' liter. =with an under 
 his command standing body of troops (XruVVencorpg, n.) to (S. 72, N. 4) Holstein 
 to march. 4, near = not far from, unmeit. 5, = first. 6, = they saw that 
 a simple miller and his wife were brought into the tent. 7, bie ber ©cneral 
 bnvd) feinen Slbjutanten l)attc t)olen taffen. 8, cor. 9, mit. 10, made them 
 sit down, Iie§ (or ^icf, bade) fie . . . f)la^'nef)mcn ; beside him = on his side; to 
 dinner, beim @ffen. 11, to ask a person numerous questions, einem oicle 
 Svagen vxjv'lcgen; about, iibcr. 
 
 Section 137. 
 
 DO NOT BE ASHAMED OP YOUR ORIGIN. 
 
 II. 
 
 The good man told him that he was (A pp. § 28) the eldest son of a 
 miller, and that he had two brothers in ' a mercantile line and a sister.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 37. 93 
 
 " But," said the general, " had you ^ not another brother besides the two 
 whom you have mentioned ? " 1 The miller told him he had another ^ 
 brother, but * he went to the wars very young, and as * they had never 
 heard of him, they supposed he was dead. The ^ general, reading (S. 16, 
 N. 4) in the eyes of the officers that they were surprised at his enter- 
 taining himself so long with questioning the poor man, turned to them 
 and said : " Gentlemen, you have always been curious to know from 
 what family I sprung '^ ; I now tell ^ you that I am not ashamed of my 
 origin ; that I am the brother of this honest miller ; he has given you the 
 history*. of my family." The general, after spending^" (S. 55, N. i) the 
 day with his relations, in" the fesdvity of which his officers heartily 
 joined, took measures to better their fortune ^'^. — Anecdotes. 
 
 1, in — line, im Jlaufmanneiflanbe. 2, Translate 'you' by 3^c in this 
 
 address, and use the verb in the 2nd pers. pi., which at that time was the 
 common address for people of the lower rank of society. Say * had you 
 (3^r) besides (auf er) the two already mentioned brothers not yet another ' ? 
 3, no^ einen. 4, abcr er fci fctjr jung in ben Jlvieg gcjogcti. 5, ba ; read 
 
 S. 27, N. 8. 6, Say ' The general who read in the eyes of the officers 
 
 their surprise (insert baruhr), that he occupied himself so long with the 
 questioning (^Ui^fragen, n.) of the poor man '. 7, jlamnien. 8, teil = s?y. 
 9, family-history, S. 76, N. 22, J. 10, To spend a day with one's relations, 
 einen Xag in ©cfellfdnift feincv a3erwanbten veitcbcn. 11, bci welder geftlid)fcit 
 
 fic^ bie Cjtijieve t)CVjU(^ betciligtcn. 12, fortune = position. 
 
 Section 138. 
 
 NOT NEAR ENOUGH YET. 
 
 There ^ is a popular report in the Brandenburg district, where Bis- 
 marck's family has been so many centuries at home, which attributes to 
 the Bismarcks-, as the characteristic saying of the house, the phrase : 
 "^]Dd^ lange nid^t genug" — (Not near enough yet), aJtd which expresses ^ 
 we^ suppose, the popular^ conception of* their tenacity of purpose — 
 that ^ they were not tired out of any plan they had formed by a reiterated 
 failure or a pertinacious opposition which would have disheartened most 
 of their compeers.' There'' is a somewhat extravagant illustradon of 
 this characteristic in Bismarck's \vild, youthful days, if his biographer may 
 be trusted. When studying* law at Berlin, he had been more than once 
 disappointed ^ by a bootmaker who "* did not send home his boots when 
 they were promised. Accordingly " when this next happened, a servant 
 of the young jurist appeared at the bootmaker's at six in the morning 
 (App. § 9) with the simple question : " Are Herr ^^ von Bismarck's boots 
 ready ? " When he was told they were not ^^, he departed '*, but at ten 
 minutes past six another servant appeared, asking ^® the same question, 
 and '* so at precise intervals of ten minutes it went on ail day, till by '" 
 the evening the boots were finished and^^ sent home. — Earle, "The 
 Philology of the English Tongue." 
 
 1, Say ' In the province of Brandenburg, where the family Bismarck for 
 (feit) several centuries is at home ('to be at home,' here anfviJTig fcin) there is 
 (cvifiievt) a popular (\)olfi^tiimUi:^) report (-Sage, f.) which, as a characteristic
 
 94 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 38. 
 
 / 
 
 saying (SDa'^tfpruc^, m.) attributes (ju'f(f)vciben, with the dat.) to the Bismarclis 
 the phrase (3)?otto, n.) '. 2, Say * as we suppose ', which place after the rel. 
 
 pron. 3, }:ic>)uldr; conception, SSotjieKung, f. 4, boh il)rein jdt)en 
 
 Sc^fjaltcn am 3»c(!e. 5, iqdH^mt. 6, that they even (aud)) through 
 
 repeated failure (geljlf^tagen) or pertinacious (^artnddig) opposition (ffiibcrftanb, 
 m.), which would have discouraged (cntmutigt ^dtte, which place at the end of 
 this clause) most of their compeers ((StanbeSgetiojfen), were not tired out of any 
 plan they had formed (ji(^ nic^t von t^rcm einnial gefaften ^iam abkingen lie^cn). 
 7, A somewhat eccentric illustration ^Bctag, m.) of (fur) this characteristic 
 quality we find in Bismarck's wild (fiurmifi^) youth, if we can trust his bio- 
 grapher. 8, To study law, Sura jiuticrcn. 9, tduf(^en ; by, Bon. 10, Say 
 'who had not (App. § 10) sent back his boots at the appointed (»erabvebet) time'. 
 11, When (S. 4, N. 2) it therefore happened again (ttjicbev gefdje^en). 12, j^^iitft 
 -Otto 0011 ^i^marcf wuxie am i. Slvvtt 18 15 ju ©^cufjaufcn, bem ©tamntgutc bet 
 g-amitie ©igmarrf, in bcr $vo»inj 5Bvanbcnburg im ^onigreic^e 5)3veu^eu geboren. (St 
 entjiammt bet alten pveu§ifd)eu abctigen S^mitie Ben ©i^ntarcf , ioctdje auc^ Bon ©igmarcfs 
 ©(^on^aitfen genannt nnrb, urn bicfetbe Bon bet i^t Berioanbten gamitic Bon Siemarcfj 
 S3of)ten ju unterf^eiben. S3ou ffli^mavd ttat jucvj^ offentUc^ auf bem Sanbtage Bon 1847 
 o(S j5uf)vct ber du^evftcn 9te^tcn (extreme Conservatives) unb bann atS 2JJitgUcb bcr 
 im 3at)te 1848 tagenben jweitcn preii^ifc^eu Jlammer (the Prussian House of 
 Commons) aU cntfc^iebencr ©egnet beg 9Jepvd[eutationgfi)fiem3 (Representative 
 Government) unb bet Oieii^gBetfaffung ^ctBot. ©ein cntfd)iebenc^ Satent fut bie 
 btBlomatif^e Saufbafjn beftimmte bie Oiegietung, tf)n im 3at)re 185 1 jum Segationgj 
 feftetdr bei ber ^5veu^ifd)en 58unbe(3tag^ge[anbfc^aft in gvanffurt ^/3W. ju etnennen. S)rei 
 ?D?onate fpdter ttiurbe er jeboc^ fc^on pm SBunbcgtageigefanbten ert)oben, in tt>dd)ct (Sigen^ 
 fd}aft ct Betgcbti^ ^Pveu^enS ©ieic^fteUung mit Diltcic^ bcim SBunbeeitage crflrebte. 
 Sflad^bcm er feit bem i. Slpvil 1859 pteu^ii"d}et ©efanbtcr in $ctetgbiu-g imb feit bem 
 griibiaf)t 1862 93otfd)aftcv in 5Pati^ gewefen, tvat et am 24. (September begfelben Saljtee 
 a[§ aJJinifiet beS Stu^wdrtigeu an bie @pi|e beiJ neu etnannten .flabinett^. @3 iviitbe ju 
 roeit fubtcn, I}iet auf bie (Sinjctfjciten feinet grc^avtigeu (Stfolge a\S 3J?iniftetprdftbent 
 cinjuget)en, geniige eg p bemevfen, ba^ fein Ǥauptftveben bavauf geridjtet wax, ^^reufien 
 gut Ijetrfc^enben SDIac^t in S)eutf{!^taub gu mac^cn, Dficei^ baraug gu Berbtdngcn, 
 unb fd)(ie§lid) burc^ Stufiofung bc^ beutfd)cn ©taatcubuubeg ein einigeg 2)eutfd)(anb untet 
 bem Septet *45reufenS gu fdjaffen. aBie it)m biefe. 5lufgabe gelang, ift allgemein be; 
 fannt. !r>ie fdjon lange jnnfc^cn 5).>teu§eu unb Dftvetc^ beftanbene (Siferfud)t bta^ 
 cnbtii^ im Sa^re 1866 bucd) ben Jlrieg in lic^ten gtanimen au^. $tcupen ging gldngcnb 
 an& bemfetbcn ate ©icgct ^evBor. ®uvd) ben *)3vager 8^rieben'5Bevttag entfagte Djireic^ 
 nic^t atleii; feinen 5tnfvrii(^en aU $vdfibialuiac^t im beutfc^en ©taatenbunbe, fonbern 
 fc^ieb gdn,^lid9 oug bcmfelbeu aiiS unb cifauute ben untct ^pveuBcnS Subvnng gu ftiftcnben 
 Olorbbeuifdjcu 23unb an. 3n Jluerfcunuiig fciucv gvc^cu (i'vfolge unube SBiamavcf nac^ 
 beenbigtem ^riege in ben ©rafenftanb cttjobcn unb gitgtetc^ gum dangler beS SJotbbeut; 
 fd)cn ^unbeS ctnannt, bcffen 9lnge(egen()citen ct ntit fo bebeutenbem ®efd)icf leitctc, ba§ 
 bei ber im 3al)ve 1870 Bon gtanftcic^ an ^teufjen cvfolgten Jttieg^etfldrung audi) bie 
 ©iibftaaten fid) bem 9Jorbbeutfc^en Suube anfc^toffen unb bag gauge S)cutfd)(anb Bcteinigt 
 gegen ben gcinb in ben .ftampf gie()en fonnte, aug bem cS mit Sotbeeten gcftont ftegrci^ 
 I)etBotging. ©ci^on am 18. Sanuat 1871 uvivb ^onig SBitbetm I. Bon ^reufen untct 
 Sujlimmung adet bcutfd}en ©taaten im ©d^IoJTe gu ffietfaideg aU beutf^et JTaifet 
 j)toflamiert. !Dag gro^e 3tel Stgmarcfg utar etteid)t. 5)ic (Siu{}ctt beg bibber gerfiiicfcUen 
 ffiaterlanbeg toat iBiebevljetgcficIlt, em md^tigcS beutfd^eg ?St(id) untct bet giibvung 515rcus 
 ^en6 gcgriinbet, imb bie bemfclben brobeubeu Jvcinbe tBavcn beftcgt unb gcfd)(agen. 9lm 
 20. ajfai 1 87 1 iButbc Bon bem giitften unb Oteic^gfangtct ffliiinunrf gu gtanffurt a/SO?. 
 bet gtiebe mit gtan!vcic& untetgcicbnet, burd) ujct^cn bie fvuljet Bon bem beutfc^en 
 OJeid)e getreuuten ^ctgogtiimet l'otf)riitgen unb (Slfa§ bemfclben tBiebet ciuBctlcibt 
 toutbcn unb gtanftcid) <tc^ Bcvpfllic^tetc, an ©eutf^lanb cine Jlticggentfc^dbigung Bon 
 fiinf aRilliavbcn granfen gu gablcu. 2)ic (Stcffnung beg bcutfd)cu gJcid)6tagog in Sctlin, 
 om 21. SWdtg 1 871, gc{)ott Bicllcic^t gu ben gvopten !Itiumpt)cu biefeg tjo^ji feltfamen
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION I38. 95 
 
 bewunbentngSnjurbigcn 2)?annfe. 13, Supply 'ready', and use the Present 
 
 Subjunctive. 14, fort'gcljen. 15, = with the same question. 16, and — 
 day = and this was repeated (unb bifg hncbcv^cUe jic^) all day long (ben flanj^en Xaq^ 
 lang) at (in) precise intervals of 10 minutes. 17, an, contracted with the 
 
 def. art. « 18, = and were sent back. 
 
 Section 139. 
 
 A GIIEA.T LOSS. 
 
 Mr. Thomas Carlyle had lent the Manuscript of the first volume of 
 his " French Revolution " to a neighbour to peruse. By ^ some mis- 
 chance or other, it "^ had been left lying on the parlour-floor, and * become 
 forgotten. Weeks ran on*, when at last the historian sent for^ his 
 manuscript, the * printers being loud for copy. Inquiries "^ were made, 
 and* then it was found that the maid-of-all-work, finding' what she con- 
 ceived to be a bundle of waste paper on the floor, had ^^ used it to light 
 the kitchen and parlour fires with ". Such ^^ was the answer returned '* 
 to Mr. Carlyle, and his consternation and despair may be imagined 
 (S. 4, N. 4). iThere ^* was, however, no help for him but to set himself 
 resolutely to -^'ork to re-write his book ; and ^* he turned to and did it. 
 He had no draft ^*, and '' was compelled to rake up from his memory facts, 
 ideas, and expressions, which had long since been dismissed. The 
 composition^* of the book in the first instance had been a work ^real 
 pleasure ; the ^' re-writing of it, a second time, was one of pain and 
 anguish almost beyond belief. That^" he persevered and finished the 
 volume under such circumstances aff'ords '^' an instance of determination 
 of purpose which has seldom been exceeded. — S. Smiles, " Self-Help." 
 
 1, By — other = Through a mischance (iPiifgcfc^ict, n.). 2, it — lying, 
 
 l)atte man e^ . . . liegcn laJTen. 3, and — forgotten = where it was forgotten. 
 
 4, ran on = passed away. 5, nac^. 6, the — copy = since the printers 
 
 desired (vcvlangen) the same. 7, to make inquiries, Diadjfcvj'dimigen anftcllcn. 
 
 8, unb nun ftcllte ii jicl) (Krau3. 9, finding — floor = in the oj)inion of finding 
 
 a bundle of worthless papers on the floor. 10, had used (benu^cit . . . jn) 
 
 the same. Read carefully S. 87, N. 6, and construe accordingly. 11, with 
 
 = with it, S. 4. N. 5,5. 12, Such = that. 13, = which Mr. C. received. 
 14, (Si5 blicb tt}m inbcJTcn nid)t'.^ anbcvcei ubvig, aI(J. 15, nui? er niad)te fid) bavan 
 
 nnb fii()vte eel line*. 16, tinmnirf, m. 17, and — dismissed = and had to 
 
 ( = must) torture (abmavtcvn) his memory in order to find again the from (uon) 
 him long forgotten facts, ideas, and expressions. 18, composition = work; 
 
 in the first instance = at first. Supply ' for him ' after ' pleasure '. 19, Say 
 
 *to write it for the (^uni) second time was a painful and almost incredibly 
 anxious (angfivcK) work. 20, 2)afi ev fie buid)fi'i(n-fe. 21, =is; determination 
 of purpose - strength of will, 2i*illciietvaft, f . ; exceeded, ubertroffcn. 
 
 Sectioji 140. 
 
 HERO WORSHIP'. 
 I. 
 
 Do "^ not think it a mean thing to look up to (^11) those who are supe- 
 rior to yourselves ^ On the contrary, you will find in practice*, that
 
 q6 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION T40. 
 
 z/ z's only the meanest hearts, the shallowest and the basest (S. 1 28, N. 11) 
 w/zo feel no admiration, but (S. 6, N. 10) only envy for those who 
 are better than themselves ; who delight in^ finding fault with them, 
 blackening (S. i, N. 3) their character, and showing that they are not 
 after all so much superior to other* people; while '^ if is the noblest- 
 hearted, the very men who are most worthy to be admired themselves, 
 who feel * most the pleasure, the joy, and the strength of reverence (S. 3, 
 N. 2); of^ having some one whom they can look up to and admire; 
 some one in whose company they can forget ^^ themselves, their own 
 interest, their own pleasure, their own honour and^^ glory, and cry: 
 " Him I must hear; him I must follow; to him I must cling, whatever ^^ 
 may betide I " 
 
 1, ^etbcnwerc'^nnig, f. 2, Do — thing. .§attc eg tiic[)t fiir ju gcrtng. 3, Use 
 the second person plural; to be superior to a person, emem wett iibetlegeii 
 fein. 4, in practice = always. 5, in — them = to discover weaknesses 
 
 in (an, with dat.) them. 6, to other people = to others. 7, while — 
 
 men, jrd^rcnb bie I)od)t)erjigflen SKciif^cu, gcrabe biejenigcn. 8, * to feel ', here 
 
 empfinben ; 'most' here = deepest, am ticfjlen ; pleasure, @enu^, m. 9, In 
 
 order to connect this sentence more closely with the preceding, I propose to 
 say: 'the pleasure (Ocnup, m.) of having (S. 34, N. 10) some one to (j;u) whom 
 they can look up, and whom they can admire '. The auxiliary ' can ' must be 
 omitted in the tirst instance. 10, Where must you place the two verbs, 
 
 and in what order? 11, It is a matter of course that the words 'their 
 
 own ' must be repeated here in German. Why ? 12, Whatever (3Bag 
 
 auc^) may happen. 
 
 Section 141. 
 
 HERO WORSHIP. 
 
 II. 
 
 Blessed^ and ennobling is the feeling which gathers round a wise 
 teacher or ^ a great statesman all the more earnest, high-minded, pious 
 youths of his generation"; the'' feeling which makes® soldiers follow the 
 general whom they trust, they know not why or whither, through danger *, 
 hunger, fatigue, and'' death itself; the* feeling which, in its highest per- 
 fection, made* the Apostles forsake all and follow Christ^, saying (S. in, 
 N. 6): "Lord, to ^'^ whom shall we go? Thou hast the words of eternal 
 hfe," and which made them ^^ ready to work '^'^ and to die for Him whom 
 the world called the Son of the carpenter, but whom they, through '^ the 
 Spirit of God bearing witness with their own pure and noble spirits, 
 knew ^* to be the Son of the Living God. — Charles Kingsley, " The 
 Water of Life." 
 
 1, *8cg(ii(fenb. 2, Repeat here the prep, 'round', um. 3, generation = 
 time. 4, jcncS. 5, to make follow, fotgcn tjcifcn, which verbs must be 
 
 placed after the rel. clause ; folgcn requires the dat, ; to trust a person, einem 
 sertraucn. 6, Use the pi. with this noun. 7, yea, even unto death. 
 
 8, 'to make', here again tjcipen (to bid), str. v. tr, ; which place after ' follow' 
 according to App. § 19. 9, Jesus Christ has retained its Latin declension, 
 
 thus: N. Sefug (Sf)tijlitg ; G. 3cfu gf)vifti; D. 3cfu (Stjrijlo ; Ace. Sefum gfiviftum. 
 Use the dat. (Sl^vifio, since folgcn governs the dat. 10, 'to whom', here
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 141. 97 
 
 Vootyn (whither), which appears in the German text of the Bible. 11, 'to 
 
 make ready ', here = to enable, bcfdtjigen. 12, trivfen is more appropriate 
 
 here than arfceiten, considering the elevated style of the whole speech. 
 13, through — spirits, fraft beg gottlic&en ®cifteg, bcr in i^ten reincit, cblcn §erjen 
 Seugnig ablegte. 14, knew to be, als (followed by the Ace.) . . . ctfannteii. 
 
 Sectio7i 142. 
 
 JAMES WATT AND THE STEAM-ENGII03. 
 
 I. 
 
 James Watt was the great Improver of the steam-engine ; but, in 
 truth ^, as to all that is admirable in its structure, or vast in its utility, he 
 should rather be described as its Inventor. // was by his inventions that 
 its action ^ was so regulated as ' to make it capable of being applied to 
 the finest and most delicate manufactures, and its power so increased as 
 to set weight and solidity at defiance. By his admirable contrivances* it 
 has become a thing stupendous alike for its force and flexibility, for the 
 prodigious power which it can exert, and the ease, precision, and ductility 
 with which this power can be varied, distributed, and applied. The 
 trunk of an elephant, that can pick up a pin or rend " an oak, is as 
 nothing to it. It can engrave a seal, and crush masses of obdurate 
 metal before it, draw out without ' breaking a thread as fine as gossamer, 
 and lift a ship of war like a bubble in the air. It can embroider'' muslin 
 and forge anchors, cut steel into ribbons*, and impel' loaded vessels 
 against the fury of the winds and waves. 
 
 1, * in truth ' is better not translated here. Say * but in regard to (in 
 ffludfft^t auf) all that (S. 3, N. 7) refers (|t^ bfj;icf)en) to (aitf) the excellence of 
 its construction and (rtjie) to (auf) the variety (^Kanuigfaltigfcit, f.) of its 
 application (Dlu^anivcnlDung, f.), should he rather (eigcntUc^) be called the 
 Inventor of the same'. 2, SEivfung, f.; in what voice is the verb? Insert 
 
 the adv. crfl after the auxiliary. 3, as — defiance = as (urn) to be able to 
 
 employ it in (bci) the making (2lnfcrHgung, f.) of the finest and most delicate 
 (jart) manufactures (gabvifatc), and its power so increased as (um) to be able to 
 render resistance (9BiberftanD leii^en) to every weight (8a(t, f.) and every solidity 
 (ScPigfcit, f.). Translate ' to be able ' by fcnncn, which need be expressed but 
 once, and must be placed at the very end of the whole period, which, along 
 with the following, is perhaps the most difficult to translate that has yet been 
 given. 4, tSinriittungcn ; it = the machine; thing, Siierfjeug, n., after which 
 
 place the verb 'become'; alike for, unb jtvar bic^ [owdjl ivegen . . . irie and}. 
 5, rend = tear down. 6, Say ' without tearing it', which place after 
 
 'gossamer ' (Scmnuvfabcn). 7, Insert the prep, auf here. 8. ©trcifen. 
 
 9, to impel against, entgc'gcntrcitcn, governing the dat. 
 
 Section 143. 
 
 JAMES WATT AND THE STEAM-ENGHSTE. 
 
 II. 
 
 It would be difficult to estimate the value of the benefits which these 
 inventions have conferred upon this country. There is no branch of 
 industry that has not been indebted ^ to them ; and ^, in all the most 
 
 VOL. IV, H
 
 98 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 43. 
 
 material, they have not only widened most magnificently the field of its 
 exertions, but ' multiplied a thousand-fold the amount of its productions. 
 It was our improved steam-engine, in short *, that fought the battles of 
 Europe and sustained and exalted, through ^ the late tremendous contest, 
 the political greatness of our land. // z's the same great power which 
 now enables us to pay the interest of our debt, and to maintain * the 
 arduous struggle in which ive are still engaged ( 1 8 1 9) with the skill '' and 
 capital of countries (S. 16, N. 10) less oppressed with (oon) taxation. 
 
 But these are poor* and narrow views of its importance. It has in- 
 creased indefinitely the mass of® human comforts and enjoyments, and*" 
 rendered cheap and accessible, all over the world, the materials of wealth 
 and prosperity. 
 
 1, I am greatly indebted to you, i(^ %ibe S^^iten stcteS ju »etban!cn. 2, Say 
 * and in the principal branches ' ; most magnificently, auf ba3 qrof atttgftc. 
 3, Insert 'also' here. 4, j^urj, which place at the head of the period. 
 
 5, through = in. 6, foitfe|ett, which rendering will make the relative 
 
 clause '/■« — f«g-fl§-e^' superfluous. 7, ' skill ', here = industry. 8, poor = 
 superficial ; narrow, bcfc^idnft ; of = about. 9, of human = of our. 10, unb 
 bic ©tcffc, n?e(d)e fonft nur bem Gteic^tum uiib bent aBo()l|lanb jugaitgli^ »?aren, fiir tie 
 gaiije 2Bclt billig uub erveic^bar gcmac^t. 
 
 Section 144. 
 
 JAMES WATT AND THE STEAM-EITGINK 
 
 III. 
 
 It has armed the feeble hand of (S. 3, N. 2) man, in short*, with a 
 power to which no limits can be assigned "^ ; completed ^ the dominion of 
 mind over the most refractory qualities of matter *, and laid a sure foun- 
 dation for ^ all those future miracles of mechanic power which ® are to 
 aid and reward the labours of after generations. It '' is to the genius of 
 one man, too, that all this is mainly owing ! And certainly no man ever 
 bestowed such a gift on his kind *. The blessing is not only universal, 
 but ® unbounded ; and the fabled *° inventors of the plough and the 
 loom, who were deified by their rude" contemporaries, conferred less 
 important benefits (App. § 5) on mankind than the inventor of our 
 present steam-engine. 
 
 This will be the fame of Watt with *^ future generations, and it " is 
 sufficient for his race and his country. — Lord Jeffrey. 
 
 1, Commence the period with * In short '. 2, to assign limits to a thing, 
 einer ©ac^e (SJrenjen ilccfcn. 3, Say ' it has completed ', etc. 4, 9Jfateric, f. 
 
 5, ju. 6, Say ' which are destined (ju ctwaS beftimmt fcin, Gomp. S. 87, N. 6) 
 to assist and to reward the labours of ( = of the) future generations. 7, It — 
 owing = All this we owe mainly to the genius of a single man. 8, @efd)lec^t, 
 n. ; use the verb in the Perfect ; ever, je worl^cr. 9, fcubeni aud^. 10, fagem 
 l^aft. 11, rude = inexperienced. 12, bei, with the def. art. 13, biefev. 
 
 Section 145. 
 
 MANUFACTURES OF ENGLAND'. 
 
 The principal branches of'^ the industrial pursuits are the manufac- 
 tures* of cotton, woollen*, and worsted goods, iron and hardware,
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 145. 99 
 
 earthenware*, hosiery, mining^, and shipbuilding. The geographical 
 distribution of the manufacturing ' population is dependent partly on 
 natural, partly on accidental circumstances. The proximity of a coal- 
 field* decides the point' in many instances^"; for, even where the raw 
 material is bulky '^ it is generally more practicable to bring ^^ it to the 
 coal (^ot)Ien), than the coal to it, an^' instance of which is furnished 
 by the copper-ore of Cornwall being taken to Swansea to be smelted. 
 The iron manufacture is carried on ^* generally at ^■' the coal-fields, 
 the ^' chief seats being South Wales, Staffordshire, and Derbyshire. The 
 cotton manufacture has^^ been located in Lancashire and Cheshire for 
 /ke last three centuries ; but ^^ it has attained its present dimensions very 
 much through those counties being readily furnished with the raw material 
 from America, as'® well as from the abundance of coal outside those 
 counties ; Manchester, Bolton, Oldham, Stockport, and Macclesfield are 
 the chief seats of the manufacture.— Bevan, " The Student's Manual of 
 Modern Geography." 
 
 1, 3)te engtifc^e 3tibujirie. 2, of — pursuits, bcr Snbujivie. 3, gabri; 
 
 fation, f. 4, The preposition 'of is best repeated in this enumeration ; 
 
 worsted, auS JfammwoKe gefertigt ; ' goods ', here ©toffe. 5, irbcneg ©cfc^in: or 
 
 Xcvf«Waren. 6, ©ergninb (Sd)iff6bau. 7, manufacturing = industrial. 
 
 8, ^o^Unlagcr, n. 9, the point, baiiiber, which place last. 10, instances = 
 cases. 11, fc^irct unb umfangreid). 12, ^infc^ajfcn ; than — it = than the 
 
 reverse, afg unt9efet)rt. 13, It is well to begin a new period here, thus : 
 
 ' An example of this (baju) furnishes the copper-ore of Cornwall, which is 
 taken (befoibern) to (S. 72, N. 4), S.', etc. 14, bctvciben, insep. c. str. v. 
 
 15, at the = in the neighbourhood of the. 16, the — being = which are 
 
 mainly situated (bcfegcn) in. 17, has been located, iji aufciffig. The Present 
 is often used in German where the English use the Perfect to 
 express the duration of an action up to the time of speaking ; as — 
 Unfcre gamitie hio{)ut feit jiranjig Sa^ieii (or fcf)on jiratijig 3a()rc) in SDiatic^cjlcr, 
 our family has been living in Manchester for these last twenty years. 
 18, but — America. This clause containing a Gerund (being) preceded by the 
 preposition 'through ', must be construed according to S. i, N. 3, and S. 87, 
 N. 6 in the following way : * but it (fie) has received its present dimension 
 especially thereby (babur(f>, read S. 87, N. 6), that these counties can easily be 
 (S. 2, N. i) supplied with the raw material from America'. The three verbs 
 must, of course, be placed at the end, and in such a way that the governing 
 verb (can) stands last, and the auxiliary of tense in the middle. 19, as — 
 
 counties = as also (me aui) noc^) thereby, that the coal is [use the pi. in German] 
 to be got (ju \)a.hm fein) in abundance in the neighbouring counties. 
 
 Section 146. 
 
 MB. H. M. STAIJIiEY'S APPEAL ^ FOR SUPPLIES. 
 
 I. 
 
 Village o/'N'sanda% August 4, 1877. 
 To ' any Gentleman who speaks English at Embomma. 
 Dear* Sir, 
 
 1 have arrived at ' this place from Zanzibar with 1 1 5 souls, (S. 53, 
 N. 9) men, women, and children. We are now in * a state of imminent 
 
 H 2
 
 lOO GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION T46. 
 
 Starvation. We can buy'' nothing from the natives, for they laugh at' 
 our kinds of cloth *, beads, and wire. There '** are no provisions in the 
 country that may be purchased, except on market days, and starving 
 people cannot afford to wait for these markets. I '^, therefore, have made 
 bold to despatch three of my young men ''*, natives '* of Zanzibar, with 
 
 nebfi) a boy named Feruzi, of the English mission at Zanzibar, with 
 
 his letter. 
 
 I do not know you, but" I am told there (S. 104, N. 19) is an English- 
 man at (in) Embomma, and as you are a Christian and a gentleman, I 
 beg you not to disregard my request. The boy Robert will be better able 
 to describe our lone condition than I^^ can tell you in this letter. We are 
 in a state ^the greatest distress; but if your supplies'® arrive in time, I" 
 may be able to reach Embomma within four days. 
 
 1, Slnruf urn 3«fciibuug eon SBateu. 2, The village of N'sanda is three 
 
 days' journey from Embomma, or Boma, which is a small town on the 
 Congo or Livingstone River at a distance of sixty-five English miles from the 
 Atlantic, and, with regard to Stanley's position, may be considered the van of 
 civilisation in Africa, being the first place inhabited by Europeans. — For the 
 full understanding of this letter, it may be useful to observe that it was 
 written at the critical period when, at their journey home from the sources 
 of the Nile, and almost at the end of all their troubles, the heroic travellers 
 of more than 7000 miles through Equatorial Africa found themselves 
 face to face with the grimest of all enemies — starvation. Nearly forty 
 men filled the sick list with dysentery, ulcers, and scurvy, and the number 
 of victims of the latter disease was steadily increasing. For a considerable 
 time the people had had no other food but a few ground-nuts and bananas, 
 and were scarcely more than skin and bone. In this extremity Mr. Stanley 
 determined to despatch four of his strongest and swiftest men with this 
 letter to Embomma, where he was told there was one Englishman, one 
 Frenchman, and three Portuguese. He then intended to follow these men 
 as quickly as possible with the rest of his people, and to meet them and 
 the expected supplies on the road to Boma, thus gaining at least one or two 
 days, which might turn out to be of the greatest importance to his starving 
 followers. 3, Use the attributive construction, as explained in S. 48, 
 
 N. 6. 4, ©cetjrt. 5, at this place = here. 6, bem iBev^ungern na^e 
 
 fein. 7, ' buy ', here = exchange, eiii'taufc^cn. 8, iit)er, with Ace. 
 
 9, Say 'cloths, beads, and wires'. 10, Say 'Except on (5luper an) market 
 
 days there are (jinb) in the (auf bent) country no provisions to be got (ju "^aben) 
 that we can buy, and if one hungers, one cannot possibly wait for (auf, with 
 Ace.) these markets. 11, Say ' I venture (after which use the grammatical 
 
 object, as explained in S. 51, N. 13) therefore to send (ab'ffiten) ', etc. 
 12, Scute. 13, irelcfje au^ B^nuibar gcbiirtig ftnb. 14, man fagt mit 
 
 iebo(^. 15, I can tell you -1 can do. 16, 'supplies', here = goods. 
 
 17, I may be able = I can perhaps (See App. § 15). 
 
 Section 147. 
 
 MR. H. M. STANLEY'S APPEAL FOR SUPPLIES. 
 
 II. 
 
 I want 300 cloths^, each four yards long, of such quality as you trade 
 with, which is very different from that we have ; but * better than all would
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 147. lOI 
 
 be ten or fifteen man-loads of rice or grain to fill the pinched * bellies 
 immediately, as ^ even with the cloths it would require time to purchase 
 food, and starving people * cannot wait. The supplies must arrive within 
 two days, or'' I may have a fearful time of it among the dyingT\Of course 
 1 hold myself responsible for any* expense (S. 16, N. 10) you* may 
 incur in the business. What is wanted is immediate relief, and I pray 
 you to^° use your utmost energies to forward it at once. If (App. § 21) 
 you have such little luxuries " as tea, coflfee, sugar, and biscuits by you, 
 such ^^ as one man can easily carry, I beg you on " my own behalf that 
 you will send a small supply" and^* add to the great debt of gratitude due 
 to you upon the timely arrival of the supplies for my people. Until '" that 
 time I beg you to believe me. 
 
 Yours sincerely, 
 
 H. M. Stanley, 
 Commanding" the Anglo-American Expedition for" the 
 
 Exploration of Africa. 
 
 P.S. You'* may not know me by name, I therefore add, V am the 
 person that discovered'^^ Livingstone in 187 1. H. M. S. — H. M. Stanley, 
 " Through the Dark Continent." 
 
 1, cloths = pieces c/" cloth. 2, of — have = and of that quality with 
 
 which you trade, which is quite different from ours. 3, but — grain = but 
 
 still better would be (Pluperf, Subj.) as much rice or grain as ten or fifteen 
 men (Seute) can carry. 4, = hungry stomachs. 5, as — food = as (after 
 
 which place the subject * ive '), even in the possession of the cloths, we should 
 yet want time to exchange provisions for them (S. 4, N. 5, B). 6, bic .^uiigev; 
 leibeubcn. 7, or — dying. Liter. = if (after which place the subject '/') among the 
 dying I shall (foil) not experience (biirc^lc'beu) a dreadful time (App. § 18). 
 8, any = all. 9, bic 5()ncn auS bicfcr Sliu3clfflcnl)cit crirad)ffn incgeii. 10, to — 
 once = to do the ( = your) utmost in your powuer (fciit Slu^evjlce t()un) and to send 
 us the same (to agree with relief) at once. 11, iJuniesartifct ; to have by 
 
 oneself = to possess. 12, such = about as much. 13, on — behalf = 
 
 for my own person. 14, supply = quantity. 15, and — people = and 
 
 thereby still to increase (ucrgr6§cvn) the great debt of (S. 3, N. 2) gratitude, to 
 which I shall be in duty bound to you (ctnem lunvptid^tet fein) after the timely 
 (r«d)tjeitig) arrival of the supplies (Suvcnfeiibiuia). 16, ^ig batjin ctjipfcl)lc 
 
 iij m\6) 3()iicn t)od)ad)tcnb uiib erc^ebcnft. 17, Jlommanbicvcnbfr ber. 18, jur. 
 
 19, = Perhaps is my name unknown to you. 20, I — that = that it is I, 
 
 who. 21, aiif finben, of which use the Perfect. 
 
 Section 148. 
 
 ANSWER TO^ THE PRECEDING LETTER. 
 
 English Factory, Boma, 6th August 1877, 6.30 a.m. 
 H. M. Stanley, Esq. 
 Dear Sir, 
 Your welcome letter came" to hand yesterday, at 7 p.m. As' soon as 
 its contents were understood, we arranged to despatch to you such articles 
 as you requested, as much as our stock on hand would permit, and other 
 things that we deemed would be suitable in that locality. You will see
 
 I02 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION I48. 
 
 i/iai we send fifty pieces 0/ cloth, each twenty-four yards long, and some 
 sacks containing sundries for yourself; several* sacks <y rice, potatoes, a 
 few bundles ^fish, a bundle 0/" tobacco, and one demijohn' ^rum. The 
 carriers are all paid, so that you need not trouble yourself about them. 
 That ® is all we need say about busines§,-l We are exceedingly sorry to 
 hear that you have arrived there in such (fo) piteous ^ condition, but we 
 send our warmest congratulations to you, and hope that you will soon 
 arrive in Boma. (This* place is called Boma by us, though on the map it' 
 is Embomma.) Again '° hoping that you will soon arrive, and that you 
 are not suffering in health. 
 
 Believe" us to remain. 
 
 Your sincere friends, 
 
 HaTTON & COOKSON. 
 
 (Signed) A. Da Motta Veiga. 
 J. W. Harrison. 
 
 1, ouf, with Ace. ; a.m. ntovgen^ ; p.m. abenb^.— This letter and the accom- 
 panying supplies were received by Mr. Stanley in the morning of the 6th of 
 August, two days after he despatched his letter to Boma. Messrs. A. Da 
 Motta Veiga and J. W. Harrison were the managers of a factory be- 
 longing to Messrs. Hatton & Cookson of Liverpool. 2, came to 
 hand = we have . . . received. 3, As — locality = As soon as we had under- 
 stood the contents of the same (to agree with letter), we (App. § 14) made 
 arrangements (5lnfiatten trcffen) to send you the asked for (etbetetj) articles^ as 
 far as (fo ircit) our stock (9Barcntac(cr, n., or SBareuvonat, m.) would permit 
 us (S. 51, N. 13), and add (supply noc^) some other things of which we thought 
 they might ( = could) be useful to you there. 4, several, a few = some. 
 5, eine gvo^e ^orbfjafc^c. 6, ffieitct ^bett h)it nic^ts @ef(!^aftU<^c3 ju fageit. 
 7, ttauvig. 8, Say ' We call this place (Drt, m.) B '. 9, Say ' it is 
 called '. 10, Say ' Again (uoc^ einntal) expressing (S. ii i» N. 6), the hope '. 
 11, jei^nen Ujit in aufric^tiger Svcunbfc^aft crgebenfl:. 
 
 Section 149. 
 
 MR. STANIjEY'S ACKJJ'OWIiEDGMENT' OP THE PRECEDING 
 LETTER AND THE SUPPLIES '^ 
 
 I. 
 
 Banza M'Buko, August 6, 1877. 
 
 Messrs. A. Da Motta Veiga and J. W. Harrison, 
 Embomma, Congo River. 
 
 Gentlemen, 
 
 I(S. 115, N. i) have received your welcome letter, but better 
 ihan all, and ^ more welcome, are your supplies. I am unable to express 
 j'usl at present how grateful I feel. At the sight of (t>on) the stores ex- 
 posed' to our hungry eyes — at the sight of (oon) the rice, the fish, and 
 the rum, and* for me — wheaten bread, butter, sardines, jam, peaches, 
 grapes, beer (ye ^ gods ! just think of it — three bottles pale ale ^ !), besides 
 tea and sugar, we (App. § 14) are all so over-joyed and confused that 
 we cannot restrain ' ourselves from falling to and ' enjoying this sudden
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 149. I03 
 
 bounteous store. I beg you will charge' our apparent want of (an) 
 thankfulness to our greediness. If we do not thank you sufficiently in 
 words, rest assured we ^° feel what volumes could not describe. 
 
 For the next twenty-four hours we shall be too busy eating and 
 drinking to think of anything else much ; but I may say that the people" 
 will cry out joyfully, while ^^ their mouths are full of rice and fish : 
 " Verily, our master has found the sea and his brothers, but we did not 
 believe him until ^^ he showed us the rice and the pambe (rum). We 
 did not believe there ^* was any end to the great river ; but God be 
 praised for ever, for we shall see white people ^"* to-morrow, and our 
 wars^' and troubles will be over 1" 
 
 1, Slnjcige con bent (Smpfangc ; * supplies ', here SBareiifcnbnng, f. 2, Insert 
 the adverb noc^ here. 3, It was exposed to my eyes, e3 Wat t)ov nieincn 
 
 llugcn auSgeBrcitet ; ' hungry ', here gicrig. 4, unb — beg fur mic^ befiimmten 
 
 SBfif brotS ; the article, in the Gen. case, must be repeated before each of the 
 following nouns. 5, ye — it = o fc^et, 3f)t ©otter. 6, 9Bcipiet. 
 
 7, bciteiugen; from falling to, ;5iii(ugreifeii. 8, unb biefe unS fo fd^ncK unb 
 
 gro^mutig gugcfanbten SBorrate ju «erjet)reu. 9, I beg you will charge this 
 
 to his greediness, ic^ bitte <Ste, bie3 feincr (Spbcgierbe ^ut Sa(l legen ju njoKen. 
 10, we — describe = we feel more than could (App. § 33, and S. 2, N.'i) be 
 described to you through (buc^) volumes. 11, Seute. 12, Say ' while 
 
 their mouth is still filled with rice and fish'. 13, c§e. 14, Say 'the 
 
 great river had (See App. § 29) ever (je) an end. 15, a)?enfd)cn. 16, Jldmpfe 
 unb 93ef(^n)erbcn. 17, This letter, on the morning of the 7th of August, was 
 despatched to Boma, the caravan following slowly, and reaching Boma on 
 the 9th of August 1877, the 999th day from the date of their departure from 
 Zanzibar. The expedition then embarked on board a steamer at Boma, 
 and, on the nth, descended the river Congo. After steaming northward from 
 the mouth of the Congo for a few hours, the vessel entered the fine bay of 
 Kabinda, on the southern shores of which the native town of that name 
 in the county of Nyoyo is situate. The Expedition, after a- stay of eight days 
 at Kabinda, was kindly taken on board the Portuguese gunboat * Tamega ' to 
 San Paulo de Loanda. Here they were treated with the utmost hospitality 
 by the Portuguese and the officers of the English navy, who offered the 
 Expedition a passage to Cape Town in H.M.S. ' Industry', Commander R. C. 
 Dyer. The Cape of Good Hope was reached on the 2 ist of October. Here 
 a telegram from the Lords of the British Admiralty was received, authorising 
 the Commodore Francis William Sullivan to prepare H.M.S. 'Industry' for 
 the reception of the Expedition and to convey them to Zanzibar, the end 
 of their journey. On the 6th of November H.M. S. ' Industry ' was equipped 
 and ready for her voyage to Zanzibar, which was reached on the 20th of the 
 same month. By this time the sick had, all but one, recovered, and had 
 improved so much in appearance that few persons ignorant of what they 
 had been, could have supposed that these were the living skeletons that had 
 reeled from sheer weakness through Boma. 
 
 Section 150. — 
 
 MR. STAIfLEY'S LETTER (continued). 
 
 II. 
 
 Dear Sirs, 
 
 Though ^ strangers, I feel we shall be great friends, and ' I shall 
 always remember my feeUngs of gratefulness, when I first caught sight
 
 104 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 150. 
 
 of your supplies, and my poor, faithful, and brave people cried out : 
 " Master, we are saved !— food * is coming !" TAe old and /ke young — 
 //le men, /^e women, and /Ae children — Hfted their wearied and worn- 
 out* frames ^ and began to chant lush'/y an* extemporaneous song, in^ 
 honour of the white people by (an) the great salt sea (the (S. 53, N. 9) 
 Atlantic) who had listened to their prayers. I had* to rush to my 
 lent to hide the tears that would issue », despite all my attempts to 
 composure ". -^ 
 
 . Gentlemen, that the blessing of God may attend your footsteps 
 whithersoever " you go, is the very earnest " prayer of 
 
 Yours faithfully, 
 
 H. M. Stanley, 
 Commanding the Anglo-American Expedition. — 
 
 H. M. Stanley, " Through the Dark Continent.' 
 
 1, obglei^ wit un8 noc^ fremb jtnb. 2, Say ' and I shall never forget the 
 
 feelings of gratefulness which I experienced (em^finben, insep. comp. str. v.), 
 when ', etc. 3, Say * there come provisions ' ! 4, abgemagcvt. 
 
 5, Mxpiv, m., which use in the Sing. 6, cin m6 bem ©tegveife entwovfene^ 
 
 l*icb ; to chant = to sing. 7, in — people, ben Seipcn . . . ju (St^rcn; the words 
 ju @t)ren must be placed at the end of the clause. 8, Use the Imperfect 
 
 of ntuffcn. 9, to issue = to break forth, (}crt»or'brec^cn. 10, to composure = 
 to compose myself. 11, The adverbial clause ' whithersoever you go ' may 
 
 be briefly rendered by the adverb ' jietS '. 12, earnest = sincere ; faithfully, 
 
 ergeben (adject.). 
 
 Section 151. 
 
 RETURNED 1 KINDNESS. 
 
 When (S. 4, N,~ 2) the country near ^ Albany was newly settled, a 
 starving Indian came to the inn at Lichfield and asked for a night's 
 shelter and some supper, at^ the same time confessing that, from* 
 failure in hunting, he had nothing"* to pay. The hostess drove him 
 away With reproachful ' epithets, and as the Indian was about (S. 6, N. 4) 
 scornfully to retire,— there being (S. 30, N. 4) no other inn for^ many 
 a weary mile,— a* man, who was sitting by, directed the hostess to 
 supply • his wants, and promised to pay her. As " soon as the Indian's 
 supper was ended, he thanked his benefactor, and said he would some 
 day return his kindness. | Several years thereafter " the settler was taken 
 a prisoner by a hostile tribe, and carried off to (S. 72, N. 4) Canada. His 
 life was spared ^^ but he was detained in " slavery. One " day, however, 
 an Indian came to him, and bade the captive follow him. The Indian 
 never told where they were going, nor " what was his object ; but day 
 after '* day the captive followed his mysterious guide, till one afternoon 
 they came suddenly on " a beautiful expanse of cultivated fields, with 
 many houses rising amongst them. " Do you know that place ? " asked 
 the Indian. " Ah, yes — it is Lichfield ! " and whilst the astonished exile '* 
 had not yet recovered from his surprise and (S. 10, N. 9) amazement, 
 the Indian exclaimed : " And I am the starving Indian, on whom, at
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 151. I05 
 
 this very place, you took " pity. And now that ^'^ I have repaid you, 
 I pray you go home I " — Dr. Dwight. 
 
 1, aergclten, insep. comp. str. v. 2, miitteit ; newly, eben ; ' to settle ', here 
 
 folcnifiercn. 3, at — confessing = on which occasion (irobei) he confessed. 
 
 4, itcflcn crfotglofcr 3agb. 5, nothing to pay = no money for (ju, contracted 
 
 wit^i the dat. of the def. art.) paying, 6, reproachful epithets, ©djcitoorte. 
 
 7, for — mile, nteilemteit in bcr CRunte. 8, 'a man', here = a guest. The 
 
 verb * directed ' (^ci§en, str. v.) must be placed before the subject, since the 
 subordinate clause precedes the principal one. 9, to supply a person's 
 
 wants, fur bie 33cbiivfniJTe eineg aKcufd^en fovgen. 10, Say ' As soon as the 
 
 Indian had eaten (oeijc()veu) his supper'. 11, fpatcr. 12, »erfc^oncn. 
 
 13, in slavery = a.s a slave ; ' to detain ', here flefaugen l}atten. 14, Say 
 
 'One day, however, came an Indian to the prisoner with the intimation 
 (3Bcifung, f.) to follow him '. This construction is necessary to avoid the 
 repetition of the pronoun ' it)m '. 15, nor — object = or else his intention. 
 
 16, fiir. 17, ju einer [d^onen Slac^e "vbar gemad}ter Sclber. 18, exile = 
 
 settler. 19, to take pity on a person, ftc^ ciiieS llJcnfc^cu erbarmeii ; supply 
 
 the adverb einntal (one day) before the verb. 20, that = since, ba ; to repay 
 a person, eineiu [eine Sd^ulb ab'tvagen. 
 
 Section 152. 
 
 NEW- YEARS EVE*. 
 
 It was dreadfully cold ; it snowed, and was beginning to grow dark ; 
 it was the last evening of the year, — New-year's Eve. In this cold, a 
 poor little girl was wandering about the streets with ^ bare head and 
 bare feet. She had slippers on when she left home (>§au§, with the 
 def. art.), but what was the good of them? They ((SS) were the large, 
 i t^l ^ old slippers of her mother's — so large that they fell off the little girl's 
 feet as she hurried across the street to * escape a carriage, which came * 
 galloping along at a great rate. The one slipper. was not to be found, 
 and a boy ran off with the other. 
 JV So the litde girl wandered about barefooted, with a quantity " of 
 ^ matches in an old apron, whilst she held a box* of them in her 
 (S. 43, N. 9, A) hand. No one had bought any matches of her through^ 
 the whole livelong day — no one had given her a single farthing *. 
 Hungry, and pinched ^ with cold, the poor little girl crept '° along, the 
 large flakes of snow covering (S. 55, N. i ; use itdl)renb) her yellow 
 hair, which " curled round her face. 
 
 In ^"^ a corner between two houses, one projecting beyond the other, 
 she sought shelter^ Huddling" herself up, she drew her poor little 
 feet, which were red and blue with cold, under her ([id?) as well as she 
 could, but she " was colder than ever, and ^^ dared not go home 
 (S. 63, N. 8), for, as she had sold no matches, her cruel '^ father would 
 beat her. Besides ", it was cold at home (S. 63, N. 8), for they lived 
 just '" under the roof, and '^ the wind blew in, though straw and rags 
 had been stuffed in the large cracks. Her little hands were quite 
 benumbed with cold. Oh'^, how much good one match would do,
 
 I06 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 152. 
 
 if she dared but (nur) take it out of the box and draw ^i it across the 
 wall to warm her fingers in the flames ! 
 
 J\ 1, 2)cv ®t){»erftevac)cnb. 2, with — feet, barfii^ unb unf>ebecftcn J6aut>te^, 
 
 which place before * about (burd)) the streets '. 3, to escape a carriage, 
 
 einem aBayett aug bent SBcg taufen. For the translation of the conjunction ' to ' in 
 this clause compare S. 19, N. 7. 4, to come galloping along at a great 
 
 rate, in roUcm @alo^))) bie ©tra^e entlang fommen. 5, a quantity = some. 
 
 e, @d)acf)tet, f. ; of them = of the same. 7, through — day, ben flanjcn %Ci% 
 
 (aiig, which is best placed at the commencement of the period. 8, J&eKer, m. 
 8, to be pinched with cold, »or J?a(te crjtarrt fein. 10, to creep along, ftc^ 
 
 hjeiter fc^tcftjcn. 11, Say 'which in curls surrounded (umwallen, insep. 
 
 comp. w. V.) her face. 12, In — other, 3n einem burc^ ein I^ervorfpringenbed 
 
 ^auS gebitbeten SBinfet. 13, Say ' She huddled herself up (nie'berfauern, sep. 
 
 comp. w. V.) and drew her ', etc. 14, I am cold, eg fricrt mic^. 15, Say 
 
 ' and yet she (App. § 24, 5) dared (n?agen, w.v.) not to go home'. 16, ' cruel', 
 here = severe, 17, Say 'And also (App. § 14) at home it was cold'. 
 
 18, 'just', here = immediately. 19, Say 'through which the wind blew, 
 
 although the large cracks (iSpaltc, f.) were stuffed (oerj^ojjfen, insep. comp. w. v.) 
 with straw and rags'. 20, Say, 'Oh (31^), how nice (fd^on) must (Imperf. 
 
 Subj.) a match be '. 21, (Sin Sunb^olj^en an bev aKauer an'reibcn, to draw 
 
 a match across the wall. 
 
 Section 153. 
 
 NEW-YEAR'S EVE. 
 II. 
 
 She drew one out — " Ritsh ! " how it sputtered ^ and burned I It 
 burned with a warm, bright flame, hke a candle, and she bent her hand 
 round it (S. 4, N. 5, B), it was a wonderful hght ! It appeared to the 
 little girl as if she were sitting '^ before a large iron stove, in which the 
 fire burned brightly, and ^ gave out such comfort and such warmth. She 
 stretched out her feet to warm them, too — but the flame went* out, the 
 stove disappeared, and there she sat, still holding ^ a little bit of the 
 burnt-out* match in her (S. 43, N. 9, A) hand. 
 
 Another was ® lighted ; it burned, and, where ' the light fell upon the 
 wall, that® became transparent, so that she could see into the room. 
 There the table was covered with a cloth of dazzling white, and with 
 fine china ; and a roast goose was smoking most * temptingly upon it. 
 But what was still more delightful, the goose sprang down from the 
 table, and^°, with a knife and (S. 10, N. 9) fork slicking in its" back, 
 waddled towards the little girl. Then ^^ the match went out *, and she 
 saw nothing but the thick, cold wall. 
 
 She lighted a third one (S. 67, N. 3); and now she was sitting under 
 the most splendid Christmas-tree. It was larger and more beautifully 
 decorated^ than the one (S. 16, N. 10) she had seen at Christmas" 
 through the window at'* the rich merchant's. Hundreds of^" tapers 
 were burning amongst the green branches, and painted ^^ pictures, such " 
 as she had seen in the shop-windows, looked down upon her. She 
 stretched out '® both her hands, when the match was burnt * out, —
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 153. 107 
 
 1, fpru^ctt, w. V. 2, Use the Impf. Subj. according to App. § 33 ; as if, 
 
 al«. 3, unb i^ iteif nic^t trie t3ict Sct)ag(i(^fcit uub SBdvmc ou^[tra()lte. 4» ' to 
 go out', and ' to burn out', here erlofi^en, insep. comp. str. v. 5, The Present 
 Participle may be used here in German, but where must it be placed ? 6, In 
 which Voice is the verb here? Introduce the clause by the grammatical 
 subject *eg', as explained in S. 104, N. 19, 7, where = at (an) the place 
 
 (®tel(c, f.) where. 8, biefe. 9, Use the superlative of {)o(^. 10, Here 
 
 follows the verb * waddled '. 11, in its = in the, contracted ; towards, 
 
 auf . . . gu, which latter preposition place at the end of the whole period. 
 12, Then = Thereupon. 13, aiifpu^cn, sep. comp. w. v. 14, at (an, 
 
 contracted with the dat. of the def. art.) Christmas-day. 15, The pre- 
 
 position 'at', in the signification of 'at the house of is generally- 
 rendered, by the preposition ' bci', which governs the dative ; as — 
 At Easter we shall all dine at my Sim Dllertage wcrbcn iuir al(e bei meiner 
 
 mother's. 2)Juttet ju SWittag eJTen. 
 
 16, con. 17, painted = coloured, Bunt. 18, such as, Xo'\i. 19, Supply the 
 pronominal adverb ' banac^ ' before the particle au3, which stands at the end. 
 
 Section 154. 
 
 NEW-YEARS EVE. 
 III. 
 
 The countless lights rose higher and higher, and she now saw that 
 ihey (eg) were the stars, one of which fell S leaving a long line of light 
 in the sky. 
 
 Some^ one has (S. 29, N. 3) died just now, the girl said; for her 
 old grandmother, who alone * had loved her, but who was now dead, 
 had told her that * when a star fell, a soul took (App. §§28 and 30) its 
 flight up to heaven. 
 
 She drew another match across the wall, and in the light it threw * 
 around stood her old grandmother, so bright ^ so mild, and so loving. 
 ,.;;;;;:?:==^Grandmother," the little girl cried, "oh, take me with_yo«/ I know 
 that you will disappear as soon as the match is burnt out, just like the 
 warm stove, the delicious roast goose, and the Christmas-tree ! " And 
 hastily she lighted the '^ rest of the matches that remained in the box, 
 for she wished to keep * her grandmother with her as long as possible ; 
 and the matches burnt so brightly, that it was lighter than day. Never 
 before* had she seen her grandmother so beautiful and so tall, and 
 behold, she ^° now took the little girl in her arms, and ", in radiance 
 and joy, flew high, high up with her into the heaven, where she felt 
 neither (fein) cold, nor (feiu) hunger, nor (unb fein) fear any more ", — 
 ioL she was with God. 
 
 But, in the corner between the two houses, in the cold morning air, 
 lay the little girl with pale cheeks and smiling lips. She was frozen ^* 
 to death during the last night of the Old Year. The first light of the 
 New Year shone upon the dead body of the little girl with the matches, 
 one " box of which was nearly consumed. " She must have tried to 
 warm herself," the people said ; but no one knew of (oon) the visions '* 
 she had had, or of the splendour that (S. 48, N. 6) surrounded her when
 
 lo8 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 54. 
 
 she entered with her grandmother into the joys of a New Year. — After 
 Hans Andersen, " Fairy Tales." 
 
 1, Say ' fell down and left (jurud'(affen) a long line of light (Sic^tjlrcifen, m.) 
 in (an) the sky '. 2, This sentence is best introduced by the grammatical 
 
 subject ' e6 ', see S. 104, N. 19. 3, Say * alone of all '. 4, that — fell ; 
 
 bag bcint .^evuntevfadcn eineS <Sterne« ; flight, %{\\% m. ; up to, ju, contracted with 
 the dat. of the def. art. 5, to throw around, urn fic^ ^cr scrbveiteit. 
 
 6, bright = friendly ; mild, fanft ; loving, Uebtreic^. 7, the — box, bie in bev 
 
 ©cf)ad)td jtd) noc^ befinblicl}cn 3unb()6(jer (Gomp. S.48, N. 6). 8, to keep with 
 oneself, bet \ii) bc^alten, insep. comp. str. v. tr. 0, jjiwor. 10, It will 
 
 be best to begin this clause with the adv. * now ', and to turn the personal 
 pronoun * she ' into the demonstrative pronoun ' the same *, to agree with 
 'grandmother*. This will commend itself in order to avoid ambiguity. 
 11, Here follows the verb *flew'; in radiance and joy, freubcftratjtenb, adv.; 
 high— heavens, mit i^r junt ^immel empor. 12, any more, mef)r, before the 
 
 verb ; ' with ', here bei. 13, erfriercn, insep. comp. str. v., to freeze to 
 
 death. 14, Liter. * of which nearly a whole box was burnt up '. 
 
 15, S^raumbilb, n. 
 
 I 
 
 Section 155. 
 
 PROVIDENCE' VINDICATING THE INNOCENT. 
 
 .It is (S. 2, N. i) recorded in history that a beautiful maiden named 
 Blanche, the serf of ^ an ancient nobleman, was wooed* by her master's 
 son. Not * admiring his character, she scorned * his suit. Upon this 
 his course of love turned " to bitter hatred. Just "^ then a precious string 
 of pearls confided (S. 7, N. 3, B) to the maiden's care was* lost. Her 
 pseudo-lover ® charged her with the theft, and, in ^° accordance with the 
 customs of that rude age, she was doomed to die. On the day of the 
 execution, as the innocent girl knelt to offer ^^ her dying prayer, a^^ flash 
 of lightnin g str uck a statue of Justice, which adorned the market-place, 
 to the dust/TFrom ^■'' a destroyed bird's nest, built (S. 7, N. 3, A, and S. 
 48, N. 6)'TTr a crevice of the image '\ dropped the lost^^ pearls, thus^* 
 declaring the maiden's innocence. In a moment the exultant crowd 
 rushed to the scaffold, demanding her release. There she knelt beside 
 the block, pale and beautiful, and with a smile of peace upon her lips. 
 They (S. 134, N. 4) spoke ^^ — she answered not. They touched her — 
 she was dead ! To preserve her memory they raised a statue there ^* ; 
 and to^' this day, when'" men gaze upon her image, they condemn her 
 oppressor; they praise her for the purity of her character; they recog- 
 nise the justice of Him whose "^^ lightning testified her innocence. — , 
 W. Smith. 'H^ 
 
 1, Say, 'Providence (S. 3, N. 2) protects innocence.' 2, of — noble- 
 
 man = of a nobleman oi an old family ((Scfc^Icc^t, n.). 3, iimivcr'bfn, insep. 
 
 comp. str. v. 4, = As his character displeased (migfallen, insep. comp. str. 
 
 v., governing the dat.) her. 5, »crfcf)mdl)cn, insep. comp. w. v. tr. 6, fi^ 
 
 iierwau'beln in. 7, Just then -= Just at this time. 8, was lost = one 
 
 missed ; care, Dbf^nt, f. 9, = false lover. 10, in — customs = according 
 
 to the law. 11, = to speak. 12, a — Justice ... to the dust = fu^r ein
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 55. I09 
 
 ffltt^fira^t in bie ©tatue bet ©erec^tiqfcit . . . unb jjcrfi^mcttcrte fie. 13, 9lii^. 
 
 14, Silbfdule, f. 15, = missed. 16, Say ' and testified (bcjcucjen, w. 
 
 V. tr.) thus the maiden's innocence '. 17, Supply ' to her '. 18, bafelbft. 
 
 19, big auf ben tjeiitigen 'Jag. 20, Construe thus : * those who looic 
 
 at her image (Silbnig, n,) condemn her oppressor ', and consider App. 
 § 14. 21, In order to avoid a repetition of the same form of pronoun, 
 
 turn the last clause into: 'who with his lightning testified her innocence '. 
 
 Section 156. 
 
 NAPOLEON BONAPARTE \ 
 
 "^ V ' I. 
 
 Napoleon understood his business ^ He was a man who in each 
 moment and' emergency knew what* to do next. This^ is an immense 
 comfort and refreshment to the spirits, not only of (S. 3, N. 2) kings, 
 but ' of citizens. Few '' men have any next ; they live from hand to 
 mouth, without plan, are* ever at the end of their line, and, (S. 102, 
 N. 30) after each action, wait for ' an impulse from abroad. Napoleon 
 would have been the first man of the world, if* his ends had been 
 purely public. As" he is, he inspires confidence and vigour by the 
 extraordinary unity of his action. 
 
 He is firm ^^, sure, a^d self-denying ; he sacrifices everything to his 
 aim '' — money, troops, generals, his own safety even, and is not mi^d ^*, 
 like common adventurers, by ^^ the splendour of his own means, 
 cidents ought not to govern policy," he said, " but ^^ policy incidents." 
 " To " be hurried away by every event, is ^^ to have no political system 
 at all." His victories were only so many doors ^^ and '^^ he never for a 
 moment lost sight of his way onward in the dazzle and uproar of the 
 present circumstances. He knew what to do, and he flew to his mark. 
 
 He ^' would shorten a straight line to come at his object. Horrible 
 anecdotes may no doubt be collected (S. 4, N. 4) from his history, of ^^ 
 the price at which he bought his successes ; but he must not, therefore, 
 be set "^^ down as cruel, but only as one ^* who knew no impediment to 
 his will : not ^'^ bloodthirsty, not cruel ; but woe to ^'' what person stood 
 in his way 1 " Sire, General Clarke cannot combine with General Junot 
 for the dreadful fire of the Austrian battery." i" Let^^ him carry the bat- 
 tery." " Sire, every regiment that approaches the heavy artillery is 
 sacrificed ^^. Sire ", what orders ?" " Forward 1 Forward !" 
 
 1, SZa^oIcoii I., Jtaifer bcr 5ran5cfen, gcborcn ben 15. Jliig. 1769 ^u 5ljaccio 
 auf ^orfifa n?at bcr ^ireite <Set)n te^ ^atiijicrg garlo i^cnapavte unb ber ITJaria ^^atitia 
 gJanioUni. l^ac^bem er feit 1779 bie ^ricgi^fd^ulen ^u 58vicnne unb ^X^axis h\nd)t Ijatte, 
 trat et am i. Sept. 1785 a[6 lieutenant ber 9lvti((erie in bie ?lvmec ein. 3m 3al)re 1793 
 nntrbc er ale 5lrtiUcrief)auvtmann feiteng ber SRepublit gegen bie ?luTTtdnbifcf)en in .ftovftfa 
 Bencanbt, ireldje if}n dd)teten, ba ev aU Sanb^mann gegen fie fdmvfte. Seit bem 12. Sept. 
 1793 Dbevbefcl)lel)a()er beg 33elagevung^gef^iitjee »'cn 5:cu(cn, ivelcfccs? ft^ in ben Jpanbcn 
 ber (Sngldnbcr befanb, i^nung er ben ^latj am 19. !Dej. jur .Hapitulaticn, ircvauf er ,^um 
 SJrigabegeneval bet SlttiUerie bcfovbevt njarb unb in bet 5lvmce fon Stalien im .^tviege 
 gcgen Dilreid) bicnte. giacfebem et fid) vielfacf) au<?gc^eicf)net liattc, unube ev im ivcbntat 
 1796 jum Dberbefcl)lg()abet bet Sttmee iion 3tatieu evnauut, tecvganifievte biefelbe, erotevte
 
 110 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1^6. 
 
 in furjcm bic ?ombatbet, fd^fug bic Dftrcid)cr in ntel)vcren gto^cn ©c^tac^ten, gtoang 
 SWantua jur Jla^)itnlatton, bvang in Sftricn, ^avntf)eu unb ©tetcrmar! ein unb fct)lo^ am 
 1.8. 5lprit 1797 P Sam^jo ^onnio ben fuu Srantretd) t)6c^ji gunftigen gvicbcn mit 
 Dftreic^ ab. @eit bem 9. 2«drj 1796 mit ber »crtoit»v)ctcn ©eneralin Sofc^j^ine Scau^ 
 l^arnai^ »ermdf)lt, trarb ct am 7. 5ebr. 1800 ncben Sambaccrcg unb Scbnin, »eld)e i^m 
 beratenb juv ©ette fianben, a_uf jct|n 3at)ve jum crften ^onful crnaunt. ^ad) met); 
 rcrcn fiegveid)cn Jfriegcn mit Dftreid^, «|3vcu^en, €?uf (anb, (Snglanb u. a., tuarb er im 
 a)?ai 1802 bur^ ©cnatgbef^Iu^ auf it)eitere scf)n 3a{}re unb am 2. Slug. beiJfelbcn 
 3at)rc8 auf Sebeu^jett jnm .^onfut ernannt. Sim 8. aMai 1804 njuvbe ex jcbcS) fd)on aid 
 Sfiapoleon I. jum evb(ict)en ^atfer bet granjofen cvf (att. 9lun fclgtc cine faji ununtcr^ 
 brodjene 9!ct()e oon Jlricgcn rait faft alien euvovdifd)en 3[»ad)ten, unb alg er im Sa^rc 
 1809 ben ^cr)e)?unft feiner SWac^t encic^t t)atte, lieg er ftd), feiner fiuberlofen (Bi^e wegen, 
 son feiner cbenfo flugen »ie Ueben^tcurbigen ®ema()Un fd)eiben unb »enndf)lte fic^ am 2. 
 9lpri( 1810 mit a«arie guife, ber %od)kv granj I.»on Dilreic^. SUg er iebod; 1812 
 *Tiu^(anb ben Jlrieg erftdrte, mit ber gropeu Slrmee in (Ru^lanb ein^cg, a((e8 Winter ftc^ 
 l)cr »erbrannte unb jerficrtc, bann aber burd) bic weitbefannte, j^ets bentwurbige ©inds 
 f^enmg ber gro^en Jpau^tftabt S!Jie$hn feitenS ber belbenniutigen, tier^weifelnben (Sin; 
 iDctiner gegiDuugen unirbe, ben SfJiirf jug aujutreten, auf bem faft bie ganje gvo^e Slrmce »on 
 ber furd)terlid)cn ,f dlte unb bie bur^ bie a^ercbuug beg Sanbcg oerurfad^te §ungereinct scr^ 
 nid)tet wurbe— fd)ien bag @lurf il)n ceriaifen ju baben. a^on biefer 3eit an folgte eine 
 Stieberlage nad^ ber anbern, »cn bcnen bie gro^e a36lferfd)(ad)t bei Scipjiig (18. Dft. 1813), 
 in welder ber ung(ufflid)e Jlaifcr ben ttereinigten ^ecren ber 5JJreu^eu, Dftrei^cr unb 
 Oiuffen gegenubcr ftanb, bie entfdjeibenbe rtar. gflapoteon hJurbe in bevfelben gdnjlid^ 
 gefdjlagcn unb bie filiefjenbc Slrmee i-ion ben 93erbunbetcn unter 53(ud)erg gufirung »erj 
 folgt. ^ad) ber (Sinnaijme »on $aris feitcng ber SUtiirten am 31. i^ax^ 18 14 crfotgte 
 bann bie burc^ ben ©enat crjicungene Slbbanfung beg .taiferg unb beffen 95erbannung 
 md) ber Snfel @(ba, tton wo er jeboc^ fd)on aufaugg aTtdrg beg 3a()reg 18 15 jurucffct)rte. 
 ©ein bto^eg (Srfd)einen >var geniigenb, bag franjofifc^e a^clf aufg ueue fur if)n ju begeificrn. 
 liberal! inurbe er mit Subcl bcgrii^t, fein SSorCringen tear unn?iberficl)lid), bie Slrmee ging 
 freubig ju i^m fiber, unb f^on am 14. SWdrj n?ar ber ^onig Subiwig XVIII. gej^ungen, 
 ben jungfi beftiegeiien 2;i)ron ju »erlaffcn unb fid) burc^ bie glud)t ing Sluglanb ju 
 rettcn. — gia^iolecng jttjeite S^egierung war inbeffen nur tton furjer Sauer (100 Sage). 
 ^ex tangerfcf)nte griebe fonnte nur burd) feincn Untcrgang I)erbeigefut)vt werben, n)cgt}atb 
 bie ©ro^mdc^te Dftrci^ {Ru^laub, $rcu^en unb ©nglanb am 25. 5PJdrg einen Stlli; 
 anj»ertrag abfd)lof|en, bur^ ben jie ft^ »erbanben, ^Jlapoleon gemeinfd^aftlid^ ^n be-- 
 fdm^jfen unb ber .§en;[c^aft begfelbcn auf immer ein (§nbe j^u mad)cn. 2)ieg gelang if)nen 
 aud) balb, benn am 18. 3uni 18 15 wnrben bie nod) ubrigen, fd)ncll won 9laHeon 
 iufammengerafftcn ©treitfrdfte granfreid)g in ber grofcn ©d)lad)t bei SBaterloo unter 
 aBelUngtong unb ©lud^erg i^ut)rung gdnjlid) vernic^tet. Siajjoleon tt)ollteam2i.3uni 
 p Sloig },u gunfieu feineg uoc^ unmnnbigen ©o^neg abbanfen, feinc 2lbbanfung wurbe 
 aber nid)t angenommen, unb alg er fic^ am 3. 3uli in 9Jod)efort nad^ Slmerifa einfd^iffen 
 wonte,fanb er benbortigen ^afcn burd) englifd)e ^rieggfd)iffegefperrt,n)orauferftd> unter 
 ben ©d)u^ ©nglanbg ftcllte unb ft^ auf bag 8inienfd)ijf aSctlcrop^on begab. Sluf 
 58efd)(u^ ber »erbunbcten 2Wdd)te Wurbc er nun alg ' ©enerat ©onaparte' na^ ber 
 entlegenen Snfet ©t. .^elena trangportiert, »co er am 16. Dft. 1815 anlangte unb, in 
 Songrocob wo^nenb, am 5. 2}?ai 1821 in ben 9lrmen einiger if)m noc^ treu ucrbliebenen 
 greunbe eineg natiirlidicn Sicbeg ftarb. 2, =task. 3, and emergency, unb in 
 jebem Sflotf.ille. 4, what — next = what he must (Impf.) do next (jund^ji). 
 
 5, This — spirits = This strengthens and refreshes the courage. 6, Read 
 
 S. 6, N. 10, and insert the adv. 'aud) ' here. 7, Say ' Only few men know 
 
 what they must do next '. 8, to be at the end of one's line {or to be at 
 
 one's wit's end), fid) nie ju ratcn unJTen. 9, auf cine gottlic^e ©ingcbung. 
 
 10, Say ' had his ends ( = aims) been solely directed to (auf) the public welfare'. 
 Carefully study App. §§ 36 and 37. 11, This passage requires an alto- 
 
 gether different setting; let us say: 'But notwithstanding (Siro^bcm aber) he 
 inspires (crfiillen) us through the extraordinary unity (©inljeit, f.) of (in) his
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 56. Ill 
 
 actions with confidence in (auf) his strength*. 12, firm = unshakable ; 
 
 sure, unfef)lbar = never failing. 13, = purpose. 14, ir'ieleiteti, sep. comp. 
 w. V. 15, by — means, buvc^ bic @rofc [eincr i'^m ^u ©cbctc ficl)ent)eii ^iilfgi 
 mittel. 16, * but', here tnc^l abix. 17, to be hurried away, fid^ . . . 
 
 ()tn unb '^er trcibcn laffeit. 18, is = signifies (^ei§en);'to have', here = to 
 
 follow, befctgcn. 19, doors = gates (^forten), through which he tried (fud^cn) 
 to attain his aims (App. § 19). This addition seems to be necessary to com- 
 plete the underlying idea. 20, and — circumstances = and in (bci) the dazzle 
 (Sierbtenbung) and the confusion, which ruled (be{)cnfc^cn) his time, he never lost 
 sight of these aims. To lose sight of a thing, ctn?ag au3 bent 3Utge Bcrlieven. 
 21, Say 'He would have liked (Impf. Subj. of gcvn !)abcn in connection with 
 the Past Participle of the verb) to shorten (abfiirjcn) a straight line, in order 
 to attain his purpose'. 22, of — successes, h?clc^e a((e Sfngni^ ba»cn ablcgcn, 
 
 h)ie teuer cr feine (Srfolge cvfaufte. 23, to set a person down as cruel, 
 
 einen fur graufam ^alten. 24,' one', here = a man (S. 134, N. 9). 25, Say 
 ' he was not ', etc. 26, Say ' to the man who ', etc. 27, Say * He 
 
 must carry (crobern) the battery'. 28, 'to be sacrificed', here batjin'gerajft 
 werben. 29, 2Ba3 bcfcljlcn ®». (abbreviation of (Sure) aWajeflat ? 
 
 Section 157. 
 
 NAPOLEON BONAPARTE. 
 II. 
 
 In the plenitude of his resources every obstacle seemed to vanish. 
 " There ^ shall be no Alps," he said; and he built his perfect roads ^ 
 climbing^ by graded galleries their steepest precipices, until Italy was * 
 as open to Paris as any town" in France. Having (S. 55, N. i) decided 
 what was to be done, he did that with * might and main. He "^ put out 
 all his strength. He risked everything, and spared ^ nothing ; neither 
 ammunition, nor money, nor * troops, nor generals, nor ^^ himself. If 
 fighting" be the best mode of adjusting national diflferences (as^^ large, 
 majorities of men seem to agree), certainly Bonaparte was right 'ys\ 
 making it thorough ^^. 
 
 He fought '* sixty battles. He had never enough. Each victory was» 
 a nev/ weapon. "My power would falP^, were 1 not to support it by- 
 new achievements. Conquest has " made me what I am, and conquest 
 must maintain me." 
 
 Before " he fought a battle, Bonaparte thought '* little about what he ^ 
 should do in ^^ case of success, but a great deal about what he should 
 do in case of a reverse of fortune. The same prudence and good sense 
 marked ^^ all his behaviour ^". His instructions ^^ to his secretary at the 
 palace are worth ^'^ remembering. He said : " During the night enter 
 my chamber as seldom as possible. Do not awake me when you have 
 any good news to communicate '^•, with "^^ that there is no hurry ; but 
 when you have bad news, rouse me instantly, for then there is not a 
 moment to be lost." His'^' achievement of business was immense, and** 
 enlarges the known power of man. There have been (S. 82, N. 7) many 
 working kings, from Ulysses to " William of Orange **, but '^'^ none who 
 accomplished a tithe of this man's performance. — Emerson. 
 
 1, (Ss foH feine JUven met)r gebcn. 2, perfect roads, JTunfifiraf en. 3, Say 
 ' through which he by means of winding, (jic^ [(f)ldngeln) and gradually rising 
 passes climbed the steepest precipices (3lb^ang, m.) of the Alps '. 4, was =
 
 112 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 57. 
 
 stood ; to Paris = to the Parisians. The suffix cr is used to form names 
 of m^ale persons and of the inhabitants of countries and places ; as — 
 ber Staliener, the Italian, from 3talieu ; bcr Jpamburger, the inhabitants of Ham- 
 burgh. 5, town in France = French (S. loi, N. i) town. 6, with — 
 main, au3 SfibcSfraften. 7, @v fe^tc fcine ganjc ©tdrfe baran. 8, f^cnen. 
 9, nor=neither. 10, iinb auc^ ftc^ fetbjt tiic^t. 11, = war; be = is; mode, 
 9lrt unb 9Bcife. 12, Say * as the majority of men seem (S. 107, N. 13) to 
 think (S. 64, N. 11) '. 13, to make (do) a thing thorough(ly), ettoag gviinb; 
 tic^ betrcibfu. 14, to fight battles, (S^Iac^ten liefeni. 15, = sink. 
 16, = Conquests have ; he has made me what I am, cr ijat miit) j^u bcm geniac^t, 
 Xoa6 ii) bin. 17, @^e, adv. 18, to think about a thing, iibev tt)x>A6 
 nac^'bcnfcn, read S. 87, N. 6; in — success, im (SliicfgfaUe; in — fortune, im 
 UnglucfeifaUc. 19, aug'jcid)neu. 20, ^anbtung^itcife. ./^//i»/V happiness, 
 fcin gatij^cg ®(iicf ; all our family, unfcre ganje ganiiHc. 21, SSert^altung^; 
 bcfe{)l, m., directions for conduct ; to, an. 22, This is not worth remem- 
 bering, bieg ifi niijt ber SBca^tung irevt. 23, melben. 24, Say literally 
 * these have no haste '. 25, His — business, ©cine Slrbcit^fvaft. 26, unb 
 crwcitcrt unfcre big()erigcn SSorftellungen tton ben im Sltcnfc^en lr)oi)nenben .Sraften. 
 27, big auf. 28, Dranien. Commence this period with : ' From Ulysses'. 
 29, bocf) feinen, bee auc^ nuv ein gcfjntel »on ben X^aten bic[c5 SJianne^ woltbia^t t)dtte 
 (App. § 33). 
 
 Section 158. 
 
 THE WARLIKE CHARACTER OF THE GERMANS. 
 
 The Germans fight as a nation. Whatever^ their birth ^ or (S. lo, 
 N. 9) profession, all are trained * soldiers. The nation is the army ; the 
 army is the nation. Hence * they cannot be moved save at the bidding 
 of some grand principle, and the stirring^ of some soul-penetrating* and 
 elevating sentiment; and yet they are as sensible'' as any nation that 
 they abandon comfort', domestic ease, monetary independence, every- 
 thing^ which (S. 3, N. 7) men (:=man) love and live for, in^° order to 
 identify the nation and the army. But they are willing to pay the price. 
 They count ^^ hardihood of body and trained ^"^ courage of heart the 
 noblest riches of a nation. JThey reckon " that national independence 
 and national greatness are a thousand times more precious than gold 
 and silver, and ^* that to die on the field of batde is better and happier 
 than to rot" and crumble away in sybaritic ease. They ^^ hold, too, 
 that " the cause of liberty, and the free noble spirit engendered by the 
 brotherhood of a nationality which affirms its oneness by noble acts ^'', is 
 blessed by God, and that He will give ^* victory to the armies who go 
 forth to battle in (S. 3, N. 2) trust in" His name. No wonder"" they 
 fight and triumph ^\ — Admiral Garbett. 
 
 1, Supply the verb 'be'. 2, = station, ©tanb, m. 3, = practised. 
 
 4, Say ' Hence they can be moved (ervcgen) only at (buvrf)) the bidding (@ebDt,n.) '. 
 
 5, @rwc(!ung, f. 6, bic ©eelc cvgrcifcnb. 7, ' to be sensible ', here ftd* 
 bewuf t fein. 8, here bic Slnnet)mli^!eiten beS Sebeng. 9, Say * in short 
 give up everything ', for the verb 'abandon ' must be placed at the end of this 
 clause. 10, Say ' in order to prove the identity of the nation and the 
 army'. 11, t)attcn (fiir). 12, here gcftdf)lt. 13, Say ' and feel 
 that it is better and nobler to die ', etc. 14, wetntobern ; to crumble away, 
 oerfaflen ; ' ease ', here ®cma(^li^feit. 15, 9lu^ ^alten (ic tafiir. 16, Con-
 
 s? 
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 58. I13 
 
 strue thus : ' that God will bless the cause (©ad^c, f.) of liberty ', and use the 
 attributive constr. for the transl, of 'and the — nationality'. Any other 
 constr. would be much too clumsy. 17, = deeds. 18, to give victory, 
 
 ben @icg tievlci()cn; to go forth to battle, in tie ©(^ladjt jictjen. 19, auf. 
 
 20, Supply 'then, that'. 21, = conquer. 
 
 Section 159. 
 
 THE ' WAY TO MASTER THE TEMPER. 
 
 A London (S. 157, N. 4) merchant, having ^^.a dispute with a Quaker 
 concerning a business account, determined^ to institute a law-suit against 
 him. Desirous of amicably settling * the matter, the Quaker called at 
 the house of the merchant, when ^ the latter became so enraged that he 
 vehemently*^ declared to his servant that he would (App. §§ 28 and 30) 
 not see his opponent.^" Well, friend," said the Quaker quietly, " rnay 
 God put thee in a better mind." The merchant was^ subdued by the 
 kindness of the reply, and, after careful consideration, became convinced 
 that ^ he was wrong. He sent ^^ for the Quaker, and " after making a 
 humble apology, he asked : " How were you able to bear my abuse " 
 with so much patience?" "Friend," replied the Quaker, "I was natu- 
 rally ^'^ as hot " and violent as thou art, but I knew that " to indulge my 
 temper was sinful, and also very foolish. I observed that men in a 
 passion always spoke very loud, , and I thought that '^ if I could control 
 my voice, I should keep down my passion. I therefore made ^^ it a rule 
 never to let it rise above a certain key ; and by a careful observance of 
 this rule I have, with the blessing of God", entirely mastered my ^* natural 
 temper." — Alcott. 
 
 1, 2Bie man fcinen 3orn BcT)enfd^cn faun. 2, Change * having ' into ' had '; 
 
 the object is best placed after 'account'. 3, Supply 'and' before 'de- 
 
 termined'; to institute a law-suit against a person, cincn c^evid^tUd) belangcn. 
 4, to settle a matter amicably, cine ©ac^e auf gutlid}e 3Bei[e orbuen. Comp. S. 30, 
 N. 4, and note that the Present Participle ' being ' is understood at the com- 
 mencement of this period. 5, = whereupon. 6, = emphatically, 
 nad)biucf lid). 7, Say ' may God alter thy mind (©eftnnuui^, f.) '. 8, to 
 be subdued, ftc^ bcftccit fiil)leu ; by, bur(^. 9, ' that — wrong ' may be briefly 
 turned by ' of his wrong '. 10, to send for a person, ciuen ju jtc^ nifcn (affen. 
 U, ' and — asked '. This passage, literally translated, would be inelegant in 
 German, say : ' humbly begged his pardon, and asked then '. Abuse, 5Bcleibi« 
 gunoi, f. 12, von yjatur. 13, = passionate. 14, = that it was 
 sinful, etc.; to indulge one's temper, fciucm Som fveien 8auf (afTen. 15, =that 
 I could (App. § 33) conquer my anger through mastering my voice (burci^ 
 5Bet)cvvj"c^ung meiucr ©timnte). 16, We make it a rule never to let our 
 voices rise beyond a certain key, iinv maiden eg uug jur OJcgel, unfcie Stimmen ute 
 fiber eine vjeunffe !icuj^difc (jiuau^ \\\ evljeben. 17, = with God's help. 18, = my 
 natural inclination to (ju) anger (S. 3, N. 2). 
 
 » Section 160. 
 
 OPINIONS^ AS TO ENGLISH EDUCATION. 
 
 I. 
 
 This ''■ energy of individual life and example acting throughout society 
 constitute ^ the best practical education of Englishmen. Schools, aca- 
 voL. IV. ■ I
 
 114 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION l6o. 
 
 demies, and colleges* give but the' merest beginning of culture in com- 
 parison with it (S. 4, N. 5). Far higher® and more practical is^ the life- 
 education daily given in our homes, in* the streets, behind (S. 3, N. 2) 
 counters®, in workshops, at the loom and behind the plough, in counting- 
 houses and manufactories, and " in all the busy haunts of men. This 
 is the education that " fits Englishmen for doing the work and acting 
 the part of free men. This '^ is that final instruction as members of . 
 society, which Schiller designated " the education of the human race," 
 consisting ^^ in action, conduct^*, self-culture, self-control — all^' that 
 tends to discipline a man truly, and fit him for the proper performance 
 of the duties of life — a kind 0/" education not to be learnt (S. 7, N. 3 B) 
 from (aug) books. Lord Bacon observes that ^® " Studies teach not 
 their own use, but that there is (S. 82, N. 7) a wisdom without them 
 and above them, won (S. 7, N. 3 5, and S. 2, N. i) by (burc^) observa- 
 tion, a remark that holds" true of^^ actual life, as well as of^* the culti- 
 vation of the intellect itself. For all observation serves^" to illustrate 
 and enforce the lesson, that a man perfects himself by work much more 
 than by reading ^^, — l/ial^^ it is life^' rather than literature '^\ action'-* 
 rather than study, and character ^' rather than biography '^'^, which ^^ tend 
 perpetually to renovate mankind. 
 
 1, Slnft(^tcn vAn. 2, This — society. A good German rendering of 
 
 the thought underlying this line is so difficult, that the author thinks it best 
 to give at once his own translation, which he hopes will find acceptance : 
 Sicfe int mc^r fclbftdnbigen Sebcn fic^ eutteidclntie (Snergic unb bag baburd) gegcbene, aiif 
 bie ganje ©cfcKfd^aft itirfenbe 33cifpie(. 3, an^'madjen. 4, = universities; 
 
 ' to give ', here ge>rdf)ren. 5, = a mere. 6, = more important. 7, is — 
 homes, iji bie im tdgtic^en 8ebcn gctnounene (Srj{cf)ung ju Jg>aufe. 8, auf. 9, Use 
 this noun in the Sing. 10, unb in ten »ielcn anbern ©cfc^dft^ftdttcn in 3)lmi 
 
 f(^cn. 11, Say * that enables Englishmen as free men to do their work and their 
 duty '. 12, This — designated = This education gives also to human society 
 that instruction (Untcrlreifung, f.), which Schiller calls, etc. So^ann (S^rifio^jf) 
 griebric^ con ©d&iller, gebovcn am 10. ^loo. 1759 S^ TOaibac^, gcftorkn am 9. 2J?ai 
 1805 ju aBeimar, ift ndc^ji ©ct^e (@ic^e S. no, N. i) unjtveitig bie bebeutenbjte @r; 
 fcfteinuug in bev bentfc^en Sitteratur. 9ll5 2) id) tev jet($nete er \id) foivo^l buv^ feine tbeale, 
 fnijeftioe OJii^tung, iftc auc^ buvd) ftinrei^enben ©d>nnntg ec^t ^.loctifc^er Segeijicmng 
 au6, \midji im 2)vama if)vcn i^c()c):)imft eneid)te. Slbcr auc^ al6 ®e[(^ici^tfd)rciber unb a(g 
 ^3^itofov^if(^ec S^riftfteder ^at ec fic^ bet fciner [Ration euien uiijierblic^en Stamen 
 erwovben. 13, =and which consists in (S. 3, N. 2) action, etc. 14, in ber 
 fittlic^en Stuffnt^rung. 15, = and in all that (here follows the verb * consists ', 
 
 since this is the end of the relative clause introduced in Note 13), which (S. 3, 
 N. 7) educates (bilben) man truly (uia^vl)aft) and fits (bcfdf)igen) him for (;5n) the 
 proper performance ( = fulfilment) of his duties in life. 16, = that ' Studies 
 do not teach us the application of the same, but ', etc. 17, * to hold true ', 
 here = to prove true. 18, = in practical life. 19, of — itself, in SSe^ug 
 
 auf bie ©eijle^bilbung fclbfi. 20, = interprets (cvfldven) and proves the 
 
 doctrine. 21, here Sefture, f., with the art. 22, This conj. 'that' 
 
 is best omitted, since a repetition of subordinate clauses must, as far as pos- 
 sible, be avoided. 23, = practical life ; ' rather than ' seems here to be = 
 'and not'. 24, !£f)dtigfeit, activity. 25, The English word ' character ' 
 is so varied in its application that it requires always the greatest discrimina- 
 tion to decide upon its translation, and in this case more than ever. After 
 careful consideration it is thought to be equivalent here to : ' the personal
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION l6o. I15 
 
 dignity of a man'. 26, bte ScBetiSBefd^reibmig be^felben. 27, iretc^e bagu 
 
 titmn, bie SDIenfc^fjeit jlet^ »on neuem ju beUben. 
 
 Section 161. 
 
 OPINIONS AS TO ENGLISH EDUCATION. 
 
 I Goethe (S. 5, N. 2), in one of his conversations with Eckermann at 
 Weimar, once ^ observed : " It is very ^ strange, and I know not whether ' 
 it hes in race, in climate, in * soil, or in their healthy ^ education, but * 
 certainly Englishmen seem to have a great advantage over most other 
 men. We see here in Weimar only a '' minimum of them, and * those, 
 probably, by no means the best specimens, and yet what splendid fellows 
 they are! And although they come here as seventeen-year-old^ youths, 
 yet they by no means feel strange in this strange land ; on the contrary, 
 their entrance ^° and bearing " in society is so confident ^'^ and quiet, 
 that one would ^^ think they were everywhere the masters, and the whole 
 world belonged to them "." 
 
 I should not like to affirm, for all that ^^" replied Eckermann ", 
 " that the English gentlemen in Weimar are cleverer, better educated, 
 and better hearted than our young men." 
 
 "That is not the point"," said Goethe; "their superiority does not 
 lie in such things ; neither ^^ does it lie in their birth and fortune " ; it 
 lies precisely'^ in their having^' the courage to be what nature made 
 them. There '^'^ is no halfness about ^^ them. They are complete'^* 
 men. Sometimes complete fools also, that I heartily ^^ admit, but even 
 that is something, and has its weight." 
 
 Thus (App. § 14), in'-^^ Goethe's eyes, the Englishmen fulfilled, to a 
 great extent, the injunctions^ given by Lessing^* to those who would 
 be men: 
 
 " Think wrongly, if you please, but think for yourselves ! " — S. Smiles, 
 " Self-Help." 
 
 1, = one day. 2, * Very ' is often rendered by the superlative of the 
 
 adv. ^cd). 3, 'whether it lies' may be elegantly translated by omitting 
 
 the conjunction ' whether ' and using the inversion. 4, iiii I)ctniatlic^cn 
 
 SBobcn. 5, t)eitfam. 6, Say ' but it seems to be certain that English- 
 
 men possess a great superiority over most other men'. 7, a minimum = 
 
 very few. 8, = and these (bif<?) are probably by no means the best, and 
 
 yet (bcnucd^ aBer) they are (jiiib est) splendid fellows ! 9, a thirty-year-old 
 
 man, ciu bveipicjidf)viijei- ajiann. 10, SUiftrctcn, n. 11, 58enc^mcn, n, 
 
 12, jic^er. 13, Render ' would ' by the Impf. Subj, of mcgcii, since the 
 
 sentence is equivalent to 'that one would be inclined to think'. The 
 following verbs must be constructed according to App. §§ 29 and 30. 
 14. Supply ' alone ' after ' them '. 15, for all that, abcv tcc^, to be placed 
 
 before 'not'. 16, 3oI)ann ^tUx tSctevmann, geBcrcn 1792 ju SBinfen 
 
 in ber jiveu^ifcf^en ^rcinn^ ^^amic\3cr, gcftorbcn ben 3. 3)ej. 1854 ju 2Deimar, ivar vielc 
 3a'^re a(S ®cttic3 ^isviiMtfch-ctdr t()dtig unb ij! bcv ffiett am bcfaunteiicu buvdi bie »on 
 tl)m nac^ ®i3tl)ces Sobe t>crcffnuUcl)ten ' Wefprdcl)e mit ®6tl)e '. (Sr war aud^ bet 
 J&erau«i\cbcr (editor) i^on ®6t()e3' 9iac^ge(a(Tenen aiSevfcn'. 17, ©ac^c, f. 18, audt) 
 
 I 2
 
 c^ 
 
 Il5 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION l6l. 
 
 befte^t fie nic^t in. 19, = wealth; Comp. S. lo, N. 9. 20, = simpl>'. 
 
 21, The English Gerund preceded by a possessive adjective and a 
 preposition, must be translated by a regular subordinate clause writh 
 a conjunction and a finite verb ; as — 
 
 His superiority lies in his halving the (Seine Ubevlegcn^eit befie^t barin (S. 87, 
 courage to be what nature made N. 6), ba^ er ben 5Kut ^at, bag ju 
 
 him. fein, tt»ag ct »on 9tatur <x\ii \^. 
 
 22, @g. 23, an. 24, = whole. 25, = willingly ; weight = value. 
 26, = according to the judgment of Gothe. 27, = advice ; by, Won ; to, 
 an; those = all such; who, bie ba. 28, @ott^. (S)3f>raim ScfTing, geboren ben 
 22. 3an. 1729 ju ^anien;5 (Dbev(aufi^), geftorben ben 15. %ihx. 1781 in S3raunfcf)Weig, 
 hat fi^ buvc^ feine dft^etif^itritifc^en ffierfe, irie and^ bnrdji feine S)ranien, bcren %oxm, 
 ©prac^e, a}Jet()obe unb 3nf)alt faft unetieic^te 2)?uftef finb, einen uniievbti^en 9lamcn in 
 bet beutf^en Sittevatuvgefc^ic^te evicorben. @ein aGivfen oXi geniater ^ritifer, goifcl^ec 
 unb 2)i(^ter mav »on unerme^tic^em (Sinjiu^ auf bie ndctjfie (Snttwicfetung unferet Sitte* 
 ratuc, bie init i^m unb butc^ i^n iijvcr ®lanjvwpl'« ent^egenfc^ntt. 
 
 Section 162. 
 
 A ROYAL JUDGMENT. 
 
 A man and his wife named Lambrun had been many years in the 
 service of the unfortunate Queen Mary Stuart, and were sincerely attached 
 to her. The tragical death of that princess had such an effect on the 
 husband that he did not long survive her, and the ^ widow, Margaret 
 Lambrun, resolved to revenge, upon^ Queen Elizabeth, the^ death of 
 two persons so dear to her. She {S. 5, N. 2) therefore disguised* 
 herself in man's clothes, bought (S. 58, N. 8) a brace ^ 0/ pistols, and 
 went® to (S. 72, N. 4) London. Soon after, when the queen '^ appeared 
 in * public, Margaret endeavoured to ® make her way through the crowd 
 in order to shoot her^"; but one of the pistols fell", and she was 
 immediately apprehended. 
 
 The^^ queen, being informed of the circumstance", ordered" the 
 man to be brought before her, and said to him : " Well, Sir, who are 
 you ^* ? and why do you seek " to kill me ? " — " Madam," replied Mar- 
 garet, " I am a woman ; I was a long time in the service of Queen 
 Mary Stuart, whom you put " to death unjustly ; her execution caused ^* 
 the death of my dear husband, who was sincerely attached to her ; and 
 my affection for both of them has excited ^* me to revenge." — " And how do 
 you think I ought to deal ^'^ with you .? " asked Elizabeth. — " Do you speak 
 as a queen or as a judge ? " returned Margaret. — " As a queen." — " Then 
 you ought to pardon ^^ me," was the answer. — "And what security^* 
 can you give me that you will not attempt ^® my life again ? " — " Madam, 
 z.^ pardon granted upon conditions ceases to be a favour'^*." — "Well 
 then," said the queen, " I pardon you, and trust to your gratitude for ^® 
 my safety." — P. Sadler. 
 
 1, = his. 2, an, with the Dat. of the def. art. The words * upon — 
 
 Elizabeth' must be placed before the supine. Comp. App. §1. 3, We 
 
 lament the death of the two boys so dear to us, ttiir bclveincn ben Sob bet betben 
 un3 fo teuvcn ^naben. 4, to disguise oneself in man's clothes, jic^ aU ^JJann
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 162. II7 
 
 Ufrneiben. 5, = a pair. 6, ftc^ bcgcben, insep. comp. str. v. refl. 7, Here 
 place the adverbs ' soon after '. 8, cffciittic^. 9, to make one's way, jicf) 
 cineti SBcg bat)ncn. 10, to shoot a person, auf cinen fcfeif§cii. 11, cntfiel 
 
 i^r. 12, Construe accord, to S. 55, N. i, and S. 4, N. 4, (man). 13. SBot^ 
 fan, m. 14, lie^ fu ben SKann vor fief) fiif)ren. 15, Use the 2nd pers. pi. 
 
 (3^r) here and in the following passages, since that was the pronoun generally 
 used in addressing persons in olden times. 16, to seek to kill a person {or 
 
 to attempt a person's life), cinem nadfi bent Selten tia^ten. 17, to put a person 
 to death unjustly, cinen ungercc^terrt)cifc :^inrid)ten lafTen. 18, This caused 
 
 the death of our child, bices foftct* unfercm Jlinbc ba^ Sebcn. The insertion of 
 
 the adv. and) after the verb * caused ' would considerably improve the German 
 rendering. 19, to excite a person to revenge, cinen jnr OJad^c antrcibcn. 
 
 Use the Impf. 20, »evfa()ren. 21, bcgnabigen, v. tr. 22, Si'ivgfcl^aft, f. 
 
 23, a — conditions, cine bcbingnngsipcifc SBcgnabignng. 24, ®nabc, f. 25, Ijins 
 fi^tli^, followed by the Gen. The words ' to (auf) your gratitude ' are best 
 placed at the end. 
 
 Section 163, 
 
 TACITUS. 
 
 I am glad to find S by your ( = thy) letter just received, that you are 
 reading Tacitus'^ with some relish. His style is rather quaint^ and 
 enigmatical, which (S. 3, N. 7) makes* it difficult to the student; but 
 then * his pages * are filled with such admirable apothegms and maxims 
 of political wisdom, as '' infer the deepest knowledge of human nature ; 
 and it is particularly necessary that any one intending to become a public 
 speaker should^ be master of his works, as' there is neither an ancient 
 nor a modern author who aff"ords such a selection of admirable quo- 
 tations. You should exercise yourself frequently in ^'^ trying to make 
 translations of the " passages which most strike ^'^ you, trying " to invest " 
 the sense of (S. 25, N. 5) Tacitus in as good English as you can. This 
 will answer^' the double purpose of making yourself familiar with the 
 Latin author, and giving you ihe command of^® your own language, 
 which no person will ever have ^'^ who ^^ does not study composition in 
 early life. — Sir Walter Scott, " Letters to his Son." 
 
 1, here cvfcf)en ; by, au3. 2, Use the def. art. accord, to S. 25, N. 5. 
 
 3, = unusual and unclear (bnnfcl). 4, to make difficult, cvfc^wcrcn ; student = 
 pupil. 5, = on the other hand, anbercvfeitS. 6, = writings, ©cfcviften ; 
 
 filled with such, fc V'cd iJcn. 7, as infer = that they prove. 8, Say 
 
 ' should thoroughly (gvimbli^) know his works '. 9, Say ' as there is (S. 82, 
 
 N. 7) no classical nor (no^) modern author (©c^viftficllcv) '. 10, in trying = 
 in the attempt, in bent akrfudje. 11, = such. 12, This passage struck 
 
 me most, biefe Stedc ntad^te am meiflcn (Sinbrucf auf mi*. 13, trying = and 
 
 try. 14, une'bcrgcbcn, sep. comp. str. v. tr. 15, This does not answer 
 
 my purpose, bieS cnt[prid)t meincm Swerfe nid)t. 16, fiber. 17, = obtain. 
 
 18, melc^ev fic^ ni^t jc^on in bet 3ugenb in fc^viftU^en Sluffdtjcn iibt. 
 
 Section 164. 
 
 HTJMLLITY. 
 
 I believe the first ' test of a truly great man is his humility. I do not 
 mean by^ humility, doubt of^ his own power, or hesitation* in speaking^
 
 Il8 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 164. 
 
 his opinions, but a right understanding of the relation between ' what 
 he can do and say, and'' the rest of the world's sayings and doings. 
 All great men not only know ' their business ^ but usually know " that " 
 they know it ; they are not only right in their main opinions ^^, but they 
 usually know that they are right in them (S. 4, N. 5, B) ; only they 
 do not think much of themselves on " that account. Arnolfo " knows 
 he can build a good ^^ dome at Florence ; Albert ^' Diirer writes calmly " 
 to one who had found fault with his work : " It cannot be better done ; " 
 Sir Isaac Newton knows that he has worked ^* out a problem or two 
 that would have puzzled anybody " else : — only they do not expect their '^^ 
 fellow-men therefore to fall down and worship them ; they ^' have a curious 
 under-sense of powerlessness, feeling (S. 30, N. 4) that the greatness is^^ 
 not in them, but through them ; that they could (App. § 33) not do or 
 be anything else than^* what God made them. They see something 
 divine and God-made " in every other man, and are endlessly, nay '■'^ in- 
 credibly mercifuP". — Anonymous. 
 
 1, = best ; test, 5)3vufilcin, m. 2, uutcr, which place at the head of the 
 
 period ; mean = understand. 3, an, with the Dat. 4, here Unentfc^loffeu- 
 f)eit. 5, au^'fpre^cti. 6, »ou. 7, = and of that which the remaining 
 
 world can say and do. 8, = understand. 9, ©ac^c, f. 10, iwiffcii, 
 
 after which insert the adv. auc^. 11, that they understand the same (to 
 
 agree with (Sad)c). 12, ^auptanfic£)tcn. 13, on that account, beSitegen, 
 
 which place after the Subj. ; to think much of oneself, cine grope SJJcinung tjon 
 ftc^ ^aben. 14, $ltnolfo bi Sambic, bcrii^mter SSaumeiilet unb Sitb^auer ju 
 
 Slorenj (1232-1300), baute bcu Som St. Maria del fiore ju Slorenj unb ba^ %i\itx- 
 luxfet gu @t. ^aolo in 9tom. 15, = stately. 16, Sllbre(^t ©iirer, geboreu 
 
 ben 20. ^ai 1471 ju Oiurnbcrg, gefiovben ben 6. S^jvit 1528 cbenbafctbji, rang ju ben 
 ■^ettiorragenbftcn imb cielfcitigftcn Jliinj^lern gc^^d^tt n^erben, bie je gelcbt. (Sr Wat nic^t 
 a((etn aueige^eic^neter 2)?alev, fonbern auc^ juglei(i^ ^upferfie(^cr (engraver on copper), 
 Socmfc^neibec (moulder), SilDfjaucr (sculptor), Stvc^iteft unb ©^vifti^encr (author) 
 iibcr bie ^unfl. (Sr n?ac bet ©rjiubcr ber Sl^funjt, cvfanb ba^ 3)?ittel, bie ^otjfc^nitte 
 mit jJuei S^arben jn brucfen, unb certtoflfonimnete bie ©^riftgiepcrei (type-foundry), 
 bennoon ifjm flammt bie 5orm bet beut[d>en Settevn. 17, gelajfen ; one, 
 
 jemanb. 18, to work out a problem or two, ^ptobleme lofen. 19, anybody 
 
 else, jeber aubere, as Nom. 20, = that their fellow-men therefore (befi^^atb) 
 
 must (fof(en) fail down before them and worship (an'beten) them. The auxiliary 
 foKen must be placed last, accord, to App. § 18. 21, they — powerlessness. 
 This clause cannot be rendered in a literal way, but may be expressed thus : 
 ' they recognise that they are, after all, only powerless ' ; after all, only, bodj 
 nut, which place after the Subj. 22, is not = manifests itself not (fic^ 
 
 offenbatcn). 23, aU wojju ®ott ttc ctfd)affen. 24, ©ottetfc^affeueg. 25, ja 
 fogat, 20, = forbearing, nac^fi^tig. 
 
 Sectio7t 165. 
 
 RUSSIAN POIilTICAL PRISONERS IN BANISHMENT. 
 
 I. 
 
 In the cheerless regions of^ Arkangel, of which the aborigines say: 
 " God made Russia, but the devil made Arkangel," there are (S. 82, 
 N. 7) more than two hundred of those banished ones — men and women, 
 all young, all ( = and) poor, most "^ of them sent without trial, few * 
 amongst them knowing even of what they are accused. Victor Ivano-
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 165. 1 19 
 
 vitch* dines with his friend B., for instance, and® after a stroll along" the 
 boulevards they separate. B. is arrested that '' very evening, and when 
 Victor, astonished and horror-stricken \ hastens ^ to inquire the cause, 
 he finds everybody ^°, even B.'s own father, as " much in the dark as he 
 n himself ; all questions and petitions on ^"^ the subject receive " vague 
 administrative answers ; all friends and relatives are systematically dis- 
 couraged and silenced; eagerly they wait for^* the numerous political 
 trials that^® come on without intermission, hoping ^® to see the missing 
 one's (S. 67, N, 3) name on ^^ the list of criminals, or to see ^'^ his face once 
 more, let '® it be even in ^" the prisoner's dock ; but as ^^ they wait and '^'^ 
 watch, the prisoner ^ is, without any trial, en route for Arkangel. 
 
 Arrived^* there, the routine (App. § 15) is the same for all; whatever" 
 the crime alleged, the age or sex, the "^^ prisoner is taken to the police- 
 ward, — a*'' dreary log-building, containing two sections, one for men, the 
 other for women. The solitary table and chair in the room, the four 
 walls, and even the ceiling, are covered ^* with the names of ^* youthful 
 predecessors, whose pencilled "** jests and clever caricatures bear ^^ wit- 
 ness to the strength of confidence in themselves with which they began^^ 
 their life in exile. 
 
 1, fce^ ®oiiticrnement3 Slrdiaiigct. 2, most of them, mcilleng ; sent = sent 
 
 there ; without trial = without any trial, ol)ue ici3(id}ce( !!Bcit)cv. 3, Say liter. 
 
 * of whom even but (nur) few know '. 4, Here follows ' for instance ' ; 
 
 with = in company of. 5, Say ' nnb tvennt ftd^ »pn i()m iia(^', etc. 6, \i.\\\. 
 
 7, noc^ an bcmfelbcn 9lbcnb. 8, aiifa t)cd)fie crfc^rcrfeii. 9, to hasten 
 
 to inquire the cause, fic^ ciHc((! tia^ bcr Uvfarfje crfuubiiyn. 10, everybody = 
 
 that all. 11, Supply ' are ' (fic^ bcfinben) before ' as '. 12, iibcr bic Suite. 
 
 13, receive — answers = are vaguely (in unbfftimniter IBcife, which place alter 
 government) answered by (S. 106, N. 23) the government. 14, aiif. 
 
 15, = that follow one another (auf einanbev folc^cn). ' 16, = in the hope. 
 
 17, in. 18, i\\ fcf)aucn (App. § i) ; face, jtm^iftc^t, n, 19, let it be = 
 
 be it even. 20, in — dock, vor ben @cl}ranff 11 fccei 4)cri(J)tt^. 21, = whilst. 
 
 22, and watch = and attentively watch (biira^en) everything. 23, Insert 
 
 the adv. fc^on after the subject; en route for = on the way to. 24, !Doit 
 
 angcfomnun ; ' routine ', here = treatment ; the words ' the same ' are to be 
 placed at the end of the clause. 25, whatever — sex, irclc^c^ 33eibvc(^cnt5 
 
 bet ©efancjcne auc^ angcflagt unb uicld}c« 3Utcid unb @efc^le(^tg cr au^ fci. 26, the — 
 ward = yet (fo . . . boc^) he is always taken ( = conducted) to (in) the police- 
 ward (*13olijei»a^e, f.). 27, a — women = that consists of (auS) a miserable 
 block-house of (auS) two divisions, one of which is appointed for men and the 
 other for women. 28, befd)iicbeu, p. p. 29, of — predecessors = of 
 the former (fruljer, adj.) youthful inhabitants of the same (to agred with room). 
 30, pencilled, niit 33leiftift flcjeidinet, which use attributively. 31, bear — 
 themselves = prove the intensity (@vc^c, f.) of the confidence in themselves 
 ((Selbj^vcrtrauen, n.). 32, 'to begin', here au'tvctcn, sep. comp. str. v. tr. ; 
 ife in exile = banishment. 
 
 Section 166. 
 
 RUSSIAN" POLITICAL PRISONERS IN BANISHMENT. 
 
 II. 
 In this dreary abode ^ a week or ten days is spent, when "^ the governor 
 of Arkangel, after due reflection, marks out ^ for this dangerous person-
 
 120 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 66. 
 
 age some final place of exile (S. 76, N. 22, B), some* miserable little 
 district town®, such as Holmogor, Shenkoursk, Pinega, or Mexen. The® 
 prisoner is then told his " documents " are ready, and a gendarme enters, 
 saying ' it is time to start *. The exile jumps into the jolting post- 
 waggon, two gendarmes jump in after him, the bell above ^ the horse's 
 neck begins to ring — and rings on for ^° days and weeks — through wood", 
 and swamp, and plain, along ^^ roads inconceivably drear and lonely, 
 until the ^^ weary convoy at length arrives at his destination. The little 
 town is desolate and black", and consists of log-huts, two unpaved 
 streets, and a wooden church painted green, and the ^® live-stock consists 
 of ten or twelve raw-boned ^^ horses, a small herd of sickly ^^ cows, and 
 thirty or forty reindeer. The population rarely (S. 102, N. 30) exceeds 
 one (S. 132, N. 10) thousand ^^ and consists of the Ispravnik^^, ten sub- 
 altern'^" ofificers, the Arbiter ^^ of the Peace, the^^ Crown Forester, a priest, 
 a few shopkeepers, thirty or forty exiles, a^' chain-gang of Russian 
 felons, and a crowd ^* of Finnish beggars. On his arrival, the prisoner 
 is driven straight to (S. 72, N. 4) the police-ward, where he is inspected^* 
 by (S. 106, N. 23) the Ispravnik, a (S. 53, N. 9) police officer, who is 
 absolute lord and master of the district. This representative of the 
 Government requires ^'^ of him to answer the following questions : His " 
 name ? How old ? Married or single ? Where from ? The address 
 of 2* parents, relations, or friends 1 Answers "^ to all of which are en- 
 tered in the books. 
 
 1, Stufcnt^attgovt, m. ; a — spent = spends (vcrkingcn) the prisoner eight or 
 ten days. 2, = whereupon. 3, to mark out, be^eic^nen ; for this = 
 
 to this (Dat.) ; personage = character ; some final = his definite (befinitio). 
 The Dat. should be placed immediately after ' Slrfangcl '. 4, = a. 5, ^reig; 
 flabt, f. ; such as = as for example. 6, Construe this passage accord, to 
 
 the following model: I am told the documents are destroyed, 6^ (S, 104, 
 N. 19) trirb mir mitgeteilt, ba^ bie 5>apiere »evni(^tct finb. 7, mit bcm Scmerfen, 
 
 ba§, etc. 8, ' to start,' of a conveyance, a train, etc., is generally rendered 
 
 by ab'fafiren. 9, = at, an. 10, for years, ia^retang. 11, Use 
 
 the pi. for this and the two following nouns. 12, auf. Read S. 128, N. 
 
 1 1 . 13, the — convoy = the exhausted travellers. 14, black = gloomy. 
 
 15, ffiic^ftanb, m. 16, abgemagert. 17, ftcd^. 18, Supply ' souls '. 
 
 19, This term may be used in its unaltered form, but is perhaps better ren- 
 dered by ' ^^^ohjciprafibcnt', m. 20, Untcrbeamte, m. 21, grieben^ric^ter. 
 22, Nom. ber faiferlid^e gorftbcamte. 23, einem ^aufen ruffifc^er ajerbred^ev in 
 ^cttcn. 24, = number. 25, = examined ; who — district = with 
 absolute (unutnfd^rdnft) power (aSoHmac^t, f.) over the whole district. 26, be; 
 gc^rcn; to answer = the answer, bie 93eantwortuug, followed by the Gen., but 
 without art. 27, = your. 28, Say ' of your parents '. 29, Say * and 
 the answers to (auf, with Ace.) these questions are all entered (ein'tragen) in 
 the books. 
 
 Section 167. 
 
 RUSSIAN POIiTTICAIi PRISONEBS IN BANISHMENT. 
 
 III. 
 A^ solemn promise is then exacted of him that he will not give lessons 
 of 2 any kind, or^ try to teach* anyone; that every letter (S. 48, N. 6)
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 167. 121 
 
 he writes will go through the Ispravnik's hands, and ^ that he will follow 
 no occupation except shoemaking, carpentering, or field labour. He is 
 then^ told he (App. § 28) is free, but'' at the same time is solemnly 
 warned that * should he attempt to pass the limits of the town, he would 
 be shot down like a dog rather than be allowed to escape ; and ^, should 
 he be taken alive, would be sent off to Eastern Siberia without further 
 formality than that of the Ispravnik's personal order. 
 
 The pool* fellow takes up his Httle bundle, and '**, fully realising that 
 he has now bidden " farewell to the culture and material ^^ comfort of 
 his past " life, he walks " out into the cheerless street. A group of 
 exiles, all pale and emaciated, are (S. 107, N. 13) there ^^ to (S. 19, N. 7) 
 greet him, take^® him to some <?/" their miserable lodgings, and feverishly 
 demand " news from home. The new comer gazes on them as one in 
 a dream ; some are melancholy, and almost mad, others nervously 
 irritable, and the remainder have evidently tried to find solace in^* drink. 
 They live (S. 1 1 6, N. 1 7) in '* communities of twos and threes, have food, 
 a scanty provision of clothes, money ^", and books in common, and con- 
 sider '^^ it their sacred duty to help each other in every emergency, 
 without ^^ distinction of (S. 3, N. 2, and S. 10, N. 9) sex, rank, or age. 
 The noble by ^^ birth get sixteen shillings ^* a month from Government 
 for their maintenance, and^^ commoners only ten, although many of 
 them are married, and ^^ sent into exile with young families ^\ 
 
 1, Say ' Hereupon one demands (vcvlancien) of him the solemn promise '. 
 2, not of any kind, fcinerlei, adj. (indeclinable). 3, or try = and not try. 
 
 The auxiliary verb of mood ' if ;7/ ' need be expressed but once, and stands, of 
 course ? 4, untcrricl)ten, insep. comp. w. v. tr. 5, Say ' and that he 
 
 besides (aupcr) shoemaking (©djumac^erei, f., with def. art.), carpentering and 
 field-labour, will carry on (treiben) no (feiuev(ei) occupation. 6, ' then ', 
 
 here (Snblic^, with which begin the clause, and construe accord, to S. 4, N. 4 
 (man). 7, but — warned, ah(t ^no^kiij fiinbigt man il^m an. 8, that — 
 
 escape. This passage requires an altogether different construction in German ; 
 say ' they (man) would upon (beij an attempt, to go beyond (iibcvfd^vciten, insep. 
 comp. str. V. tr.) the limits of the town, not allow him to escape, but rather 
 (»ielm«t)r) shoot him down like a dog (liter. —but him rather like a dog shoot 
 down, nie'bcr[d)icpcn). 9. Say ' should he however be caught (cin'fangcn) alive, 
 (fc) they (man) would send him without further formality (^otmaUtdt, f.), upon 
 the simple order of the Ispravnik to the East of Siberia. 10, and — 
 
 realising = and well knowing (pres. p.). 11, to bid farewell, £ek>rof)t 
 
 fagen. 12, matcricde ^cqnemlic^fcitcn (Nom. pi.), which use with the def. 
 
 art. in the Dat. pi. 13, = former. 14, to walk out into the street, 
 
 in bie ©tra^c t)inau^'fd)'^fitfn' 15, = outside. 16, Supply the pron. 
 
 'these' before the verb take (fitf)rcn, i.e. lead); to = into. 17, to demand 
 
 news from home, cinen nacb ^Jac^ruttcn an^ bcv Jpeiniat fvai^en. 18, in drink, 
 
 im Xrunfe. 19, in — threes, jc gwei ober bvci jiiifammcn. 20, Supply 
 
 'as also' before 'money'; in common, gcmeinfc^aftli^. 21, My parents 
 
 consider it their duty to help their neighbours in every emergency, mcine 
 (Sltcrn I)a(tfn (6 fiir itjre ^flicfit, if)ien 9Jad^barn in jeber OJct unb ©efatjt bcigHftcl)cn. 
 22, Insert ' nnb jlvar ' before ' without ', which will improve the rendering 
 very much. 23, »on. 24, i sh. = i aJtavf ; a month, monatUc^, jcben 
 
 Sfpnat, or a((e 9)?cnate. 25, bed} bie SiirgerUc^cn ; repeat ' SWarf after 'ten'. 
 
 26, and sent = and are being sent (see S. 2, N. 1). 27, = children.
 
 L22 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION l68. 
 
 Section 168. 
 
 KUSSIAN POLITICAL PRISONERS IN BANISHMENT. 
 
 IV. 
 
 Daily a gendarme visits ^ their lodgings, inspects ^ the premises when 
 and how he pleases ', and now * and then makes some mysterious entry 
 in his note book. Should ® any of their number carry a warm dinner, a 
 pair of newly-mended boots, or a change of linen to some passing exile 
 lodged for the moment in the police-ward, it is just as likely as not 
 marked against him as a crime. It is a crime to ® come and see a friend 
 off, or accompany' him a little on the way. In* fact, should the Is- 
 pravnik feeP out of sorts — the effect of cards" and drink — he" vents 
 his bad temper on the exiles ; and as ^"^ cards and drink are the only 
 amusements in these dreary regions, crimes ^' are often marked down 
 against the exiles in astonishing numbers, and ^* a report of them sent 
 to the Governor of the province. 
 
 Winter lasts eight months, a ^'^ period during which the surrounding ^' 
 country presents the appearance of a noiseless ", lifeless, frozen marsh. 
 No roads, no communication with the outer world, no means of^' escape. 
 In course of time almost every exile is attacked '^ by nervous convul- 
 sions, soon^° followed by prolonged apathy and complete prostration. 
 Some of them contrive ^^ to forge passports, and by a miracle, as ^ it 
 were, make their escape ; but the great majority of these victims of the 
 Third Section ^^ either go mad, commit suicide, or die of ^* delirium 
 tremens. — James Allen. 
 
 1, visits = comes into. 2, = who inspects (unterfu'd^en) the house. 
 
 3, Do as you please, tt)un ©if, Irie e^ S^ncn beliebt. 4, now and then, bann unC 
 Wann, or son Beit ju 3eit, after which insert the adverbs au(^ iBo^t; some = a; 
 to make an entry in a book, etne SScmcrfung in ein ^iid) eintragen. 5, Arrange 
 this period in the following manner : ' Should one of them to a for the moment 
 in the police-ward lodged (untcrgcbrad^t) and passing (burc^rcifenb) exile ever (je) 
 a warm dinner, a pair of newly-soled boots, or some clean linen (SBafc^c, f.) 
 bring, then (fo) is (Passive) to him this very (S. i6r, N. 2) likely as a crime 
 ascribed {lyxx i*ail gefcfjricben). 6, He came and saw his friend off, cr finite 
 
 feincm abreifcnben gveunbe Scbclro^I. 7, Will you accompany me a little on 
 
 my way ? SlBcdcn (Sie mi^ aiif meincm SBcc^e cine fleine ©tvccfc bfcjUitcn ? 8,= In 
 short, ^\\x\. 9, to feel out of sorts, libier ?aunc [ein. Insert the adv. cinmat 
 after the subject. 10, = card-playing ; see S. 3, N. 2, and S. 10, N. 9. 
 
 11, he — exiles, fo ntiiffen i^m bie SSerbanntcn barur biigen. 12, The adverbial 
 
 circumstance of place ' in — regions ' is best placed immediately after the conj. 
 13, crimes — numbers = an astonishing number of crimes is often ascribed to 
 the exiles. Read App. § 5. 14, and — sent to = and reported (ntclbcn) 
 
 to. 15, a — which = during which time. 16, = whole. 17, See 
 
 S. 71, N. 2, which rule applies likewise to adjectives; 'frozen', here gu @i^ 
 erftarrt. 18, ju, contracted with the art. 19, ' to be attacked ', here 
 
 ^eimgefuct^t hicrbcn. 20, = upon which soon follows a state (3uflanb, m.) of 
 
 prolonged (baucrnb) apathy (©tunipffinn, m.) and complete (gdnjlic^) prostration 
 (.^Mnf^lliQ^it ber gfbcnstrdftc). 21, He contrived to forge a passport, c6 gefani^ 
 i^m, eincn falfc^cn 5pafi ^crjujieKen. 22, as it were, gteid^fam, which place
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION l68. 1 23 
 
 after 'and'; by = through, burc^ ; to make one's escape, entfommcn, insep. comp. 
 str. V. intr. 23, *2)ie bvitte Slbteilung' ncnnt man in iRuflanb bag gcfurc^tete 
 
 Separremcnt ieS ^polijeimiuiflcvium^, irelc^eS mit bcv gc^eimea 5}Joltgei bettaut iji. 
 24, an, contracted with the Dat. of the def. art. 
 
 Section 169. 
 
 TAHITI '. 
 I. 
 
 At ^ daylight Tahiti, an island which must for ever remain ' classical 
 to the voyager in the South Sea, was in view. At a distance the appear- 
 ance * was not attractive. The * luxuriant vegetation of the lower * part 
 could not yet be seen; and as the clouds rolled^ past, only the wildest' 
 and most precipitous peaks showed themselves* towards ^° the centre of 
 the island. As soon as we anchored in" Matavai Bay we^^ were sur- 
 rounded by canoes. After dinner we landed and enjoyed the delights^* 
 always^* produced by the first impressions of a fine country. A crowd 
 of vsxtw, women, and children was collected on the shore, ready to (S. 19, 
 N. 7) receive us with laughing, merry faces. They^^ marshalled us towards 
 the house of (S. 10, N. 2) Mr. Wilson, the^' missionary of the district, 
 who met" us on the road, and gave^* us a very fine reception. After 
 sitting" a short time in his house, we separated from our host to^** walk 
 about, and" returned in the evening. 
 
 The^^ land capable of cultivation is^' scarcely in any part more than 
 a fringe of low alluvial soil, accumulated round'^* the base of the moun- 
 tains, and'^^ protected from the waves of the sea by a coral reef, which 
 encircles the entire line of coast. Within the reef there'^* is an expanse 
 of smooth water, like that of a lake, where ^'^ the canoes of the natives 
 can ply with safety, and where ^* ships anchor. The low land, which ^' 
 comes down to the beach of coral sand, is covered ^^ by the most beau- 
 tiful productions of^' the intertropical regions. In the midst of bananas ^^ 
 orange, cocoa-nut, and bread-fruit trees, spots ^^ are cleared where yams'*, 
 potatoes, the sugar-cane, and pine-apples are cultivated **. 
 
 1, %<x\)\i\ ifl bie gwgte ber ©cfcdfc^aft^infetn (Society Islands) im |ii((en aWcere 
 ober ber ©I'lbfce (Pacific Ocean) nnC bcii^t nnc)cfdl)i: 0200 (Simiuif)ncr, tuctdje feit 181 3 
 butc^ cnglifdje iJ?if[iondie jum (5()viitentum befcl)vt jiub. 3)ie 5Bibel ift in bie ©pvacfee 
 bet (Sinfleborncn ubcvfe^t, unb auc^ in ben Jlircfcen unb ©c^ulen unib in ber Sanbeefpra^e 
 geprebigt unb gele()vt. 2, = At the break of day (58eim S^ugetianbiucfc) we saw 
 
 Tahiti. 3, = appear, cvfcbcinen. The words 'to — Sea ' must be placed 
 
 after the rel. pron., and are followed by 'for ever' (fieti^). 4, =view. 
 
 5, Use the active Voice of the verb with ' man *, which should commence the 
 clause. 6, 'lower', here nicbrigcr belegcn. 7, rolled past, an un^ 
 
 corubetjogen. 8, Supply 'to us' after ' themselves'. 8, uiu)l. 10, =in 
 the middle. 11, in ber Sud)t »on 'QJJatavai. 12, = we found ourselves 
 
 surrounded by (oon) canoes (!i3aumfabn, m.). 13, greuben. 14, Say 
 
 * which the first sight of a fine country always produces (betvot'tufen) within 
 us '. 15, = These conducted us. 16, bed SeurtetmifTiondcd. 17, He 
 
 will meet me on the road, et luirb mir l)a(bn>ec\>5 eutgc'c^cnfemmen. 18, to give 
 
 a person a very fine reception, tinen ^oc^|l fveunblic^ bewilltommnen. 18, vei-
 
 124 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 169. 
 
 incUcn; construe this clause accord, to S. 55, N. r. 20, Inf. cinen (Spagiers 
 
 gang madden. 21, =from which we returned in the evening (abenb^). 
 
 22, !Der fulturfd^ige Zdl bee SitfeL 23, is — soil = consists nearly every- , 
 
 where only of (aiig) a narrow strip of low (niebrig betegcn) alluvial land (use the 
 Gen. without the art.). 24, round the base, ringg ^cium am ^u^i. 25, Say 
 ' and is protected ' ; from, »or. 26, there is = finds itself (ftc^ befinben) ; 
 
 an expanse of water, einc aiiggcbetinte SBafferfldc^e ; ' smooth ', here fajl [piegelglatt. 
 27, The literal rendering of this passage would not read well, say * which (to 
 agree with SOBaffcrpd^c) affords (App. § 5) perfect (»cf(ig) safety to the canoes of 
 the natives '. 28, = in which. 29, = which reaches down (:^inun'ter; 
 
 veid^en) to (Bis ju) the beach consisting of coral-sand. — Use the attributive 
 const., S. 48, N. 6. 30, ' covered ', here bewai^fen ; by, ntit. 31, bcr 
 
 jttjtfd^m ben Xro^jen betcgcncn ©egenbcn. 32, See S. 71, N. 2. 33, to 
 
 clear a spot (of trees, etc.), eine ©tcKc urbar ma^cn. 34, ©amShJurjcln. 
 
 35, kucn. 
 
 Sectio7i 170. 
 
 TAHITL 
 II. 
 
 Even the brush-wood is ' an imported fruit-tree, namely, the guava ^ 
 which grows in abundance here. In Brazil I have often admired the 
 varied^ beauty of the bananas (S. 71, N. 2), palms, and orange-trees 
 contrasted * together ; and here we also have the bread-fruit ®, con- 
 spicuous ® from its large, glossy, and deeply digitated leaves. It is 
 admirable "^ to behold groves of a tree, sending * forth its branches with 
 the vigour of an English oak, loaded* with large and most nutritious 
 fruit ^\ 
 
 However" seldom the usefulness of an object can account for the 
 pleasure of beholding it, in the case of these beautiful woods, the know- 
 ledge of their high productiveness, no doubt, enters largely into the feel- 
 ing of admiration. The ^^ little winding paths, cool from the surrounding 
 shade, led to the scattered " houses, the owners of which everywhere 
 gave " us a cheerful ^^ and most hospitable reception. 
 
 I^® was pleased with nothing so much as with the inhabitants. There" 
 is a mildness in the expression of their countenances which at once 
 banishes the idea of^'^ a savage, and an intelligence'' which shows that 
 they are ^° advancing in civilisation. The common people, when working, 
 keep ''■^ the upper part of their bodies quite naked ; and " it is then that 
 the Tahitians are seen to advantage. They are very tall, broad-shouldered, 
 athletic, and well proportioned. It (S. 4, N. 4, man) has been remarked 
 that^ it requires litde habit to make a dark skin more pleasing and 
 natural to the eye of a European than his own colour. 
 
 1, = consists of. 2, bcr ©ujatiabaum, bcjfcn )?cnteranjenarttge (orange-like) 
 
 5rii(^te in Buder eingemad^t obcr au(^ in @clee cerwanbelt ocrfanbt werbcn. 3; man; 
 nigfaltig. 4, Say ' which form such a great contrast '. 5, Srotbaum, m. 
 
 6, conspicuous, treld^cr . . . [oglcic^ oujfddt, i. e. strikes the eye ; from, bnvc^ ; its 
 deeply digitated leaves, feine tief eingcf^nittencn, fingcrfcrmigen 33ldtter. 
 
 7, = splendid; groves of a tree = a forest of trees. 8, = spreading out 
 their, etc. 9, = and are at the same time (babei) loaded. 10, Use
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 170. 1 25 
 
 this noun in the pi. 11, Arrange this period thus : ' Although the usefulness 
 of an object perhaps only seldom explains to us the pleasure, which we 
 experience at the sight of the same, yet (fo . . . iod)) our admiration at the 
 sight of these splendid groves (3BdIber) is no doubt considerably influenced by 
 ( = through) our knowledge of (»on) their great fertility. 12, The — shade = 
 The narrow, winding (fic^ fc^langelnb), shady and cool foot-paths. 13, jcr> 
 
 ftreut Ucgcnb. 14, gewdJ^ren. 15, fieunblic^, but here tt>o^htio((tnib, in 
 
 order to avoid a repetition of the same term, since 'hospitable' must be turned 
 by gafiJTCunbUd) ; reception, 9tufna:^mc, f. 16, Say ' Nothing gave (ma(f>en) 
 
 me greater joy than just (gerabe) the inhabitants '. 17, Say ' The expression 
 of their faces (3[)r @eft(^t^auSbrmf) bears a mildness (©anftlttut, f.), which', etc. 
 18, = of savages. 19, SuteKigcnj, f. 20, are advancing = make progress. 
 21, =they have. It is a matter of course that the conj. 'when' must 
 commence the period. 22, = and just then one sees the Tahitians (bic 
 
 3!a^itianer) to advantage (= in the best light). 23, =that after « short 
 
 time a dark skin appears to the eye of a European more pleasing and more 
 natural than his own. 
 
 Section 1711 
 
 TAHITI. 
 III. 
 
 A white man bathing (S. i6, N. 4) by the side of a Tahitian was' 
 like a plant bleached (S. 7, N. 3, attrib.) by the gardener's art compared^ 
 with a fine dark-green one growing vigorously ^ in the field. Most of 
 the men are tatooed, and the ornaments follow the curvature * of the 
 body so " gracefully, that they ® have a very elegant effect. The most 
 common pattern, varying '' in its details, is somewhat like ^* the crown of 
 a palm-tree. It springs * from the central hne of the back, and grace- 
 fully curls ® round both sides. The simile may '° be a fanciful one, but 
 I" thought the body of a man thus ornamented'^ was (App. §§ 29 
 and 30) Hke " the trunk of a noble tree embraced '* by a delicate creeper. 
 
 Many of the elder people '^ had their feet covered with small figures, 
 so '* placed as to resemble a sock. This fashion, however, is partly 
 gone " by, and has been succeeded '^ by others. Here '', although 
 fashion is far from immutable, every one must abide ^^ by that prevailing 
 at his youth. An old man has thus ^' his age for ever stamped on his 
 body, and he cannot assume '^^ the airs of a young dandy. The women 
 are tatooed in the same manner as the men, and'-^^ very commonly on 
 their fingers. 
 
 In^* returning to the boat, we witnessed'^'' a very pretty scene. 
 Numbers^*' of children were playing on the beach, and had lighted 
 bonfires, which illuminated the placid sea and ^^ surrounding trees ; 
 others, in^' circles, were singing Tahitian verses. We seated ourselves 
 on the sand, and ^' joined their party. The songs were impromptu ^^ 
 and*' I believe related to our arrival. One little girl sang a line^^ 
 which ** the rest took up in parts, forming ^* a very pretty chorus. The 
 whole scene made ^^ us unequivocally aware that ^® we were seated on 
 the shore of an island in the far-famed South Sea. — Charles Darwin.
 
 126 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 171. 
 
 1, = appeared. 2, = in (contracted with the Dat. of the def. art.) 
 
 comparison. 3, = in full vigour (Jtraft, f.). 4, vf urttatur, f. 5, auf 
 
 cine fo anmutige SBcife. 6, they have a = they are of. 7, varying — 
 
 details = the single parts of which often differ (ab'ttjeicl)en) from each other. 
 8, springs from, gelit . . . au^ ; from — back, ttont Stiicfgrat (spine). 9, to curl 
 round, ft^ um . . . ^entm'winben. 10, may — one = is perhaps fanciful {pi^dnt 
 taftifd)). 11, ii) bad)te bci mir felbjl. 12, Use the attribut. const. 
 
 13, tt)ie. 14, = which is embraced (itmfc^Hn'flcn, insep. comp. str. v.) by 
 
 (S. 106, N. 23) a delicate (javt) creeper (©(^Ungpflaujc, f.). 15, =men. 
 
 16, = which were so arranged that they resembled (gleic^en, to be like, str. v. 
 governing the Dat.) a sock. 17, = antiquated, wevaltet. 18, »erbrangt, 
 
 i, e. displaced. 19, Say * Although fashion here is far from (ttjcit batten 
 
 cntfernt) being (S. i, N. 5) immutable. 20, to abide by a thing, bei itwaS 
 
 vjcrblciben. Use the attributive constr, in this clause. 21, 3luf biefe SQSeife, 
 
 which place at the head of the period. ' Old ', here Bcia:^rt ; * to stamp ', here 
 aug'prdgcu. 22, to assume the airs of a dandy, ben ©tu^er fpiclcn. 
 
 Render 'not' by 'not possibly', immogUc^. 23, =but generally also. 
 
 24, = When we returned to the vessel. 25, Yesterday I witnessed a very 
 
 pretty scene, gcflcrn bot ii(^ ntir cin fetjr :^iibfc[)c3 (gcf^aufpiel bar. 26, = Numerous 
 children. 27, unb bie in bcv ^ai)i ftet)enbcn a^aume. 28, = who formed 
 
 a circle (itrei^, m.), sang verses in their mother-tongue (i.e. native language). 
 29, =and joined them (fi(^ an'fdjUe^en, sep. comp. str. v. refl., governing the 
 Dat.). 30, aug bem ©tegreif. 31, = and related (fi(^ bejietjen, insep. comp. 
 irreg. v. refl.), I believe (inverted), to (anf) our arrival. 32, the 'line' of 
 
 a verse is generally rendered by ' @hoi)^e', f. 33, which — parts, ttielcte 
 
 »on ben iibrigen ntetjrjiimmig aufgenomnten ttiurbc. 34, = and formed, 
 
 35, made — aware, legte un5tt?eifcl()afteg 3cugui3 bawon oB. 36, =that we 
 
 found ourselves. 37, here ttielbefungen, adj. 
 
 Section 172. 
 
 AUDUBOTTS THE AMERICAIT ORTTITHOIiOGIST, RELATES 
 
 HOW NEARLY 2 A THOUSAND OF HIS ORIGINAL 
 
 DRAWINGS WERE DESTROYED. 
 
 I left the village ^Henderson, in Kentucky, situated^ on the banks 
 of the Ohio, where I * resided for several years, to proceed ^ to Phila- 
 delphia on business. I (S. 115, N. i) looked^ to my drawings before 
 my departure, placed them carefully in a wooden box, and gave '' them 
 in charge of a relative, with * injunctions to see that no injury should 
 happen to them. My absence was of ( = lasted) several months ; and 
 when I returned, after ' having enjoyed the pleasures of home for a few 
 days, I inquired ^° after my box, and " what I was pleased to call my 
 treasure. The box was produced ^^ and opened ; but ^', reader, feel for 
 me — a pair of Norway rats had taken possession of the whole, and 
 reared a young family among the gnawed ^* bits of paper, which, but '® 
 a month previous, had represented nearly a thousand inhabitants of" 
 the air 1 The burning heat which ^'^ instantly rushed through my brain 
 was too great without" affecting my whole nervous system. I slept 
 for (S. 166, N. 10) several nights, and the days passed Hke^^ days of 
 oblivion — until ""^ the animal powers being recalled into action, through 
 the strength of my constitution, I "^^ took up my gun, my note-book and
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1^2. 127 
 
 my pencils, and went forth to the woods as gaily as if nothing had 
 happened. P^ felt pleased that I might now make better drawings 
 than before ; and, ere a period not exceeding three years had elapsed, 
 my portfolio was again filled. — John Audubon. 
 
 1, 3ot)n 3atttc3 Slububon, bcr t)ciuf)mtc amctifanifc^'c Drnitfjologe (ober ajogeU 
 funbige), gebcren ben 4. 3}iai 1780 in Scuiftana, gcfievben ben 27. 3annar 1851 ju 
 S(leir;g)ot!, U\u\)x bie ©trome unb gluJTe bc^ SBcjleng, nm bie S^ogcl ?u bcoba^ten unb ju 
 jcic^nen. 2, nearly a thousand, nal)e an taufenb. 3, Use the attributive 
 
 constr., and see S. 7. N, 3, and S. 48, N. 6. 4, = I had resided for (feit). 
 
 5, veifen ; on business, in ©efc^aften. 6, to look to a thing, nadj ihvaS [cfjen. 
 
 7, to give a thing in charge to a person, cinem ctwaS ubevge'ben. 8, = with 
 
 the express command to protect (bewabren) them from (»or) any (jcber) injury. 
 
 9, =and had enjoyed. The pleasures of home, bie 5«uben ber ^du^U^feit. 
 
 10, to inquire after a thing, nad^ ctwag fmgen. 11» =and after (nac^) my 
 treasure, as I was pleased to call its contents (wie id) beffen 3nl)alt gcvne ju 
 bejeici)nen pjllegte). 12, = brought. 13, = but have pity on (mit) me, 
 O reader ! 14, i(ernagt ; bits of paper, $apierfe|en. 15, no^ voc einem 
 ajJcnat. 16, ber I'iifte, which is the poetic form. 17, = which instantly 
 took possession of my brain (®c()irn, n.). To take possession of a thing, fi(^ 
 einer @a(^e bemdc^tigen. 18, urn ni(^t auc^ ntein gauj^eg Dievoenf^l^em ^u erfc^uttevn. 
 19, hke — oblivion, im ganjU^cn a3cvgef|en aUe& @efc^ct)encn. 20, =till my 
 vital powers (gebengfrdfte) were reanimated (tvieber angevcgt liuiven, App. § 17) 
 through the strength of my constitution (9iatur, f.). 21, Say 'and I was 
 able (imjtanbe fein) to take up (evgvcifen) my gun (SSuc^fe, f.), my sketch-book 
 and my pencils to (S. 19, N. 7) go therewith again as (fo) cheerfully into the 
 woods as if nothing had happened (a{6 cb ni^tS uorgefaUcn U'dve) '. 22, Say 
 ' It gave me pleasure to think that I would now perhaps produce better 
 drawings than ever (je) before; and even before (no(^ et}e) three years had 
 passed away, my portfolio was again filled with drawings. 
 
 Section 173, 
 
 THE BATTLE OP' KASSASSIN. 
 
 I. 
 
 Mahsamah, Monday, August 28, 1882. 
 
 At ''' seven this morning, guns were heard in the direction of Kassassin, 
 which is * four miles to our front. The troops were called * under arms, 
 the Cavalry, consisting of the Household Cavalry^ and 7th Dragoon 
 Guards, saddled up, and the Infantry fell * in in readiness to "^ march to 
 the assistance of the force there under General Graham. That officer, 
 however, sent a ^ message saying that the firing was in the enemy's camp, 
 and ' was inexplicable, except upon the supposition that the Egyptians 
 were fighting^" among themselves. 
 
 At" eleven o'clock, however, the flags of the signallers at Kassassm 
 were in motion, and (S. 104, N. 19) the news came that the enemy 
 were approaching '^ The Cavalry again turned out ^^ and rode off to 
 Kassassin. As the enemy approached, General Graham opened fire 
 with his two guns, and'* the Egyptian artillery replied. The 19th 
 Hussars '^ came on ^^ to the place from Mahuta, where General Willis 
 has his headquarters. 
 
 The enemy, made no attack, but halted at" a considerable distance
 
 128 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 1 73. 
 
 from the camp, and kept ^^ up a continued shell-fire, but at a distance 
 altogether ^* out of range. Their conduct ^* was, indeed, altogether 
 inexplicable. The Cavalry remained out all day, and the Infantry Aere 
 were kept in readiness to march at ^° a moment's notice, but as the enemy 
 made ^^ no movement in advance, they were not called forward to the 
 front. 
 
 The heat was terrific ^'^ all day, the^' sun beating down with almost 
 insupportable force upon the wide sand waste. It*^* had been hard 
 work for horses and men. No shade was obtainable -^ and the hot 
 wind raised ^^ great dust storms, which penetrated everywhere and made 
 breathing difficult. The brigade of Guards (S. 36, N. 7, A) fell in 
 under arms^* ready ^^ to march, but the Cavalry returned and reported 
 that the enemy had fallen back *", after ^^ keeping the troops the whole 
 day out in the full force of the sun. 
 
 1, bet. The very graphic account of the Battle of Kassassin given in 
 Sections 173-177 was written by the correspondent of the London ' Standard', 
 who was with the cavalry at Mahsamah. Kassassin (also called Kassassin Lock) 
 is four miles west trom Mahsamah Station, which, only a few days previous to 
 this action, was captured from the Egyptians by General Drury Lowe. The 
 Egyptians had established a camp at that place, and, after the capture, the 
 Household Cavalry and the Dragoon Guards were stationed there, under the 
 command of General Drury Lowe, as a reserve to the small force that held 
 Kassassin Lock, an important fortified position occupied by General Graham. 
 The enemy, under the rebel-leader Arabi, held the strongly fortified camp of 
 Tel-el-Kebir, about twelve miles west from Kassassin. Arabi's stronghold 
 (Tel-el-Kebir) was stormed and captured by the English under their skilful 
 Commander-in-chief Sir Garnet Wolseley (now Lord Wolesley of Cairo), on 
 Wednesday, September 13, when the rebel-army was totally beaten, and the 
 Egyptian war brought to a successful issue. 2, Say ' This (Jpcutc) morning at 
 7 o'clock we (man) heard the thunder of cannons (comp. n.)', etc. 3, =is 
 situated ; to our front = before us. 4, to call under arms, 511 ben 9Bajfen tufen. 
 5, Nom. PI. ©arbefiirafriere ; the ist Dragoon Guards, bag erfle SDragoner ©avberegii 
 ntent. 6, fell— readiness, jleUte fid) in iReil) unb @(ieb. 7, urn ben bort untev ©enevat 
 @ral)am ftet)enben Snippen ju Jpiilfe jn eilen. 8, a — saying = a messenger with 
 
 the information (OJad^rid^t, f.). 9, and — supposition, unb ba§ ntan ft^ 
 
 ba^felbe nur buvd) bie a^evmutnng evflaven fonne. 10, The rebels fight among 
 
 themselves, bie (Snipovcr befdmpfen fief) untct einanbcr. 11, = At 1 1 o'clock, 
 
 however, we (man) saw the flag-signals (S. 76, N. 22, A) at Kassassin. 
 12, {)eran'riicfen. Comp. 107, N. 13. 13, =got ready (fidf) fertig madden). 
 
 14, which was answered (cvtttietern) by the Egyptian artillery. 15, Jpufaren; 
 
 regiment, n. 16, on — place = here (()iel)ev). 17, at a = in. 18, to 
 
 keep up a continued shell-fire, ein ununtevbroc^enefj Sombarbcment (pronounced as 
 in French) untevl^aften. 18, itte(cf)e au^ev bem a3ereic^e ber @(J)u§ttieite tag. 
 
 19, Jpanblung^Uieifc, f. ; indeed = really ; altogether, ganj. 20, at — notice = 
 any moment. 21, to make a movement in advance, Uor'riiden. 22, = ex- 
 traordinary great. 23, = and the sun shone down, etc. ; * force ', here 
 @fut, f. 24, = Horses and men had had hard work (here cinen fc^ttjercn 
 (Stanb f)abcn). 25^ = to be found. 26, ©taubtttolf en auf treiben. 27, here 
 l^in'bringen. 28, to fall in under arms, unter SBaffen treten. 29, =and 
 held itself ready to march (fic^ pm Slbmavfc^ bereit I)a(ten). 30, to fall back, 
 jicf) gnriicf5iet)en. See App. §§ 28 and 22. The auxiliary in this clause is best 
 omitted to avoid its repetition, the next sentence containing the same. 
 31, = after he (i.e. the enemy) had kept (juviirffjalten, App. § 30) the troops
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 73. 139 
 
 the whole day at (bfi) the great heat of the sun (comp. n. S. 76, N. 22 ; use n 
 as a connecting link, since fern, nouns ending in c in olden times used to take 
 n as an inflection for the Gen., Dat., and Ace. Sing., as well as for the PI.) in 
 the field. 
 
 Section 174. 
 
 THE BATTLE OF KASSASSIN". 
 
 II. 
 
 Ismailia\ Tuesday, August 29, 
 3 o'clock in the morning. 
 
 Scarcely had the Cavalry unsaddled, and^ horses and men begun to 
 eat, when the' sound of artillery was heard (S. 4, N. 4, man) again at 
 Kassassin, and by* the heavy and continuous roar' it was evident" that 
 this time the attack was'' in earnest. Again the wearied men saddled 
 their no less weary horses and* prepared to advance. The' sun was still 
 beating down fiercely even at that late hour, and the hot withering^" wind 
 was raising" the sand clouds so high that it was impossible to see what 
 was going ^^ on, but through the dust and haze numerous" jets of smoke 
 from the guns were visible. 
 
 The cannonade increased" in violence, and the Cavalry moved ^' away 
 to the right, the '" Artillery following them, and pressed^'' round towards 
 the flank of the enemy's Infantry. With^* the movement of such masses 
 of men and horses the dust rose over the whole scene thicker than ever, 
 and it was impossible to obtain'^ more than a general idea of what was 
 going on; while the sun set in"" a red glare over the sandy plain. 
 
 The Cavalry pushed'^' still further to the right untiP^ hidden from the 
 enemy by some low sand hills, and'^' then goaded their weary horses into 
 as fast a trot as the heavy sand and their weary condition would permit. 
 
 It was evident that it was the General's intention to repeat the tactics 
 of the previous fight, and that he meant" to get round the enemy's rear. 
 It was a striking proof of his confidence in^^ his troops that (S. 66, 
 N. 15), with'^" tired horses and night approaching, he should attempt this 
 manoeuvre against an enemy of unknown strength and with" fresh horses. 
 Against any other enemy it would have been rash'^^, but the result proved 
 that General Drury Lowe did not over-estimate the fighting powers" of 
 his men. 
 
 1, Ismailia, then the head quarters of Sir Garnet Wolseley, is 2 1 miles east of 
 Kassassin, on the Suez Canal. In the morning, movi^cn^. 2, and = and 
 
 scarcely had ; ' men', here Oieitcr ; to begin to eat, ntit bent (SJTcti an'fJiujen. 
 3, the — artillery, Slrtidericfaben. 4, = through, turd); heavy = loud. 
 
 5, JlancnfiibiMUicv, m. 6, = clear. 7, = was meant in earnest (cnijilic^, 
 
 adv.). See App § 17. 8, unb vuj^ctcn fic^ ^iim a3crviicfcn. 9, Say 
 
 'Even at (,^u) this late hour the sun sent down burning rays', and insert 
 the adv. noc^ before * burning '. 10, »cvfeiU3ciiti. 11, tvcibcn. 12, to go 
 on, vicv't5ct}cn. 13, numerous — guns, jat)trcid^e au(3 ben Jtancnen auffteiijcnbe 
 
 Oiauc^fdnlen. 14, = became more and more violent (tmntev with the compa- 
 rative form of the adj.). 15, to move away, ab'rcitcu ; to the right, na(^ 
 vec^tei. 16, = whilst the A. followed them (ilw, to agree with j?ava(lcric in 
 the fern. Sing.) 17, ' to press round ', here feitirdvtsi oor'brin^eu ; towards, 
 
 VOL. IV. " K
 
 130 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 74. 
 
 auf; 'of — infantry ' may be briefly expressed by ' of the hostile Infantry'. 
 18, With — horses, S)urd^ bie ntajfen^afte Siruvpcn'betregung. 19, ' to obtain', 
 
 here jtc^ . . . tnad)en ; of what was going on, »on bem SScttaufe beg (sjefed^t^, which 
 place after the pron. fic^. 20, in — glare, mit blenbenb rotem ©tange, which 
 
 place before the verb, which stands ? 21, vor'bvingm. 22, until — enemy, 
 big bicfctbe tea 93(i(f en beg geinbeg . . . cutjogeu tt»ar. 23, Render ' and — 
 
 permit ' freely, and say 'unb fponitcn bann i^re enm'ibeten *Pferbe jum mogtid^fi 
 f(i)nef(eii S^rabc an'. 24, gebenfen; to — rear, bem geinbc in ben OliicEcn gu fallen. 
 The Impf. of the verb gebenfcn stands, of course, after fallen, accord, to App. 
 § 19. 25, ttielc^eg tx ju feinen stru^pen ^cgte. 26, = in spite of 
 
 the tired horses and the approaching (^eran'iia^en) night. 27, = in the 
 
 possession of fresh horses. 28, uubefonuen, i. e. imprudent. 29, fighting 
 powers, ©tiirfe, f. ; ' men ', here = troops. 
 
 Section 175. 
 
 THE BATTLE OF KASSASSIN, 
 III. 
 
 Soon^ darkness came down rapidly upon us. The rattle and roar of* 
 combat on^ our left never ceased, and it was evident that the two thou- 
 sand Infantry* at Kassassin were hard pressed. Presently® the moonlight 
 streamed palely over the grey sand, but the clouds of dust obscured® the 
 advancing horsemen, who sometimes trotted, sometimes'' walked. 
 
 By about seven o'clock we had got in the rear of the firing', and' 
 wheeled in that direction, advancing '° very slowly to^^ allow the Artillery 
 to^'^ come up. We could see the flashes of^' the enemy's artillery ^/^aw 
 on the horizon like the flicker of incessant summer lightning^*. 
 
 We slowly drcw^° nearer to the scene of conflict. It was almost dark ^®, 
 but, unfortunately, we showed up^'' a black mass against the bright 
 moonlit sky and ground '*, and " the sudden rush of shell through the 
 air, followed^" by an explosion far in our rear, showed that the enemy 
 had at last discovered us. They^^ were about fifteen hundred yards ^^ 
 away, and^' we saw nine flashes, one after another, at short intervals, 
 spurt out, no ^* longer like sheet lightning, but in angry jets of flame. 
 Almost simultaneously the sky above us seemed to ^* be torn in pieces as 
 by (= through) a mighty hurricane. Shells screamed ^^ and burst ^®, and 
 shrapnel bullets " tore up the sand on either side of us. 
 
 The brigade now moved ^* to the right to ^^ disconcert their aim, and 
 the next salvo of sheU missed us. We moved quickly forward, and the 
 gunners again saw us, and the shells burst over and around. Yet, 
 strangely^", but few were hit, though it seemed as if the storm ^^ would 
 mow men and horses down by squadrons *^ 
 
 1, = Soon after (barauf) the darkness (2)unfc{, n.) of the night descended 
 (^enue'berfleigen) rapidly upon us. 2, = of the. 3, gu. 4, Snfam 
 
 tetif^cn. 5, = Now streamed the pale moonlight, etc. 6, = concealed; 
 
 horsemen, Siciterei, f. Sing. 7, jmrciten au^ im ©c^ritt ba^iitritt. 8, = enemy; 
 got = arrived. 9, itnb fd)titenften ber 9Ji(^tung gu, aug ber bag ©d)icfetx !am. 
 
 10, = advanced (»cr'n)drtgieiten) however only very slowly. 11, to allow = 
 
 to (S. 19, N. 7) give time to. 12, Inf. tjcran fommen. 13, = of the 
 
 hostile artillery. 14, = sheet lightning, 2Bettevleu^ten, n. 15, to
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 75. 131 
 
 draw near, jid) na()evn. 16, The fact of its being dark soon after seven at 
 
 the end of August is explained when we remember that there is no twilight in 
 Egypt. 17, = we formed. 18, ©vbboben, m. 19, unb bag ©aufen cincv 
 Vlo|li(i> bie !?itft bur^flicgenben ©ombc. 20, = which exploded far behind us. 
 
 21, = He (the enemy). 22, = steps, ©c^ritte ; away, ton uiiS cntferiit. 
 
 23, Arrange this sentence literally thus : and now saw we nine at (in) short 
 intervals one another (einanber) following cannon-shots (^anoncufd^uffe) spurt out 
 (^eroor'bli^cn). 24, wddji iiid)t me()v bent SfBetterleuc^ten, foubevn verjc^rcnbeu 
 
 Seucrfiiomen g(id)en ; to — pieces, ^u geitei^en. 25, faufen. 26, ph^tn . . . 
 in bet 8uft. 27, (Srauaten. 28, ab'fc^uieufcii. 29, um bent 3iele beg ^einbeg 
 an^ bcm SBege ju gctjen. 30, fonbevbarerlpetfe. 31, ber Jtugelvegen. 
 
 32, men and horses by squadrons = whole squadrons of (»on) men (2)'Jenf(^en) 
 and horses. — To mow down, (jernie'bevma^en. 
 
 Section 176. 
 
 THE BATTLE OF KASSASSIN. 
 IV. 
 
 Now ' tiny flashes, with the sharp ping of bullets, told that the enemy's 
 Infantry were also at work, whilst" a horse here and a man there dropped^ 
 in the ranks. 
 
 The battery having (S. 30, N. 4) by this time come up, the Cavalry 
 moved* to the right, in order to^ allow them to come into action, and in 
 a few seconds, after taking up their ground, our guns spoke " out their 
 answer to the enemy's fire. 
 
 The Cavalry now advanced' from the left, the^ 7lh Dragoons leading. 
 Under* cover of these the Life Guards formed for a charge, and^° by 
 word of command the Dragoons opened " right and left to allow them to 
 pass. Already Herbert Stewart, General Drury Lowe's brigade-major, 
 had passed"* down the line the word: "The Cavalry are to charge the 
 gunsl" Sir Baker Russell was in front (=at the head), and shouted: 
 " Now we have them. Charge !" 
 
 Away ^^ went the long line, disappearing " almost instantly in the dark- 
 ness and dust, and away behind them went'° the 7th Dragoons, keeping^* 
 (S. 16, N. 4) on either flank of the Guards. 
 
 We ^\ remaining in the rear, had the full benefit of the storm and shot 
 which was to greet the advancing horsemen (Oieitcrei, f.) and of whom 
 from (S. 102, N. 4) this moment we saw no more till the battle was over; 
 and ov\y (S. 109, N, 5) then we learned^* what they had done. 
 
 Led by Baker Russell, they charged ^® straight at the guns, sabring ^* 
 the gunners as they passed, and*' dashing into and cutting down the 
 flying Infantry beyond them. Russell's horse was shot under him, but 
 he seized another and kept with ** his men. 
 
 The battle was ended *^ at a stroke, and a scene of wild confusion 
 ensued ^* ; some guns were ^^ still firing, bodies ^^ of Infantry still kept up 
 a fusillade, and numerous bodies " of horses and men dotted the moon- 
 lit plain. 
 
 Being now separated altogether from the Cavalry, with'** the enemy 
 intervening between us, myself and two companions endeavoured to find 
 
 K 2
 
 132 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 76. 
 
 our '^^ way round to Kassassin. It was an adventurous ride, for several 
 shells burst near us, but before we reached the camp, the conflict was 
 at an end. 
 
 1, =At (3n) this moment (App. § 14) flashes of lightning (flcine §8U^e) and 
 the sharp ping (^naf(cn, n.) of bullets betrayed that also the hostile Infantry 
 were ( = was) engaged in the attack (beim Slngvijf beteiligt fein). 2, Place 
 
 ' here ' after ' whilst', and ' there ' after * and '. 3, ju 93oben faflen. 4, * to 
 move ', here ab'jic^en, sep. comp. irreg. v. 5, = in order to allow (gcftattcn) 
 
 the same (to agree with 'battery') to begin the combat. 6, spoke out 
 
 their answer to = answered (erwiebeni), V. tr. 7, Voi'riicfen. 8, = and 
 
 (unb jwar) the 7th Regiment of Dr. at (an) the head (@pi|e, f.). 9, = Under 
 their (beffen) cover ((Sd)u^, m.) formed the Life Guards (bie ©arbefiirafCierc) a 
 line of attack (cine Slngriff^Unie). 10, = and upon a given command. 
 
 11, = opened . . . the ranks (Std^m). 12, to pass the word, ben 93efc^t 
 
 ergef)en laffen ; down = all along, Idng^. 13, 2)ie tange Sinie fvrengte bauon. 
 
 14, = and disappeared. 15, away . . . went = folio wed. 16, to keep, 
 
 ft($ t)a(ten ; on, ju, either flank = both flanks. 17, = Since we remained 
 
 (juriicf' b(eiben) behind all, (fo) we had the full effect of the shower of shot 
 (^ugclregen, m.) 18, = heard. 19, to charge straight at the guns, 
 
 bie fcinbU(^e Slrtidcrie fogtei^ an'greifen. 20, = sabred down ; as they passed, 
 
 anf i^rem 3iige- 21, = and dashed (fpvengcn) into the ranks of the flying 
 
 Infantry behind the same, which they (fte, f. Sing, to agree with bie Oieiterei) cut 
 down (ntc'berme|,etn). 22, bei ; men = regiment. 23, = with one 
 
 stroke (Sc^tag, m.) at an end (ju (Snbe). 24, = followed. 25, = thun- 
 
 dered still. 26, cinjetnc Xeite. 27, bodies — plain = and numerous 
 
 bodies (^aufen) o/" Cavalry were still here and there upon the moonlit plain 
 visible. 28, = and the enemy stood between us. (The verb must stand 
 
 last, since also this clause is a depending one, co-ordinated to the preceding 
 clause by the conjunction 'and'.) 29, our way round, einen 5Beg 
 
 feitipaitg. 
 
 Section 177. . 
 
 THE BATTLE OF KASSASSIN. 
 V. 
 
 The Infantry there' had indeed had a hot time of it^ Hundreds of shells 
 had (S. 29, N. 3) burst in the confined-' space, and the shelter trenches^ 
 afforded but an insufficient protection. On the left of the position ^, next 
 to the Canal, were^ the Marine Artillery, then came the 46th, and next'' 
 to them the 84th ^ the' slight earthworks sweeping round again in a 
 semi-circle almost to the Canal. The Mounted '" Infantry were in front 
 under Captain Pigott, who" has received a wound, having been shot 
 through the thigh. 
 
 The Egypdans came on with great bravery, and in spite of the '^ heavy 
 fire of our men'^ were rapidly gaining ground, and would soon have 
 rushed'* into the entrenchments, when the roar of our guns on'^ their left 
 rear, followed ''' by the rush of our Cavalry, proved '^ too much for them, 
 and from (S. 102, N. 4) that moment they thought only of flight. 
 
 Our casualties are surprisingly '^ small considering '^ the fire to which 
 our men were exposed. Lieutenant Edwards, of the Mounted Infantry, 
 was'° shot in the arm, Surgeon-Major'^* Shaw, of the 46th, was'^^ killed,
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION Ijy. 133 
 
 and some ten or a dozen men, but, fortunately, the Remington bullet 
 wounds rather than kills ; the hospital was crowded '^^ with wounded men. 
 
 About 10 o'clock the Cavalry came in'^* in high spirits over their bril- 
 liant achievement. Many, of course, are missing in the darkness, but 
 will, no doubt, turn up ^® in the morning. Upon their ^'^ return from the 
 pursuit they " were unable to find the guns over which they had charged, 
 but these ^* will doubtless be discovered at sunrise. After learning from 
 them'^' the events^** of the charge, I'^ started to ride here to get off^^ my 
 despatches, — a^^ distance of twenty-four miles. This solitary ride over 
 the dismal desert by moonlight was not ^* the least exciting part of an 
 exciting day. 
 
 Late ^^ as it was, I found at (auf) the different posts the men '® busy at 
 work entrenching, and met troops also on-^'' their march to reinforce 
 those at the front. 
 
 The enemy's force'* engaged was estimated at 13,000. The Egyptians 
 fought well until our Cavalry and guns took^'' them in the rear, and, 
 had *° it not been for the gallantry of the defenders of Kassassin, would " 
 have carried the positon before our reinforcements came upon the scene. 
 
 At ■^^ the time I left, the losses were unknown, but were " supposed to 
 be about twenty killed and a hundred wounded. 
 
 As" I am writing, Sir Garnet Wolseley and*^ the entire army are march- 
 ing to the front. — The Correspondent of the London " Standard." 
 
 1, there, bortig, which is an attributive adj., to be placed before the noun 
 'Infantry'. 2, to have a hot time of it, cinen fc^weren @tant) ijahm. 
 
 3, = narrow. 4, bie ©(^anjgrdbcn. 5, = camp. 6, = stood. 
 
 7, next to them = finally. 8, Supply 'regiment '. 9, = whilst the 
 
 insignificant entrenchments (3Scr[(^anjmic5en) swept round in a semicircle almost 
 to (big ju) the canal. ' To sweep round,' here fii) ()in'fcfclancjeln, of which the 
 pron. fic^ must be placed immediately after the subject, and the verb? 
 10, bcritteti, adj. 11, = who was wounded (S. 2, N. i) and had received a 
 shot through the thigh. 12, Norn, bag leM)aftc ©c!l)ic^cn. 13, = troops; 
 
 were rapidly gaining ground = advanced rapidly (fd)uell t>ci'U''dvtgviirfen, sep. comp. 
 w. V. intr. Where must you place the verb ? and where the separable par- 
 ticle? 14, to rush into the entrenchments, in bic ©c^an^wifc bviiiijeu (str. v.). 
 15, on — rear, an if)vcv linfen S'^ufe. 16, unb bcr barauf folgcnbe un'entartcte 
 
 9lngriff unfcrcr itat)alleiie. 17, = had not terrified them (einen in <Sc^vcrfcn 
 
 jagcn). 18, = extraordinarily. 19, = if one considers (bcbcnfen), that 
 
 our troops were exposed to a really murderous fire. 20, = is wounded ; 
 
 in, an, contracted with the Dat. of the def. art. 21, ©tab^arjt. 22, was — 
 kills = and ten or a dozen (jc()n h\& JttJolf) men ( = privates, ©cmcinc) are killed, 
 but fortunately the Remington bullet (^ugcl, f.) is but (nur) rarely fatal (ift . . . 
 von tobtid^cr SBivfung). 23, = quite full of. The wounded man, bet 
 
 SBcilttunbctc. 24, = returned ; in high spirits, f)c(^i^ crfrmt. 25, to turn 
 
 up, ftd^ ivicbcr cin'ftcKcn ; ' in the morning', here morgcn friil). 26, = the ; 
 
 from their pursuit, iicn i{)ver a^cvfclyung. 27, Literally = could the Cavalry 
 
 the cannons, which they had conquered, not find again (mcbcrfinbcn). 28, =the 
 same. 29, = the horsemen (^aiMdcrif^cn). 30, = details, (Sinjcl()citcn. 
 
 31, ritt ii) nac^ (jicr ab. 32, = send off. 33, Commence a new period 
 
 here, and say : ' The distance from Kassassin to here [Ismailia] is (bctrdgt) 
 24 miles'. 34, =by no means, feinc^ircgg, adv. 35, = Notwith- 
 
 standing the late hour. 36, aWannfc^aftcn. 37, on their march, 
 
 luelc^c auf bcm aSarfd^ bcgrijfcn trarcn. - 38, Stvcitfrdftc, pi.; was = were; at
 
 134 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 77. 
 
 13,000, an 13,000 SWann. 39, = attacked. 40, tjattett bic 95cl•^eibic^er 
 
 »on ^affaffin nic^t eine fotc^e SJctpfcrfcit bcluicfen, fo, etc. 41, = the enemy 
 
 would. 42, = When I rode away. 43, = were estimated at (auf ) 
 about, etc. 44, = Whilst. 45, = with. 
 
 Section 178. 
 
 HOW THE DUKE OP WELLINGTON" WAS DECEIVED. 
 
 "I (S. 115, N. i) got famously taken in' on that occasion," said the 
 Duke of Wellington once. " The troops had ^ taken to plundering a 
 good deal. It was necessary to ' stop it, and I issued an order announc- 
 ing * that the ® first man taken in the act should be hanged upon the spot. 
 One day, just as we were sitting* down to dinner, three men' were 
 brought to the door of the tent by the provost. They had been taken 
 in * the act of plundering, and I had nothing for it ® but to command that 
 they (S. 4, N. 4, man) should be taken away and hanged in some place 
 where they might be seen by the whole column in its march next day. 
 I had a good many guests with '" me on that day, and among the rest, I 
 think, Lord Nugent. They" seemed dreadfully shocked, and could not 
 eat ^/leir dmner. I did not eat myself, but, as I told them, I could not 
 indulge my feelings'^; I must do my duty. Well^, the dinner went off 
 rather gravely ; and next morning, sure enough '*, three men in uniform 
 were seen hanging (S. 78, N. 14, B) from the branches of a tree close to 
 the high road. It was a terrible example, which produced ^® the desired 
 effect, for there was no more plundering. Some months afterwards 1 
 learned that one of my staff'* had taken counsel with Dr. Hume, and as 
 three men had (S. 29, N. 3) just died in the hospital, they had hung 
 them '^ up and let the three culprits return to their regiments." 
 
 " Were you not very angry, Duke'* ?" 
 
 " Well '*, I suppose I was at first ; but ^° as I had no wish to take the 
 poor fellows' lives and only wanted the example, and as the example had 
 the desired effect (S. 27, N. 8), my anger soon died out*^', and I confess 
 to you that "^"^ I am very glad now that the three lives were spared." — 
 Historical Anecdotes. 
 
 1, to be famously taken in, fletjorig angcfutjit ivcrben ; once, cine3 J^age^. 
 2, = had begun to plunder ; a good deal, tii(^ti9. 3, to — it = to make an 
 
 end of this nuisance, bicfem Unnjffm ein @nbe ju ma(J)en. 4, announcing 
 
 that = according to which, iponact). 5, the — act = the first man (ber erfte) 
 
 whom one would take in the act. To take a person in the act, ciiicii auf 
 frifc^er %\)Ai crtajj^jeu. 6, to sit down to dinner, fid^ ju !£if(^e fe^en. 7, Seute. 
 8, in — plundering, beitn *ptiinbem. 9, He has nothing for it, t& bleibt \{)\n 
 
 iiii^t^ anbcreS ubrig; but, alei ; in, an; might = could, Impf. Subj.; column = 
 army ; in its march, tjorbeimavfd^icrenb, adj. qualifying 'army '. 10, bet ; place 
 ' I think ' after ' and ' ; among the rest = among others. 11, = These 
 
 seemed to be very much shocked (ergriffen) at (bou) the occurrence. 12, to 
 indulge one's feelings, fetncn ©efii^len freien Sauf laffcit. 13, ®ut ; went — 
 
 gravely, ging ein wcnig ernfi^aft tjonftattcn. 14, auc^ roitflic^, which place after 
 the subject, and construe the sentence in the Active Voice with the pron. 
 man ; men = soldiers. 15, = had. There was no more talking, c^ (ourbe 
 
 nic^t met)r gcfpvo^cu. 16, = one of my stafF-officers (©tab^ofijiere) ; to take
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 78. I35 
 
 counsel in a matter with a friend, etne ©ad^c rait einem greunbc Befpre^en. 
 17, = these; culprits = condemned men (cer SBeruvtciltf, Norn. Sing.). 18, aBaren 
 (Sure (^tt).) ^ot)cit ni^t fet^r crjurnt bavfibcv ? 10, *JJun ja, anfang^ cielleic^t 
 
 war i(|'g. 20, = however (aber), since I did not wish (tooUen) the death of 
 
 the poor fellows, but (fonbern) only the example (Here follows the verb). 21, ' to 
 die out', here crfterben, insep. comp. str. v. 22, To avoid a repetition of 
 
 subordinate clauses, say : ' that I am very glad (frol)) now at (uber) the pre- 
 servation (Oiettung) of the 3 men (Scute). 
 
 Sectio7i 179. 
 
 A LETTER PROM DR. HENRY DAWSON TO' MR. JOHN 
 PORSTER, ON 2 CHARLES DICKENS'S ^ SCHOOL-LIFE. 
 
 I. 
 
 My impression is * that I was a schoolfellow of Dickens for nearly two 
 years. He left * before me, I think about fifteen years of age. The school, 
 called (S. 7, N. 3, E) the Wellington Academy, was in the Hampstead 
 Road at the north-east corner of Granby Street. The school-house was 
 afterwards taken down ® on account of the London and North-Western 
 Railway. It was considered at the time '' a very superior sort of school, 
 one of the best indeed * in that part of London ; but it was most shame- 
 fully mismanaged ®, and the boys '° made but very little progress. The 
 proprietor, Mr.. Jones, was a Welshman"; a most'^ ignorant fellow, and 
 a mere tyrant, whose chief employment was'^ to scourge the boys. Dickens 
 has ^* given a very lively account of this place in his paper entilled " Our 
 School," but it is very mythical in many respects, and'^ more espe- 
 cially in the compliment he pays in it to himself. I do not remember 
 that Dickens distinguished himself in any way'", or carried off any prizes. 
 My belief is " that he did not learn Greek or Latin there, and you will 
 remember'* there is no allusion to the classics in any 0/ his writings. He 
 was a handsome, curly-headed lad '^, full of animation and animal spirits, 
 and ^^ probably was connected with every mischievous prank in the school. 
 
 1, an. 2, fiber. 3, (S;i)arlfg ©icfen^, gebcren ben 7. ??fbr. 1812 ^u 
 
 ^5crte!moutt), gefiorben beu 9. Suni 1870 auf fcinem Sanbji^e bet \!cnbcu, begauu feine 
 fdjriftj^e(lerifd)e 2;()dtigfeit uuter bcm augeucmmeneu Dlamen 23oii, weld)er il)u f^nell 
 berubmt mad)te. (Sr begrunbete fcinen OJuf al^ cnglifdjer Jpumcrij^ bur^ bie ' Sketches 
 of London' (1836), unb namentli^ bur^ bie ' Pickwick Papers' (1837), »reld)e^ 
 unfircitig bag beliebtefte, aber au^ vnel(eid)t bag bcjle fciuer ;^af)lreid)en SPerfe ifi. ©r 
 griinbcte 1845 bie Sfitung 'Daily News', foline 1850 bie 3eitfd)rift 'Household 
 Words ', wdijt feit i860 ben Xitel ' All the year round ' fut)rt. CSr befud)te .^trcimal, 
 im 3abre 1842 unb 1868, bie 45erciuigteu (Staatcn »pu 9tcxt ?lntcrifa, ihmi wo er bac( 
 jweite aTial burc^ fciue viclbcfuc^tcu i^orlefuugeu and feinen eigcncu aBcvfcn cine rcic^e 
 (§rnte ^eimTut)rte. 93cn feinen fj^dtcrcn aBcrfen ftnb 'Oliver Twist', 'Nicholas 
 Nickelby', 'David Copperfield', ' Dombey and Son', 'Martin Chuzzlewit', 
 unb ' A Christmas Carol ' bie befanntcftcn unb bcfien. (S^ mag intcrc(Taut feiu, (jier 
 ju bcmcrfen, ba^ feit bcm ilobc beei bcrubmteu unb l)c*ii belicbten 'i>crfaiTcre (b. t). in 16 
 3at}rcn) »on feinen fficrfen 4,539,000 a3aube inrtauft ircrbcn finl). 4, = I re- 
 
 member still, that, etc. Place the advl. circumstance of time 'for — years' 
 before ' a — Dickens '. 5, Supply ' the school ' here ; before me = earlier 
 
 than I ; I think = and as I think. 6, to take down (of buildings), nie'ber; 
 
 rcipen, 7, bamalg ; 1 consider this a very superior sort of school, i4 ijalte bic^
 
 136 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 79. 
 
 fur cine ganj covjuglii^c @c^u(c. 8, one — indeed = and was indeed (au^ 
 
 unrflid^) one of the best. 9, This institution is most shamefully mis- 
 
 managed, bicfe Sluftalt ittivb flanj au^evorbentti* fclttcc^t verwaltet. 10, boys = 
 
 school-boys or pupils, ^ijhkx ; to make little progress, geringe gortfd^vitte ntac^en. 
 11, aSadifcr. 12, most = highly, f)6^fi ; ' fellow ', here = man ; ' mere ', 
 
 here = real, trat)r. 13, bavin befianb (comp. S. 87, N. 6) ; to scourge = to 
 
 chastise, jiic^tigm. 14, Insert 'to us' after the auxiliary ; of, uUx; place = 
 institution ; ' paper ', here ©c^rift, f. Place ' in — School ' after * to us '. 
 
 15, unb 5»ar befonberg in Sejug auf bie ©c^mei^cUicn, bie er fic^ felbft bavin i^oKt. 
 
 16, in any way = ever, je ; to carry off prizes, ©c^ulpveife ev()alten. Use the verbs 
 in the Pluperfect Subjunctive, accord, to App. § 33; the auxiliary, however, 
 must be used but once, and this at the very end. 17, = I believe ; not 
 . . . or = neither . . . nor. 18, = and you know. Is there no allusion to 
 the classics ? hq\t\}t cv fic^ nic auf bie flaffifc^e 8ittevatuv ? 19, = He was a 
 handsome boy with curly hair. Full — spirits = velter Seben unb Scbcngfvaft. 
 20, = who; to be connected with an action, bet einer .'paublung beteiligt fein; 
 a mischievous prank, eiu mutandigev ^offenfivetc^. 
 
 Section 180. 
 
 A LETTER FROM DR. HENRY DANSON TO MR. JOHN 
 EORSTER, ON CHARLES DICKENS'S SCHOOL-LIFE. 
 
 I do not think (S. 64, N. 11) he^ came in for any of Mr. Jones's 
 scourging propensity ; in fact, together with myself, he was only a day- 
 pupil, and 2 with these there was a wholesome fear of tales being carried 
 home to the parents. His personal appearance at that time ' is vividly 
 brought home to me in the portrait of him taken a few years later by 
 Mr. Lawrence. He resided (S. 116, N. 17) with* his friends, in a very 
 small house in a street leading out of Seymour Street, north of Mr. 
 Judkin's chapel. 
 
 Depend on it, he was quite a self-made man, and his wonderful know- 
 ledge and command (aBe^errfdjung, f.) of the English language must " 
 have been acquired by long and patient study after leaving his last 
 school. 
 
 I have no recollection of the boy you name ". Dickens's chief asso- 
 ciates were, I think ^ Tobin, Mr. Thomas, Bray, and myself. The first 
 named ^ was his chief ally, and his acquaintance with him appears to 
 have continued many '° years afterwards. About that time " the Penny 
 and Saturday magazines (S. 71, N. 2) were published weekly, and were 
 greedily read by (S. 106, N. 23) us. We kept bees, white mice, and 
 other living things, clandestinely '^ in our desks, and the mechanical 
 arts were a good deal cultivated, in " the shape of coach-building, and 
 making pumps and boats, the motive power of which was the white 
 mice. 
 
 I think at that time Dickens took to writing " small tales, and we had 
 a sort ^club for^^ lending and circulating them. Dickens was also very 
 strong " in using a sort of lingo, which made us " quite unintelligible to 
 bystanders.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION l8o. I37 
 
 1, =that he had to suffer from the scourging propensity (^riiijetmanie, f.) of 
 his teacher, for, like myself, etc. 2, uub bicfeii gcgem'iber war ftct^ ju bcfiivc^tcn, 
 bdf fie bei ben ©Item ju ^aufe au3 ber @d)ute plaubcrn wiivbcu. 3, Seiti 
 
 bamatii^cg 9lu^fcf)en ; is vividly brought home to me = is again vividly brought 
 (ful^ren) before my (S.43,N. 9, ^ and B) eyes; in— Lawrence (Liter,) = ' through 
 the some years later by (lion) Mr. L. painted picture of him', which place 
 immediately after the copula (unrb) and the dative of the personal pronoun 
 indicating the possessor. 4, bei ; in — Street = in a side-street (comp. n. 
 
 5. 76, N. 22, B [n]), not far from Seymour Street. 5, must — acquired = 
 he must have acquired. To acquire, fic^ evwerbeii, insep. comp. str. v. refl. ; 
 by, buvdi ; 'long', here lanc^ialjvttj ; after — school = after his school-time. 
 
 6, = 1 cannot remember (fid) ciiier (Bcid^i erimiern) the boy whose name you 
 mention (au'fii()vcn). 7, I^auptfcic^lic^, adj. 8, Inverted constr. 
 
 9, Srfterer; render 'chief ally' by a comp. n., and turn 'chief by ^aupt. 
 
 10, Insert the adv. noc^ before ' many '; to continue, fcrt'baiieni. 11, Urn 
 biefe 3eit' 12, to keep clandestinely, luvficcf t ftalten ; things = creatures; 
 a — cultivated, cifrig gcubt. 13, in — mice = for we made coaches, pumps 
 and boats, which then were set in motion by the white mice. 14, took to 
 writing = began to write. 15, for — them. Liter. = among (untev) the members 
 of which the same (to agree with 'tales') circulated (jivfutifrcu). 16, =great; 
 in — lingo, im ®fbrauc^ ciner geunffeii faubcni\ilfc^cii @e()cim)>iacl)e. 17, made 
 us = was; to bystanders = to the uninitiated, beii Uiuiiigcweiljtcn. 
 
 Section 181. 
 
 A LETTER PROM DR. HENRY DANSON TO MR. JOHN 
 PORSTER, ON CHARLES DICKENSS SCHOOL-LIFE. 
 
 III. 
 
 We were very strong, too, in theatricals ^ We mounted'^ small 
 theatres, and got up very gorgeous scenery to ' illustrate " The Miller 
 and his Men," and other pieces. I remember the * present Mr. Beverley, 
 the scene painter, assisted us in this (S. 4, N. 5). Dickens was always 
 the leader "* at these plays, which were occasionally presented with much 
 solemnity before an audience® of boys, and in the presence of the 
 ushers. My brother, assisted by Dickens, got up'' " The Miller and his 
 Men" in a very gorgeous form. Master* Beverley constructed the mill 
 for us, in such a way ^ that it could tumble to pieces with the assistance 
 of crackers. At one representation, the fireworks in the last scene, ending 
 with the destruction of the mill, were so very real ^^ that the police inter- 
 fered, and knocked violently at the door. Dickens's after-taste for 
 theatricals might have had '^ its origin in these small affairs. 
 
 I quite '2 remember Dickens " one day heading us in Drummond 
 Street in pretending to be poor boys, and asking the passers-by for 
 charity, especially old ladies, one of whom told " us she had no money 
 for beggar-boys. 
 
 On these adventures, and especially when the old ladies were quite 
 staggered ^'^ by the impudence of the demand, Dickens would explode 
 with laughter and then take to his heels. 
 
 I met him one Sunday morning shortly after he had left the school, 
 and " we very piously attended the morning service at Seymour Street
 
 138 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 181. 
 
 chapel. I am sorry to say^'^ Master" Dickens did not attend in the slightest 
 degree to the service, but (S. 6, N. 10) incited me to laughter by declaring 
 (S. Ill, N. 6) his dinner was ready, and the potatoes would be spoiled'*. 
 In fact, he behaved in such a manner '^^ that it was lucky for us we were not 
 ejected from the chapel. — From J. Forster's " Life of Charles Dickens." 
 
 1, in tticatralif^cu Sluffutiruiifleu. 2, = made ; to get up, cevfertigen. 
 
 3, Say * to illustrate (in Scene fc^e n) the piece ', etc. Men, Seute. 4, = that 
 the ; scene painter, Seforationgmaler, which is best placed before the name. 
 5, bet !£onangcber ; at, bei. 6, = assembly; boys = pupils; ushers = assistant 
 
 masters, Unterlet)rer. 7, to get up, in ©cene fe^en, of which the part ' in 
 
 ©cene ' is to be treated like the separable particle of a comp. sep. verb. Place 
 the verb immediately after ' brother ', and supply * the piece ' before ' The — 
 Men'; In — form = very (ganj) gorgeously. 8, = The young. 9, auf 
 
 fcl(J)e ffieife ; with the assistance, ntit J&ulfe. 10, reatifiifd) ; to interfere, fic^ 
 
 l^incinmifc^cn. 11, might have had = perhaps had. Commence the sentence 
 with * Perhaps '. 'After-taste ', aSovliebc, f. ; affairs = performances, gSevfteUungcn. 
 12, noc^ ganj bentti^. 13, =that Dickens led (an'leiten) us one day in 
 
 Drummond Street to pretend to be (ft^ gebavben . . . aU) poor boys and to ask 
 the passers-by for (urn) ahns (milbe @abcn). 14, = observed (bemcrfen). 
 
 15, ' to be quite staggered ', here ganj tierbliifft ba'ilebcn ; by — demand = through 
 the impudent demand ; to explode with laughter, oor \!ad^cn faji berficn ; to take 
 to one's heels, f^ncU ba»on laufen ; and — heels = and ran then quickly away. 
 
 16, =and we went very (ganj^) piously to church in Seymour St., to attend the 
 morning service (urn bent SKorgcngotte^bienfle beijutt5of)nen). 17, 3c^ ntup leiber 
 befennen. 18, = that the young D. not paid the least attention to the 
 service. To pay attention to a thing, ciner @a^e 3lufmerffamfeit nsibmcn. 
 19, = would get cold. 20, = He behaved really so. That — us = that 
 we must (Impf.) esteem (f^d^en) ourselves lucky, not to be ejected from 
 church. — He was ejected from church, er luurbe aM bev J?ir(^e geworfcn. 
 
 Section 182. 
 
 SIR JOSEPH PAXTON». 
 
 Sir Joseph Paxton was acting as gardener to^ the Duke of Devonshire 
 when the Committee of the Exhibition of 1851 advertised for plans of a 
 building. The architects and engineers seem to have been very much at 
 fault ' when Paxton submitted his design, and its novelty and remarkable 
 suitability for the purposes intended, at once secured its adoption *. The 
 first sketch was made upon a piece of blotting-paper in the rooms of the 
 Midland Railway Company ^ at Derby ; and the first rough * sketch indi- 
 cated ^ the principal features of the building as accurately as the most 
 finished drawings which were afterwards prepared. The great' idea of 
 the Crystal Palace was as palpable * on the blotting-paper as if it had 
 been set forth in all the glory of water-colour and gold-framing '". 
 
 Was it a sudden idea, — an inspiration of genius ", — flashing upon the 
 mind of one ^^ who, though no architect, must at least '* have been some- 
 thing Hke a poet? — Not at all". The architect of the Crystal Palace was 
 simply a man who cultivated opportunities ", — a laborious, painstaking '* 
 man, whose life had been a life of labour, of diligent self-improvement, of 
 assiduous cuUivation of knowledge '^ As ^* Sir Joseph Paxton himself 
 has shown, in a lecture before the Society of Arts, the idea was slowly and
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 82. I39 
 
 patiently elaborated by experiments extending over many years ''. The 
 Exhibition of 1851 merely afforded him //le opportunity of putting 
 forward his idea '^'^ — the right thing at the right time — and the result was 
 what we have seen. — S. Smiles, " Self-Help." 
 
 1, Sofc^.i'^ barton, Qth. ben 3. 9lug. 1803, gcjl. ben 8. Sunt 1865, ft)urbc guna($ft 
 .^unftgdrtncc beim 'i&erjog »on !Dettonf()ire, jcidbncte jtd) jeboc^ ba(b bur^ fcine genialen 
 (S^ovfut'flfn fo fft|r auS, ba^ ber -iperjog i^n jum ©artenbireftor unb aSenratter fciiier 
 gro^attigcn SScft^itng in @^atgtt»ortt) ernannte. 2)ie h>unbet»o((cn ©artenaulagen unb 
 (S)cnjdc^gt)dufer bafclbft legen noc^ l^eute Scugni^ ah Son fciner ©enialitdt. S)a5 gro^e 
 @eutdcl)^(>ntg, ircl(^eg au& @ifen unb ©lag crbaut unb 300 gu§ tang unb 140 gu^ bccit ifi, 
 bicnte i^m frdtcr a[6 ©runblagcbcei con ifjm eingcvcid)tcn Sntwuvfc^ fuv bag 9luiJfte([ung3i 
 gebdube t»on 1 85 1 im Jg>t)be $arf ju Scnbon unb bed fpdter »on i^m in ©ijben^am crric^teten 
 .(tr\)jialpatafleg. ©cine SBerbienfie um bic grci§e aBeltinbuflricauSjicIlung oon 1851 njurben 
 vcn ber Jlonigin baburcf^ anerfaunt, ba| fie if)m bie {Kittetlniirbe Bevtie^. ©ii Sofep:^ 
 ^arton wuvbe im Sa^re 1854 jum ^artamcnteimitglicbe fiit (Socentri) gcwd^tt unb ^at 
 ft(^ um bic Saufunjl unb bag (Sifeubat)ntt)cfen manege a^erbienjle crworben. (Sr ifi aud) 
 bcv a3crfaffer vielcc 3eitfc^riftcn unb SBcrfe ubcr bic ©artcnfunft. 2, to act as 
 
 gardener to a person, bei cinem alg ^unftgdvtncc angejtcHt fcin ; advertised — 
 building, offentltci^ jur (Sinfcnbung von *)3(dnen fiir cin Stugftctlungggebdube aufforberte. 
 1 propose to commence the period with the subordinate clause ' when — 
 building '. 3, to be very much at fault, in gvc^er ffierlegcnfjcit fcin ; to submit 
 a design (of a building), cincn (Sntlinnf ein'ici(^cn. 4, and — adoption = and 
 
 as the same (agreeing with (Snticuvf) was quite new and remarkably suitable 
 to its purpose (jivccfentfprc(^cnb), it was at once accepted. 5, in — com- 
 
 pany = in the waiting-rooms of the railway station. 6, = hasty, fiuc^tig. 
 
 7, an'bcutcn. 8, = grand, grc^attig. 9, flat bargeficKt, p. p. 10, as — 
 
 framing = as if one had embellished (aus'fd^miicfca) it with beautiful water- 
 colours and gold framing. 11, an — genius = the inspiration of a genius 
 (©enie, n., pronounced as in French). 12, flashing — • one = which suddenly 
 (auf einmal) filled the mind of a man. 13, Insert the adv. boc^ before ' at 
 least' (minbcf^cnS) ; something like = more or less. 14, @anj unb gar ni^t ! 
 15, to cultivate opportunities, ©elegcn^eitcn 5U bcuu^cn unjfen. 16, fivcbfam ; 
 of = full of, ttcUer. 17, of — knowledge, unb unticrbrojfenen (Stvcbeng nad^ J?ennt-- 
 niffen. 18, = Like, wit ; has shown = declared ; in — Arts, in ctncm l^cr bcm 
 .tunftucreine gc()altcncn 33ortragc, which place immediately after the subject. 
 19, 'by — years' may be briefly rendered by burc^ langid(}iige 93erfuct)e or 
 ©rpcrimente, which place after 'idea'; slowly = gradually ; patiently, bc^arvlic^ ; 
 to elaborate, auS'arbcitcu. 20, of — idea = to bring his idea before (uov) 
 the public (£)ffcntli(^feit, f.) ; the right thing, bag 9Jec^tc ; at, ju, contracted with 
 the def. art. 
 
 Section 183. 
 
 REBECCA DESCRIBES THE SIEGE OF TORQUIIiSTOITE 
 (App. § 5) TO THE WOUNDED IVANHOE '. 
 
 I. 
 
 "And I must lie here like a bed-ridden^ monk," exclaimed Ivanhoe, 
 " while the game ' that gives me ■* freedom or death is played out by the 
 hand of o\kiQX%\ Look from the window* once again, kind maiden, but 
 beware that you are not marked by the archers *. Look out once more, 
 and tell me if '^ they yet advance * to the storm." 
 
 With patient* courage, strengthened by the interval which she had 
 employed in mental devotion '°, Rebecca again took post " at the lattice,
 
 140 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 83. 
 
 sheltering herself ^'^j however, by means of a large and ancient shield so as 
 not to be visible from beneath ^*. 
 
 " What dost thou see, Rebecca ? " again demanded the wounded 
 knight. 
 
 " Nothing but the " cloud of arrows flying so thick as to dazzle mine 
 eyes ^^ and to hide the bowmen who shoot them." 
 
 " That cannot endure ", " said Ivanhoe ; " if they press not right on " 
 to carry the castle by pure force of arms (S. 27, N. 8), the archery may^^ 
 avail but little against stone walls and bulwarks. Look for ^^ the Black 
 Knight, fair Rebecca, and see how he bears himself^"; for as the leader 
 IS, so will his followers be ^\" 
 
 " I see him not," said Rebecca. 
 
 " Foul craven ^'^ ! " exclaimed Ivanhoe ; " does he blench ^^ from the 
 helm when the wind blows highest ^* ? " 
 
 1, Ivanhoe, a novel by Sir Walter Scott, is the most brilliant and splendid 
 of romances in the English language, Rebecca, the Jewess, was Scott's 
 favourite character. The Scene is laid in England in the reign of Richard I., 
 who assumes the name of the 'Black Knight' in this story, and we are introduced 
 to Robin Hood in Sherwood Forest, banquets in Saxon halls, tournaments, and all 
 the pomp of ancient chivalry. Sir Wilfred Ivanhoe is the favourite of Richard I. 
 and disinherited son of the Saxon Cedric of Rotherwood. Having distinguished 
 himself as a crusader, he returns to England and, disguised as a palmer, goes to 
 Rotherwood, where he meets Rowena, his father's ward, with whom he is in love ; 
 but, through his separation from his true love, we see him more as the friend of 
 Rebecca and her father, Isaac of York, to both of whom he shows repeated acts 
 of kindness, and completely wins the affections of the beautiful Jewess, who, by 
 her gentle, meek, yet noble and high-toned disposition, quite throws into the 
 shade her more successful rival Rowena. In the grand tournament at Ashby 
 Ivanhoe appears as the ' Disinherited Knight ', and overthrows all comers. 
 He is, however, wounded, and carried from the crowded lists by Rebecca's 
 servants. After having attended to his wounds, Rebecca and her father are 
 about to transport their friend in a litter to Doncaster, when they are surprised 
 by a number of armed men, headed by the Templar Brian de Bois-Guilbert, 
 who take them prisoners and bring them, along with Cedric and Rowena, who 
 likewise have been made captives, to Torquilstone, the Castle of Front-de- 
 Boeuf, Ivanhoe's enemy. During their imprisonment the castle is besieged by 
 the Black Knight, who, in his adventurous spirit, having joined a band of 
 yeomen and outlaws, demands the deliverance of the prisoners. The castle 
 falls into the hands of the besiegers, Front-de-Boeuf perishing in the flames of 
 the burning castle; King Richard pleads for Ivanhoe to Cedric, reconciles the 
 father to his son, and the young knight marries Rowena, 2, bettldgcrig. 
 
 3, = combat. 4, Insert ' either ' here; gives = brings; played out = is 
 
 fought out ; by, »on. 5, to look from the window, pm gcniier I)inau6'f«^cn. 
 
 Use the 2nd pers. sing, when Ivanhoe addresses Rebecca. 6, that — 
 
 archers = that ( = in order that, bailtit) the archers way not notice thee. 
 7, ob. 8, f)cran'rucfen. 9, unccrbroffcn. 10, unb iuxi) bie con xi}x 
 
 jur jiiKen Slubac^t bcnu^te ^JJaufe qcftarft. 11, took post = placed herself; at, 
 
 an. 12, fic^ »erberc(en, insep. comp. str. v. refl.; say ' sheltered herself how- 
 
 ever;' by means of = behind. 13, as — beneath = that she could not be 
 
 seen from beneath (unten). 14, =a; flying so thick = which fly in such 
 
 masses (use the Sing.) through the air ; * to fly through ', here burd^ftie'gen, 
 insep. comp. str. v. 15, as — eyes = that they dazzle my eyes : and to 
 
 hide = and conceal from my eyes (5Blicf, m.) ; 'to shoot', here ab'fc^ie^en.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 83. 141 
 
 16, tangc fo fcrtbaucrn. 17, to press right on, fc^nctt ttor'brinc^en ; to = and; 
 
 to carry a fortress by pure force of arms, eine ^cj^ung but^ fflaffengcttalt eiu'nel)^ 
 men. 18, = will ; avail, nu^cn ; but = only ; bulwarks, ^i^cfefiiguitgcn. 
 
 19, fitd&en. 20, ' to bear oneself, here jtdE) fatten, str, v. refl. 21, fo 
 
 bie ®efu()rten. 22, aSertuc^ter gcigling ! 23, =to give way, j^iirucf; 
 
 tviiijttt, sep. comp. str. v. ; helm = rudder, ©teitcmtber, n. 24, highest = 
 
 strongest. The relative superlative of adverbs is formed by placing am 
 before the superlative of the adjective, and giving it the dative termination 
 Cit, like the predicative form of adjectives. Comp. S. 120, N. 14. 
 
 Sec f ton 184. 
 
 REBECCA DESCRIBES THE SIEGE OF TORQUILSTOITE TO 
 
 THE WOUNDED IVANHOE. 
 
 II. 
 
 " He blenches not ! he blenches not !" said Rebecca, "I see him now; 
 he leads a body of men ^ close under the outer barrier^ of the barbican. 
 They pull down the piles and palisades ; they hew down the barriers 
 with axes. — His high black plume floats abroad over the throng ^, like a 
 raven over the field of the slain *. — They have made a breach in the 
 barriers — they rush in — they are thrust back ! Front-de-Bceuf heads the 
 defenders ; I see his gigantic form above the press ^ They throng " 
 again to (S. 72, N. 4) the breach, and the pass is disputed hand to hand 
 and man to man''. God of Jacob! it is the meeting of two fierce tides — 
 the conflict of two oceans moved by adverse winds * ! " 
 
 She turned her head from the lattice, as if (S. 27, N. 7) unable longer 
 to endure a sight so terrible (S. 128, N. 11). 
 
 " Look forth again, Rebecca," said Ivanhoe, mistaking ^ the cause of 
 her retiring; "the archery must in some degree '° have ceased, since they 
 are now fighting hand to hand. — Look again, there is " now less danger." 
 
 Rebecca again looked forth, and almost immediately exclaimed : 
 " Help, O prophets of the law ! Front-de-Boeuf and the Black Knight 
 fight hand to hand on ^^ the breach, amid " the roar of their followers ", 
 who watch ^'^ the progress of the strife. — Heaven strike'^ (App. § 34) 
 wM the cause ((Sacl;e, f.) of the oppressed and the captive ! " 
 
 She then " uttered a loud shriek, and exclaimed : " He is down ^^ ! — 
 He is down!" 
 
 1, eine ©c^ar .ftdmpfer. 2, 'barrier' may here be rendered by SScfe^ 
 
 fiigungen, Sc^an^vf^if)!?, or aSerf^an^mgen. Every Gothic castle and city had, 
 beyond the outer walls, a fortification composed of palisades, called the 
 barriers, which were often the scene of severe skirmishes, as these had neces- 
 sarily to be carried before the walls themselves could be approached. The 
 'barbacan' or ^ barbican^ was the outer wall of an ancient castle or town, 
 and may be rendered by * Sivingmaucr, f.' 3, flattevt l)cc^ uber ber a)icnge in bet 
 8uft nm^cr. 4, = battle-field. 5, ©ebvdnge, n. 6, to throng = 
 
 to press forward, |id^ lunlvdrti^ bvdngcn, sep. comp. w. v. refl. 7, and — man = 
 they fight for (um) the pass (!^urctgang, m.) and struggle (fdntvfcn) man against 
 man. 8. it — winds = it is like the meeting (?lncinvintcv|tcpcn) of two fierce 
 
 tides (Stnvmflnt, f.), like the conflict (3ufamnicnfiicficn, n.) of two oceans 
 (2BcUmeer, n.) which are moved (fcrt'trciben, sep. comp. str. v.) by adverse 
 (entgegengcfc^t) winds. 9, unvic^tig beuten. Construe accord, to S. 16, N. 4 ;
 
 142 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 184. 
 
 of her retiring = of this movement. 10, in some degree = almost. 
 
 11, there is, eg i|i . . . »ovl)auben. Comp. S, 104, N. 19. 12, »or. 
 
 13, n?d()ienb, with Gen. 14, Sln^angcr. 15, tnit Stufmerffamfeit 
 
 cerfotgen. 16, = defend, v. tr. 17, = hereupon, which place first. 
 
 To utter a shriek, eincn @(^vci ouSjloien. 18, = fallen. 
 
 Section 185. 
 
 REBECCA DESCRIBES THE SIEGE OP TORQUHiSTOITE TO 
 THE WOUJSDED IVANHOE. 
 III. 
 
 "Who is down?" cried Ivanhoe; "for^ our dear Lady's sake, tell me 
 who has fallen?" 
 
 " The Black Knight," answered Rebecca faintly "^ ; then instantly again 
 shouted with joyful eagerness': "But* no — but no! — the name of the 
 Lord of hosts be blessed^! — he is on foot' again, and fights as if there 
 were twenty men's strength in his single arm '. — His sword is broken — 
 he snatches* an axe from a yeoman— he presses* Front-de-Boeuf with 
 blow on blow. — The giant stoops and totters like an oak under the steel 
 of the woodman ^** — he falls — he falls !" 
 
 "Front-de-BcEuf ?" exclaimed Ivanhoe. 
 
 "Front-de-Boeuf!" answered the Jewess; "his men" rush to the 
 rescue ^^, headed (S. 102, N. 3) by (t>on) the haughty Templar ^^ — their 
 united force compels the champion ^* to pause. — They drag Front-de- 
 Boeuf within the walls 'V 
 
 "The assailants have won^* the barriers, have they not?" said 
 Ivanhoe. 
 
 "They have — they have"!" exclaimed Rebecca — "and they press'® 
 the besieged hard upon the outer wall; some plant ladders'", some swarm 
 like bees (S. 3, N. 2) and endeavour to ascend upon the shoulders of 
 each other ^" — down go -^ stones, beams, and trunks of trees upon their 
 heads, and as fast as they bear the wounded to the rear ^^, fresh men "^^ 
 supply their places in the assault. — Great God, hast thou given men thine 
 own imagers that (S. 183, N. 6) it should be thus cruelly defaced '^^ by^^ 
 the hands of their brethren?" 
 
 1, = for the sake of (urn . . . nuHcn) the holy Virgin. 2, nttt fc^irad^cr 
 
 <Stimmc. 3, then — eagerness = but cried immediately (gtei^ barauf) with 
 
 joyful surprise. 4, !I)oc^. 5, gcpricfen. 6, to be on foot, auf 
 
 ben ^Beiiien fein. 7, as — arm = as if (at^ cb) his arm possessed (Impf. Subj. 
 
 App. 33) the strength of 20 men. 8, to snatch a thing from a person, 
 
 cinem etwa^ entvei'peii, insep. comp. str. v. tr. ; a yeoman, ein ^reifviiTe, m- Gomp. 
 App. § 5 ; * axe ', here = battle-axe, ©tvcitart, f. 9, ' to press ', here ttjeitct 
 
 jurucf bvdngen, sep. comp. w. v. tr. ; with blow on blow, mit jebem ©d)(age. 
 10, = wood-cutter. 11, Seiite. 12, He rushed to my rescue, et eilte 
 
 mir i\\ -^utfe. 13, 2)er !EempeU)err »ar Svian be Soiei;®uilbert. Comp. S. 183, 
 N. I. 14, =hero; to pause = to stop fighting, mit bem 5ed}ten iti'nep^atten. 
 
 15, ' within the walls ' may be briefly rendered by ()inein. 16, = taken, 
 
 ein'nc^men, sep. comp. irreg. v. tr. ; turn 'barriers' by SScrfc^anjungen ; have 
 they not? nic^t wa^r? 17, 3a — ja ! 18, here bebrdugen ; hard, fjeftig; 
 
 upon, auf, with Dat. 19, to plant ladders, Seitern on bie SWauer ^ellen.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 185. 143 
 
 20, = of the others. 21, down go, c3 trerben . . . :^ciiuebevgctoorfen. Comp. S. 
 104, N. 19. 22, and — rear = and as soon as (fo trie) the wounded are carried 
 away (^intteg'tragcn). Comp. S. 2, N. i. 23, = other combatants (©tvciter). 
 He suppUed my place in the assault of the castle, cr naf)m ntcinc ©telle bci bcr 
 (Srfiiirmung be3 ©(^toffeg trieber cin. 24, Say * hast thou created men (S. 134, 
 N. 9) after thy own image (Silb, n.)'. 25, entjietleii, insep. comp. w. v. ; 
 
 Use the Pres. Subj. of the Passive voice, and comp. App. §§29 and 35. 26, by 
 = through, tnx^ ; the hands = the hand. 
 
 Section 186. 
 
 REBECCA DESCRIBES THE SIEGE OF TORQUILSTO]SrE TO 
 THE WOUNDED IVANHOE. 
 IV. 
 
 "Think not of that (S. 4, N. 5, B)," said Ivanhoe; " this is^ no time 
 for such thoughts. Who yield? Who push their way '^ ? " 
 
 " The ladders are thrown down," repHed Rebecca shuddering ; " the 
 soldiers lie grovelling * under them like crushed reptiles. The besieged 
 have the better *." 
 
 " Saint George, strike ' for us ! " exclaimed the Knight ; " do the false 
 yeomen give way*?" 
 
 " No !" exclaimed Rebecca, " they bear' themselves right yeomanly — 
 the Black Knight approaches the postern with his huge axe — the thun- 
 dering blows which he deals * you may '■* hear them above all the din ^° and 
 shouts of the battle. — Stones and beams are hailed down '^ on the bold 
 champion — he regards them no more than if they were ^^ thistle-down^^ or 
 feathers!" 
 
 " By Saint George," said Ivanhoe, raising (S. 1 1 1, N. 6) himself joyfully 
 on his couch, "methought^* there was (S. 82, N. 7, and App. § 33) but 
 one man in England that**^ might do such a deed!" 
 
 " The postern gate shakes ^V' continued Rebecca ; " it crashes — it is 
 splintered by'' his blows — they rush in — the outwork is won^^ — O God, 
 they hurl the defenders from the battlements — they throw them into the 
 moat. — O men, if ye " be indeed men, spare them that can resist no 
 longer ! " 
 
 " The bridge — the bridge which communicates with the castle — have 
 they won ^° that pass ? " exclaimed Ivanhoe. 
 
 "No," replied Rebecca, "the Templar has destroyed the plank on 
 which they crossed^' — few^'^ of the defenders escaped with him into the 
 castle — the shrieks and cries'^' which you hear tell the fate of the 
 others. — Alas ! I see it is still more difficult to look upon '^* victory 
 (S. 3, N. 2) than upon battle." — Sir Walter Scott, " Ivanhoe." 
 
 1, = we have ; for, ju. 2, to push one's way, vorli'dvt^ briiigen. 3, auf 
 
 bent SSaucfte. 4, to have the better, bic Dbcr[)aub l)aben. 5, = fight. 
 
 6, juriicf»eid)cn. 7, ' to bear oneself, here ftc^ Ijalten ; right yeomanly = 
 
 like true (ed)t) yeomen. 8, to deal blows, ©tveic^e fuljren. 9, =can; 
 
 See S. 92, N. 5, and App. § 14 ; above, iibec . . . I)iiiau3. 10, dietofc, n. 
 
 11, = thrown down. 12, than — were = than he would regard (beacf)tcn). 
 
 13, $Dijietoc(le. 14, =1 thought ; see S. 64, N. 11 ; but = only. 15, bet
 
 144 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 86. 
 
 etner foremen Stjat fdtjtg trarc ! 16, mdtln. 17, tton, 18, = taken, 
 
 cin'ne()mcn, sep. comp, irreg. v. tr. 19, it)r ; to spare a man, cine^ 2)?cn[d^en fc^onen ; 
 render ' them ' by the Gen. of the demonstr. pron. ; that — longer = who can 
 defend themselves no longer. 20, crfdmpft; that pass, biefcn ©ur^gang. 
 21, to cross on a plank, uber cine ^pianfe f^iciten. 22, =only few ; escaped = 
 have escaped (cntfotn'men, insep. comp. irreg. v., S. 29, N. 3). 23, bag iaute 
 
 (S^vcicuunb ^lagcn; you = thou; tell, oeadt. 24, 'to look upon a 
 
 thing ', here etwaS mit an'fe^cn, v. tr. 
 
 Section 187. 
 
 THE FAVOURITE HARES K 
 I. 
 
 In the year 1774, being (S. 55, N. i) much indisposed both in mind 
 and body -, incapable of diverting myself either ^ with company or books, 
 and yet in a condition * that made some diversion necessary ^ I was glad 
 of anything that would engage my attention ®, without fatiguing it. 
 
 The children of a neighbour of mine had a leveret given them for a 
 play-thing "^ ; it was at that time about three months old. Understanding 
 better how to tease the poor creature than to feed it, and soon becoming 
 weary of their charge ^ they readily consented * that their father, who 
 saw it pining^" and growing leaner every day, should offer" it to my 
 acceptance. I was willing enough to take the prisoner under my pro- 
 tection, perceiving that (S. 66, N. 15), in the management ^^ of such an 
 animal, and in the attempt to tame it, I should find just that sort of 
 employment which my case required ". It was soon known among the 
 neighbours that I was pleased " with the present, and the consequence 
 of it was, that'^ in a short time I had as many leverets offered to 
 me as would have stocked a paddock". I undertook the care" of 
 three, which it is necessary that I should here distinguish by the names I 
 gave them ^^ : Puss, Tiny, and Bess. Notwithstanding the two feminine 
 appellatives, I must inform '' you they were all males. 
 
 1, 2)ie in biefcv unb ben brci barauf folgcnbcn Slbfc^nitten gegetiene tntercffantc @rjdf|; 
 lung \\i ben S^riftcn beg ttjcf)lbefannten englifc^en 2)ic^tevg unb @d)viftjle(lerg ffiilliam 
 (Sowver entnommcn, treldjev am 26. 9({o»entber 1731 im ^farrf)aufe tton @reat Seiff)anipj 
 fteab iu ^ertfovbfljire geboren truvbe unb ant 25. Stjjvil 1780 ftarb. ©eine befie ©c^opfung 
 iji unftteitig bie eon i^m mit bcm 3;itet : ' The Task ' benannte S)i^tung, butd^ wetc^e 
 er fcinen Oluf atg 2)iditer begvunbetc, unb tt>et($e von feinem feincr fpdtercn 2Berfc uber^ 
 troffen wurbe. 2, to be much indisposed both in mind and body, folvc^t 
 
 geiftigalg auc^ forijevtic^ i^enuttet fein. 3, incapable — either = and could 
 
 neither divert myself (ft^ jerf^vcucn) ; with, bur^, which repeat before books ; 
 or = nor. 4, mi^ aber babei fo befanb. 5, that — necessary = that 
 
 some diversion was necessary. 6, I shall be glad of anything that will 
 
 engage my attention, id) »erbe gcvn af(eg ergveifen, irag meine Slufmerffamfeit fefiein 
 tann. 7, gum ©pielcn, which place after the auxiliary 'had^; given them, 
 
 gefd)enft cr^alten. 8, to become weary of one's charge, feineS ©d^ii^tingg 
 
 iiberbriifiig werben. 0, I readily consented, id^ ^atte nic^tg bagcgen. 10, fi(!^ 
 ab'jel)ven. 11, should offer = offered it. We offered it to his acceptance, 
 
 iuii- boten c3 i^m sum ©efc^en! an. 12, = treatment. 13, I hope he wil'
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 8/. 1 45 
 
 find just that sort of employment which his case requires, tc^ '^cffe, cr h?irb ^cvabe 
 bie fur feincn Buftanb ^jaJTeubc SBcf^dftiguiig finben. 14, My father will be 
 
 greatly pleased with the picture, bag SilD »ivb ntcincm SSatcr gro^c ^reubc macf)cn. 
 15, Read App. § 21. In order to avoid a repetition of the conjunction baf, 
 it is advisable to construe the clause * that — • me' = there were {t6 irurben, S. 104, 
 N. 19) offered to me in a short time so many leverets. ' To offer', here jum 
 @cfcl)enf aubicten. 16, as — paddock, bafi id) eincn 2Bi(b^arf bantit '^dtte 
 
 au^riiften fonnen. 17, l^jTcge. 18, which — them = the names of which 
 
 I must mention (an'fuT)vcii) here, in order to distinguish them from one another ; 
 I called them, 19, bcmerfcn; you = to the reader; they = the little animals 
 (for which use the diminutive). 
 
 Section 188. 
 
 THE FAVOURITE HARES. 
 II. 
 
 Immediately commencing carpenter, I built ^ them houses to sleep in. 
 Each leveret had a separate apartment, so contrived ^ that it could be 
 kept perfectly sweet and clean ■•. In the daytime * the animals had the 
 range ® of the hall, and at night ® retired each to his own bed, never 
 intruding into that of another''. 
 
 Puss grew presently familiar, would leap * into my lap, raise himself^ 
 upon his hinder feet, and bite the hair from my temples. He would 
 suffer '" me to take him up, and to carry him about in my arms, and has 
 more than once fallen fast asleep upon my knees. He was ill three days, 
 during which time I nursed him, kept him apart from his fellows, that ^' 
 they might not molest him (for, like many other wild animals, they per- 
 secute ^'^ one of their own species that is sick), and by constant care '^ 
 and with a variety of herbs, restored him to perfect health '*. No crea- 
 ture could be more grateful than (S. 104, N. 19) my patient after his 
 recovery, a sentiment which he most significantly expressed by licking'"' 
 my hand, first the back of it*", then the palm, then every finger 
 separately *'', then'^ between all //le fingers, as if (S. 27, N. 7) anxious to 
 leave no part of it unsaluted ; a ceremony *® which he never performed 
 but once again '-° upon a similar occasion. 
 
 1, I became at once a carpenter and made, etc. 2, cin'ric^ten; see S. 7, 
 
 N. 3, B. 3, rein inib faiibcr. 4, 2)cg llagcg. 5, We had the range of 
 
 the whole house, unr fcimten im gan^cn Jpaiifc um()cr'(aiifcit. 6, be^ Oluc^t^. 
 
 7, never — other = and none ever (jc) went (fid} bcgcbcu) into the bed of another. 
 
 8, would leap = leapt. Comp. S. loi, N. 22. 9, = placed himself. 
 
 10, = He allowed (geftutten) me; has fallen = fell; to fall asleep, fiu'fd^lafcu. 
 
 11, = in order that, bamit; might = could. 12, = torment, qudlcu; one — 
 sick = the sick ones of their own species (@attinig, f.). 13, = nursing, 
 5>flcge, f. ; with a variety = various. 14, He restored me to perfect health, 
 cr ftellte mciiic ©ffiiiib()eit gan^ ivieber tjcr. 15, bur^ bag SBflccfm. 16, uub 
 gtrar bclerfte cr i(ucvft ben OJiicfen bevfetbcn. 17, = singly, adj., to be 
 placed before ' finger '. 18, = and finally he licked even, belccfte er 
 mid) and). 19, here gcrmlid^feit, f. 20, but once again, nur no^ 
 eiuntal ; upon, bei. 
 
 VOL. IV. L
 
 146 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 89. 
 
 Section 189. 
 
 THE FAVOURITE HARES. 
 III. 
 
 Finding him extremely tractable, I made it my ' custom to carry him 
 always after breakfast into the garden, where he hid himself generally 
 under the leaves of a vine, sleeping^ or chewing the cud till evening; in 
 the leaves also of that vine he found a favourite repast ^ I had not long 
 habituated him to this taste o/" liberty, before* he began to be impatient 
 for the return of the time* when he might enjoy it*. He would invite me 
 to the garden^ by drumming (S. 1 1 1, N. 6) upon my knee, and by (S. 185, 
 N. 26) a look of such expression* as it was not possible to misinterpret. 
 If the ® rhetoric did not immediately succeed, he would take the skirt of 
 my coat (S. 36, N. 7, ^) between his teeth, and pull it with all his force ^^ 
 Thus Puss might be said to be perfectly tamed"; the shyness of his nature 
 was done away^^ and, on the whole^^ it was visible by many symptoms, 
 which I have not room to enumerate ", that he was happier in human 
 society than when (S. 27, N. 7) shut up with^' his natural companions. 
 
 Not so Tiny ; upon him the kindest " treatment had not the least 
 effect. He too was sick, and in his sickness had an equal share of my 
 attention"; but when, after his recovery, I took the liberty to stroke him, 
 he would grunt, strike with his fore feet, spring forward, and bite '*. He 
 was, however", entertaining in his way; even his surliness was matter of 
 mirth ^°, and in his play he preserved such an air of gravity ^\ and per- 
 formed his feats with such solemnity of manner ^^, that in (an) him too I 
 had an agreeable companion. 
 
 1, jur. 2, Use this and the following verb in the Imperfect, preceded 
 
 by 'and'; to chew the cud, fcin gutter itieberfduen. 3, in — repast, auc^ 
 
 a^ cr bie Stdttcr beg ffieinjiccfg Ijcfonbcrg gem. 4, = when ; insert the adv. 
 
 fc^cii after ' he '. 5, to — time = to long impatiently for the time. 
 
 6, when — it = when (S. 131, N, 4) he could again enjoy this liberty. 7»^to 
 come into the garden with him. 8, Render ' of such expression ' by 
 
 the adj. 'expressive'; as = that, followed by man and the active form of the 
 verb. 9, = his ; and construe according to the following example : He 
 
 will never succeed, cr ttjivb nie feinen 3we(f evreicl)en. 10, Supply the adv. 
 
 ' forward * after this noun. 11, Say ' And so (fomit) I may (biirfen) 
 
 perhaps (trotjl) say of " Puss " that he was quite tamed'. 12, = his 
 
 natural shyness was conquered. 13, ittiev^auvt ; visible = clear. 14, = which 
 (S. 66, N. 15) on account of want of (an) room I cannot enumerate here. 
 15, * to be shut up ', here ft^ au5fc^lie§li(^ bejinbcn ; with, bet. 16, liebrcicfe. 
 
 17, in — attention = and during his sickness I nursed him with equal (ftleidj) 
 attention. 18, Supply ' at (nac^) me ' here. 19, Supply ' also ' here ; 
 
 in, auf. 20, = amusing. 21, =such a grave air (SUicne, f.). 22, = solemn 
 dignity. 
 
 Section 190. 
 
 THE FAVOURITE HARES. 
 IV. 
 
 Bess, who died soon after he was full grown \ and whose death was 
 occasioned by his being turned (S. 161, N. 21, and S. 87, N. 6) into his
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 190. 147 
 
 box, which had been washed, while it was yet damp^, was a hare of great 
 humour and drollery'. Puss was tamed by gentle usage; Tiny was not 
 to be tamed at all ; and Bess had a * courage and confidence that made 
 him tame from the beginning '*. I always admitted them into the parlour 
 after supper, when (S. 131, N. 4), the* carpet affording their feet a firm 
 hold, they would frisk, and bound, and play a thousand gambols, in "^ 
 which Bess, being remarkably strong and fearless, was always superior to 
 the rest. One evening, the cat being in the room, it had the hardiness 
 to pat Bess upon the cheek, an indignity which * he resented by drum- 
 ming upon her (S. 43, N. 9, B) back with such violence that the cat was 
 happy to escape from under his paws, and * hide herself 
 
 I describe the animals as having had each a character of his own ". 
 Such they were in fact ", and their countenances were so expressive of 
 that character, that, when I looked only on the face of either, I imme- 
 diately knew which it was ^^. — William Cowper, " The Gentleman's 
 Magazine, 1784." 
 
 1, vodig au(?i5cn\id)fcn fcln. 2, which — damp = which after having been 
 
 washed {\\ix6:j t)«v Oiciiu^iuig) was yet damp. 3, = was a very facetious and 
 
 droll hare. 4, = so much. 5, = that he became tame from the 
 
 very (glei^ im) beginning. 6, Place the clause ' the — hold ' after ' they — 
 
 gambols': To play gambols pcfficvli^e Suftf^rungc mac^cn. 7, in which = 
 
 in (bei) which games. 8, an indignity which = which offence. 9, Say 
 
 ' and to be able to hide herself. 10, as — own = as if each of the same had 
 had (Pluperf. Subj.) his own character. 11, =That was however (abcr ait(^) 
 really the case. 12, that — was = that from (aue) the face of each 1 could 
 
 at once distinguish (cvfcuiicnj who it ( -- he) was. 
 
 Section 191. 
 
 PRINCE BISMARCK'S HOME^ 
 
 After crossing the threshold I found myself in a small, plain apart- 
 ment — the reception-room — in the centre of which stands a simple little 
 polished table with four legs. This is a relic of historical significance. A 
 brass plate let into the square top^ bears the following inscription: "At 
 this table the preliminaries of peace between Germany and France were 
 signed, February 26th, 187 1, at Versailles, No. 14 Rue de Provence." In 
 the centre of the table is' a round piece ^ green cloth, and on it are 
 visible a number of spots* caused by (S. 185, N. 26) the drippings'* from 
 the candles used on the momentous occasion of the negotiations between 
 the Chancellor and Jules Favre ^ The table was the property of the 
 lady in whose house the Chancellor was quartered ^ and of whom he 
 bought it. In the same room stands a gigantic wardrobe richly sculp- 
 tured', and a second wardrobe (S. 5, N. 2), according to Castellan (S. 10, 
 N. 2) Hackmack's explanation, was made from * the wood of a linden tree, 
 in the shade of which Prince Bismarck, when a '" merry student at Got- 
 tingen, had frequently reposed. The adjoining room is the Prince's 
 study. A bookcase contains a small library " for immediate use and for 
 reference, among its books being a French account of '^ the peace nego- 
 
 L 2
 
 148 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 19I. 
 
 tiations of 187 1. The writing-desk occupies the centre of the room. A 
 polished fire-screen, highly ^^ ornamented and of Asiatic origin, is a 
 present from the Chinese Embassy in Berlin, On the mantel-piece 
 stands a bronze statuette, about three feet high, representing the Grand 
 Elector — a present from the Emperor. A slip of paper attached to the 
 Marshal's baton in the Elector's outstretched hand, bears the Imperial 
 autograph^*: " To ^^ Prince Bismarck — Christmas, 1880, — W." On the 
 wall, behind the statuette, hangs, in a richly gilt frame, a painting by^® 
 Hiinten, representing the attack of dragoons of the guard on French 
 infantry at Mars-la-Tour ; the Chancellor's two sons, Herbert and 
 William, being " in the midst of the fight. — The Correspondent of the 
 London " Daily News." 
 
 1, here ^augeintic^tmtg. 2, here !£if(^ ; the plate was let into the table, 
 
 bie *^latte imr in fcen !£if(^ f)iiicin9c(c9t. 3, =lies, 4, and — spots = 
 
 and upon the same one sees still some spots. 5, bag Secfen; render 
 
 ' from the ' by the Gen. of the def. art., and turn ' used — negotiations ' by 
 ' during the momentous negotiations '. 6, Suleg jyavre, geboren bm 21. 
 
 SWdrj 1809 ^u ?V)oii, tnac^te fi(^ gucrji a(g {Rcbner imb geivanbter Slbvcfat eineu Olameii, 
 bcfdjdftiflte fief) jeboc^ fpciter and) ntit ber ^votitif, too er i^cts jur beincfvatifcften ^^artei 
 gctjcrtc. 9kc^ bcv gfiJi^uavresiohttion Bon 1848 icurbe cv @encra(fefretar int SUiniftevtum 
 beg Snncvu, bann ^^(ttgtieb ber Staticnah'icrfantmluiig, in bcr cr al3 ©egner beg yavx 
 $vdfibenten ge\iHi^lten ^rinj^en Snbiuig 9iapclcon auftvat. 3m Sa^ve 1858 in ben 
 gcfe^gcbcnbcn ^ovper gcival)tt, nnirbe cr nac^ bem ©tur^e bcS Jtaiferreid^S unb bev 
 ©rfldrung bee OJepublif SOiitgtieb ber Otegiernng ber S^ationabevteibigung unb 3)(iuiilei- 
 beg Slu^ern, a(g n)cl(J)cr er im Sa^re 1871 ^u a3evfaifleg unb granffurt a/2)? ntit bem 
 giirfien 93i(?mavd fiber ben Srieben untcv(}anbc(te. Sim 2. Slugui^ 1871 jcg er ftcfc jeboc^ 
 «om )5oUtifc^en 2eben ^uviicf unb ftavb am 19. Sannav 1880. 7, =lived (S. n6, 
 
 N. 17). 8, richly sculptured, mit veicfier 33ilb()auerar'6eit cerjiert, which use 
 
 attributively, as explained in S. 7, N. 3, A)\ 'wardrobe', here 2Banbfd)ranf. 
 9, aug. 10, when a = as. 11, Supply 'intended' (beftimmt) here, 
 
 and place the words ' intended for (ju, contracted with the def. art.) — refer- 
 ence ' before ' library '. 12, iibcr. 13, ^6d)fi fiinftlerifd) ; and — origin = 
 and made (Berfertigcn) in Asia, all to be placed before ' screen '. 14, trdgt 
 
 bic »om .f aifer eigenfjdnbig gcfd^riebenen SBovte. 15, Sem. 16, »on. 
 
 17, = are, ji^ befiuben. 
 
 Sccil07l 192. 
 
 EOYAL BENEVOLENCE. 
 
 Frederick the Great, King of Prussia^, once rang the belP of his 
 cabinet ; but as nobody answered ^, he opened the door of the ante- 
 chamber, and there found his page fast asleep * upon a chair '\ He went 
 up to awake him, but, coming nearer, he observed a paper in his pocket, 
 upon which something was written ^ This excited his curiosity. He 
 pulled it out, and found that it was a letter from the page's mother, the 
 contents of which were nearly as follows '': " She returned her son many 
 thanks^ for the money he had saved out of his salary and sent to 
 her, which had proved a very timely assistance '. God would certainly 
 reward him for it, and if he continued to serve God and his king faith- 
 fully and conscientiously, he could not fail of success ^^ and prosperity in 
 this world ^'." Upon reading (S. 55, N. i) this, the king stepped softly into
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 9 2. I49 
 
 his closet, fetched a rouleau ^'^ <?/" ducats, and put it with the letter into the 
 page's pocket (S. 43, N. 9, B). He then rang again till the page awoke 
 and came into his closet. " You have*'' been asleep, I suppose ?" said the 
 king. The page could not deny it, stammered out an excuse ^*, put, in 
 his embarrassment, his hand into his pocket, and felt the rouleau of 
 ducats. He immediately pulled it out, turned '•' pale, and looked at the 
 king with tears in his eyes. "What is the matter with you?" said the 
 king. " Oh ! " replied the page, " somebody has contrived ^'^ my ruin : I 
 know nothing of this money." " What God bestows *V' resumed the 
 king, "He bestows in sleep. Send the money to your mother (App. § 5), 
 give my respects to her ***, and inform her that I will take care *^ of both 
 her and 3'ou." — W. Buck. 
 
 1, 'J^tifbrir^ 6cr ©ro^c, .Rciiiq t»cu ?preu§en, »uvbc am 24. Saniiar 1712 in 
 *^erlin (\cbcveu uiib \\\n bcr So()n be^ ^onig^ Ariebvid) 2£Ull)elm I, ber bcii ben .ftunftcii 
 unb aBiffenfc^aftcn evi^cgcbcn Sungling eft t\n"cinnifc^ nnb ()art bctjanbctte nnb Ujn fclbft gcgcn 
 feine S'Zeigung int 3al)vc 1733 mit bcr ^rinjcifin (Slifabctt) (Sl)viftine »cn ©raunfc^weig^ 
 Q3c»crn »crmd()ltc. dlniij bcm llcbe feiuf^ SBaterg bcftieg cr am 31. 2)?ai 1740 ben 
 ).n-eu5if(^cn !£()von, anf bem cv balb ©elegcntjcit fanb, [cine bebcutenben !Ja(cntc aU ©taats^ 
 mann unb jVclt()cn- ju bett)dtigen. 5)ie @efd}id)te ncunt i()n inctjl mit *Jiecf)t ben grcften 
 Siirfien, 5«lb()ervn unb Staateimann [einer 3cit, unb a((? cr ant 17. Slnguft 1786 anf fcincm 
 IHiftfc^Ioffe ;iu ©an?fonci fiavb, l)intcvlicp cr feinem 9Jad)fc(ger cin urn 1325 Ouabrat; 
 mcilcn ccrgvo^evte^ SJeic^, einen ©Aal^ lum iibcr 70 3)?illicnen 3lf)alcvn, eiue Slvmec vcn 
 200,000 i)?ann nnb einen fidftig cmpt>iblu[)euben ©taat. 2, to ring the bell, 
 
 bie ©Iccfe jtctjen; of = in. 3, = appeared. 4, in ticfem ©c^tafe. 
 
 5, Supply here ft^en. 6, The clause ' upon — written ' may be briefly 
 
 rendered by ' bcfc^vicben ', to be placed before paper, inflected as an adj. 
 7, were ... as follows, fotgcnbevma^en lantete. 8, to return a person many 
 
 thanks, eiuem inolmalg banfen. Construe this and the following passages 
 according to App. §§ 28, 30 and 31. 9, Place the words 'sent to her ' before 
 ' money ', attributively, and render ' which — assistance ' by nnb it)r fe()r gelegeu 
 gefcmmcn fei. 10, You cannot fail of success, bag @lnc! fann bir nid^t feljlen. 
 
 11, = life. 12, gjode, f. 13, = Thou hast, after which place the 
 
 adv. ttcbl = I suppose. 14, = stammered some words of (bcv) excuse. 
 
 15, = became. 16, crfonnen. 17, = gives. 18, give — her, 
 
 grufe fic lum mir. 19, to take care of a person, fur fiuen forgeu ; of — 
 
 you = of both of you. He saw both of us, (Sv fat) un^ bcibe. 
 
 Section 193. 
 
 TELEGRAPHY (S. 3, N. 2) AMONG BIRDS. 
 
 I watch* a flock '^ a/" crows who, by some own correspondent of theirs, 
 have learned that Farmer Blyth will hold a ploughing match on his 
 grounds^ and have in consequence summoned their brethren'' to a diet of 
 worms. How unconcerned they look, as if worms were nothing to 
 them ^ 1 How grave, as if it were an Ecclesiasdcal Convocation *, and 
 they had no thought of earthly things''! Yet point' a gun, or anything 
 like it towards them, and in a moment (App. § 14) the young birds even 
 whose backs seemed turned to you' will give a flutter*" of their wings, 
 which appears an involuntary struggle **, but in reality is as significant a 
 danger-signal as a red flag on a railway ^'^j and is sufficient to clear the
 
 150 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 93. 
 
 field. Nor [= And yet .... not] are those crows exceptionally wise. All 
 their feathered brethren ^^ have made a sacred compact ^* that never with 
 their consent shall salt be put upon their tails. The sparrows are not 
 so idle that ^' they do not pass the word to each other when crumbs are 
 falling thick^® from some rich man's table. The doves, though they look 
 so innocent (S. 27, N. 8) do not spend ^^ all their time in cooing love- 
 songs and cradle-lullabies^*, or in pruning their rainbow-feathers. They 
 have a Telegraphy of their own ^', and ^° by a mere peck, or a [ba§] ruffle 
 of their feathers, can direct each other to the fields where the autumn 
 wheat ^^ is germinating best, or'^'^ the garden where the green peas are 
 fullest and brightest ^^ — Professor C. Wilson. 
 
 1, fecobat^ten. 2, (Sc^ar, f. 3, to hold a ploughing match on one's 
 
 grounds, auf feinem ^tlit ^fiiigcn taffen. 4, = friends; ' diet', here ©eric^t, n. 
 
 5, This is nothing to me, bieS gc^t mi(^ nii^t^ an. See App. § 33. 6, ^ir^ 
 
 c^enoerfamnttung, f. 7, to have no thought of earthly things, an nic^ta 3rbifci)e^ 
 Ceiifcn. 8, The huntsman pointed a gun towards me, bet Sdgcc ri(^tcte eine 
 
 jytinte auf tnicft. 9, whose — you = that apparently seemed to turn their 
 
 (S. 43, N. g,B) back to thee. 10, to give a flutter, eine leic^te fiatternbc 
 
 SBelfegung ntac^cn ; of = with. 11, an involuntary struggle = quite involuntary 
 (untt)if(furlic^). 12, = in the railway-service (S. 36, N. 7, ^). 13, = All 
 
 birds. 14, Supply ' among (untcr) one another ' here. ,_ 15, at^ ba^ ; to 
 
 pass the word = to give a hint. 16, to fall thick, tin Uberfl^uffe auf bie ©rbe 
 
 r'aflen. 17, verbringen. 18, in — lullabies, niit bent ©irrcn tton 8icbe6; unb 
 
 SBiegentiebcrn. 19, We have a library of our own, ujir ^aben unfere eigcne 
 
 Stbliot^ef. 20, Here follows the verb 'can' ; supply ' with the beak ' after 
 
 ' peck '. 21, ^ where the wheat in autumn. 22, The prep. ' to ' must 
 
 be repeated here. 23, = stand thickest and best (fc^on). See S. 183, 
 
 N, 24„ 
 
 Section 194. 
 
 THE HANSE \ 
 I. 
 
 About the end of the twelfth century commerce began to extend to- 
 wards the north of Europe. Along the German shores of the Baltic 
 (S. 36, N. 7, ^) sprang up''^ thriving towns, which sent out ships to (S. 72, 
 N. 4) Russia, Norway, England, and other parts, and exchanged the raw 
 materials which they thus acquired (S. 48, N. 6) for the merchandise of 
 Southern Europe and the Levant, which reached them both by land and 
 sea'. Before* the middle of the thirteenth century, this trade had become 
 so valuable as to excite ^ the rapacity, not only of numerous pirates who 
 infested® the seas, but'' of princes (S. 3, N. 2) and nobles, who exacted 
 arbitrary and excessive tolls. 
 
 To defend their interests against these assailants, the chief* ports 
 entered into a league, binding themselves ' to [^u] afford mutual aid and 
 protecdon. Liibeck and Hamburg stood at the head of this association ; 
 Bremen ranked next^"; and one after another the principal towns gave in 
 their adhesion, the movement spreading from east to west'^ The numbers 
 of the league '^ fluctuated, but at one dme it is known (S. 4, N. 4, man) 
 to have comprised more than ninety diff^erent towns. In the fourteenth 
 century its authority" extended greatly, for" it rallied around it the chief
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 194, 151 
 
 commercial towns of the interior, such as Cologne, Dortmund, Miinster, 
 Brunswick, Magdeburg, etc. The Hanse had for its object the protection 
 and development of commerce, the maintenance of existing and the 
 acquisition of new privileges ^^ The association was governed by a 
 Diet '*, to which each town sent representatives, and which met once in 
 three years ^^ in Liibeck. As the confederation expanded, it became 
 necessary to divide it into several provinces ^*, of which the capitals were 
 Liibeck, Cologne, Brunswick, and Dantzic. 
 
 1, 35ie ^anfa. 2, cntilct)en, insep. comp. irreg. v. 3, hic(d)e fie fo^vot)! auf 
 bent Sanb; ale aitc^ auf bent ©ecuicge bejcgen. 4, -- Already before. 5, = that 
 it excited ; place * not only ' before ' rapacity '. 6, iin|ic^er mac^en. 
 
 7, =but also that (to agree with ' rapacity'). 8, =most important; 
 
 to enter into a league, ein SutibniS ittit einanber fcfilicgen. 9, = whereby they 
 bound themselves (jicf) »ervfii(^teu). Aid and protection, (Sc^u| uttb %x\x%. 
 10, = hereupon came Bremen. 11, and — west = and afterwards one great 
 town after the other joined the league, which expanded (|ic^ au^'breitcn) from 
 east to west. 12, Liter. = The number of the towns in the league. 
 
 13, = power. 14, for — it, benu tg tiatcit if)m . . . bet. 15, The — 
 
 privileges = The protection and the development of commerce, the mainte- 
 nance of existing and the acquisition of new privileges were the object (3wecf, 
 m.) of the Hanse. 16, =» The business (5lngelegeii^citctt, pi.) of the league 
 
 was conducted by (buvc^) a Diet (here ben ^attfetag). 17, at(e brei 3at)re 
 
 finnial. 18, here iBejiife {or Oiiavtiere). 
 
 Sec f -ion 195, 
 
 THE HANSE. 
 II. 
 In Russia the Hanse found a valuable and most virgin field ' for its 
 commercial enterprises. Thence it drew "^ large supplies of timber, flax, 
 hemp, ropes, skins, furs, wax, and tallow ; bestowing in return ^ (for the 
 trade was only one of barter), salt, herrings, and coarse cloth, for the 
 mass of the peasants ; and * brocades, jewels, wines, and other articles of 
 luxury, for the wealthy boyards and princes. A factory at Novgorod 
 conducted these transactions. Another factory at Bergen placed the 
 Hanse in direct contact* with Norway and Sweden. This was an estab- 
 lishment of considerable magnitude, comprising twenty-two courts, and 
 serving not only as a lodging lor the staff of agents and clerks •'j but as 
 a warehouse ■'ytr Ihe goods. The chief exports from this quarter were" 
 timber, resin, sperm oil, and, above all", sailed fish — a (S. 53, N. 9) 
 commodity^" in great demand at a time when Europe was still Catholic 
 and fasted faithfully on the appointed days. The Hanse had" two 
 other large factories, one in Bruges, employing three hundred agents, 
 and another in London. 
 
 Year by year ^^ the Hanse grew more rich and powerful. New 
 branches of business were opened up, new factories ivere founded. 
 Kings and princes were glad " to be on good terms with so influential a 
 body. Ambassadors from the Kings of England, France, Sweden, and 
 Denmark, and even from the Emperor himself, waited on '^ the Diet, to
 
 152 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 195. 
 
 ask'* favours, and to offer trading privileges in return. The original 
 object of the league — mutual protection — was reasonable and legitimate, 
 but was gradually expanded into ^^ a policy of forcible aggression and 
 imperious monopoly. Not only were foreigners, in '^ their voyages to 
 (S. 72, N. 4) the Hanse towns, compelled to employ Hanseatic ships, 
 but" the commerce of the north-east and west of Europe was almost 
 exclusively in the hands of the league. 
 
 ], and most virgin field = and hitherto quite unused field. 2, Bcjie^en, 
 
 insep. comp. irr. v. tr. 3, bestowing in return = Liter, which it (fie, to agree 
 with tie ^^anfa) for (gegen) . . . exchanged. The verb stands, of course, after 
 ' princes ', and the clause ' for — barter ' is best placed after it. 4, Repeat 
 the preposition gcgeu here. 5, Place 'in — contact ' after 'Sweden'. 
 
 6, for — clerks, ben ©eanttcn unb Unterbeamten, which place after ' only '. 
 Render *as a ' by ju, contracted with the dat. of the def. art. 7, =but 
 
 was also used as a (ds) warehouse. 8, bcftanben au5. 9, =but especially. 
 The prep. au3 must be repeated here. 10, Slrtifef, m. ; in — demand, 
 
 ivelc^er ... in grower ^Jlac^frage jianb. 11, Supply the adv. nod) fiere. 
 
 12, SSon 3a^r ju 3a^c. 13, frof) ; to be on good terms, auf frcuiibff^aftli^cm 
 
 %\\^ jlef)en ; with — body, mit bent mdc^tigen ©tdbtebunbe, which place after ' glad'. 
 14, = appeared before (»or). 15, erbitten; favours, ©iinftbejeugungen ; in 
 
 return, bafur. 16, ju; of— monopoly, bev @ettialtl)erv[i)aft unb be^ iWc)no^.iol<S ; 
 ' to expand ', here umgejtalten. 17, auf. 18, but . . , was, foubern eS 
 
 befanb fic^ auc^ ; of=in. 
 
 Section 196. 
 
 THE HAlSrSE. 
 III. 
 
 There were no bounds to its greed and selfishness *. It did its utmost 
 to crush all growing trade ^, navigation, and even manufactures, which 
 in the least interfered with its gains ". It warned away * all strangers ^ 
 from the Baltic ; and when it found them there, it seized and destroyed 
 their vessels®. In order to maintain this monopoly, it ''^ was ready to 
 make * the greatest sacrifices, to equip fleets, and sustain long and costly 
 campaigns. With Denmark it waged a desperate war ; and it also came 
 into collision ' with Sweden and Norway. From '" these contests it came 
 off victorious, and the whole of Scandinavia was compelled to acknow- 
 ledge its commercial supremacy". It^^ had a rupture also with the 
 Netherlands, whose flag it banished from the Baltic ". 
 
 These unbounded pretensions naturally excited a great deal of ill 
 feeling '* against the Hanse, and, in the end, proved fatal ^^ to it. One 
 after another '*, the markets which it had been accustomed to regard as 
 its own private estates, threw off their allegiance, and admitted" the 
 traders of other nations. Then ^^ // was that the league began to suffer 
 in another way from its narrow-minded selfishness. As long as it had 
 exclusive command of" foreign sources of supply, it did not trouble 
 itself to develop the resources of Germany — indeed it rather endeavoured^"* 
 to repress them, when it thought that others were likely to profit by them ; 
 but when one by one its monopolies exploded ^^, it found reason to re-
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 96. 153 
 
 pent that it had neglected to cultivate "^^ the productive powers of its own 
 country. 
 
 These causes, combined " with the change ^* of route to India, led to 
 the gradual decline of this famous confederation ^^i and at the last 
 general assembly, held at Liibeck in 1630, the deputies from the several 
 cities appeared merely to declare their secession ^®. In a modified form % 
 however, the Hanse lingered on ^* till the beginning of the present cen- 
 tury — the^* shadow of a great name. The Free Cities of Liibeck, 
 Hamburg, Bremen, and Frankfort-on-the-Maine, are now only nominally 
 the representatives of the Hanse. — J. H. Fvfe. 
 
 1, = Its greed and selfishness had no bounds. 2, to crush all growing 
 
 trade, alien Jpanbet . . . im >f eime ju evftiffcn ; the adj. ' all ' must be_repeated before 
 the two following nouns. 3, which — gains, fobalb bie SntereHen beS ©unbeS im 
 i^eviiigfieii babiirc^ bceiiitriic^tigt hjuvben. 4, = drove away. 5, = foreign ships. 
 6, their vessels = them. Ihe passage ' and — vessels ' is best rendered by the 
 Passive Voice. ' To seize ', here mit 33cfcJ}lag belctjcn. 7, = the league. 
 
 8, to make a sacrifice, ciii Opfcr briiigcn. 9, to come into collision with a 
 
 person, fidj mit eiiicm eiit^iiKten. ^, 10, 3lu(J; to come off, t^erttorgetjcn ; it = the 
 same. 11, beffen fommcvjielle Ubcrlcgcnlicit. 12, It is better, for the sake of 
 distinctness, to change the pronoun ' it ' into 'the league'. 13, Use the 
 
 Passive Voice to render ' whose — Baltic'. 14, a — leeling = great hatred. 
 
 15, to prove fatal = to become dangerous. 16, Place ' one — another' 
 
 after ' threw', and commence the sentence with ' The markets ' ; it = the same ; 
 as — estates, aU i()ve cigcncu @ebtete; threw off their allegiance, niaifeu . . . bus.' 
 iljncn aufgcbntngeue 3o(^ »ou )i(f). 17, ' to admit a person ', here eiiiem bcii 
 
 3utritt gcftatten. 18, = Upon that. 19, Jpcnf^aft iibcv ; sources ot 
 
 supply, 3iifit()i'q»d(ett. 20, cr bcmiit)te fict) uidmc^v. 21, but — exploded = 
 but when its monopolies (^aiibel^vrittilegieu) were one after another taken away 
 (entrei^en) from it (i()m, to be placed after ' monopolies'). 22, to culti- 
 
 vate = the cultivation (*^fiege, f.) ; ' the — country ' may be briefly rendered by 
 ber inlanbifc^ui ^JJvcbuttionefraft. 23, = in combination. 24, a.?cilcgutig, 
 
 f. ; route, liJanbwcg, m. 25, ©tdbtebunb, m. 26, bcv Slu^tritt aii^ bciii 
 
 3unbe. 27, bcfc^rdnft. 28, however, the Hansa lingered on, friftctc 
 
 bie J&anfa [tied) iicc^ . . . ein fummerli^ces ©afein. 29, = the mere. 
 
 Section 197. 
 
 COMING TO TERMS'. 
 
 One of the most distinguished artists in Paris ^ painted for a lady 
 occupying a brilliant position in society her portrait', with* the intention 
 of placing it in an exhibition afterwards. The lady, although a long 
 time celebrated for her beauty *, had arrived at that age ^ whicli is seldom 
 admitted (fifty years), but '^ endeavoured to conceal it through cosmetics, 
 and showed herself as beautiful and captivating as in her younger days 
 [=years]. Paris is full of resources, and ointments are to be obtained 
 there * to heal the wounds of time. 
 
 Our heroine had her portrait taken ' in the most graceful attitude ; 
 splendidly dressed, and leaning on an arm-chair, she looked smiling into 
 the glass, which should return '" her the most amiable compliments.
 
 154 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 197. 
 
 The painter made " a most striking likeness, but this was a great mis- 
 take — a flattering one was expected "^, and the lady subsequently ^* de- 
 clared that she did not recognise herself (App. § 28) in this painting, and 
 the portrait was left on the painter's hands ". The artist, feeling himself 
 hurt in his pride, was too good a philosopher to keep a portrait worth 
 three thousand francs quietly on his hands'^, and an idea of vengeance 
 presented itself to his mind ^*, which he put into execution at once. 
 
 A short time before the day fixed for " the opening of the art-exhibi- 
 tion at the Louvre ^*, the lady was secretly informed that her portrait was 
 ornamented with certain accessories rather compromising her^'. She 
 went immediately to the artist. There was the portrait ! It was the 
 same striking likeness certainly ; but the painter had thinned the hair, 
 and the lady so faithfully painted ^" held in her hand two large tresses of 
 false hair. On the toilet table were several small bottles, labelled thus^^: 
 " White- Wash," "Vegetable Red," " Cosmetic "^ to efface wrinkles," 
 " Lotion, to dye the hair in a minute ^^" 
 
 " It is abominable," said the lady, greatly excited. 
 
 " Of what do you complain .?" coolly replied the artist. " Did you not 
 declare (S. 48, N. 2, and App. § 28) that it was not your portrait.? You 
 are right, it is a mere fancy sketch ", and as such I shall send it to the 
 exhibition." 
 
 " What, Sir, do you intend to exhibit this painting?" 
 
 " Certainly ^^ Madam ; but as a cabinet picture '^^ since the catalogue 
 will indicate it under the title o/"'The Coquette of Fifty Years.' " 
 
 At this the lady fainted, but soon recovered, and then paid at once for 
 the portrait". The accessories were effaced'^" in her presence, the 
 portrait was restored to its original state, and the three thousand francs 
 were transferred ^* to the purse of the painter. — The Young Ladies' 
 Journal. 
 
 1. =The Compromise. 2, An artist in Berlin, cin SBerttner ^unftlcr. 
 
 3, 'painted — portrait' may be briefly rendered = painted the portrait of a 
 high-placed (^oc^geftedt) lady. 4, in. 5, = Although the lady was for 
 
 a long time (feit iangc) celebrated for (ttegen) her beauty (see S. 27, N. 8). 
 
 6, = she had now reached that age; admitted = confessed (cingejianbcn). 
 
 7, = however, to be placed after ' endeavoured '. 8, and — time = and 
 offers (barbieten) ointments, which heal all the wounds of time. 9, to have 
 one's portrait taken, ftc^ maleu laffen. 10, = tell. 11, f($a^cn, str. v. 
 tr. ; a most striking likeness, cin ^crfjft d{jnti(^e^ 33ilb. 12, =the lady ex- 
 pected one that flattered her (S. 48, N. 6). 13, init^in, to be placed after 
 ' declared '. 14, and — hands = and refused the acceptance of the same (to 
 agree with ' painting'). 15, to keep a portrait quietly on one's hands, cin 
 ^portrait ganj ru()ig bci fi^ ticgcn laj[en. 16, and — mind = and devised a plan 
 of vengeance (S. 36, N. 7, A). Yl^ \\x. 18, im liJouwrc. 19, ba§ 
 i^r 5J?ortvait mit gch?iffcn fie fcmpvomitttercnbcn 3ufa^en vcrjicvt fci. 20, unb 
 bic trcu nad^ bcr Diatnr gcniattc 2)amc ; a tress of false hair, cine fatfd^e Jpaarfle^te. 
 21, =with the following labels ((^tifette, f.). 22, ©c^cn^cit^wafTcr. 23, J^aar^ 
 finttiir jum augenblirflidjcn garbcn bcr Jpaare. 24, = it is only the production 
 of my fancy. 25, 5Ulcrbing5. 26, al6 ©cnrcbilb, the first component of 
 which being pronounced as in French. 27, for — portrait = the price of 
 the picture. 28, bcfcitigcn. 29, cin'»erleiben, p. p. einvevtcibt.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 98. 1 55 
 
 Section 198. 
 
 FALSE PRIDE. 
 
 Have pity on^ the youth who is ashamed to be seen carrying ' a parcel. 
 Such a youth will never climb the hilP ; he will never be honoured and 
 respected by sensible, respectable * men. And yet how many there are 
 (S. 82, N. 7) who have the failing \ Do you know the story of the 
 young man who came down from a country town of New Hampshire, 
 and entered the great wholesale establishment of the Lawrences — Abbot 
 and Amos — in Boston * .? He was a young merchant who had just 
 commenced business ''. He had money enough wiih which to purchase a 
 certain quantity ^ goods, and wished to get as many more on credit^, if 
 they (S. 134, N. 4) would trust ^ him. 
 
 Mr. Lawrence shook his head. The young man could offer no secu- 
 rity, and the old^° merchants did not consider it good policy to give 
 credit to an unknown and untried young man. The youthful customer 
 did not blame them. He said he should probably do the same himself 
 by one whom he did not know ^^. " However," he added, " I hope I 
 may grow into your confidence one of these days '^." 
 
 Then he paid for the goods he had purchased ; and when they had 
 been done up ", he was asked where he would have them sent ". " I will 
 take ^° them myself," was the answer. " But the parcel is heavy," said the 
 clerk. " And I am young and strong," answered the customer. " No, 
 I will take the parcel on my shoulder. I cannot earn half a dollar more 
 easily or more honestly." And he had taken the parcel on his shoulder, 
 and had approached the door, when Mr. Lawrence came out of his office, 
 where ^® he had been a spectator of the scene, and called the youth back. 
 " You can have all the goods you want, young man"," he said. " Make 
 your own selection, and set your own time for payment ^*. He who is 
 willing to help himself, will not betray'^ those who are willing to help him." 
 
 And the old merchant was not mistaken. That young man became 
 one of his most valuable customers, and one of his valued'"* friends. 
 
 When Jerome Napoleon Bonaparte, son of (S. 25, N. 5) King Jerome 
 of Westphalia and nephew of the Emperor Napoleon L, was a student 
 of" Harvard College, in Cambridgeshire, he was one day carrying a 
 bundle of clothing ^* from his washer-woman's to his dormitory ^■'', when 
 he was met by a companion^*, who asked him, with much surprise, why 
 he had not had the bundle sent to his room. 
 
 " Why should I do that?" asked the prince. " Why''''," said his com- 
 panion with a little touch of embarrassment, " you know it doesn't look 
 well to carry one's own bundle like a common labourer." 
 
 " Bah ''^" cried Jerome, laughing, " I trust I shall never be ashamed 
 to be seen bearing " anything (S. 3, N. 7) that belongs to a Bonaparte !" — 
 The New York Herald. 
 
 1, rait. 2, = with. 3, = Such a one will never get on (oortrdrt^ fommen). 
 4, folibe. 5, = this fault. 6, from — Boston = from (au^) a small town 
 
 in N. H. to Boston, and there entered the great (gto^arti^) wholesale estabUsh-
 
 1^6 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 98. 
 
 ment (ffiarettfagcr) of Messrs. Lawrence — Abbot and Amos ? 7, I have 
 
 just commenced business, tc^ f)a6e ttii(i) foeben ctabliert. 8, to get a thing on 
 
 credit, ttmaS auf .trcbit cntncf)men ; as many more, noc^ eiiimal fo viete. 9, to 
 
 trust a person, cinem S^crtraucn f(i)enfen. 10, = experienced. 11, by — 
 
 know, eiitfm Unbetannten gegem'ibcr, to be placed after 'should' and the gram- 
 matical object ' eg'. To do the same oneself, c^ auc^ fo tiiad)cn. 12, I may — 
 days = that I shall gain (fic^ ertpcvbcn) one of these days (bermaleinft) your confi- 
 dence. 13, = were packed. 14, = where they should be sent. 
 15, = carry. 16, »oti h)o ; to be a spectator of a scene, eine (Scene tnit 
 an'fcl)en. 17, '^crr. 18, to set one's own time for payment, ben ^ciij^ 
 lungStcrrain fclbji beftimmen. 19, betriigen. 20, = best. 21, was — 
 of= studied in. 22, niit SBdf^e. 23, =* lodging' here. 24, I was 
 met by a companion, ein Sreunb bcgcgncte mtr. 25, (Si ; his = the ; with — 
 embarrassment, etwa^ Berlegen ; you know, todj, to be placed after the verb ; to 
 carry = if one carries. 26, = Nonsense! 27, to be seen bearing = 
 to bear. 
 
 Section 199. 
 
 ANECDOTES OF^ GREAT STATESMEN". 
 
 I. 
 
 Abraham Lincoln^. 
 
 The night previous to the meeting of the Convocation ' of Chicago, 
 Mr. Lincoln did not get home until* eleven o'clock at night. In the 
 morning ^ Mrs. Lincoln, who possessed a most amiable disposition, re- 
 monstrated with her good husband at breakfast. She kindly, but firmly, 
 informed him ^ that politics "^ were leading him into bad habits, especially 
 (S. 87, N. 6) to keeping late hours* and drinking at the rum shops. 
 She did not like it ; she had to sit up ®, and also the children were kept 
 awake ^°. " And now, Abraham," she continued, " let me tell you " that 
 to-night I will go to bed at ten o'clock. If you come before that 
 hour, well and good ^'^; if not", I will not get up and let you in^*." Ten 
 o'clock came that night, and true to her word, Mrs. Lincoln went to bed 
 with her children ^^. About an hour later Mr. Lincoln knocked at ^^ the 
 door. He knocked once, twice, and even three times before" an upper 
 window was raised and the nightcap of a female looked out. " Who is 
 there.?" "I." " You know what I told you, Abraham ?" "Yes, but, 
 wife, I have got something very particular to tell you. Let me in I" "I 
 don't want to hear. It is political stuff ^^" "Wife, it is very important. 
 There is ^* a telegraphic despatch, and I have been nominated for the 
 Presidency '^°." " Oh, Abraham, this is awful ! Now I know you have 
 been drinking. I only suspected it before, and you may just go and 
 sleep where you got your liquor "M" And down went the window with a 
 slam'^^. The next day confirmed the truth of the news that the humble 
 husband had been nominated to rule*^* over millions. — The New York 
 Herald. 
 
 IL 
 
 Prince Bismarck (S. 138, N. 12) and Lord Beaconsfield '*. 
 
 Amongst a number of amusing anecdotes of Lord Beaconsfield is one 
 of* the State banquet given at Berlin at the time of the Congress,
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 99. 157 
 
 when ^® he sat next to Prince Bismarck and opposite to the Crown Prin- 
 cess of Germany. Near to him was a trophy of " bonbons," on the 
 papers of which were ^'^ miniature photographs of the German Emperor 
 and other members of the Prussian royal family. After the feast was 
 over^^, the lord was busily engaged (S. 87, N. 6) in securing ^^ some of 
 these sweets to take home as a [jum] remembrance of the occasion '®, 
 when Prince Bismarck suddenly caught him by the arm and so startled 
 him that he dropped his spoil and exclaimed : " I see, not only does 
 Prince Bismarck give nothing away, but (S. 6, N. 10) he does not allow 
 anybody to help himself." The German Chancellor, on discovering 
 (S. 55, N, i) that he had interrupted Lord Beaconsfield in a feat of an- 
 nexation^', burst into a hearty laugh, and retorted: "It is true that^^ I 
 give nothing away ; but, as you see, I am always ready for an honest 
 alliance." So saying, he turned to the table and executed an energetic 
 raid upon^' the "bonbons," part of which he handed over to his British 
 colleague. — The Correspondent of " The London Daily Telegraph." 
 
 1, uber, with Ace. 2, SXbrnljnm Stncolu, -Prdfibent bev a3creimgten 
 
 @taaten oon 5lovb 5lmcnfa, teat ber @o()it ciiic^ ciufacl)cn Saubinaimeg mib unirbe am 
 
 12. gebntar 1809 tm Staate Jlentuffi gebcven. ©cine 3ui"\ciibcvjie()iimj \\\u nut cine 
 ()cc^ft iiiaiujeU)aftc, bcnti man fac^t, ev tjabe nnv ctn 3a()v bie <£d)nle befnd^t ; ticij bee ini^ 
 £\unfiii3)ten 5l5ei-t)dttni|Te fletang eg i^m abet bcnncd), ftd^ burcb be^arrlic^c^ Sclbftilubium 
 ^iim gcWiinbten ^Jlb»ofaten, tiic^tigeu 9iebncr unb einpu^reid^cn ^^nilitifcr f^cran^nbilben. 
 (S'r unirbe Slbgeorbucter fiir bie I'cgitilatur bed ©taatci^ Sllinoid, 3i)htgUcb bed Jlongreffee 
 unb beg ©enatg, unb n\ub eublici) int Safjre i860, gerabe in bem fritifd^cn IHugeubticfc, 
 ICO bie ©ubftaaten, iveldjc bie 5ln3be()nungbcr ©flaitevciforberten, fi^ weg n 33evweigerung 
 biefer ivovbevung von bet Union loesfagten, »on ben OJevubUfanevn jum *4>i'diibenten bev 
 *-J3ei-cinigten Staaten gcivdbtt. ®leid) nad) fciner 9Bal)i jnr (ViUjvuug bcei Staateivubevd 
 erfolgte bev 9Uieibvud) jeneg fietg bcufuiuvbigcn iBiivgcifiiajcg fcitcns bcr Union unb ber 
 fid^ em)?ocenben Subftaaten, iveld)er fiinf 3a()re lang mit tiioibevifc^et 35?nt bag ?anb 
 jeniittete unb enblid) mit ber gdnjlid)cn 9tbfd)aitnng bet igflavuvci unb ber ibeftegung ber 
 ©iibftaaten enbcte. Stamn wnx ct jebod} im ilJdv^ 1865 jum ^irciten Wlcik burd) un- 
 gel)eure ©timmcnnie()vl)ctt t»oa ber Union jjum 'JJvdfibenten cnrdl)lt unnten, unb faum 
 leaven bie ©tveitfrdfte bev Siitflaateu auf immev gcbrod;en unb \>cvuid}tet, a'g bev gcfeievte 
 (Staatgmann am 14. SUnil 1865 bei ®e[cgcn(}cit einev 2;()eatevt'cvftcUung im 5ovt)'f(^en 
 Xfjeatev ju 3Bafbington bev vudilofcn i*?anb eined i?on bev bcmofvatifd)en ^^.'^ivtei angeveijteu 
 ?Wovbcvg, beg ©d}aufpielerg 3ol)n SiUlfeg 5i3oot(), jum Dpfer fxct. @o enbete bag iieben 
 eineg 3)fanneg, ireldnv alg gutev, ved'tfdHaffcuev 'IMivgcv, alg eu;filnpveid}cv ©taatgmaununb 
 alg cbelmiitigev ^cfieiev »on fnnf 'i)ii((icuen Sflaven «on feuiem 4>aterlanbc ftctg in 
 banfbavem Stnbcnfcu gcljaUcn uuntcn unvD. 3, itonvcnt, m. ; of, ^n. 4, not 
 until, eril. 5, Say 'The next morning at (beim) breakfast', and comp. App. 
 § 14. She remonstrated with her good husband, fie mad)te il)vcm gutcu *J)ianne 
 einige 33ov)tcllungcn iibix fein langeg SUwbteiben. The words 'einige — I'lugbteiben ' 
 must stand at the end of the period. 6, = She told hini in a kind, but 
 (bod)) determined tone. 7, bie ^otitif, always used in the Sing. ; into, ju. 
 8, to keep late hours, fpdt nod) .J^aufe fommen. App. § 28 and 30. To drink 
 at the rum shops, bie ®ivtg()dufev bcfndjen. 9, aufbleibcn. 10, = could 
 not sleep. 11, = I will tell you. 12, = well, then, I will be glad. 
 
 13, Liter. = comest thou however not. 14, ing J^aug lafTen. 15, Say 
 * Now, when it (?Ug eg nun) struck ten that night, Mrs. Lincoln with her chil- 
 dren went to bed, as she had promised. 16, an, with Ace. 17, e()e ; 
 an — raised = a window was opened up-stairs (oben). 18, Unfinn. 19,1^6 
 ifi . . . gefommen. 20, lor the Presidency = President. Comp. S. 27, N. 4.
 
 l^S GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 99. 
 
 21, = go again and sleep there where you have been drinking ! 22, = and 
 
 the window was closed with a slam (tciebcr jufleirorfen). 23, to rule = ruler. 
 
 24, ^citiamtit Si^raeli, Sorb ^cacoii^ftplt), gcbovcn in Sonbou am 21. ©c^ 
 jiembcr 1804, gefiovben am 19. Slprt(i88i auf fcincm Sanbfi^e Jpugl^cnben, au^gcgcic^ncter 
 Sitterat, fcevudmtev ©taat^mann, gldnjcnbcc {Rebner unb langid^riger Su^ver bev fonfcvoa= 
 tiijen Cartel, fiet)t Bei feineii beicunbeniben Sanb^lcutcn je^t noc^ in fo frifc^cm Slnbenfen, 
 ba^ c3 bem S3crfaffer ber ^iirje twegen crlaubt fein moge, auf feine gldnjenbcn (Srfclge 
 tocitcrnic^t cinjuge^en. 25, in ©cjug auf; use the attributive construction, 
 
 as explained in S. 7, N. 3, ^, and S. 48, N. 6. 26, bei bem. 27, on — 
 
 were = which were ornamented with. 28, nac^ aufgef)obcnet Xafil. 29, here 
 fi^ an'eignen. 30, an bag iSi^. 31, Slnnerion^iievfu^, m. 32, It — that, 
 gieilic^. 33, = and made an energetic (tii^tig) attack upon (auf). 
 
 Section 200, 
 
 THE POWER OP MUSIC. 
 
 On one occasion when young Chopin ^ had been travelling for several 
 days in the slow fashion of German diligences, he was delighted and 
 surprised, on stopping at a small posl-house, to discover a grand piano- 
 forte in one of the rooms ^ and still more surprised to find it in tune * — 
 thanks, probably, to the musical taste of the postmaster's family. He sat 
 down instantly and began to improvise in * his peculiarly happy manner. 
 One by one the travellers were attracted by the unwonted sweet sounds. 
 One of them even allowed ° his beloved pipe to go out in his ecstasy, 
 and the postmaster, his wife, and his two daughters joined the group of 
 listeners. Unmindful of his audience, of the journey, the lapse of time*, 
 and everything but the music, Chopin continued to play, and his com- 
 panions ' to listen in rapt attention, when they were suddenly roused by 
 a stentorian* voice, which made the windows rattle, calling out*: "The 
 horses are ready, gentlemen 1" The postmaster roared out an anathema'" 
 against the disturber — the postillion — and the passengers cast angry 
 glances at him. Chopin started from his seat, but was instantly sur- 
 rounded by his audience, who entreated him to continue. " But we 
 have been here for some time," said Chopin, consulting his watch, " and 
 are due in Posen already'^." " Stay and play, noble young artist," cried 
 the postmaster, " I will find you courier's horses if you will only remain 
 a httle longer." "Do be persuaded ^^" added the postmaster's wife, 
 almost threatening the artist with an embrace ". What could he do but 
 resume his place at the instrument } When at last he paused, the ser- 
 vant appeared with wine ; the host's daughter served the artist first, and 
 then the travellers, upon which the postmaster proposed a cheer for'* the 
 musician, in which all joined ^^ The ladies in their gratitude filled the 
 carriage pockets with the best eatables and wine the house contained ; 
 and when at last the artist rose to go ", his gigantic host seized him in 
 his arms and triumphantly bore him to " the carriage ! Long '* years 
 afterwards Chopin would recall (S. loi, N. 22) this little incident with 
 pleasure, and declare that the plaudits of the press had never given him 
 more delight than the homage ^^ of these simple music-loving Germans. — 
 Manxhester Tit-Bits.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 200. 159 
 
 1, 5tcbetic J^ranfoig (5^o^)tn, bcr fcerui^mte^tamcrBirtuofeimb Jtonnjonifl, beffen 
 mclobiecnreidje SUcafuvfag, SBa^cr, lUotturnoS, 58a((aben, *l5otonaifen imb (Stubcn feinett 
 9lamen ubevad befannt gcniad^t l)abcn, luuvbe im Satjre iSiogii Sffajcwalock bei aBar; 
 f(^aii geboren, unb fiavb am 17. Dftober 1849 in ^axi&, \vo cv fid; feit bent Sa^re 1831 
 niebergelaffcn tjattc. On one occasion, citift. 2, he — rooms = and was 
 
 stopping at (oor) a small post-house, he was delighted and surprised to discover 
 a grand pianoforte (StiJgel, m-) in one of the rooms. 3, to — tune = when 
 
 he found it in good tune. 4, auf; peculiarly = peculiar; happy = charming. 
 
 5, laffen. 6, 3cit»ertaiif, m. 7, Say ' whilst his travelling-companions 
 
 listened to him', etc. 8, = mighty. 8, = through which even the 
 
 windows rattled (evflirren), and which cried. 10, einen ^iuij au^fio^en. 
 
 11, I am due in London already, ic^ foUte beveitS ttl Sonboii fein. The words 
 'said — watch' are best placed after the quotation. 12, fic^ iiberreben 
 
 laffen. 13, bie in if)rem ent^iicfen ben ^unfiler fafi nmarnit ^tte. 14, to 
 
 propose a cheer for a person, tin .^lod^ auf etncn au^bvinc^cn. 15, here ein^ 
 
 ftimmen. 16, here guv Slbvcife. 17, in . . . tjinein. 18, 9ioc^ »ielc. 
 
 19, bie Sl)«nbejeu9uuflen. 
 
 Section 201. 
 
 THE TWO SCHOOLBOYS, OR EYES AND NO EYES'. 
 
 I. 
 
 " Well, Robert, where have you been walking "^ this afternoon ?" said a 
 tutor lo one of his pupils, at the close ^ of a holiday. 
 
 Robert. — I have been to Millthorp-Heath, and so round by * the wind- 
 mill upon Camp-Mount, and home through the meadows by the river 
 side. 
 
 Tutor. — Well, that is a pleasant round ^ 
 
 Robert. — I thought* it very dull, sir; I scarcely met with a single 
 person. I would much rather have gone "^ along the turnpike-road. 
 
 Tutor. — To be sure, if seeing men and horses is your object*, you 
 are, indeed, better entertained on the high-road. But did you not see 
 William (S. 48, N. 2)? 
 
 Robert. — We set out together'; but he lagged behind in the lane, 
 and so '" 1 walked on and left him. 
 
 Tutor. — That was a pity. He would have been company for you. 
 
 Robert. — Oh, he is so tedious, always stopping to look at this thing 
 or that I I would rather walk alone ". 1 dare say he is not come 
 yet. 
 
 Tutor. — Here he comes. Well, William, where have you been ? 
 
 William. — Oh, the pleasantest walk ^^ ! I went all over Millthorp- 
 Heath, and so up to the mill at the top of the hill, and then down among 
 the green meadows by the side of the river home again. 
 
 Tutor. — Why, that is just the round Robert has been taking, and he 
 complains of its dulness and prefers the high-road. 
 
 William. — 1 wonder at that. 1 am sure I hardly took a step that did 
 not delight me ; and I have brought home my handkerchief full of 
 curiosities ^^
 
 l6o GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 20 1 ; 
 
 Tutor. — Suppose", then,' you give us an account of what amused 
 you so much. I fancy it will ^® be as new to Robert as to me. 
 
 William. — I will do it readily. The lane leading to the heath, you 
 know, is close ^® and sandy, so I did not mind it much, but made the 
 best of my way ". However, I spied a curious thing enough '* in the 
 hedge. It was an old crab-tree, out of which grew a bunch of some- 
 thing green ^^ quite different from the tree itself. Here is a branch 
 of it. 
 
 Tutor. — Ah I this is mistletoe, a plant of great fame ^° for the use 
 made of it by the Druids of old ^S iri their religious rites and incantations. 
 It bears ^^ a very slimy, white berry, of which bird-lime may be made, 
 whence -' its Latin name " viscum." It is one of those plants which do 
 not grow in the ground by a root of their own ^*, but fix themselves upon 
 other plants ; whence ^^ they have been humourously ^* styled " parasit- 
 ical," as being hangers on, or dependents. It was the mistletoe of the 
 oak that the Druids particularly honoured. 
 
 1, ober <Bcfjtn unb nicht ©et)en. 2, walking, aiifbnnem ©pajtergatige. Use the 
 2nd pers. sing, when the tutor addresses the boy, but the 3rd pers. pi. when 
 the boy addresses the tutor. 3, am 5lbenb. 4, and — by = banu bei . . . 
 
 t^cvubcv. Camp-Mount, bev Sagerbcrg ; Millthorp-Heath, bie 9JJi[(tf)orper Jpeibc. 
 5, = tour or walk. 6, = I have found. 7, Use the Pluperfect Subj. 
 
 accord, to App. § 32 ; along — road, bie S^auifee. 8, =if you want to see 
 
 men and horses. — 1 am better entertained there, \d^ irevbe mi(^ bort Bcffcv amit^ 
 fieveu. 9, = We went away from home together. 10, = therefore ; and 
 left him = and troubled no more about him (fi^ iim cineii fiimmern). 11, 3(^ 
 getie siet licbev a((cin. I dare say, ttio^t, adv., to be placed after the auxiliary. 
 12, =0h, it was a splendid walk! All over = through the whole of; and so = 
 then; and then = and from there; among = through. 13, = curious things. 
 
 14, 9iuii. 15, = It will certainly. 16, cingepfevc^t. 17, so — way = and 
 therefore I left almost everything unnoticed there and went on as fast as pos- 
 sible. 18, == something most curious. 19, a — green = a green plant. 
 20, = a well (adgcmein) known plant. 21, =the old Druids; in, bet. 
 22, = has. 23, unb bather. 24, which — own, wetcfte tiic^t in bet (Srbe 
 trurjetn. 25, \uegf)alb. 26, fd)evj()afterJ»eife ; parasitical, $avafiten ; 
 as — dependents, ba^ tjeif t ©^maro^er ober Slbijcinglutge. 
 
 Section 202. 
 
 THE TWO SCHOOLBOYS, OR EYES AIH) NO EYES. 
 
 II. 
 
 William. — A little further on I saw a green woodpecker ^ fly to a tree, 
 and run up the trunk like a cat. 
 
 Tutor. — That was ^ to seek /or insects which live in the bark of trees. 
 For that purpose the woodpeckers bore holes into the bark with their 
 strong bills, whereby they do ' a great deal of damage to the trees. 
 
 William. — What beautiful birds they are * ! 
 
 Tutor. — Yes ; the woodpecker has, from its colour and size, been 
 called the English parrot (S. 4, N. 4, man).
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 202. l6l 
 
 William. — When I got upon the heath, how charming it was^ ! The 
 air was so fresh, and the prospect on every side " so free and unbounded ! 
 The heath was all covered with gay flowers, many of which I had never 
 observed before. There were'' at least three different kinds (S. 36, 
 N. 7 y4) of heath (I have them in my handkerchief here) and gorse, and 
 broom, and bell-flowers ; and many others of all colours, of which I will 
 beg you presently to tell me the names ^ 
 Tutor. — That I will do readily. 
 
 William. — I saw, too, several birds that were new to me. There was 
 a pretty grayish one, of the size of a lark, that was hopping about some 
 great stones ; and when he flew he showed a great deal of white above 
 his tail '. 
 
 Tutor. — That was a wheat-ear '". They are reckoned very delicious 
 birds to eat", and frequent the open downs in ^^ Sussex, and some other 
 counties, in great number, 
 
 William. — There was a flock of lapwings upon a marshy part of the 
 heath ^^ that amused me much, As I came near them, some of them 
 kept flying round and round ", just over my head, and crying, " Pewit," 
 "Pewit," so distinctly, one might almost fancy they spoke '^ I thought 
 I should have caught '^ one of them, for he flew as if one of his wings 
 was broken (App. § 33), and often tumbled close to the ground; but as 
 I came near, he always contrived ^^ to get away. 
 
 Tutor. — Ha, ha! you were finely taken in, then^^ ! This was all an 
 artifice of the bird's, to entice you away from its nest, for the lapwings 
 build upon the bare ground, and their nests would easily be observed, 
 did they not draw off^^ the attention of intruders, by their loud cries and 
 counterfeit lameness. 
 
 William. — I wish I had known that ^^ for the bird led me a long 
 chasers often over shoes in water. However, this was the cause [ba»on, 
 
 5. r6i, N. 21] of my falling in with"^ an old man and a boy, who were 
 cutting "^^ and piling up turf for fuel. I had a great deal of talk with 
 them about the manner of preparing the turf, and the price it sells at ^\ 
 They gave me, too, a creature I never saw before — a young viper, which 
 they had just killed. I have seen several common snakes, but this is 
 thicker in proportion, and of a darker colour than they are. 
 
 1, ©riinfpcc^t, m. ; to, auf. 2, = That he did. 3, ju'fucieii. 4,= They 
 (@^) are really charming birds ! 5, = But upon the heath it was charming ! 
 
 6, xiadf alien ©citen (}iu ; all = quite. 7, (^i irarcn bcrt. 8, bevcii 91amcn id) 
 inir ncd^ »on Stjncn crbittcn »ill. 9, and — tail, uitb bcim glicc^cu fiber bem 
 ©d)lvau^e Unip beficbeit wax. 10, ©teittVacf ev, m. ; or ai'eif5fcl*en, n. 11, They — 
 eat = These birds are very much valued (fc^ii^en) on account of their flesh. 
 12, =and live in the downs of. 13, =- In the marshy part of the heath I 
 saw a flock (Sc^av) 0/ lapwings. 14, round and round, imntcr int Xtvcifc 
 (levum. 15, one — spoke, bap i^ fafi lvdt)ute, fie fpvc^eu ,^u Ijovcit. 16, = I 
 should be able to catch. 17, gcl.uig eS ihm immcr. 18, banii bill bii fc^tni 
 anjcfiilH't irovben! 19, did — ofi", fuc^tcu ftc ui^t . . . bainni abjulcnfcii, in- 
 truders = unbidden guests. 20, ©ad ()dtte id^ vcvfter unffcn fellcii. 21, =-for 
 the bird caused (ycvanlaiTcii) me to run a long time after it (bintev eiuciu I)eviagen). 
 22, of— with = that I met. 23, ftcdjeii, str. v. 24, about — at, 
 iiber bie 3u6evcitiiJi^d>vcife uub bie IVvfaufeivveife bed lox^t^. 
 
 VOL. IV. M
 
 l62 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 203. 
 
 Section 203, 
 
 THE TWO SCHOOLBOYS, OR EYES AND NO EYES. 
 
 III. 
 
 Tutor. — True. Vipers frequent ^ those turfy, boggy grounds ^ pretty 
 much, and I have known several turf-cutters bitten by them. 
 
 William. — They are very venomous, are they not ? 
 
 Tutor. — Enough so^ to make their wounds painful and dangerous, 
 though they seldom prove fatal. 
 
 William. — Well, I then took my course * up to the windmill on the 
 mount. I climbed up the steps of the mill, in order to get a better view 
 of the country round ^. What an extensive prospect 1 I counted fifteen 
 church steeples ; I saw several gentlemen's houses * peeping out from 
 the midst of green woods and plantations''; and I could trace the wind- 
 ings* of the river all along the low grounds, till it was lost behind a ridge 
 of hills'. But I will tell you what I mean to do^", if you will give 
 me leave. 
 
 Tutor. — What is that"? 
 
 William. — I will go again and take with me Carey's county map ^^, 
 by which I shall probably be able to make out most of the places. 
 
 Tutor. — You shall have it; and I will go with you, and take my 
 pocket spying-glass. 
 
 William. — I shall be very glad of that. Well, a thought struck me, 
 that, as the hill is called Camp-Mount, there might probably be some 
 remains of ditches and mounds ^* with which I have read that camps 
 were surrounded. And I really believe I discovered something of that 
 sort " running one side of the mount. 
 
 Tutor. — Very likely you might ^^. I know antiquaries have described 
 such remains as existing there, which some suppose to be Roman, others 
 Danish ^^ We will examine them when we go. 
 
 William. — From the hill I went straight down to the meadows below, 
 and walked on the side of a brook that runs^'' into the river. It^* was 
 all bordered with reeds and tall flowering-plants (S. i6, N. lo), quite 
 different from those I had seen on the heath. As I was getting down ^' 
 the bank to reach one of them, I heard something plunge into the water 
 near me. It was a large water-rat, and I saw it swim over to the other 
 side, and go ^** into its hole. There were " a great many large dragon- 
 flies all about the stream. I caught one of the finest, and have him here 
 
 ■•&' 
 
 in a leaf But how I longed to catch a bird that I saw hovering ^^ over 
 the water, and every now and then darting into it ! It was all over a 
 mixture of the most beautiful green and blue, with some orange colour ^'. 
 It was somewhat less than a thrush, and had a large head and bill, and 
 a short tail. 
 
 1, = live in. 2, Wcgcnbcn. 3, = venomous enough. 4, = there- 
 
 upon I went. 5, I had a fine view of the country round, id^ fonntc bie 
 
 Umgcijenb gut liBcvHicfcn. 6, Iiervfc^aftlic^e ^dufer. 7, *13arfanlagen. 8, bcr 
 fi(^ fc^ldngelube Sauf, as Nom.: low grounds = meadows. 9, Jpiigctviicfen, m. 
 
 10, = will do. Supply ' baju ' after ' leave'. 11, SEag benn ? 12, 23e-
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 203. 163 
 
 5tvf£ifartc ; by which = by (mit) the help of which ; ' to make out ', here befttmmcii, 
 w, V. tr. ; places, Dvtfdjaftm, 13, Well — mounds. This passage may be 
 
 construed thus : ' Now, since (J)a nun) the hill is called Camp-Mount, a thought 
 struck me that there are (fic^ bffliibcn) probably some remains of ditches and 
 mounds ((SvbttiaK, m) '. I have read = as I have read. 14, ehrag bcravtigeg ; 
 
 running one side = on the one side. 15, =That is quite (gmte) possible. 
 
 16, to be — Danish, ia^ jtc romifcfcen, aiibcve aber, ba^ fte bdnifcfjen Urfprungg finb. 
 
 17, ftc^ crgic^cn. 18, = The brook : bordered = overgrown, bcttiac^fcn. 
 19, ^inunteiftcigen ; to reach = to pluck. 20, = creep. Read S. 78, N. 14, B. 
 
 21, (Sg iraren bovt, after which place the words ' all — stream ', am 93ad>c. 
 
 22, itmljcrfJiegcn ; every — then, banu unb Wann ; ' to dart ', here ^tnuntcrfdjic^cn ; 
 into it = into the same. 23, It — colour = His plumage (©cftebev) con- 
 sisted of (aiig) a mixture of the finest green and blue with a small addition 
 (3ufa^, m.) of orange colour (Dvaugcngetb). 
 
 Section 204. 
 
 THE TWO SCHOOLBOYS, OR EYES AND 1^0 EYES. 
 
 IV. 
 
 Tutor. — I can tell you what that bird was — a kingfisher, the cele- 
 brated halcyon of the ancients, about which so many tales are told. It 
 lives on^ fish, which it catches in the manner you saw. It builds in holes 
 on the banks, and is a shy, retired ^ bird, never to be seen far from the 
 stream it inhabits. 
 
 William. — I must try to get another sight of him, for I never saw 
 (S. 48, N. 2) a bird that pleased me so much. Well, I followed this litde 
 brook till it entered' the river, and then took'' the path that runs along 
 the bank. On the opposite side, I observed several little birds running 
 along the bank, and making a piping noise \ They were'' brown and 
 white, and about as big as a snipe. 
 
 Tutor. — I suppose they [c§] were sand-pipers''; one of the numerous 
 family of birds (S. 36, N. 7, A) that get their living^ by wading among 
 the shallows and picking up worms and insects. 
 
 William. — There were a great many swallows, too, sporting ® above 
 the surface of the water, that entertained me with their motions. Some- 
 times^" they dashed down into the stream"; sometimes they pursued 
 one another so quickly, that the eye could scarcely follow them. In one 
 place, where a steep sand-bank rose high above the river, I observed 
 manv of them go in and out of holes with which the bank was bored 
 full 'K 
 
 Tutor. — Those [2)a§] were sand-martins ", the smallest of our species 
 of swallows. They are of a mouse-colour above, and white beneath. 
 They '* make their nests, and bring up their young, in these holes, which 
 run a great depth, and by their situation are secure from all plunderers. 
 
 William. — A little further I saw a man in a boat, who was catching 
 eels in an odd way^^ He had a long pole with broad iron prongs" at 
 the end ; just like Neptune's trident ''', only there were five prongs instead 
 of three. This he pushed straight down into the mud, in the deepest 
 parts of the river, and fetched up the eels sticking between the prongs. 
 
 Tutor. — I know the method. It is called the spearing of eels '^ 
 
 M 2
 
 164 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 204. 
 
 William. — While I was looking at him, a heron came flying over my 
 head, with his large flagging wings. He alighted ^^ at the next turn of 
 the river, and I crept softly behind the bank to watch his motions. He 
 had waded into the water as far as his long legs would allow him ^'^ and 
 was standing there motionless with his neck drawn in, looking "^^ intently 
 on the stream. Presently he darted his long bill as quick as lightning 
 into the water, and drew out a fish, which he swallowed. I saw him 
 catch another in the same manner. He then took alarm ^^ at some noise I 
 made, and flew away slowly to a wood at some distance, where he 
 settled. 
 
 1, Bon ; in — saw, auf bie »on bir Beobac^tete 2Beife. 2, bte Siiifam!eit ticBcnb ; 
 never — inhabits = which goes never far away (fic^ entfcrncn) from the stream 
 (@ett)dffer, n.) where it has its nest. 3, fi(^ ergie^en, str. v. refl. 4, betrcten, 
 str. V. tr. 5, running — noise, am Ufct entfan^ ^iipfen unb t>feifen. 6, = looked; 
 and = and were. 7, ©tranbtdufer. 8, * to get one's living ', here ftc^ feine 
 Sla^rung vcvf^affen. Read S. 87, N. 6 ; among the shallows, an ben feid)ten (StcKen ; 
 to wade, utti^er'tt>aten ; and picking up = in order to pick up. 9, *to sport ', 
 
 here feiu <B)pxd trciben ; that = and. 10, iali. 11, = water. 12, I — 
 full = I observed that many of them crept into the holes that were in great 
 number (^DJenge, f.) bored (^inein'6o()ren) into the bank, but then (bann aber) 
 came out again. 13, Itferfc^njalbcn. 14, Commence this period with 
 
 * In these holes — plunderers' ; to make a nest, ein 9left baucn ; to bring up the 
 young, bie Sungcn gvo^ jif ^en. 15, auf wunberUcfie aScife. 16, Sittfe, f- 
 
 17, ^vcijacf, m. 18, bag 3latj!c(^cn. 19, ji^ auf bie Srbe niebertafren. 
 
 20, Insert the grammatical object eg before ' him'. 21, =and looked in- 
 
 tently (mit gefpanntet Slufmerffamfeit) down upon the water (auf . . . t)eniiebei). 
 22, to take alarm at something, burc^ ettt»aS in guvd^t gefe^t luevben. 
 
 Section 205. 
 
 THE TWO SCHOOLBOYS, OR EYES AND NO EYES. 
 
 V. 
 
 Tutor. — Probably his nest was there, for herons build upon the loftiest 
 tree they. can find, and sometimes in society together, like rooks. Form- 
 erly, when these birds were valued for the amusement of hawking \ many 
 gentlemen had their heronries ^ and a few are still remaining. 
 
 William. — I think (S. 64, N. 11) they are the largest wild birds 
 we have. 
 
 Tutor. — They are of great length and spread of wing', but their 
 bodies are comparatively small. 
 
 William. — I then turned homeward, across the meadows, where I 
 stopped awhile, to look at * a large flock of starlings, which kept flying 
 about at no great distance. I could not tell at first what to make of 
 them ", for they rose altogether from the ground as thick as a swarm of 
 bees, and formed themselves into a kind ® of black cloud, hovering over 
 the field. After taking a short round '^, they settled again, but presently 
 rose in the same manner. I dare say ^ there were hundreds of them. 
 
 Tutor. — Perhaps so'; for in the fenny counties their flocks are so 
 numerous '° as to break down whole acres of reeds, by settling on them ".
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 205. 1 65 
 
 This disposition ^^ of starlings to fly in close swarms was remarked even 
 by Homer, who compares the foe (S. 48, N. 6) flying from one of his 
 heroes to a cloud of starlings retiring dismayed at the approach of 
 the hawk. 
 
 William. — After I had left the meadows, I crossed " the corn-fields 
 in the way to our house, and passed close by a deep marl-pit. Looking 
 into it, I saw, on one of the sides, a cluster of what " I took to be shells ; 
 and upon going down, I picked up a clod of marl '^ which was quite 
 full of them ; but how sea-shells can get there, I cannot imagine. 
 
 Tutor. — I do not wonder at your surprise, since many philosophers 
 have been much perplexed to account for the same appearance ^^ It is 
 not uncommon to find ^' great quantities of shells and relics of marine 
 animals, even in the bowels of high mountains, very remote from 
 the sea. 
 
 William. — I got ^* to the high field next to our house just as the sun 
 was setting, and I stood looking at it till it was quite lost ^®. What a 
 glorious sight ! The clouds were tinged with purple, crimson, and 
 yellow of all shades and hues, and the clear sky varied from blue to a 
 fine green at the horizon. But how large the sun appears just as it sets ! 
 I think it seems twice as big as when it is over-head. 
 
 1, for — hawking = on account of the amusement which they afforded 
 through hawking (bie Salfciii^idt'). 2, 9iei()crflanb, m. 3, They — wing = 
 
 They have very large, long wings. 4, = to observe ; to keep flying about, 
 uml)crfiic9en ; at — distance, in nur gcringcv (Siitfevnung vcu mir. 5, = I could 
 
 not recognise them at first. ' To rise ', here fid) in bie 8uft cmpovfdjunngcn ; 
 thick, bid^t. 6, a kind, (jkidifam ; hovering — field, aU fie ubn bcm ^tUic l)in 
 
 unb ifix iijWihtm. 7, = After they had been flying about /or a short time. 
 
 8, * I dare say ' may be briefly rendered by the adv. gmn§. Read S. 104, N. 19. 
 
 9, ©ag ifl Icicl}t mcglic^. 10, = they exist (\?crf)anbcn fcin) in such masses ; as 
 to = that they. 11, = when they settle upon the same (to agree with 'reeds'). 
 12, = peculiarity. 13, = I went through the corn-fields home again. 
 14, a — what, cine jufantmcnijeba((te SJiaffc, wdiji. 15, Nom. cin Jlhimpcn (m.) 
 SJ'Jevcjcl; of them = of shells. 16, since — appearance, ba fd^on ijiclc 3iatuv; 
 forf(f)er [tdj fiber bie (Srfldvung biefer (Srfcfieinung ben .(tcpf ^evbrcd}cu Ijabcn. 17, = that 
 one finds. 18, gelangen; to, anf ; high field, Sln^iJlje, f. 19, =till it had 
 entirely disappeared at the (am) horizon. 
 
 Section 206. 
 
 THE TWO SCHOOLBOYS, OR EYES AND NO EYES. 
 
 VI. 
 
 Tutor. — It does so^ ; and you may probably have observed the same 
 apparent enlargement of the moon at its rising ^ 
 
 William. — I have**; but pray what is the reason of this? 
 
 Tutor. — It is an optical deception, depending upon principles which I 
 cannot well explain to you, till you know more of that branch o/" science. 
 But what a number of new ideas this afternoon's walk has aff"orded you. 
 I do not wonder that you found it amusing *, and it has been very in- 
 structive too. Did you see (S. 48, N. 2) nothing of all these sights, 
 Robert ?
 
 l66 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 2o6. 
 
 Robert. — I saw some of them, but I did not take particular notice 
 of them. 
 
 Tutor. — Why not ? 
 
 Robert. — I do not know. I did not care about them ; and I made 
 the best of my way home ^ 
 
 Tutor. — That would have been (App. § 33) right, if you had been 
 sent on a message %• but as you only walked for amusement'', it would 
 have been wiser to have sought out as many sources of it as possible *. 
 But as it is^ : one man walks through the world with the eyes open, and 
 another with them shut, and ^° upon this difference depends all the^^ supe- 
 riority the one acquires above the other. I have known sailors ^^ who 
 have been in all the quarters of the world, and could tell you nothing 
 but^' the signs of the tippling houses they frequented" in dif- 
 ferent ports, and the price and quality of the liquor. On the other 
 hand ^^, a Franklin could not even cross the Channel without making 
 some observation useful to mankind ^'^. While many a vacant, thought- 
 less youth is whirled throughout Europe ^^, without gaining ^* a single 
 idea worth crossing a street for ^', the observing eye and inquiring mind 
 find matter of improvement and delight'^" in every ramble ?« fowjt or 
 country Do you then, William, continue to make use of your eyes ; and 
 you, Robert, learn that eyes were given you to use. — Dr. Aikin. 
 
 1, = Quite right. 2, of — rising, tcim Sliif^ange besJ 2)foubeg. 3, = Yes. 
 
 4, = interesting. 5, and — home = and went home as quickly as possible. 
 
 6, if — message, ^atte man bi(^ aug9ef(^ic!t, urn eiue Sefcrtjiing ju »eiTi(i}ten. 7, to 
 walk for amusement, eiiicn Spajiergang ntac^en. 8, to — possible, fjdttcii bit 
 
 bcnfetben fo ttiet line mcgtic^ aug;^ubeuten gefu(^t. 9, @g iji aber nun einmal fo ; one 
 man, bet cine ; another, bet anbere. 10, and just (gevabe). 11, = the great. 
 
 12, ©c^iffer. 13, and — but, bennoc^ aber won nic^tes anbevcm ju er^af)len jvu^ten, 
 alg von. 14, - visited. 15, 3lubererfeitg tiingegen. 16, Use the attribu- 
 tive construction. 17, ganj (Suropa burdjfiicgt. 18, fiic^ an'eigncn. 
 19, worth — for = for (tregen) which it would have been worth while to go over 
 the street. 20, jur ^ele()vung unb jum ©enuffe. The words * in every 
 ramble ' must be placed after ' mind '. 
 
 Sectio7i 207. 
 
 THE KING AND THE MILLER. 
 I. 
 
 In the reign ^ of Frederick the Great (see S. 192, N. i), king of Prussia, 
 there was^ a mill near Potsdam which obstructed the view from the 
 windows of the palace of Sans Souci. Annoyed by this drawback to his 
 favourite residence ^ the king sent* to the owner of the mill inquiring 
 the price for which he would sell it. " For no price," was the reply of 
 the sturdy Prussian ; and in a moment of anger the monarch gave orders^ 
 that the mill should be pulled down. " The king may do this," said the 
 miller, quietly folding his arms; "but there are (S. 82, N. 7) laws in 
 Prussia, and he will find them out"". Forthwith he commenced a law- 
 suit against the monarch, the issue of which was '', that the court gave a
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 207. 167 
 
 decision against His Majesty, compelling him ^ to rebuild the mill, and 
 in addition ^ to pay a large sum of money as a compensation for the 
 injury he had done". The king felt mortified (S. 87, N. 6) at having 
 been worsted by one of his subjects, but had the magnanimity to say, 
 addressing " his courtiers : " I am glad to find that there are just laws 
 and upright judges in my kingdom who are bold enough to decide 
 against me when they think I am in the wrong." Many years after- 
 wards (App. § 14), a descendant of the honest miller, who had in dt/e 
 course of time succeeded to the hereditary possession of the property ^'', 
 found himself involved in pecuniary difficulties that had become 
 insurmountable. 
 
 1, = At (^u) the time of the reign. See S. 5 3, N. 9. 2, there — Potsdam = 
 stood near (bei) Potsdam a mill. 3, 2)ev [eiiiem ^tebliiu-^efdjloffe i)ievt)UV(^ 
 
 ern?ad)fml)e Slac^tcil ijcvcvop ben Jlcnig fe(}r. 4, = and he sent. 5, = the 
 
 order. 6, =and he will soon convince himself of it. 7, the — was, 
 
 ivielcfccr bamit enbcte. 8, = and compelled him. 9, and in addition, unb uoc^ 
 obeiibrctn ; sum — compensation, (SiUfd^dbigunc^efummc, f. 10, Supply ' to the 
 miller'. 11, =to. 12, Liter. = who in course of time and through 
 
 inheritance had come into the possession of the mill. 
 
 Secfw7i 208. 
 
 THE KING AND THE MILLER. 
 II. 
 
 In his distress he wrote to Frederick William IV, who was at that time 
 king of Prussia, reminding him of the refusal experienced by Frederick the 
 Great at the hands' of his ancestor the miller, and stating^ that' if His 
 Majesty now wished to obtain possession of the property, he would, in 
 his present embarrassed circumstances, most willingly dispose of the mill. 
 The king immediately wrote, with his own hand *, //le following reply : 
 
 " My Dear Neighbour, 
 
 I cannot allow you to sell the mill. It must remain in the pos- 
 session of your family as long as one of your descendants survives ■', for 
 the building belongs" to the history of Prussia, and is a standing'' memo- 
 rial of the integrity of our judges and the impartiality of our laws. I am 
 sorry, however, to hear that you are in straitened circumstances, and 
 therefore send you six thousand dollars^ to pay off your debts, and hope 
 the sum will be sufficient for the purpose. Consider me '■' always 
 
 Your affectionate'" neighbour, 
 
 Frederick William." 
 
 The mill still stands, and is occupied by the^' descendants of the reso- 
 lute miller who had the fortitude to thwart the despotic monarch in his 
 desire '^ to improve the prospect from the windows of his palace. — 
 Chambers's " Short Stories." 
 
 1, reminding — hands = reminded him of the refusal (atfrfildvjic^c SliitUunt) 
 which Fred, the Gr. had received at the hands (feiteiis?). 2, = stated. 
 
 3, =that he would in his present embarrassed circumstances most willingly 
 sell the mill, if, etc. 'To obtain possession of the property', here ba« *^c; 
 (i^tl)um fdujiii^ envcrbcii. 4, with — hand, civjc iU)diu ivj, adj., which use after
 
 l68 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 2o8. 
 
 'following'. 5, nod^ am Scben fcht. 6, an'gcljoren. 7, Meibenb, adj.; to, 
 an. 8, !£f)alev (m.), formerly the standard coin in Germany, and equal to 
 
 3 sh. English. 9, = I remain always. 10, here lt»o^ltt>o([enb, adj. 
 
 11, = and is still in the possession of the. 12, to thwart — desire = to 
 
 oppose (jlc^ {inec @ac^e luibevfe^en) the desire of the despotic king. 
 
 Section 209. 
 
 A FKIEND IN NEED (S. 3, N. 2). 
 I. 
 
 One wet wintry night, when a gentleman was hurrying along^ one of the 
 crowded thoroughfares of London, his attention was arrested by a lean, 
 hungry-looking dog which rushed past him. He observed that it had a 
 collar ^ round its neck, to which a basket was attached. If it was (App. 
 § 36) a dog that ran on errands \ he thought that surely its owner would 
 feed it better, and its ribs would not look so spare. Thinking that there 
 was some mystery connected with the animal *, he resolved to follow it ^ 
 After a ^ time it turned up a narrow lane into a stable-yard, where some 
 coachmen and hostlers were loitering about. It then got up on its hind- 
 legs, and began walking about in circles ''. The bystanders, surprised 
 at this strange proceeding, formed round in a ring and looked on. It 
 walked five times round, standing ^ erect, and looking fixedly before it 
 like a soldier on duty ^, evidently doing its utmost'" to make the company 
 laugh. After taking a short rest, it began its performance " again, but 
 this time on its fore-feet, pretending to stand '^ on its (S. 43, N. 9) head. 
 Tiring of this '^, it lay down in the middle of the ring, feigning to be 
 dead '*, and going through all the convulsions of a dying dog, breathing 
 heavily, panting, suffering the lower jaw to fall ''^, and then turning over 
 motionless. It did this so well, that a woman in the crowd exclaimed : • 
 " Poor beast ! " and drew her hand across her eyes *". Having lain still 
 a minute, with its eyes closed, it got up and shook itself, to show that 
 the performance " was over. It then went round begging on its hind- 
 legs, standing '^ a little while before each of the spectators, and earnestly 
 watching '' to see whether they put their hands into their pockets or not. 
 The basket round its neck had a slit in the lid, into which the coppers 
 might be dropped. 
 
 1, to hurry along, bmc()ci'tcn, insep. comp. w. v. Place * oye — night ' after 
 'gentleman'; wet = rainy; thoroughfares = streets. 2, here ^algbaitb, n. ; 
 
 round its neck, um. 3, to run on errands, aSeforginigen au^'tic^tcn ; and — 
 
 sparer and it would not look so dreadfully lean. 4, = Since the matter 
 
 appeared very mysterious (idtfcU)alft) to him. 5, =the animal. 6, tuvj ; 
 
 turned up = ran into ; into = which led to. 7, tm .fveife. 8, = held himself. 
 9, auf bent ipoften. 10, = and did evidently his best. 11, here = tricks, 
 
 .Runfiftucfe. 12, = and did (ftc^ anfteden) as if he stood (App. § 33). 
 
 13, = Hereupon. 14, to feign to be dead, fid) tct fteKen. The Present 
 
 Participles in this passage must be rendered by the Imperfect in German. 
 15, = dropped (fallen (affen) the lower jaw. 16, mit tev -fpanb uber bie Slujeii 
 
 fal)ren. 17, a^orfteKunij, f. 18, (^i((e jietjeiu 19, = and watched 
 
 (becbac^ten) them quite earnestly (ernftf)aftj.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 210. 169 
 
 Section 210. 
 
 A FRIEND IN" NEED. 
 
 II. 
 
 The gentleman put in a shilling, and stooped down to read a crumpled 
 piece of paper which hung loosely from the collar. It bore these words, 
 written in a ^ shaky hand : " This is the dog of a poor man who is bed- 
 ridden. It earns bread for its master. Good people, do not prevent it 
 from returning to its home." On receiving (S. 55, N, i) any money, 
 the poor creature returned thanks by a wag of its tail. Almost every one 
 of the spectators gave the dog something, and when it had finished col- 
 lecting the money, it barked once or twice, as if to say good-bye, and 
 then scampered off. On entering the principal street, it quickened its 
 pace '^j and the gentleman finding it impossible to keep up with it^, hailed * 
 a cab, and, much to the driver's amazement ^, cried : " Follow that dog." 
 After a time the dog bolted up a narrow alley", through which the cab 
 could not pass ^. The gentleman alighted, and followed the dog through 
 a dark close up* to the garret of a rickety dwelling. Pulling the string 
 attached to the latch, the dog opened the door, and the stranger followed. 
 Its master lay dying ^ on a wretched bed, supported ^° by the earnings of 
 the faithful creature, who practised " the same tricks alone as it used to 
 do under its master's superintendence. Death soon ended^'^ the poor 
 man's sufferings, and the dog followed the coffin to the grave. The 
 gentleman took home the dog, but next morning the poor beast howled 
 impatiently for ^^ the basket to go its rounds as usual. It went with the 
 pennies to the cemetery and laid them on a grave, whining '* mournfully, 
 and trying to scratch up the earth. Twice more it went out all day, and 
 brought back the money for its master ; but, on finding the money un- 
 touched, it lay down at full length upon the grave. The next morning 
 it did not go its rounds, for it was dead. — Chambers's " Short Stories." 
 
 1, in a = with. 2, here Sauf, m. 3, to keep up with a person, gletc^cii 
 iSc^iitt mit cinem l)a(teH. 4, an'nifcn, sep. comp. str. w. tr. 5, =to the 
 
 great amazement of the driver. 6, v^i't"''''^ '" fi'"'" ©urc^^ang I)iuein'(aufen. 
 
 7, ViiiTif«n. 8, ^sajTaiie, f. : to = into; rickety, baufallig. 0, im ©tcrbeit. 
 
 10, = and was supported (untcrf^attcn or ucifLngcu). 11, here auei'ubcii. 
 
 12, ciucr ©ad^e (Dat.) cin iSnbe mac^eii. 13, ua^ ; * to go one's rounds ', 
 
 here feiue Oiuube lincber an'tietcu. 14, = whereby he whined. 
 
 Section 211. 
 
 MY FIRST GUINEA. 
 
 I well remember', when I was very young, possessing for the first time 
 a guinea. I remember too that this circumstance cost me no little per- 
 plexity and anxiety. As I passed along the streets, the tear of losing my 
 guinea induced me oftentimes to take it out of my pocket to look at it. 
 First I put'^ it in one pocket, then I took it out and put it in another;
 
 170 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 21 1. 
 
 after a while I took it out of the second pocket and placed ^ it in another, 
 really perplexed' what to do with it (S. 27, N. 7). 
 
 At last my attention was arrested by a book-auction. I stepped in 
 and looked about me. First one lot * was put up, and then another, and 
 sold to the highest bidder ^. At last I ventured to the table, just as the 
 auctioneer was putting up " The History of the World," in two large 
 folio volumes. I instantly thrust^ my hand into my (S. 43, N. 9) pocket, 
 and began turning over * my guinea, considering whether I should have 
 money enough to buy this lot. The bidding proceeded '', and at last I 
 ventured to bid too. "Halloo! my little man!" said the auctioneer, 
 "what! (S. 27, N. 7) not content with less than the world.?" This 
 remark greatly confused me, and drew the attention of the whole com- 
 pany* toward me, who^ seeing (S. 30, N. 4) me anxious'" to possess 
 the books, refrained from bidding against me; and so, "The World" 
 was knocked down " to me at a very moderate price. 
 
 How to get ^^ these huge books home was the next consideration ". 
 The auctioneer offered to send them, but I, not knowing what sort of 
 creatures auctioneers were ^*, determined to take them myself ; so, after ^^ 
 the assistant had tied them up, I marched out of the room with these 
 huge books upon my shoulder, like Samson with the gates of Gaza, amid 
 the smiles of all present. 
 
 When I reached my home, after the servant had opened the door, the 
 first person I met was my sainted mother. 
 
 "My dear boy," she said, "what have you go/ there.'' I thought you 
 would not keep your guinea long." 
 
 " Do not be angry, mother," said I, throwing the books down upon 
 the table. " I have bought ' The World ' for nine shillings." 
 
 This was on a Saturday, and I well remember sitting up'* till it was 
 well-nigh midnight, turning over-''' this " History of the World." The 
 books became my delight, and were carefully read through and through. 
 
 When I grew older, I became at length a Christian, and my love of 
 books'*, among other things, led me to desire to be a Christian minister ''. 
 To the possession of these books I attribute, in a great measure, any honours 
 that have been added to my name in connection with literature. I have 
 not mentioned this anecdote to gratify any foolish feeling ^^, but to en- 
 courage in all whom I see before me that ^* love of literature which has 
 afforded me such unspeakable pleasure — pleasure ^^ which I would not 
 have been without for all the riches of the Indies '^^ — The Rev. Dr. 
 Vaughan. 
 
 1, Supply 'the time' here; to remember, ji^ erimtern, governs the Gen.; 
 possessing = and possessed. 2, ftccfcu. 3, fid) in gvcfer ^^erlccjeu^eit 
 
 befxnben. 4, ^artte, f. ; to put up to auction, to public sale, ^uc sBci-fieiflciunci 
 
 briucjeti, iintcr ben Jjiammer bvingcii, or ^uin ojfentlic^cn a3cvfaiif fledcn. 5, bee 
 
 SDJeiftbicteube ; to, an. 6, Ijevum'bvcticn ; considering = and considered (ubcv; 
 
 le'gcn, insep. comp. w. v.). 7, Oonftatten gefjcn. 8, = of all the per- 
 
 sons present (bie Slnlvcfenbcn) ; toward, an]. 9, Finish first the clause ' who 
 
 refrained from bidding against me ', and then commence the other, and use 
 this construction in all cases where it can possibly be employed. 
 10, We are an.\ious to buy the property, unv mi3ct;tcn bat? iBejiljtnm ijcvne fauftu.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 211. I'J i 
 
 11, to knock down an article to the last bidder, eincn 5lvtifct bem jute^t Sietcntcn 
 ^u'fc^lacjeii. 12, to get home, nai^ -^aufe fct)affeii. 13, (Siwd^uiig, f. 
 
 14, = but since I had not yet any experience in such matters, I determined, 
 etc. 15, so, after = and when. 16, =that I sat up. 17, =and 
 
 turned over (burc^blat'tcrn, insep. comp. w. v.). 18, Sieb^abevei (f.) fur ®u^ev. 
 19, =to become a Christian Minister (@eifl(i(^er). 20, Supply ' of vanity ' 
 
 here. 21, = the ; of, jn, contracted with the Dat. of the def. art. 
 
 22, =a pleasure (®cnu§, m.) 23, =of India. 
 
 Section 212. 
 
 THE GREEN VAULTS IN DRESDEN. 
 
 Dresden, May ii, 1845. 
 
 We were fortunate in seeing the Green Vaults or " Das griine Gewolbe," 
 a collection of jewels and costly articles \ unsurpassed in Europe (S. 7, 
 N. 3, A). Admittance is only granted to six persons at a time, who pay 
 a fee ^ of two thalers. The customary way is to employ a " valet de 
 place"," who goes round from one hotel to another, until he has col- 
 lected the required number, when ^ he brings them together and conducts 
 them to the keeper who has charge of the treasures. The first hall into 
 which we were ushered contained works in bronze ^ They were all 
 small, and chosen with regard to their artistical value. The next room 
 contained statues, and vases ornamented with reliefs, in ivory. The 
 most remarkable work was the fall of Lucifer and his angels, containing 
 ninety-two figures in all ", carved out of a single piece 0/ ivory sixteen 
 inches high ! It was the work of an Italian monk, and cost him many 
 years of hard labour ''. 
 
 However costly the contents of these halls (S. 27, N. 7), they were 
 only an introduction to those which followed. Each one exceeded the 
 other in splendour and costliness. The walls were covered to the ceiling 
 with rows of goblets, vases, etc., of polished jasper, agate, and lapis 
 lazuli. We saw two goblets, each prized at six thousand thalers, made 
 of gold and precious stones; also the great pearl called the Spanish 
 Dwarf, nearly as large as a pullet's t^g ; globes and vases cut entirely 
 out of the mountain crystal ; magnificent Nuremberg watches and clocks, 
 and a great number of figures made ingeniously of rough ^ pearls and 
 diamonds. The seventh hall contains the coronation robes of Augustus II, 
 king of Poland, and many costly specimens of carving in wood'-*. A 
 cherry-stone is shown in a glass case, which has one hundred and twenty- 
 five faces, all perfectly finished, carved upon it '". The ne.xt room we 
 entered sent back a glare of splendour " that perfectly dazzled us. It 
 was all gold, diamond, ruby, and sapphire. Every case sent out a glow 
 and a glitter that it seemed like a cage of imprisoned lightnings '^ 
 Wherever the eye turned it was met by a blaze of broken rainbows. 
 They were there by hundreds ^", and every gem was a fortune. We here 
 saw the largest known onyx, nearly seven inches long, and four inches 
 broad! One of the most remarkable works is the throne and court of 
 Aurungzebe, the Indian king, by Dinglinger, a celebrated goldsmith of 
 the last century. It contains one hundred and thirty-two figures, all
 
 172 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 212. 
 
 of enamelled gold, and each one most perfectly and elaborately finished. 
 It was purchased by Prince Augustus for fifty-eight thousand thalers, 
 which was not an exorbitant sum, considering that the making of it occu- 
 pied Dinglinger and thirteen workmen for seven years ! 
 
 It is almost impossible to estimate the value of the treasures these 
 halls contain. That of gold and jewels alone must be many millions of 
 dollars, and the amount of labour expended on these toys of royalty is 
 incredible. — Bayakd Taylor, " Views Afoot." 
 
 1, ^cfittc^teiten. 2, (Sinhntt^getb, n. 3, Generally one engages a * valet 
 de place ' (ciii Scf}ubcbicutev, Nom.), 4, = and then. 5, Svoi^cfa^eu. 
 
 6, im ©aitjeii. 7, hard labour, angejlvcngte Strbeit. 8, here ungci'd^Uffcii. 
 9, i^oljfc^ui^evcicn. 10, which — it = upon which are carved 125 faces, 
 which are all perfectly finished (auSgebitbet). 11, »iebevftra()(te tton einem 
 f)cn:ti(^eti ©laii^je ; * perfectly ', here farmli^. 12, 5lug iebem Jlaften crftral)lte 
 [0 Old @(anj unb Sid^t, ba^ eg fd)ien, eS cntftvcmten i(;m taufciib ^(i§e. 13, = There 
 were ((5^ imuti bovt) hundreds of gems. 
 
 Sediofi 213. 
 
 THE DEATH OP LITTLE NELL. 
 
 She was dead. No sleep (S. 27, N. 7) so beautiful and calm, so free 
 from trace ^ of pain, so fair to look upon. She seemed "- a creature fresh 
 from the hand of God, and waiting for the breath of life ; not one who 
 had lived and suffered death. Her couch was dressed with here and 
 there some winterberries and green leaves, gathered in a spot she had 
 been used to favour. " When I die, put near me something ' that has 
 loved the light, and had the sky above it always." These were her 
 words. 
 
 She was dead. Dear (S. 10, N. 2), gentle, patient, noble Nell was 
 dead. Her little bird — a poor, slight thing *, the pressure of the finger 
 would have crushed — was stirring nimbly in its cage ; and the strong 
 heart of its child-mistress ^ was mute and motionless for ever ! Where 
 were the traces of her early cares, her sufferings and fatigues? All gone ^ 
 Sorrow was dead, t?tdeed\n her''; but peace and perfect happiness were 
 born* — imaged in her tranquil beauty and (S. 10, N. 9) profound 
 repose. 
 
 And still her former self lay there, unaltered in this change *. Yes, the 
 old fireside ® had smiled upon that same sweet face ; it had passed like 
 a dream through haunts of misery and care — at the door of the poor 
 schoolmaster on the summer evening, before the furnace-fire upon the 
 cold wet night, at the still bedside of the dying boy ", there had been 
 the same mild and loving look. So shall we know the angels in their 
 majesty after death. — Charles Dickens, " The Old Curiosity Shop." 
 
 1, =from the traces. 2, = seemed to be a creature (.Rveatur, f.). Fresh — 
 God, erjl [oeben am ber ^anb ©otteg I)enjor9e9aii9en, which use attributively before 
 'creature'; breath, Dbcm, m. 3, bann gebct mir ctimg ittit. 4, tin armfes 
 
 ligeg fleincg 2)iug. 5, finblic^e ^m\\\, Nom. 6, 9l((c^ tear lurfc^ttuuben. 
 
 7, war in if)r evfiorbcn; were born, itaven bafuv Jvieber in i^v erftanbm; imaged in,
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 2 1 3. 1 73 
 
 tine e3 . . . Bc^eugte ; her tranquil beauty = her tranquil beautiful face (9lnt(i^, 
 n.). 8, Liter. = And still (bcuno(^) lay her former self in this change (33emHmb; 
 lung) unaltered there. 9, bcv l)dit6lic^c J£>crt) ; * to smile upon ', here aiif 
 
 etwa^ I)enue'l)evld(^cln. 10, = brother. 
 
 Section 214. 
 
 THE CHILDHOOD OF ROBERT OLIVE'. 
 
 Some lineaments of the character of the man were early discerned in 
 the child. There remain ^ letters written by his relations when he was in 
 his seventh year ; and from ^ these letters it appears that, even at that 
 early age, his strong will and his fiery passions, sustained by a constitu- 
 tional intrepidity *, had begun to cause great uneasiness to his family. 
 " Fighting," says one* of his uncles, " to which he is out of measure 
 addicted, gives his temper such a fierceness and imperiousness, that he 
 flies out on every occasion ^" The old people of the neighbourhood 
 still remember to have heard from their parents how Bob Clive climbed 
 to the top of the lofty steeple of Market Drayton, and with what terror 
 the inhabitants saw (S. 78, N. 14, B) him seated on a stone spout near 
 the summit. They also relate how he formed all the idle lads of the 
 town into a kind of predatory army ", and compelled the shop-keepers 
 to submit to a tribute of apples and halfpence, in consideration of which '' 
 he guaranteed the security of their windows. He was sent from school 
 to school, making very little progress in his learning", and gaining for 
 himself everywhere the character of an exceedingly naughty boy. One 
 of his masters, it is said, was sagacious enough to prophesy that the idle 
 lad would make a great figure in the world'. — Lord Macaulay, " Lord 
 Clive." 
 
 I, OJcbcvt Scvb SU»c, gcborcn bfii 29. ©eHcmkv 1725, gcfiovben ben 22. 0^ci^em6cc 
 1774, war bev '-iifv^viuibcr bes brittifc^eu Oieic^e^ in Snbieit. 2, (5\^ crittieren noc^. 
 
 3, an^ •. it appears, evgiebt ftd^. 4, tveld^c buvd) bic if)nt angcbovcne Ihifvfcfivocfcn; 
 
 Ijeit nc(^ unterjlfajt unirbcn. 5, ba§ cr bei jeber Wetecjenljeit in I)cftiv'5en 3orn gerdt. 
 6, He formed of them a kind of predatory army, er bilDete mi^ tljncn eine 2lvt 
 OJduberbanbe. 7, in — which, trcfur. 8, = studies. 9, to make 
 
 a great figure in the world, cine grope 9io((e in bcv fficU fpiclcn. 
 
 Section 215, 
 
 AN ADVENTURE WITH A LION. 
 
 I. 
 
 It is welP known that if one of a troop of lions is killed, the others 
 take the hint -, and leave that part of the country. So ^ the next time the 
 herds were attacked, I went with the people, in order to encourage them 
 to rid themselves of the annoyance by destroying * one of the marauders. 
 We found the lions on a small hill about a quarter of a mile in length ', 
 which was covered with trees. A circle of men was formed round it, and 
 they gradually closed up ®, ascending pretty near to each other. Being 
 down below on the plain with a native schoolmaster, named Mebalwe, a 
 most excellent man (S. 53, N. 9), I saw one of the lions sitting (S. 78,
 
 174 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 21 5. 
 
 N. 1 4, B) on a piece o/rock within the now-dosed circle of men. Mebalwe 
 fired at him before I could ''j and the ball struck the rock on which the 
 animal was sitting. He bit at the spot struck, as a dog does at a stick 
 or stone thrown at him ; then leaping away *, broke through the opening 
 circle, and escaped unhurt. The men were afraid to attack him on 
 account of their belief in [an] witchcraft. When the circle was re-formed, 
 we saw two other lions in it; but were afraid^ to fire lest we should strike 
 the men, and they allowed the beasts to burst through also. If (App. 
 § 36) the Bakatta had acted according to the custom of the country, they 
 would have speared the lions in their attempt to get out. Seeing we 
 could not get '^^ them to kill one of the lions, we bent our footsteps ^' 
 towards the village ; in going round the end of the hill, however, I saw 
 one of the beasts sitting on z. piece ^rock as before, but this time he had 
 a little bush in front. Being about thirty yards ^^ off", I took a good aim 
 at his body through the bush, and fired both barrels into it. The men 
 then called out: "He is shot! he is shot!" Others cried: "He has 
 been shot by another man, too ; let us go to him 1 " I did not see any 
 one else shoot at him, but I saw the lion's tail ^^ erected in anger behind 
 the bush, and turning to the people, said : " Stop a little till I load ^* 
 again." 
 
 1, = generally. 2, eS fic^ jur SBavnitttg biencii laffett. 3, So, 9llg nun ; 
 
 the next time, uncbevum, which place after the subject. 4, biivd^ SScvtilgung, 
 
 which place, with ' one — marauders ', immediately after the reflective pronoun 
 *fic^'. 5, Use the attributive construction. 6, and — up, n?elc^e fi^ 
 
 a((nia(}U(^ enger an cinanber anfdjlciTen ; ascending = and ascended (ben Sevg ^iuanf; 
 ftcigen). 7, cl)e ic^ c3 tljun fonnte. 8, =and when, hereupon, he sprang 
 
 away, he, etc. 9, = but ventured not ; lest, au^ 5in(J)t, bag ; render 
 
 ' should' by the Imperf. Subj. of mcgcn. 10, ba^in bringen. 11, we went 
 
 (fc^vctten). 12, = steps ; distances are generally measured by steps in Ger- 
 
 many. 13, a lion's tail, @cf)Weif, m. ; in, au6. 14, =have loaded. 
 
 Section 216. 
 
 AN ADVENTURE WITH A LION. 
 
 II. 
 When (S. 27, N. 7) in the act' of ramming down the bullets, I heard 
 a shout. Starting, and looking half round, I saw the lion just in the act of 
 springing ^ upon me. I was upon a little height ; he caught my shoulder 
 as he sprang^, and we both came to the ground below together. Growl- 
 ing (S. 55, N. I, rtdt)rcnb) horribly close to my ear, he shook me as a 
 terrier dog does a rat. The shock produced a stupor similar to that 
 which seems to be felt by a mouse after the first shake of the cat. It 
 caused a sort of dreaminess, in which there was ^ no sense of pain nor 
 feeling of terror, though I was quite conscious of all that was happening. 
 It was like what ^ patients, particularly under the influence of chloroform, 
 describe, who see all the operation, but do not feel the knife. This sin- 
 gular condition was not the result of any mental process. The shake 
 annihilated fear, and allowed no sense of horror*' in looking round at the 
 beast. This peculiar state is probably produced in all animals killed by
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 2l6. 175 
 
 the carnivora ' ; and, if so *, is a merciful provision by our benevolent 
 creator for lessening the pain of death (S. 76, N. 22, B, i). Turning 
 round to relieve myself of the weight, as he had one paw on the back of 
 my head ®, I saw his eyes directed to Mebalwe, who was trying to shoot 
 him at a distance of ten or fifteen yards. His gun, a flint one '°, missed 
 fire in both barrels ; the lion immediately left me, and attacking Mebalwe, 
 bit" his thigh. Another man, whose life I had saved before, after he 
 had been tossed '^ by a buffalo, attempted to spear the lion while he was 
 biting Mebalwe. He left Mebalwe, and caught this man by the shoulder ; 
 but, at that moment, the bullets he had received took effect ", and he fell 
 down dead. The whole was the work of a few moments, and must have 
 been his paroxysm of dying rage. In order to take out the charm from 
 him, the Bakatta on the following day made a huge bonfire over his 
 carcass, which was declared to be that of the largest lion they had ever 
 seen. Besides crunching the bone into splinters, he left " eleven teeth 
 wounds on the upper part of my arm. — Dr. Livingstone. 
 
 1, 'to be in the act of doing anything', here ki ctlita^ befd}afticjt fcin. Read 
 S. 87, N. 6, which rule applies in this case likewise. 2, ' in the act of 
 
 springing ', here = about (im ^-Bcgriff) to spring. 3, as he sprang, im @pnuiC(C, 
 with which commence the clause. 4, in — was = which possessed. 5, = I 
 found myself in that state (3iiftaub, m.), which. 6, anti fioi5te miv fciiicn 
 
 ©c^recfen ein. 7. here rei^eube Sieve. 8, =and if this is the case, it 
 
 is, etc. 9, on — head, auf mciiicni i^iiitcvfopfe. 10, His — one, ©cine 
 
 iVlinte ; to miss fire, mnfagcn. 11, and — bit = attacked M., and bit. etc. 
 
 12, in bie 811ft j'd}leubevu. 13, to take effect, ju unvfeu aiifatujcu. 
 
 14, juvii(f'la|Teii. 
 
 Section 217. 
 
 THE BURNING OF MOSCOW. (Comp. S. 156, N. i.) 
 
 I. 
 
 On the 14th <?/" September, 181 2, while the rear-guard of the Russians 
 were in the act (S. 216, N. i) of evacuating Moscow, Napoleon reached 
 the hill called the Mount of Salvation \ because t/ is there where the 
 natives kneel and cross themselves at first sight of the Holy City. 
 
 Moscow seemed as lordly and striking ^ as ever, with the steeples of its 
 thirty churches, and its copper domes glittering in the sun ; its palaces of 
 Eastern architecture mingled with trees, and surrounded with gardens ' ; and 
 its Kremlin*, a huge triangular mass of towers,'' something between a 
 palace and a castle, which rose hke a citadel out of the general^ mass of 
 groves and buildings. But not a chimney sent up smoke'', not a man 
 appeared on the battlements, or at the gates. Napoleon gazed ^ every 
 moment expecting to see a train of bearded boyards arriving to (S. 19, 
 N. 7) fling themselves at his feet, and place their wealth at his disposal. 
 His first exclamation was : " Behold at last that celebrated city 1 " His 
 next: "It was fulP time !" His army, less regardful of the past or the 
 future^", fixed their eyes on the goal of their wishes, and a shout of 
 " Moscow! IMoscow!" passed from rank to rank. 
 
 Bonaparte, as if unwilling to encounter the sight of the empty streets,
 
 175 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 2 1 7. 
 
 Stopped immediately on entering the first suburb. His troops were 
 quartered in the desolate city. During the first few hours after their 
 arrival", an obscure rumour, which could not be traced ^^ but one of 
 those which are sometimes found to get abroad before the approach of 
 some awful certainty ", announced that the city would be endangered by 
 fire in the course of the night '*. 
 
 1, Norn, bcr fcligmac^enbe ©evg.. 2, = majestic. 3, fcinen tm oriental 
 
 tifc^en @ti(c evbauten, ntit SBdumm unb ©arten umgcbcnen $ataficti. 4, ^tem(, m. 
 
 5, cincm uiu-\cf)emen, brcietfigcn, mit inelcn S^iivmen cerjierten ©eljdube; something — 
 castle, mldjt^ jitnfd^en einem $a(ajic unb einem ©(^toffe bie 2)htte t)iclt; which = and. 
 
 6, = great; groves, Saumgrupjjen. 7, = smoked; not a man = nobody. 
 8, blicfte . . . buvauf ^in. 9, =high. 10, less— future, Liter. = which 
 troubled itself (ji^ befiimmern) only about (urn) the present (©egenttjart, f.). 
 11, Here follows the predicate 'announced'. 12, = the origin of which 
 could not be traced (augjtnbig macfjen). See S. 4, N. 4 (man). 13, = event. 
 14, = that the town during the night would be exposed to a great conflagration. 
 
 Section 218. 
 
 THE BURNING OF MOSCOW. 
 II. 
 
 The report seemed to arise from * those evident circumstances 
 which rendered the event probable, but no one took any notice of it, 
 untiP at midnight, wken the soldiers were startled from their quarters 
 by the report that the town was in flames (App. § 28). The memorable 
 conflagration began amongst^ the coachmakers' warehouses and work- 
 shops in the Bazaar, w/iic/i was the richest district of the city. It was 
 imputed to accident, and the progress of the flames was subdued by the 
 exertions of the French soldiers. Napoleon, who had been roused by 
 the tumult, hurried to the spot * ; and when the alarm seemed at an end ^ 
 he retired, not to his former quarters in the suburbs, but to the Kremlin, 
 the hereditary palace of the only sovereign whom he had ever treated as 
 an equal ", and over whom his successful arms had now attained such an 
 apparently '^ immense superiority. Yet he did not suffer himself to be 
 dazzled by the advantages he had attained, but availed himself of the 
 light of the blazing Bazaar, to write to the Emperor proposals of peace 
 with his own hand ^ They were despatched by a Russian officer of rank, 
 who had been disabled by indisposition from following the army. But 
 no answer was ever returned *. 
 
 Next day the flames had disappeared, and the French officers 
 luxuriously'" employed themselves (S. 87, N. 6) in selecting out of the 
 deserted palaces of Moscow, that which best pleased the fancy of each 
 for his residence. At night the flames again arose in the north and 
 west quarters of the city. As the greater part of the houses were built 
 of wood, the conflagration spread with the most dreadful rapidity. 
 
 1, =to have arisen from (cntfic^en (auS), conjugated with fcin). 2, Supply 
 ' at last ' here and omit the comma and the conj. 'when'. To be startled 
 from one's quarters, ocn fctncm 9Ja($t(ager anfgcfcijvecft UH-vben. 3, =in; 
 
 warehouse, SJJagajin, n. 4, f)crbei'<ilen. 5, = and when the danger seemed
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 21 8. 1 77 
 
 to be over. 6, \vk fetnc«gtci(f)cn. 7, apparently, tote c^ fci^icn, which 
 
 place after the adv. ' now '. 8, Say * to write to the Emperor with his 
 
 own hands (cigcntjdnbig, adj. used attributively) a letter, in which he offered him 
 proposals of peace (S. 76, N. 22, B). 9, = The same (to agree with 'pro- 
 
 posals of peace ') remained however unanswered. 10, pia(^tUcBeub, which 
 
 use as adj. before ' French officers'. 
 
 Section 219. 
 
 THE BUHNING OF MOSCOW. 
 
 III. 
 
 This was at first imputed to the blazing brands [= pieces of wood] 
 and sparkles which were carried by the wind ; but at length it was 
 observed, that, as often as the wind changed ', — and it changed three 
 times in that terrible night, — new flames broke always forth in that 
 direction, where ^ the existing gale was calculated to direct them on ^ 
 the Kremlin. These horrors were* increased by the chance^ of explosion. 
 There was, though as yet unknown to the French, a magazine of powder 
 in the Kremlin ; besides that, a park of artillery, with its ammunition, 
 was drawn up " under the Emperor's window. Morning (S. 3, N. 2) 
 came, and with it a dreadful scene. During the whole night, the 
 metropolis had glared'' with a thick and suffocating atmosphere, of 
 almost palpable smoke. The flames defied the efforts of the French 
 soldiery, and it is said that the fountains of the city had been rendered 
 inaccessible, the water-pipes cut, and the fire-engines destroyed or 
 carried off. 
 
 Then came the reports of fire-balls having been found burning in 
 deserted houses ; of men and women, that, like demons, had been seen 
 openly spreading the flames, and who were said to be * furnished with 
 combustibles for rendering their dreadful work more secure. Several 
 wretches against^ whom such acts had been charged, were seized (S. 2, N. i) 
 upon, and, probably without much inquiry, were shot on the spot. While 
 it was almost impossible to keep the roof of the Kremlin free of the 
 burning brands which the wind showered down*", Napoleon watched 
 from the windows the course of the fire which devoured his fair conquest, 
 and the exclamation burst from him " : " These are indeed $cythians !" 
 
 1, as — changed, bci jcbem 2Cinbc(?wecI)fcI ; it = the wind. 2, where = which 
 through (buvd)) ; to calculate, bcrcdjuen (aiif) ; read S. 87, N. 6. 3, = to. 
 
 4, Insert here the adv. nocf). 5, =possibiIity ; of, Vcn, followed by the plural. 
 6, =put up, aufftcdcn. 7, = had been filled. 8, The Emperor is said 
 
 to be dead, ber Jtaifcr foil tot feiii. 9, against — charged = who were (warcii) 
 
 accused (bcfci)ulbic;cn) of such a deed. 10, = which were carried away by 
 
 (S. 106, N. 23) the wind in great number (aJJenge, f.}. 11, =and he ex- 
 
 claimed involuntarily (umri(lfuvlid)). 
 
 Sedioji 220. 
 
 THE BURNING OF MOSCOW. 
 IV. 
 
 The equinoctial gales rose higher and higher^ Upon the third night, 
 and extended the flames, with which there was no longer any human 
 
 VOL. IV. N
 
 178 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 220, 
 
 power of contending ^ At the dead' hour of midnight, the Kremlin 
 itself was found to be on fire. A soldier of the Russian police, charged 
 with being incendiary *, was turned over ^ to the summary * vengeance of 
 the Imperial Guard. Bonaparte was then, at length, persuaded, by the 
 entreaties of all around him, to relinquish his quarters in the Kremlin, to 
 which, as the visible mark of his conquest, he had seemed to cling with 
 the tenacity of a lion holding a fragment of his prey. He encountered both 
 difficulty and danger in retiring from the palace, and, before he could gain 
 the city gate, he had to traverse with his suite streets arched with fire '', and 
 in which the very air they breathed was suffbcating. At length he gained 
 the open country, and took up his abode in a palace of the Czar's called 
 Petrowsky, about a French league from the city. As he looked back on 
 the fire, which, under the influence of the autumnal wind, swelled and 
 surged round the Kremlin, like an infernal ocean around a sable Pande- 
 monium **, he could not suppress the ominous expression : " This bodes 
 us great misfortune!" 
 
 The fire continued to triumph unopposed, and consumed in a few days 
 what it had cost centuries to raise. " Palaces and temples," says a 
 Russian author, "monuments of art, and miracles of luxury, the remains 
 of ages which had passed away, and those which had been the creation of 
 yesterday ; the tombs of ancestors, and the nursery-cradles^ of the present 
 generation, were indiscriminately destroyed. Nothing was left of Moscow 
 save the remembrance of the city, and the deep resolution to avenge 
 its fall." 
 
 The fire raged till the 19th of September with unabated violence, and 
 then began to slacken for want of fuel. It is said four-fifths of this great 
 city were laid in ruins. — Sir Walter Scott. 
 
 1, tmmev ftdrfcr ttierbeu ; upon = during, with which commence the period. 
 
 2, there was no longer ... of contending = could no longer contend. 
 
 3, = quiet. 4, This man is charged with being incendiary, man tcfc^ulbtgt 
 bicfcn 3Kann bcr ©raubjiiftung. 5, itbcrge'ben, with Dat. 6, here = im- 
 mediate, fpfortig, adj. 7, ubcv bcncn lum beiben ©citen ein geiicrmecr emvorfc^tug. 
 
 8, urn ein fd)»i?arjeg ^anbamonium (cin 3)amoncntemvet, bag 9lcic^ it6 ©atans). 
 
 9, bie ©ebuvtiJftattcn, N. PI. 
 
 Section 221. 
 
 CHRISTMAS IN GERMANY. 
 
 I. 
 
 Frankfort-on-the-Maine, Jan. 2, 1845. 
 We have lately ^ witnessed the most beautiful and interesting of all 
 German festivals — Christmas — which is celebrated in a style truly 
 characteristic of the ^ people. About the commencement of December, 
 the Christmarkt, or fair, was opened in the Romerberg', and has 
 continued to the present time. The booths, decorated with green 
 boughs, were filled with toys of various kinds, among which, during 
 the first days, the figure of St. Nicholas was conspicuous. There were * 
 bunches of wax candles to illuminate ^ the Christmas tree, gingerbread 
 with printed mottoes in poetry*^, beautiful little earthenware, basket-work.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 221. 1 79 
 
 and a wilderness'' ^playthings. The sixth of December, being Nicholas 
 day'*, the booths were lighted up, and the square was filled with boys, 
 running from one stand to another, all shouting and talking together in 
 the most joyous confusion ^ Nurses were going around, carrying the 
 smaller children in their arms, and parents bought presents decorated 
 with sprigs of pine and carried them away. 
 
 Many of the tables had bundles ^rods with gilded bands, which were 
 to be used that evening by the persons who represented St. Nicholas. 
 In the family with whom we reside, one of our German friends dressed 
 himself^ very grotesquely with a mask, fur robe, and long tapering cap. 
 He came in with a bunch of rodj, a sack, and a broom for '" sceptre. 
 After we all had received our share of the beating, he threw the contents 
 of his bag on the table, and while we were scrambling for the nuts and 
 apples, gave us many smart raps over the fingers. In many families 
 the children are made to say ^^ : "I thank you ^^ Herr Nicholas," and the 
 rods are hung up in the room until Christmas, to keep them in good 
 behaviour ". This '^ was only a forerunner of the " Christkindchen's " 
 coming. The Nicholas is the punishing spirit, and the " Christkindchen " 
 the rewarding one. 
 
 1, furjUc^. 2, Render * of the ' by the Dat. of the def. art., and use the 
 
 attributive construction for ' truly — people '• 3, aiif bem Oiomeibevge, a 
 
 large square (*^lat^, m.) in the City. 4, 6'g iravcn bovt. 5, jur (5rj 
 
 Icuc^tung. e, = verses. 7, = great number, 9)f cnge, f. 8, = excitement. 
 
 9, fic^ »erf(ciben. 10, a(g. 11, Idpt man bic Jliubcr fa^cii. 12, (Siic^. 
 
 13, um bie .Sleincn baran ju evinncnt, fic^ gut ju betragni. 14, il^cv ©t. (S. 103, 
 
 N. 33) Siicdaugtag ; forerunner, 4>cvfdci-, f. 
 
 Section 222. 
 
 CHRISTMAS IN GERMANY. 
 
 II. 
 
 When this time was over, we all began preparing secretly our presents 
 for Christmas. Every day there was^ a consultation about the things 
 which should be obtained ^. It was so arranged that we should inter- 
 change presents, but nobody must^ know beforehand what he would 
 receive. What pleasure there was in all these secret purchases and pre- 
 parations ! Scarcely anything was thought or spoken of but Christmas, 
 and every day the consultations became more numerous and secret. The 
 trees were bought some time before-hand, but as we Americans were to 
 witness the festival for the first time, we were not allowed to see them 
 prepared, in order that the effect might be as great as possible. The 
 market in the Romerberg Square grew constantly larger and more bril- 
 liant. Every night it was illuminated with lamps and thronged with 
 people. Quite a forest sprang up in the street before our door. The old 
 stone house opposite, with the traces of so many centuries on its dark 
 face, seemed to stand in the midst of a garden. It was a pleasure to go 
 out every evening and see the children rushing to and fro, shouting and 
 selecting toys .from the booths and talking all the time of the Christmas 
 
 N 2
 
 l8o GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 222. 
 
 that was so near (S. 48, N. 6). The poor people went with * their little 
 presents hid under their cloaks, lest their children might see them ; every 
 heart was glad, and every countenance wore a smile of secret pleasure. 
 
 Finally, the day before Christmas arrived. The streets were so full, 
 I ^ could scarcely make my way through ®, and the sale of trees went on '^ 
 more rapidly than ever. These were ^ usually branches of pine or fir, 
 set upright ' in a little miniature garden of moss. When the lamps were 
 lighted at night, our street had the appearance of an illuminated garden. 
 We were prohibited from entering the rooms upstairs in which the grand 
 ceremony was to take place, being obliged ^^ to take our seats in those 
 arranged for the guests, and to await with impatience the hour when the 
 " Christkindchen " should call us. 
 
 1, flatt'finben. 2, = procured, an' f^affen. 3, = but that nobody 
 
 should. 4, went with = had. 5, =that I. 6, to make one's 
 
 way through, fic^ einen 2Beg buvcf> bte 3Wenge bat)ticn. 7, »oiijtatten gcfien. 
 
 8f bejiel)eu {au$). 9, a^cl^e . . . t)ineingefte((t waven. 10, = and were obliged. 
 
 Section 223. 
 
 CHRISTMAS IN GERMANY. 
 III. 
 
 Several relatives of the family came (S. 104, N. 19), and, what was more 
 agreeable, they brought with them five or six children. I was anxious to 
 see how they would view the ceremony \ Finally, in the midst of an 
 interesting conversation, we heard the bell ringing at the head of ^ the 
 stairs. We all started up, and made for ^ the door. I ran up the steps 
 with the children at my heels, and at the top met * a blaze of dazzling 
 light, coming from the open door. In each room stood a great table, on 
 which presents were arranged, amid flowers and wreaths. From ° the 
 centre rose the beautiful Christmas tree, covered with wax tapers to the 
 very top, which made the room nearly as light as day '', while every bough 
 was hung with sweetmeats and gilded nuts. The children ran shouting 
 around the table, hunting'' their presents, while the older persons had 
 theirs pointed out to them. I had a little library of German authors as 
 my share; and many of the others received quite valuable gifts. 
 
 But how beautiful was the heartfelt joy that shone on every counte- 
 nance ! As each one discovered his presents, he embraced the givers, and 
 it was a scene of unmingled joy *. It is a glorious feast, this Christmas 
 time F What a chorus from happy hearts went up on that evening to 
 Heaven ! Full of poetry and feeling, and glad associations, it is here 
 anticipated with delight, and leaves a pleasant memory behind it. We 
 may laugh at such simple festivals at home, and prefer to shake our- 
 selves loose from every shackle ® that bears the rust of the past, but we 
 should certainly be happier if some of these beautiful old customs were 
 better honoured. They renew the bond of feeling^** between families and 
 friends, and strengthen their kindly sympathy ; even life-long associates 
 require occasions of this kind to freshen the tie that binds them together". 
 — Bayard Taylor, " Views Afoot."
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 223. 181 
 
 1, lute fie fic^ bci bent Sffle Beneljmcti »»urben. 2, at the head of, cben oitf. 
 
 3, =ran towards. 4, =found. 5, =In; rose = stood. 6, as — 
 
 day, tagcS^cd ; 'to make', here erleuc^teii. 7, =and searched for (nac^). 
 
 8, = empfaiigcn. 9, Use this noun in the pi., geJTeln ; bears = bear. 
 
 10, = love ; to — together, nm baci fte vevbiubeiibe Sanb feficr ju fdjiirjen. 
 
 Section 224. 
 
 NEW-YEAR'S EVE (S. 152, N. i) IN GERMANY. 
 
 New- Year's Eve is also favoured with a peculiar celebration ^ in Ger- 
 many. Everybody remains up and makes himself merry until midnight. 
 The Christmas trees are again lighted, and while the tapers are burning 
 out, the family play for ^ articles which they have purchased and hung on 
 the boughs. It is so arranged that each one shall win as much as he 
 gives, and the change " of articles creates much amusement. One of 
 the ladies rejoiced in the possession of a red silk handkerchief and a 
 cake of soap, while a cup and saucer and a pair of scissors fell to my lot. 
 As midnight drew near, the noise became louder in the streets, and com- 
 panies of people, some of them * singing in chorus, passed by on their 
 way to the Zeil ^ Finally, it struck a quarter to twelve, the windows 
 were opened, and every one waited anxiously for the clock to strike 
 twelve. At the first sound, such a cry arose as one may imagine when 
 thirty or forty thousand persons all set their lungs going ^ at once. 
 Everybody in the house, in the street, over the whole city, shouted : 
 "Prost Neujahr^!" 
 
 In families, all the members embrace each other, w-ith wishes of hap- 
 piness for the new year. Then the windows are thrown open, and they 
 cry to their neighbours or those passing by. 
 
 After we had exchanged congratulations, three of us set out for the 
 Zeil. The streets were full of people, shouting to one another and 
 to those standing at the open windows. We failed not to cry: " Prost 
 Neujahr!" wherever we saw a damsel at the window, and the words 
 came back to us more musically than we sent them. Along the Zeil 
 the spectacle was most singular. The great wide street w^as filled with 
 companies of men, marching up and down, while from the mass rang up 
 one deafening, unending shout, that seemed to pierce the black sky 
 above. The whole scene looked stranger and wilder in the flickering 
 light of the swinging lamps*, and I could not help thinking it must re- 
 semble a night in Paris, during the French Revolution. — Bayard Taylor, 
 '' Views Afoot." 
 
 1, is — celebration = is celebrated in (auf) a peculiar way. 2, I'.nt. 
 
 3, S^aufc^ or I'UuMaufc^, m. 4, = of whom some were. 5, bic 3eil 's 
 
 one of the principal streets in Frankfort a/M. 6, to set going, in 
 
 Scweguug fc^cn. 7, Properly: profit D^eujaTjr ! A happy New- Year to 
 
 you! 8, Before the introduction of gas, the lamps hung in the middle 
 
 of the street on ropes which were attached to the houses on both sides of the 
 street.
 
 iSz GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 225. 
 
 Section 225. 
 
 THE TWO ROBBERS. 
 I, 
 
 We often condemn in others what we practise ourselves. 
 
 (Alexander the Great in his tent. A man with a fierce countenance, 
 chained and fettered, brought before him.) 
 
 Alexander. — What, art thou the Thracian robber, of whose exploits I 
 have heard so much } 
 
 Robber. — I am a Thracian, and a soldier. 
 
 Alexander. — A soldier .? — a thief, a plunderer, an assassin ! the pest 
 of the country ! I could honour thy courage, but I must detest and 
 punish thy crimes. 
 
 Robber. — What have I done of which you can complain* ? 
 
 Alexander. — Hast thou not set at defiance my authority, violated the 
 public peace, and passed thy life ^ in injuring the persons ' and proper- 
 ties of thy fellow-subjects*? 
 
 Robber. — Alexander ! I am your captive. I must hear what you 
 please to say, and endure what you please to inflict. But my soul is 
 unconquered ; and if I reply at all * to your reproaches, I will reply like 
 a free man. 
 
 Alexander. — Speak freely. Far be it from me to take * the advantage 
 of my power, to silence those with whom I deign to converse ! 
 
 Robber. — I must then answer your question by another. How have 
 you passed your life ? 
 
 Alexander. — Like a hero. Ask Fame'', and she will tell you. Among 
 the brave, I have been the bravest ; among sovereigns, the noblest ; 
 among conquerors, the mightiest. 
 
 1, jid^ iibec ctlrag bcflagcn. Use the 2nd person Plural when the robber ad- 
 dresses Alexander. 2, imb bein Scben bamit jucjcbrac^t. 3, = the personal 
 safety. 4, bcincr S'icbcnmcnfd^en. 5, ubevt)auvt. 6, = to use. 
 7, ' Fame,' here %vcix^x, bie ®6ttin be^ 9iut)me5. Fame, or Fama, was a poetical 
 deity, represented as having wings and blowing a trumpet. A temple was 
 dedicated to her by the Romans. 
 
 Section 226. 
 
 THE TWO ROBBERS. 
 II. 
 
 Robber. — And does not Fame speak of me too? Was there (S. 82, 
 N. 7) ever a bolder captain of a more valiant band ? Was there ever — 
 but I scorn to boast. You yourself know that I have not been easily 
 subdued. 
 
 Alexander. — Still, what are you but a robber, a base, dishonest 
 robber 1 
 
 Robber. — And what is a conqueror ? Have not you, too, gone about 
 the earth ' like an evil genius, blasting "^ the fair fruits of peace and in-
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 226. 183 
 
 dustry, plundering, ravaging, killing ' without law, without justice, merely 
 to gratify an insatiable lust for dominion ? All that I have done to a 
 single district with a hundred followers, you have done to whole nations 
 with a hundred thousand. If I have stripped individuals*, you (S. 27, 
 N. 8) have ruined kings and princes. If I have burned a few hamlets, 
 you have desolated the most flourishing kingdoms and cities of the earth. 
 What is then the difference "', but that, as you were born a king, and I a 
 private man ", you have been able to become a mightier robber than I ? 
 
 Alexander. — But if I have taken like a king, I have given like a king. 
 If I have subverted empires, I have founded greater. 1 have cherished ' 
 arts, commerce, and philosophy. 
 
 Robber. — I, too, have freely given to the poor, what I took from the 
 rich. I have established order and discipline among the most ferocious 
 of mankind*, and have stretched out my protecting arm over the oppressed. 
 I know, indeed, litUe of the philosophy you talk of ; but I believe neither 
 you nor I will ever atone to the world for the mischiefs we have done. 
 
 Alexander. — Leave me ! — Take off his chains, and use him well. 
 Are we, then, so much like ? — Alexander and a Robber ? — Let me re- 
 flect*. — Dr. AiKiN. 
 
 1, *to go about the earth' here ubcr t»ic ©vbc T)cv'jic^cu, conjugated with fcin. 
 2, =to (um . . . ju) blast, tieviiic^tcn. 3, = Have you not plundered, ravaged 
 
 and killed. 4, = robbed common citizens. 5, 53cftc()t bcnn junfc^cn uu^ 
 
 beiben cin anbcrer Unterfc^icb ale bcr, ba§ ; followed by ' you have — than I ', ac- 
 cording to S. 211, N. 9. 6, = common citizen. 7, here = protected. 
 8, =of all men. 9, 3c^ trifl baruber na^bciifcu. 
 
 Section 227. 
 
 A TOUCHING SCENE AT SEA. 
 I. 
 
 Two weeks ago ^ on board an English steamer, a little ragged boy, 
 aged nine years, was discovered on the fourth day of the voyage out 
 from Liverpool to New York, and carried before the first mate, whose 
 duty it was to deal with such cases. When questioned as to his object 
 in being stowed away ^ and who brought him on board, the boy, who had 
 a beautiful sunny face, and eyes that looked like the very mirrors of truth, 
 replied that his stepfather did it, because he could not afford ^ to keep 
 him, nor to pay his passage out to Halifax, where he had an aunt who * 
 was well off, and to whose house he was going. The mate did not 
 believe the story, in spite of the winning face and truthful ^ accents of 
 the boy. He had seen too much of stow-aways * to be easily deceived 
 by them, he said ; and it was his firm conviction that the boy had been 
 brought on board and provided with food by the sailors. The litUe 
 fellow was very roughly handled in consequence. Day by day he was 
 questioned and re-questioned, but always with the same result. He did 
 not know a sailor on board, and his father alone had secreted him, and 
 given him the food which he ate. At ^ last the mate, wearied by the 
 boy's persistence in the same story, and perhaps a litde anxious to
 
 184 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 227. 
 
 inculpate the sailors, seized him one day by the collar, and dragging 
 him to the fore*, told him that (S. 211, N. 9) unless he would tell 
 the truth in ten minutes from that time, he would hang him from the 
 yard-arm. 
 
 1, 9Sor »ierjct)tt itagen, after which place predicate and subject [one dis- 
 covered], since, as a rule, only one part of the adjuncts to the predicate 
 should be placed before it. 2, as — away = uiantm cv auf^ ©cfciff 9cfd)mu99clt 
 
 fei (App, §§ 28 and 30). 3, I cannot afford to keep you, meine 3[)HttcI gcs 
 
 flatten niir nic^t, bicb 511 ernd^rcn. 4, The relative clause 'who — off' may be 
 avoided by using the adjective ' ivct}(l)abent) ' before 'aunt'. 5, here glaub; 
 
 Kmrbig ; accents, @j.uacl)e. 6, ' the stow-away ' may perhaps be rendered 
 
 by bet (Singcfc^miiggelte. 7, It will easily be seen that, on account of the 
 
 length of this period and of the many dependent clauses contained therein, 
 it requires an altogether different form of construction in German. The 
 author will, however, refrain from indicating the form to be used, the student 
 being by this time expected to have attained sufficient skill and practice for 
 dealing with such cases. 8, unp ^orberteil be^ @cf)iffe3. 
 
 Seaio/i 228. 
 
 A TOUCHING SCENE AT SEA. 
 II. 
 
 He then made him sit down under it on the deck. All around him 
 were the passengers and sailors of the watch, and in front of him stood 
 ihe inexorable mate, with his chronometer in his hand, and the other 
 officers of the ship by his side. It was the finest sight, said our informant ^ 
 that he ever beheld — to see the pale, proud, sorrowful face of that noble 
 boy, his head erect, his beautiful eyes bright through the tears that 
 suffused them. When eight minutes had fled^, the mate told him he 
 had but two minutes to live, and advised him to speak the truth and save 
 his life ; but he replied with the utmost simplicity and sincerity by asking 
 (S. Ill, N. 6) the mate if he might pray. The mate said nothing, but 
 nodded his head, turned as pale as a ghost ^, and shook wM trembling 
 like a reed with * the wind. And there, all eyes turned on him, the brave 
 and noble litde fellow, this poor waif, whom society owned not, and 
 whose own stepfather could not care for him — there he knelt, with 
 clasped hands, and eyes turned up to heaven, while he repeated ^ audibly 
 the Lord's Prayer, and prayed the Lord Jesus to take him to heaven. 
 There then occurred (S. 104, N. 19) a scene as at Pentecost. Sobs 
 broke* from the strong hard hearts, as the mate sprang forward to 
 the boy, and kissed and blessed him, and told him how sincerely he 
 believed his story, and how glad he was that he had been willing 
 enough to face death ^ and to sacrifice his life for the truth of his 
 word. — Rev. E. Davies. 
 
 1, Place 'said — informant (here ©eirafirgmann, m.)' after ' that — beheld ', 
 2, = were over. 3, as — ghost, geijlerbtei^. 4, = in. 5, = said ; 
 
 audibly = aloud. 6, @in Sc^luc^jen eiitrang ft4 followed by the Dat. 7, to 
 face death, bem S^obe in^ 9l»tli^ fdiauen, or bem !lobe tic^'bieten.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 229. 185 
 
 Section 229. 
 
 AN ORATION ON THE POWER OP HABIT. 
 
 I. 
 
 I will now speak of a habit which I believe ^ is, more than any other, 
 debasing, degrading, and embruting to man ^ both * physically, intellec- 
 tually, and morally. I am not going to give you an address ^ full of my 
 favourite theme [temperance], but I must speak of it^ I must speak of 
 it before this assembly, for I shall never see you again till we meet on 
 that day when we shall see things as they are ^. Let me then speak of 
 one habit which, in its power, and '' influence, and ^ fascination, seems to 
 rear its head like a Goliath or Saul above all its kindred agencies of 
 demoralization ; I allude to ^ the habit of using intoxicating liquors as a 
 beverage, until that habit becomes a fascination ^^ You will allow me 
 to give " my opinions upon these points freely. I consider drunkenness 
 not merely to be a moral evil, but also a physical evil, and ^^ it depends a 
 great deal more upon the temperament, aiid the constitution, and dispo- 
 sition of the young man, whether if he falls into the drinking usages of 
 society, it becomes a habit or not, than it does upon his strength of mind 
 or firmness of purpose ". 
 
 Take a young man, and he shall be full of fire " and poetry. He 
 shall be ^® of a nervous temperament and generous heart ; fond of society, 
 and open and manly in everything he does. Every one loves him. 
 That is the man most liable to become intemperate. 
 
 1, =as I believe. 2, is ... to man, auf ben 2JJnifcI)en unrff. 3, 'both', 
 ^ier unb jWur. 4, to give an address to a person, ciucm eine 3tebe fjatteu ; of, 
 
 ubev. 5, ic^ ntu^ baefelbe 'ifatt wcnigflen^ bcn"i()rfn (allude to). 6, Render 
 
 'for — are' Liter. = for we shall see one another only (S. 109, N. 5) on that 
 day, when (wc) we shall see (fcf^aucn) the things in their true form (®efiaU, f.). 
 7, = in its, 8, = and its. 9, = I mean; of using — 
 
 beverage = of drinking intoxicating liquors. 10, until — fascination, bi3 
 
 bicfe ®e»o{)u()eit finen jaubn()aften Oieij auf ben 2)?enfc^cn au^ubt. 11, = express. 
 
 12, Say 'and when a young man once follows the general habit of taking in- 
 toxicating liquors, it depends, etc' 13, his — purpose, feinc ®eiftcd;cbcr 
 ffiideneifraft. 14, = who is full of (»o((er) fire. 15, The student will 
 do well to omit the words ' He shall be ' and join this period to the pre- 
 ceding one. 
 
 Section 230. 
 
 AN ORATION ON THE POWER OP HABIT. 
 
 II. 
 He enters ' into the outer circle of the whirlpool, and throws care to 
 the winds ^ There he thinks to stay, but he gets nearer and nearer 
 to the fatal gulf, until he is swept into the vortex before he dreamed of 
 danger. This thing, habit ^ comes gradually. Many a man who has 
 acquired * a habit of drinking, but does not exactly proceed to excess ', 
 is rescued simply by possessing certain physical qualities which his poor 
 unfortunate friend had not. You say : " I am not so foolish as to become 
 a drunkard !" " So He thought once. You say: " I can leave it off* when
 
 l86 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 230. 
 
 I like," as if He at first had not had (App. § 33) the power to leave it off 
 when he liked. You say : " I have too sound an intellect to become 
 a drunkard," as if He were born without an intellect. You say : " I have 
 too much pride in myself, too much self-respect," as if He were not once 
 as proud as you." The way men acquire this habit, zs by looking on 
 those '' who proceed to excess as naturally inferior to themselves. The 
 difference between you and the drunkard is just this, that you could leave 
 off* the habit, but won't ; he would ' with all his heart and soul, but 
 cannot. I tell you, young men ^°, that while the power of a bad habit 
 is stripping you of nerve [pk], and (S. 10, N. 9) energy, and freshness of 
 feeling *^, it does not destroy your responsibility. You are accountable 
 to God for every power, and talent, and influence with which you have 
 been endowed. 
 
 1, = approaches. 2, to throw care to the winds, fic^ feine ©orgen ma(^en. 
 
 3, =What one calls habit. 4, to acquire a habit, in eine @ett)o^n^cit cerfaUcn. 
 5, bcr biefflbe icbod^ eigcntlic^ nidjt iibcvtvcibt. 6, to leave off, aiiff)6ren. 7, = by 
 considering (^alteii) those ; to proceed to excess, ftc^ bem iibcvmap crgcbcn ; as — 
 themselves = as (fur) l?eing worse than themselves. 8, here aufgebeti. 
 
 9, = and that he would give it up. 10, Commence the period with ' Young 
 men '. 11, ©efij^lefrifc^e, f. 
 
 Sech'on 231. 
 
 AN ORATION" ON" THE POWER OP HABIT. 
 
 III. 
 
 If you say : " Should I find the practice by experience to be injurious, 
 I will give it up," surely that is not common sense ^ You might as well 
 say : " I will put my hand into the nest of the rattlesnake, and when I 
 find out that he has stuck his fangs into me ^, I will draw it out and get 
 cured." 
 
 I remember riding from' Buffalo to the Niagara Falls, and said to a 
 gentleman: "What river is that. Sir?" "That," he said, "is Niagara 
 River V "Well, it is a beautiful stream," said I, "bright, and fair, and 
 glossy; how far off are the rapids^.?" "Only a mile or two," was the 
 reply. " Is it possible that (S. 66, N. 15) only a mile or two from us we 
 shall find the water in the turbulence which it must show wAen near the 
 falls?" "You will find it so. Sir." And so I did find it; and that first 
 sight of the Niagara I shall never forget. Now, launch your boat on 
 that Niagara river ; it is bright, smooth, beauuful, and glossy. There 
 is a ripple at the bow ', and the silvery wake '' you leave behind adds to 
 your enjoyment. Down the stream you glide ; oars, sails, and helm 
 are in proper trim, and you set out * on your pleasure excursion '. 
 Suddenly some one cries out from the bank: "Young men, ahoy^°!" 
 " What is it " !" — " The rapids are below you ^^ !" — " Ha, ha ! we have 
 heard of the rapids, but we are not so foolish as to get there ". If we 
 go [=If it goes] too fast, then up with the helm**, then set the mast in 
 the socket '^ hoist the sail, and speed to land^*. Then on*'', boys; 
 don't be alarmed — there's no danger ! "
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 23 1. 1 87 
 
 1, = reasonable. 2, stuck — me = bitten me. 3, riding from = that 
 
 I during a journey from ; change ' and said to ' into * asked '. 4, Use the 
 
 def. art. 5, bie ©tromf(^ticl(cn. 6, !I)a3 SSajfcr frdufelt fi(^ am S3ug bc3 5^ootf«. 
 7, Jlielttjaffer, n. 8, ' to set out on ', here an'trctcn, v. tr. 9, Q^ergnugun^eitour. 
 
 10, D{)oi! of which pronounce every vowel separately and slowly in the 
 German way. 11, iBuiJ gieBt^. 12, are below you, ftnb bort unten nidit 
 »rcit son euc^ ! 13, as — there, fo tf eit ju faf^reii. 14, bann f(^nc(l ia6 
 ©teuerruber ^inein. 15, bann rid)ten wiv ben SWajl ouf. 16, unb eilen an3 
 Sanb I 17, !l)a^er nur immev corlvart^. 
 
 Section 232. 
 
 AN ORATION ON THE POWER OF HABIT. 
 
 IV. 
 "Young men, ahoy, there T — " What is it?" — "The rapids are below 
 youl" — "Ha, ha! we will laugh and quaff; all things delight us. What 
 care we for the future ? No man ever saw it. ' Sufficient for the day is 
 the evil thereof \' We will enjoy life while we may^; we will catch 
 pleasure as it flies. This is enjoyment ; time enough ^ to steer out of 
 danger when we are driving swiftly with the current." — " Young men, 
 ahoy!" — "What is it?" — "Beware! Beware! The rapids are below 
 you!" — Now you see water foaming* all around you. — See how fast you 
 pass that point! — Up with the helm! — Now turn'! — Pull hard* — 
 quick ! — quick ! — pull for your lives ! — pull till "^ the blood starts from the 
 nostrils, and the veins stand like whipcord upon the brow ! Set the mast 
 in the socket ! hoist the sail ! Ah, ah ! — it is too late I Shrieking, 
 cursing, howling, blaspheming, over you go * ! — Thousands go over the 
 rapids of Intemperance® every year, through the power of evil habit, 
 crying out all the while ^"i "When I find out that it is injuring me, I 
 will give it up!" The power of evil habit, I repeat, is fascinating^^, is 
 deceptive ; and man may go on arguing and coming to conclusions 
 while on the way down to destruction ^^. — J. B. Gough. 
 
 1, S« if! gcnug, bafi cin ieglid)er !Jag fciitc eigcne !^kigc l)abc! 2, fo laitge 
 
 unr eg no(^ fonncn. 3, eg bltibt iing noc^ 3fit gcmig. 4, fct>aiimenbc(} 
 
 ffiaffer. 5, * to turn ', here uni'fef)ren. 6, Pull, O'Jubcvt ; ' hard ', here 
 
 ait« ?cibcgfvaften. 7, Supply the pron. eitcf) here ; starts = streams ; from 
 
 the nostrils, aug bcr 91afe. 8, jtuv^t i()r in ben ?(bgninb l)imintfr ! 9, %x\\\\h 
 
 fitd)t, f., seems to be the right expression here, although the dictionaries 
 translate the word by Unntd§igtcit, f., and i^ctierei, t. 10, unb rufeii immer. 
 
 11, here beftricfcnb ; is = and. 12, and — destruction = and often we are 
 still occupied with arguing a matter (eine @ad)c gn'iiibli(^ ju cvorterii) in order 
 to come (gelangen) to a definite conclusion, when we are (ft^ befinben) already 
 on the way to destruction (33erbcrben, n.). 
 
 Section 233. 
 
 A CURIOUS STORY". 
 I. 
 
 We heard a curious story ^ at Tristan' about two Germans who hac 
 settled nearly, two years before on Inaccessible Island '. Once a year
 
 1 88 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 2^;^. 
 
 about the month ^December, the Tristan men go* to the two outlying 
 islands to pick up the few seals which are still to be found there. On 
 two of these occasions they had seen the Germans, and within a few 
 months smoke had risen from the island, which they attributed ^ to their 
 having fired (S. i6i, N. 21) some of the brushwood; but as they had 
 seen or heard nothing of them since, they thought the probability was 
 that they had perished. Captain Nares ® wished to visit the other islands, 
 and to ascertain the fate of the two men was an additional object in 
 doing so''. 
 
 Next morning we were close under Inaccessible Island, the second in 
 size of the little group of three. The ship was surrounded by multitudes 
 of penguins \ and as few of us had any previous personal acquaintance 
 with this eccentric form of life ^ we followed their movements with great 
 interest. The penguin as a rule swims under water, rising now and then 
 and resting on the surface, Hke one of the ordinary water-birds, but more 
 frequently with its body entirely covered, and only lifting its head from 
 time to time to breathe. 
 
 The structure of Inaccessible Island is very much the same as Tristan, 
 only the pre-eminent feature '" of the latter, the snowy cone, is wanting. 
 A wall of volcanic rocks, about the same height as the cliff at Tristan, 
 and which one is inclined to believe to have been at one time con- 
 tinuous with it, entirely surrounds Inaccessible Island, falling for the 
 most part sheer" into the sea, and it seems that it slopes sufficiently 
 to allow a tolerably easy ascent to the plateau on the top at one point 
 only. 
 
 1, This story is taken from Mr. W, J. J. Spry's most interesting account 
 of ' The Cruise of the Challenger '. The Tristan d' Acunha group of islands 
 (bic ©vfiif^ungginfeln), so named from the Portuguese navigator who discovered 
 it early in the i6th century, lies in mid-ocean, about 1300 miles south of 
 St. Helena and 1500 miles west of the Cape of Good Hope, nearly on a line 
 between the Cape of Good Hope and Cape Horn ; it is thus probably the 
 most isolated and remote of all the abodes of men. The group consists of 
 the larger Island of Tristan and two smaller islands— Inaccessible Island, about 
 18 miles south-west from Tristan, and Nightingale Island, twenty miles south 
 of the main island. Tristan only is permanently inhabited, the other two are 
 visited from time to time by sealers. In the year 1829 Tristan was inhabited 
 by 27 families ; ini836 it possessed a population of 42 ; in 1852 the population 
 had risen to 85, and in 1867 this number was only exceeded by one. 2, 2(itf 
 bet Snfel Xxi^an, which place at the head of the period ; about, fiber, with Ace. 
 
 3, The author finds that the best German maps use the English name of ' In- 
 accessible Island' unaltered. This is also the case with ' Nightingale Island'. 
 
 4, fasten ; ' to go ', when used in the sense of ' travelling, riding (in a 
 carriage), driving, sailing, etc.', is mostly rendered by rcifcil (gener- 
 ally used for greater distances) or by frtljrcii. "When used in the 
 sense of 'riding on horseback,' it is rendered by teitPlt. 5, = which 
 they attributed to the circumstance. 6, Captain Nares was the commander 
 of ' The Challenger ' at that time. 7, and — so = and as he was anxious 
 (begierig) to ascertain (crfctf^en) the fate of the two men, the voyage [there, 
 t)at)in] was at once determined upon. 8, bcr ^Jjinguiii, pi. c. 9, with — 
 life, mit biefer cigentumlid|en SJcgelart. 10, = the characteristic peculiarity. 
 11, = straight.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 234. 189 
 
 Section 234. 
 
 A CURIOUS STORY. 
 
 II. 
 
 There is a shallow bay in which the ship anchored in fifteen fathoms 
 on the east side of the island ; and there, as in Tristan, a narrow belt of 
 low ground, extending for about a mile along the shore, is interposed 
 between the cliff and the sea. A pretty waterfall tossed itself down, 
 about the middle of the bay, over the cliff from the plateau above. A 
 little way down it was nearly lost in spray, like the Staubbach of 
 Schaffhausen, and collected itself again into a rivulet ^ where it regained 
 the rock at the lower level. A hut built of stones and clay, and roofed 
 with spars and thatch, lay in a little hollow "^ near the waterfall, and the 
 two Germans, in excellent health and spirits, but enraptured at the sight 
 of the ship and longing for a passage anywhere out of the island, were ' 
 down on the beach, waiting for the first boat. Their story is a curious 
 one *, and as Captain Nares agreed ^ to take them to the Cape, we had 
 ample time to get an account of their adventures, and to supplement 
 from their experience such crude notions of the nature of the place as we 
 could gather during our short stay ®. 
 
 Frederick and Gustav Stoltenhoff are sons of a dyer in Aix-la-Chapelle 
 (^kd^en). Frederick, the elder, was employed in a merchant's office in 
 Aix-la-Chapelle at the time of the Franco-German war (1870). He was 
 called on to serve in the German army, where he attained the rank of a 
 lieutenant, and took part in the siege of Metz and Thionville. At the 
 end of the campaign he was discharged, and returned home to find his 
 old situation filled up. 
 
 1, flcflattete fid^ iet)0(^ ivicbet ju cincm ffeincn 93ad^e. 2, SBerticfitng, f. 
 
 3, =stood. Consult S. 5, N. 2. 4, =very (()cd)ft) curious. 5, =granted 
 them their request. 6, Let the student endeavour to construe this pas- 
 
 sage by means of the attributive construction, which will prove excellent 
 practice. 
 
 Section 235. 
 
 A CURIOUS STORY. 
 III. 
 
 In the meantime, his younger brother, Gustav, who was a sailor and 
 had already made several trips, had joined ' on the ist of August, 1870, 
 at Greenock, as an ordinary seaman, the English ship " Beacon Light," 
 bound for Rangoon. On the way out'^, the cargo, which consisted of 
 coal, caught fire-"* when they were from* six to seven hundred miles 
 north-west of Tristan d' Acunha, and for (S. 166, N. 10) three days all 
 hands ^ were doing their utmost to extinguish the fire. On the third day, 
 the hatches, which had been battened down, to exclude the air, blew up ^, 
 the main hatch carrying overboard'' the second mate who had been
 
 IQO GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 235. 
 
 Standing on it at the time of the explosion. The boats had been pro- 
 visioned beforehand, ready to leave the ship. Two of the crew were 
 drowned through one of the boats being swamped ^ and the survivors, to 
 the number of sixteen, were stowed in the long-boat. Up to this time 
 the ship had been nearing Tristan with a fair wind at the rate of* six 
 knots an hour ^°, so that they had now only about three hundred miles 
 to go. They abandoned the ship on Friday ; on Saturday afternoon they 
 sighted Tristan, and on the following day a boat came off to their assistance 
 and towed them ashore. 
 
 The shipwrecked crew remained for eighteen days at Tristan d' Acunha, 
 during which time they were treated with all kindness and hospitality. 
 They were relieved by the ill-fated " Northfleet," bound for Aden with 
 coal, and Gustav Stoltenhoff found his way back to Aix-la-Chapelle. 
 
 1, to join a ship, ft(i) einem ©cftiffe »cr{)euem. 2, = On the voyage thither 
 
 (bovtf)in). 3, to catch fire, in Sranb geraten. 4, = about, uugcfdtjr. 
 
 5, 'all hands', here=all sailors, bie gai^e SDfannfc^aft, af(e 2)?atiofcn, al(e ©cijiffetcutf. 
 
 6, in bic Suft fprcugcn ; the hatches, bte Siifen ; the main hatch, tie gvo^e 8ufe. 
 
 7, = and the main hatch carried overboard (fiber 58orb fc^leubcrn). 8, = through 
 the sinking of one of the boats. 9, *at the rate of, referring to the 
 rapidity of motion, is rendered by 'ttitt cillcr ^BdynelliQteit VOll', but when 
 referring to price, is generally rendered by ' Jlini ?J>rciff DOlt'. 10, an 
 hour, ill t»fr (Stiiiibc, pcv «2tnii&e, or bic 3tuii&e. He receives 20 marks 
 a week, er ertjdlt 20 Wlaxt bie ffioc^e (or nn^^eutUd;). 
 
 Seaion 236. 
 
 A CURIOUS STORY. 
 IV. 
 
 During his stay at Tristan he heard that a large number of seals were 
 to be had among the islands ^ and he seems to have been greatly pleased 
 with the Tristaners and to have formed a project of returning there. 
 When he got home, his brother had just got back from the war and 
 was unemployed ; he infected him with his notion ^, and the two agreed ^ 
 to join in a venture to Tristan to see what they could (App. § 33) make* 
 by seal-hunting and barter. 
 
 They accordingly sailed for^ St. Helena in August 1871, and on the 
 6th of November left St. Helena for Tristan in an American whaler 
 bound on a cruise « in the South Atlantic. The captain of the whaler, 
 who had been often at Tristan d' Acunha, had some doubt of the re- 
 ception which the young men would get'' if they went as permanent 
 settlers* there, and he spoke so strongly of the advantages of Inaccessible 
 Island, on account of the greater productiveness of the soil, and of its 
 being the centre * of the seal-fishing, that they changed their plans and 
 •were landed on the west side of Inaccessible Island on the 27th of 
 November 187 1, — early in summer. A quarter of an hour after, the 
 whaler departed, leaving them the only inhabitants of one of the most 
 remote spots on the face of the earth. They do not seem, however, to 
 have been in the least depressed by their isolation.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 236. 191 
 
 The same day the younger brother clambered up to the plateau with 
 the help of the tussock grass '", in search of goats or pigs, and remained 
 there all night, and on the following day the two set to work to build 
 themselves a hut for shelter. They had reached the end of their voyage 
 by no means unprovided, and the inventory of their belongings '^ is 
 curious. 
 
 1, in bet ©egcnb bcr Sufeln. 2, =he persuaded (geunnnen, str. v. tr.) his 
 
 brother for his plan. 3, uBerein'fcmmcn ; to join — to Tristan = to under- 
 
 take the adventurous voyage to Tristan. 4, =earn. 5, =to. 6, The 
 vessel is bound on a cruise in the Atlantic, ba^ ©c^iiT ijl baju befiimmt, im atlan; 
 lifc^en Dyt<m umfjcvjufrei^en. 7, had — get = doubted (jtoeifelte bavau) that 
 
 the young men would be kindly (frcunb(ic^) received (aufnc()men). Use the 
 
 active voice with ' man '. 8, He went there as a permanent settler, ev 
 
 lie§ ftc^ bovt baucrub niebev. 0, = and of its central (ijeutral) position for seal- 
 
 fishing. 10, bas5 SuJTocfgra^. 11, here Jjab|'elicjfeiteu, Nom. PI. 
 
 Sectio?i 237. 
 
 A CURIOUS STORY. 
 V. 
 
 They had an old whale-boat ^ which they had bought at St. Helena, 
 with mast, sails, and oars, three spars for a roof, a door, and a glazed 
 window ; a wheel-barrow, two spades and a shovel, two pickaxes, a saw, 
 a hammer, two chisels, two or three gimlets, and some nails ; a kettle, 
 a frying-pan, two sauce-pans, knives and forks, and some crockery ; two 
 blankets each, and empty covers ^ which they afterwards filled with sea- 
 birds' down; They had a lamp, a bottle of oil, and six dozen boxes of 
 Bryant and May's matches. 
 
 For internal use* they had two hundred pounds o/" flour, two hundred 
 pounds ^rice, one hundred pounds 0/" biscuits, twenty pounds (9/" coffee, 
 ten pounds ^tea, thirty pounds of sugar, three pounds ^table-salt, a 
 little pepper, eight pounds of tobacco, five bottles of gin, six bottles 
 ^Cape wine*, six bottles ^vinegar, and some Epsom salts. A barrel 
 ^coarse salt was provided for curing seal-skins, and forty empty casks 
 were intended for oil. Their arms and ammunition consisted of a short 
 English rifle, an old German fowling-piece, two and a half pounds of 
 powder, two hundred bullets, and four sheath-knives °. The captain of 
 the whaler gave them some seed potatoes, and they had a collection of 
 the ordinary garden seeds. 
 
 When they had been four days on the island, they had a visit from 
 a party of men from Tristan, who had come on their annual sealing 
 excursion. They were ten days on Inaccessible, and were very friendly 
 in their intercourse with the new comers. 
 
 1, the whale-boat, bag beim SBadfifi^fang gcbrducbUc^c Scot. We have not 
 a compound noun to render the English term. Say ' They had an old boat, 
 which had been used (bcmi^t) for whale-fishing and which they had bought in 
 (S. 46, N. 6) the Island r/St. Helena. 2, here Ubcijug, m., pi. Ubcrjiigf. 
 
 3, giiv iljre fcvpevlidjcii '-BcDiufiuifc. 4, Jlapivcui, m. 5, Sacjbmejicr, m.
 
 19a GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 238. 
 
 Section 238. 
 
 A CURIOUS STOBY. 
 VI. 
 
 They told them that the north side of the island was better suited for 
 a settlement, and transported all their goods (S. 236, N. 11) thither in 
 one of their boats. Being familiar with the place, they showed them 
 generally their way about and the different passes by which the plateau 
 might be reached, and they taught them how to build ^ to withstand the 
 violent winds, and how to thatch with tussock-grass. Immediately after 
 they left, the brothers set about building a house and clearing some 
 ground "^ for potatoes and other vegetables. They killed nineteen seals, 
 and prepared the skins, but they were unable to make any ' quantity of oil. 
 Towards the end of the sealing season their boat got damaged in the 
 surf, and they were obliged to cut it in two *, patch up the best half of it, 
 and use it as best they could ^ in smooth weather, close to shore. 
 
 They went from time to time to the upper plateau and shot goats and 
 pigs. When they first arrived, they counted a flock of twenty-three goats ; 
 three of these were killed during the summer of 1871-1872 by the 
 Tristan people (S. i57,N. 4), and six by themselves; the remaining 
 fourteen remained over the winter of 1872. The flesh of the goats they 
 found extremely delicate. Pigs were much more numerous, but their 
 flesh was not so palatable, from their feeding ® principally on sea-birds ; 
 that of the boars was especially rank. They found the pigs very valuable, 
 however, in yielding an abundant supply of lard '', which they used for 
 frying their potatoes. 
 
 1, =how they must (Imp. Subj.) build. 2, to clear the ground ( = land), 
 cine ©tverfe Saitbeg urbar ma(^cn. 3, here evjiclen ; any =a large. 4, to cut 
 in two, eutjltift'fdinfibcn, sep. comp. irr. v. 5, =as well as possible. 6, from 
 their feeding = as they lived ; on, con. 7, in — lard = on account of their 
 
 lard ((£{^ma(j, n.). 
 
 Section 239. » 
 
 A CURIOUS STORY. 
 VII. 
 
 In the month of April 1872, a singular misfortune befell them. While 
 burning some of the brushwood below to make a clearing, the tussock- 
 grass in the gully ^, by which they had been in the habit "^ of ascending 
 the cliff, caught fire, and as it had been only by its assistance that they 
 had been able to scramble up to the plateau, their only hunting-ground was 
 now inaccessible from the strip of beach on which their hut and garden 
 stood, which was closed in on either side by a headland jutting into the 
 sea. While their half-boat remained seaworthy, they were able to paddle 
 round in fine weather to the west side of the island, where there was an 
 access to the top ; but the " sea-cart," as they called it, was washed off" 
 the beach and broken up in June, and after that the only way they had 
 of reaching the plateau was by swimming round the headland — a risky 
 feat, even in the finest weather, in these wild regions.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 239 193 
 
 In winter it was found to be impossible to reach the terrace, and as 
 their supply of food was low, they experienced considerable privations 
 during their first winter. Their daily allowance of food was reduced to 
 a quantity just sufficient to maintain Hfe, and in August they were little 
 better than skeletons ^ 
 
 Help was, however, near. Early in August a multitude of penguins 
 landed * hard by their hut, — stupid ^ animals, which will scarcely get out 
 of one's way, and are easily knocked down with a stick '^, and with fleshy 
 breasts, wholesome enough, though with a rather fishy taste ; and in the 
 end of August the females began to lay large blue eggs, sufficiently delicate 
 in flavour. 
 
 1, 93ertiefung, f. 2, I was in the habit of ascending the mountain every 
 
 day, tc^ ^jflegte tdgtic^ bcii 93evg gu erftcigcn. 3, = unb im Stuguji iuarcn fic fafi ju 
 
 ©feietten gcitorben. 4, = settled, fic:^ nicbcrtaifen. 5, Begin a new period 
 
 here and say: * These are stupid animals', etc. 6, and -stick, ji^ (eid^t 
 
 mit eiiicm ©tccE tiiebcrfc^tageu taffen ; and with — taste = and have a fleshy breast, 
 which (supply ^\vax here) yields (bictcn) a wholesome food, but (jcbod^) possesses 
 a rather (ctinag) fishy taste. — The whole period is difficult to translate 
 into good German ; the author considers it therefore necessary to assist the 
 student. 
 
 Section 240. 
 
 A CURIOUS STORY. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 A French barque hove-to off" the beach ^ in the middle of September, 
 and in her they shipped their seal-skins, and bartered penguins' eggs with 
 her for biscuits and tobacco. Had the bark arrived a week earlier, the 
 brothers would have left the island ; but the eggs had set them up again -, 
 and they determined to remain a little longer. In October, a schooner, 
 which proved ^ to be " The Themis," a whaler from the Cape of Good 
 Hope, was seen standing towards the island. A gale o/wmdh\Q\v* her 
 off" for a couple of days, but she returned and landed some men from 
 Tristan, who had crossed ^ to see what the hermits were about '. Their 
 guests remained a day and a half, and then returned to Tristan. 
 
 Early in November, that is, early in the second summer, the brothers 
 thus swam round the eastern headland : — Frederick with their blankets, 
 the rifle, and a spare suit of clothes ' — Gustav with powder, matches, and 
 the kettle in an oil-cask. They mounted by the help of the tussock-grass 
 to the top of the cliff, went over to the west side of the plateau, and there 
 built a small hut, where they remained a month, living on goats' flesh 
 and fresh pork. 
 
 On the loth of December they returned home, mended their thatch, 
 dug ^ the early potatoes, and put the garden in order. 
 
 On the 19th of December the Tristan men made their second sealing 
 expedition. They remained nine days on the island, and killed forty 
 seals, one sea-elephant, and eight of the remaining ^ twelve goats. They 
 left some flour in exchange for an oil-cask, and this was the last com- 
 munication between the brothers and the outer world until the "Challenger" 
 called eight months later. 
 
 VOL. IV. O
 
 194 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 24O. 
 
 1, tcgte jtc^ . . . imiDcit ber Snfet »or Slnfer. 2, =had strengthened them 
 
 again. 3, fi(^ crwcifeu aU. 4, = drove. 5, = who had come 
 
 over. 6, = doing. 7, a spare suit of clothes, ein Oiefetocanjug, m. 
 
 8, here aufncfjmen ; early potatoes, frii^jeitifle .Sartoffeln. 8, nod^ ubrig. 
 
 Section 241. 
 
 A CURIOUS STOBY. 
 IX. 
 
 In January Frederick swam round the point ^ again, and mounted the 
 cliff. He shot four pigs, ran "^ the fat into buckets, and threw the hams 
 down to his brother on the beach below. He saw the four last goats, 
 but spared' them to increase their number. In February a boat came 
 to the west side from Tristan, and its crew killed the four goats, and 
 departed without communicating with the Stoltenhoffs *. 
 
 The relations between the Tristan people and the brothers does not 
 appear to have been so cordial latterly as it was at first, and the Stol- 
 tenhoffs believe that ^ the intention of their neighbours in killing the 
 goats, and in delaying from time to time to bring them some live stock, 
 which they had promised them, was to force them to leave the island. 
 It may have been so, for the Tristan men had been in the habit of 
 making a yearly seaUng expedition to Inaccessible Island, and no doubt 
 the presence of the energetic strangers lessened their chance of success. 
 
 In March the brothers once more swam round the point, and 
 ascended the cliff. After staying on the plateau together for a few 
 days, it was settled that Frederick should remain above to procure (S. 58, 
 N. 8) a stock of lard for the winter, Gustav returning to the hut and 
 storing it^ When a pig was killed, the hide, with the fat in it, was 
 rolled up, secured with thongs of skin, and thrown over the cliff, where 
 Gustav then ran the lard into a cask. 
 
 1, Sanbun^c, f. 2, taufen lajfen. 3, ttcrfcfccnen. 4, = without having 
 seen the Stoltenhoffs. 5, =that their neighbours killed the goats and de- 
 
 layed, etc., ... in order to force them, etc. 6, um ee jujubereitm. 
 
 Section 242. 
 
 A CURIOUS STORY. 
 X. 
 
 During the second winter, the privations of the brothers do not seem 
 to have been great. They were getting accustomed to their mode of 
 life, and had always sufficient food, such as it was ^ They were remark- 
 ably well educated. Both could speak and read English fluently, and 
 the elder had a good knowledge of French, Their library consisted of 
 eight volumes: Schoedler's Natural History, a German Adas, Charles 
 O'Malley, Captain Morrell's Voyages, two old volumes of a monthly 
 magazine ''■, Hamlet and Coriolanus with French notes, and Schiller's 
 poems. These books they came to know almost by heart ', but they 
 had considerable resources in themselves, in the intelligent interest they 
 took in the ever-changing appearances of nature.
 
 * 
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 242. 1 95 
 
 When the "Challenger" arrived, they were preparing for another summer; 
 but the peculiar food, and the want of variety in it, were beginning to tell 
 upon them, for all their original stores were exhausted, with the exception 
 of the Epsom salts, which were untouched, neither of them having had an 
 hour's illness during their sojourn; and they were heartily glad of a 
 passage to the Cape. 
 
 Frederick came to the ship before we left for the South in December. 
 He was then comfortably settled in a situation in a merchant's office in 
 Cape Town, and Gustav was on his way home to see his people* before 
 resuming the thread of his roving sailor's life. — W. J. J. Spry, "The 
 Cruise of the Challenger," 
 
 1, and — was = and the food at their disposal (unb bie tfjnen ju ©cbcte jlefjenbc 
 Sfla^ritng) was at least always sufficient (ait6rcirf)cnb). 2, a monthly magazine, 
 eiiie SJJcnatgfc^vift. 3, = they knew at last almost by heart, 4, =triends 
 
 or relations. 
 
 Section 243. 
 
 HOW THE BANK OF ENGLAND WAS HUMBLED. 
 
 I. 
 
 Once, many years ago, a bill of exchange for a large amount was 
 drawn ^ by Anselm Rothschild, of Frankfort, on Nathan Rothschild, of 
 London. When the gentleman who held it arrived in London, Nathan 
 was away, and he took the bit of paper to the Bank of England and 
 asked them to discount it. 
 
 The managers were very stiff. With haughty assurance they informed 
 the holder that they discounted only their own bills ; they said they had 
 nothing to do with the bills of private persons. They did not stop to 
 reflect with whom they had to deal. Those shrewd old gentlemen in 
 charge of the bank of the realm should have known and remembered 
 that that bit of paper bore the signature of a man more powerful than 
 they — more powerful, because independent of a thousand-and-one ham- 
 pers that rested upon them. " Umph," exclaimed Nathan Rothschild, 
 when the answer of the Bank was repeated to him. "Private persons] 
 I will let these important gentlemen know with what sort of private persons 
 they have to deal." 
 
 And then Nathan Rothschild went to work. He had an object in 
 view ''■ — to humble the Bank of England — and he meant to do it ^ He 
 sent agents to the Continent and through the United Kingdom, and 
 three weeks were spent in gathering up notes of the smaller denomina- 
 tions of the Bank's own issue *. 
 
 One morning, bright and early, Nathan Rothschild presented himself 
 at the Bank, and drew forth from his pocket-book a five-pound note, 
 which he desired to have cashed. Five sovereigns were counted out to 
 him, the officers looking with astonishment upon seeing Baron Roth- 
 schild troubling himself personally about so trivial a matter. The 
 baron examined the coins one by one, and, having satisfied himself of 
 their good quality, slipped them into a canvas bag, and then drew out 
 and presented another five-pound note. The same operation was re- 
 
 o 2
 
 1()6 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 243. 
 
 peated, save that the baron took the trouble to take a small pair of 
 scales from his pocket to weigh one of the pieces, for the law gave him 
 that right. 
 
 1, to draw a bill of exchange, cincti fficd^fet jte^en. 2, (Sv '^atte jtc^ bas 
 
 3tet gcfiecft. 3, unb er tcodte aKeg boran fc^en, bic« 3tet gu crreid^en. 4, in 
 
 gathering — issue, bie auf fleinere ©ummen lautcnben, von bet cnglifc^cn 93anf in 
 Umtauf gefe^ten Santnoten aufjufaufen. 
 
 Sec lion 244, 
 
 HOW THE BANK OF ENGLAKD WAS HUMBLED. 
 
 II. 
 
 Two — three — ten — twenty — a hundred — five hundred five-pound notes 
 were presented and cashed. When one pocket-book was emptied, 
 another was brought forth ; and when a canvas bag had been filled with 
 gold, it was passed to a servant who was in waiting. And so he went on 
 until the hour arrived for closing the Bank ; at the same time he had 
 nine of the employes of his house engaged in the same work. So it 
 resulted that ten men of the house of Rothschild had kept every teller ^ of 
 the Bank busy for seven hours, and exchanged somewhere about £22,000. 
 Not another customer had been able to get his wants attended to. The 
 English like oddity. Let a man do anything original, and they will 
 generally applaud. So the people of the Bank contrived to smile ^ at 
 the eccentricity of Baron Rothschild, and when the time came for closing 
 the Bank, they were not a tenth part so much annoyed as were ^ the cus- 
 tomers from abroad * whose business had not been attended to. The 
 bank officials smiled that evening, but^ 
 
 On the following morning, when the bank opened ^ Nathan Roth- 
 schild appeared again, accompanied by his nine faithful helpers, this time 
 bringing with him, as far as the street entrance, four heavy two-horse 
 drays, for the purpose of carting away the gold, for to-day the baron had 
 bills of a larger amount. Ah ! the officers of the Bank smiled no more, 
 and a trembling seized them when the banker monarch said, with stern 
 simplicity and directness ; 
 
 " Ah ! these gentlemen refuse to take my bills ! Be it so. I am re- 
 solved that I will not keep one of theirs. It is the House of Rothschild 
 against the Bank of England "." The Bank of England opened its eyes 
 very wide. Within a week, the House of Rothschild could be demanding 
 gold which it did not possess. The gentlemen at the head of affairs 
 saw very plainly that in a determined tilt'' the Bank must go to the wall*. 
 There was but one way out of the dilemma, and they took it. Notice 
 was at once publicly given ® that thenceforth the Bank of England would 
 cash the bills of Rothschild the same as its own. — Tit-Bits. 
 
 1, = cashier, ^aJTicrer. 2, contrived to smile = smiled. 3, they — 
 
 were, drgcitcn fie it(^ nic^t "^at^ fo fefir, \x>\t. 4, ' the customers from abroad ' 
 
 seems to be used here in the sense of ' the numerous customers '. 5, = was 
 opened. 6, ©^ ^nbelt fic^ barum, ob bag Jpau^ 9iotf)f(^i[b obcr bie engUfc^e 
 
 53anf ben ©ieg bauon tragen tt)irb ! 7, = struggle, ^ampf, m. 8, to go 
 
 to the wall, beu fnvjeren }iet;en. 9, hi tmivbe offentUc^ angejcigt.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 245. 197 
 
 Section 245. 
 
 MORGAN PRUSSIAN 
 I. 
 
 Morgan, the gay and handsome son of a low Irish farmer, tired of 
 home, went to take the chances of the world, and seek his fortune. By 
 what means he traversed England, or made his way to France, is not 
 told. But he at length crossed France, and, probably without much 
 knowledge or much care whether he was moving to the north or the south 
 pole, found himself in the Prussian territory. This was in the day of 
 Frederick William I. (£'713-1740), famous for his tall regiment of guards. 
 He had but one ambition, that of inspecting twice a day a regiment of a 
 thousand grenadiers, not one of whom was less than six feet and a half 
 high. Morgan was an Irish giant, and was instantly seized by the Prus- 
 sian recruiting sergeants, who forced him to " volunteer " into the tall 
 battalion. This turn of fate was totally out of the Irishman's calculation ; 
 and the prospect of carrying a musket till his dying day on the Potsdam 
 parade ^ after having made up his mind to live by his wits and rove the 
 world, more than once tempted him to think of leaving his musket and 
 honour behind him, and fairly trying his chance for escape. But the 
 attempt was always found impracticable ; the frontier was too closely 
 watched, and Morgan still marched up and down the Potsdam parade 
 with a disconsolate heart, when one evening a Turkish recruit was 
 brought in ; for the king looked to nothing but the thews and sinews of 
 a man, and the Turk was full seven feet high. 
 
 "How much did his majesty give for catching that heathen.?" said 
 Morgan to his corporal. " Four hundred dollars ^," was the answer. 
 Morgan burst out into an exclamation of astonishment at this waste of royal 
 treasure upon a Turk. " Why, they cannot be got for less," replied the 
 corporal. "What a pity my five brothers cannot hear of it!" said Mor- 
 gan, "I am a dwarf to any one of them, and the sound of half the 
 money would bring them all over immediately." As the discovery of a 
 tall recruit was the well-known road to favoritism, five were worth at 
 least a pair of colours to the corporal *. The conversation was immediately 
 carried to the sergeant, and from him, through the gradation of officers, to 
 the colonel, who took the first opportunity of mentioning it to the king. 
 The colonel was instantly ordered to question Morgan ; but he at once 
 lost all recollection of the subject. " He had no brothers ; he had made 
 the regiment his father, and mother, and relations, and there he hoped to 
 live and die." But he was urged still more strongly, and at length con- 
 fessed that he had brothers, even above the regimental standard, but 
 that nothing on earth could stir them from their spades. 
 
 1, SWorgan bcr ^rcu§f. 2, aitf bent ?Parabctta| i^u <pct(?bani. 3. X^ater. 
 
 4, five — corporal, fo iriivbeu funf berfclbcn bcm Jtorpcral wenigilend tine ga^n* 
 Ttc^^fieHe eintragen.
 
 198 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 2^6. 
 
 Section 246. 
 
 MORGAN PRUSSIA. 
 H. 
 
 After some time the king inquired for the five recruits, and was indig- 
 nant when he was told of the impossibility of enhsting them. " Send the 
 fellow himself," he exclaimed, " and let him bring them back." The 
 order was given ; but Morgan was broken-hearted " at the idea of so 
 long an absence from the regiment." He applied to the colonel to have 
 the order revoked, or at least given to some one else. But this was out 
 of the question, for the king's word was always irrevocable ; and Mor- 
 gan, with a disconsolate face, prepared to set out upon his mission. But 
 a new difficulty struck him. " How was he to make his brothers come, 
 unless he showed them the recruiting money?" This objection was at 
 last obviated by the advance of a sum equal to about three hundred 
 pounds sterling, as a first instalment for the purchase of his family. Like 
 a loyal grenadier the Irishman was now ready to attempt anything for 
 his colonel or his king, and Morgan began his journey. But, as he was 
 stepping out of the gates of Potsdam, another difficulty occurred ; and 
 he returned to tell the colonel that of all people existing the Irish were 
 the most apt to doubt a traveller's story, they being in the habit of a 
 good deal of exercise in that style themselves^; and that when he should 
 go back to his own country, and tell them of the capital treatment and 
 sure promotion that a soldier met with in the guards, the probability was, 
 that they would laugh in his face. As to the money, " there were some 
 who would not scruple to say that he stole it, or tricked some one out of 
 it. But, undoubtedly, when they saw him walking back only as a 
 common soldier, he was sure they would not believe a syllable, let him 
 say what he would about rising in the service." 
 
 The objection was intelligible enough, and the colonel represented it 
 to the king, who, doubly outrageous at the delay, swore a grenadier's 
 oath, ordered Morgan to be made a sub-lieutenant, and, with sword and 
 epaulets, sent him instantly across the Rhine to convince his five bro- 
 thers of the rapidity of Prussian promotion. Morgan flew to his home 
 in the county ^Carlow, delighted the firesides for many a mile round with 
 his having outwitted a king and a whole battalion of grenadiers, laid out 
 his recruiting money on land, and became a man of estate at the expense 
 of the Prussian treasury. 
 
 One ceremony remains to be recorded. Once a year, on the anniver- 
 sary of the day on which he left Potsdam and its giants behind, he 
 climbed a hill within a short distance of his house, turned himself in the 
 direction of Prussia, and, with the most contemptuous gesture which he 
 could contrive, bade good-bye to his majesty. The ruse was long a 
 great source of amusement, and its hero, like other heroes, bore through 
 life the name earned by his exploit — Morgan Prussia. — King George 
 THE Fourth. 
 
 1, they being — themselves, ba aud^ fte ttn ©rja^tm ttou bergteic^cn ®efd^ii;ten 
 eine gro^e Sertigfeit befdpen.
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 247. 199 
 
 Section 247. 
 
 THE TERRIBLE WINTER OP 1784. 
 
 About the middle of the month of April, in the year 1784, three 
 hundred thousand miserable beings, dying from cold and hunger, groaned 
 in Paris alone — in that Paris where, in spite of the boast that scarcely 
 another city contained so many rich people, nothing had been prepared 
 to prevent the poor from perishing of cold and wretchedness. 
 
 For the last four months, the same leaden sky had driven the poor 
 from the villages into the town, as it sent the wolves from the woods 
 into the villages. 
 
 No more bread. No more wood. 
 
 No more bread for those who felt this cold — and no more wood to bake 
 it. All the provisions which had been collected, Paris had devoured in 
 a month. The Provost, short-sighted and incapable, did not know how 
 to procure for Paris, which was under his care, the wood which might 
 have been collected in the neighbourhood. When it froze, he said the 
 frost prevented the horses from bringing it; when it thawed, he pleaded want 
 of horses and conveyances. Louis XVI., ever good and humane, always 
 ready to attend to the physical wants of his people, although he over- 
 looked their social ones, began by contributing a sum of 200,000 francs 
 for horses and carts, and insisting on their immediate use. Still the 
 demand continued greater than the supply. 
 
 At first no one was allowed to carry away from the public timber-yard 
 more than a cart-load of wood ; then that was limited to half the 
 quantity. Soon long strings of people might be seen waiting outside the 
 timber-yards, as they were afterwards seen at the bakers' shops. The 
 king gave away the whole of his private income in charity. He procured 
 3,000,000 francs by a grant and applied it to the relief of the sufferers, 
 declaring that every other need must give way before that of cold and 
 famine. The queen, on her part, gave 500 louis from her purse. The 
 convents, the hospitals, and the public buildings were thrown open as 
 places of asylum for the poor, who came in crowds for the sake of the 
 fires that were kept there. 
 
 They kept hoping for a thaw, but heaven seemed inflexible. Every 
 evening the same copper-coloured sky disappointed their hopes ; and 
 the stars shone bright and clear as funeral torches through the long, 
 cold nights, which hardened again and again the snow that fell during 
 the day. All day long, thousands of workmen, with spades and shovels, 
 cleared away the snow from before the houses, so that on each side 
 of the streets, already too narrow for the traffic, rose a high, thick wall, 
 blocking up the way. Soon these masses of snow and ice became so 
 large that the shops were obscured by them, and they were obliged to 
 allow it to remain where it fell. 
 
 Paris could do no more. She gave in, and allowed the winter to 
 do its worst. December, January, February, and March passed thus,
 
 200 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 247. 
 
 although now and then a few days' thaw changed the streets, whose 
 sewers were blocked up, into running streams. Horses were drowned, 
 and carriages destroyed, in the streets, some of which could only be 
 traversed in boats. People went to the markets to see the fisherwomen 
 serving their customers with immense leathern boots on, inside which 
 their trousers were pushed, and with their petticoats tucked round their 
 waists, all laughing, gesticulating, and splashing each other as they stood 
 in the water. 
 
 These thaws, however, were but transitory ; the frost returned, harder 
 and more obstinate than ever, and recourse was had to sledges, pushed 
 along by skaters, or drawn by roughshod horses along the causeways, 
 which were like polished mirrors. The Seine, frozen many feet deep, had 
 become the place of rendezvous for all idlers, who assembled there to skate 
 or slide, until, warmed by exercise, they ran to the nearest fire, lest the 
 perspiration should freeze upon them. All trembled for the time when, 
 the water communications being stopped, and the roads impassable, 
 provisions could no longer be sent in, and began to fear that Paris would 
 perish from want. 
 
 The king, in this extremity, called a council. They decided to implore 
 all bishops, abb^s, and monks to leave Paris and retire to their dioceses 
 or convents ; and all those magistrates and officials who, preferring the 
 opera to their duties, had crowded to Paris, to return to their homes ; 
 for all these people used large quantities of wood in their hotels, and 
 consumed no small amount of food. There were still the country 
 gentlemen, who were also to be entreated to leave. But M. Lenoir, 
 lieutenant of police, observed to the king that, as none of these people 
 were criminals, and could not therefore be compelled to leave Paris in 
 a day, they would probably be so long thinking about it, that the thaw 
 would come before their departure, which would then be more hurtful 
 than useful. 
 
 All this care and pity of the king and queen, however, excited the 
 ingenious gratitude of the people, who raised monuments to them, as 
 ephemeral as the feelings which prompted them. Obelisks and pillars 
 of snow and ice, engraved with their names, were to be seen all over 
 Paris. 
 
 At the end of March the thaw began, but by fits and starts, constant 
 returns of frost prolonging the miseries of the people. Indeed, in the 
 beginning of April it appeared to set in harder than ever, and the half- 
 thawed streets, frozen again, became so slippery and dangerous, that 
 nothing was seen but broken limbs and accidents of all kinds. The 
 snow prevented the carriages from being heard, and the police had 
 enough to do, through the reckless driving of the aristocracy, to preserve 
 from the wheels those who were spared by cold and hunger. — After 
 Alexander Dumas, " The Queen's Necklace."
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 248. 201 
 
 Sectiofi 248. 
 
 A STORY WORTH READING. 
 
 I. 
 
 Soon after the promulgation of Methodism^ in England it spread with 
 great rapidity over the counties of Devon and Cornwall, and especially 
 among the miners and lower orders. For a long period after its intro- 
 duction the clergy and higher classes of society in the west of England 
 manifested a dislike to the new doctrines which can scarcely be imagined 
 in these days of modern toleration. It was thought by many young 
 gentlemen good sport to break the windows and nail up the doors of a 
 Methodist chapel '^, The robbery of a Wesleyan preacher ^, as a spree, 
 by two young gentlemen, became the subject of an investigation, and the 
 frolicsome young men had to pay very dearly for their practical joke. 
 
 Among the uninstructed local preachers was one known by the name 
 of " The Old Gardener." This old man was no common character — 
 indeed he was quite original, and by far the most popular preacher 
 among the disciples of John Wesley in the vicinity. 
 
 He kept a small nursery garden about two miles from the town of 
 
 St. A , working hard at his occupation of gardener by day, and 
 
 praying and preaching to his fellow-sinners, as he called them, in the 
 evening. He lived in the poorest manner, giving away all the surplus of 
 his earnings in charity, distributing Bibles, and promoting to the utmost 
 of his ability the extension of Methodism. His complexion was a sort 
 of dirty, dark, iron grey, and his whole appearance lean and grotesque. 
 Although extremely ignorant, he possessed no small degree of cunning; 
 of this the following incident affords ample evidence : — 
 
 " The Old Gardener " was once subjected to a burglary and attempt at 
 robbery. He lived with his wife in a small and somewhat dilapidated 
 cottage, not far from the high road. Three young " squires," who all 
 despised and hated Methodism, having heard that the old man had been 
 recently making a collection to build a Methodist chapel, thought it 
 would be a good frolic to rob him temporarily of the proceeds of this 
 collection. The result of the frolic is best related in the words of one 
 of the actors : — 
 
 " We set out," said he, " upon our expedition with blackened faces, 
 upon a dark night, a little before twelve o'clock. We had dined late, 
 and all of us had Dutch as well as Cornish courage; yet I confess, when 
 it came to the point *, I felt myself a coward. I began to reflect that it 
 was but a dastardly frolic to frighten the poor old man and his wife in 
 the dead of night." 
 
 " The clock struck twelve. ' Now comes the watching time of the 
 night,' exclaimed Tom." 
 
 " ' Don't let us frighten the poor couple out of their wits,' said I." 
 
 " ' No,' said Ryder, ' we will be gentle robbers — gentle as Robin 
 Hood and Little John.' " 
 
 " I said that. I would rather return than proceed. 'Recollect,' said I,
 
 202 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 248. 
 
 ' the old fellow is an old soldier, as well as a saint, and fears nothing 
 human.' " 
 
 " ' Nonsense,' exclaimed Ryder, ' here goes ".' He pressed the feeble 
 door of the cottage in which the old man resided ; it immediately gave 
 way and flew open. We entered and found ourselves in a sort of 
 kitchen. To our great surprise there was a light shining from an inner 
 room. This made us all hesitate." 
 
 1, Nom. bie Se^^re bet SDJetfjobiflen. 2, of a — chapel, eincv ben a)?ctf)cbi|ien 
 
 ge{)cvenben ^a))c((c. 3, eincg trcgte^ifd^eu ^vebigcvg. 4, a\S eg tcirflic^ 
 
 enift »urbe, 5, fomm nuv ! 
 
 Section 249. 
 
 A STORY WORTH READING. 
 II. 
 
 "'Who is out there at this time of the night.?' exclaimed a hoarse voice 
 from within. I knew it to be the unmistakable voice of ' The Old 
 Gardener.' " 
 
 " 'Give us your money, and no harm shall befal you,' said Tom, 'but 
 we must have your money.' " 
 
 " ' The Lord will be my defence,' rejoined ' The Old Gardener.' 
 ' You shall have no money from me ; all in the house is the Lord's — 
 take it if you dare.' " 
 
 •"We must and will have it,' said we, as we entered the inner room, 
 after taking the precaution of fastening the chamber-door as we 
 entered." 
 
 " We soon wished we had suffered it to remain open, as you will see." 
 
 "Now, consider us face to face with ' The Old Gardener,' and a pretty 
 sight was presented. Three ruffians (ourselves) with white waggoners' 
 frocks and blackened faces ; before us ' The Old Gardener,' sitting on 
 the side of his bed. He wore a red worsted nightcap, a checked shirt, 
 and a flannel jacket ; his iron grey face, fringed with a grizzly beard, 
 looking as cool and undismayed as if he had been in the pulpit 
 preaching." 
 
 "A table was by the side of the bed, and immediately in front of him, 
 on a large deal table, was an open Bible, close to which we observed, to 
 our horror, a heap of gunpowder, large enough to blow up a casde. A 
 candle was burning on the table, and the old fellow had a steel in one 
 hand and a large flint in the other. We were all three paralysed. The 
 wild, iron-faced, determined look of ' The Old Gardener,' the candle, 
 flint and steel, and the great heap of powder, absolutely froze our blood, 
 and made cowards of us all. The gardener saw the impression he had 
 made." 
 
 '"What ! do you want to rob and murder?' exclaimed he ; 'I think you 
 had better join with me in prayer, miserable sinners that you all are ! 
 Repent, and you may be saved. You will soon be in another world.' " 
 
 " Ryder first recovered his speech."
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 249. 203 
 
 " ' Please to hear me, Mr. Gardener. I feel that we have been wrong, 
 and if we may depart we will make reparation, and give you all the 
 money we have in our pockets.' " 
 
 " We laid our purses on the table before him." 
 
 "'The Lord has delivered you into my hands. It was so revealed to 
 me in a dream. We shall all soon be in another world. Pray, let us pray.' " 
 
 "And down he fell upon his knees, close to the table, with the candle 
 burning, and the ugly flint and steel in his hand. He prayed and prayed. 
 At last he appeared exhausted. He stopped and eyed the purses, and 
 then emptied one of them out on the table. He appeared surprised, 
 and, I thought, gratified at the largeness of its contents." 
 
 " We now thought we should have leave to retire ; but, to our dismay, 
 ' The Old Gardener ' said : 
 
 " ' Now, we will praise God by singing the looth Psalm.' " 
 
 " This was agony to us all. After the Psalm, the old man took up the 
 second purse, and while he was examining its contents, Ryder, who was 
 close behind Tom and myself, whispered softly : 
 
 " ' I have unfastened the door, and when you hear me move, make a 
 rush.' " 
 
 "'The Old Gardener,' then, pouring out the contents of the second 
 purse, exclaimed : 
 
 " ' Why, there is almost enough to build our new house of God. Let 
 me see what the third contains.' " 
 
 " He took up the third purse." 
 
 " 'Now,' whispered Ryder, ' make a rush.' " 
 
 " We did so ; and at the same moment heard the old fellow ham- 
 mering away at his flint and steel. We expected to be instantly blown 
 into fragments. The front door, however, flew open before us : and the 
 next moment we found ourselves in the garden. The night was pitchy 
 dark. We rushed blindly through brambles and prickly shrubs, ran our 
 heads against trees, and then forced our way through a thick hedge. At 
 last, with scratched faces, torn hands, and tattered clothes, we tumbled 
 over a bank into the high road. 
 
 Section 250, 
 
 A STORY WORTH READING. 
 
 III. 
 
 " Our horses we soon found, and we galloped to Ryder's residence. 
 Lights were produced, and we sat down. We were black, ragged, and 
 dirty. We looked at each other, and, in spite of our miserable adven- 
 ture, roared with laughter." 
 
 " 'We may laugh,' exclaimed Tom, ' but if this adventure becomes 
 known, and we are found out, Cornwall will be too hot for us the next 
 seven years. We have made a pretty night of it We have lost our 
 money, been obliged to pretend to pray for two long hours, before a 
 great heap of gunpowder, while that grim-faced, ugly, red-capped brute 
 threatened us with an immediate passage into eternity. And our money
 
 204 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION ^50. 
 
 forsooth must go to build a meeting-house ! Bah ! It is truly horrible. 
 The old fellow has played the old soldier on us with a vengeance, and we 
 shall be the laughing-stock of the whole country.' " 
 
 " The affair was not yet ended. Reports were spread that three men 
 disguised as black demons, with horns and tails, had entered the cottage 
 of ' The Old Gardener/ who had not only terrified them, but had 
 frightened them out of a good sum of money, which he intended to de- 
 vote to the building of a new Methodist meeting-house. It was given 
 out that on the following Sunday ' The Old Gardener ' intended to 
 preach a sermon, and afterwards solicit subscriptions for the meeting- 
 house, when he would relate the remarkable manner in which he had 
 been providentially assisted with funds for the building. Our mortifica- 
 tion was complete. Tom, whose hatred of Methodism was intense, de- 
 clared he would blow up the meeting-house as soon as it was built. 
 Our curiosity, however, was excited, and we all three determined to hear 
 our adventure of the night related by ' The Old Gardener,' if we could 
 contrive to be present without being suspected." 
 
 " Sunday evening arrived. The meeting-house was crammed to suffo- 
 cation ; and with the dull lights then burning in the chapel, we had no 
 difficulty in concealing ourselves. The sermon was short, but the state- 
 ment of our adventure was related most minutely and circumstantially in 
 the old man's quaint, homely, and humorous phraseology. This evehing 
 he seemed to excel himself, and was exultingly humorous." 
 
 " * I never,' said he, ' saw black faces pray with greater devotion. 
 I have some doubt, however,' he slily observed, ' if their prayers were 
 quite heavenward. They sometimes turned their faces towards the door, 
 but a lifting of the flint and steel kept them quiet.' " 
 
 " He then added, with a shake of the head and an exulting laugh : 
 ' But they had not smelt powder like the old soldier they came to rob. 
 No, no ; it was a large heap— ay, large enough to frighten old General 
 Clive himself. The candle was lighted, the flint and steel were ready. 
 You may ask, my friends, if I myself was not afraid. No, no, my dear 
 friends,' shouted he, * this large stock of apparent gunpowder was — it 
 was my whole year's stock of leek (onion) seed ! ' " 
 
 " The whole congregation somewhat irreverently laughed ; even the 
 saints almost shouted ; many clapped their hands. I was for a moment 
 stupefied by the announcement, but at last could hardly suppress my 
 own laughter." 
 
 " We subscribed to the fund to avoid suspicion, and left the meeting. 
 After the sermon we joined each other, but could not speak. We could 
 hardly chuckle ' leek-seed,' and then roared with laughter." 
 
 " It was a good joke, though not exactly to our taste. It has, how- 
 ever, more than once served for subsequent amusement." 
 
 " The chapel was built with the money collected by the gardener. 
 Time and circumstances now induce me to think that there has been no 
 detriment to morality or religion by the erection of the meeting-house, 
 which was afterwards known as ' The Leek-seed Chapel.'" — St. James's 
 Magazine.
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 A. ESSENTIALS OF CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 I. PRINCIPAIi AND CO-ORDINATE CLAUSES. 
 
 (See § 24.) 
 
 § 1. Infinitives, Participles, and that form of the Infinitive pre- 
 ceded by JU which is called Supine, stand at the end of the clause ; 
 as — 
 
 6r irat drmti^, aber boc^ faubet gc« He was poorly, but yet neatly 
 
 f ( e i b e t. dressed, 
 
 ©ein gurncnbcr D^eim ^atte i^n ju jt(^ His angry uncle had bid him come 
 
 gcrufen. to him. 
 
 (Seine iiautc iwirb movcjen ;;uunS f ommen. His aunt will come to us to-morrow. 
 
 ®ie ^at itn3 oerfproc^en, ntoigen ju She has promised us to come to- 
 
 f nt nt e n. morrow. 
 
 § 2. In a clause containing both an infinitive and a participle, the in- 
 finitive stands last ; as — 
 
 S)er !Diencr mirbe c3 nic^t gct^an f^aben, The servant would not have done it, 
 
 h)cnn er i^ii nic^t fvcunblid) bavum if he had not kindly asked him 
 
 gebeten ^dtte. to do it. 
 
 2)cr fflrief ntu^ gut gcfc^rieben Uicr« The letter must be well written, for 
 
 ben, benn cr entljalt unc^tige 2)Jit; it contains important communi- 
 
 teilungeu. cations. 
 
 § 3. In a clause containing two infinitives, the one governing the 
 other stands last; as — 
 
 6'r mag mit fiitcm folt^en SDicnfc^cn nid)t5 He does not like to have anything to 
 JU t()un I;abcu. do with such a man. 
 
 § 4. Separable prefixes of compound verbs are placed at the end of 
 
 the clause when the verb is used in a simple tense ; as — 
 
 !Dev .Rouig g i n g jcbcn SKovgcn urn elf The king went out every morning 
 U()r anS uub f a m gcgcu jwclf lU)t at eleven o'clock and returned 
 
 g u r u (f . towards twelve o'clock. 
 
 § 5. In a clause containing two objects, both expressed by nouns, that 
 of the person stands before that of the thing ; as — 
 
 Vim ndd^flen Slbenb gab er bem ^Kanne The next evening he returned the 
 ba^ ®elb jun'icf. money to the man.
 
 2o6 APPENDIX. CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 § 6. When both objects represent persons, the accusative generally stands 
 first; as — 
 
 SJian ^at ben 33erbvec^er bem 9iid)ter They have delivered the criminal to 
 iibcvlicfert. the judge. 
 
 § 7. In clauses containing tivo objects, one being a personal pronoun and the 
 other a noun, the pronoun stands first ; as — 
 
 2)er frembe ^err gab mir einige 51j)fet The stranger gave me some apples 
 unb Sirnen. and pears. 
 
 § 8. When both objects are personal pronouns, the diQC\x.aaX\ve generally 
 stands first ; as — 
 
 ©te ^di eei mir gcfagt. She has said it to me. 
 
 2J?an ^t fie i^m gcnomnten. They have taken her away from him. 
 
 § 9. -^. Adverbial expressions of time generally stand before the object 
 (except it is a pronoun) and always before adverbial expressions of manner 
 and place ; as— 
 
 SBir ()aben gejiern bret SBricfe erfjaltcn. Yesterday we received three letters. 
 
 (5v tfl ^entt p\c^i\it) nad} Sonbon He has suddenly left for London to- 
 
 abgctciji. day. 
 
 But we must say — 
 
 2Bir ^abeu @ie ^eutc ntit Ungebulb We have been eicpecting you to-day 
 evttjavtet. (@ie pers. pron.) with impatience. 
 
 B. Adverbial expressions of manner and place generally stand before the 
 Infinitive or Participle when the verb is in a compound tense, but take the last 
 place in the clause when the verb is in a simple tense ; as — 
 
 2)ie ^d)uUv ^aben i()re 5lufgabeu fe^^r The pupils have done their lessons 
 
 g u t gemad)t. -very avell. 
 
 ©ie nia(i)en i{)rc Slufgabcn immcr fcljr They do their lessons always very 
 
 gut. well. 
 
 ©tnb ©ie gejlern im %i)tattx gcttJefcn? Were you at the theatre yesterday f 
 
 3^ * ge^e nieinSX^eater. 1* never go to the theatre. 
 
 § 10. The negation ltid[)t stands after the accusative ; as — 
 
 (Sr f^reibt ben Srief nic^t, [onbern fein He is not writing the letter, but his 
 
 33rubev. brother is. 
 
 (Sr ftat ben SSrief nic^t gefd)riebcn. He has not written the letter. 
 
 § 11. In questions tiii^t sometimes stands before the accusative; as — 
 J&aben ©ie nic^t meinen SBrief ertjalten? Have you not received my letter? 
 
 § 12. In general the negation widyt stands before that part of the sentence 
 which it affects ; as — 
 
 3c^ bin nidcji franf geftcfen. I nave not been ill. 
 
 SBir fprec^cn n i ^ t son i^nt, fonbevn We do not speak of him, but of his 
 
 »ou fcinem 4>etter. cousin. 
 
 I)ie S'latur Ijatte fie nic^t mit ©d)cnj Nature had not endowed her with 
 
 :^cit au^gcftattet. beauty. 
 
 * "When the subject, which may be preceded by its attributes, occupiea 
 the first place in a principal clause, either the copula or the verb must 
 follow immediately.
 
 APPENDIX. CONSTRUCTION, 20y 
 
 II. IWrVERTED CONSTRUCTIOW. 
 
 § 13. The ordinary way of arranging the words is to place the subject and 
 its adjuncts first, and the predicate with its adjuncts after ; as — 
 X)ex gute 93atcr (subj.) ifi l)eutc 3)forgcn The good father has left this morn- 
 
 Miit fcinen brci Xccl}tcni nad} l^cnbon ing for London with his three 
 
 abgereifi (predicate with adjuncts). daughters. 
 
 But this construction is sometimes inverted, so as to place the 
 predicate, or a part of the predicate, before the subject. This is 
 the case : 
 
 (a) In interrogative clauses ; as — 
 .f m ttt t bcr SJfann ()eute ? Does the man come to-day ? 
 
 3ft bet SSater ttac^ Sciifccn abgcicift? Has the father left for London? 
 
 ^$at cr fein ®clb bci fid) ? Has he no money about him ? 
 
 (6) In imperative clauses; as — 
 ©enbcn @ie biefen 33ricf jur ^u>ft ! Send this letter to the post-office ! 
 
 (c) In exclamatory clauses ; as — 
 
 ^dtte cr auf mid) c\et)crt ! Would he had listened to me! 
 
 (d) In subordinate clauses beginning with an adverbial conjunc- 
 tion. (See § 124 of Lange's German Grammar.) ' 
 
 § 14. The ordinary way of arranging the words is often departed from for 
 the sake of emphasizing a part of the predicate. In this case the part to 
 be emphasized is placed at the beginning of the sentence, and the construction 
 must be inverted, that is to say the subject must be placed after the 
 verb; as — 
 !Die le^tcn SBorte t)attc bcr jungc The last words the young man had 
 
 9}}cnf(^ mit gc^cbcnet (£timme gc; spoken with an elevated tone of 
 
 fprod^cji. voice, 
 
 ■ipcutc fann et nic^t abreifcn, fonbcrn He cannot depart to-day, but to- 
 
 morgcn. morrow. 
 
 2!?it bent ;i»otf llT)t 3ugc fann er He cannot go by the twelve o'clock 
 
 nic^t mc()r faf)rcn, benn c^ ifl ju fvdt. train, for it is too late. 
 
 These sentences would read in the ordinary construction : 3)cr junge 9)?cnfc^ 
 ^attc bie le^tcn 35?ovte rait gcl)obcncr <Stimntc gcfprcd)en. @r fann nid)t beute abvcifcn, 
 fonbcrn movgen. @r fann nidjt mcl)r mit bem ;^»vclf lU)r 3iigf fal)ren, bcnn ct^ ift ,^n fpdt. 
 The words „!Dic (c^ten SBovtc," „t)cutc," „mit bem ^wci^ 1\\}X 3tigf," have been made 
 emphatic by being placed at the beginning of the sentence, which required the 
 •verb and the subject to interchange places. 
 
 § 15. Sometimes a subordinate clause (that is to say a clause dependent 
 on another clause, without which it would not he understood) is made em- 
 phatic by being placed before the principal clause. Then also the 
 subject of the principal clause must be placed after the verb ; as — 
 %\i ct in bie ©tube fam, fanb er mid) When he came into the room, he 
 am ©d^reibtifc^c. found me at the desk. 
 
 In this example the principal clause is „cr fanb mi(^ am ©d)reibtifd)c," and the 
 subordinate clause is contained in the words „'i\Vi er in bie ©tube fam;" this 
 latter clause has been emphasized by being placed before the principal clause, 
 but it required the principal clause to be in'verted, so as to place the subject (er) 
 after the verb (fanb).
 
 308 APPENDIX. CONSTRUCTION, 
 
 Here are some more examples of the same class : 
 
 SBcit cr cin guter Sunge ifi, irilt ic^ if)m Because he is a good fellow, I will 
 feinc SStttc gctrdfiren. grant his request. 
 
 Oiad^bcm er gcgeffen unb gctruufen l^atte, After having eaten and drunk, he 
 g i n 9 « r w^ij J&aufe. went home. 
 
 III. SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 
 
 (See § 24.) 
 
 § 16. In subordinate clauses beginning with a relative pronoun, a relative 
 conjunction, or a subordinative conjunction, the verb stands at the end. ; as — 
 
 2)?an j^cigte mir ein ©uc^, bag »iele fcf^one They showed me a book which con- 
 
 S3ilbet entl|ielt. tained many beautiful pictures. 
 
 SBit h5aren im Simmer, olH cr ctntrat. We were in the room when he entered. 
 
 § 17. When the verb is in a compound, tense, the auxiliary verb stands 
 last; as — 
 
 9ta#cm fie ifin Bcgru^t l^atte, fain After she had welcomed him, she 
 fie fc^neU auf mid^ ju. approached me quickly. 
 
 § 18. When there are ttvo verbs, one of which is a verb of mood, the verb 
 of mood stands last ; as — 
 
 Gr fagte, bap cv nicftt f onitnen f onne. He said that he could not come. 
 
 § 19. When there are t^o verbs, the one being an infinitive, and the other 
 an inflected verb, the inflected verb stands last ; as — 
 
 2)ec ©o^n fiarb gcrabe ju bcr (Stunbe, The son died the very hour his father 
 in »e(cf)cr fein 93ater i^n wiebers hoped to see him again, 
 
 jufe^en I)offte. 
 
 § 20. When there are tivo infinhl'ves and an auxiliary I'erb, the auxiliary 
 verb has the first place, whilst the governing infinitive stands last ; as — 
 
 ^r itberlegte, trie er eg njevbe »ermeiben He considered how he might be able 
 fonnen. (fonnen is the governing to avoid it. 
 
 verb.) 
 
 (Sr fagte, baf er e^ nid^t \:jOL\:it t^un He said that he did not like to 
 nt c g e n. (uicgcn is the governing do it, 
 
 verb.) 
 
 § 21. Sometimes the conjunction, which generally connects the sub- 
 ordinate clause with the principal clause, is omitted and understood. In this 
 case the construction is like that oi 2i principal clause; as — 
 
 dr fiird^teje, id) f 6 n n c mid^ eifalten. He was afraid I might catch 
 (®r fiirdbtetc, bap i^ nti^ e r f d 1 1 e n cold, 
 
 f n n e.) 
 
 § 22. Sometimes the auxiliary verb is omitted and understood; as — 
 
 35 a f er miv gencntmeu (wuvbe), ifi That he was taken from me is my 
 mein gropteS Scib. greatest sorrow. 
 
 § 23. In subordinate clauses the prefixes of separable compound 
 verbs are not separated from the verb; as — 
 
 @c Jrar fo befc^dftigt, bag er in »ier;5c{)u He was so busy that he did not go 
 S^agen nicfit a u 6 g i n g. out for a fortnight.
 
 A PPENDIX. CONS TR UC TION. 209 
 
 §24. J. The co-ordinative conjunctions — aBer, altetn, beiiti, namttd), 
 rbcr, fonbcrn, fo»of)( — a\S, and unb — serve to connect two or more 
 independent statements with each other, which have either one common 
 subject or predicate, or have each a subject and predicate of their own 
 (co-ordinate clauses). Co-ordinative conjunctions do not affect the 
 regular order of construction explained in §§ 1-12, and generally stand 
 at the beginning of the co-ordinate clauses which they introduce ; but \i\iix 
 and ltd ml id) are often placed after the verb, and sometimes even stand in 
 the middle of the clause ; as — 
 
 !l)ie grau icav bfm SlTJaime fuTf) geflovben; bicfcv lie^ bent tjinterlaffeneu Jliiibe 
 abcr jcbe ntcgticfie ©orgfalt angeteiljen. 
 
 A subordinate clause, i. e. a clause dependent on another clause, without 
 which it would not be understood, is joined to a principal clause by means of 
 a relative pronoun, or a conjunction, which latter may be either a relative, a 
 subordinative, or an adverbial conjunction. (See § 124 of Lange's German 
 Grammar.) The effect produced upon the construction by relative pronouns, 
 relative conjunctions, and subordinative conjunctions has been explained in 
 §§ 16-23. 
 
 B. Adverbial conjunctions, like all other adverbial expressions 
 commencing a clause, require the verb to stand before the subject, 
 as has been pointed out in § 124 of Lange's German Grammar. 
 
 B. THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 § 25. The Indicative Mood is the Mood of Actuality, whilst the Sub- 
 junctive Mood is the Mood of Possibility. The nature of the Indicative may 
 be said to be objecti've, because it is used to express positive facts. The nature 
 of the Subjunctive may be said to be subjecti've, because it represents the state- 
 ment made as a mere subjective supposition, or as resting on the mere hearsay 
 evidence of other persons. 
 
 The Indicative Mood denotes Positiveness and Certainty. 
 
 Conjunctions never determine the mood in which a verb is to be 
 used. The mood is always determined by the nature of the statement we 
 wish to make. So one and the same verb may be followed, in the dependent 
 clause, either by the Indicative or the Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Examples. 
 3)er ©efaiigcne ift let; er ifi l^cute The prisoner is dead; he died this 
 SJJorgen gcjtcvben. (Positive state- morning, 
 
 ment.) 
 
 3d) bin uber^cugt, baf ct c3 gcfagt tjat. I am convinced that he has said it. 
 (Certainty.) 
 
 S'ev 3J{cnfd) ijl flcvMid). (A fact.) Man is mortal. 
 
 3c^ t)abe gc()crt, bap «r jum aKiuijlcr I have heard that he has been ap- 
 etnannt ift. pointed a minister, (and I do not 
 
 doubt it). 
 (Here the Indicative Mood is used, because I wish to imply that I have no 
 doubt about the accuracy of the statement.) 
 
 3^ t)abe gcl}cvt, ba^ cv jum 2)iiiiifici- I have heard that he has been ap- 
 ernannt [ei (see § 30). pointed a minister, (but 1 rather 
 
 « doubt it). 
 
 (Here the Subjunctive Mood is used because I w ish to express a doubt about 
 the accuracy of the statement, wliich is expressed in English by the words 
 ' but I rather doubt it.') 
 
 VOL. IV. P
 
 210 APPENDIX. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 C. THE SUBJUNCTIVE (OR CONJUNCTIVE) MOOD. 
 
 (See § 25.) 
 
 § 26. Since, in the best modem works of English Literature, we frequently 
 find the Indicative employed instead of the Subjunctive in clauses of un- 
 certainty and supposition, and since, with the exception of the verb to be, it is 
 evidently the tendency of the English language to reject the distinction of the 
 Subjunctive Mood, the student will encounter no small difficulty in learning 
 the right use of the German Subjunctive, which is most extensively used, and 
 gives often great power, conciseness, and elegance to the mode of speaking. 
 
 The Subjunctive Mood is used both in principal and subordinate clauses, 
 and denotes Uncertainty and Supposition. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Wlan fagt cr fet gcj!orBen (see § 29). People say (i.e. it is rumoured) he is 
 (Uncertainty.) dead. 
 
 $tato gfaubte, ba^ nur ein ®ott fei. Plato thought that there was only o«<f 
 (Supposition.) God, (but that it was a matter of 
 
 doubt). 
 
 § 27. The Subjunctive expresses Command, Wish, and Concession. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 @t nc'^ine fctne ffieite, trie's g3rau(^ Let him take his distance as it is 
 ifi ! (Schiller.) (Command.) customary ! 
 
 ®ott fei tnit bir! (Wish.) God be with you! 
 
 (fr ge^e, ttjo^tn er 8ujl ^<xt. (Con- He may go wherever he pleases, 
 cession.) 
 
 § 28. The Subjunctive is used in Indirect Speech (oratio obliqua), 
 i. e. when words which have been actually spoken are quoted not as they were 
 spoken, but m substance only ; it stands especially after the verbs [agen, to say; 
 crjd^len, to relate; melben, to report; beric^ten, to relate, to report; l^oreii, 
 to hear ; as — 
 
 @r fagte i^m, cr fei etn ffievfc&rtenbcr. He told him he was a spendthrift. 
 
 ©ie beljauptete, fte ^a.'bi ben 93rief ni^t She asserted that she had not got the 
 
 cr()alten. letter. 
 
 Sein greunb ntclbete, baf er nid^t fomnten His friend reported that he could not 
 
 f onne, mi(^ ju befuc^en. come to see me. 
 
 § 29. The Subjunctive is used w^hen the statement made in the 
 subordinate clause is intended to be represented not as a fact, but 
 as a mere idea, as a mere conception of the person speaking. We 
 find it, therefore, especially after verbs denoting a request, a 'wish, a hope, an 
 apprehension, a permission, an advice, and a command; as — 
 
 ineine:i, to mean. ftjoKcn, to be willing, 
 
 glauben, to believe. bitten, to ask. 
 
 secmuten, to presume. befcf}lm, to command. 
 
 jweifeln, to doubt. »erlangen, to demand. 
 
 f(i)eincn, to seem. crmabnen, to admonish. 
 
 i)Dffen, to hope. raten, to advise. 
 
 fSr^ten, to fear. bcjic:^en, to insist upon, 
 And others of a like meaning.
 
 APPENDIX. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 211 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Soffen (Sie unS I) of fen, bag unfcr ©tvcben 
 
 t)on ©tfolg fein t»erbc. 
 3(f) bat i^n, bag cr mir Ijelfen moge. 
 
 3c^ fur^tete, bag cr ein 93ein ge* 
 
 broc^en f)abc. 
 Sir bitten, bag ber ©efangene fvei 
 
 gclaffen icecbc. 
 
 (Sr jtpeifelt baran, bag man if)n fur 
 unfc^ulbig erfldren toerbe. 
 
 SBir hjerben ficts verlangen, bag man 
 nnS unfere OJe^te gelcd^re. 
 
 5c^ rate bir, bag bu ji[eigiger njcrs 
 bej^. 
 
 3^ bejle'^e barauf, bag fic^ ber Sorb 
 entferne. (Schiller.) 
 
 Let us hope that our endeavours may 
 be successful. 
 
 I asked him to help me. 
 I was afraid that he had broken a 
 leg. 
 
 We request that the prisoner be 
 released. 
 
 He doubts if he will be declared 
 innocent. 
 
 We shall always demand that our 
 rights be given to us. 
 
 1 advise you to become more in- 
 dustrious. 
 
 I insist upon the Lord's retiring. 
 
 § 30. With regard to the Tense in which the Subjunctive ought to stand in 
 subordinate clauses of the character mentioned above, the general rule is, 
 that— 
 
 We use the same tense of the Subjunctive Mood Tvhieh, in 
 direct speech, or in a principal clause, wrould be used in 
 the Indicative Mood, 
 
 except that 
 
 the Perfect of the Subjunctive is used instead of the Imperfect 
 of the Indicative, and that the Pluperfect of the Indicative 
 is changed into the Perfect of the Subjunctive, with the 
 help of one of the conjunctions cl)C, bctfor, and nad)bcitt. 
 
 The following table will make this clear: — 
 
 Direct Speech. 
 
 (St fagte: „3c^ Icfe." (Present.) 
 
 (Srfagte: „3ci) fjabe gelefen." (Perfect.) 
 
 (Sr fagte: ,;3c^ Wixit Icfen." (First 
 Future.) 
 
 (St fogte: „3c& trerbe gclcfcn Ijaben 
 (Second Future), menu mcin 
 ^reunb mid) abf)olcu unrb." (First 
 Future.) 
 
 But— 
 
 Sr fagte: „3c^ tag, aU fein Srcunb 
 fd^rieb." (Imperfect.) 
 
 Indirect Speech. 
 
 (Sx fagte, er lefe. (Present Subj.) 
 
 (St fagte, er ijahi getcfen. (Perfect Subj.) 
 
 (St fagte, er n^crbe Icfen. (First Future 
 Subjunctive.) 
 
 (St fagte, er toerbe gclcfcn tjabcn (Second 
 Future Subj.), iricnn fein Jyveunb 
 i()n abf)olcn wcrbe (First Future 
 Subjunctive). 
 
 (Sr fagte, er l)ahc Qclcffii, ds fein 
 gveunb gcfcijricbcu l)abc. (Per- 
 fect Subjunctive.) 
 
 ©r fagte, er Ijabc flclcfpit (Perfect 
 Subjunctive), cl)e fein ^rcuiib 
 flffdjricbcil Ijabc. (Perfect Sub- 
 junctive.) 
 
 It will be seen, therefore, that the verb in the subordinate clause stands 
 either in the Present, in the Perfect, or in the Future. 
 
 Qr fagte: „3(^ tjatte gdcfen (Plu- 
 perfect), al^ mein grcunb fdjrieb." 
 (Imperfect.)
 
 212 
 
 APPENDIX. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 SDer !Dicncr antoortete, cr fei ntc&t tm« 
 jianbe bie Slrbeit gu tf)un, benn er 
 fei gu f^ttjad). (Present Subj.) 
 
 (St ergd^lte tnir, cr t)abc cm Unatucf 
 gefiabt. (Perfect Subj.) 
 
 @ic bc^au^jtcte, bafi fte nie in invent Sebcn 
 franf gettiefcn fei. (Perfect Subj.) 
 
 @r fagtc, ba^ cr ft(^ urn cine @te[(e be* 
 Wetben iccrbc. (First Future.) 
 
 The servant answered that he was 
 unable to do the work, for he 
 was too weak. 
 
 He told me he had met with a mis- 
 fortune. 
 
 She affirmed that she had never been 
 ill in all her Ufe. 
 
 He said that he was going to apply 
 for a situation. 
 
 § 31. The Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive, hoT?vever, must 
 be used instead of the Present and Perfect Subjunctive, and the 
 Conditional instead of the Future Subjunctive, when any ambiguity 
 might arise as to the mood employed, that is to say in cases where the form of 
 the Present, of the Perfect, or of the Future is identical both in the Indicative 
 and the Subjunctive Mood. For example, in the sentence — 
 
 „@ic fagte mir, i^rc %o^in gingen 'She said to me that her daughters 
 
 niemalg anf SSciKc;" never went to balls;' 
 
 the verb gingen stands in the Imperfect Subjuncti-ve and not in the Present, 
 because the third person plural of the Present Indicative and the corre- 
 sponding person of the Present Subjunctive are identical in the conjugation 
 of this verb. Both are „fie get) en," the verb, therefore, must be put in the 
 Imperfect Subjunctive to show clearly the mood employed. 
 
 § 32. The Subjunctive is employed in adverbial clauses of pur- 
 pose and of manner, when the subordinate clause generally begins with the 
 conjunctions baf, auf ba^, bamit, and at3 ob; as — 
 
 2)u fcdil beinen SSater unb betne S'Juttet 
 e^rcn, auf baf bir'5 ^rof^Igelje unb 
 tu tange lebejl auf (Srben. 
 
 3jl c3 nic^t, aU oh bieg aSolf mic^ jum 
 @ott mac^e? (Schiller.) 
 
 Thou shalt honour thy father and thy 
 mother, that thou mayest prosper 
 and thy days be long on earth. 
 
 Does it not seem as if the people 
 meant to make a God of me ? 
 
 § 33. The Imperfect Subjunctive and the Pluperfect Subjunctive 
 are used to express somethmg possible, or something capable of being done, 
 also to denote a mere supposition on the part of the speaker, or for the pur- 
 pose of stating an opinion with caution or modesty ; as — 
 
 (S3 1 n n t e fein, baf er ntc&t gu «!saufe 
 tBdre. 
 
 3(^ '^ 5 1 1 e iro^^t Sujl, tf)nt cinen Scfuc^ 
 
 ju ntad)en. 
 3c^ JBii^te ttoi)!, h?ag ju tt)un irare. 
 (S3 IB are »ieneid}t bejfcr, bag Untcrnc'^j 
 
 men aufjugeben. 
 
 § 34. To express a wish we use the Present Subjuncti-ve, when we believe 
 in the fulfilment of the wish, but the Imperfect Subjuncti-ve, when we want to 
 indicate that the fulfilment of the wish is unlikely, and even impossible ; as — 
 
 @ott fei mit bir I God be with you! 
 
 SDJ oge cr balb gefunb ttcrbeu ! May he soon recover his health! 
 
 Sang I c b e bcv ^outg ! Long live the king ! 
 
 @ott t) c t f e mir ! (Sutler.) May God help me I 
 
 Literally: It might be possible that 
 he were not at home, i.e. He may 
 possibly not be at home. 
 
 I should like indeed to pay him a 
 visit. 
 
 I fancy I know what ought to be done. 
 
 Perhaps it would be better to give up 
 the undertaking.
 
 APPENDIX. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 21^ 
 
 But with the Imperfect Subjunctive : 
 
 33? (^ t e er balb gcfunb ttcrbcn ! Would he might soon recover his health I 
 
 SBcim er iod) noij lebtc! I vi^ould he were still alive! 
 
 SP? 6 c^ t e er balb fommcn ! Would he might soon come ! 
 
 § 35. It must always be remembered that both moods (the Indicative and 
 the Subjunctive) may stand in Principal Glauses as well as in Subordinate 
 Clauses, since tbeir use depends alone on the nature of the statement qve wish to 
 make (see § 25). Nor has the notion connected with the verb standing in the 
 principal clause an absolute influence on the mood to be used in the sub- 
 ordinate clause. The Indicative stands in subordinate clauses not merely 
 after verbs expressing Certainty, but also after such as denote Belief, Sup- 
 position, and Doubt, when the statement contained in the subordinate clause 
 is represented objectively, i.e. as being based upon a fact, or as being, in the 
 speaker's opinion, not open to any doubt. So we say — 
 
 3c^9taube,ba^ cr inber (S^tad^t gebliebcn I believe that he was killed in 
 
 ifi (not fei). battle. 
 
 3(i^ ttcip nic^t, ob cr lebt, cbcr ob er I do not know whether he is alive, 
 
 tot i)l. or whether he is dead. 
 
 3c^ jweific, ba§ bcr ^ranfe genefen ftirb. I doubt if the patient will recover. 
 
 3c^ l^ofe, ba^ er ftd^ h)ol)t bcfinbct. I hope that he is well. 
 
 But when the statement contained in the subordinate clause is represented 
 subjecti'vely, i.e. as being based upon a mere idea or belief, the correctness of 
 which is still open to doubt, the Subjunctive must be used; as — 
 
 SWan gtaubt, ntan fagt, etc., er fei in ber People believe, people say, etc., that 
 S^lac^t gebliebcn. he was killed in battle, (but it is 
 
 still doubtful). 
 
 (Sr fiivdjtet, ba^ man itjn cerratcn He is afraid that they have betrayed 
 tj a b f. him, (yet he does not know). 
 
 D. THE CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 § 36. The Conditional is the mood for representing a state or an event as 
 dependent on another, which other, however, is not based upon a real fact, 
 but is a mere hypothesis or supposition. As such we use not only the First 
 and Second Conditional (ic^ trurbe, etc.), as given in the tables of verbs, but 
 also the Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive. The latter two, in fact, may 
 be called the simple forms of the Conditional Mood, and the former (i(^ 
 Joiirbe, etc.) the compound forms. Every true conditional statement consists 
 of two clauses : {a) the hypothetical clause, which contains the supposition, 
 [b) the conditioning clause, which contains the inference drawn from that 
 supposition ; as — 
 
 If I had money (hypothetical clause), 
 
 I should like to travel (conditioning clause). 
 
 The Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive may be used in both clauses, but 
 the First and Second Conditional (ic^ iviirbe, etc. — see the tables of verbs) can 
 only be used in conditioning clauses. 
 
 The conditioning clause is often introduced by „fo." 
 
 Examples. 
 
 SBcnn i(^ ®ctb ^atte, gtngc ic^ gem auf If I had money, I should like to 
 {Reifen (or ttjiirbe i^ gcvn auf ificifcu travel, 
 
 ge^en).
 
 214 
 
 APPENDIX. THE CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 SBenn e3 ^cutc f^oned SBettcr gctwefcn 
 TO&rc, fo hjurben n)ic au^ge* 
 gangen fein. 
 
 !Diefcr SWann fonnte glucftid^cr fein, 
 njenn ec baS Spiel nic^t ju fct|c 
 liebte. 
 
 (St iDutbe gcfunb fein (or cr ttare 
 gcfunb), njcnn ct ntaftgec Icfcte. 
 
 If the weather had been fine to-day, 
 we should have gone out. 
 
 This man might be happier, if he 
 were not too fond of gambling. 
 
 He would be healthy, if he were 
 more temperate. 
 
 I 
 
 § 37. The Conditional is sometimes used eUiptically ; as — 
 
 30/ i^ tBiirbe gcfommen fein I 
 
 Untcr ben Umjlauben ^atte t^ c3 gcrt>i^ 
 gct^an. 
 
 2Bfire i^ ret^, tturbe '\ij ©ie fofort 
 fceitt^Un. 
 
 Yes, I should have come! (i.e. if I 
 had been able to do so, understood). 
 
 I am sure, under the circumstances I 
 should have done it (i.e. if I had 
 been placed in the same situation). 
 
 Were I rich, I should pay you di- 
 rectly.
 
 SYNOPSIS OF THE CHANGES 
 
 WHICH 
 
 THE GERMAN SPELLING HAS UNDERGONE THROUGH THE 
 GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS OF 1880*. 
 
 Myiu . 
 
 A. 2>o?aIe. (Vowels.) 
 
 si, ,C, it (instead of 2le, De, He) in: bie Slvfel {apples)-, bic Dfen {ovens, stoves); ber 
 
 Uberrocf {overcoat), etc. In foreign words fl, \i (for Greek and French ai 
 
 and French u) in : ber i^Jatagcg {pedagogue) ; ber ^'ajjttdn {captain) ; bie Sefture 
 
 {reading), etc. 
 
 a^ (instead of ai) in : SBai)evn {Bavaria) ; ber 33at)cr {the Bavarian) ; bai)evifcf>, adj. 
 
 {Bavarian), and derivatives. 
 et (instead of ai) in: bet Jpeice {heathen) ; tie Jpeibe {heath); bag ©ctreibe {grain); 
 ber 2Bcti;en {iv heat), etc. — But : bie 23ai {bay) ; bev §ai {shark) ; ber ^ain {grove) ; 
 ber .Raifer {emperor) ; bev Saib {loaf) ; ber i'aid^ {spaivn [of fish]) ; bog Saic^en 
 I J {spa<wning) ; bic l'aid}jeit {spaivnifig-time) ; ter i!aie {layman) ; ber 9)fai (iWi?;') ; bie 
 
 SWaib {maid, maiden) ; ber 3Jiaig {maize) ; inaifc^eil {to mash [in brewing]) ; bie 
 ©aitc {string) ; ber 9Baib {dyer's <woad) ; ber or bie SBaife {orphan (boy or girl]), 
 and derivatives. 
 
 Nouns terminating in -tt and -it — 
 
 ^take in the plural cil, which inflection forms a separate syllable, as: 
 bic Slvmee' {army), pi. bie 3lrntce'cu {armies) ; ber or bie ©ec' {lake or sea), pi. 
 bie ©ee'en {lakes or seas); bie SJielobie' (melody),//, feie SWcIobie'en {melodies); 
 bie SEljeorie' {theory), pi. bic Sl)eorie'en {theories), etc. But: bag Jloniitce' 
 {committee), pi. bie .Roinitec'ei {committees) ; bag ^uie' {knee), pi. bie Jlnie'c. 
 Cll 1. (instead of au) in : beudjteu {to appear, to seem) ; mir beuc^t {it seems to me, 
 methinks) ; i^m beuc^te {he thought) ; (burc^);blcucn {to give [ow] a hearty 
 drubbing, to beat [one] black and blue) ; [but : (burc^)jblduen {to make or 
 dye blue)] ; ber ©reuel {horror) ; leiuinetl {to deny) ; Cerlcumbeu {to slander), 
 etc. 
 2. in the termination cilC (sounded as in French), in : ber (Sommaubeur {com- 
 mander) ; ber (Rebactciir {editor), etc. 
 i (instead of i)) in; ber ®ifg {plaster of Paris); bie <£itbe {syllable); ber Sirup 
 {syrup) ; ber Ikni^'ir {vampire), etc. [Comp. at).] 
 
 *l. SRegeln imb 2Bortert*erjci(^nig fiir bie beutfd^c iHc^ti'd&reibunfl jum ©ebraut^ in 
 ben rreugifcfoen ©c^ulen. 33evlin, aBeibmanfc^e SBud^fianblung 2. yjccjeln unb SBorter; 
 verjcic^nig fiir bic bcutf(^e OJc^tfdjrcibung junt ©cbrauc^ in ten baperifd^en ©d&uleu. 
 ajfunien, ©rpcbition beg ffgl. 3entraU©^ulbiid)er-,*-Berlagg.
 
 21 6 SVNOPSIS OF THE CHANGES IN THE GERMAN SPELLING. 
 Write: 
 
 ie (instead of i) in the verbal termination ic'rcn, as in : jiubie'ren {to study) ; fpoi 
 jic'ren {to go for a walk) ; niavfc^ic'veu {to march) ; Vrobie'ren {to try, to test) ; 
 Ijantic'ren {to handle, to manage), etc. — and in their derivatives, as in : bie 
 Jpatitie'iung {management, business, profession), etc.; also in: gicb {gi-ve), and 
 derivatives. 
 oil {pronounced as in French, instead of u) in words coming from the French, as 
 bie jVouvage {forage) ; bcr gouricr {quarter master) ; bev gouruier {veneer), etc. 
 
 Only one Vowel (instead of two) — 
 in : bar {bare, destitute of; [of money] : in cash) ; btc S3arf{^aft {ready money, 
 cash in hand) ; bag 2)?a^ {measure) ; bag (S(|af {sheep) ; bie ©c^ar {troop, herd) ; 
 tec (Star {starling; [in medicine] : cataract) ; bie SBage {scales) ; bie SBare (^oo^j); 
 bev Jperb {hearth) ; bie ^erbe (/;f/-J, focA) ; bag Jlainel {camel) ; bag 2cg (/o^, /a/f) ; 
 lofcn {to cast lots) ; bie Sofung {the casting or draiving of lots) ; ber ©(|o§ {lap, 
 middle ; [of dress] : skirt, or tail) ; etc. 
 
 B. ^oitfoiiatiteit. (Consonants.) 
 
 j>. (instead of bt) in: ber 2!ob {death); tobhauf {sick unto death); tobmiibe {tired to 
 death) ; bie STobfuiibe {deadly or mortal sin) ; tobU(!^ {deadly, mortal, fatal), etc. — 
 Comp. letter t (instead of bt). 
 ^ (instead of i?'^) in : Slbolf {Adolphus) ; ber (Sfefaiit {elephant) ; ber gafan {pheasant) ; 
 *Jiubotf {Ralph) ; SBeftfalen {Westphalia), etc. — But : ber @pf)eu (w^) from the 
 old German word ©b^cit. 
 ^ 1. ]^ remains as a sign of lengthening a syllable : — 
 
 {a) In syllables beginning with a t-sound. and. containing a long 
 vowel, but not a diphthong or a double vow^el, as in : bie %\)(xi 
 {deed) ; bie S£^rane {tear) ; ber S^^voii {throne) ; ber %\)ox {fool) ; bag 
 Sljor (^-^/f) ; tt)un (/o d'o) ; ttiat {did) ; getf^an (^o«e), etc, [Comp. 
 Ij.2(a).] 
 (^) before \, m, II, and r, as in : atlmdt)ti(^ {gradually) ; befel)len {to 
 command); nefjmen (to take); ttuj^uen {to live, to reside); te^ren {to 
 teach), etc. Exceptions: bie i^eme {an old secret criminal court in 
 Westphalia) and derivatives, as: bev 5cntri(^tcv {a judge of that court), 
 and derivatives. 
 (f) in : bie 5e^be {feud, quarrel) ; bie ^Wat^b {moiuing), from tnd^en {to monu) ; 
 ber !l)ra^t {ivire) from bvcljen (^o /wrw) ; bie 9ia^t {seam), from iid^en {to 
 seiv), and other words derived from verbs containing an aspirated i). 
 {d) in a few proper names, as in: 58cvtf|a, ®ui\ti)tx, SWavtfja, SDJat^ilbe, 
 
 3;f)eobalb, 2;f)cobov, etc. 
 {e) in many nouns originally Greek, as : bie ^at^ebra'fe {cathedral) ; 
 bag Zi}ima (theme); bie 2:i)cclcgie'; bie S^eovie'; bag Xijitmomt'Ux ; ber 
 ^IJa'iit^ev, etc. 
 2. I) is not retained after tt — 
 
 (a) in syllables beginning with a t-sound and containing a diph- 
 thong or a double vowel, as in : bev %ai\ {dew) ; bag Zau {rope) ; bev
 
 Writei 
 
 SFNOPSIS OF THE CHANGES IN THE GERMAN SPELLING. 21 7 
 
 %tit (tar) ; tcercn {to tar) ; in or iai %iH (part, or siiare) ; tcuer (dear) ; 
 bag Sicv (animal) ; »erteibigcn (to defend)^ etc., and derivatives. — 
 Exception : bcr Xf)ce (tea), and derivatives. 
 
 {b) in the suffixes tlUtl and tiim (formerly t()um and t^itm), as in : ba3 
 ©tgentum (property) ; bad Jlenigtum (kingdom) ; bag Ungetiim (monster), 
 etc. 
 (f) at the end of syllables, and at the beginning of syllables before 
 a short vowel, as in : — bie Slrmut (po-verty) ; ber 5ltcm (breath) ; atmen 
 (to breathe) ; bie ©lute (blossom) ; bie glut (flood) ; bag @erat (tools) ; bie 
 ®lut (glonu) ; ber ^ot (dirt) ; bag Sot (a fweight of half an ounce, no^ 
 obsolete)', ber 9Wct (mead); bie 9)tiete (rent; a corn or hay-stack; mite)', 
 ber 2)Jut (courage) ; bie 9ict (wet^) ; iiotigen (^o urge ; to invite ; to compel) ; 
 ber or bie ^ate (god-father or god-mother) ; bev 9Jat (ad'vice) ; rateil (to 
 advise ; to guess) ; bag 9Jatfel (riddle) ; rot (red) ; bie Oiote (redness) ; bie 
 Oilttc (roi) ; ber Xiinu (totuer) ; ber SGert (-value) ; tvert (<U}orth, dear) ; 
 ber 2Birt (Aoj^, landlord) ; bie CSut (rage), and derivatives, as : ratlog 
 (ivithout advice or means : helpless) ; WertVoU (valuable, precious) ; bag 
 SBirtg^aug (inn), etc. 
 
 Mark well : :^uvra ! (hurra .'). 
 
 1. (instead of c) in many w^ords originally Greek, as in : bie Slfabemic', 
 
 (academy) ; pva'fttfc^ (practical) ; bie Slrit^meti't (arithmetic) ; bie 5]8&i)|i'f 
 (natural philosophy), etc. — But: ber S^ava'fter; bie aJJctanc^oUe'. 
 
 2. (instead of c and qu) in many words originally Latin or Trench, 
 
 but which have become quite germanised, and are now looked upon as 
 altogether German words, as : ber 5lb»ofa't (laivyer) ; bag Sogfe'tt (thicket) 
 from the French: le bosquet; bag Sofa'i (locality); bag *)3u'bUfum (public); 
 tala'nt (vacant) ; ber a>ulfa'n (volcano), etc. — More especially in words 
 terminating in . . . fel, as in : bcr 9Uti'{el ; bie ^^avti'fel ; bie gio'gfel 
 (flourish), pi. bie Slo'gfelu (flne <words, frequently made use of luith a de- 
 ceptive purpose). 
 
 3. (instead of c) in words with the prefixes 5to = , ^oI=, ^0111 = , ^OIt = , 
 
 jRot=, and also in syllables containing a f-sound followed by t (. . . ft), 
 as in : bie ^ojjie' (copy) ; bie Colonic' (colony) ; ber Jlomntanba'nt (commander) ; 
 ber .Ro'nitabler (constable) ; bag .tonjc'vt (concert) ; bie JTorrefponbe'iij (correspond- 
 ence), etc. ; bie 2)ibafti'f (didactics) ; bag (Sbi'ft (edict), etc.— But : bag 
 ©i'ctuut, because not germanised, etc. — • 
 
 Mark well : ber Jlajfee' (coffee), but : bag (5af^ (a fine restaurant nvhere mostly 
 
 coffee is served). 
 NOTE. In foreign words which have preserved a foreign pronunciation, 
 or certain foreign forms of spelling or inflection, do not use f, but c, as in : 
 tie Satnpagne (campaign) ; ber ©cmmi'g (clerk) ; bag glaco'ix (smelling-bottle) ; ber 
 (Kcbacteu'r (editor) ; bie Slbjccti'sa (adjectives), etc. 
 
 Doubtful Orthography. We find : .f onje'rt and Sonce'rt, n. ; Jta'rjer 
 (prison in schools and universities) and Sa'rcer, m. ; .Romitee' and (Somite', n. ; 
 .Somranie' and Sompagnie', f. ; conje'iitrifc^ (concentric) and conce'ntrifc^ ; .Roujffi'io'H
 
 2l8 SFNOPSIS OF THE CHANGES IN THE GERMAN SPELLING. 
 
 Write : 
 
 and Sonccffio'n, f. ; ^onji'f {council) and Sonci'f, n. ; f[affijijie'ren {to classify) and 
 
 claffificte'ren ; ^u'rfit^ {course of study) and (Su'rfu^, m. ; fonef t and corre'ct ; 
 
 ^onjunftio'it and ©onjunctio'ti, etc., etc. 
 
 From these examples it will be seen that the mode of spelling is fluctuating 
 
 between f and c> and c and 5, in many words which originally contained the 
 
 letter c. The first way is to be preferred, and strongly recommended, 
 
 in all the words given above, and many others in common use that 
 
 contain a f or a j-sound. and are qviite germanised in spelling and 
 
 inflection. (Comp. G. 3.) 
 
 Use also f instead of c in words of Greek origin which have preserved the 
 
 f-sound, as: — 2lnefbo'te, fatt)o'Ufci^, ^omo'Die, ©iate'ft, etc. — [Comp. B, 
 
 letter f, 1.] — And write c and c<?, as before, in: 91'cce'nt, 2l'ccufati'», Sl'cquij 
 
 fitio'n, etc. — 
 stti^ (instead of ni§) as a suffix of nouns, as in: baS ©rcifluis {event) ; ba3 Scgiabni^ 
 
 (burial) ; bag SSerfjdttnig (relation) ; taS 35crmd'c^tnig (bequest), etc. — 
 
 The prefix tni^ . . ., however, remains unchanged, as in: bag SHi'^wcrfidubnig 
 
 (misunderstanding), pi. bie SWi'focrfidnbnijfe. 
 ft (instead of ^) in bcg^alb {therefore) ; beSWegcn (therefore, for this reason") ; inbeg 
 
 (meanivhile, ivhilst ; hoivever)', untcrbcg (meaniuhile, ivhi/st); )xit6i)alh (<why); 
 
 ircgtticgcn (tvhy), etc. — 
 ftf (instead of fl") in : bagfctbc (the same) ; bcSfetbcn (of the same) ; btegfeitS (on this 
 
 side), etc. 
 St (instead of fl) in : ©ienStag (Tuesday) ; ©eburt^tag (birthday) ; gru^tinggtag 
 
 (spring-day), and other compound nouns in which g occurs as a sign of the 
 
 Genitive and is followed by a t. 
 fT between two vowels, the first one of which is short, as in taffen (to let, to leave) ; 
 
 bie Soffe (cup) ; trotj bcffen (in spite of that) ; weffen (<whose), etc. — 
 6 I. between two vowels, the first one of which is long, as in: bii'fen (to atone 
 for) ; f^iepen (to shoot), etc. 
 
 3. before t, and at the end of words, as in : er Id^t (he leaves) ; itjt ta^t (you 
 leave) ; gcbiipt (atoned for) ; ta^ (iet) ; ber ^u^ (iiss), etc. — 
 f (instead of bt) in : ber %oti (a dead man or person) ; tot (dead) ; totcn (to kill) ; 
 
 ber S^ctfdjlag (manslaughter) ; ber S^otengrdbcr (gravedigger), etc. — Comp. letter 
 
 t (instead of bt.) 
 t (instead of b) in : bag S3rot (bread). 
 
 t (and never j) in the accented and original Latin combinations : — tia', tie', tio', 
 
 as in ntartia'lifc^, ^atie'nt, m., ^JJatio'n, f., Xrabitio'n, f., 3D?otto'n, etc. 
 But write : (SSra'gie, Sngvebie'njien, etc., e being tmaccented. 
 3 1. (instead of tj) after a long vowel, as in : bie Sre'jcl (biscuit in the shape of a 
 
 tnvisted ring, cracknel) ; bu'jen (to call a person thou), etc. 
 
 2. (instead of (^5 and @c) in : bet 3ar (czar) ; bag BfVter (sceptre), etc. 
 
 3. (instead of ce) regularly at the end of foreign words with German 
 pronunciation and terminating in French in ce, and in Latin in tia, tius, 
 tium, cius, cium, as in : bag Scnejt'j, bie Sufti'j, bag ^ogjji'j, bie OTiti'5, bie 
 fRoti'g; bie ©iffcre'nj, bie ©ente'nj, bie 93afa'nj ; bie gina'njen, bie Oiotii'je, bie SUlia'nj,
 
 SFNOPSIS OF THE CHANGES IN THE GERMAN SPELLING. 21 9 
 
 bte 2)i(la'nj, etc. — (But with foreign pronunciation : SUliance, ©iftance, etc.) 
 
 4. also in words quite germanised, as : bet SBcji'rf (district, circuit) ; tie Sa'nje 
 (lance) ; bte ^ottjei' {police) ; ber ^^Jottji'ft [policeman) ; ba§ Xixytxo'i {pocket-pistol) ; 
 bag Xtx^t'ii {trio), etc. — But write : (Sd'far, bie Sdfu't {cesure, cesura) ; bie (Se'bet, 
 bie Sctebritd't, bie (Scufu'r {censorship), cenfic'vcn {to censure, to review), ber (Se'tttu 
 me'tcr, bie Serea'Hen {cereals), bag (Soliba't, ber (Si'rtumjie'r, bag 8t)ce'um, etc. 
 
 5. (instead of c) in verbs terminating in . . . te'rctt, as : fabrijte'rcn {to manufac- 
 ture) ; mujtjie'reu {to make music) ; ^ublijie'ren {to publish), etc. 
 
 Note. In many words which originally contained the letter c, the mode of 
 spelling is unsettled and fluctuating between c and 5, as in : SKebiji'n ayid 
 3)Jcbici'it, f . ; bag 9icge))t and 9flecc))t, n, {prescription, recipe); ^JJrinji'p and 
 5|)rinci'p, n. {principle) ; $roje'nt and ^proce'nt, n. {per cent.); ^rojc'p and ^45ioce'p, 
 m., etc. — [Read, carefully B, Note to letter f, also letter t of B, and General 
 Observations on the Spelling of Foreign Words, where additional examples 
 are given.] 
 
 C. ^Ilgemeiiie SSemetlPuiigen fiber Me 3^rei&uttg bet 
 
 ^tembtpprter* 
 
 (General Observations on the Spelling of Foreign Words.) 
 
 1. With foreign ■words containing sounds and combinations of sounds 
 not originally German, THE GENERAL PRINCIPLE regarding their 
 orthography is that, their foreign pronunciation being preserved, also 
 the foreign garb of their orthography is retained. 
 
 So, for example, we use : — 
 
 oi (sounded as in French) in : bie SWemoi'ren {memoirs) ; bie 2!oite'tte 
 {toilet). 
 
 and ^ (sounded as in French) in : bie ^aga'ge {luggage) ; bag Sogi'g 
 {lodgings) ; bet ©enba'rm {a police-officer on horseback) ; bag ©enie' 
 {genius ; a man of great talent) ; bet Sn^enieu'r {engineer) ; bag Scurna'l 
 {journal, magazine) ; rongic'reil {to arrange), etc. — But with German 
 pronunciation : bet ©cnera'l {general) ; geiua'l {highly gifted) ; bie 
 ®ciiiaUtd't {geniality, originality), etc. — 
 
 911 (sounded as in French) in : bee Gfjampa'gnet {champaign) ; bie 
 fiorgnc'tte {lorgnette, eye-glass), etc. 
 
 U (sounded like English 1 followed by y) in : bag SataiKo'n {battalion) ; 
 bag 58i'I(arb {billiards); bag SiKe't {ticket; note); ber *:)3o)liao'u 
 {postillion), etc. 
 
 ti (sounded as in French, but not quite so nasal) in : bie Ulua'ucc {grada- 
 tion of colours'); bag ©affi'n {reservoir); bet Oiefrai'n {refrain); bet 
 ffla^o'n {ray of light ; [of a fortification] : radius) ; bag a3iotonce'(( 
 {•violoncello), etc. 
 
 2. Many foreign, words, on the other hand, composed of German
 
 220 SYNOPSIS OF THE CHANGES IN THE GERMAN SPELLING. 
 
 sounds, which might be indicated by German letters, have as yet 
 preserved their original orthography. So we find : — 
 
 ai (for the sound of d) in : tie (S()ai'fe (chaise), from the French ; 
 
 ail and can (for the sound of c) in: bie ©au'ce (sauce) ; iai bureau (office), 
 
 from the French ; 
 c^ (for the sound of fc^) in: bie S^auffee' (turnpike-road), from the 
 
 French ; 
 c^ (for the Greek f-sound) in : ber or iaS S^or (choir or chorus), from the 
 
 Greek ; 
 p\) (for the sound of f) in : bcr $f)itcfo'pI) (philosopher), from the Greek ; 
 tif (for the sound of t) in : bcr X^von (throne), from the Greek ; and 
 » (for the German tt>-sound) in: oiole'tt (-violet- blue, adj.), from the 
 French. 
 3. Again we find foreign words which, being in common use 
 and composed of German sounds, have become entirely germanised, 
 and wear a German garb; as: bie %x\x')?);>t (troop, company), French: la 
 troupe ; bie ©vu'pve {group), French : la groupe ; ber 2)igfu'r^ (discourse), French : 
 le discours; bcr (gefretd'r (secretary), French: le secretaire. 
 
 It follows from the three preceding paragraphs :— that it is impos- 
 sible to reduce the spelling of foreign words to any fixed principles, 
 and that there exists at present much uncertainty and inconsistency 
 respecting the spelling of such words. [Comp. B, Consonants, Note to 
 letter f, also B, letter j, where additional examples are given.] 
 
 D. Stlciiifc^rcibung unb Sufammeiijic^iuig. 
 
 (SmaU Initials [instead of Capitals] and Contractions.) 
 
 USE SMALL INITIALS:— 
 
 1. With Nouns used as Prepositions, Conjunctions, Indefinite 
 Numerals, and Adverbs, as in : angcridjt^ (in the face of) ; infotge (in conse- 
 quence of); be^uf^ (on behalf of);— ^am (in case o/) ;— ein bifc^cn (a bit, a 
 little) ; ein »jaar (a feiv, some, some fe'w) ;— atifaiigS (in the beginning) ; teilS 
 {partly) ; cittcgteil^ (on the one part or hand) ; atlbcvntcilg (on the other part or 
 hand) ; Tlteincvfeitg (on my part) ', ntorgcng (in the morning) ; <xU\\U (in the 
 evening) ; sortnittag^ (in the fore-noon) [but t be3 a«orgcng, beg Slbeiib^, I)eute 
 gja^mittag, etc., €ountag^, SWontagg, etc.]; ubcrt)aupt (in general, altogether, 
 moreover) ; utltcttvegS (on the ivay) ; l)eut5Utage (now-a-days) ; beijeitcn (in time, 
 betimes) ; bi^iveilcn (at times) ; cinmal (once) ; jwcintal (twice) ; bergauf (uphill) ; 
 tc^)fiibet (head over heels), etc. 
 
 2. With Nouns used in Verbal-Combinations, in which, by the by, 
 they are strongly accented, and treated as separable particles, i.e. are separated 
 from the verb and placed at the end of the clause when used in a principal 
 sentence and in a simple tense. Such Verbal-Combinations are:— re'd^t (jabcii
 
 SrNOPSIS OF THE CHANGES IN THE GERMAN SPELLING. 221 
 
 (to be right) ; u'nrcd)t t)aBen [to be lurong) ; Ici'b t^im [to he sorry) ; ttjc'f) {\,VA\ {to 
 /!7«r/);— fc^u'Ib I)abcn or fein (/o ^^ in fault); — fci'iib fcin [to be hostile); mir ifl 
 a'ngfi, ttjo'^t (/ am afraid, well) ; mir ijl lip't (/> w necessary to me, I require) ; 
 mir ifi »e'()e (7 am grieved) ; ba^ ifi f(^a'be (/^«/ w a />/Vj') ; t^ bin Jti'denS (/ have 
 a mind, I intend) ; — jla'ttfiiibeu, fia'tt^aben {to take place) ; ttta'fjrnctjmen {to per- 
 ceive) ; tei'hictjmcn {to take part in, to sympathise with) ; u'ber()aiiblie(}mcn (to 
 increase) ; ]^au'^^a(teu {to keep house, to manage) ; a'cl)tget)en {to pay attention) ; 
 prci'^geben {to abandon, to expose) ; bra'd^liegen {to lie fall onu) ; (^ufla'ttcn fommcn {to 
 be of use, to come in usefully) ; iitjia'nb fetjen {to repair, to restore) ; jufia'ilbe 
 fommen {to accomplish) ; imfti'd} taffcil {to leave in the lurch), etc. — (Sr ^att {)au8; 
 e^ il'i mir jullvittcn gefommcn ; e^ ^at xibertjaubgeuommen ; e3 ifi mir gutcil geworbcn. 
 But : @r ()at feincu %i\\. an mir, etc. 
 
 3. With Pronouns and Numerals, as:— jemanb, nicmanb, {cbcr, fcincr, 
 eincr, bcr eiue, ber aitbere, man ; — etUdje {some), einigc, einjeliif, manege, »iele, alle, <x\{i?,, 
 ettrag, nic^t^, beibe ; — tie (a((e) anbcrn, bag (a((ct^) aiibre, bie (aflc) iibvigen, bag (a((eg) 
 fibrige, bag meiflc, ber (bag) ndmlidje, ber crfte, ber letjte, bcr jiveite, ber nd(^jic, bev 
 evfte bclk, ein jc9U(^er, etc. 
 
 But :— Use Capital Initials (as before) : — 
 
 {a) with Ordinal Numerals and Adjectives preceded by the definite 
 article and used in apposition to a proper noun, as : ^riftrid) 
 ber 3»r>cite ; .Karl ber ®rD§e, etc. 
 
 {b) With Pronouns and Adjectives in titles, as: — ©e. ^DJaje^dt ber 
 .Rcniij; bag ^aiferli(^e 3cUamt {the Imperial Custom-House); ber 
 5Birflid)e @et)eimrat con ^"lumbolbt {the Privy Councillor von Humboldt). 
 
 {c) With Pronouns used in addressing persons, more especially 
 in letters, as : — @ie geniefien mein voKeg 9}ertrauen ; ttir gtaubcn S^nen 
 alleg ; bag ^aug S^rcr (5(tern n?ar mir jletg geoffnet ; id) unf( S)ir batb mel^r 
 bacon erjdijten ; fictg b(eibe id^ !Dein Sid) liebenbcr So^n ^einric^, etc. 
 
 4. In Adjectival and Adverbial Clauses, as : — gro^ uiib flein {grown up 
 people and children) ; arm unb rcid) {poor and rich people) ; alt nnb jnng, buvd) bid 
 unb bunn ; — am beficn, fnrg evfie, bei ireitem {by far) ; anfg beutUd)fie, im aUgemeinen, 
 im ganjen, im folgenben, im irefentlid)cn {essentially, in all essential points) ; oon 
 neuem, »or htr^em, im corang {beforehand) ; con corne, o(}ne iveitcreg, um ein betidc^t; 
 li^eg, etc. — and also in idiomatic phrases, such as: — ©r jief)t ben ffirjern 
 babei {he is the loser by it) ; ic^ unll Stjnen 3I)rc Unarten gngutc batten (/ will bear 
 with your rudeness ; I will excuse your incivilities); ber Sunge l)at Sie jum befien 
 {the boy amuses himself at your expense); ic^ tritt eg 3f)nen jnlicbe ttjun {I will do 
 it to please you), etc. 
 
 E. Sftlcginig fccr 9B6rtcr iit Silbcit, 
 
 (Division of Words into Syllables.) 
 
 1. When part of a German word has to be separated from the rest in order 
 to be carried on to the next line, the division into Syllables is made as we 
 would naturally deliver them whilst pronouncing the word very slowly and
 
 222 SYNOPSIS OF THE CHANGES IN THE GERMAN SPELLING. 
 
 distinctly. The compound letters : ^, d, bt, pi, p\), fc^/ fr/ ft/ ^, t\^, 
 and tj, shoxold, as a rule, not be separated. [For exceptions see § a of this 
 chapter.] Examples :— ru-'I)ett, bie^fcr, ©oiune, 9)?ut4er, aWit^tag, ben;nod^, 5luf-ff, 
 Set^etsglaS, funf4c, 2ln=fer, aBed^^fet, J&off^uung, Jgoff^nuivgen, gituger, Sang^fam^feit, 
 — ©ru^e, ^a^cfcn, ©td^bte, f(o;pfen, Dr4{)o^gra5pf)tc, lo^^en, auS^pre^cn, la^jiig, 
 f^ie^^en, So^tfjar, !ra.'tjcn, ^c^rc. 
 
 2. The syllables forming the constituent parts of Compound Words should 
 not be broken up, and the principal rule, as expressed above, cannot always 
 be applied to them. Examples : ^ittsein, t)icr;auf, fjcrscin, \>ax-.\m, icarjum, oor;au3, 
 coH^en^ben, Siutcr^ef^fc, 2Wi4ro4fop, 2tt;mo;fvt)a;re, ©c^iffjfa^rt* ©c^wimtiumeufter*, 
 9e5mut4i^, Si^^peng, big^pustie^ren, 2)ig;po4i;ti;on, bcjobsa^sten, aufjer^jic-^cn, 
 ©e^burtgstag, gru^^-ling^jtag. 
 
 * But write ' O^iffa^rt ' and ' ©c^wimmeificr ' when no separation takes place. 
 
 F. ©cr 2l:poftrop^. (The Apostrophe.) 
 
 1. The Apostrophe is more especially used for indicating the suppression of 
 certain letters in poetry and in the language of every-day life, as in English. 
 Examples: 3c^ tieb' bi^ ; ®te^' auf ! SBie gcf)t '3 ? ©o ijl '^ rec^t ; ®elb W \ij 
 
 2. Contractions of prepositions and articles are used without the Apo- 
 strophe, as : am, beim, unterrn, anei, ing, jum. 
 
 3. The Apostrophe is abolished before the inflections indicating the 
 Genitive relation of proper names, as : Siccrcg ffiriefe ; ©(^(((crg @ebi(^te ; 
 J^omevei Sliag ; gritjen^ ©eburt^tag ; .^amburgg ^anbcl ; ©op^ien^ SWutter ; bie 
 ©inttio^net Sreglaug. 
 
 4. Family names, however, terminating in § or 5, the genitive of 
 which cannot be formed by adding ^, require an Apostrophe to be placed 
 after them for indicating the Genitive relation, as : Semoji^enc^' 9Jeben ; SSo^' 
 £uife.
 
 INDEX 
 
 TO THE GRAMMATICAL RULES AND IDIOMATIC RENDERINGS. 
 
 A. 
 
 a or an preceded by 'not', how to 
 render, S. 126, N. 12. The nu- 
 meral ' a ' not translated before 
 hundred or thousand, S. 132, N. 10. 
 
 a great deal, how to render, S. 65, 
 N. 3 and S. 77, N. 3. an hour, 
 how to render, S. 235, N. 10. a 
 month, how to render, S. 167, N. 
 24. 
 
 about, to be, rendered by im Segviff 
 fein or tvoKeii, S. 6, N. 4. 
 
 Abstract nouns, their formation 
 from Infinitives of verbs, S. 11, 
 N.7. 
 
 Adjectives. Used as nouns, S. 34, 
 N, I. National adjectives require a 
 small initial, S. loi, N. i. Adjec- 
 tives and all parts qualifying nouns 
 must be placed before them, S. 128, 
 N. II. The formation of their su- 
 perlative used predicatively, S. 120, 
 N. 14. 
 
 Adverbs. Their position in Impera- 
 tive clauses, S. 68, N, 2. Must not 
 precede the verb or copula when 
 the subject stands before them, S. 
 102, N. 30. Formation of the rela- 
 tive superlative of Adverbs, S. 183, 
 N. 24. 
 
 all in connection with a possess, adj. 
 pron. and a noun in the sing, num- 
 ber, how to render, S. 157, N, 20. 
 All of us (thetn, you), S. 74, N, 3, 
 how to render. 
 
 Apposition, the, its agreement, S. 
 53, N. 9. 
 
 Articles, the, and other determinative 
 words repeated, S. 10, N. 9. Their 
 position in connection with adject- 
 ives and adverbs, S. 28, N. 9. The 
 Definite Article. Before nouns 
 representing a whole class, and 
 before abstract nouns, S. 3, N. 2. 
 Before nouns of persons preceded 
 
 by an adjective or a common name, 
 S. 10, N. 2. Used to mark the Gen., 
 Dat., and Ace. of proper names, S. 
 25, N. 5. Used in stating the price 
 of goods, S. 33, N. 7. Used before 
 objects individualised or singled out, 
 S.40, N. 9. Used instead of Possess. 
 Adj. Pronouns, S. 43, N. 9, A and 
 B. The Indefinite Article. 
 Not expressed before nouns de- 
 noting professions, etc., S. 14, N. 2. 
 How to render when preceded by 
 'not', S. 126, N. 13. 
 
 as, con]., = since, how to render, S. 
 41, N. 6. = according to, how to 
 render, S. 74, N. 6. 
 
 ask (to), how to render, S. 132, N. 23. 
 
 at = at the house of, how to render, S. 
 1 5 3, N. 1 5. at home, how to render, 
 S. 63, N. 8. at the rate of, how to 
 render, S. 235, N. 9. 
 
 Attributive construction, S. 7, N. 
 3 ; S. 48, N. 6. 
 
 ailf, prep., = in, before names of 
 Islands, S. 46, N. 6. 
 
 Auxiliary verbs of tense, often 
 omitted in subordinate clauses, S. 
 52, N. 8. 
 
 B. 
 
 be, to, rendered by muJTcn, S. 62, 
 N. 4. 
 
 beginning with, rendered by 'ooxi . . . 
 on, S. 102, N. 4. 
 
 birtben, conjugated with fein, S. 98, 
 N.5. 
 
 but, rendered by foubeni after a nega- 
 tive, S. 6, N. 10. 
 
 by, ^Ye'p., = through, buvrf), S. 59, N. 
 1 3. In connection with the Passive 
 Voice, rendered by ecu, S. 106, N. 
 
 both . . . and, fonjol)! . . . alS au(^, 
 S. 59, N. II.
 
 224 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 C. 
 
 Capital Initial, when required for 
 pronouns, S. 69, N. 2. 
 
 care, to take care of, S. 91, N. 7. 
 
 cause (to) how to render, S. 73, N. i. 
 
 Collective nouns in the Singular re- 
 quire the verb to agree with them 
 in the Singular, S. 107, N. 13. 
 
 Colon, the, its use, S. 36, N. 3. 
 
 Comma, the, not used to enclose 
 adverbial clauses, etc, S. is, N. 3. 
 
 command, to, how to render, S. 73, 
 N. I. 
 
 Compoimd expressions, their im- 
 portance, S. 33, N. 4. 
 
 Compound forms with auxiliary and 
 Present Participle or 'to do' and 
 Infinitive, how to render into Ger- 
 man, S. 32, N. ir. 
 
 Compound Nouns. Their impor- 
 tance, S. 33, N. 4 ; their formation, 
 S. 36, N. 7, ^ and B, and S. 76, N. 
 22, ^, B, C and D; their Gender, 
 S. 36, N. 7, C; compound nouns 
 which have the last component in 
 common are connected with hy- 
 phens, S. 71, N. 2. 
 
 Conditional Mood, the, its use, App. 
 §§ 36 and 37. 
 
 Conjunctive Mood, the, its use, App. 
 §§ 26-35. 
 
 Construction. Principal and Co- 
 ordinate Clauses, App. §§ r-12. 
 Inverted Construction, App. §§13- 
 15. Subordinate Clauses, App. §§ 
 16-24. 
 
 Construction. Inverted after quota- 
 tions, S. 32, N. 5. Attributive con- 
 struction, S. 7, N. 3, ^ ; S. 48, N. 6. 
 Position of adverbs in Imperative 
 Clauses, S. 68, N. 2. 
 
 Copula, the, not to be omitted, S. 
 27, N. 7. The Copula must follow 
 the Subject when the latter begins 
 the principal clause, S. 5, N. 2. 
 
 copy, noun, how to render, S. 132, 
 N. 17. 
 
 D. 
 
 ta, adv. in combination with a prep, 
 governing the Dat. or Ace, S. 4, 
 N. 5, B. ^a, conj., denotes lo- 
 gical cause, used for rendering ' as ' 
 and 'since', S. 30, N. 4. ®rt, adv., 
 in connection with a prep , required 
 
 in the principal clause when verbs 
 and adjectives governing a prep, 
 are followed by a subordinate clause, 
 S. 87, N. 6. 
 
 Definite Article, the. When to be 
 repeated, S. 10, N. 9. Its position 
 in connection with adjectives and 
 adverbs, S. 28, N. 9. Before nouns 
 representing a whole class, and 
 before abstract nouns, S. 3, N. 2. 
 Before names of persons preceded 
 by an adj. or a common name, S. 
 10, N. 2. Used to mark the Gen., 
 Dat., and Ace. of proper names, S. 
 25, N. 5. Used in stating the price 
 of goods, S. 33, N. 7. Used before 
 objects individualised or singled out, 
 S. 40, N. 9. Used instead of Posses. 
 Adj. Pronouns, S. 43, N. 9, y^and B. 
 
 Demonstrative Pronoun, followed 
 by a relat. pron., how to render, S. 
 8, N. I. ^ 
 
 &fr and &tc must be used as relat. 
 pronouns in reference to a personal 
 pron. of the ist and 2nd pers. sing, 
 and pi,, and also in reference to 
 the pers. pron. of the 3rd person pi. 
 (@ie), S._78, N. 7. 
 
 do, used in sentences of entreaty, 
 rendered by bcc^, S. 92, N. 9. 
 
 bod}, adv.,= 'do' in sentences of en- 
 treaty, S. 92, N. 9. 
 
 cr, suffix, used to form names of male 
 
 persons from names of countries 
 
 and places, S. 157, N. 4. 
 critrttttptt, requires the prep, ju, S. 
 
 27, N. 4. 
 crtodbleil, requires the prep, ju, S. 
 
 27, N. 4. 
 C§. Used as grammatical Object in 
 
 principal clauses, S. 51, N. 13. 
 
 Used as grammatical Subject, S. 
 
 104, N. 19. 
 
 F. 
 
 fact, the, how to render, S. 115, N. 2. 
 
 fond (to be — of), how to render, S. 
 20, N. 2. 
 
 for, rendered by fcit in sentences ex- 
 pressing the duration of an action 
 up to the time of speaking, S. 145, 
 N. 17. 
 
 for years, S. 166, N. 10.
 
 J N n E X. 
 
 from, referring to time and place, 
 
 how to render, S. 102, N. 4, 
 full of, liow to render, S. 74, N. 14. 
 
 Qef)e\t, always construed with fein, S. 
 
 29, N. 3. 
 @rttiat)Iin, wife, consort, S. loi, 
 
 N. 5. 
 
 Genitive, the, of a proper noun 
 stands generally before the govern- 
 ing noun, S. 14, N. 3. 
 
 gentleman, how to render, S. 88, 
 N. 2. 
 
 flcnt(e), adv., denotes liking, S. 20, 
 N. 2. 
 
 Gerund, the. How to render, S. i, 
 N. 3 ; S. 34, N. 10. Preceded by 
 a possess, adj. and a prep., how to 
 render, S. 161, N. 21. 
 
 gicbt (ce) = the matter is, S. 63, N. 
 9; = there is, there are, S. 82, 
 
 N. 7. 
 go, to, how to render when = to travel, 
 
 etc., S. 233, N. 4. 
 going (to be — to), how to render, 
 
 S. 67, N. 2. 
 
 H. 
 
 ^rtfcr, not used in the pi., S. 22, 
 N. I. 
 
 have, to, rendered by miijycn, S. 62, 
 N. 4. 
 
 head = .§auvt in elevated diction, S. 
 127, N. 8. 
 
 home and al home, how to render, 
 S. 63, N. 8. 
 
 Hyphens required to show the con- 
 nection between compound nouns 
 that have the last part in common, 
 S. 71, N. 2. 
 
 I. 
 
 I, should, if possible, not begin the 
 sentence, S. 115, N. i. 
 
 If, rendered by \imu\, S. 64, N. 12. 
 
 £|l)t, formerly used in addressing per- 
 sons of the lower ranks of society, 
 S. 137, N. 2. 
 
 in, prep., how to render before names 
 of islands, S. 46, N. 6. 
 
 Indefinite Article, the. When to 
 be repeated, S. 10, N. 9. Its posi- 
 tion in connection with adjectives 
 and adverbs,- S. 28, N. 9. Not ex- 
 
 VOL. IV. 
 
 pressed before nouns denoting pro- 
 fessions, etc., S. 14, N. 2. How to 
 render when preceded by ' not ', 
 S. 126, N. 12. 
 
 iltbrm , conj., used for rendering the 
 Participle in -ing in adverbial clauses 
 of manner, S. 1 1 1, N. 6. 
 
 Indicative Mood, the, its use, App. 
 §§ 25 and 35. 
 
 Infinitive, the. With an Accusative, 
 howtoj-ender, S. 57, N. 14. When 
 used without the preposition jii, S. 
 78, N. 14. Forms abstract nouns, 
 S. ii,N. 7. 
 
 Inverted Construction. When to 
 be used, App. §§ 13-15. Used after 
 quotations, S. 32, N. 5. 
 
 Imperfect, the, its use, S. loi, N. 22. 
 
 it, dependent on a prep., how to 
 render, S. 4, N. 5, £. 
 
 J. 
 3cfll§ (5:l)riftu§, its declension, S. 
 141, N. 9. 
 
 K. 
 
 f f tit, the general translation for ' not 
 a', S. 126, N. 12. 
 
 lafffll, to order, to command, to 
 
 cause, S. 73, N. i. 
 
 lebtCIt, to teach, requires two accu- 
 satives, S. 42, N. 4, and S. 43, N. 10, 
 
 like, to, how to render, S. 20, N. 2. 
 
 live, to, how to render, S. 116, N. 17. 
 
 M. 
 
 macl)Clt, requires the prep, ju, S. 27, 
 
 N. 4, and S. 102, N. 13. 
 man = human being, how to render, 
 
 S. 134, N. 9. 
 niait, pron. With the Active Voice 
 
 instead of Eng. Passive Voice, S. 4, 
 
 N. 4. 2)?aii, indef. pron., used to 
 
 render the Eng. ' you ' used in a 
 
 general sense, S. 92, N. 5, also S. 
 
 134, N. 4. 
 SJJtavf, tie, its inflection, S. 58, N. 3. 
 matter, the — is, ct^ cjieh, S. 63, N. 9. 
 lltborit, auxil. v. of mood, S. 20, 
 
 N. 2. 
 tuiiffcil = to be and to have, followed 
 
 by the infinitive of another verb, 
 
 S. 62, N. 4.
 
 226 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 N. 
 
 nad), prep. = to, S. 72, N. 4. 
 
 Names of male persons and inha- 
 bitants ofcountries and places made 
 by the suffix er,S. 157, N. 4, Proper 
 Names, their declension, S.65, N. 1. 
 
 National adjectives, require a small 
 initial, S. loi, N. i. 
 
 not a=no, S. 126, N. rs. 
 
 Nouns. Compound Nouns, their im- 
 portance, S. 33, N. 5. Formation 
 of Compound Nouns, S. 36, N. 7, 
 and S. 76, N. 22. Nouns must be 
 preceded by the parts qualifying 
 them, S. 128, N, ir. Abstract 
 Nouns made from the Infinitives of 
 verbs, S. 11, N. 7. Collective 
 Nouns in the Sing, require the verb 
 to agree with them in the Sing., 
 S. 107, N. 13. 
 
 Number. Use the Sing, number in 
 connection with a Collective Noun 
 in the Sing., S. 107, N. 13. 
 
 O. 
 
 Object, the grammatical, in a principal 
 clause, followed by a subordinate 
 clause, or a supine, S. 51, N. 13. 
 
 on. On the contrary, how to render, 
 S. 66, N. 16. To be on the point of, 
 rendered by ittcKcn, S. 67, N. 2. 
 
 one, not translated after an adj. or 
 a pron., S. 67, N. 3. 
 
 one, numeral, not translated before 
 hundred and thousand, S. 132, N. 10. 
 
 one day, how to render, S. 19, N. 2. 
 
 only, adv., how to render, S. 109, 
 N. 5. 
 
 order, to, how to render, S. 73, N. i. 
 
 ought, how to render, S. 64, N. 5. 
 
 P. 
 
 Participles, the. Participles used 
 attributively must be inflected, S. 
 7, N. 3, B. The Past (or Per- 
 fect) Participle. As a rule pre- 
 cedes the qualified noun, S. 7, N. 
 3, A. Rendered by a relat. clause, 
 S. 7, N. 3, B. Rendered by the 
 attributive construction, S. 7, N. 3, 
 and S. 48, N. 6. Used ellipticaliy 
 to denote state or condition, S. 102, 
 N. 3. The Present Participle. 
 The English — qualifying a preced- 
 ing noun, turned into a relat. clause, 
 
 S. 16, N. 4. How to render when 
 it denotes a logical cause, S. 30, 
 N. 4. Rendered by the attribu- 
 tive construction, S. 48, N. 6. Used 
 adverbially to denote manner or 
 state, S. 53, N. 12. How to render 
 when used in adverbial clauses of 
 time, S. 55, N. i. The — in -ing in 
 adverbial clauses of manner, ren- 
 dered by the conj. iiibem and a finite 
 verb, S. in, N. 6. 
 
 Passive Voice, the. Its formation 
 in German, S. 2, N. i. How to 
 recognise, S. 2, N. i. Rendered 
 into German by a reflective verb, or 
 the pron. ntaii with the active voice, 
 S.4, N.4. 
 
 people, how to render, S. 134, N. 4. 
 
 Perfect, the. Its use, S. 48, N. 2. 
 The Eng. Perfect rendered by the 
 Present in German, S. 145, N. 17. 
 
 Person, the, for whose benefit an 
 action is done, must, as a rule, be 
 indicated in German, S. 130, N. 13. 
 
 Personal Pronoun, the. In the 
 Dat. case, used to indicate the Pos- 
 sessor, S. 43, N. 9, jB. Used to 
 indicate the person for whose benefit 
 an action is performed, S. 58, N. 
 8. Personal and possessive pro- 
 nouns require a capital initial in 
 letters, S. 69, N. 2. 
 
 ?Pflint>, biu^, one £, Engl., never takes 
 the mark of the plural, S. 58, N. 3. 
 
 Possessive Adjective Pronoun, 
 the. When repeated in German, 
 S. 10, N. 9. How to render into 
 German, S. 43, N. 9, A and B. 
 
 pound, how to render, S. 58, N. 3. 
 
 Predicate, the, Copula or Verb, must 
 follow the Subject when it begins 
 the clause, S. 5, N. 2. The forma- 
 tion of the Superlatives of adjec- 
 tives used predicatively, S. 120, 
 N. 14. 
 
 Present Tense, the German, used to 
 express duration up to the time of 
 speaking, where the Engl, use the 
 Perfect, S. 145, N. 17. 
 
 Principal Clauses. Their con- 
 struction, App. §§ 1-12. 
 
 progress, noun, how to render, S. 
 132, N. I. 
 
 Proper names, when not inflected, 
 S. 65, N. I.
 
 INDEX. 
 
 227 
 
 R. 
 
 rate, yit the rate of, Tlow to render, 
 S. 235, N. 9. 
 
 Relative Clauses, rendered by the 
 attributive construction, S. 48, N, 6. 
 
 Relative Pronoun, the. Follows, 
 as a rule, its antecedent, S. 13, N. 
 5. Must not be omitted in German, 
 S. 1 6, N. 10. 2)er and bte must be 
 used in reference to a preceding 
 personal pronoun, S. 78, N. 7. 
 
 S. 
 
 Scholar, how to render, S. 128, N. i. 
 
 fcill, auxiliary, its use, S. 29, N. 3. 
 
 fcit, as a transl. of the Eng. prep. 
 for in sentences which express a 
 duration of an action up to the 
 time of speaking, S. 145, N. 17. 
 
 fO, conj. When required in the begin- 
 ning of principal clauses, S. 27, N. 8. 
 
 so, in connection with a transitive 
 verb, rendered by cS, ba3, bieS, S. 
 132, N. 13. 
 
 foUcil, expresses assertion, S. 54, N. 
 13; = ought, S. 64, N. 5. 
 
 ®t., abbreviation ot Sanct., its deri- 
 vation, S. 103, N. 33. 
 
 Subject, the. Must be followed by the 
 Copula or the Verb when it begins 
 the principal clause, S. 5, N. 2. Its 
 position in subordinate clauses, S. 
 66, N. 15. Not to be omitted, S. 
 27, N. 7. The grammatical subject 
 in the form of the pron. ct?, S. 104, 
 N. 19. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood, the. Its use, 
 App. §§ 26-35. 
 
 Svibordinate Clauses. Their con- 
 struction, App. §§ 16-24. 
 
 Superlative, the, of an adjective 
 used predicatively is generally pre- 
 ceded by am, S. 120, N. 14. How 
 to form the relat. Superlative of 
 adverbs, S. 183, N. 24. 
 
 Supine, the. Explanation and use, 
 S. I, N. 2. Formation of the Su- 
 pine Present, S. i, N. 2. Used for 
 rendering the Eng. Gerund pre- 
 ceded by a preposition, S. i, N. 3. 
 Expresses purpose, S. 19, N. 7. 
 Used for rendering the Eng. Ge- 
 rund governed by a noun or a verb, 
 S. 34, N. 10. Used in connection 
 with the veitb hl)xi\\, S. 43, N. 10. 
 
 Suppose, I, in interrogativesentences, 
 rendered by ircM, S. 92, N. 3. 
 
 T. 
 
 Take, to. How to render, S. 3, N. 
 8. To take care of, how to render, 
 S. 91, N. 7. 
 
 teach, to, how to render, S. 42, N. 4, 
 and S. 43, N. 10. 
 
 that, them, those, dependent on a 
 prep., how to render, S. 4, N. 5, B. 
 
 that and those, followed by a relat. 
 pron., cannot be rendered by the 
 adv. ba in connection with a pre- 
 ceding preposition, S. 8, N. i. 
 
 that = in order that, how to render, 
 S. 183, N. 6. 
 
 there is and There are, rendered 
 by ei3 gicbt, S. 82, N. 7. 
 
 they, used in an indefinite sense, ren- 
 dered by man, S. 134, N. 4. 
 
 think, to, how to render, S. 64, 
 N. II. 
 
 to = in order to, how to render, S. 19, 
 N. 7. 
 
 to, prep., how to render, S. 72, N. 4. 
 
 trust, to, anything to a person, S. 91, 
 N. 6. 
 
 U. 
 
 Use, to, V. tr. and intr., how to render, 
 S. 129, N. 6. 
 
 V. 
 
 Verb, the. Agreement of verbs with 
 collective nouns, S. 69, N. 17. Aux- 
 iliary of tense often omitted in 
 subordinate clauses, S. 52, N. 8. 
 The verb or copula must follow 
 the subject, when the latter begins 
 the Principal Clause, S. 5, N. 2. 
 
 Verbal, the, in -ing, how to render, 
 S. I, N. 3 ; S. 34, N. 10. 
 
 very, rendered by the Superl. of the 
 aav. l)cd), S. 161, N. 2. 
 
 W. 
 
 want, to, rendered by ii^cflen, S. 63, 
 N. 10. 
 
 tDrt'5. When required as a relat. 
 pron., S. 3, N. 7. Used in refer- 
 ence to a preceding whole clause, 
 as a transl. of ' which ', S. 33, N. 8. 
 
 ■we, in an indefinite sense, rendered by 
 man, S. 134, N. 4. 
 
 ft)cr&Pli, conjugated with [etn, S. 98,N.5. 
 
 Q 3
 
 •228 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 what sort of, how to render, S, 63, 
 
 N. 2. 
 ■when. Rendered by aB, S. 4, N. 2. 
 
 Rendered by wenn, S. 18, N. 6, 
 
 Rendered by nu\ S. 131, N. 4. 
 where, rendered by )ro, S. 131, N. 4. 
 which, rendered by ttag, S. 33, N, 8. 
 wife, how to render, S. loi, N. 5. 
 wish, to, rendered by it»o((eii, S. 63, 
 
 N. 10. 
 tt)0, relat. conj,, its use, S. i?i,N. 4. 
 tt)Ol)I = I suppose, S. 92, N. 3. 
 tVoUcit. Expresses ivish and ivant, 
 
 S. 63, N. 10. — = to be going, to be 
 
 on the point, S. 67, N. 2. — = to be 
 
 about, S. 6, N. 4. 
 
 wonder, to, how to render, S. 90, 
 
 N. II. 
 2Bort, bag, double ph, S. 7, N. 2. 
 worth remembering, how to render, 
 
 S. 157, N. 22. 
 
 Y. 
 
 you. Used in a general sense, ren- 
 dered by man, S. 92, N. 5. When 
 rendered by 3^r, S. 137, N. 2. 
 
 Z. 
 
 311, prep. Required with verbs de- 
 noting choosing, appointing, etc., 
 S. 27, N, 4, and S. 102, N. 13. 
 
 The End.
 
 LANGE'S GERMAN COURSE 
 
 CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING WORKS : — 
 
 THIRD EDITION, with the German speUing revised to meet the requirements of 
 the German Government Regulations of 1880. 
 
 THE GERMANS AT HOME; A Practical Introduction to German 
 Conversation, with an Appendix, containing the Esse?itiais of German 
 Grammar, and a Synopsis of the changes the German speUing has 
 undergone through the Government Regulations of 1880. 
 
 =>♦:= [Price 2S. 6d, 
 
 SECOND EDITION, carefully revised. 
 
 THE GERMAN MANUAL ; A Gennadi Grammar, A Reading-book, 
 and A Handbook of Conversation i?i Gertnati. [Price 7J, 6d. 
 
 'The German Manual' is intended to follow 'The Germans At Home.' It con- 
 tains, besides a complete Grammar, a series of interesting anecdotes, stories, fables, 
 letters, and conversations arranged in progressive order, and finishes with a German 
 Play, and Franz Hoffman's well written and highly interesting story of ' Beethoven,' 
 especially adapted for this work. It offers great advantages for self-instruction, and 
 will be very useful to persons who, having a certain knowledge of German, desire to 
 obtain fluency in speaking and writing the language. 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE, in two Parts. 
 Part I, Accidence; Part H, Syntax. With an Appendix, compre- 
 hending: — 
 
 IV. The Use and Signification of the 
 
 Auxiliary Verbs of Mood. 
 V. On Punctuation. [Price 35. dd. 
 
 The 'Grammar' forms the first part of the 'German Manual' and, in this separate 
 form, is intended for the use of students who wish to make themselves acquainted with 
 German Grammar chiefly for the purpose of being able to read German books. It is 
 divided into paragraphs, and will commend itself as a text-book to the notice of 
 teachers who, in pursuing the study of German Literature with their pupils, require a 
 Grammar in a concise form for reference and study. 
 
 I. The Declension of German Nouns. 
 II. Essentials of Construction. 
 III. Essentials of Word-building. 
 
 THIRD EDITION, with the German spelling revised to meet the requirements of the 
 German Government Regulations of 1880. 
 
 GERMAN COMPOSITION; A Theoretical and Practical Guide to 
 the art of Translating English Prose into German; with an Appendix 
 containing, among other matters, a Synopsis of the changes the 
 German spelling has undergone through the Government Regula- 
 tions of 1880. [Price dfS. 6d. 
 [A Key to the aho-oe, price 5J.] 
 The book has been arranged so that it may be used with advantage by students 
 who do not possess the author's other works. 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF THE CHANGES TPIE GERMAN SPELLING HAS UNDER- 
 GONE THROUGH THE GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS OF 18S0; a 
 concise and easy Guide for English students of German desirous of adopting the 
 new official German spelling. Reprinted from ' German Composition.' 
 
 [Price dd. 
 
 [Any one of the preceding books, being complete in itself, may be used 
 independently, of any other book in the Series, according to the require- 
 ments of the student.]
 
 EXTRACTS FROM OPINIONS 
 ON H. LANGE'S GERMAN COURSE. 
 
 'The works bear evidence of remarkable painstaking, great 
 teaching power, and a thorough understanding of the art of teach- 
 ing. — Dk. Karl Dammann, Lecturer on the German Language and L'ttera- 
 ture at the Mason Science College, Queen's College, and the Midland Institute, 
 Birmingham. 
 
 *The Germans at Home.' 
 
 * The author is a practical teacher, and we are glad to recommend his 
 work as likely to reduce, as far as possible, the inevitable difficulties to be 
 encountered in the first study of a foreign language. Happy boys and girls 
 of the present day, if they only knew their own blessings ! ' 
 
 Journal of Education, 
 
 ' " The Germans at Home " consists of forty conversations, intended to 
 illustrate one day out of the life of a German family at home, as its name 
 implies. The result is a decided improvement upon the run of books of 
 this class. The interest of the student is sustained throughout, and every- 
 thing is done in fact, which can be done to create a royal road to a know- 
 ledge of German.' Manchester Courier. 
 
 ' " The Germans at Home " is an excellent book, and is likely to be ex- 
 tensively used.' Schoolmaster. 
 
 * The traits called " new " in this Course are thus defined by the author. 
 " First the Facts, and then the Theory, the Laws and the Inferences." 
 " The Germans at Home " (printed in Roman characters) contains forty 
 conversations, all connected, so as " to illustrate one day out of the life of a 
 German family at home." The themes are German, the idioms are modern, 
 and the "variations" that follow the conversations seem likely to be 
 useful.' Athenxum. 
 
 * A Grammar of the German Language.* 
 
 ' The author has obviously studied to make as clear as possible the arrange- 
 ment of his materials, and the printer has aided that endeavour.' 
 
 Jlthenxum. 
 
 ' The Grammar is a good one.* Schoolmaster.
 
 LANGE S GERMAN COURSE. ^ 
 
 *The Germans at Home' and *Tlie German 
 
 Manual.' 
 
 * Instead of wearying the unhappy student with learning a lot of dry and 
 elaborate technicalities of accidence and syntax at the outset, Mr. Lange 
 starts him with conversations — forty in number, each illustrative of one day 
 out of the life of a German family at home — and very soon lands him " in 
 medias res " by the aid of interlinear translation, by the means of which he 
 can gain a knowledge of the idioms and peculiarities of structure of the 
 language, while he is at the same time acquiring a knowledge of the theory 
 of the language, i.e. of its accidence and syntax. Thus we get in Mr. 
 Lange's system the facts first, and then proceed to the theory, laws, and 
 inferences — first the life and spirit, then the form and body in which they 
 are clothed. Only those who have themselves learnt and taught (or tried 
 to learn and teach) German, can thoroughly appreciate the advantages of 
 this plan, which avails itself of the two leading principles which underlie all 
 learning, and ought to form the basis of all teaching, viz. the principles of 
 imitation and of variation. When we remember the long and weary hours 
 spent by ourselves in learning German, we envy Mr. Lange's pupils, and 
 those who have the chance of using his books.' Manchester Critic. 
 
 ' Mr. Lange's " German Course " is thoroughly trustworthy and usefut.' 
 
 GJajgoiv Neivs. 
 
 * Herr Lange has worked out his principle most successfully.' 
 
 Edinburgh Daily Revienv. 
 
 *The German Manual.' 
 
 'This is a very elaborate work. It contains an amount of matter 
 unusually great, and of unquestionable excellence. If not multum in 
 parvo, it is at least multum in uno. The bigness of the book is largely due 
 to the fact that the author has amalgamated with this volume the entire 
 grammar, which is also published in a separate form. The grammar is 
 a good one; but the special feature of the "German Manual" consists 
 in its comprehensiveness, which will be apparent from the following sum- 
 mary of its contents: — Part I. Accidence. Part II. Syntax. Part III. 
 Interlinear Translation. Part IV, German for Translation into English. 
 Part V. Notes and Helpful Hints. Part VI. English Version of Part IV. 
 for Re-translation. By an ingenious system of adaptation, the six parts 
 are to be proceeded with simultaneously. Thus every part throwing 
 light upon the rest, and the student having to deal with the same passages 
 over and over again, the process of mental assimilation is likely to be 
 rendered more real and rapid. When we add that the book contains a 
 humorous comedy and an excellent life of Beethoven, our readers will
 
 4 LANGES GERMAN COURSE. 
 
 acknowledge that Herr Lange has provided that variety which is proverbi- 
 ally charming. From the conspicuous absence of the namby-pamby 
 element — unfortunately too common in translation exercises — as well as 
 from the general excellence of the work, it may be confidently recom- 
 mended, especially for the use of adult students,' Schoolmaster. 
 'Herr Lange's method is excellent for simplicity and clearness.' 
 
 Saturday Rcvie^ui. 
 
 * German Composition.' 
 
 * Having used H. Lange's Composition for about a couple of years with 
 my advanced pupils, I am in a position to state that it has more than 
 answered the very favourable expectations I had formed on a first perusal 
 of the work. To my mind its chief recommendations are : — 
 
 ist. It may safely be put into the hands of learners at an earlier stage 
 than most works of this class. 
 
 2nd. The judicious manner in which the exercises have been graduated, 
 and the careful elucidation of all grammatical difficulties. 
 
 3rd. The admirable rendering of English idioms into their German 
 equivalents.' — John j. T. Jackson, Lecturer on Modern Languages and 
 Philology at the Lancashire Independent College, and the Wesleyan College, 
 Didsbury. 
 
 ' After a very careful perusal of " Hermann Lange's German Compo- 
 sition," I have no hesitation to say that it seems to' me to be the best book 
 of that kind, — not only with regard to the choice of good extracts from 
 modern English authors, but also in respect to the thoroughness and correct- 
 ness of the Notes. I shall find it exceedingly useful with my pupils for the 
 Army and Civil Service Examinations.' — Theodore H. Dittel, London, 
 Tutor to Students preparing for the Army and Civil Service Examinations. 
 
 ' I prefer the book to all others on German Composition.' — Ernest 
 R. Morgan, London. 
 
 * We begin with simple stories of two or three sentences each, and so 
 fully annotated that they may be read off into German by a pupil who 
 knows his first accidence, and ascend by easy gradients to Sir "Walter Scott 
 and Macaulay. 
 
 It is throughout a careful, accurate, and scholarly piece of work.' 
 
 Journal of Education. 
 
 AT THE CLARENDON PRESS. 
 
 LONDON: HENRY FROWDE, 
 Oxford Univkrsity Press Warehouse, Amen Corner, E.G.
 
 CLARENDON PRESS, OXFORD. 
 SELECT LIST OF STANDARD WORKS 
 
 DICTIONARIKS ....... page i 
 
 LAW „ 2 
 
 HISTORY, BIOGRAPHY, ETC 4 
 
 PHILOSOPHY, LOGIC, ETC ,6 
 
 PHYSICAL SCIENCE, ETC 7 
 
 1. DICTIONARIES. 
 
 A NEW ENGLISH DICTIONARY 
 
 ON HISTORICAL PRINCIPLES, 
 Founded mainly on the materials collected by the Philological Society. 
 
 Imperial 4to. 
 
 EDITED BY DR. MURRAY. 
 
 Present State of the Work. £ ^ ^ 
 
 Vol. I. A, B By Dr. Murray Half-morocco 212 6 
 
 Vol. II. C By Dr. Murray Half-morocco 2 13 6 
 
 Vol. III. D, E By Dr. Murray and Dr. Bradley Half-morocco 2 12 6 
 
 Vol. IV. F, G By Dr. Bradley Half-morocco 212 6 
 
 Vol. V. H — K By Dr. Murray Half-morocco 2 12 6 
 
 , L-Lap 026 
 
 Lap-Leisurely ...050 
 
 „ I Leisureness-Lief ..026 
 
 Vol. VI. L-N By Dr. Bradley . . j Lief-Lock ....050 
 
 I Lock-Lyyn ....050 
 
 M-Mandragon ...050 
 
 O-Onomastic . . .050 
 
 Onomastical-Outing . 050 
 
 Vol. VII. O, P By Dr. Murray . . J Outjet-Ozyat ...026 
 
 P-Pargeted ....050 
 
 I Pargeter-Pennached. 050 
 
 I Q o :j 6 
 
 „ , -TT-r-, ^ ... -r. Tir /-, E-Eeactive . . . . o s o 
 
 Vol. VIII. Q— S By Mr. Craigie . . - „ .. , -r, 
 
 I Reactively-Ree ..050 
 
 [ Eee-Reign ....026 
 
 The remainder of the work is in active preparation. 
 
 Vols. IX, X will contain S-Z with some supplemental matter. 
 
 Orders can be given through any bookseller for the delivery of the remainder of 
 the work in complete Volumes or in Half-volumes or in Sections or in Parts. 
 
 HALF- VOLUMES. The price of half-volumes, bound, witli straight-grained 
 persian leather back, cloth sides, gilt top, is )Cl 7s. 6c?. each, or/Ci3 15*. for the ten 
 now ready, namely. A, E, C-Comm., Comm.-Czech, D, E, F, G, H, I-K. 
 
 SECTIONS. A single Section of 64 pages at 2«. 6d, or a double Section of 1 28 
 pages at 5«. is issued quarterly. 
 
 PARTS. A Part (which is generally the equivalent of five single Sections 
 and is priced at I2,s. 6rf.) is issued whenever ready. 
 
 Nearly all the Parts and Sections in which Volumes I-V were first issued are 
 still obtainable in the original covers. 
 
 FORTHCOMING ISSUE, 1905. A portion continuing R. by jNlr. Cbaigie. 
 
 Oxford : Clarendon Press. London : Hknky Frowde, Amen Corner, E.G. 
 C. 4000
 
 ENGLISH AND ROMAN LA W. 
 
 A Hebrew and English Lexicon of the Old Testament, with 
 an Appendix containing the Biblical Aramaic, based on the Thesaurus 
 and Lexicon of Gesenius, by Francis Brown, D.D., S. R. Driver, D.D,, 
 and C. A. Briggs, D.D. Parts I-XI. Small 4to, 2s. 6d. each. 
 
 Thesaurus Syriacus : collegerunt Quatrem^re, Bernstein, Lorsbach, 
 Arnoldi, Agrell, Field, Roediger: edidit R. Payne Smith, S.T.P. 
 Vol. I, containing Fasciculi I-V, sm. fol., 5?. 5s. 
 Vol. II, completing the work, containing Fasciculi VI-X, 81. 8s. 
 
 A Compendious Syriac Dictionary, founded upon the above. 
 Edited by Mrs. Margoliouth. Small 4to, complete, 63s. net. Part IV, 
 1 5s. net. Parts I-III can no longer he supplied. 
 
 A Dictionary of the Dialects of Vernacular Syriac as spoken 
 by the Eastern Syrians of Kurdistan, North-West Persia, and the Plain 
 of Mosul. By A. J. Maclean, M.A., F.R.G.S. Small 4to, 155. 
 
 An English-SwahiU Dictionary. By A. C. Madan, M.A. Second 
 
 Edition, Revised. Extra fcap. 8vo, 7s. 6d. net. 
 
 Swahili-English Dictionary. By A. C. Madan, M.A. Extra fcap. 
 
 8ro. 7s. 6d. net. 
 
 A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Etymologically and Philologically 
 arranged, v^ith special reference to cognate Indo-European Languages. 
 By Sir M. Monier-Williams, M.A., K.C.I.E. ; with the collaboration of 
 Prof. E. Leumann, Ph.D. ; Prof. C. Cappeller, Ph.D. ; and other scholars. 
 New Edition, greatly Enlarged and Improved. Cloth, bevelled edges, 3?. 13s. 6d. ; 
 half-morocco, 4.1. 4s. 
 
 A Greek-English Lexicon. By H. G. Liddell, D.D., and 
 Robert Scott, D.D. Eighth Edition, Revised. 4to. il. i6s. 
 
 An Etymological Dictionary of the English Language, 
 arranged on an Historical Basis. By W. W. Skeat, Litt.D. Third 
 Edition. 4to. 2I. 4s. 
 
 A Middle-English Dictionary. By F. H. Stratmann. A new 
 edition, by H. Bradley, M.A., Ph.D. 4to, half-morocco, il. lis. 6d. 
 
 The Student's Dictionary of Anglo-Saxon. By H. Sweet, M.A., 
 Ph.D., LL.D. Small 4to. 8s. 6d. net. 
 
 An Anglo-Saxon Dictionary, based on the MS. collections of the 
 late Joseph Bosworth, D.D. Edited and enlarged by Prof. T, N. Toller, 
 M.A. Parts I-III. A-SAR. 4to, stiff covers, 15s. each. Part IV, § i, 
 SAR-SWIDRIAN. Stiff covers, 8s. 6d. Part IV, § 2, SWf)?-SNEL- 
 YTMEST, i8s.6d. 
 
 An Icelandic-English Dictionary, based on the MS. collections of 
 the late Richard Cleasby. Enlarged and completed by G. Vigfiisson, 
 M.A. 4to. 3^. 7s. 
 
 2. LAW. 
 
 Anson. Principles of the 
 
 English Law of Contract, and of Agency 
 in its Relation to Contract. By Sir 
 W. R. Anson, D. C. L. Tenth Edition. 
 8vo. los. 6d. 
 
 Anson. Law and Custom of 
 
 the Constitution. 2 vols. 8vo. 
 Part I. Parliament. Third Edition. 
 
 I2S. 6d. 
 Part II. The Crown. SecondEd. 14*1. 
 
 Oxford : Olarendon Press,
 
 LAW. 
 
 Bryce. Studies in History and 
 
 Jurisprudence. 2 Vols. 8vo. By the 
 
 Right Hon. J. Bryce, M.P. 25s. net. 
 
 Goudy. Von Jhering's Law 
 
 in Daily Life. Translated, by H. 
 GouDY,D.C.L. CrownSvo. 3s.6rf.nef. 
 
 Digby. An Introduction to 
 
 the History of the Law of Real Property. 
 BySirKenelmE. Digby, M.A. Fifth 
 Edition. 8vo. 12s. 6d. 
 
 Grueber. Lex Aquilia. By 
 
 Erwin Grueber. 8vo. los. 6d. 
 
 Hall. International Law. By 
 
 W.E.Hall,M.A. Fifth Edit. Revised 
 by J. B. Atlay, M.A. Svo. 21s. net. 
 
 ' A Treatise onthe Foreign 
 
 Powers and Jurisdiction of the British 
 Crown. Svo. los. 6rf. 
 
 Holland. Elements of Juris- 
 prudence. By T. E. Holland, D.C.L. 
 
 Ninth Edition. Svo. los. 6d. 
 
 Studies in International 
 
 Law. Svo. IDS. 6d. 
 
 Gentilis, Alherici, De 
 
 lure Belli Libri Tres. Small 4to, 
 half-morocco. 21s. 
 
 The Institutes of Jus- 
 tinian, edited as a recension of 
 the Institutes of Gains. Second 
 Edition. Extra fcap. Svo. 5s. 
 
 The European Concert 
 
 in the Eastern Question, a collection 
 of treaties and other public acts. 
 8vo. i^s. 6(7. 
 
 Holland and Shadwell. Select 
 
 Titles from the Digest of Justinian. By 
 T. E. Holland, D.C.L., and C. L. 
 Shadwell, D.C.L. Svo. 14s. 
 Also sold in Parts, in paper covers — 
 Part I. Introductory Titles. 2s. 6d. 
 Part II. Family Law. is. 
 Part III. Property Law. 2s. 6rf. 
 Part IV. Law of Obligations (No. 1 ), 
 3s. 6d. (No. 2), 4s. 6d. 
 
 Ilbert. The Government of 
 
 India. Being a Digest of the Statute 
 Law relating thereto. With His- 
 torical Introduction and Illustra- 
 tive Documents. By Sir Courtenay 
 Ilbert, K.C.S.I. Svo, half-roan. 21s. I 
 
 London : Henrt Frowde 
 
 Ilbert. Legislative Forms and 
 
 Methods. Svo, half- roan. i6s. 
 
 Jenks. Modern Land Laiv. 
 
 By Edward Jenks, M.A. Svo. 15s. 
 Jenkyns. British Rule ccnd 
 
 Jurisdiction beyond the Seas. By the 
 late Sir Henry Jenkyns, K.C.B. 
 Svo, half- roan. i6s. net. 
 
 Markby. Elements of Lavj 
 
 considered with reference to Principles of 
 General Jurisprudence. By SirWilliam 
 Markby. Fifth Edition. Svo. 12s. 6d. 
 
 Moyle. Imperatoris lus- 
 
 tiniani Institutionum Libri Quattuor, 
 with Introductions, Commentary, 
 Excursus and Translation. ByJ. B. 
 Moyle, D.C.L. Fourth Edition. 2 vols. 
 Svo. Vol. I. 1 6s. Vol. II. 6s. 
 
 Contract of Sale in the 
 
 Civil Law. Svo. 10s. 6d. 
 
 Pollock and Wright. An 
 
 Essay on Possession in the Common Law. 
 By Sir F. Pollock, Bart., M.A., and 
 Sir R. S.Wright, B.C. L. Svo. Ss.6rf. 
 
 Poste. Gaii Institutionum 
 
 Juris Civilis Commentarii Quattuor ; or, 
 Elements of Roman Law by Gaius. 
 With a Translation and Commen- 
 tary by Edward Poste, M.A. Fourth 
 Edition, revised and enlarged, by 
 E.A.Whittuck, M.A.,B.C.L. With 
 an Historical Introduction by A. H. 
 .J. Greenidge, D.Litt. Svo. i6s. net. 
 
 RadcliflFe and Miles. Cases 
 
 Illustrafing the Principles of the Laic of 
 Torts. By F. R. Y. Radcliffe, K.C, 
 andJ.C.MiLEs, M.A. Svo. 12s.6d.net. 
 
 Sohm. The Institutes. A 
 
 Text-book of the History and 
 System of Roman Private Law. 
 By Rudolph Sohm. Translated by 
 -I.e. Ledlie, B.C.L. Second Edition, 
 revised and enlarged. Svo. iSs. 
 
 Stokes. The Anglo-Indian 
 
 Codes. By Whitley Stokes, LL.D. 
 
 Vol. I. Substantive Law. Svo. 30s. 
 
 Vol. II. Adjective Law. Svo. 35s. 
 
 First and Second Supplements to 
 
 the above, 1S87-1S91. Svo. 6s.6d. 
 
 Separately, No. I, 2s.6d.;No. 2,45.6^. 
 
 Amen Corner, E.G.
 
 HISTORY, BIOGRAPHY, ETC. 
 
 3. HISTORY, BIOGRAPHY, ETC. 
 
 Asser. Life of King Alfred, 
 
 together with the Annals of St. 
 
 Noets, erroneously ascribed to 
 Asser. Edited with Introduction 
 and Commentary bj^ W. H. Steven- 
 son, M .A, 2 vols. Crown 8vo. 1 2S. net 
 
 Aubrey. ' Brief Lives,' cJiiefly 
 
 of Contemporaries, set down by John 
 Aubrey, between the Years 1669 and 
 1696. Edited from the Author's 
 MSS., byAndrew Clark, M.A., LL.D. 
 With Facsimiles. 2 vols. 8vo. 25s. 
 
 Ballard. T//e Boineulay Bor- 
 oughs. By Adolphus Ballard, B.A., 
 LL.B. 8vo. With four Plans. 6s. 6rf. 
 
 net. 
 
 Barnard. Companion to Eng- 
 lish History {Middle Ages). With 97 
 Illustrations. By F. P. Barnard, 
 M.A. Crown 8vo. 8s. 6d. net. 
 
 Boswell's Life of Samuel 
 
 Johnson, LL.D. Edited by G. Birk- 
 beck Hill, D.C.L. In six volumes, 
 medium 8vo. With Portraits and 
 Facsimiles. Half-bound, ^l. 3s. 
 
 Bright. Chapter's of Early 
 
 English Church History. By W. 
 Bright, D.D. Third Edition. Revised 
 and Enlarged. With a Map. 8vo. 12s. 
 
 Bryce. Studies in History 
 
 and Jurisprudence. By J. Bryce, M.P. 
 2 vols. 8vo. 25s. net. 
 
 Butler. TIlb Arab Conquest 
 
 of Egypt and the last thirl y years of the 
 Roman Dominion. By A. J. Butler, 
 D.Litt., F.S.A. With Maps and 
 Plans. 8vo. i6s. net. 
 
 Chambers. The Mediaeval 
 
 stage. By E. K. Chambers. With 
 two illustrations. 2 vols. 8vo. 2^s.nei. 
 
 Clarendon's History of the 
 
 Rebellion and Civil Wars in England. 
 Re-edited by W. Dunn Macray, 
 M.A., F.S.A. 6vols. CrownSvo. 2I. 5s. 
 
 Earle and Plummer. Ttvo of 
 
 the Saxon Chronicles, Parallel, with 
 Supplementary Extracts from the others. 
 A Revised Text, edited, with Intro- 
 duction, Notes, Appendices, and 
 
 Glossary, by 0. Plummer, M.A., on 
 
 the basis of an edition by J. Earle, 
 
 M.A. 2 vols. Cr. 8vo, half-roan. 
 
 Vol. I. Text, Appendices, and 
 
 Glossary. los. 6d. 
 Vol. II. Introduction, Notes, and 
 
 Index. I2S. 6d. 
 
 Fisher. Studies in Napole- 
 onic statesmanship. — Germany. By 
 H. A. L. Fisher, M.A. With four 
 Maps. 8vo. I2S. 6d. net. 
 
 Freeman. The History of 
 
 Sicily from the Earliest Times. 
 
 Vols. I and II. 8vo, cloth. 2l.2s. 
 Vol. III. The Athenian and 
 
 Carthaginian Invasions. 24s. 
 Vol. IV. From the Tyranny of 
 
 Dionysios to the Death of 
 
 Agathokles. Edited by Arthur 
 
 J. Evans, M.A. 21*. 
 
 Freeman. The Reign of 
 
 William Rufus and the Accession of 
 Henry the First. By E. A. Freeman, 
 D.C.L. 2 vols. 8vo. \l. i6s. 
 
 Gardiner. The Constitutional 
 
 Documents of the Puritan Revolution, 
 1 628-1660. ByS.R.Gardiner.D.C.L. 
 Second Edition. Crown 8vo. los. 6rf. 
 
 Gross. The Gild Merchant; 
 
 a Contribution to British Municipal 
 History. By Charles Gross, Ph.D. 
 2 vols. 8vo. 24s. 
 
 Hill. Sources for Greek 
 
 History between the Persian and Pelopon- 
 nesian Wars. Collected and arranged 
 by G. F. Hill, M.A. 8vo. los. 6d. 
 
 Hodgkin. Italy and her In- 
 vaders. With Plates & Maps. 8 vols. 
 8vo. By T. Hodgkin, D.C.L. 
 Vols. I-II. Second Edition. 42s. 
 Vols. III-IV. Second Edition. 36s. 
 Vols. V-VI. 36s, 
 Vols. VII-VIII (completing the 
 work). 24s. 
 
 Johnson. Letters of Samuel 
 
 Johnson,LL.D. Collected and Edited 
 by G. Birkbeck Hill, D.C.L. 2 vols, 
 half-roan. 28s. 
 
 Johnsonian Miscellanies. 
 
 2 vols. Medium 8vo, half-roan. 28s. 
 
 Oxford : Clarendon Press.
 
 HISTORY, BIOGRAPHY, ETC. 
 
 Kitchin. A History of France. 
 
 By G. W. Kitchin, D.D. In three 
 Volumes. Crown 8vo, each los. 6d. 
 Voh I. to 1453. Vol. II. 1453- 
 1624. Vol. III. 1624-1793. 
 
 Kyd. The Works of Thomas 
 
 Kyd. Edited from the original 
 Texts, with Introduction, Notes, 
 and Facsimiles, by F. S. Boai, 
 M.A. 8vo. 15s. net. 
 
 Lewis {Sir G. Corneiuall). 
 
 An Essay on the Qovernment of De- 
 pendencies. Edited by C. P. Lucas, 
 B.A. 8vo, half-roan. 14s. 
 
 Lucas. Historical Geography 
 
 of the British Colonies. By C. P.Lucas, 
 B.A. With Maps. Cr. 8vo. 
 
 The Origin and Growth of the 
 English Colonies and of their 
 System of Government (an Intro- 
 duction to Mr. C. P. Lucas's 
 Historical Geography of the 
 Colonies). By H. E. Egerton. 
 2s. 6rf. Also in Ijinding unifoj-m 
 witli the Series. 3s. 6d. 
 
 Vol.1. The Mediterranean and 
 Eastern Colonies (exclusive of 
 India). 5s. 
 Vol. II . The West Indian Colo- 
 nies. 7s. 6d. 
 Vol. III. West Africa. Second 
 Edition, revised to the end 0/1899, 
 by II. E. Egerton. 7s. 6rf. 
 Vol. IV. South and East Africa. 
 Historical and Geographical. 
 9s. 6rf. 
 Also Vol. IV in two Parts — 
 Part I. Historical, 6s. 6d. 
 Part II. Geographical, 3s. 6d. 
 Vol. V. Tlie History of Canada 
 (Part I, New France). 6s. 
 
 Ludlow. The Memoirs of 
 
 Edmund Ltidloiv, Lieutenani-Qeneral of 
 the Horse in the Army of the Common- 
 wealth of England, 1625-1672. Edited 
 by C. H. Firth, M.A. 2 vols. 36s. 
 
 Lyly. The Works of John Lyly. 
 
 Collected and edited, with facsim- 
 iles, by R. W. Bond, M.A. In3vols. 
 Svo, uniform with Kyd. ^2s. net. 
 
 Maehiavelli. . II Principe. 
 
 Edited by L. Arthur Burd, M.A. 
 With an Introduction by Lord 
 Acton. Svo. 14s. 
 
 ' Merriman. Life and Letters of 
 
 Thomas Cromioell. Witli a Portrait 
 and Facsimile. By E. B. Merriman, 
 B.Litt. 2 vols. 8vo. 1 8s. net. 
 
 Morris. The Welsh Wars of 
 
 Edward I.' With a Map. By J. E. 
 Morris, M.A. Svo. 9s. 6d. net. 
 
 Oman. A History of the Penin- 
 
 sidar War. 6 vols. Svo. With Maps, 
 Plans, and Portraits. By C. Oman, 
 M.A. Vol. I. 1S07-1809. 14s. ncL 
 Vol. II, Jan. -Sept., 1809 (from the 
 Battle of Corunna to the end of the 
 Talavera Campaign). 14s. net. 
 
 Payne. History of tJce New 
 
 World called America. By E. J. 
 Payne, M.A. Svo. 
 
 Vol. I, containing TAe Discovery 
 
 and Aboriginal America, 18s. 
 Vol. II, Aboriginal America (con- 
 cluded), 14s. 
 
 Plummer. The Life and Times 
 
 of Alfred the Great. By Cliarles 
 Plummer, M.A. Crown Svo. 5s. 
 
 ii.et. 
 
 Poole. Historical Atlas of 
 
 Modern Europe from the decline nf the 
 Roman E^npire. Edited by R. L. 
 Poole, M.A. 5?. i^s.6d. net. Each 
 Map can now be bought separately 
 for IS. 6d. net. 
 
 Prothero. Select Statutes and 
 
 other Constitutional Documents, illustra- 
 tive of the Reigns of Elizabeth and 
 Jamesl. Edited by G. W. Prothero, 
 M.A. Cr. Svo. Edition 2. los. 6d. 
 
 Ramsay (Sir J. H.). Lancaster 
 
 and York. (a.d. 1399-14S5). 2 vols. 
 Svo. Witli Index. 37s. 6d. 
 
 Ramsay (W. M.). The Cities 
 
 and Bishoprics of Phrygia. 
 
 Vol.1. PartL The Lycos Valley 
 and South-Wcstern Phrygia. 
 Royal Svo. i8s. net. 
 Vol. I. Part II. West and West- 
 Central Phiygia. 21s.net. 
 
 London : Hknky Frowdk, Aiueu Coiner, E.G.
 
 PHILOSOPHY, LOGIC, ETC. 
 
 Smith's Lectures on Justice^ 
 
 Police, Revenue and Arms. Edited, 
 with Introduction and Notes, by 
 Edwin Cannan. 8vo. los. 6d. net. 
 
 Wealth of Nations. 
 
 With Notes, by J. E.Thorold Rogers, 
 M.A. 2 vols. 8vo. 2 IS. 
 
 Smith (V. A.). The Early Hiti- 
 
 tonj of India, from 600 B.C. to the Mu- 
 hammadan Conquest, including the 
 Invasion of Alexander the Great. By 
 Vincent A. Smith, M.A. Svo, with 
 Maps and other Illustrations. I4s.«e^ 
 
 Stubbs. Select Charters and 
 
 other Illustrations of English Constitu- 
 tional History, from the Earliest Times 
 to the Reian of Edward I. Arranged 
 and edited by W. Stubbs, D.D. 
 Eighth Edition. Crown Svo. 8s. 6d. 
 
 The Constitutional His- 
 tory of England, in its Origin and 
 Development. Library Edition. 3 vols. 
 Demy Svo. 2I. 8s. 
 Also in 3 vols, crown Svo. 12s. each. 
 
 Seventeen Lectures on 
 
 the Study of Mediaeval and Modern 
 History and kindred subjects. Crown 
 Svo. Third Edition. 8s. 6d. 
 
 Registrum Sacrum 
 
 Anglicanum. Sm. 4to. Ed. 2. ios.6rf. 
 
 Vinogradoff. Villainage in 
 
 England. Essays in English Medi- 
 aeval History. By Paul Vinogradoff. 
 Svo, half-bound. i6s. 
 
 4. PHILOSOPHY, LOGIC, ETC. 
 
 Ranke. A History of Eng- 
 land, principally in the Seventeenth 
 Century. By L. von Ranke, Trans- 
 lated under the superintendence of 
 G. W. Kitchin, D.D., and C. W. 
 Boase, M.A. 6 vols. Svo. 63s. 
 Revised Index, separately, is. 
 
 Rashdall. The Universities of 
 
 Europe in the Middle Ages. By Hast- 
 ings Rashdall, M.A. 2 vols, (in 3 
 Parts) Svo. With Maps. 2I. 5s. net. 
 
 Ilh;^s. Studies in the Arthur- 
 ian Legend. By John Rhys, M.A. 
 Svo. I2S. 6d. 
 
 Celtic Folklore: Welsh and 
 
 Manx. By the same. 2 vols. Svo. 21s. 
 
 Rogers. History of Agricul- 
 ture and Prices in England, a.d. 1259- 
 1793. ByJ.E.T. Rogers, M.A. Svo. 
 Vols. I, II (12^9-1400), 42s. Vols. 
 Ill, IV (1401-1582), 50s. Vols.V, 
 VI (1583-1702), 50s. Vol. VII, 2 
 Parts (1703-1793)- 
 
 Sanday. Sacred Sites of the 
 
 Gospels. By W. Sanday, D.D. With 
 many ilhistrations,includingdraw- 
 ings of the Temple by Paul Water- 
 house. Svo. 13s. 6d. net. 
 
 Scaccario. De Necessariis 
 
 Observantiis Scaccarii Dialogus. Com- 
 monly called Dialogus de Scaccario. 
 Edited by A. Hughes, C. G. Crump, 
 and C. Johnson. Svo, 12s. 6d. net. 
 
 Bacon. Novum Organum. 
 
 Edited, with Introduction, Notes, 
 &c., by T. Fowler, D.D. Second 
 Edition. Svo. 15s. 
 
 Berkeley. The Works of 
 
 George Berkeley, D.D., formerly Bishop 
 of Cloyne ; including many of his writ- 
 ings hitherto uyipublished. With Pre- 
 faces, Annotations, Appendices, 
 and an Account of his Life, by A. 
 CampbellFraser,Hon.D.C.L.,LL.D. 
 New Edition in 4 vols. , cr. Svo. 24s. 
 
 The Life and Letters, 
 
 with an account of his Philosophy. By 
 A. Campbell Eraser. Svo. i6s. 
 
 Bosanquet. Logic; or, the 
 
 Morphology of Knowledge. By B. 
 Bosanquet, M.A. Svo. 21s. 
 
 Butler. The Works of Joseph 
 
 Butler, D.C.L., sometime Lord Bishop 
 of Durham. Edited by the Right 
 Hon. W. E. Gladstone. 2 vols. 
 Medium Svo. 14s. each. 
 
 Campagnac. The Cambridge 
 
 Platonists: being Selections from the 
 writings of Benjamin Whichcote, 
 John Smith, and Nathanael Culver- 
 wel, with Introduction by E. T. 
 Campagnac, M.A. Cr.Svo. 6s.6d.«e«. 
 
 Oxford : Glareniion Press,
 
 PHYSICAL SCIENCE, ETC. 
 
 Fowler. Logic; Deductive and 
 
 Inductive, combined in a single 
 volume. Extra fcap. 8vo. 7s. dd. 
 
 Fowler and Wilson, T}ie 
 
 Principles of Morals. By T. Fowler, 
 D.D., and J. M. Wilson, B.D. 8vo, 
 cloth. 14s. 
 
 Green. Prolegomena to Ethics. 
 
 By T. H. Green, M.A. Edited by 
 A. C. Bradley, M.A. Fourth Edition. 
 Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d. 
 
 Hegel. The Logic of Hegel. 
 
 Translated from the Encyclopaedia 
 ofthe Philosophical Sciences. With 
 Prolegomena totheStudy of Hegel's 
 Logic and Philosophy. By W. Wal- 
 lace, M.A. Second Edition, Revised 
 and Augmented. 2 vols. Crown Svo. 
 10s. 6d. each. 
 
 Hegel's Philosophy of Mind. 
 
 Translated from the Encyclopaedia 
 ofthe Philosophical Sciences. With 
 Five Introductory Essays. By Wil- 
 liam Wallace, M.A., LL.D. Crown 
 Svo. I OS. 6d. 
 
 Hume's Treatise of Human 
 
 Nature. Edited, with Analytical 
 Index, by L. A. Selby-Bigge, M.A. 
 Second Edition. Crown Svo. 6s. net. 
 
 Enquiry concerning 
 
 the Human Understanding. Edited 
 by L. A. Selby-Bigge, M.A. Second 
 Edition. Crown Svo. 6s. net. 
 
 Leibniz. The Monadology and 
 
 other Philosophical Writings. Trans- 
 lated, with Introduction and Notes, 
 by Robert Latta, M.A., D.Phil. 
 Crown Svo. Ss. 6d. 
 
 Locke. An Essay Concern- 
 ing Human Understanding. By John 
 Locke. Collated and Annotated 
 by A. Campbell Eraser, Hon. 
 D.C.L.,LL.D. 2 vols. Svo. il. 12s. 
 
 Lotze's Logic, in Three Books 
 
 — of Thought, of Investigation, and 
 of Knowledge. English Transla- 
 tion; edited by B. Bosanquet, M.A. 
 Second Edition. 2 vols. Cr. Svo. 12s. 
 
 Metaphysic, in Three 
 
 Books— Ontology, Cosmology, and 
 Psychology. English Translation ; 
 edited by B. Bosanquet, M.A. 
 Second Edition. 2 vols. Cr. Svo. 12s. 
 
 Martineau. Types of Ethical 
 
 Theory. By James Martineau, D.D, 
 Third Edition. 2 vols. Cr. Svo. ie,s. 
 
 A Study of Religion : 
 
 its Sourcesand Contents. Second Edition. 
 2 vols. Cr. Svo. 15s. 
 
 Selby-Bigge. British Moral- 
 ists. Selections from Writers prin- 
 cipally of the Eighteenth Century. 
 Edited by L. A. Selby-Bigge, M.A. 
 2 vols. Crown Svo. 12s. net, uni- 
 form with Hume's Treatise and En- 
 quiry and the 4 vol. crown Svo 
 edition of Berkeley. 
 
 Spinoza. A Study in the 
 
 Ethics of Spinoza. By Harold H. 
 Joachim. Svo. los. 6d. net. 
 
 Wallace. Lectures and Essays 
 
 on Natural Theology and Ethics. By 
 William Wallace, M.A., LL.D. 
 Edited, with a Biographical Intro- 
 duction, by Edward Caird, M.A. 
 Svo, with a Portrait. 12s. 6rf. 
 
 5. PHYSICAL SCIENCE, ETC. 
 
 Chambers. A Handbook of 
 
 Descriptive and Practical Astronomy. 
 
 By G. F. Chambers, F.R.A.S. Fourth 
 
 Edition, in 3 vols. Demy Svo. 
 
 Vol. I. The Sun, Planets, and 
 Comets. 2 IS. 
 
 Vol. II. Instruments and Prac- 
 tical Astronomy. 2 IS. 
 
 Vol. III. The Starry Heavens. 14s. 
 
 De Bary. Comparative Ana- 
 tomy of the Vegetative Organs of the 
 Phanerogams and Ferns. By Dr. A. 
 de Bary. Translated by F. 0. 
 Bower, M.A. , and D. H. Scott, M.A. 
 Royal Svo, half-morocco, 24s. net ; 
 cloth, 21.S. net. 
 
 CoTiiparative Morpho- 
 logy and Biology of Fungi, Mycetozoa 
 
 l/ondoD : Hgnrt Frowdk, Amen Oorner, B.O.
 
 PHYSICAL SCIENCE, ETC. 
 
 and Bacteria. By Dr. A. de Bary. 
 Translated by H. E. F. Garnsey, 
 M. A. Revised by Isaac Bayley Bal- 
 four, M. A., M.D.,F.E.S. Royal 8vo, 
 half-moroccOj24S. ne^; cloth, 21s.net 
 
 Lectures on Bacteria. 
 
 By Dr. A. de Bary. Second Improved 
 Edition. Translated and revised by 
 the same. Crcvvn 8vo. 5s. net. 
 
 Ewart. On the Physics and 
 
 Physiology of Protoplasmic Streaming 
 in Plants. By A. J. Ewart, D.Sc, 
 Ph.D.jF.L.S. With seventeen illus- 
 trations. Royal 8vo. 8s. 6d. net. 
 
 Fischer. The Structure and 
 
 Functions of Bacteria. By Alfred 
 Fischer. Translated into English 
 by A. C. Jones. Royal 8vo. With 
 Twenty-nine Woodcuts. 7s. 6d. net. 
 
 Qoebel. Outlines of Classifi- 
 cation and Special Morphology of Plants. 
 By Dr. K. Goebel. Translated by 
 H. E. F. Garnsey, M, A. Revised by 
 I. B. Balfour, M.A., M.D., F.R.S: 
 Royal 8vo. half-morocco, 22s. 6d. 
 net : cloth, 20s. net. 
 
 Organography of Plants, 
 
 especially of the Archegoniatae and Sper- 
 mopkyta. ByDr.K. Goebel. Author- 
 ized English Edition, by I. B. Bal- 
 four, -M.A., M.D., F.R.S. Part I, 
 General Organography. Royal Svo, 
 half-morocco, 12s.net; cloth, ios.net. 
 Pt. II, half-morocco, 24s. net; cloth, 
 2 IS. net. 
 
 Miall and Hammond. The 
 
 Structure and Life-History of the 
 " Harlequin Fly (Chironomus). By L. C. 
 Miall, F.R.S., and A. R. Hammond, 
 F.L.S. Svo. With 130 Illustra- 
 tions. 7s. 6d. 
 
 Pfeffer. The Physiology of 
 
 Plants. A Treatise upon the Metabolism 
 and Sources of Energy in Plants. By 
 Prof. Dr. W. Pfeffer. Second fully 
 Revised Edition, translated and 
 edited by A. J. Ewart, D.Sc, Ph.D., 
 
 F.L.S. Royal 8vo. "Vol. I, half- 
 morocco, 26s. net; cloth, 23s. net. 
 Vol. II, 1 6s. net; cloth, 14s. net. 
 
 Prestwich. Geology — Chemi- 
 cal, Physical, and Stratigraphical. By 
 Sir Joseph Prestwich, M.A., F.E.S. 
 In two Volumes. Royal Svo. 6is. 
 
 Sachs. A History of Botany. 
 
 Translated by H. E. F. Garnsey, 
 M.A. Revised by I. B. Balfour, 
 M.A.,M.D.,F.R.-S. Cr.Svo. ios.net. 
 
 Schimper. Plant Geography 
 vpon a Physiological Basis. By Dr. 
 
 ' A. F. W. Schimper. The Author- 
 ized English Translation, by W. R. 
 Fisher, M.A. Revised and edited 
 by Percy Groom, M.A., and I. B. 
 Balfour, M.A.. M.D., F.R.S. Royal 
 Svo. With a photogravure portrait 
 of Dr. Schimper, five collotypes, 
 four maps, and four hundred and 
 ninety-seven other illustrations. 
 Half-morocco, 42s. net. 
 
 Solms-Laubach. Fossil Bot- 
 any. Being an Introduction to Palaeo' 
 phytology from the Standpoint of the 
 Botanist. By H. Graf zu Solms- 
 Laubach. Translated and revised 
 by the same. Royal Svo, half 
 morocco, 1 7s. net ; cloth, 1 5s. net. 
 
 OXFOED HISTORY OF MUSIC. 
 
 Svo. Edited by W. H. Hadow, M.A. 
 The Polyphonic Penod. Part I 
 
 (Method of Musical Art, 330-1330). 
 
 By H. E.Wooldridge, M.A. 15s. net. 
 TJie Seventeenth Century. By Sir 
 
 C. H. H. Pariy,M.A., D.Mus. 15s. wf^ 
 The Age of Bach and Handel. By 
 
 J. A. Fuller Maitland, M.A. 15s. net. 
 The Viennese School. By W. H, 
 
 Hadow, M.A. 
 
 IN PREPARATION. 
 The Polyphonic Period. Part II. 
 
 By H. E. Wooldridge, M.A. 
 The Romantic Period. By E. 
 
 Dannreuther, M.A. 
 
 OXFORD 
 AT THE CLARENDON PRESS 
 LONDON, EDINBURGH, NEW YORK, AND TORONTO 
 HENRY FROWDE
 
 
 e-
 
 Date Due 
 
 NOV 8 
 
 JAN 3 
 
 ^Y^^^ 
 
 im — r-m^ 
 
 1969 
 
 1 
 
 iL 
 
 Library Bureau Cat. No. 1137 
 
 LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 737 5 

 
 IM 
 
 11 
 
 !f 
 
 '''->tt 
 
 iwv;.'h>'/!-:^-a;v!o^